Use these links to rapidly review the document
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS 2
TABLE OF CONTENTS 3

Table of Contents

As filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on August 4, 2010

Registration No. 333-            

UNITED STATES
SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION
WASHINGTON, D.C. 20549



FORM S-1
REGISTRATION STATEMENT
UNDER
THE SECURITIES ACT OF 1933



Walker & Dunlop, Inc.
(Exact Name of Registrant as Specified in its charter)

Maryland
(State or other jurisdiction of
incorporation or organization)
  6199
(Primary Standard Industrial
Classification Code Number)
  80-0629925
(I.R.S. Employer
Identification Number)

7501 Wisconsin Avenue
Suite 1200
Bethesda, MD 20814
(301) 215-5500
(Address, Including Zip Code, and Telephone Number, Including Area Code, of Registrant's Principal Executive Offices)



William M. Walker
Chairman, President and Chief Executive Officer
7501 Wisconsin Avenue
Suite 1200
Bethesda, MD 20814
(301) 215-5500
(Name, Address, Including Zip Code, and Telephone Number, Including Area Code, of Agent for Service)



Copies to:

David W. Bonser
James E. Showen
Hogan Lovells US LLP
555 Thirteenth Street, NW
Washington, DC 20004
(202) 637-5600

 

Edward F. Petrosky
J. Gerard Cummins
James O'Connor
Sidley Austin
LLP
787 Seventh Avenue
New York, NY 10019
(212) 839-5300



Approximate date of commencement of proposed sale to the public:
As soon as practicable after the effective date of this Registration Statement.

          If any of the Securities being registered on this Form are to be offered on a delayed or continuous basis pursuant to Rule 415 under the Securities Act, check the following box:  o

          If this Form is filed to register additional securities for an offering pursuant to Rule 462(b) under the Securities Act, check the following box and list the Securities Act registration statement number of the earlier effective registration statement for the same offering.  o

          If this Form is a post-effective amendment filed pursuant to Rule 462(c) under the Securities Act, check the following box and list the Securities Act registration statement number of the earlier effective registration statement for the same offering.  o

          If this Form is a post-effective amendment filed pursuant to Rule 462(d) under the Securities Act, check the following box and list the Securities Act registration statement number of the earlier effective registration statement for the same offering.  o

          Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a large accelerated filer, an accelerated filer, a non-accelerated filer, or a smaller reporting company. See the definitions of "large accelerated filer," "accelerated filer" and "smaller reporting company" in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act. (Check One):

Large accelerated filer  o   Accelerated filer  o   Non-accelerated filer  ý
(Do not check if a
smaller reporting company)
  Smaller reporting company  o


CALCULATION OF REGISTRATION FEE

       
 
Title of Each Class of Securities
to be Registered

  Proposed Maximum
Aggregate Offering
Price(1)

  Amount of
Registration Fee

 

Common Stock, $0.01 par value per share

  $150,000,000   $10,695

 

(1)
Estimated solely for the purpose of calculating the registration fee pursuant to Rule 457(o) under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended. Includes shares of common stock that the underwriters may purchase to cover overallotments, if any.

           The registrant hereby amends this registration statement on such date or dates as may be necessary to delay its effective date until the registrant shall file a further amendment which specifically states that this registration statement shall thereafter become effective in accordance with Section 8(a) of the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, or until this registration statement shall become effective on such date as the Commission, acting pursuant to Section 8(a), may determine.


Table of Contents

The information in this preliminary prospectus is not complete and may be changed. Neither we nor the selling stockholders may sell these securities until the registration statement filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission is effective. This preliminary prospectus is not an offer to sell these securities and it is not soliciting an offer to buy these securities in any jurisdiction where the offer or sale of the securities is not permitted.

Subject to Completion dated August 4, 2010

PROSPECTUS

                         Shares

GRAPHIC


Common Stock



        We are one of the leading providers of commercial real estate financial services in the United States, with a primary focus on multifamily lending. We originate, sell and service a range of multifamily and other commercial real estate financing products.

        This is our initial public offering and no public market currently exists for our common stock. We are offering            shares of our common stock, and the selling stockholders named in this prospectus are selling            shares of our common stock. We will not receive any proceeds from the sale of the shares of our common stock by the selling stockholders. We expect the initial public offering price of our common stock to be between $            and $            per share. We intend to apply to list our common stock on the New York Stock Exchange, or the NYSE, under the symbol "            ."

         Investing in our common stock involves risks. See "Risk Factors" beginning on page 12 of this prospectus for a discussion of the risks that you should consider before making a decision to invest in our common stock.



 
  Per Share   Total  

Public offering price

  $     $    

Underwriting discounts and commissions

  $     $    

Proceeds, before expenses, to us

  $     $    

Proceeds, before expenses, to the selling stockholders

  $     $    

        We have granted the underwriters the right to purchase up to                                    additional shares of our common stock at the initial public offering price, less the underwriting discounts and commissions, within 30 days after the date of this prospectus to cover overallotments, if any.

         Neither the Securities and Exchange Commission nor any jurisdiction or other securities commission has approved or disapproved of these securities or determined if this prospectus is truthful or complete. Any representation to the contrary is a criminal offense.

        The shares of common stock sold in this offering are expected to be ready for delivery on or about                        , 2010.

Credit Suisse   Keefe, Bruyette & Woods

The date of this prospectus is                        , 2010.



TABLE OF CONTENTS

 
  Page

Summary

  1

Risk Factors

  12

Forward-Looking Statements

  30

Use of Proceeds

  31

Dividend Policy

  31

Capitalization

  32

Dilution

  33

Selected Financial Data

  35

Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations

  37

Business

  55

Our Management

  71

Principal and Selling Stockholders

  90

Certain Relationships and Related Transactions

  92

Description of Capital Stock

  97

Shares Eligible for Future Sale

  100

Certain Provisions of Maryland Law and Our Charter and Bylaws

  102

U.S. Federal Income Tax Considerations

  108

ERISA Considerations

  112

Underwriting (Conflicts of Interest)

  114

Legal Matters

  118

Experts

  118

Where You Can Find More Information

  119

Index to the Financial Statements

  F-1

         You should rely only on the information contained in this prospectus or in any free writing prospectus prepared by us. We have not, and the selling stockholders and the underwriters have not, authorized any other person to provide you with different or additional information. If anyone provides you with different or additional information, you should not rely on it. We are not, and the selling stockholders and the underwriters are not, making an offer to sell these securities in any jurisdiction where the offer or sale is not permitted. You should assume that the information appearing in this prospectus and any free writing prospectus prepared by us is accurate only as of their respective dates or on the date or dates which are specified in those documents. Our business, financial condition, liquidity, results of operations and prospects may have changed since those dates.

         Until                , 2010 (25 days after the date of this prospectus), all dealers that effect transactions in our common stock, whether or not participating in this offering, may be required to deliver a prospectus. This is in addition to the dealers' obligation to deliver a prospectus when acting as underwriters and with respect to their unsold allotments or subscriptions.

         This prospectus contains registered trademarks that are the exclusive property of their respective owners, which are companies other than us, including Fannie Mae, the Federal Home Loan Mortgage Corporation, the Federal Housing Administration, the U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development and the Government National Mortgage Association. None of the owners of the trademarks appearing in this prospectus, their parents, subsidiaries or affiliates or any of their respective officers, directors, members, managers, stockholders, owners, agents or employees, which we refer to collectively as the "trademark owners," are issuers or underwriters of the shares of common stock being offered hereby, play (or will play) any role in the offer or sale of the shares of common stock, or have any responsibility for the creation or contents of this prospectus. In addition, none of the trademark owners have or will have any liability or responsibility whatsoever arising out of or related to the sale or offer of the shares of common stock being offered hereby, including any liability or responsibility for any financial statements, projections or other financial information or other information contained in this prospectus or otherwise disseminated in connection with the offer or sale



of the shares of common stock offered hereby. You must understand that, if you purchase our common stock in this offering, your sole recourse for any alleged or actual impropriety relating to the offer and sale of the common stock and the operation of our business will be against us (and/or, as may be applicable, any selling stockholder of such shares of common stock) and in no event may you seek to impose liability arising from or related to such activity, directly or indirectly, upon any of the trademark owners.

         We use market data and industry forecasts and projections throughout this prospectus, including data from publicly available information and industry publications. These sources generally state that the information they provide has been obtained from sources believed to be reliable, but that the accuracy and completeness of the information are not guaranteed. The forecasts and projections are based on industry surveys and the preparers' experience in the industry and there can be no assurance that any of the forecasts or projections will be achieved. We believe that the surveys and market research others have performed are reliable, but we have not, and the selling stockholders and the underwriters have not, independently verified this information.

ii


Table of Contents


SUMMARY

         This summary highlights some of the information in this prospectus. It does not contain all of the information that you should consider before making a decision to invest in our common stock. You should read carefully the more detailed information set forth under "Risk Factors" and the historical financial statements, including the related notes, and the other information included in this prospectus. Except where the context suggests otherwise, the terms "company," "we," "us" and "our" refer to Walker & Dunlop, Inc., a Maryland corporation, together with its consolidated subsidiaries, after giving effect to the formation transactions described in this prospectus.

         Unless indicated otherwise, the information in this prospectus assumes (i) the formation transactions described in this prospectus have been completed, (ii) the common stock to be sold in this offering is sold at $            per share, which is the midpoint of the initial public offering price range shown on the cover page of this prospectus, (iii) the grant to certain of our employees, including our executive officers, and our independent directors of options to purchase an aggregate of                                    shares of our common stock and an aggregate of                        shares of our restricted stock, and (iv) no exercise by the underwriters of their overallotment option to purchase up to an additional                                     shares of our common stock.

Our Company

        We are one of the leading providers of commercial real estate financial services in the United States, with a primary focus on multifamily lending. We originate, sell and service a range of multifamily and other commercial real estate financing products. Our clients are owners and developers of commercial real estate across the country. We originate and sell loans through the programs of Fannie Mae and the Federal Home Loan Mortgage Corporation ("Freddie Mac,"™ and together with Fannie Mae, the government-sponsored enterprises, or the "GSEs"), the Government National Mortgage Association ("Ginnie Mae") and the Federal Housing Administration, a division of the U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development (together with Ginnie Mae, "HUD"), with which we have long-established relationships. We retain servicing rights and asset management responsibilities on nearly all loans that we originate for GSE and HUD programs. We are approved as a Fannie Mae Delegated Underwriting and Servicing ("DUS"™) lender nationally, a Freddie Mac Program Plus™ lender in seven states, the District of Columbia and the metropolitan New York area, a HUD Multifamily Accelerated Processing ("MAP") lender nationally, and a Ginnie Mae issuer. We also originate and service loans for a number of life insurance companies, commercial banks and other institutional investors.

        In 2009, we originated more than $2.2 billion in commercial real estate loans, of which approximately $1.9 billion were sold through GSE or HUD programs and approximately $343 million were placed with institutional investors. As of June 30, 2010, we serviced approximately $13.7 billion in commercial real estate loans covering approximately 1,600 properties in 46 states and the District of Columbia. We also provide investment consulting and related services for two commercial real estate funds that invest in commercial real estate securities and loans for a number of institutional investors.

        For the year ended December 31, 2009, according to the Mortgage Bankers Association, by principal amount of loans directly funded or serviced by us, we were:

1


Table of Contents

        We have not historically originated loans for our balance sheet. The sale of each loan through GSE and HUD programs is negotiated prior to closing on the loan with the borrower. For loans originated pursuant to the Fannie Mae DUS program, we generally are required to share the risk of loss, with our maximum loss capped at 20% of the unpaid principal balance of a loan. We have established a strong credit culture over decades of originating loans and are committed to disciplined risk management from the initial underwriting stage through loan payoff. From January 1, 2005 through June 30, 2010, we settled risk sharing obligations of $3.8 million, or an average of 2 basis points annually of the average Fannie Mae at risk portfolio balance.

        Our total revenues were $63.6 million for the six months ended June 30, 2010 and $88.8 million for the year ended December 31, 2009. Our income from operations was $22.5 million for the six months ended June 30, 2010 and $28.6 million for the year ended December 31, 2009.

        We have been in business for 73 years. Since becoming a Fannie Mae DUS lender in 1988, we have had major institutions as investors in our business. In January 2009, we acquired from Column Guaranteed LLC ("Column"), an affiliate of Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC, its $5.0 billion servicing portfolio, together with its Fannie Mae, Freddie Mac and HUD operations, which significantly expanded our GSE and HUD loan origination capabilities. Our extensive borrower and lender relationships, knowledge of the commercial real estate capital markets, expertise in commercial real estate financing, and strong credit culture have enabled us to establish a significant market presence and grow rapidly and profitably in recent years. We believe our business model and expertise, combined with the additional capital from this offering, will enable us to continue to grow and enhance our position as a leading provider of commercial real estate financial services in the United States.

Industry and Market Opportunity

        We believe that sizeable demand for commercial real estate loans, principally driven by impending debt maturities and an anticipated rebound in commercial real estate investment activity, presents significant growth opportunities for companies that have an established market presence, demonstrated origination experience, deep relationships with active investors and a disciplined risk management strategy.

        Historically, multifamily and other commercial real estate loans have been funded by a large number of investors, including commercial banks, insurance companies and other institutional investors, as well as GSEs and HUD. Since reaching their highs in 2007, commercial real estate values have declined substantially as a result of the global recession and the related significant contraction in capital available to the commercial real estate market. This contraction in capital has been exacerbated by the near shut down in investor demand for commercial mortgage-backed securities ("CMBS") and by financial institutions significantly reducing their commercial real estate portfolios and lending activity in an effort to retain capital, reduce leverage, mitigate risk and meet regulatory capital requirements.

        A substantial amount of commercial real estate loans is scheduled to mature in the coming years. According to the Federal Reserve Flow of Funds Accounts of the United States, approximately $3.4 trillion of commercial real estate loans were outstanding as of December 31, 2009, of which approximately $900 billion were multifamily loans. It is estimated that $28 billion to $40 billion of multifamily loans held by investors other than commercial banks will mature each year from 2011 to 2014, according to the Survey of Loan Maturity Volumes, Mortgage Bankers Association. This amount would be considerably higher if it included multifamily loans held by commercial banks. As this debt matures, real estate owners will be required to repay or restructure their loans. In these scenarios, new debt will almost always be required, which we believe will provide significant opportunities for us. We further believe that demand for multifamily and other commercial real estate loans will increase as the overall economy improves, which should have a positive impact on our origination volume.

2


Table of Contents

Our Competitive Strengths

        We distinguish ourselves from other commercial mortgage originators and servicers through five core strengths developed over decades of experience:

3


Table of Contents

Our Growth Strategy

        We believe we are well positioned to grow our business by taking advantage of opportunities in the commercial real estate finance market. During the recent credit crisis, we not only maintained our position in the market, but also expanded our business through the Column transaction in 2009, which added licenses to originate and service loans for Freddie Mac and HUD. We also significantly expanded our capabilities in the healthcare lending business through the Column transaction. As a result, while commercial real estate originations dropped nationwide by 46% from 2008 to 2009 and multifamily originations dropped nationwide by 35% from 2008 to 2009, according to the Mortgage Bankers Association's 2009 Annual Origination Volume Summation, our originations grew by 12% to approximately $2.2 billion in 2009 from approximately $2.0 billion in 2008. While some of our competitors suffered extensive loan losses and negative earnings, we sustained limited credit losses and remained profitable during the same period. We believe that our performance during this period of significant market dislocation has given us access to new clients and talented professionals and enhanced our brand awareness across the commercial real estate finance industry.

        We seek to use this momentum and market position to profitably grow our business by focusing on the following areas:

4


Table of Contents

Summary of Risk Factors

        You should carefully consider the matters discussed in the "Risk Factors" section beginning on page 12 of this prospectus prior to deciding whether to invest in our common stock. Some of these risks include:

5


Table of Contents

Our History and the Formation Transactions

        Walker & Dunlop was founded in 1937 and has been under three generations of Walker family leadership. We became one of the first Fannie Mae DUS lenders in 1988 and have been a top 10 originator under the Fannie Mae DUS Program for 19 of the past 20 years. We are headquartered in Bethesda, Maryland and have seven additional offices across the country.

        In January 2009, W&D, Inc., its affiliate Green Park Financial Limited Partnership ("Green Park"), and Column contributed their assets to a newly formed entity, Walker & Dunlop, LLC. The transaction brought together Walker & Dunlop's competencies in debt origination, loan servicing, asset management, investment consulting and related services, Green Park's Fannie Mae DUS origination capabilities and Column's Fannie Mae, Freddie Mac and HUD operations, including its healthcare real estate lending business, to form one of the leading providers of commercial real estate financial services in the United States. Substantially all of the assets and liabilities of W&D, Inc. and Green Park, including its wholly owned subsidiary Green Park Express, LLC, were transferred to Walker & Dunlop, LLC in exchange for 5% and 60% interests, respectively, in Walker & Dunlop, LLC, and certain assets and liabilities of Column were transferred to Walker & Dunlop, LLC for a 35% interest in Walker & Dunlop, LLC.

        Concurrently with the closing of this offering, we will complete certain formation transactions through which Walker & Dunlop, LLC will become a wholly owned subsidiary of Walker & Dunlop, Inc., a newly formed Maryland corporation. In connection with the formation transactions, members of the Walker family, certain of our directors and executive officers and certain other individuals and entities who currently own direct and indirect equity interests in Walker & Dunlop, LLC will contribute their respective interests in such entities to Walker & Dunlop, Inc. in exchange for shares of our common stock.

6


Table of Contents

        The following chart shows the anticipated structure and ownership of our company, including operating subsidiaries, after giving effect to the formation transactions and this offering on a fully diluted basis (assuming no exercise by the underwriters of their overallotment option):

GRAPHIC

Material Benefits to Related Parties

        Upon completion of the formation transactions and this offering, former direct and indirect equity holders of Walker & Dunlop, LLC, including certain of our executive officers and directors and Column, will receive the material financial and other benefits described below:

7


Table of Contents

        In addition, members of our board of directors and our executive officers, William M. Walker, our Chairman, President and Chief Executive Officer, Howard W. Smith, our Executive Vice President and Chief Operating Officer, Deborah A. Wilson, our Senior Vice President, Chief Financial Officer, Secretary and Treasurer, and Richard C. Warner, our Senior Vice President and Chief Underwriter, will receive the material financial and other benefits described below.

        For a more detailed discussion of these benefits, see "Management" and "Certain Relationships and Related Transactions."

Corporate Information

        We were formed as a Maryland corporation on July 29, 2010. Our principal executive office is located at 7501 Wisconsin Avenue, Suite 1200, Bethesda, Maryland 20814. Our telephone number is (301) 215-5500. Our web address is www.walkerdunlop.com . The information on, or otherwise accessible through, our website does not constitute a part of this prospectus.

8


Table of Contents


The Offering

Common stock offered by us

              shares (plus up to an additional            shares of our common stock that are issuable by us upon the exercise of the underwriters' overallotment option).

Common stock offered by the selling stockholders

 

            shares

Common stock to be outstanding after this offering

 

            shares(1)(2)

Use of proceeds

 

We estimate that the net proceeds we will receive from this offering will be approximately $            , after deducting the underwriting discounts and commissions of $            and estimated offering expenses of approximately $            payable by us at closing (or, if the underwriters exercise their overallotment option in full, approximately $            , after deducting the underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses). We currently intend to use these net proceeds to execute our growth strategy and fund working capital and for other general corporate purposes.

 

We will not receive any of the net proceeds from the sale of shares of our common stock in this offering by the selling stockholders. See "Use of Proceeds" on page 31.

Risk factors

 

Investing in our common stock involves risks. You should carefully read and consider the information set forth under the heading "Risk Factors" beginning on page 12 and other information included in this prospectus before making a decision to invest in our common stock.

Proposed NYSE symbol

 

"            "


(1)
Excludes (i)                         shares of our common stock issuable upon the exercise of the underwriters' overallotment option, (ii)                         shares of our common stock issuable upon exercise of outstanding options to be granted concurrently with this offering and (iii)                         additional shares of our common stock issuable under our Equity Incentive Plan after this offering.

(2)
Includes an aggregate amount of                        shares of restricted stock to be granted concurrently with this offering.

9


Table of Contents


Summary Selected Financial Data

        The following table sets forth summary selected financial and operating data on a consolidated and combined historical basis for our predecessor. We have not presented historical financial information for Walker & Dunlop, Inc. because we have not had any corporate activity since our formation other than the issuance of shares of common stock in connection with the initial nominal capitalization of our company and because we believe that a presentation of the results of Walker & Dunlop, Inc. would not be meaningful. The term "predecessor" refers to, collectively, Walker & Dunlop, LLC, Walker & Dunlop Multifamily, Inc., Walker & Dunlop GP, LLC, GPF Acquisition, LLC, W&D, Inc., Green Park Financial Limited Partnership, Walker & Dunlop II, LLC, Green Park Express, LLC and W&D Balanced Real Estate Fund I GP, LLC.

        You should read the following summary selected financial and operating data in conjunction with "Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations" and the consolidated and combined financial statements and related notes of our predecessor included elsewhere in this prospectus.

        The unaudited summary selected historical financial information at June 30, 2010, and for the six months ended June 30, 2010 and 2009, have been derived from the unaudited condensed consolidated and combined financial statements of our predecessor included elsewhere in this prospectus and, in the opinion of management, includes all adjustments, consisting only of normal recurring adjustments, necessary for a fair presentation of such data. The interim results for the six months ended June 30, 2010 are not necessarily indicative of the results for 2010. Furthermore, historical results are not necessarily indicative of the results to be expected in future periods.

        The summary selected historical financial information at December 31, 2009 and 2008, and for the years ended December 31, 2009, 2008 and 2007, have been derived from the consolidated and combined financial statements of our predecessor audited by KPMG LLP, an independent registered public accounting firm, whose report thereon is included elsewhere in this prospectus.

10


Table of Contents

 
  Six Months Ended June 30,   Year Ended December 31,  
Dollars in thousands
  2010   2009   2009   2008   2007  
 
  (unaudited)
  (unaudited)
   
   
   
 

Statement of Income Data(1)(2)

                               

Revenues

                               

Loan origination related fees

  $ 24,844   $ 12,099   $ 27,734   $ 14,113   $ 12,829  

Gain attributable to mortgage servicing rights

    21,369     14,142     30,212     15,315     9,101  

Servicing fees

    12,780     9,760     20,981     12,257     12,327  

Net warehouse interest income

    2,173     2,356     4,186     1,787     17  

Escrow earnings and other interest income

    1,114     791     1,769     3,428     8,993  

Other

    1,335     1,504     3,879     2,272     7,005  
                       

Total Revenue

  $ 63,615   $ 40,652   $ 88,761   $ 49,172   $ 50,272  
                       

Expenses

                               

Personnel

  $ 23,413   $ 12,688   $ 32,177   $ 17,008   $ 16,779  

Amortization and depreciation

    8,163     5,356     12,917     7,804     9,067  

Provision for risk sharing obligation

    2,580     323     2,265     1,101      

Interest expense on corporate debt

    697     888     1,684     2,679     3,853  

Other operating expenses

    6,293     6,668     11,114     6,548     4,240  
                       

Total Expenses

  $ 41,146   $ 25,923   $ 60,157   $ 35,140   $ 33,939  
                       

Income from Operations

  $ 22,469   $ 14,729   $ 28,604   $ 14,032   $ 16,333  
                       

Gain on Bargain Purchase(3)

        10,922     10,922              
                       

Net Income

  $ 22,469   $ 25,651   $ 39,526   $ 14,032   $ 16,333  
                       

Balance Sheet Data(1)

                               

Cash and cash equivalents

  $ 14,789   $ 17,939   $ 10,390   $ 6,812        

Restricted cash and pledged securities

    18,719     20,211     19,159     12,031        

Mortgage servicing rights

    90,272     72,229     81,427     38,943        

Loans held for sale

    94,092     66,840     101,939     111,711        

Total Assets

    276,104     199,044     243,732     183,347        

Warehouse notes payable

    88,003     65,055     96,612     107,005        

Notes payable

    30,307     35,583     32,961     38,176        

Total Liabilities

    186,978     135,266     173,921     169,497        

Total Equity

    89,126     63,778     69,811     13,850        

Supplemental Data(2)

                               

Income from operations, as a % of total revenue

    35 %   36 %   32 %   29 %   32 %

Total originations

  $ 1,657,528   $ 1,167,523   $ 2,229,772   $ 1,983,056   $ 2,064,361  

Servicing portfolio

  $ 13,692,347   $ 12,511,328   $ 13,111,261   $ 6,976,208   $ 6,054,186  

(1)
We have historically operated as pass-through tax entities (partnerships, LLCs and S-corporations). Accordingly, our historical earnings have resulted in only nominal federal and state corporate level expense. The tax liability has been the obligation of our owners. Upon consummation of the formation transactions, our income will be subject to both federal and state corporate tax. The change in tax status is expected to result in the recognition of an estimated $35 million to $40 million of net deferred tax liabilities and a corresponding tax expense in the quarter in which the formation transactions are consummated.

(2)
Statement of Income Data for 2009 includes the results of 11 months of the operations acquired in the Column transaction. The results of these operations in January 2009 were not significant.

(3)
We recognized a one time gain on bargain purchase of $10.9 million in connection with the Column transaction in January 2009. The gain on bargain purchase represents the difference between the fair value of the assets acquired and the purchase price paid.

11


Table of Contents


RISK FACTORS

         Investing in our common stock involves risks. You should carefully consider the following risk factors, together with all the other information contained in this prospectus, before making an investment decision to purchase our common stock. The realization of any of the following risks could materially and adversely affect our business, prospects, financial condition, results of operations and the market price and liquidity of our common stock, which could cause you to lose all or a significant part of your investment in our common stock. Some statements in this prospectus, including statements in the following risk factors, constitute forward-looking statements. Please refer to the section entitled "Forward-Looking Statements."

Risks Relating to Our Business

The loss of or changes in our relationships with GSEs, HUD and institutional investors would adversely affect our ability to originate commercial real estate loans through GSE and HUD programs, which would materially and adversely affect us.

        Currently, we originate substantially all of our loans for sale through GSE or HUD programs. We are approved as a Fannie Mae DUS lender nationwide, a Freddie Mac Program Plus lender in seven states, the District of Columbia and the metropolitan New York area, a HUD MAP lender nationwide, and a Ginnie Mae issuer. Our status as an approved lender affords us a number of advantages and may be terminated by the applicable GSE or HUD at any time. The loss of such status would, or changes in our relationships could, prevent us from being able to originate commercial real estate loans for sale through the particular GSE or HUD, which would materially and adversely affect us. It could also result in a loss of similar approvals from other GSEs or HUD.

        We also originate loans on behalf of certain life insurance companies, investment banks, commercial banks, pension funds and other institutional investors that directly underwrite and provide funding for the loans at closing. If these investors discontinue their relationship with us and replacement investors cannot be found on a timely basis, we could be adversely affected.

A change to the conservatorship of Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac and related actions, along with any changes in laws and regulations affecting the relationship between Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac and the U.S. federal government, could materially and adversely affect our business.

        There continues to be substantial uncertainty regarding the future of Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac, including whether they both will continue to exist in their current form.

        Due to increased market concerns about the ability of Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac to withstand future credit losses associated with securities on which they provide guarantees and loans held in their investment portfolios without the direct support of the U.S. federal government, in September 2008, the Federal Housing Finance Agency (the "FHFA") placed Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac into conservatorship and, together with the U.S. Treasury, established a program designed to boost investor confidence in Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac by supporting the availability of mortgage financing and protecting taxpayers. The U.S. government program includes contracts between the U.S. Treasury and each of Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac that seek to ensure that each GSE maintains a positive net worth by providing for the provision of cash by the U.S. Treasury to Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac if FHFA determines that its liabilities exceed its assets. Although the U.S. government has described some specific steps that it intends to take as part of the conservatorship process, efforts to stabilize these entities may not be successful and the outcome and impact of these events remain highly uncertain.

        The problems faced by Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac resulting in their placement into conservatorship and their delistings from the New York Stock Exchange have stirred debate among some U.S. federal policymakers regarding the continued role of the U.S. government in providing liquidity for mortgage loans. Future legislation could further change the relationship between

12


Table of Contents


Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac and the U.S. government, could change their business charters or structure, or could nationalize or eliminate such entities entirely. We cannot predict whether, or when any such legislation may be enacted.

        In June 2009, as part of the Obama administration's financial industry recovery proposal, the U.S. Treasury announced that it and HUD, in consultation with other government agencies, plan to engage in a wide-ranging initiative to develop recommendations on the future of Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac and the Federal Home Loan Bank system. The U.S. Treasury noted that there are a number of options for the reform of Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac, including: (i) returning them to their previous status as government-sponsored enterprises with the paired interests of maximizing returns for private shareholders and pursuing public policy home ownership goals; (ii) gradual wind-down of their operations and liquidation of their assets; (iii) incorporating each of Fannie Mae's and Freddie Mac's function into a federal agency; (iv) creating a public utility model where the government regulates Fannie Mae's and Freddie Mac's profit margin, sets guarantee fees and provides explicit backing for guarantee commitments; (v) a conversion to providing insurance for covered bonds; and (vi) the dissolution of Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac into many smaller companies. Treasury Secretary Geithner testified in March 2010 that the administration expects to present its proposals for housing finance reform to Congress "next year." On April 14, 2010, the Obama administration released seven broad questions for public comment on the future of the housing finance system, including Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac, and announced that it would hold a series of public forums across the country on housing finance reform. The White House announced a "Conference on the Future of Housing Finance" for August 17, 2010 to bring together academic experts, consumer and community organizations, industry groups, market participants and other stakeholders for an open discussion about housing finance reform.

        Most recently, in Section 1491 of the Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act (the "Dodd-Frank Act"), signed into law on July 21, 2010, Congress stated that the "hybrid public-private status of Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac is untenable and must be resolved" and, further, "[i]t is the sense of the Congress that efforts to enhance by [sic] the protection, limitation, and regulation of the terms of residential mortgage credit and the practices related to such credit would be incomplete without enactment of meaningful structural reforms of Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac."

        Currently, we originate a substantial majority of our loans for sale through Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac programs. Furthermore, a substantial majority of our servicing rights derive from loans we sell through Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac programs. Changes in the business charters, structure or existence of Fannie Mae or Freddie Mac could eliminate or substantially reduce the number of loans we originate, which would have a material adverse effect on us.

We are subject to risk of loss in connection with defaults on loans sold under the Fannie Mae DUS program that could materially and adversely affect our results of operations and liquidity.

        Under the Fannie Mae DUS program, we originate and service multifamily loans for Fannie Mae without having to obtain Fannie Mae's prior approval for certain loans, as long as the loans meet the underwriting guidelines set forth by Fannie Mae. In return for the delegated authority to make loans and the commitment to purchase loans by Fannie Mae, we must maintain minimum collateral and generally are required to share risk of loss on loans sold through Fannie Mae. Under the full risk sharing formula, we are required to absorb the first 5% of any losses on the unpaid principal balance of a loan, and above 5% we are required to share the loss with Fannie Mae, with our maximum loss capped at 20% of the unpaid principal balance of a loan. Our risk sharing obligation has been modified and reduced on some Fannie Mae DUS loans. In addition, Fannie Mae can double or triple risk sharing obligations if the loan does not meet specific underwriting criteria. As of June 30, 2010, we had pledged securities of $12.6 million as collateral against future losses under $6.3 billion of Fannie Mae DUS loans outstanding that are subject to risk sharing obligations, which we refer to as our "at risk

13


Table of Contents


balance." While we originate loans that meet the underwriting guidelines defined by Fannie Mae, in addition to our own internal underwriting guidelines, underwriting criteria may not always protect against loan defaults. In addition, commercial real estate values have generally declined in recent years, in some cases to levels below the current outstanding principal balance of the loan. Also, underwriting standards, including loan-to-value ratios, have become stricter. These factors create a risk that some older loans may not be able to be refinanced at maturity and thus may experience maturity defaults. For the quarter ended June 30, 2010, our delinquency rate was 1.64% of the unpaid principal amount of Fannie Mae DUS loans on which we have risk sharing that are sixty or more days delinquent. If loan defaults continue to increase, actual risk sharing losses under the Fannie Mae DUS program could exceed our pledged collateral, in which case we would need to post additional collateral, and such defaults could have a material adverse effect on our results of operations and liquidity. In addition, any failure to pay our share of losses under the Fannie Mae DUS program could result in the revocation of licenses from Fannie Mae and the exercise of various remedies available to Fannie Mae under the Fannie Mae DUS program.

If we fail to act proactively with delinquent borrowers in an effort to avoid a default, the number of delinquent loans could increase, which could have a material adverse effect on us.

        As a loan servicer, we maintain the primary contact with the borrower throughout the life of the loan and are responsible, pursuant to our servicing agreements with GSEs, HUD and institutional investors, for asset management. We are also responsible, together with the applicable GSE, HUD or institutional investor, for taking actions to mitigate losses. We believe we have developed an extensive asset management process for tracking each loan that we service. However, we may be unsuccessful in identifying loans that are in danger of underperforming or defaulting or in taking appropriate action once those loans are identified. While we can recommend a loss mitigation strategy for GSEs and HUD, decisions regarding loss mitigation are within the control of GSEs and HUD. Recent turmoil in the real estate, credit and capital markets have made this process even more difficult and unpredictable. When loans become delinquent, we incur additional expenses in servicing and asset managing the loan, we are typically required to advance principal and interest payments and tax and insurance escrow amounts, we could be subject to a loss of our contractual servicing fee and we could suffer losses of up to 20% of the unpaid principal balance of a Fannie Mae DUS loan with full risk sharing, as well as potential losses on Fannie Mae DUS loans with modified risk sharing. These items could have a negative impact on our cash flows and a negative effect on the net carrying value of the MSR on our balance sheet and could result in a charge to our earnings. As a result of the foregoing, a continuing rise in delinquencies could have a material adverse effect on us.

A reduction in the prices paid for our loans and services or an increase in loan or security interest rates by investors could materially and adversely affect our results of operations and liquidity.

        Our results of operations and liquidity could be materially and adversely affected if GSEs, HUD or institutional investors lower the price they are willing to pay to us for our loans or services or adversely change the material terms of their loan purchases or service arrangements with us. A number of factors determine the price we receive for our loans. With respect to Fannie Mae related originations, our loans are generally sold as Fannie Mae-insured securities to third-party investors. With respect to HUD related originations, our loans are generally sold as Ginnie Mae securities to third-party investors. In both cases, the price paid to us reflects, in part, the competitive market bidding process for these securities.

        We sell loans directly to Freddie Mac. Freddie Mac may choose to hold, sell or later securitize such loans. We believe terms set by Freddie Mac are influenced by similar market factors as those that impact the price of Fannie Mae–insured or Ginnie Mae securities, although the pricing process differs.

14


Table of Contents


With respect to loans that are placed with institutional investors, the origination fees that we receive from borrowers are determined through negotiations, competition and other market conditions.

        Loan servicing fees are based, in part, on the risk sharing obligations associated with the loan and the market pricing of credit risk. The credit risk premium offered by Fannie Mae for new loans can change periodically but remains fixed once the we enter into a commitment to sell the loan. Over the past several years, Fannie Mae loan servicing fees have been higher due to the market pricing of credit risk. There can be no assurance that such fees will continue to remain at such levels or that such levels will be sufficient if delinquencies occur.

        Servicing fees for loans placed with institutional investors are negotiated with each institutional investor pursuant to agreements that we have with them. These fees for new loans vary over time and may be materially and adversely affected by a number of factors, including competitors that may be willing to provide similar services at better rates.

We originate mostly multifamily and other commercial real estate loans that are eligible for sale through GSE or HUD programs, which focus may expose us to greater risk if the CMBS market recovers or alternative sources of liquidity become more readily available to the commercial real estate finance market.

        We originate mostly multifamily and other commercial real estate loans that are eligible for sale through GSE or HUD programs. Over the past few years, the number of multifamily loans financed by GSE and HUD programs has represented a significantly greater percentage of overall multifamily loan origination volume than in prior years. We believe that this increase is the result, in part, of market dislocation and illiquidity in the secondary markets for non-GSE or HUD loans. To the extent the CMBS market recovers or liquidity in the commercial real estate finance market significantly increases, there may be less demand for loans that are eligible for sale through GSE or HUD programs, and our loan origination volume may be adversely impacted, which could materially and adversely affect us.

A significant portion of our revenue is derived from loan servicing fees, and declines in or terminations of servicing engagements or breaches of servicing agreements, including as a result of non-performance by third parties that we engage for back-office loan servicing functions, could have a material adverse effect on us.

        For the year ended December 31, 2009, 24% of our revenues were from loan servicing fees. We expect that loan servicing fees will continue to constitute a significant portion of our revenues for the foreseeable future. Nearly all of these fees are derived from loans that we originate and sell through GSE and HUD programs or place with institutional investors. A decline in the number or value of loans that we originate for these investors or terminations of our servicing engagements will decrease these fees. HUD has the right to terminate our current servicing engagements for cause. In addition to termination for cause, Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac may terminate our servicing engagements without cause by paying a termination fee. Our institutional investors typically may terminate our servicing engagements at any time with or without cause, without paying a termination fee. We are also subject to losses that may arise as a result of servicing errors, such as a failure to maintain insurance, pay taxes or provide notices. In addition, we have contracted with a third party to perform certain routine back-office aspects of loan servicing. If we or this third party fails to perform, or we breach or the third-party causes us to breach our servicing obligations to GSEs, HUD and institutional investors, our servicing engagements may be terminated. Declines or terminations of servicing engagements or breaches of such obligations could materially and adversely affect us.

15


Table of Contents


If one or more of our warehouse facilities, on which we are highly dependent, are terminated, we may be unable to find replacement financing on favorable terms, or at all, which would have a material adverse effect on us.

        We require a significant amount of funding capacity on an interim basis for loans we originate. As of June 30, 2010, we had $300 million of committed loan funding available through two commercial banks, $250 million of uncommitted funding available through Fannie Mae As Soon As Pooled ("ASAP") program, and an unlimited amount of uncommitted funding available for Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac loans through Kemps Landing Capital Company, LLC, an affiliate of Guggenheim Partners. Consistent with industry practice, three of our existing warehouse facilities are short-term, requiring annual renewal. If any of our committed facilities are terminated or are not renewed or our uncommitted facilities are not honored, we may be unable to find replacement financing on favorable terms, or at all, and we might not be able to originate loans, which would have a material adverse effect on us.

        If we fail to meet or satisfy any of the financial or other covenants included in our warehouse facilities, we would be in default under one or more of these facilities and our lenders could elect to declare all amounts outstanding under the facilities to be immediately due and payable, enforce their interests against loans pledged under such facilities and restrict our ability to make additional borrowings. These facilities also contain cross-default provisions, such that if a default occurs under any of our debt agreements, generally the lenders under our other debt agreements could also declare a default. These restrictions may interfere with our ability to obtain financing or to engage in other business activities, which could materially and adversely affect us. As of June 30, 2010, we were in breach of a covenant in one of our warehouse facilities that requires the delinquency rate of the Fannie Mae loans on which we have risk sharing to not increase more than 0.5% from quarter-end to quarter-end. Our delinquency rate increased 0.71% from March 31, 2010 to June 30, 2010. The delinquency rate is calculated based on the unpaid principal amount of Fannie Mae DUS loans on which we have risk sharing that are sixty or more days delinquent. The lenders under this warehouse line waived the breach, and all related cross-defaults were waived. The covenant was amended to increase the quarterly maximum delinquency rate increase to 1% from quarter-end to quarter-end. There can be no assurance that we will not experience another default of this nature in the future.

We are subject to the risk of failed loan deliveries, and even after a successful closing and delivery, may be required to repurchase the loan or to indemnify the investor if we breach a representation or warranty made by us in connection with the sale of the loan through a GSE or HUD program, any of which could have a material adverse effect on us.

        We bear the risk that a borrower will choose not to close on a loan that has been pre-sold to an investor or that the investor will choose not to close on the loan, including because a catastrophic change in the condition of a property occurs after we fund the loan and prior to the investor purchase date. We also have the risk of serious errors in loan documentation which prevent timely delivery of the loan prior to the investor purchase date. A complete failure to deliver a loan could be a default under the warehouse line used to finance the loan. Although we have experienced only one failed delivery in our history, we can provide no assurance that we will not experience additional failed deliveries in the future or that any losses will not be material or will be mitigated through property insurance or payment protections.

        We must make certain representations and warranties concerning each loan originated by us for GSE or HUD programs. The representations and warranties relate to our practices in the origination and servicing of the loans and the accuracy of the information being provided by us. In the event of a breach of any representation or warranty, investors could, among other things, increase the risk sharing on the Fannie Mae DUS loan or require us to repurchase the loan and seek indemnification for losses from us. Because the accuracy of many such representations and warranties generally is based on our

16


Table of Contents


actions or on third-party reports, such as title reports and environmental reports, we may not receive similar representations and warranties from other parties that would serve as a claim against them. Even if we receive representations and warranties from third parties and have a claim against them in the event of a breach, our ability to recover on any such claim may be limited. Our ability to recover against a borrower that breaches its representations and warranties to us may be similarly limited. Our ability to recover on a claim against any party would also be dependent, in part, upon the financial condition and liquidity of such party. Although we believe that we have capable personnel at all levels, use qualified third parties and have established controls to ensure that all loans are originated pursuant to requirements established by the GSEs and HUD, in addition to our own internal requirements, there can be no assurance that we, our employees or third parties will not make mistakes. Any significant repurchase or indemnification obligations imposed on us could have a material adverse effect on us.

An unfavorable outcome of litigation pending against us could have a material adverse effect on us.

        We are currently a party to certain legal proceedings, including one lawsuit alleging certain claims related to Column. That lawsuit contains three claims, each of which alleges damages of approximately $30 million or more. The three claims allege breach of contract, unjust enrichment and unfair competition arising out of an engagement to potentially refinance a large portfolio of senior healthcare facilities throughout the United States. This lawsuit was filed against Walker & Dunlop, LLC based on its alleged status as successor to Column in connection with the January 2009 Column transaction. We believe that Walker & Dunlop, LLC is entitled to indemnification from Column with respect to some or all of the claims arising out of this matter. However, Column has not accepted or rejected our indemnification claim and may not do so until after the matter has been fully resolved. As a result, we may be required to bear the potentially significant costs of the litigation and any adverse judgment unless and until we are able to prevail on our indemnification claim. There can be no assurance that we will satisfy the requirements for indemnification from Column. Moreover, an unfavorable outcome with respect to this lawsuit could have a material adverse effect on us.

We expect to offer new loan products to meet evolving borrower demands, including loans that we originate for our balance sheet. Balance sheet lending would increase our risk of loss, and because we are not as experienced with such loan products, we may not be successful or profitable in offering such products.

        Currently, we do not originate loans for our balance sheet, and all loans are pre-sold or placed with an investor before we close on the loan with the borrower. In the future, we expect to offer new loan products to meet evolving borrower demands, including loans that we originate for our balance sheet. Carrying loans for longer periods of time on our balance sheet would expose us to greater risks of loss than we currently face for loans that are pre-sold or placed with investors, including, without limitation, 100% exposure for defaults, impairment charges and interest rate movements. We may initiate new loan product and service offerings or acquire them through acquisitions of operating businesses. Because we may not be as experienced with new loan products or services, we may require additional time and resources for offering and managing such products and services effectively or may be unsuccessful in offering such new products and services at a profit.

Our business is significantly affected by general business, economic and market conditions and cycles, particularly in the multifamily and commercial real estate industry, including changes in government fiscal and monetary policies, and, accordingly, we could be materially harmed in the event of a continued market downturn or changes in government policies.

        We are sensitive to general business, economic and market conditions and cycles, particularly in the multifamily and commercial real estate industry. These conditions include changes in short-term and long-term interest rates, inflation and deflation, fluctuations in the real estate and debt capital

17


Table of Contents


markets and developments in national and local economies, unemployment rates, commercial property vacancy and rental rates. Any sustained period of weakness or weakening business or economic conditions in the markets in which we do business or in related markets could result in a decrease in the demand for our loans and services, which could materially harm us. In addition, the number of borrowers who become delinquent, become subject to bankruptcy laws or default on their loans could increase, resulting in a decrease in the value of our MSRs and servicer advances and higher levels of loss on our Fannie Mae loans for which we share risk of loss, and could materially and adversely affect us.

        We also are significantly affected by the fiscal and monetary policies of the U.S. government and its agencies. We are particularly affected by the policies of the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System (the "Federal Reserve"), which regulates the supply of money and credit in the United States. The Federal Reserve's policies affect interest rates, which have a significant impact on the demand for commercial real estate loans. Significant fluctuations in interest rates as well as protracted periods of increases or decreases in interest rates could adversely affect the operation and income of multifamily and other commercial real estate properties, as well as the demand from investors for commercial real estate debt in the secondary market. In particular, higher interest rates tend to decrease the number of loans originated. An increase in interest rates could cause refinancing of existing loans to become less attractive and qualifying for a loan to become more difficult. Changes in fiscal and monetary policies are beyond our control, are difficult to predict and could materially and adversely affect us.

We are dependent upon the success of the multifamily real estate sector and conditions that negatively impact the multifamily sector may reduce demand for our products and services and materially and adversely affect us.

        We provide commercial real estate financial products and services primarily to developers and owners of multifamily properties. Accordingly, the success of our business is closely tied to the overall success of the multifamily real estate market. Various changes in real estate conditions may impact the multifamily sector. Any negative trends in such real estate conditions may reduce demand for our products and services and, as a result, adversely affect our results of operations. These conditions include:

        Moreover, other factors may adversely affect the multifamily sector, including changes in government regulations and other laws, rules and regulations governing real estate, zoning or taxes, changes in interest rate levels, the potential liability under environmental and other laws and other unforeseen events. Any or all of these factors could negatively impact the multifamily sector and, as a result, reduce the demand for our products and services. Any such reduction could materially and adversely affect us.

18


Table of Contents

For most loans that we service under the Fannie Mae and HUD programs, we are required to advance payments due to investors if the borrower is delinquent in making such payments, which requirement could adversely impact our liquidity and harm our results of operations.

        For most loans we service under the Fannie Mae DUS program, we are currently required to advance the principal and interest payments and tax and insurance escrow amounts up to 5% of the unpaid principal balance if the borrower is delinquent in making loan payments. Once the 5% threshold is met, we can apply to Fannie Mae to have the advance rate reduced to 25% of any additional principal and interest payments and tax and insurance escrow amounts, which Fannie Mae may approve at its discretion. We are reimbursed by Fannie Mae for these advances. Although we understand that Fannie Mae plans to eliminate its cash advance requirement on servicers as part of its proposed new requirements on minimum net worth, operational liquidity and collateral requirements, effective in January 2011, there can be no assurance regarding the timing or ultimate content (including whether this cash advance requirement is eliminated or otherwise modified) of these new rules.

        Under the HUD program, we are obligated to continue to advance principal and interest payments and tax and insurance escrow amounts on Ginnie Mae securities until the HUD mortgage insurance claim and the Ginnie Mae security have been fully paid. In the event of a default on a HUD insured loan, HUD will reimburse approximately 99% of any losses of principal and interest on the loan and Ginnie Mae will reimburse the remaining losses of principal and interest. Ginnie Mae is currently considering a change to its programs that would eliminate the Ginnie Mae obligation to reimburse us for any losses not paid by HUD in return for our receiving an increased servicing fee. It is uncertain whether these changes will be implemented. An elimination of Ginnie Mae's reimbursement obligation could adversely impact us.

        Although we have funded all required advances from operating cash flow in the past, there can be no assurance that we will be able to do so in the future. If we do not have sufficient operating cash flows to fund such advances, we would need to finance such amounts. Such financing could be costly and could prevent us from pursuing our business and growth strategies.

If we securitize our loans in the future, we will be subject to additional risks that we do not currently face.

        Although some of our loans back Fannie Mae-insured or Ginnie Mae securities, we currently do not directly securitize the loans that we originate. Securitizing our loans would subject us to numerous additional risks, including:

If we were to securitize our loans, we would have to adequately address these and other related risks. Our failure to do so could have a material adverse effect on us.

19


Table of Contents

The requirements associated with being a public company, which will require us to implement significant control systems and procedures, require significant company resources and management attention.

        As a public company, we will be subject to the reporting requirements of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (the "Exchange Act"), and the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 (the "Sarbanes-Oxley Act"). The Exchange Act requires that we file annual, quarterly and current reports with respect to our business and financial condition and performance within specified time periods and maintain effective disclosure controls and procedures and internal control over financial reporting within specified deadlines. Section 404 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act requires that our management evaluate, and our independent registered public accountant report on, our internal control over financial reporting on an annual basis. We expect that we will be required to complete our initial internal controls assessment by the time of the filing of our Form 10-K for our fiscal year ending December 31, 2011. As a result, we will incur significant legal, accounting and other expenses that we did not incur prior to the time we became subject to the requirements of the Exchange Act and the Sarbanes-Oxley Act. We have made, and will continue to make, changes to our corporate governance standards, disclosure controls, internal control over financial reporting and financial reporting and accounting systems designed to meet our reporting obligations on a timely basis, including the timely filing of Exchange Act reports. However, if the measures we take are not sufficient to satisfy our obligations, we may incur further costs and experience continued diversion of management attention, adverse reputational effects and possible regulatory sanctions or civil litigation.

The loss of our key management could result in a material adverse effect on our business and results of operations.

        Our future success depends to a significant extent on the continued services of our senior management, particularly Mr. Walker, our Chairman, President and Chief Executive Officer, Mr. Smith, our Executive Vice President and Chief Operating Officer, and Mr. Warner, our Senior Vice President and Chief Underwriter. The loss of the services of any of these individuals could have a material adverse effect on our business and results of operations. We only maintain "key person" life insurance on Mr. Walker.

We may not be able to hire and retain qualified loan originators or grow and maintain our relationships with key loan correspondents, and if we are unable to do so, our ability to implement our business and growth strategies could be limited.

        We depend on our loan originators to generate borrower clients by, among other things, developing relationships with commercial property owners, real estate agents and brokers, developers and others, which we believe leads to repeat and referral business. Accordingly, we must be able to attract, motivate and retain skilled loan originators. We currently employ 27 loan originators throughout our eight offices. The market for loan originators is highly competitive and may lead to increased costs to hire and retain them. We cannot guarantee that we will be able to attract or retain qualified loan originators. If we cannot attract, motivate or retain a sufficient number of skilled loan originators, or even if we can motivate or retain them but at higher costs, we could be materially and adversely affected.

        We also depend on our network of loan correspondents, who generate a significant portion of our loan originations. During the six months ended June 30, 2010 and the year ended December 31, 2009, correspondents generated 40% of the loans that we originated during those periods. Unlike our loan originators, correspondents are not directly employed by us but are paid a percentage of the origination fee and the ongoing servicing fee for each loan that they help originate. In addition, although we have an exclusive relationship with our correspondents with respect to GSE and HUD loan products, we do not have an exclusive arrangement for any other loan products. While we strive to cultivate long-standing relationships that generate repeat business for us by making available co-marketing

20


Table of Contents


materials and educational resources to them, correspondents are free to transact business with other lenders and have done so in the past and will do so in the future. Our competitors also have relationships with some of our correspondents and actively compete with us in our efforts to expand our correspondent networks. Competition for loans originated by correspondents was particularly acute when the CMBS market was more robust. Although recent difficulties in the CMBS market have increased demand for GSE and HUD loans, we cannot guarantee that correspondents will continue to provide a strong source of originations for us if and when the CMBS market recovers. We also cannot guarantee that we will be able to maintain or develop new relationships with additional correspondents. If we cannot maintain and enhance our existing relationships and develop new relationships, particularly in geographic areas, specialties or niche markets where our loan originators are not as experienced or well-situated, our growth strategy will be significantly hampered and we would be materially and adversely affected.

We have numerous significant competitors and potential future competitors, many of which may have greater resources and access to capital than we do, and we may not be able to compete effectively in the future.

        We face significant competition across our business, including, but not limited to, commercial banks, commercial real estate service providers and life insurance companies, some of which are also investors in loans we originate. Many of these competitors enjoy competitive advantages over us, including:

        Commercial banks may have an advantage over us in originating loans if borrowers already have a line of credit with the bank. Commercial real estate service providers may have an advantage over us to the extent they also offer an investment sales platform. We compete on the basis of quality of service, relationships, loan structure, terms, pricing and industry depth. Industry depth includes the knowledge of local and national real estate market conditions, commercial real estate, loan product expertise and the ability to analyze and manage credit risk. Our competitors seek to compete aggressively on the basis of these factors and our success depends on our ability to offer attractive loan products, provide superior service, demonstrate industry depth, maintain and capitalize on relationships with investors, borrowers and key loan correspondents and remain competitive in pricing. In addition, future changes in laws, regulations and GSE and HUD program requirements and consolidation in the commercial real estate finance market could lead to the entry of more competitors. We cannot guarantee that we will be able to compete effectively in the future, and our failure to do so would materially and adversely affect us.

21


Table of Contents


The continuation of certain indemnification obligations of certain of our predecessors could have a material adverse effect on us.

        In connection with the Column transaction, certain predecessor entities that will become our wholly owned subsidiaries through the formation transactions agreed to indemnify Walker & Dunlop, LLC and its members (including Column) for certain matters, including (i) breaches of representations, warranties and covenants, (ii) any repurchase requirements with respect to loans originated by those subsidiaries, and (iii) liabilities in connection with excluded assets and excluded liabilities. Those indemnification obligations of our subsidiaries will continue following the formation transactions. The survival of those obligations will permit the indemnified parties, including Column, to the extent that they sustain damages resulting from any indemnified matter, to assert claims for indemnification against our subsidiaries for the survival period of those obligations. While we are unaware of any potential claims for indemnification against our subsidiaries, any such claims could have a material adverse effect on us. See "Certain Relationships and Related Transactions" for additional information.

We have experienced significant growth over the past several years, which may be difficult to sustain and which may place significant demands on our administrative, operational and financial resources.

        Our recent significant growth may not reflect our future growth potential, and we may not be able to maintain similarly high levels of growth in the future. Our recent growth reflects, in part, the acquisition of certain mortgage banking operations from Column in January 2009, which contributed $5.0 billion to our servicing portfolio and expanded our product lines as well as origination capacity. Much of our growth has also occurred since the onset of the 2008 credit crisis and the resulting tightening of credit standards, as many traditional lenders decreased or ceased their investments in commercial real estate debt. As a result, borrowers looked instead to GSEs, HUD and other sources of lending for multifamily loans. We intend to pursue continued growth by adding more loan originators, expanding our loan product offerings and acquiring complementary businesses, as appropriate, but we cannot guarantee such efforts will be successful. We do not know whether the favorable conditions that enabled our recent growth will continue. Because our recent significant growth is not likely to accurately reflect our future growth or our ability to grow in the future, there can be no assurance that we will continue to grow at the same pace or achieve the same financial results as we have in the past.

        In addition, if our growth continues, it could increase our expenses and place additional demands on our management, personnel, information systems and other resources. Sustaining our growth will require us to commit additional management, operational and financial resources to maintain appropriate operational and financial systems to adequately support expansion. There can be no assurance that we will be able to manage any growth effectively and any failure to do so could adversely affect our ability to generate revenue and control our expenses, which could materially and adversely affect us.

If we acquire companies in the future, we may experience high transaction and integration costs, the integration process may be disruptive to our business and the acquired businesses may not perform as we expect.

        Our future success will depend, in part, on our ability to expand or modify our business in response to changing borrower demands and competitive pressures. In some circumstances, we may determine to do so through the acquisition of complementary businesses rather than through internal growth. The identification of suitable acquisition candidates can be difficult, time consuming and costly, and we may not be able to successfully complete identified acquisitions on favorable terms, or at all. Furthermore, even if we successfully complete an acquisition, we may not be able to successfully integrate newly acquired businesses into our operations, and the process of integration could be expensive and time consuming and may strain our resources. Acquisitions also typically involve

22


Table of Contents


significant costs related to integrating information technology, accounting, reporting and management services and rationalizing personnel levels and may require significant time to obtain new or updated regulatory approvals from GSEs, HUD and other authorities. Acquisitions could divert management's attention from the regular operations of our business and result in the potential loss of our key personnel, and we may not achieve the anticipated benefits of the acquisitions, any of which could materially and adversely affect us. In addition, future acquisitions could result in significantly dilutive issuances of equity securities or the incurrence of substantial debt, contingent liabilities or expenses or other charges, which could also materially and adversely affect us.

Risks Relating to Regulatory Matters

If we fail to comply with the numerous government regulations and program requirements of GSEs and HUD, we may lose our approved lender status with these entities and fail to gain additional approvals or licenses for our business. We are also subject to changes in laws, regulations and existing GSE and HUD program requirements, including potential increases in reserve and risk retention requirements that could increase our costs and affect the way we conduct our business, which could materially and adversely affect us.

        Our operations are subject to regulation by federal, state and local government authorities, various laws and judicial and administrative decisions, and regulations and policies of GSEs and HUD. These laws, regulations, rules and policies impose, among other things, minimum net worth, operational liquidity and collateral requirements. Fannie Mae requires us to maintain operational liquidity based on a formula that considers the balance of the loan and the level of credit loss exposure (level of risk sharing). Fannie Mae requires Fannie Mae DUS lenders to maintain collateral, which may include pledged securities, for our risk sharing obligations. The amount of collateral required under the Fannie Mae DUS program is calculated at the loan level and is based on the balance of the loan, the level of risk sharing, the seasoning of the loans and the rating of the Fannie Mae DUS lender.

        Regulatory authorities also require us to submit financial reports and to maintain a quality control plan for the underwriting, origination and servicing of loans. Numerous laws and regulations also impose qualification and licensing obligations on us and impose requirements and restrictions affecting, among other things: our loan originations; maximum interest rates, finance charges and other fees that we may charge; disclosures to consumers; the terms of secured transactions; collection, repossession and claims handling procedures; personnel qualifications; and other trade practices. We also are subject to inspection by GSEs, HUD and regulatory authorities. Our failure to comply with these requirements could lead to, among other things, the loss of a license as an approved GSE or HUD lender, the inability to gain additional approvals or licenses, the termination of contractual rights without compensation, demands for indemnification or loan repurchases, class action lawsuits and administrative enforcement actions.

        Regulatory and legal requirements are subject to change. For example, Fannie Mae has indicated that it will be increasing its collateral requirements from 35 basis points to 60 basis points, effective as of January 1, 2011. The incremental collateral required for existing and new loans will be funded over approximately the next three years in accordance with Fannie Mae requirements. Ginnie Mae has indicated that it is currently considering a change to its programs that would eliminate the Ginnie Mae obligation to reimburse us for any losses not paid by HUD in return for our receiving an increased servicing fee, although it is uncertain whether these changes will be implemented. In addition, Congress has also been considering proposals requiring lenders to retain a portion of all loans sold to GSEs and HUD. The Dodd-Frank Act imposes a requirement that lenders retain "not less than 5 percent of the credit risk" of certain securitized loans, particularly those that are not "qualified residential mortgages." It is currently unclear whether and how the Dodd-Frank Act will apply to commercial real estate lenders. The Dodd-Frank Act requires the federal banking agencies, the Federal Trade Commission (the "FTC"), HUD, and FHFA to issue rules implementing this requirement no later than 270 days after Dodd-Frank's enactment. It also requires the federal banking agencies, the FTC, HUD, and

23


Table of Contents


FHFA to issue a joint rule defining a "qualified residential mortgage." Therefore, the applicability of this provision to us and its effect upon our business will not be fully known until these agencies issue the joint rule. It is also impossible to predict any future legislation that Congress may enact regarding the selling of loans to GSEs or any other matter relating to GSEs or loan securitizations. GSEs, HUD and other investors may also change underwriting criteria, which could affect the volume and value of loans that we originate. Changes to regulatory and legal requirements could be difficult and expensive with which to comply and could affect the way we conduct our business, which could materially and adversely affect us.

If we do not obtain and maintain the appropriate state licenses, we will not be allowed to originate or service commercial real estate loans in some states, which could materially and adversely affect us.

        State mortgage loan finance licensing laws vary considerably. Most states and the District of Columbia impose a licensing obligation to originate, broker or purchase commercial real estate loans. Many of those mortgage loan licensing laws also impose a licensing obligation to service commercial real estate loans. If we are unable to obtain the appropriate state licenses or do not qualify for an exemption, we could be materially and adversely affected.

        If these licenses are obtained, state regulators impose additional ongoing obligations on licensees, such as maintaining certain minimum net worth or line of credit requirements. The minimum net worth requirement varies from state to state. Further, in limited instances, the net worth calculation may not include recourse on any contingent liabilities. If we do not meet these minimum net worth or line of credit requirements or satisfy other criteria, regulators may revoke or suspend our licenses and prevent us from continuing to originate, broker or service commercial real estate loans, which would materially and adversely affect us.

If we fail to comply with laws, regulations and market standards regarding the privacy, use and security of customer information, we may be subject to legal and regulatory actions and our reputation would be harmed.

        We receive, maintain and store the non-public personal information of our loan applicants. The technology and other controls and processes designed to secure our customer information and to prevent, detect and remedy any unauthorized access to that information were designed to obtain reasonable, not absolute, assurance that such information is secure and that any unauthorized access is identified and addressed appropriately. Accordingly, such controls may not have detected, and may in the future fail to prevent or detect, unauthorized access to our borrower information. If this information is inappropriately accessed and used by a third party or an employee for illegal purposes, such as identity theft, we may be responsible to the affected applicant or borrower for any losses he or she may have incurred as a result of misappropriation. In such an instance, we may be liable to a governmental authority for fines or penalties associated with a lapse in the integrity and security of our customers' information.

Risks Related to Our Common Stock

There is currently no public market for our common stock, an active trading market for our common stock may never develop or continue following this offering and the trading and market price of our common stock may be volatile and could decline substantially following this offering.

        Prior to this offering, there has not been a public market for our common stock. An active trading market for our common stock may never develop or be sustained and securities analysts may choose not to cover us, which may affect the liquidity of our common stock and your ability to sell your common stock when desired, or at all, and could depress the market price of our common stock and the price at which you may be able to sell your common stock. In addition, the initial public offering price will be determined through negotiations among us, the selling stockholders and the

24


Table of Contents


representatives of the underwriters and may bear no relationship to the price at which the common stock will trade upon completion of this offering.

        The stock markets, including the NYSE, on which we intend to list our common stock, have experienced significant price and volume fluctuations. As a result, the trading and market price of our common stock is likely to be similarly volatile and subject to wide fluctuations, and investors in our common stock may experience a decrease in the value of their shares, including decreases unrelated to our operating performance or prospects. The market price of our common stock could decline substantially following the offering in response to a number of factors, including those listed in this "Risk Factors" section of this prospectus and others such as:

        In the past, securities class action litigation has often been instituted against companies following periods of volatility in the market price of their common stock. This type of litigation could result in substantial costs and divert our management's attention and resources, which could have a material adverse effect on our ability to execute our business and growth strategies.

Common stock eligible for future sale may have adverse effects on the market price of our common stock.

        We are offering                shares of our common stock and our selling stockholders are offering                shares of our common stock, as described in this prospectus. Concurrently with the completion of this offering, we will grant options to purchase an aggregate of                shares of our common stock and an aggregate of                shares of restricted stock under our Equity Incentive Plan to our employees, including our executive officers, and our independent directors. These persons, together with Column, will collectively beneficially own approximately      % of our outstanding

25


Table of Contents


common stock on a fully diluted basis (or approximately      % if the underwriters exercise their overallotment option in full) upon completion of this offering and the formation transactions. These persons may sell the shares of our common stock that they own at any time following the expiration of the lock-up period for such shares, which expires 365 days after the date of this prospectus (or earlier with the prior written consent of the representatives of the underwriters).

        Upon completion of this offering, we will enter into a registration rights agreement with regard to an aggregate of                   shares of our common stock issued in connection with our formation transactions to former direct and indirect equity holders of Walker & Dunlop, LLC, including certain of our executive officers and directors and Column.

        We cannot predict the effect, if any, of future issuances or resales of our common stock, or the perception that such issuances or resales may occur, on the market price of our common stock. Accordingly, the market price of our common stock may decline significantly in response to such issuances, resales or perceptions, especially when the lock-up restrictions described above lapse.

Future issuances of debt securities, which would rank senior to our common stock upon our liquidation, and future issuances of equity securities, which would dilute the holdings of our existing common stockholders and may be senior to our common stock for the purposes of paying dividends, periodically or upon liquidation, may negatively affect the market price of our common stock.

        In the future, we may issue debt or equity securities or incur other borrowings. Upon liquidation, holders of our debt securities and other loans and preferred stock will receive a distribution of our available assets before common stockholders. We are not required to offer any such additional debt or equity securities to existing common stockholders on a preemptive basis. Therefore, additional common stock issuances, directly or through convertible or exchangeable securities, warrants or options, will dilute our existing common stockholders' ownership in us and such issuances, or the perception that such issuances may occur, may reduce the market price of our common stock. Our preferred stock, if issued, would likely have a preference on dividend payments, periodically or upon liquidation, which could eliminate or otherwise limit our ability to pay dividends to common stockholders. Because our decision to issue debt or equity securities or otherwise incur debt in the future will depend on market conditions and other factors beyond our control, we cannot predict or estimate the amount, timing, nature or success of our future capital raising efforts. Thus, common stockholders bear the risk that our future issuances of debt or equity securities or our other borrowing will negatively affect the market price of our common stock and dilute their ownership in us.

Our financial results fluctuate as a result of seasonality and other factors, including the demand for commercial real estate loans, which makes it difficult to predict our future results for a particular period, makes the comparison between periods difficult and may materially and adversely affect the market price of our common stock or cause it to be volatile.

        Our business is subject to seasonal trends. Our quarterly results have fluctuated in the past and are expected to fluctuate in the future, reflecting the seasonality of the industry and the timing of transactions. Historically, our revenue, operating income, net income and cash flows from operating activities have been lower in the first and third quarters of the year and higher in the second and fourth quarters of the year. Further, the timing of sales of loans and MSRs, transaction closings, commencements and terminations of contracts and additional expenses to support new business activities create fluctuations in our financial results from time to time.

        These and other factors make it very difficult to predict our financial results. If our financial results do not meet the expectations of our stockholders and stock analysts, then the market price of our common stock may be materially and adversely affected or be volatile.

26


Table of Contents


We do not expect to pay dividends in the foreseeable future.

        We currently intend to retain all future earnings for the operation and expansion of our business and, therefore, do not anticipate declaring or paying cash dividends in the foreseeable future. The payment of any dividends in the future will be at the sole discretion of our board of directors and will depend on our results of operations, liquidity, financial condition, prospects, capital requirements and contractual arrangements, any limitations on payments of dividends present in any of our future financing documentation, applicable law and other factors our board of directors may deem relevant. If we do not pay dividends, a return on your investment will only occur if our stock price appreciates.

New investors in our common stock will experience immediate and substantial dilution after this offering.

        If you purchase shares of our common stock in this offering, you will experience immediate dilution of $            per share because the price that you pay will be substantially greater than the adjusted net tangible book value per share of common stock that you acquire. This dilution is due in large part to the fact that our earlier investors paid substantially less than the price of the shares of our common stock being sold in this offering when they purchased their shares of our common stock, as well as the equity awards issued concurrently with this offering. If outstanding options to purchase our common stock are exercised, you will experience additional dilution. See the section entitled "Dilution" in this prospectus for a more detailed description of this dilution.

We have broad discretion in the use of the net proceeds from our sale of common stock in this offering, and we may not use these proceeds effectively.

        All of the net proceeds from our sale of common stock in this offering will be used, as determined by management in its discretion, for working capital and other general corporate purposes. Our management will have broad discretion in the application of the net proceeds from our sale of common stock in this offering and could spend these proceeds in ways that do not necessarily improve our results of operations and cash flows or enhance the value of our common stock. The failure by our management to apply these proceeds effectively could result in financial losses, cause the market price of our common stock to decline or cause us to be unable to execute our business and growth strategies in a timely manner or at all.

Risks Related to Our Organization and Structure

Certain provisions of Maryland law could inhibit changes in control.

        Certain provisions of the Maryland General Corporation Law (the "MGCL") may have the effect of deterring a third party from making a proposal to acquire us or of impeding a change in control under circumstances that otherwise could provide the holders of our common stock with the opportunity to realize a premium over the then-prevailing market price of our common stock. We will be subject to the "business combination" provisions of the MGCL that, subject to limitations, prohibit certain business combinations (including a merger, consolidation, share exchange, or, in circumstances specified in the statute, an asset transfer or issuance or reclassification of equity securities) between us and an "interested stockholder" (defined generally as any person who beneficially owns 10% or more of our then outstanding voting capital stock or an affiliate or associate of ours who, at any time within the two-year period prior to the date in question, was the beneficial owner of 10% or more of our then outstanding voting capital stock) or an affiliate thereof for five years after the most recent date on which the stockholder becomes an interested stockholder. After the five-year prohibition, any business combination between us and an interested stockholder generally must be recommended by our board of directors and approved by the affirmative vote of at least (i) 80% of the votes entitled to be cast by holders of outstanding shares of our voting capital stock; and (ii) two-thirds of the votes entitled to be cast by holders of voting capital stock of the corporation other than shares held by the interested

27


Table of Contents


stockholder with whom or with whose affiliate the business combination is to be effected or held by an affiliate or associate of the interested stockholder. These super-majority vote requirements do not apply if our common stockholders receive a minimum price, as defined under Maryland law, for their shares in the form of cash or other consideration in the same form as previously paid by the interested stockholder for its shares. These provisions of the MGCL do not apply, however, to business combinations that are approved or exempted by a board of directors prior to the time that the interested stockholder becomes an interested stockholder.

        The "control share" provisions of the MGCL provide that "control shares" of a Maryland corporation (defined as shares which, when aggregated with other shares controlled by the stockholder (except solely by virtue of a revocable proxy) entitle the stockholder to exercise one of three increasing ranges of voting power in electing directors) acquired in a "control share acquisition" (defined as the direct and indirect acquisition of ownership or control of issued and outstanding "control shares") have no voting rights except to the extent approved by our stockholders by the affirmative vote of at least two-thirds of all the votes entitled to be cast on the matter, excluding votes entitled to be cast by the acquirer of control shares, our officers and our personnel who are also our directors.

        Certain provisions of the MGCL permit our board of directors, without stockholder approval and regardless of what is currently provided in our charter or bylaws, to adopt certain mechanisms, some of which (for example, a classified board) we do not yet have. These provisions may have the effect of limiting or precluding a third party from making an acquisition proposal for us or of delaying, deferring or preventing a transaction or a change in control of our company under circumstances that otherwise could provide the holders of shares of our common stock with the opportunity to realize a premium over the then current market price. Our charter contains a provision whereby we elect, at such time as we become eligible to do so, to be subject to the provisions of Title 3, Subtitle 8 of the MGCL relating to the filling of vacancies on our board of directors. See "Certain Provisions of Maryland Law and Our Charter and Bylaws."

Our authorized but unissued shares of common and preferred stock may prevent a change in our control.

        Our charter authorizes us to issue additional authorized but unissued shares of common or preferred stock. In addition, our board of directors may, without stockholder approval, amend our charter to increase the aggregate number of shares of our common stock or the number of shares of stock of any class or series that we have authority to issue and classify or reclassify any unissued shares of common or preferred stock and set the preferences, rights and other terms of the classified or reclassified shares. As a result, our board of directors may establish a class or series of common or preferred stock that could delay, defer, or prevent a transaction or a change in control of our company that might involve a premium price for shares of our common stock or otherwise be in the best interests of our stockholders.

Our rights and the rights of our stockholders to take action against our directors and officers are limited, which could limit your recourse in the event actions are taken that are not in your best interests.

        Under Maryland law generally, a director is required to perform his or her duties in good faith, in a manner he or she reasonably believes to be in the best interests of the company and with the care that an ordinarily prudent person in a like position would use under similar circumstances. Under Maryland law, directors are presumed to have acted with this standard of care. In addition, our charter limits the liability of our directors and officers to us and our stockholders for money damages, except for liability resulting from:

28


Table of Contents

        Our charter and bylaws obligate us to indemnify our directors and officers for actions taken by them in those capacities to the maximum extent permitted by Maryland law. In addition, we are obligated to advance the defense costs incurred by our directors and officers. As a result, we and our stockholders may have more limited rights against our directors and officers than might otherwise exist absent the current provisions in our charter and bylaws or that might exist with companies domiciled in jurisdictions other than Maryland.

Our charter contains provisions that make removal of our directors difficult, which could make it difficult for our stockholders to effect changes to our management.

        Our charter provides that a director may only be removed for cause upon the affirmative vote of holders of two-thirds of the votes entitled to be cast in the election of directors. Vacancies may be filled only by a majority of the remaining directors in office, even if less than a quorum. These requirements make it more difficult to change our management by removing and replacing directors and may delay, defer or prevent a change in control of our company that is in the best interests of our stockholders.

We are a holding company with no direct operations and will rely on funds received from our subsidiaries for our cash requirements.

        We are a holding company and will conduct all of our operations through Walker & Dunlop, LLC, our operating company. We do not have, apart from our ownership of this operating company, any independent operations. As a result, we will rely on distributions from our operating company to pay any dividends we might declare on shares of our common stock. We will also rely on distributions from this operating company to meet any of our cash requirements, including tax liability on taxable income allocated to us.

        In addition, because we are a holding company, your claims as common stockholders will be structurally subordinated to all existing and future liabilities (whether or not for borrowed money) and any preferred equity of our operating company. Therefore, in the event of our bankruptcy, liquidation or reorganization, our assets and those of our operating company will be able to satisfy the claims of our common stockholders only after all of our and our operating company's liabilities and any preferred equity have been paid in full.

Our principal stockholders, directors and executive officers will continue to own a large percentage of our common stock after this offering, which will allow them to exercise significant influence over matters subject to stockholder approval.

        Our executive officers, directors and stockholders holding 5% or more of our outstanding common stock will beneficially own or control approximately      % of the outstanding shares of our common stock on a fully diluted basis, after giving effect to the formation transactions and the completion of this offering. Accordingly, these executive officers, directors and principal stockholders, collectively, will have substantial influence over the outcome of corporate actions requiring stockholder approval, including the election of directors, any merger, consolidation or sale of all or substantially all of our assets or any other significant corporate transaction. These stockholders may also delay or prevent a change of control or otherwise discourage a potential acquirer from attempting to obtain control of us, even if such a change of control would benefit our other stockholders. Furthermore, we have agreed to nominate two Column designees, currently Edmund Taylor and Robert Wrzosek, for election as directors at our 2011 annual meeting of stockholders. William Walker, our Chairman, President and Chief Executive Officer, and Mallory Walker, the father of William Walker and our former Chairman, have agreed to vote the shares of common stock owned by them for the Column designees at the 2011 annual meeting of stockholders. This significant concentration of stock ownership may adversely affect the market price and liquidity of our common stock due to investors' perception that conflicts of interest may exist or arise.

29


Table of Contents


FORWARD-LOOKING STATEMENTS

        Some of the statements contained in this prospectus constitute forward-looking statements within the meaning of the federal securities laws. Forward-looking statements relate to expectations, projections, plans and strategies, anticipated events or trends and similar expressions concerning matters that are not historical facts. In some cases, you can identify forward-looking statements by the use of forward-looking terminology such as "may," "will," "should," "expects," "intends," "plans," "anticipates," "believes," "estimates," "predicts," or "potential" or the negative of these words and phrases or similar words or phrases which are predictions of or indicate future events or trends and which do not relate solely to historical matters. You can also identify forward-looking statements by discussions of strategy, plans or intentions.

        The forward-looking statements contained in this prospectus reflect our current views about future events and are subject to numerous known and unknown risks, uncertainties, assumptions and changes in circumstances that may cause actual results to differ significantly from those expressed or contemplated in any forward-looking statement. Statements regarding the following subjects, among others, may be forward-looking:

        While forward-looking statements reflect our good faith projections, assumptions and expectations, they are not guarantees of future results. Furthermore, we disclaim any obligation to publicly update or revise any forward-looking statement to reflect changes in underlying assumptions or factors, new information, data or methods, future events or other changes, except as required by applicable law. For a further discussion of these and other factors that could cause future results to differ materially from those expressed or contemplated in any forward-looking statements, see the section above entitled "Risk Factors."

30


Table of Contents


USE OF PROCEEDS

        We are offering             shares of our common stock at the anticipated public offering price of $            per share, which is the midpoint of the initial public offering price range shown on the cover page of this prospectus. We estimate that the net proceeds we will receive from this offering will be approximately $            , after deducting the underwriting discounts and commissions of $            and estimated offering expenses of approximately $            payable by us at closing (or, if the underwriters exercise their overallotment option in full, approximately $            , after deducting the underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses).

        We currently intend to use the net proceeds we will receive from this offering to execute our growth strategy and fund working capital and for other general corporate purposes. We also may use a portion of these net proceeds for acquisitions of businesses or products that are complementary to our business, although we have no current understandings, commitments or agreements to do so. We cannot specify with certainty all of the particular uses for the net proceeds to be received upon the completion of this offering. The expected use of net proceeds of this offering represents our current intentions based upon our present plans and business conditions.

        Accordingly, our management will have broad discretion in the application of the net proceeds, and investors will be relying on the judgment of our management regarding the application of the proceeds of this offering. Pending their uses, we plan to invest the net proceeds of this offering in U.S. government securities and other short-term, investment-grade, interest-bearing instruments or high-grade corporate notes.

        We will not receive any of the net proceeds from the sale of shares of our common stock in this offering by the selling stockholders.


DIVIDEND POLICY

        We currently intend to retain all future earnings for the operation and expansion of our business and, therefore, do not anticipate declaring or paying cash dividends in the foreseeable future. The payment of any dividends in the future will be at the sole discretion of our board of directors and will depend on our results of operations, liquidity, financial condition, prospects, capital requirements and contractual arrangements, any limitations on payments of dividends present in any of our future financing arrangements, applicable law, and other factors our board of directors may deem relevant. If we do not pay dividends, a return on your investment will only occur if our stock price appreciates.

31


Table of Contents


CAPITALIZATION

        The following table presents capitalization information as of June 30, 2010:

        You should read the following capitalization table in conjunction with "Use of Proceeds," "Selected Financial Data," "Management Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations," and the more detailed information contained in our predecessor's consolidated and combined financial statements and notes thereto included elsewhere in this prospectus.

 
  As of June 30, 2010  
 
  Walker &
Dunlop
(Historical
Predecessor)
  Pro Forma
Walker &
Dunlop, Inc.
  Pro Forma
As Adjusted
Walker &
Dunlop, Inc.
 
 
  (In thousands)
 

Notes payable (1)

  $ 30,307   $ 30,307   $ 30,307  

Stockholders' equity/members' capital:

                   

Members' capital and non-controlling interests

    37,321              

Common stock, $0.01 par value,                shares authorized,                 shares issued and outstanding, historical;                shares authorized,                shares issued and outstanding, pro forma;                shares authorized,                shares issued and outstanding, pro forma, as adjusted (2)

                 

Preferred stock, $0.01 par value, no shares authorized, issued and outstanding, historical;                shares authorized,                shares issued and outstanding, pro forma;                shares authorized;                shares issued and outstanding, pro forma, as adjusted

                   

Additional paid-in capital

                 

Retained earnings (3)

    51,805              
               

Total stockholders' equity/members' capital

  $ 89,126              
               

Total capitalization

 
$

119,433
             
               

(1)
Does not include amounts outstanding or available under warehouse financing facilities.

(2)
Includes an aggregate amount of                shares of our restricted stock granted to our employees, including our executive officers, and our independent directors concurrently with this offering as if such grants had occurred on June 30, 2010. Excludes (i) up to                shares of common stock issuable upon exercise of the underwriters' overallotment option, (ii)                 shares issuable upon exercise of outstanding options granted concurrently with this offering and (iii) an additional                 shares issuable under our Equity Incentive Plan after this offering.

(3)
Includes the formation costs related to the deferred taxes to be incurred as a result of the termination of our predecessor's pass through tax reporting status.

32


Table of Contents


DILUTION

        If you invest in our common stock in this offering, your ownership interest will be diluted to the extent of the difference between the initial public offering price per share and the pro forma net tangible book value per share of our common stock after this offering. Net tangible book value per share is determined by dividing the number of outstanding shares of our common stock into our total tangible assets (total assets less intangible assets) less total liabilities and any outstanding preferred stock. The pro forma net tangible book value (deficit) of our common stock was approximately $             million, or approximately $            per share, based on the number of shares of our common stock outstanding as of June 30, 2010, giving effect to the formation transactions as if they had occurred on that date.

        Investors participating in this offering will incur immediate and substantial dilution. After giving effect to the sale of common stock offered in this offering at an assumed initial public offering price of $            per share (which is the midpoint of the price range shown on the cover page of this prospectus), after deducting underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses payable by us, our pro forma as adjusted net tangible book value as of June 30, 2010 would have been approximately $             million, or approximately $            per share of common stock. This represents an immediate increase in pro forma as adjusted net tangible book value of $            per share to existing common stockholders, and an immediate dilution of $            per share to investors participating in this offering. The following table illustrates this per share dilution:

Assumed initial public offering price per share

  $    

Pro forma net tangible book value per share as of June 30, 2010, after giving effect to the formation transactions as if they had occurred on June 30, 2010

  $    

Pro forma increase in net tangible book value per share attributable to common existing stockholders

  $    

Pro form as adjusted net tangible book value per share after this offering

  $    

Pro forma dilution per share to investors participating in this offering

  $    

        If the underwriters exercise their overallotment option in full to purchase additional shares of common stock from us, the pro forma as adjusted net tangible book value per share after the offering would be $            , the increase in the pro forma net tangible book value per share attributable to existing common stockholders would be $            and the pro forma dilution per share to investors partcipating in this offering would be $            .

Differences Between New and Existing Investors in Number of Shares and Amount Paid

        The following table summarizes, on a pro forma basis as of June 30, 2010, the differences between the number of shares of common stock purchased from or granted by us, the total consideration and the weighted average price per share paid by existing common stockholders, after giving effect to the formation transactions, and by investors participating in this offering at an assumed initial public offering price of $            per share (which is the midpoint of the price range shown on the cover page

33


Table of Contents


of this prospectus), before deducting underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses:

 
  Shares Purchased/Granted   Total Consideration    
 
 
  Weighted
Average Price
Per Share
 
 
  Number   Percentage   Amount   Percentage  

Existing common stockholders before this offering, after giving effect to the formation transactions

            % $         % $    

Investors participating in this offering

            % $         % $    

Total

            % $         % $    

        The number of shares of common stock outstanding in the table above is based on the pro forma number of shares outstanding as of June 30, 2010 and assumes no exercise of the underwriters' over-allotment option. If the underwriters' over-allotment option is exercised in full, the number of shares of common stock held by existing stockholders will be reduced to        % of the total number of shares of common stock to be outstanding after this offering, and the number of shares of common stock held by investors participating in this offering will be increased to            shares, or        % of the total number of shares of common stock to be outstanding after this offering.

        If outstanding options to purchase our common stock are exercised, you will experience additional dilution.

34


Table of Contents


SELECTED FINANCIAL DATA

        The following table sets forth selected financial and operating data on a consolidated and combined historical basis for our predecessor. We have not presented historical financial information for Walker & Dunlop, Inc. because we have not had any corporate activity since our formation other than the issuance of shares of common stock in connection with the initial nominal capitalization of our company and because we believe that a presentation of the results of Walker & Dunlop, Inc. would not be meaningful. The term "predecessor" refers to, collectively, Walker & Dunlop, LLC, Walker & Dunlop Multifamily, Inc., Walker & Dunlop GP, LLC, GPF Acquisition, LLC, W&D, Inc., Green Park Financial Limited Partnership, Walker & Dunlop II, LLC, Green Park Express, LLC and W&D Balanced Real Estate Fund I GP, LLC.

        You should read the following selected financial and operating data in conjunction with "Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations" and the consolidated and combined financial statements and related notes of our predecessor included elsewhere in this prospectus.

        The unaudited selected historical financial information at June 30, 2010, and for the six months ended June 30, 2010 and 2009, have been derived from the unaudited condensed consolidated and combined financial statements of our predecessor included elsewhere in this prospectus and, in the opinion of management, includes all adjustments, consisting only of normal recurring adjustments, necessary for a fair presentation of such data. The interim results for the six months ended June 30, 2010 are not necessarily indicative of the results for 2010. Furthermore, historical results are not necessarily indicative of the results to be expected in future periods.

        The selected historical financial information at December 31, 2009 and 2008, and for the years ended December 31, 2009, 2008 and 2007, have been derived from the consolidated and combined financial statements of our predecessor audited by KPMG LLP, an independent registered public accounting firm, whose report thereon is included elsewhere in this prospectus.

        The selected historical financial information at December 31, 2007, has been derived from the consolidated and combined financial statements audited by KPMG LLP.

35


Table of Contents

 
  Six Months Ended June 30,   Year Ended December 31,  
Dollars in thousands
  2010   2009   2009   2008   2007   2006   2005  
 
  (unaudited)
  (unaudited)
   
   
   
   
   
 

Statement of Income Data(1)(2)

                                           

Revenues

                                           

Loan origination related fees

  $ 24,844   $ 12,099   $ 27,734   $ 14,113   $ 12,829   $ 16,297   $ 16,525  

Gain attributable to mortgage servicing rights

    21,369     14,142     30,212     15,315     9,101     5,271     7,438  

Servicing fees

    12,780     9,760     20,981     12,257     12,327     11,569     12,742  

Net warehouse interest income

    2,173     2,356     4,186     1,787     17     (36 )   495  

Escrow earnings and other interest income

    1,114     791     1,769     3,428     8,993     7,011     6,057  

Other

    1,335     1,504     3,879     2,272     7,005     3,292     4,852  
                               

Total Revenue

  $ 63,615   $ 40,652   $ 88,761   $ 49,172   $ 50,272   $ 43,404   $ 48,109  
                               

Expenses

                                           

Personnel

  $ 23,413   $ 12,688   $ 32,177   $ 17,008   $ 16,779   $ 17,461   $ 17,113  

Amortization and depreciation

    8,163     5,356     12,917     7,804     9,067     7,526     8,495  

Provision for risk sharing obligation

    2,580     323     2,265     1,101         (245 )   1,331  

Interest expense on corporate debt

    697     888     1,684     2,679     3,853     1,059     42  

Other operating expenses

    6,293     6,668     11,114     6,548     4,240     5,647     10,148  
                               

Total Expenses

  $ 41,146   $ 25,923   $ 60,157   $ 35,140   $ 33,939   $ 31,448   $ 37,129  
                               

Income from Operations

  $ 22,469   $ 14,729   $ 28,604   $ 14,032   $ 16,333   $ 11,956   $ 10,980  
                               

Gain on Bargain Purchase(3)

        10,922     10,922                  
                               

Net Income

  $ 22,469   $ 25,651   $ 39,526   $ 14,032   $ 16,333   $ 11,956   $ 10,980  
                               

Balance Sheet Data(1)

                                           

Cash and cash equivalents

  $ 14,789   $ 17,939   $ 10,390   $ 6,812   $ 17,437   $ 13,878   $ 11,941  

Restricted cash and pledged securities

    18,719     20,211     19,159     12,031     10,250     10,594     11,149  

Mortgage servicing rights

    90,272     72,229     81,427     38,943     32,956     29,994     31,750  

Loans held for sale

    94,092     66,840     101,939     111,711     22,543     301,897     113,082  

Total Assets

    276,104     199,044     243,732     183,347     89,468     362,044     172,103  

Warehouse notes payable

   
88,003
   
65,055
   
96,612
   
107,005
   
22,300
   
302,100
   
111,067
 

Notes payable

    30,307     35,583     32,961     38,176     45,508     48,903     534  

Total Liabilities

    186,978     135,266     173,921     169,497     81,354     363,144     124,722  

Total Equity

    89,126     63,778     69,811     13,850     8,114     (1,100 )   47,381  

Supplemental Data(2)

                                           

Income from operations, as a % of total revenue

    35 %   36 %   32 %   29 %   32 %   28 %   23 %

Total originations

  $ 1,657,528   $ 1,167,523   $ 2,229,772   $ 1,983,056   $ 2,064,361              

Servicing portfolio

  $ 13,692,347   $ 12,511,328   $ 13,111,261   $ 6,976,208   $ 6,054,186              

(1)
We have historically operated as pass-through tax entities (partnerships, LLCs and S-corporations).             Accordingly, our historical earnings have resulted in only nominal federal and state corporate level expense. The tax liability has been the obligation of our owners. Upon consummation of the formation transactions, our income will be subject to both federal and state corporate tax. The change in tax status is expected to result in the recognition of an estimated $35 million to $40 million of net deferred tax liabilities and a corresponding tax expense in the quarter in which the formation transactions are consummated.

(2)
Statement of Income Data for 2009 includes the results of 11 months of the operations acquired in the Column transaction. The results of these operations in January 2009 were not significant.

(3)
We recognized a one time gain on bargain purchase of $10.9 million in connection with the Column transaction in January 2009. The gain on bargain purchase represents the difference between the fair value of the assets acquired and the purchase price paid.

36


Table of Contents


MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF
FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

         The following discussion should be read in conjunction with "Selected Financial Data" and the historical financial statements and the related notes thereto included elsewhere in this prospectus. The following discussion contains, in addition to historical information, forward-looking statements that include risks and uncertainties. Our actual results may differ materially from those expressed or contemplated in those forward-looking statements as a result of certain factors, including those set forth under the headings "Forward-Looking Statements," "Risk Factors" and elsewhere in this prospectus.

Overview

        We are one of the leading providers of commercial real estate financial services in the United States, with a primary focus on multifamily loans. We originate, sell and service a range of multifamily and other commercial real estate financing products.

        We currently do not originate loans for our balance sheet. We fund loans for GSE and HUD programs through warehouse facility financings and sell them to investors in accordance with the related loan sale commitment, which we obtain prior to loan closing. Proceeds from the sale of the loan are used to pay off the warehouse facility. The sale of the loan is typically completed 2 to 45 days after the loan is closed. Loans placed with an institutional investor are funded directly by the institutional investor.

        We generate loan origination related fees from origination fees paid by the borrowers and premiums on the sale of loans. Premiums on the sale of loans are generated when the investor purchasing the loan requires a lower yield than the coupon rate of the loan less the servicing and other fees. We also generate revenues from the gain attributable to MSRs and any net warehouse interest income we earn while the loan is being funded by the warehouse facility.

        We retain servicing rights on substantially all of the loans we originate, and generate revenues from the fees we receive for servicing the loans, interest income from escrow deposits held on behalf of borrowers, late charges and other ancillary fees. Servicing fees are set at the time an investor agrees to purchase the loan and are paid monthly for the duration of the loan. Our Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac servicing engagements provide for make-whole payments in the event of a voluntary prepayment. Loans serviced outside of Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac do not typically require such payments.

        We are currently not exposed to interest rate risk during the loan commitment, closing and delivery process. The sale or placement of each loan to an investor is negotiated prior to establishing the coupon rate for the loan. We also seek to mitigate the risk of a loan not closing. We have agreements in place with the GSEs and HUD that specify the cost of a failed loan delivery, also known as a pair off fee, in the event we fail to deliver the loan to the investor. The pair off fee is typically less than the deposit we collect from the borrower. Any potential loss from a catastrophic change in the property condition while the loan is held for sale using warehouse facility financing is mitigated through property insurance equal to replacement cost. We are also protected contractually from any failure to close by an investor. We have experienced only one failed delivery in our 23-year history with the GSE and HUD programs.

        We have risk sharing obligations on most loans we originate under the Fannie Mae DUS program. When a Fannie Mae DUS loan is subject to full risk sharing, we absorb the first 5% of any losses on the unpaid principal balance of a loan, and above 5% we share a percentage of the loss with Fannie Mae, with our maximum loss capped at 20% of the unpaid principal balance of a loan. We may, however, request modified risk sharing at the time of origination, which reduces our potential risk sharing losses from the levels described above. We regularly request modified risk sharing based on such factors as the size of the loan, market conditions and loan pricing. We may also request modified

37


Table of Contents


risk sharing on large transactions if we do not believe that we are being fully compensated for the risks of the transactions or to manage overall risk levels. Except for the Fannie Mae DUS loans acquired in the Column transaction, which were acquired subject to their existing Fannie Mae DUS risk sharing levels, our current credit management policy is to cap each loan balance subject to full risk sharing at $25 million. Accordingly, we currently elect to use modified risk sharing for loans of more than $25 million in order to limit our maximum loss on any loan to $5 million.

        Our servicing fees for risk sharing loans include compensation for the risk sharing obligations and are larger than the servicing fees we receive from Fannie Mae for loans with no risk sharing obligation. We receive a lower servicing fee for modified risk sharing than for full risk sharing.

Formation of Walker & Dunlop, LLC

        In January 2009, W&D, Inc., its affiliate Green Park, and Column contributed their assets to a newly formed entity, Walker & Dunlop, LLC. The transaction brought together Walker & Dunlop's competencies in debt origination, loan servicing, asset management, investment consulting and related services, Green Park's Fannie Mae DUS origination capabilities and Column's Fannie Mae, Freddie Mac and HUD operations, including its healthcare real estate lending business, to form one of the leading providers of commercial real estate financial services in the United States. Substantially all of the assets and liabilities of W&D, Inc. and Green Park, including its wholly owned subsidiary Green Park Express, LLC, were transferred to Walker & Dunlop, LLC in exchange for 5% and 60% interests, respectively, in Walker & Dunlop, LLC, and certain assets and liabilities of Column were transferred to Walker & Dunlop, LLC for a 35% interest in Walker & Dunlop, LLC.

Basis of Presentation

        Concurrently with the closing of this offering, we will complete certain formation transactions through which Walker & Dunlop, LLC will become a wholly owned subsidiary of Walker & Dunlop, Inc., a newly formed Maryland corporation. In connection with the formation transactions, members of the Walker family, certain of our directors and executive officers and certain other individuals and entities who currently own direct and indirect equity interests in Walker & Dunlop, LLC will contribute their respective interests in such entities to Walker & Dunlop, Inc. in exchange for shares of our common stock. See "Business—Our History and Formation Transactions."

        The selected financial data included in this prospectus represents the consolidated and combined statements for the entities that will become our wholly owned subsidiaries as of the completion of this offering.

Outlook and Trends

        We believe demand for commercial real estate loans will increase as substantial levels of existing debt mature and commercial real estate investment activity rebounds. We also believe multifamily lending will continue to be characterized by the strong market presence of GSEs and HUD, given the continued weakness of commercial banks and the secondary market for securitized loans.

        Fannie Mae, Freddie Mac and the real estate and finance industries, however, have come under intense scrutiny as a result of the recent economic crisis and that scrutiny is likely to continue for the next several years. Although we cannot predict what actions Congress or other governmental authorities may take affecting GSEs, HUD and companies operating in the commercial real estate and finance sectors, we expect some degree of regulatory change is likely. Congress and other governmental authorities have also suggested that lenders should be required to retain on their balance sheet a portion of the loans that they originate, although no regulation has yet been implemented. We may be subject to additional liquidity and capital requirements. Separately, Fannie Mae has indicated that it currently contemplates increasing its collateral requirements under the Fannie Mae DUS program from

38


Table of Contents


35 basis points to 60 basis points, effective January 1, 2011. The incremental collateral required for existing and new loans will be funded over approximately the next three years, in accordance with Fannie Mae requirements.

Factors That May Impact Our Operating Results

        We believe that our results are affected by a number of factors, including the items discussed below.

Revenues

        Loan Origination Related Fees.     Loan origination related fees are comprised of origination fees received from borrowers that are negotiated on a transaction-by-transaction basis, and any premiums earned on the sale of the loan. The origination related fees are net of fees paid to a correspondent or broker, if applicable.

        Servicing Fees.     We service nearly all loans we originate. We earn servicing fees for performing certain loan servicing functions, such as processing loans, tax and insurance payments and managing escrow balances. Servicing also includes asset management functions, such as monitoring the physical condition of the property, analyzing the financial condition and liquidity of the borrower and performing loss mitigation activities as directed by the GSEs and HUD.

        Our servicing fees provide a stable revenue stream. They are based on contractual terms, are earned over the life of the loan and are generally not subject to prepayment risk. Our Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac servicing engagements provide for make-whole payments in the event of a voluntary prepayment. Accordingly, we currently do not hedge our servicing portfolio for prepayment risk.

39


Table of Contents

        HUD has the right to terminate our current servicing engagements for cause. In addition to termination for cause, Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac may terminate our servicing engagements without cause by paying a termination fee. Our institutional investors typically may terminate our servicing engagements at any time with or without cause, without paying a termination fee.

        Gain Attributable to Mortgage Servicing Rights.     We record mortgage servicing rights ("MSRs") in connection with the origination and sale of loans when we retain the MSRs. The amount of the gain attributable to MSRs is the fair value of the MSRs on the date the loans are sold. When we recognize gains attributable to MSRs for Fannie Mae loans with a risk sharing obligation, we also recognize a guaranty obligation as a liability and as an offset to the gain attributable to MSRs. See "—Critical Accounting Policies" for a more detailed explanation of MSRs and guaranty obligations.

        Net Warehouse Interest Income.     We earn net interest income on loans funded through borrowings from our warehouse facilities from the time the loan is closed until the loan is sold pursuant to the loan purchase agreement. Related interest expense from the warehouse loan funding is netted against interest income. Net warehouse interest income varies based on the period of time between the loan closing and the sale of the loan to the investor, the size of the average balance of the loans held for sale, and the net interest spread between the loan coupon rate and the cost of warehouse financing. Loans typically remain in the warehouse facility for 2 to 45 days. Loans that we originate and place with institutional investors are funded directly by institutional investors and not by our warehouse facilities.

        Escrow Earnings and Other Interest Income.     We earn interest income on property level escrow deposits in our servicing portfolio, generally based on an average 30-day LIBOR. Escrow earnings reflect interest income net of interest paid to the borrower, which generally equals a money market rate.

        Other.     Other income is comprised of investment consulting and related services fees, make-whole payments and other miscellaneous non-recurring revenues.

Costs and Expenses

        Personnel.     Personnel expense includes the cost of employee compensation and benefits, which include fixed and discretionary amounts tied to company and individual performance.

        Amortization and Depreciation.     Amortization and depreciation is principally comprised of amortization of our MSRs. The MSRs are amortized in proportion to, and over the period that, net servicing income is expected to be received. We amortize the guaranty obligations evenly over the same period as the associated MSRs. We depreciate property, plant and equipment ratably over their estimated useful lives.

        Provision for Risk Sharing Obligation.     The provision for risk sharing obligation is established at the loan level for Fannie Mae DUS risk sharing loans when we believe it is probable a loss has been incurred. Our estimates of value are based on appraisals, broker opinions of value or net operating income and market capitalization rates, whichever we believe is a better estimate of the net disposition value.

        Other Operating Expenses.     Other operating expenses include sub-servicing costs, facilities costs, travel and entertainment, marketing costs, professional fees, licenses, dues and subscriptions, corporate insurance and other administrative expenses. As a result of this offering, we will become a public company and our costs for items such as legal services, insurance, accounting services and investor relations will increase relative to our historical costs for such services as a private company. We expect to incur additional costs to maintain compliance with the Sarbanes-Oxley Act and the rules and regulations of the Securities and Exchange Commission and the New York Stock Exchange.

40


Table of Contents

        Income Tax Expense.     We have historically operated as pass-through tax entities (partnerships, LLCs and S-corporations). Accordingly, our historical earnings have resulted in only nominal federal and state corporate level expense. The tax liability has been the obligation of our owners. Upon consummation of the formation transactions, our income will be subject to both federal and state corporate tax. The change in tax status is expected to result in the recognition of approximately $35 million to $40 million of net deferred tax liabilities and a corresponding tax expense in the quarter in which the formation transactions are consummated.

Critical Accounting Policies

        Our consolidated and combined financial statements have been prepared in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America, which require management to make estimates and assumptions that affect reported amounts. The estimates and assumptions are based on historical experience and other factors management believes to be reasonable. Actual results may differ from those estimates and assumptions. We believe the following critical accounting policies represent the areas where more significant judgments and estimates are used in the preparation of our consolidated and combined financial statements.

        Revenue Recognition-Mortgage Servicing Rights and Guaranty Obligations.     We record a gain attributable to MSRs as revenue and the corresponding asset in connection with the origination and sale of loans when we retain the MSRs. Gains attributable to MSRs are recorded at fair value the day we enter into agreements to close and sell a loan. The fair value is based on estimates of future net cash flows associated with the servicing rights. The estimated net cash flows are discounted at a rate that reflects the credit and liquidity risk of the MSR over the estimated life of the loan.

        In addition to the MSR, we record a guaranty obligation (expense and liability) for all Fannie Mae DUS loans with a risk sharing obligation. The guaranty obligation represents our stand-ready obligation and is comprised primarily of the present value of the estimated cost to monitor the physical condition of the property and financial condition and liquidity of the borrower for the estimated life of the loan. The estimated life and discount rate used to calculate the guaranty obligation equal those used to calculate the corresponding MSR.

        The MSR and associated guaranty obligation are amortized into an expense over the estimated life of the loan. The MSRs are amortized in proportion to, and over the period, that net servicing income is expected to be received. The guaranty obligations are amortized evenly over the same period. If a loan defaults and is not expected to become current or pays off prior to the estimated life, the net MSR and associated guaranty obligation balances are expensed.

        We carry the MSRs at the lower of amortized value or fair market value and evaluate the carrying value quarterly. We engage a third party to value our MSRs on an annual basis.

        Provision for Risk Sharing Obligation.     The provision for risk sharing obligation is established at the loan level for Fannie Mae DUS risk sharing loans when we believe it is probable a loss has been incurred. Our estimates of value are based on appraisals, broker opinions of value or net operating income and market capitalization rates, whichever we believe is a better reflection of the net disposition value. The provision and allowance for risk sharing obligations is evaluated quarterly based on any changes in the estimated net disposition values of underlying properties.

Results of Operations

        Following is a discussion of our results of operation for the six months ended June 30, 2010, and 2009, and each of the years ended December 31, 2009, 2008, and 2007. The financial results are not necessarily indicative of future results. Our business may be seasonal. Historically, our revenue, operating income, net income and cash flows from operating activities have been lower in the first and

41


Table of Contents


third quarters of the year and higher in the second and fourth quarters of the year. The table below provides supplemental data regarding our financial performance.

 
  Six Months Ended June 30,   Year Ended December 31,  
Dollars in thousands
  2010   2009   2009   2008   2007  

Origination Data:

                               

Origination volumes by investor

                               
 

Fannie Mae

  $ 837,472   $ 797,336   $ 1,413,144   $ 1,234,273   $ 1,215,760  
 

Freddie Mac

    306,264     32,280     255,997          
 

Ginnie Mae-HUD

    394,156     61,022     217,186          
 

Other

    119,636     276,885     343,445     748,783     848,601  
                       

Total

  $ 1,657,528   $ 1,167,523   $ 2,229,772   $ 1,983,056   $ 2,064,361  
                       

Key Origination Metrics (as a percentage of origination volume):

                               

Origination fee

    1.50 %   1.04 %   1.24 %   0.71 %   0.62 %

Gain attributable to MSRs

    1.29 %   1.21 %   1.35 %   0.77 %   0.44 %

Servicing Portfolio by Type:

                               

Fannie Mae

  $ 9,072,264   $ 8,201,787   $ 8,623,973   $ 5,182,824   $ 4,309,073  

Freddie Mac

    2,164,930     1,996,691     2,035,021          

HUD/Ginnie Mae

    466,967     200,307     350,676          

Other

   
1,988,186
   
2,112,543
   
2,101,591
   
1,793,384
   
1,745,113
 
                       

Total servicing portfolio

  $ 13,692,347   $ 12,511,328   $ 13,111,261   $ 6,976,208   $ 6,054,186  
                       

Key Servicing Metrics (end of period):

                               

Weighted-average servicing fee rate

    0.20 %   0.23 %   0.19 %   0.23 %   0.22 %

Key Expense Metrics (as a percentage of total revenues):

                               

Personnel expenses

   
37

%
 
31

%
 
36

%
 
35

%
 
33

%

Other operating expenses

   
10

%
 
16

%
 
13

%
 
13

%
 
8

%

Total expenses

   
65

%
 
64

%
 
68

%
 
71

%
 
68

%

Six Months Ended June 30, 2010 Compared to Six Months Ended June 30, 2009

        Our income from operations was $22.5 million for the six months ended June 30, 2010, compared to $14.7 million for the six months ended June 30, 2009, a 53% increase. Our total revenues were $63.6 million for the six months ended June 30, 2010, compared to $40.7 million for the six months ended June 30, 2009, a 56% increase. Our total expenses were $41.1 million for the first six months ended June 30, 2010, compared to $25.9 million for the first six months ended June 30, 2009, a 59% increase. Our operating margins, calculated by dividing income from operations by total revenues, were 35% and 36% for the six months ended June 30, 2010 and 2009, respectively. The increases in revenues and earnings were primarily attributable to higher origination volumes resulting from the additional capabilities acquired in the Column transaction and higher origination fees per comparable transaction.

42


Table of Contents

        Loan Origination Related Fees.     Loan origination related fees were $24.8 million for the six months ended June 30, 2010, compared to $12.1 million for the six months ended June 30, 2009, a 105% increase. This increase was primarily attributable to higher origination volumes from our Freddie Mac and HUD product offerings and higher origination fees per comparable transaction. Origination volumes increased to $1.7 billion for the six months ended June 30, 2010, compared to $1.2 billion for the six months ended June 30, 2009, a 42% increase. Our origination fees as a percentage of origination volumes were 150 basis points for the six months ended June 30, 2010, compared to 104 basis points for the six months ended June 30, 2009, a 44% increase.

        Gain Attributable to Mortgage Servicing Rights.     Gain attributable to MSRs was $21.4 million for the six months ended June 30, 2010, compared to $14.1 million for the six months ended June 30, 2009, a 51% increase. This increase was primarily attributable to a 42% increase in origination volumes, and an increase in the MSR per comparable transaction. Our gain attributable to MSRs as a percentage of origination volumes was 129 basis points for the six months ended June 30, 2010, compared to 121 basis points for the six months ended June 30, 2009, a 7% increase. This increase was due to an increase in the servicing fee rate for new Fannie Mae loans and an increased percentage of HUD origination, which generate higher escrow earnings.

        Servicing Fees.     Servicing fees were $12.8 million for the six months ended June 30, 2010, compared to $9.8 million for the six months ended June 30, 2009, a 31% increase. This increase was primarily attributable to growth in the servicing portfolio to $13.7 billion at June 30, 2010 from $12.5 billion in 2009, a 9% increase, offset by a decrease in the weighted-average servicing fee rate to 20 basis points at June 30, 2010 from 23 basis points at June 30, 2009, a 13% decrease.

        Net Warehouse Interest Income.     Net warehouse interest income was $2.2 million for the six months ended June 30, 2010, compared to $2.4 million for the six months ended June 30, 2009, an 8% decrease. This decrease was primarily attributable to a 47 basis point decrease in the average net interest spread between the loan coupon rate and the average cost of warehouse financing, offset by a 14% increase in the average outstanding warehouse balance.

        Escrow Earnings and Other Interest Income.     Escrow earnings and other interest income was $1.1 million for the six months ended June 30, 2010, compared to $0.8 million for the six months ended June 30, 2009, a 41% increase. This increase was primarily attributable to the growth of the servicing portfolio.

        Other.     Other income was $1.3 million for the six months ended June 30, 2010, compared to $1.5 million for the six months ended June 30, 2009, a 11% decrease. This decrease was primarily attributable to miscellaneous non-recurring revenues received in the first six months of 2009.

        Gain on Bargain Purchase.     In 2009, we recognized a one time gain on bargain purchase of $10.9 million in connection with the Column transaction. The gain on bargain purchase represents the difference between the fair market value of the net assets acquired and the purchase price paid.

        Personnel.     Personnel expense was $23.4 million for the six months ended June 30, 2010, compared to $12.7 million for the six months ended June 30, 2009, an 85% increase. This increase was primarily attributable to the additional commissions associated with increased loan origination related fees.

        Amortization and Depreciation.     Amortization and depreciation expense was $8.2 million for the six months ended June 30, 2010, compared to $5.4 million for the six months ended June 30, 2009, a 52% increase. This increase was primarily attributable to the growth of the servicing portfolio.

43


Table of Contents

        Provision for Risk Sharing Obligation.     The provision for risk sharing obligation was $2.6 million for the six months ended June 30, 2010, compared to $0.3 million for the six months ended June 30, 2009, a $2.3 million increase. The provision for risk sharing obligation was 4 and 1 basis points of the Fannie Mae at risk portfolios as of June 30, 2010, and 2009, respectively.

        Interest Expense on Corporate Debt.     Interest expense on corporate debt was $0.7 million for the six months ended June 30, 2010, compared to $0.9 million for the six months ended June 30, 2009, a 22% decrease. This decrease was primarily attributable to an 8% decrease in the average corporate debt balance outstanding and a 17 basis point decline in the average 30-day LIBOR.

        Other Operating Expenses.     Other operating expenses were $6.3 million for the first six months ended June 30, 2010, compared to $6.7 million for the first six months ended June 30, 2009, a 6% decrease. This decrease was primarily attributable to Column transaction costs in 2009.

Year Ended December 31, 2009 Compared to Year Ended December 31, 2008

        Our income from operations was $28.6 million for the year ended December 31, 2009, compared to $14.0 million for the year ended December 31, 2008, a 104% increase. Our total revenues were $88.8 million for the year ended December 31, 2009, compared to $49.2 million for the year ended December 31, 2008, an 81% increase. Our total expenses were $60.2 million for the year ended December 31, 2009, compared to $35.1 million for the year ended December 31, 2008, a 71% increase. Our operating margins were 32% for the year ended December 31, 2009, compared to 29% for the year ended December 31, 2008. The increases in revenues and earnings were primarily attributable to higher origination volumes resulting from the additional capabilities acquired in the Column transaction and higher origination fees per comparable transaction.

        Loan Origination Related Fees.     Loan origination related fees were $27.7 million for the year ended December 31, 2009, compared to $14.1 million for the year ended December 31, 2008, a 97% increase. This increase was primarily attributable to larger origination volumes and higher origination fees per comparable transaction associated with a shift toward GSE and HUD origination and away from institutional investors. Origination volumes increased to $2.2 billion in 2009, compared to $2.0 billion in 2008, a 12% increase. The 2009 volumes reflect the more challenging credit markets, the smaller appetite of institutional investors and increased reliance on GSEs and HUD for the secondary market. The GSEs and HUD comprised 85% and 62% of originations in 2009 and 2008, respectively. Our origination fees as a percentage of origination volumes increased to 124 basis points in 2009, from 71 basis points in 2008, a 75% increase.

        Gain Attributable to Mortgage Servicing Rights.     Gain attributable to MSRs was $30.2 million for the year ended December 31, 2009, compared to $15.3 million for the year ended December 31, 2008, a 97% increase. This increase was primarily attributable to a 12% increase in origination volumes, and an increase in MSR per comparable transaction. Our gain attributable to MSRs as a percentage of origination volumes was 135 basis points in 2009 compared to 77 basis points in 2008, a 75% increase. This increase results from an increased concentration in GSE and HUD originations and an increase in the servicing fee rate for new Fannie Mae loans.

        Servicing Fees.     Servicing fees were $21.0 million for the year ended December 31, 2009, compared to $12.3 million for the year ended December 31, 2008, a 71% increase. This increase was primarily attributable to an increase in the servicing portfolio to $13.1 billion at December 31, 2009 from $7.0 billion at December 31, 2008, an 88% increase, which was primarily due to the servicing acquired in the Column transaction, offset by a decrease in the weighted-average servicing fee rate to 19 basis

44


Table of Contents


points at December 31, 2009 from 23 basis points at December 31, 2008, a 17% decrease. The lower weighted-average servicing fee reflects the addition of Freddie Mac and HUD loans to the servicing portfolio.

        Net Warehouse Interest Income.     Net warehouse interest income was $4.2 million for the year ended December 31, 2009, compared to $1.8 million for the year ended December 31, 2008, a 134% increase. This increase was primarily attributable to an 18% increase in the average outstanding warehouse balance, together with a 198 basis point increase in the average net spread between the loan coupon rate and the cost of warehouse financing.

        Escrow Earnings and Other Interest Income.     Escrow earnings and other interest income was $1.8 million for the year ended December 31, 2009, compared to $3.4 million for the year ended December 31, 2008, a 48% decrease. This decrease was primarily attributable to a 255 basis point decline in the average 30-day LIBOR, offset by the growth of the servicing portfolio.

        Other.     Other income was $3.9 million for the year ended December 31, 2009, compared to $2.3 million for the year ended December 31, 2008, a 71% increase. This increase was primarily attributable to an increase in application fees from the higher origination activity, a $0.6 million gain on the sale of certain MSRs and a $1.1 million increase in investment consulting and related services fees in 2009.

        Gain on Bargain Purchase.     In 2009, we recognized a one time gain on bargain purchase of $10.9 million in connection with the Column transaction. The gain on bargain purchase represents the difference between the fair market value of the net assets acquired and the purchase price paid.

        Personnel.     Personnel expense was $32.2 million for the year ended December 31, 2009, compared to $17.0 million for the year ended December 31, 2008, an 89% increase. This increase was primarily attributable to the additional commissions associated with the increases in loan origination related fees and the personnel expense associated with employees added from the Column transaction in 2009.

        Amortization and Depreciation.     Amortization and depreciation expense was $12.9 million for the year ended December 31, 2009, compared to $7.8 million for the year ended December 31, 2008, a 66% increase. This increase was primarily attributable to growth of the servicing portfolio resulting from the Column transaction.

        Provision for Risk Sharing Obligation.     The provision for risk sharing obligation was $2.3 million for the year ended December 31, 2009, compared to $1.1 million for the year ended December 31, 2008, a $1.2 million increase. The provision for risk sharing obligation was 4 and 3 basis points of the Fannie Mae at risk portfolio balances as of December 31, 2009, and 2008, respectively.

        Interest Expense on Corporate Debt.     The interest expense on corporate debt was $1.7 million for the year ended December 31, 2009, compared to $2.7 million for the year ended December 31, 2008, a 37% decrease. This decrease was primarily attributable to a 19% decrease in the average corporate debt outstanding and a 255 basis point decline in the average 30-day LIBOR.

        Other Operating Expenses.     Other operating expenses were $11.1 million for the year ended December 31, 2009, compared to $6.5 million for the year ended December 31, 2008, a 70% increase. This increase was primarily attributable to the costs of adding seven offices and 38 employees in connection with the Column transaction in 2009.

45


Table of Contents

Year Ended December 31, 2008 Compared to Year Ended December 31, 2007

        Our income from operations was $14.0 million for the year ended December 31, 2008, compared to $16.3 million for the year ended December 31, 2007, a 14% decrease. Our total revenues were $49.2 million for the year ended December 31, 2008 compared to $50.3 million for the year ended December 31, 2007, a 2% decrease. Our total expenses were $35.1 million for the year ended December 31, 2008 compared to $33.9 million for the year ended December 31, 2007, a 4% increase. Our operating margins were 29% for the year ended December 31, 2008 compared to 32% for the year ended December 31, 2007. The 2008 results primarily reflect a decrease in escrow earnings from a 239 basis point decline in the average 30-day LIBOR coupled with a decline in prepayment penalties collected by us as the credit markets tightened. These decreases were partially offset by increased earnings as a result of a higher gain attributable to MSRs.

        Loan Origination Related Fees.     Loan origination related fees were $14.1 million for the year ended December 31, 2008, compared to $12.8 million for the year ended December 31, 2007, a 10% increase. This increase was primarily attributable to an increase in origination fees per comparable transaction associated with the shift toward GSE lending, offset by a decline in originations. Our origination fees as a percentage of origination volumes was 71 basis points in 2008, compared to 62 basis points in 2007, a 15% increase, and our origination volumes were $2.0 billion in 2008, compared to $2.1 billion in 2007, a 4% decrease. Origination volumes for loans placed with institutional investors fell 12% in 2008 compared to 2007.

        Gain Attributable to Mortgage Servicing Rights.     Gain attributable to MSRs was $15.3 million for the year ended December 31, 2008, compared to $9.1 million for the year ended December 31, 2007, a 68% increase. This increase was primarily attributable to an increase in our MSR per comparable transaction. Our gain attributable to MSRs as a percentage of origination volumes was 77 basis points in 2008, compared to 44 basis points in 2007. This increase reflects the higher concentration of GSE originations and the higher servicing fee rate for new Fannie Mae loans.

        Servicing Fees.     Servicing fees were $12.3 million for each of the years ended December 31, 2008 and 2007, respectively. The servicing portfolio grew to $7.0 billion at December 31, 2008, compared to $6.1 billion at December 31, 2007, a 15% increase. While the ratio of weighted-average servicing fee rate remained relatively constant, our servicing revenues benefitted from other higher fees of $1.0 million in 2007.

        Net Warehouse Interest Income.     Net warehouse interest income was $1.8 million for the year ended December 31, 2008, compared to $0.0 million for the year ended December 31, 2007. This increase was primarily attributable to a 104% increase in the average outstanding warehouse balance, together with a 197 basis point increase in the average net spread between the loan coupon rate and the cost of warehouse financing.

        Escrow Earnings and Other Interest Income.     Escrow earnings and other interest income was $3.4 million for the year ended December 31, 2008, compared to $9.0 million for the year ended December 31, 2007, a 62% decrease. This decrease was primarily attributable to a 239 basis point decline in the average 30-day LIBOR, offset by the growth of the servicing portfolio.

        Other.     Other income was $2.3 million for the year ended December 31, 2008, compared to $7.0 million for the year ended December 31, 2007, a 68% decrease. This decrease was primarily attributable to a $1.1 million decline in investment consulting and related services fees and a

46


Table of Contents


$1.8 million decline in prepayment penalties. As the credit markets tightened in 2008, fewer prepayments occurred, resulting in lower prepayment penalties.

        Personnel.     Personnel expenses were $17.0 million for the year ended December 31, 2008, compared to $16.8 million for the year ended December 31, 2007, a 1% increase. This increase was primarily attributable to the additional commissions associated with the higher origination related fees.

        Amortization and Depreciation.     Amortization and depreciation expense was $7.8 million for the year ended December 31, 2008, compared to $9.1 million for the year ended December 31, 2007, a 14% decrease. This decrease was primarily attributable to fewer prepayments and associated MSR write-offs in 2008.

        Provision for Risk Sharing Obligation.     The provision for risk sharing obligation was $1.1 million for the year ended December 31, 2008. We recognized no provision for the year ended December 31, 2007. The provision for risk sharing obligation was 3 basis points of the Fannie Mae at risk portfolio as of December 31, 2008.

        Interest Expense on Corporate Debt.     Interest expense on corporate debt was $2.7 million for the year ended December 31, 2008, compared to $3.9 million for the year ended December 31, 2007, a 30% decrease. This decrease was primarily attributable to a 19% decrease in the average corporate debt balance outstanding and a 239 basis point decrease in the average 30-day LIBOR.

        Other Operating Expenses.     Other operating expenses were $6.5 million for the years ended December 31, 2008, compared to $4.2 million for the year ended December 31, 2007, a 54% increase. This increase was primarily attributable to $1.0 million of Column transaction expenses included in 2008.

Financial Condition

        Our cash flows from operations are generated from loan sales, servicing fees, escrow earnings, net warehouse interest income and other income, net of loan purchases and operating costs. Our cash flows from operations are impacted by the timing of loan closings and the period of time loans are held for sale in the warehouse.

        We usually lease facilities and equipment for our operations. However, when necessary and cost effective, we invest immaterial amounts of cash in property, plant and equipment.

        We use our warehouse facilities to fund loan closings. We believe that our current warehouse facilities are adequate to meet our increasing loan origination needs. Historically we have used long-term debt to fund acquisitions.

        Although historically our excess cash flows from operations has been distributed to owners, we currently have no intention to pay dividends on our common stock in the foreseeable future.

47


Table of Contents

Six Months Ended June 30, 2010 Compared to Six Months Ended June 30, 2009

        Our unrestricted cash balance was $14.8 million and $17.9 million as of June 30, 2010, and June 30, 2009, respectively, a $3.1 million decrease and reflects the growth in near term closings.

        Changes in cash flows from operations were driven primarily by loans acquired and sold. Such loans are held for short periods of time, generally less than 45 days, and impact cash flows presented as of a point in time. We generated $16.2 million and $48.9 million of cash from operations during the six months ended June 30, 2010 and 2009, respectively, which included cash inflows of $8.6 million and $42.0 million from the sale of loans held for sale, respectively. Excluding cash flows from loan sales, our operating cash flows of $7.6 million for the six months ended June 30, 2010, were comparable to $6.9 million for the six months ended June 30, 2009.

        We invested $0.4 million and $0.0 million of cash in equipment and furniture for the six months ended June 30, 2010 and 2009, respectively, a $0.4 million increase. These amounts represent immaterial investments in property, plant and equipment.

        We used $11.4 million and $37.8 million of cash in financing activities for the six months ended June 30, 2010 and 2009, respectively, a $26.4 million decrease. This decrease was primarily attributable to a $33.4 million reduction of warehouse notes payable, offset by a cash contribution from the Column transaction.

Year Ended December 31, 2009 compared to Year Ended December 31, 2008

        Our unrestricted cash balance was $10.4 million and $6.8 million as of December 31, 2009, and December 31, 2008, respectively, a $3.6 million increase.

        Changes in cash flows from operations were driven primarily by loans acquired and sold. Such loans are held for short periods of time, generally less than 45 days, and impact cash flows presented as of a point in time. We generated $20.4 million cash flows from operations for the year ended December 31, 2009 compared to using $79.5 million of cash for the year ended December 31, 2008. The 2009 cash flows include proceeds of $10.4 million from the sale of loans held for sale, while the 2008 cash flows include $84.7 million of cash used for the purchase of loans held for sale. Excluding cash provided by and used for the sale and purchase of loans, cash flows from operations were $10.0 million and $5.2 million for 2009 and 2008, respectively. The increase in this component of cash flows from operations was primarily attributable to an increase in net income, less gain attributable to MSRs and gain on bargain purchase, plus amortization and depreciation.

        We invested $0.1 million and $0.2 million for the year ended December 31, 2009, and 2008, respectively, a $0.1 million increase. These amounts represent immaterial investments in property, plant and equipment.

        We used $16.7 million of cash from financing activities for the year ended December 31, 2009, compared to $69.1 million of cash generated from financing activities for the year ended December 31, 2008, an $85.7 million decrease. This decrease was attributable to a $95.1 million decrease in warehouse facilities outstanding, and a $2.5 million increase in distributions to owners, offset by a cash contribution from the Column transaction.

Year Ended December 31, 2008 compared to Year Ended December 31, 2007

        Our unrestricted cash balance was $6.8 million and $17.4 million as of December 31, 2008, and December 31, 2007, respectively, a $10.6 million decrease.

        Changes in cash flows from operations were driven primarily by loans acquired and sold. Such loans are held for short periods of time, generally less than 45 days, and impact cash flows presented as of a point in time. We used $79.5 million of cash flows from operations for the year ended

48


Table of Contents


December 31, 2008 compared to cash flows from operations of $293.9 million for the year ended December 31, 2007. The 2008 cash flows include $84.7 million of cash used for the purchase of loans held for sale, while the 2007 cash flows include $279.8 million cash from the sale of loans held for sale. Excluding cash provided by and used for the sale and purchase of loans, cash flows from operations was $5.2 million and $14.1 million for 2008 and 2007, respectively. The decrease in this component of cash flows from operations were primarily attributable to a decrease in net income, less gain attributable to MSRs, plus amortization and depreciation.

        We invested $0.2 million and $0 for the year ended December 31, 2008 and 2007, respectively, a $0.2 million increase. These amounts represent immaterial investments in property, plant and equipment.

        We generated $69.1 million of cash from financing activities for the year ended December 31, 2008, a $359.4 million increase over the $290.3 million of cash used in financing activities for the year ended December 31, 2007. This increase was attributable to a $364.5 million decrease in cash generated from warehouse facilities outstanding, offset by a $3.9 million increase in the amount of debt principal payments, and other net changes in assets and liabilities.

Liquidity and Capital Resources

    Uses of Liquidity, Cash and Cash Equivalents

        Our cash flow requirements consist of (i) short-term liquidity necessary to fund mortgage loans, (ii) working capital to support our day-to-day operations, including debt service payments, servicer advances consisting of principal and interest advances for Fannie Mae or HUD loans that become delinquent and advances on insurance and taxes payments if the escrow funds are insufficient, and (iii) liquidity necessary to pay down our debt obligations of approximately $1.0 million maturing on January 28, 2011 and $28.8 million maturing on October 31, 2011. We have an option to extend the $28.8 million debt to October 31, 2013, subject to certain conditions.

        We also require working capital to satisfy collateral requirements for our Fannie Mae DUS risk sharing obligations and to meet the operational liquidity requirements of Fannie Mae, Freddie Mac, HUD, Ginnie Mae and our warehouse facility lenders. Fannie Mae has indicated that it will be increasing its collateral requirements for certain loans. Congress and other governmental authorities have also suggested that lenders will be required to retain on their balance sheet a portion of the loans that they originate, although no regulation has yet been implemented. In either scenario, we would require additional liquidity to support the increased collateral requirements.

        As of June 30, 2010, December 31, 2009, and December 31, 2008, we were required to maintain at least $7.7 million, $7.3 million and $6.0 million, respectively, of liquid assets to meet our operational liquidity requirements for Fannie Mae, Freddie Mac, HUD, Ginnie Mae and our warehouse facility lenders. As of June 30, 2010, December 31, 2009, and December 31, 2008, we had operational liquidity of $14.8 million, $10.4 million, and $6.8 million, respectively.

        Historically, our cash flows from operations have been sufficient to enable us to meet our short-term liquidity needs and other funding requirements. Similarly, we believe that cash flows from operations should be sufficient for us to meet our current obligations for the next 12 months.

Restricted Cash and Pledged Securities

        Restricted cash and pledged securities consist primarily of collateral for our risk sharing obligations and good faith deposits held on behalf of borrowers between the time we enter into a loan commitment with the borrower and the investor purchases the loan. The amount of collateral required by Fannie Mae is a formulaic calculation at the loan level and considers the balance of the loan, the risk level of the loan, the age of the loan and the level of risk sharing. As of June 30, 2010,

49


Table of Contents


December 31, 2009, and December 31, 2008 we pledged securities to collateralize our Fannie Mae DUS risk sharing obligations of $12.6 million, $11.6 million and $7.2 million, respectively, all of which were in excess of the requirements.

        We fund any growth in our Fannie Mae required operational liquidity and collateral requirements from our working capital. Fannie Mae has proposed an increase to the collateral requirements for certain segments of the Fannie Mae risk sharing portfolio by approximately 25 basis points effective January 1, 2011. The incremental collateral required for existing and new loans will be funded over approximately the next three years, in accordance with Fannie Mae requirements. Based on our Fannie Mae portfolio as of June 30, 2010, the additional proposed collateral required by the end of the three year period is expected to be approximately $12.1 million.

Sources of Liquidity: Warehouse Facilities

        We have four warehouse facilities that we use to fund our loan originations. Consistent with industry practice, two of these facilities are revolving commitments we expect to renew annually, one is an uncommitted facility we expect to renew annually, and the last facility is provided on an uncommitted basis without a specific maturity date. Our ability to originate mortgage loans depends upon our ability to secure and maintain these types of short-term financings on acceptable terms. The amounts we have outstanding on our warehouse lines as of any quarter-end are generally a function of the timing of the execution of loan sales. Our warehouse facilities are as follows:

    We have a $150 million committed warehouse line with Bank of America, N.A. and TD Bank, N.A. that matures on November 29, 2010. The agreement provides us with the ability to fund our Fannie Mae, Freddie Mac and HUD loans. Advances are made at 100% of the loan balance and borrowings under this line bear interest at the average 30-day LIBOR plus 275 basis points. As of June 30, 2010, we had $31.0 million of borrowings outstanding under this line and corresponding loans held for sale. This line has been renewed successfully every year since we originally entered into the warehouse facility in 2005.

    This warehouse line includes various operating and financial covenants at the Walker & Dunlop, LLC entity level, including requirements for a minimum tangible net worth of $75 million, a debt to tangible net worth ratio of no more than 6 to 1, minimum liquid assets of at least $7 million, a maximum delinquency rate of no more than 2% (based on the unpaid principal amount of Fannie Mae DUS loans that are sixty or more days delinquent), and a maximum delinquency rate increase of no more than 0.5% (based on the unpaid principal amount of the Fannie Mae DUS loans on which we have risk sharing that are sixty or more days delinquent) from quarter-end to quarter-end. We were in breach of the delinquency rate covenant as of June 30, 2010, based on our delinquency rate increase of 0.7% from March 31, 2010 to June 30, 2010. The lenders under this warehouse line waived the breach, any related cross-defaults were waived and the covenant was amended to increase the maximum delinquency rate increase to 1% from quarter-end to quarter-end.

    We have a $150 million committed warehouse line with PNC Bank N.A. that matures on June 29, 2011. The agreement provides us with the ability to fund our Fannie Mae, Freddie Mac, and HUD loan closings. Advances are made at 100% of the loan balance and borrowings under this line bear interest at the average 30-day LIBOR plus 250 basis points. As of June 30, 2010, we had no borrowings outstanding under this line. This line has been renewed successfully every year since we originally entered into the warehouse facility in 2000. This warehouse line includes various operating and financial covenants at the Walker & Dunlop, LLC entity level, including requirements for a minimum adjusted tangible net worth of $85 million, an adjusted debt to adjusted tangible net worth ratio of no more than 3 to 1, minimum cash and cash equivalents of at least $7 million, a maximum delinquency rate of no

50


Table of Contents

      more than 2% (based on the unpaid principal amount of loans that are sixty or more days delinquent) and a maximum delinquency rate increase of no more than 2% (based on the aggregate amount of unpaid principal amount of the Fannie Mae DUS loans on which we have risk sharing that are sixty or more days delinquent) from quarter-end to quarter-end.

    We have a $250 million uncommitted facility with Fannie Mae under its As Soon As Pooled funding program. After approval of certain loan documents, Fannie Mae will fund loans after closing and the advances are used to repay the primary warehouse line. Fannie Mae will advance 99% of the loan balance and borrowings under this program bear interest at the average 30-day LIBOR plus 100 basis points. As of June 30, 2010, we had $51.1 million of borrowings outstanding under this program. There is no expiration date for this facility.

    We have an unlimited uncommitted warehouse line and repurchase facility with Kemps Landing Capital Company, LLC, an affiliate of Guggenheim Partners, that matures March 31, 2011. The line provides us with the ability to fund Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac loans. Advances are made at the lesser of 100% of the loan balance or the purchase price of the loan. Borrowings under this line bear interest at the average 30-day LIBOR plus 275 basis points. As of June 30, 2010, we had $5.8 million of borrowings outstanding under this line. This warehouse line includes various operating and financial covenants at the Walker & Dunlop, LLC entity level, including requirements for a minimum net worth of $2 million and minimum liquid assets of $200,000.

        These agreements also contain cross-default provisions, such that if a default occurs under any of our debt agreements, generally the lenders under our other debt agreements could also declare a default. We are in compliance with all of our warehouse line covenants.

Debt Obligations

        On October 31, 2006, we entered into a $42.5 million credit agreement with Bank of America that funded the purchase of a 49% interest in Green Park. Ownership interests in Green Park, GPF Acquisition, LLC, Walker & Dunlop Multifamily, Inc., Walker & Dunlop GP, LLC, W&D, Inc. and certain cash flows from the servicing portfolio were pledged as collateral for the note. On January 30, 2009, the loan was amended to reflect the formation of Walker & Dunlop, LLC and added pledges of all of the ownership interests in Walker & Dunlop, LLC as collateral for the note. The loan matures on October 31, 2011 and we have an option to extend the agreement to October 31, 2013, subject to certain conditions. The loan bears interest at the average 30-day LIBOR plus 350 basis points and has annual principal reductions of $3.6 million. As of June 30, 2010, the outstanding note balance was $28.8 million.

        On January 16, 2006, we entered into a $7.6 million note with United Bank to purchase certain ownership interests in Walker & Dunlop Multifamily, Inc. The note requires monthly principal and interest payments, bears an annual interest rate of 7.275% and matures on January 28, 2011. As of June 30, 2010, the outstanding balance of the note was $1.0 million.

        During 2008, we purchased small amounts of subsidiary equity from certain exiting employees and issued notes that are subordinated to the Bank of America credit agreement. The notes bear interest at the 90-day LIBOR plus 200 basis points and will be repaid in five annual installments after the Bank of America debt has been repaid. As of June 30, 2010, the aggregate outstanding balance of the notes was $0.5 million.

51


Table of Contents

Credit Quality and Allowance for Risk Sharing Obligation

 
  Six Months Ended
June 30,
  Year Ended December 31,  
Dollars in thousands
  2010   2009   2009   2008   2007  

Key Credit Metrics:

                               

Fannie Mae servicing portfolio, unpaid principal balance

  $ 9,072,264   $ 8,201,787   $ 8,623,973   $ 5,182,824   $ 4,309,073  

Fannie Mae at risk servicing portfolio, unpaid principal balance

    6,370,251     5,423,674     5,869,025     3,560,095     2,761,733  

60-day delinquencies, as a % of Fannie Mae at risk balance

   
1.64

%
 
0.09

%
 
0.31

%
 
0.56

%
 
0.17

%

Provision for risk sharing obligations

    2,580     323     2,265     1,101      

Provision as a percentage of Fannie Mae at risk servicing portfolio

    0.04 %   0.01 %   0.04 %   0.03 %    

Allowance for risk sharing obligations

   
5,984
   
3,072
   
5,552
   
1,101
   
 

Allowance for risk sharing obligations, as a percentage of Fannie Mae at risk servicing portfolio

    0.09 %   0.06 %   0.09 %   0.03 %    

Net write-offs, as a percentage of Fannie Mae at risk servicing portfolio

    0.03 %   0.01 %   0.01 %       0.01 %

        The unpaid principal balance of the servicing portfolio as of June 30, 2010, December 31, 2009, and December 31, 2008 was $13.7 billion, $13.1 billion and $7.0 billion, respectively. As of June 30, 2010, December 31, 2009, and December 31, 2008, the servicing portfolio included approximately $6.4 billion, $5.9 billion and $3.6 billion, respectively, of Fannie Mae loan balances that are subject to risk sharing obligations ("at risk" balance). Fannie Mae DUS risk sharing obligations are based on a tiered formula. The risk sharing tiers and amount of the risk sharing losses we absorb under full risk sharing are provided below. The maximum amount of risk sharing obligations we absorb is 20% of the unpaid principal balance of the loan.

Risk Sharing Tier
  Percentage Absorbed by Us
First 5% of unpaid principal balance   100%
Next 20% of unpaid principal balance   25%
Losses Above 25% of unpaid principal balance   10%
Maximum lender loss   20% of unpaid principal balance

        We may, however, request modified risk sharing at the time of origination, which reduces our potential risk sharing losses from the levels described above. In return, we receive a lower servicing fee for the loan. We regularly request modified risk sharing based on such factors as the size of the loan, market conditions and loan pricing. We may request modified risk sharing on large transactions if we do not believe that we are being fully compensated for the risks of the transactions or to manage overall risk levels. Except for the Fannie Mae DUS loans acquired in the Column transaction, which were acquired subject to their existing Fannie Mae DUS risk sharing levels, our current credit management policy is to cap the loan balance subject to full risk sharing at $25 million. Accordingly, we currently elect to use modified risk sharing for loans of more than $25 million in order to limit our maximum loss on any loan to $5 million.

        From January 1, 2005 through June 30, 2010, we settled risk sharing obligations of $3.8 million, or an average of 2 basis points annually of the average at risk Fannie Mae portfolio balance.

52


Table of Contents

        As of June 30, 2010, $104.2 million, or 1.64%, of our Fannie Mae at risk balances were more than 60 days delinquent. In conjunction with these delinquencies, we had an allowance of $4.6 million for risk sharing obligations.

        For the periods ending June 30, 2010, December 31, 2009, and December 31, 2008, our provisions for risk sharing obligations were $2.6 million, $2.3 million and $1.1 million, or 4 basis points, 4 basis points and 3 basis points, respectively, of the Fannie Mae at risk balances. As of June 30, 2010, December 31, 2009 and December 31, 2008, our allowance for risk sharing obligations were $6.0 million, $5.6 million and $1.1 million or 9 basis points, 9 basis points and 3 basis points, respectively, of the Fannie Mae at risk balances.

        The provision for risk sharing obligation is recorded, which increases the allowance for risk sharing obligation, when we believe that it is probable that we have incurred a risk sharing loss. Our estimates of value are based on broker opinions or other sources of market value information relevant to underlying property and collateral. A risk sharing loss is written off against the allowance at final settlement with Fannie Mae.

Off Balance Sheet Risk

        We do not have any off-balance sheet arrangements.

Contractual Obligations

        We have contractual obligations to make future payments on debt and lease agreements. Additionally, in the normal course of business, we enter into contractual arrangements whereby we commit to future purchases of products or services from unaffiliated parties. We also have a deferred compensation agreement with certain senior management officers.

        Warehouse facility obligations, long-term debt and other obligations at December 31, 2009 are as follows:

Dollars in thousands
  Due in 1
Year or Less
  Due after 1
Year through
3 Years
  Due after 3
Years through
5 Years
  Due after
5 Years
  Total  

Long-term debt(1)

  $ 6,690   $ 28,464   $   $   $ 35,154  

Warehouse facilities(2)

    96,612                 96,612  

Operating leases

    1,469     2,691     406     7     4,573  

Deferred compensation liability

    800     1,154             1,954  
                       

Total

  $ 105,571   $ 32,309   $ 406   $ 7   $ 138,293  
                       

(1)
Includes interest at contractual interest rate for fixed rate loans and effective interest rate for variable rate loans.

(2)
To be repaid from proceeds of loan sales.

53


Table of Contents

New/Recent Accounting Pronouncements

        In January 2009, the FASB issued FAS No. 167 (ASC 810) to amend requirements for consolidating variable interest entities. This amendment changes the determination of the primary beneficiary in a variable interest entity. In January 2010, the FASB voted to finalize Accounting Standards Update (ASU) amendments to Accounting Standards Codification (ASC) Topic 810 for Certain Investment Funds . The ASU will defer the effective date for a reporting enterprise's interest in certain entities. It addresses concerns that the joint consolidation model under development by the FASB and IASB may result in a different conclusion for asset managers and that an asset manager consolidating certain funds would not provide useful information to investors. The adoption of these standards did not have a material effect on our financial statements.

        In June 2009, the FASB issued FAS No. 166, Accounting for Transfers of Financial Assets —an amendment of FASB Statement 140 (as codified in ASC topic 860, Transfers and Servicing (ASC 860)). ASU No. 2009-16 issued in December 2009 removes the concept of a qualifying special purpose entity from Topic 860 and removes the exception from applying Topic 810, Consolidation of Variable Interest Entities, for qualifying special purpose entities. This ASU modifies the financial components approach used in Topic 860 and limits the circumstances in which a financial asset, or portion of a financial asset, should be derecognized. Additionally, enhanced disclosures are required to provide financial statement users with greater transparency about transfers of financial assets and a transferor's continuing involvement with transferred financial assets. We adopted ASC 860 on January 1, 2010. The adoption of the revised guidance did not have a material impact on our financial statements.

Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures About Market Risk

        We are not currently exposed to interest rate risk during the loan commitment, closing and delivery process. The sale or placement of each loan to an investor is negotiated prior to closing on the loan with the borrower, and the sale or placement is effectuated within 2 to 45 days of closing. The coupon rate for the loan is set after we have established the interest rate with the investor.

        Some of our assets and liabilities are subject to changes in interest rates. Earnings from escrows are based on a LIBOR. A 100 basis point increase or decrease in the average 30-day LIBOR would increase or decrease, respectively, our annual earnings by approximately $2.2 million based on our escrow balance as of June 30, 2010. The borrowing cost of our warehouse facilities are based on a LIBOR. A 100 basis point increase or decrease in the average 30-day LIBOR would decrease or increase, respectively, our annual net warehouse interest income by approximately $0.9 million based on our outstanding warehouse balance as of June 30, 2010. Approximately $28.8 million of our corporate debt is based on the average 30-day LIBOR. A 100 basis point increase or decrease in the average 30-day LIBOR would decrease or increase, respectively, our annual earnings by approximately $0.3 million based on our outstanding corporate debt as of June 30, 2010.

        The fair value of our MSRs is subject to market risk. A 100 basis point increase or decrease in the weighted average discount rate would decrease or increase, respectively, the fair value of our MSRs by approximately $2.4 million or $2.5 million as of December 31, 2009. Our Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac servicing engagements provide for make-whole payments in the event of a voluntary prepayment prior to the expiration of the prepayment protection period. Our servicing contracts with institutional investors and HUD do not require payment of a make-whole amount. As of June 30, 2010, 96% of the service fees are protected from the risk of prepayment through make-whole requirements; hence, we do not hedge our servicing portfolio for prepayment risk.

54


Table of Contents


BUSINESS

Our Company

        We are one of the leading providers of commercial real estate financial services in the United States, with a primary focus on multifamily lending. We originate, sell and service a range of multifamily and other commercial real estate financing products. Our clients are owners and developers of commercial real estate across the country. We originate and sell loans through the programs of Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac and HUD, with which we have long-established relationships. We retain servicing rights and asset management responsibilities on nearly all loans that we originate for GSE and HUD programs. We are approved as a Fannie Mae DUS lender nationally, a Freddie Mac Program Plus lender in seven states, the District of Columbia and the metropolitan New York area, a HUD MAP lender nationally, and a Ginnie Mae issuer. We also originate and service loans for a number of life insurance companies, commercial banks and other institutional investors.

        In 2009, we originated more than $2.2 billion in commercial real estate loans, of which approximately $1.9 billion were sold through GSE or HUD programs and approximately $343 million were placed with institutional investors. As of June 30, 2010, we serviced approximately $13.7 billion in commercial real estate loans covering approximately 1,600 properties in 46 states and the District of Columbia. We also provide investment and consulting and related services for two commercial real estate funds that invest in commercial real estate securities and loans for a number of institutional investors.

        For the year ended December 31, 2009, according to the Mortgage Bankers Association, by principal amount of loans directly funded or serviced by us, we were:

        We have not historically originated loans for our balance sheet. The sale of each loan through GSEs and HUD is negotiated prior to closing on the loan with the borrower. For loans originated pursuant to the Fannie Mae DUS program, we generally are required to share the risk of loss, with our maximum loss capped at 20% of the unpaid principal balance of a loan. We have established a strong credit culture over decades of originating loans and are committed to disciplined risk management from the initial underwriting stage through loan payoff. From January 1, 2005 through June 30, 2010, we settled risk sharing obligations of $3.8 million, or an average of 2 basis points annually of the average Fannie Mae at risk portfolio balance.

        Our total revenues were $63.6 million for the six months ended June 30, 2010 and $88.8 million for the year ended December 31, 2009. Our income from operations was $22.5 million for the six months ended June 30, 2010 and $28.6 million for the year ended December 31, 2009.

        We have been in business for 73 years. Since becoming a Fannie Mae DUS lender in 1988, we have had major institutions as investors in our business. In January 2009, we acquired from Column, an affiliate of Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC, its $5.0 billion servicing portfolio, together with its Fannie Mae, Freddie Mac and HUD operations, which significantly expanded our GSE and HUD loan origination capabilities. Our extensive borrower and lender relationships, knowledge of the commercial real estate capital markets, expertise in commercial real estate financing, and strong credit culture have enabled us to establish a significant market presence and grow rapidly and profitably in recent years. We believe our business model and expertise, combined with the additional capital from this offering, will enable us to continue to grow and enhance our position as a leading provider of commercial real estate financial services in the United States.

55


Table of Contents

Our History and the Formation Transactions

        Walker & Dunlop was founded in 1937 and has been under three generations of Walker family leadership. We became one of the first Fannie Mae DUS lenders in 1988 and have been a top 10 originator under the Fannie Mae DUS program for 19 of the past 20 years. We are headquartered in Bethesda, Maryland and have seven additional offices across the country.

        In January 2009, W&D, Inc., its affiliate Green Park, and Column contributed their assets to a newly formed entity, Walker & Dunlop, LLC. The transaction brought together Walker & Dunlop's competencies in debt origination, loan servicing, asset management, investment consulting and related services, Green Park's Fannie Mae DUS origination capabilities and Column's Fannie Mae, Freddie Mac and HUD operations, including its healthcare real estate lending business, to form one of the leading providers of commercial real estate financial services in the United States. Substantially all of the assets and liabilities of W&D, Inc. and Green Park, including its wholly owned subsidiary Green Park Express, LLC, were transferred to Walker & Dunlop, LLC in exchange for 5% and 60% interests, respectively, in Walker & Dunlop, LLC, and certain assets and liabilities of Column were transferred to Walker & Dunlop, LLC for a 35% interest in Walker & Dunlop, LLC.

        Concurrently with the closing of this offering, we will complete certain formation transactions through which Walker & Dunlop, LLC will become a wholly owned subsidiary of Walker & Dunlop, Inc., a newly formed Maryland corporation. In connection with the formation transactions, members of the Walker family, certain of our directors and executive officers and certain other individuals and entities who currently own direct and indirect equity interests in Walker & Dunlop, LLC will contribute their respective interests in such entities to Walker & Dunlop, Inc. in exchange for shares of our common stock. As a result of the contributions, we will become responsible for approximately $30.3 million of existing debt as of June 30, 2010. See footnotes to the "Principal and Selling Stockholders Table" for the number of shares received by each director and executive officer in connection with the formation transactions.

        The following chart shows the anticipated structure and ownership of our company, including operating subsidiaries, after giving effect to the formation transactions and this offering on a fully diluted basis (assuming no exercise by the underwriters of their overallotment option):

GRAPHIC

56


Table of Contents

Industry and Market Opportunity

        We believe that sizeable demand for commercial real estate loans, principally driven by impending debt maturities and an anticipated rebound in commercial real estate investment activity, presents significant growth opportunities for companies that have an established market presence, demonstrated origination experience, deep relationships with active investors and a disciplined risk management strategy.

Commercial Real Estate Loan Industry

        We believe the following represent the key sources of capital for the commercial real estate finance market:

Our current origination volume is concentrated with GSEs, as they are the dominant lender in the markets in which we operate. We expect to diversify our lending sources over time as other lenders become more attractive sources of commercial real estate financing for our clients.

Constrained Lending Environment

        Issuance of CMBS in the United States grew dramatically from $47 billion in 2001 to $230 billion in 2007, according to the Quarterly Data Book, Mortgage Bankers Association. This growth was fueled,

57


Table of Contents


in part, by rising commercial real estate property values, a strong economy and an abundance of debt and equity capital. CMBS were particularly attractive to borrowers because of their larger loan amounts and lower interest rates.

        Since reaching their highs in 2007, commercial real estate values have declined substantially as a result of the global recession and the related significant contraction in capital available to the commercial real estate market. This contraction in capital has been exacerbated by the near shut down in investor demand for CMBS and by financial institutions significantly reducing their commercial real estate portfolios and lending activity in an effort to retain capital, reduce leverage, mitigate risk and meet regulatory capital requirements. Similarly, the CMBS and broader securitization market collapsed. Only $3 billion of CMBS were issued in 2009, compared to a low of $47 billion and a high of $230 billion in any year from 2000 through 2007, according to the Quarterly Data Book, Mortgage Bankers Association. Conditions in the CMBS and broader securitization market remain extremely challenging.

        A comparison of loan delinquency rates for GSEs, CMBS, commercial banks and life insurance companies, as set forth below, shows that CMBS and commercial banks have had significantly higher delinquency rates than GSEs.


Commercial/Multifamily Mortgage Delinquency Rates by Investor Group

GRAPHIC

Source:   Q1 2010 Quarterly Data Book, Mortgage Bankers Association

Note:

 

CMBS represents 30+ days and real estate owned; Life Companies, Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac represent 60+ days; Commercial Banks represent 90+ days.

Demand for Commercial Real Estate Loans

        A substantial amount of commercial real estate loans is scheduled to mature in the coming years. According to the Federal Reserve Flow of Funds Accounts of the United States, approximately $3.4 trillion of commercial real estate loans were outstanding as of December 31, 2009, of which approximately $900 billion were multifamily loans. It is estimated that $28 billion to $40 billion of multifamily loans held by investors other than commercial banks will mature each year from 2011 to 2014, according to the Survey of Loan Maturity Volumes, Mortgage Bankers Association. This amount would be considerably higher if it included multifamily loans held by commercial banks. As this debt matures, real estate owners will be required to repay or restructure their loans. In these scenarios, new debt will almost always be required, which we believe will provide significant opportunities for us. We further believe that demand for multifamily and other commercial real estate loans will increase as the overall economy improves, which should have a positive impact on our origination volume.

58


Table of Contents

Non-Bank Multifamily Loan Maturities by Investor Type ($ in billions)

GRAPHIC

Source:
Survey of Loan Maturity Volumes, Mortgage Bankers Association

        We believe that demand for commercial real estate loans will also increase as the overall economy improves, particularly job growth. We further believe stronger employment fundamentals will likely result in lower delinquency rates, stronger cash flows and higher occupancy rates for multifamily and other commercial properties, which correlate with higher property values and an increase in real estate transaction activity.

Our Competitive Strengths

        We distinguish ourselves from other commercial mortgage originators and servicers through five core strengths developed over decades of experience:

        Strong Client Relationships and Demonstrated Loan Origination Experience.     Throughout our history, we have established and maintained deep client relationships with major owners and operators of commercial real estate across the country. We understand the financial needs of our borrowers, the geographic markets in which they operate, the market conditions for different types of commercial properties, and how to structure commercial real estate loans to meet those needs. Many of our clients are repeat customers, and some have worked with us for multiple generations. We also have decades of origination experience and were one of only three institutions in 2009 that was a top 10 originator for each of Fannie Mae, Freddie Mac and HUD. We believe that our relationships and expertise have helped us become one of the leading providers of commercial real estate financial services in the country.

        Disciplined Credit Culture.     We maintain a strong credit culture and disciplined risk management underpins everything we do. From January 1, 2005 through June 30, 2010, we settled risk sharing obligations of $3.8 million, or an average of 2 basis points annually of the average Fannie Mae at risk portfolio balance. We have received numerous awards from Fannie Mae for excellence in asset and risk management, including, in 2009, the Excellence in Asset Management Award and the Excellence in Loss Mitigation Award. We believe underwriting and active asset management are key components of our business model.

        Deep Investor Relationships.     We have relationships with Fannie Mae, Freddie Mac and HUD that are backed by decades of experience. We view ourselves as a business partner of the GSEs and HUD, working to achieve common goals. We understand GSE and HUD program requirements and standards for originating, underwriting and servicing large volumes of loans. We also have extensive relationships

59


Table of Contents


with other institutional sources of commercial real estate capital such as life insurance companies, investment banks, pension funds, commercial banks and other institutional investors. We were one of the first companies to obtain a Fannie Mae DUS license and have been a top 10 originator during 19 of the past 20 years. Currently, 24 companies are approved as Fannie Mae DUS lenders, 26 companies are approved as Freddie Mac Program Plus lenders, and 46 companies are approved as both HUD MAP lenders and Ginnie Mae issuers. We believe that obtaining new lender licenses from the GSEs is difficult, creating a significant barrier to entry.

        Servicing and Asset Management Expertise.     As of June 30, 2010, we serviced and provided asset management for approximately $13.7 billion in commercial real estate loans representing approximately 1,600 properties in 46 states and the District of Columbia. Our asset managers monitor individual investments with special emphasis on financial performance and risk management to anticipate potential property, borrower and market issues. Because of our active servicing and asset management, we believe that we provide a more full-service, hands-on experience to our customers and award-winning risk management to our investors.

        Experienced Management Team with Substantial Ownership.     Our named executive officers have an average of more than 20 years of experience in the commercial real estate finance industry. We have a senior management team that has time-tested, hands-on experience with a high degree of market knowledge and a thorough understanding of a broad range of commercial real estate asset classes. This team led our company during the credit crisis over the last few years with consistent quarterly growth in both revenues and profits. Our named executive officers will own approximately        % of our outstanding shares of common stock on a fully diluted basis following the completion of the formation transactions and this offering, closely aligning their interests with those of our stockholders.

Our Growth Strategy

        We believe we are well positioned to grow our business by taking advantage of opportunities in the commercial real estate finance market. During the recent credit crisis, we not only maintained our position in the market, but also expanded our business through the Column transaction in 2009, which added licenses to originate and service loans for Freddie Mac and HUD. We also significantly expanded our capabilities in the healthcare lending business through the Column transaction. As a result, while commercial real estate originations dropped nationwide by 46% from 2008 to 2009 and multifamily originations dropped nationwide by 35% from 2008 to 2009, according to the Mortgage Bankers Association's 2009 Annual Origination Volume Summation, our originations grew by 12% to approximately $2.2 billion in 2009 from approximately $2.0 billion in 2008. While some of our competitors suffered extensive loan losses and negative earnings, we sustained limited credit losses and remained profitable during the same period. We believe that our performance during this period of significant market dislocation has given us access to new clients and talented professionals and enhanced our brand awareness across the commercial real estate finance industry.

        We seek to use this momentum and market position to profitably grow our business by focusing on the following areas:

        Capitalize on Refinancing Needs and Commercial Real Estate Recovery.     According to the Survey of Loan Maturity Volumes, Mortgage Bankers Association, $420 billion in non-bank commercial real estate debt is expected to mature between 2011 and 2014, of which $130 billion is non-bank multifamily debt. We believe that these figures would be considerably higher if multifamily loans held by commercial banks were included. While some of this debt may be extended or restructured by existing lenders, we believe much of it will need to be refinanced, creating a significant market opportunity. In addition, we believe commercial real estate valuations will increase over time, which should produce increased transaction activity and new lending opportunities. With our strong market position and borrower relationships in multifamily debt financing, we believe that we are well positioned to benefit from an increase in lending activity for multifamily properties. Furthermore, we believe the commercial

60


Table of Contents


real estate recovery will generate opportunities for us to expand our originations of commercial real estate loans outside of the multifamily sector.

        Add to Our Origination Capabilities.     We intend to expand our business by adding to our origination capabilities. We currently have 27 originators located in eight offices nationwide, supplemented by 24 independently owned mortgage banking companies with whom we have correspondent relationships. We originate loans nationally and believe that we will have significant opportunities to continue broadening our origination network. This expansion may include organic growth, recruitment of talented origination professionals and potentially acquisitions of competitors with strong origination capabilities.

        Increase Originations in Healthcare Finance.     Through the Column transaction, we significantly increased our ability to compete in the healthcare real estate lending space, which includes skilled nursing facilities, senior housing facilities and hospitals. The most active sources of capital in this space today are HUD and Fannie Mae. From January 2009 through June 30, 2010, we have originated over $420 million in hospital and skilled nursing facility loans. According to the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, average annual health spending growth is anticipated to outpace average annual growth in the overall economy from 2009-2019, reaching approximately $4.5 trillion and representing 19.3% of GDP in 2019. Health spending growth is primarily attributable to the increasing average age of the U.S. population as the 65 and over population is expected to grow 36.2% from 2010 to 2020, according to the U.S Census Bureau. Given the significant and growing size of this market, along with our demonstrated origination capabilities, we believe that healthcare lending will represent a growing portion of our future business.

        Acquire Complementary Businesses.     Dislocation in the commercial real estate market has left many competitors weakened. We may choose to broaden the services we provide by acquiring complementary businesses that have deep client relationships and expertise in areas such as investment sales and special asset management. Through the Column transaction, we have demonstrated our ability to successfully acquire and integrate a significant business and believe that we have the ability to do so in the future should opportunities arise.

        Expand Our Commercial Real Estate Loan Product Offerings.     We anticipate offering additional commercial real estate loan products to our clients as their financial needs evolve. For example, we have experienced strong demand for interim financing for multifamily properties that would feed into our permanent GSE multifamily loan programs. While we have the structuring, underwriting, credit and asset management expertise to offer this type of product, we do not currently have the balance sheet to provide the necessary short-term financing for these loans. We believe proceeds from this offering, together with third-party financing sources, will allow us to meet client demand for additional products that are within our expertise.

Our Product Offerings

        We originate, sell and service a range of multifamily and other commercial real estate financing products. Our clients are developers and owners of real estate across the United States. We focus primarily on multifamily properties and offer a range of commercial real estate finance products to our customers, including first mortgage loans, second trust loans, supplemental financings, construction loans, mezzanine loans and equity investments. We originate and sell loans under the programs of GSEs and HUD. We retain servicing rights and asset management responsibilities on nearly all loans made under GSE and HUD programs and most of the loans that we place with institutional investors. Our long-established relationships with Fannie Mae, Freddie Mac, HUD and institutional investors enable us to offer this broad range of loan products and services.

61


Table of Contents

        We structure our internal working groups around the various services we provide: Multifamily Finance, FHA Finance, Healthcare Finance, Capital Markets and Investment Services. Each of our offerings are designed to maximize our ability to meet client needs, source capital and grow our commercial real estate financing business.

GRAPHIC

Multifamily Finance

        We are one of 24 approved lenders who participate in Fannie Mae's DUS program for multifamily, manufactured housing communities, student housing and certain healthcare properties. Under the Fannie Mae DUS program, Fannie Mae has delegated to us responsibility for ensuring that the loans we originate under the Fannie Mae DUS program satisfy the underwriting and other eligibility requirements established from time to time by Fannie Mae. In exchange for this delegation of authority, we share risk for a portion of the losses that may result from a borrower's default. For more information regarding our risk-sharing agreements with Fannie Mae, see "Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations—Liquidity and Capital Resources—Credit Quality and Allowance for Risk Sharing Obligations." Most of the Fannie Mae loans that we originate are sold in the form of a Fannie Mae-insured security to third-party investors. We also are contracted by Fannie Mae to service all loans that we originate under the Fannie Mae DUS program. We originated $1.4 billion, $1.2 billion and $1.2 billion in principal amount of multifamily loans for Fannie Mae under the Fannie Mae DUS program for 2009, 2008 and 2007, respectively, making us the fifth largest, eighth largest and sixth largest originator of multifamily loans for those periods. We have been a top 10 originator under the Fannie Mae DUS program for 19 of the last 20 years.

        We are one of 26 lenders approved as a Freddie Mac Program Plus lender under which we originate and sell to Freddie Mac multifamily and healthcare loans that satisfy Freddie Mac's

62


Table of Contents


underwriting and other eligibility requirements. Under the program, we submit our completed loan underwriting package to Freddie Mac and obtain Freddie Mac's commitment to purchase the loan at a specified price after closing. Freddie Mac ultimately performs its own underwriting of loans that we sell to it. Freddie Mac may choose to hold, sell or later securitize such loans. We do not have any risk sharing arrangements on loans we sell to Freddie Mac under Program Plus. We also are contracted by Freddie Mac to service all loans that we originate under its program. We originated $256 million in principal amount of loans for Freddie Mac during 2009, making us the tenth largest originator of loans as a Freddie Mac Program Plus lender for the period.

FHA Finance

        As an approved HUD MAP lender and Ginnie Mae issuer, we provide construction and permanent loans to developers and owners of multifamily housing, senior housing and healthcare facilities. We submit our completed loan underwriting package to HUD and obtain HUD's approval to originate the loan.

        HUD insured loans are typically placed in single loan pools which back Ginnie Mae securities. Ginnie Mae is a United States government corporation in The United States Department of Housing and Urban Development. Ginnie Mae securities are backed by the full faith and credit of the United States, and we do not bear any risk of loss on Ginnie Mae securities. In the event of a default on a HUD insured loan, HUD will reimburse approximately 99% of any losses of principal and interest on the loan and Ginnie Mae will reimburse the remaining losses of principal and interest. We are obligated to continue to advance principal and interest payments and tax and insurance escrow amounts on Ginnie Mae securities until the HUD mortgage insurance claim has been paid and the Ginnie Mae security fully paid. Ginnie Mae is currently considering a change to its programs that would eliminate the Ginnie Mae obligation to reimburse us for any losses not paid by HUD in return for our receiving an increased servicing fee. It is uncertain whether these changes will be implemented. As of June 30, 2010, we were servicing HUD loans with an unpaid principal balance of $467 million, of which $454 million were in Ginnie Mae securities.

Healthcare Finance

        Through the Column transaction, we significantly increased our ability to compete in the healthcare real estate lending space, which includes skilled nursing facilities and hospitals. The most active sources of capital in this space today are HUD and Fannie Mae. The process for originating healthcare real estate loans is similar to the process for originating multifamily loans with HUD or Fannie Mae, as applicable. We do not have any risk sharing arrangements on loans originated through HUD, but do share risk of loss on loans originated under the Fannie Mae DUS program. We are also contracted by HUD and Fannie Mae to service all loans we originate under their programs. Since the Column transaction in January 2009 through June 30, 2010, we have originated over $420 million in hospital and skilled nursing facility loans. Given the significant size of this addressable market and an aging population in the United States, along with our demonstrated origination capabilities, we believe that healthcare lending will represent a growing portion of our future business.

Capital Markets

        We serve as an intermediary in the placement of commercial real estate debt between institutional sources of capital, such as life insurance companies, investment banks, commercial banks, pension funds and other institutional investors, and owners of all types of commercial real estate. A client seeking to finance or refinance a property will seek our assistance in developing different alternatives and soliciting interest from various sources of capital. We often advise on capital structure, develop the financing package, facilitate negotiations between our client and institutional sources of capital, coordinate due diligence and assist in closing the transaction. In these instances, we do not underwrite

63


Table of Contents


or fund the loan and do not retain any interest in these loans, although we may be contracted by the lender to service the loans. We placed approximately $343 million in loans with institutional investors in 2009, approximately $749 million in 2008 and approximately $849 million in 2007. As of June 30, 2010, we serviced approximately $2.0 billion in loans for institutional investors.

Investment Services

        We provide investment consulting and related services for two commercial real estate funds, W&D Balanced Real Estate Fund I LP and Walker & Dunlop Apartment Fund I, LLC.

        W&D Balanced Real Estate Fund I LP is a commercial real estate fund that has invested approximately $50 million in commercial real estate securities and loans, such as first mortgages, B-notes, mezzanine debt and equity securities, and has no further commitments to invest. Third-party pension funds hold limited partnership interests in this fund and are entitled to all regular distributions. Through our subsidiary, we hold a general partnership interest in this fund and are entitled to incentive distributions only if returns exceed certain pre-established thresholds. To date, the general partner has never received an incentive fee. Pursuant to contractual arrangements, we provide investment consulting and related services to a third-party entity controlled by William Walker, our Chairman, President and Chief Executive Officer, which serves as the investment advisor to the fund. In return, we are entitled to all investment advisory payments earned by this third party entity.

        Walker & Dunlop Apartment Fund I, LLC is a commercial real estate fund that has invested $45 million in multifamily real estate securities and mezzanine financings, and has no further commitments to invest. An institutional investor owns a 99% non-managing member interest in the fund and a third-party entity controlled by members of the Walker family and other individuals own a 1% managing member interest therein. Pursuant to the fund's operating agreement, distribution of net cash flows is first distributed to an institutional investor based on an investment yield, next to the managing member and the balance of the net cash flows of the fund is then distributed 99% to an institutional investor and 1% to the managing member. Pursuant to contractual arrangements, we provide investment consulting and related services to the managing member, which serves as the investment advisor to the fund. In return, we are entitled to all investment advisory payments earned by the managing member.

        We do not intend to make any further investments on behalf of these funds or perform any further services, other than managing the existing fund investments.

        In the future, we may raise additional funds in an effort to provide clients with a broader selection of commercial real estate finance products. We believe the financing alternatives provided by future funds would complement our existing product offerings and do not intend to create funds that would compete with our existing products. We expect that third-party investors would likely provide the great majority of capital for these funds. Such funds would allow us to effectively leverage our cash without borrowing additional capital, strengthen and create relationships with institutional investors, create an ongoing, stable stream of asset management fees and potentially realize substantial returns on equity depending on fund performance.

        We intend to form a wholly owned subsidiary of our company to provide investment management services directly to any new funds we may create.

Direct Loan Originators and Correspondent Network

        We originate loans directly through approximately 27 originators operating out of eight offices nationwide. These individuals have deep knowledge of the commercial real estate lending business and bring with them extensive relationships with some of the largest property owners in the country. They have a thorough understanding of the financial needs and objectives of borrowers, the geographic

64


Table of Contents


markets in which they operate, market conditions specific to different types of commercial properties and how to structure a loan product to meet those needs. These originators collect and analyze financial and property information, assist the borrower in submitting information required to complete a loan application and, ultimately, help the borrower close the loan. Our originators are paid a salary and commissions based on the volume of approved loans that they originate.

        In addition to our group of talented originators, we have correspondent agreements with 24 independently owned mortgage banking companies across the country with whom we have exclusive relationships for GSE and HUD loan originations. This network of correspondents helps us extend our geographic reach into new and/or smaller markets on a cost effective basis. In addition to identifying potential borrowers, our correspondents assist us in evaluating loans, including pre-screening borrowers and properties for program eligibility, coordinating due diligence and generally providing market intelligence. In exchange for providing these services, the correspondent earns an origination fee based on a percentage of the principal amount of the financing arranged and a fee paid out over time based on the servicing revenue stream over the life of the loan.

        During the year ended December 31, 2009, our direct originators and correspondents originated approximately 60% and 40% of our loans, respectively.

Underwriting and Risk Management

        We have suffered minimal credit losses over the past five years and believe our success is due in large part to our thorough and disciplined underwriting process and our conservative risk management practices. Our success in these areas allows us to attract lenders and related capital to support our origination growth. We generally follow, or will follow, the same underwriting and risk management procedures irrespective of whether we retain risk or do not retain risk on the loans sold to third parties or originate loans for our balance sheet.

        Our underwriting process begins with a review of suitability for our lending partners and a detailed review of the borrower and the borrower's property. We review a borrower's financial statements for minimum net worth and liquidity requirements, as well as credit and criminal background checks. We also review a borrower's operating track record, including evaluating the performance of other properties owned by the applicable borrower. We also consider the borrower's bankruptcy and foreclosure history. We believe that lending to a borrower with a proven track record as an operator mitigates our credit risk.

        We review the fundamental value and credit profile of the underlying property, including an analysis of regional economic trends, appraisals of the property, and reviews of historical and prospective financials. Third-party vendors are engaged for appraisals, engineering reports, environmental reports, floor certification reports, zoning reports and credit reports. We utilize a list of approved third-party vendors for these reports. Each report is reviewed by our underwriting team for quality and comprehensiveness. All third party vendors are reviewed periodically for the quality of their work and are removed from our list of approved vendors if the quality or timeliness of the reports is below our standards. This is particularly true for engineering and environmental reports on which we rely to make decisions regarding ongoing replacement reserves and environmental matters.

        Our quality control is covered by our experienced system of checks and balances. First, underwriters and analysts work as a team to check one another's work as they complete an initial loan narrative. The narrative consists of in-depth borrower and key principal financial analysis, property financial and appraisal analysis, market analysis, and analyses for each loan, including analyses provided by third parties. The financial analysis must include an exit strategy for an unpaid loan at maturity. This narrative is then reviewed by one or two Deputy Chief Underwriters prior to submission to our Chief Underwriter for approval. This three-level system is designed to ensure thorough underwriting and to maintain quality in all of our loan narratives.

65


Table of Contents

        As required by our current internal policies and procedures, any contemplated loan over $25 million is first presented to our standing loan committee prior to being approved. This committee is currently comprised of our Chief Executive Officer, our Chief Underwriter and our Chief Operating Officer, in addition to two directors of our board. At the completion of this offering, our standing loan committee will be comprised of our Chief Executive Officer, Chief Underwriter, Chief Operating Officer and Senior Vice President of Asset Management.

        Once the loan is approved by our standing loan committee and closed, the loan becomes the responsibility of our asset management group, which also reports to our Chief Underwriter. Our asset management group monitors geographic trends at a high level, leveraging off of knowledge from a large servicing portfolio, receives and reviews property-level financial statements quarterly, monitors and evaluates escrow balances and property maintenance and routinely visits each property, in addition to monitoring payment patterns of the borrower. We believe that providing asset management services is an important advantage in minimizing credit losses. As the primary contact for the borrower, we gain insight in dealing with problem loans often before the borrower defaults. This insight, combined with our commercial real estate expertise, enables us to actively work to mitigate losses on any problem loans.

        While our underwriting procedures are generally the same for all loans, we have a stringent focus on managing our risk on loans where we participate in risk sharing with the lender. We carefully evaluate such lending partners and their underwriting standards in assessing our willingness to share credit risk. We currently share a portion of losses that may result from a borrower's default on most of the loans we originate under the Fannie Mae DUS program. Currently, we do not retain similar risk on other loans we originate. We have a long relationship with Fannie Mae and maintain a thorough understanding of their underwriting and other eligibility requirements, as well as their loss mitigation and property work-out procedures. While we can recommend a loss mitigation strategy, however, final decisions are within the control of Fannie Mae. During the foreclosure process, we decide whether we will calculate our share of losses based on the appraised value of the property or the final sale amount. We believe that our experience and in-depth knowledge of market conditions and property-level fundamentals enable us to the make sound choices in this regard. We believe Fannie Mae has a strong track record underwriting multifamily real estate loans. For example, according to the Quarterly Data Book, Mortgage Bankers Association, as of March 31, 2010, Fannie Mae's 60+ day delinquency rate was 0.79%, while the CMBS 30+ day and real estate owned delinquency rate was 7.24% and the Bank and Thrifts 90+ day delinquency rate was 4.24%.

        We also regularly evaluate market conditions for commercial real estate and the related financial markets in evaluating our willingness to share credit risk. For example, although historically we have taken risk sharing on the vast majority of loans we originated for Fannie Mae, we took no risk sharing on the majority of loans we originated for Fannie Mae in 2007.

        Finally, we currently maintain conservative concentration limits with respect to our Fannie Mae loans. We also limit geographic concentration, focusing on regional employment concentration and trends. We minimize individual loan concentrations under our current credit management policy to cap the loan balance subject to full risk sharing at $25 million. Accordingly, we currently elect to use modified risk sharing for loans of more than $25 million in order to limit our maximum loss on any loan to $5 million.

66


Table of Contents

Servicing and Asset Management

        We provide servicing for nearly all loans originated for GSEs and HUD and for most of our loans originated for institutional investors, primarily life insurance companies. We are an approved servicer of loans for Fannie Mae, Freddie Mac, and HUD and were the seventh largest GSE servicer in 2009, with $10.7 billion in loans being serviced at December 31, 2009. At June 30, 2010, we had a total servicing portfolio of approximately $13.7 billion, including $11.7 billion of loans under GSE and HUD programs.


Servicing Portfolio

 
   
  As of December 31,  
 
  As of
June 30, 2010
 
Dollars in thousands
  2009   2008   2007  

Fannie Mae

  $ 9,072,264   $ 8,623,973   $ 5,182,824   $ 4,309,073  

Freddie Mac

    2,164,930     2,035,021          

HUD/Ginnie Mae

    466,967     350,676          

Other

    1,988,186     2,101,591     1,793,384     1,745,113  
                   

Total

  $ 13,692,347   $ 13,111,261   $ 6,976,208   $ 6,054,186  
                   

        Our servicing function includes both loan servicing and asset management activities. We have a dedicated team of professionals who have significant experience in performing or overseeing the following servicing and asset management activities:

        Although we are the primary contact for the borrower at all times, certain routine back-office aspects of loan servicing, such as preparing statements, collecting payments and managing escrow accounts for taxes and insurance, are performed by a third-party provider under the supervision of our in-house servicing team. We directly handle any questions or issues that the borrower may have and make any non-routine decisions regarding collection of payment, application of funds and related matters. We believe that we enjoy significant cost savings as a result of this arrangement, without compromising the quality of the overall servicing process or diminishing the value we bring to the servicing function. All asset management activities are performed by us directly.

        Our servicing function provides us with recurring fees that are generally equal to a specified percentage of the outstanding principal balance of the loans being serviced and are paid by investors over the term of the loan. These servicing fees are contractual in nature and are agreed to upon loan origination. We may also be entitled to other forms of servicing compensation, such as late fees and fees for additional services that we are requested to perform, including loan modifications, lease reviews and defeasance. We generally retain the right to act as primary servicer for loans that we originate and sell.

        For most loans we service under the Fannie Mae DUS program, we are currently required to advance the principal and interest payments and tax and insurance escrow amounts up to 5% of the

67


Table of Contents


unpaid principal balance of a loan if the borrower is delinquent in making loan payments. Once the 5% threshold is met, we can apply to Fannie Mae to have the advance rate reduced to 25% of any additional principal and interest payments and tax and insurance escrow amounts, which Fannie Mae may approve at its discretion. We are reimbursed by Fannie Mae for these advances.

        Under the HUD program, we are obligated to continue to advance principal and interest payments and tax and insurance escrow amounts on Ginnie Mae securities until the HUD mortgage insurance claim has been paid and the Ginnie Mae security fully paid. In the event of a default on a HUD-insured loan, HUD will reimburse approximately 99% of any losses of principal and interest on the loan and Ginnie Mae will reimburse the remaining losses of principal and interest. Ginnie Mae is currently considering a change to its programs that would eliminate its obligation to reimburse us for any losses not paid by HUD in return for our receiving an increased servicing fee. It is uncertain whether these changes will be implemented.

Competition

        We face significant competition across our business, including, but not limited to, commercial banks, commercial real estate service providers and insurance companies, some of which are also investors in loans we originate. Many of these competitors enjoy competitive advantages over us, including greater name recognition, financial resources and access to capital. Commercial banks may have an advantage over us in originating commercial loans if borrowers already have a line of credit with the bank. Commercial real estate service providers may have an advantage over us to the extent they also offer an investment sales platform.

        We compete on the basis of quality of service, relationships, loan structure, terms, pricing and industry depth. Industry depth includes the knowledge of local and national real estate market conditions, commercial real estate, loan product expertise and the ability to analyze and manage credit risk. Our competitors seek to compete aggressively on the basis of these factors and our success depends on our ability to offer attractive loan products, provide superior service, demonstrate industry depth, maintain and capitalize on relationships with investors, borrowers and key loan correspondents and remain competitive in pricing. In addition, future changes in laws, regulations and GSE and HUD program requirements and consolidation in the commercial real estate finance market could lead to the entry of more competitors.

Seasonality

        Our business is seasonal. Historically, this seasonality has caused our revenue, operating income, net income and cash flows from operating activities to be lower in the first and third quarters and higher in the second and fourth quarters of each year. The seasonality of results of operations and cash flows in the fourth quarter is due to an industry-wide focus on completing transactions by year-end.

Regulatory Requirements

        Our business is subject to regulation and supervision in a number of jurisdictions. The level of regulation and supervision to which we are subject varies from jurisdiction to jurisdiction and is based on the type of business activities involved. The regulatory requirements that apply to our activities are subject to change from time to time and may become more restrictive, making our compliance with applicable requirements more difficult or expensive or otherwise restricting our ability to conduct our businesses in the manner that they are now conducted. Changes in applicable regulatory requirements, including changes in their enforcement, could materially and adversely affect us.

Federal and State Regulation of Commercial Real Estate Lending Activities

        Our multifamily and commercial real estate lending, servicing and asset management businesses are subject, in certain instances, to supervision and regulation by federal and state governmental

68


Table of Contents


authorities in the United States. In addition, these businesses may be subject to various laws and judicial and administrative decisions imposing various requirements and restrictions, which, among other things, regulate lending activities, regulate conduct with borrowers, establish maximum interest rates, finance charges and other charges and require disclosures to borrowers. Although most states do not regulate commercial finance, certain states impose limitations on interest rates and other charges and on certain collection practices and creditor remedies, and require licensing of lenders and adequate disclosure of certain contract terms. We also are required to comply with certain provisions of, among other statutes and regulations, the USA PATRIOT Act, regulations promulgated by the Office of Foreign Asset Control, the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as amended, which we refer to as "ERISA," and federal and state securities laws and regulations.

Requirements of GSEs and HUD

        To maintain our status as an approved lender for Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac and as a HUD-approved mortgagee and issuer of Ginnie Mae securities, we are required to meet and maintain various eligibility criteria from time to time established by each GSE and HUD, such as minimum net worth, operational liquidity and collateral requirements and compliance with reporting requirements. We also are required to originate our loans and perform our loan servicing functions in accordance with the applicable program requirements and guidelines from time to time established by the respective GSE and HUD. If we fail to comply with the requirements of any of these programs, the relevant GSE or HUD may terminate or withdraw our approval. In addition, the GSEs and HUD have the authority under their guidelines to terminate a lender's authority to sell loans to it and service their loans. The loss of one or more of these approvals would have a material adverse impact on us and could result in further disqualification with other counterparties, and we may be required to obtain additional state lender or mortgage banker licensing to originate loans if that status is revoked.

Regulation as an Investment Adviser

        In the future, one or more of our subsidiaries may be required to register as an investment adviser with the SEC under the Investment Advisers Act of 1940 a result of investment management services that it may provide. A registered investment adviser is subject to federal and state laws and regulations primarily intended to benefit the investor or client of the adviser. These laws and regulations include requirements relating to, among other things, fiduciary duties to clients, maintaining an effective compliance program, solicitation agreements, conflicts of interest, record keeping and reporting requirements, disclosure requirements, limitations on agency cross and principal transactions between an investment adviser and its advisory clients and general anti-fraud prohibitions. In addition, these laws and regulations generally grant supervisory agencies and bodies broad administrative powers, including the power to limit or restrict us from conducting our advisory activities in the event we fail to comply with those laws and regulations. Sanctions that may be imposed for a failure to comply with applicable legal requirements include the suspension of individual employees, limitations on our engaging in various advisory activities for specified periods of time, the revocation of registrations, other censures and fines.

Employees

        As of June 30, 2010, we had more than 150 employees nationwide. None of our employees are represented by a union or covered by a collective bargaining agreement. We believe that our relations with our employees are good.

Legal Proceedings

        On February 17, 2010, Capital Funding Group, Inc. ("Capital Funding") filed a lawsuit in the state circuit court of Montgomery County, Maryland against Walker & Dunlop, LLC for alleged breach of contract, unjust enrichment, and unfair competition arising out of an engagement to potentially

69


Table of Contents


refinance a large portfolio of senior healthcare facilities located throughout the United States ("Golden Living Facilities"). Walker & Dunlop, LLC was included in the lawsuit by virtue of its alleged status as a successor to Column, in connection with the January 2009 Column transaction. The plaintiff alleges that a contract existed between the plaintiff and Column and its affiliates whereby the plaintiff provided certain proprietary information to Column and its affiliates in exchange for the right to refinance the Golden Living Facilities. Capital Funding is seeking damages of approximately $30 million or more for each of the three claims in the complaint and injunctive relief for the unfair competition claim.

        We are not aware of any contract between the plaintiff and Column regarding the right to refinance the Golden Living Facilities. Moreover, we believe that Walker & Dunlop, LLC did not assume any of the rights or liabilities related to the original Golden Living Facilities financing from Column. We further believe that Walker & Dunlop, LLC is entitled to indemnification from Column with respect to some or all of the claims arising out of this matter. However, Column has not accepted or rejected our indemnification claim and may not until after the matter has been fully resolved. As a result, we may be required to bear the potentially significant costs of the litigation and any adverse judgment unless and until we are able to prevail on our indemnification claim. Upon our request, however, Column will be required to participate in, or assume the defense of, the lawsuit. There can be no assurance that we will satisfy the requirements for indemnification from Column.

        On May 3, 2010, we answered the amended complaint, denying liability for all three counts, and filed a motion to dismiss the unfair competition claim, which is pending before the court. A trial date for the matter is scheduled for Spring 2011. Walker & Dunlop LLC intends to vigorously defend itself against the allegations, but at this stage of the proceedings, we are unable to predict the outcome of the litigation.

        We may be subject to liability under various other legal actions that are pending or that may be asserted against us in our ordinary course of business.

        We cannot predict the outcome of any pending litigation and may be subject to consequences that could include fines, penalties and other costs, and our reputation and business may be impacted. Our management believes that any liability that could be imposed on us in connection with the disposition of any pending lawsuits would not have a material effect on our business, results of operations, liquidity or financial condition. See "Risk Factors—Risks Relating to Our Business—An unfavorable outcome of litigation pending against us could have a material adverse effect on us."

Facilities

        Our principal headquarters are located in Bethesda, Maryland. As of June 30, 2010, we maintained an additional seven offices across the country, including in: Atlanta, Georgia; Chicago, Illinois; Dallas, Texas; New Orleans, Louisiana; New York, New York; Orange County, California; and Walnut Creek, California. We believe that our facilities are adequate for us to conduct our present business activities.

        All of our office space is leased. The most significant terms of the lease arrangements for our office space are the length of the lease and the amount of the rent. Our leases have terms varying in duration and rent as a result of differences in prevailing market conditions in different geographic locations. We do not believe that any single office lease is material to us. In addition, we believe there is adequate alternative office space available at acceptable rental rates to meet our needs, although adverse movements in rental rates in some markets may negatively affect our results of operations and cash flows when we enter into new leases.

Other Information

        We were formed as a Maryland corporation on July 29, 2010. Our principal executive office is located at 7501 Wisconsin Avenue, Suite 1200, Bethesda, Maryland 20814. Our telephone number is (301) 215-5500. Our web address is www.walkerdunlop.com . The information on, or otherwise accessible through, our website does not constitute a part of this prospectus.

70


Table of Contents


OUR MANAGEMENT

Our Directors, Director Nominees and Executive Officers

        Currently, we have seven directors. Upon completion of this offering, we expect that our board of directors will consist of nine members. Pursuant to our organizational documents, each of our directors is elected by our stockholders to serve until the next annual meeting of our stockholders and until his or her successor is duly elected and qualifies. Our bylaws provide that a majority of the entire board of directors may at any time increase or decrease the number of directors. However, unless our charter and bylaws are amended, the number of directors may never be less than the minimum number required by the Maryland General Corporation Law (the "MGCL") nor more than 15.

        The following table sets forth certain information concerning the individuals who will be our executive officers and directors upon completion of this offering:

Name
  Age   Position
William M. Walker     43   Chairman, President and Chief Executive Officer

Howard W. Smith, III

 

 

51

 

Executive Vice President, Chief Operating Officer and Director

Deborah A. Wilson

 

 

54

 

Senior Vice President, Chief Financial Officer, Secretary and Treasurer

Richard C. Warner

 

 

55

 

Senior Vice President and Chief Underwriter

Mitchell M. Gaynor

 

 

51

 

Director

Richard M. Lucas

 

 

45

 

Director

John Rice

 

 

43

 

Director

Edmund F. Taylor

 

 

50

 

Director(2)

Robert A. Wrzosek

 

 

38

 

Director(2)

 

 

 

 

 

Director Nominee(3)

 

 

 

 

 

Director Nominee(3)

(1)
Independent within the meaning of the NYSE listing standards.

(2)
We have agreed to nominate two Column designees, currently Edmund Taylor and Robert Wrzosek, for election as directors at our 2011 annual meeting of stockholders. In addition, William Walker, our Chairman, President and Chief Executive Officer, and Mallory Walker, the father of William Walker and our former Chairman, have agreed to vote the shares of common stock owned by them for the Column designees at the 2011 annual meeting of stockholders.

(3)
It is expected that this individual will become a director immediately after completion of this offering.

        Set forth below is biographical information for our directors, director nominees and executive officers.

         William M. Walker will serve as our Chairman, President and Chief Executive Officer.            Mr. Walker has been a member of our board since July 2010 and a board member of Walker & Dunlop, LLC or its predecessors since February 2000. In September 2003, Mr. Walker became the executive vice president and chief operating officer of Walker & Dunlop and has been serving as the president of Walker & Dunlop since January 2005 and as the chief executive officer since January 2007.

71


Table of Contents


Prior to joining Walker & Dunlop, Mr. Walker was on the management team at TeleTech, a global business process outsourcing company from 1998 to 2003. At TeleTech, he held several senior management positions, including president of the company's European and Latin American divisions. Prior to TeleTech, Mr. Walker was a consultant at Newbridge Latin America where he was responsible for private equity transactions in the aviation, water, and apparel industries. Prior to Newbridge Latin America, Mr. Walker was the general manager of ALTA, a regional airline based in Argentina, from August 1995 to October 1996. Mr. Walker currently serves as chairman of the board of directors of Transcom Worldwide S.A., a publicly traded European outsourcing company, as well as chairman of the board of directors of the District of Columbia Water and Sewer Authority. Mr. Walker is also a member of the board of directors of Sustainable Technologies Fund, a Swedish clean-tech venture capital firm. He is a member of the Young Presidents Organization, the Mortgage Bankers Association and the Urban Land Institute. Mr. Walker received his Bachelor of Arts in Government from St. Lawrence University and his Masters in Business Administration from Harvard University.

        Mr. Walker brings to our board more than 20 years of leadership experience. Mr. Walker possesses in-depth knowledge of our industry, offers valuable insight into our business and provides the leadership, general management and vision that help us compete successfully.

         Howard W. Smith will serve as our Executive Vice President, Chief Operating Officer and one of our directors. Mr. Smith has been a member of our board since July 2010. Mr. Smith joined Walker & Dunlop in November 1980 and has been a member of the management team since 1988. Mr. Smith has been serving as the executive vice president, chief operating officer and a board member of Walker & Dunlop, LLC or its predecessors since 2004. As Executive Vice President and Chief Operating Officer, Mr. Smith is responsible for our Multifamily, FHA Finance, Healthcare Finance, Underwriting and Asset Management groups. Mr. Smith is a member of the board of directors of the Tudor Place Foundation, the Commercial Real Estate/Multifamily Finance Board of Governors of the Mortgage Bankers Association and the National Multi Housing Council. He is also an advisory council member of the Fannie Mae DUS Peer Group, a group he chaired from 2007 to 2008 and again from 2009 to 2010. Mr. Smith received his Bachelor of Arts in Economics from Washington & Lee University.

        Mr. Smith brings to our board nearly 30 years of experience in the commercial real estate finance industry. He has extensive knowledge of our operations, having spent his entire career at Walker & Dunlop. In his capacity as Chief Operating Officer, Mr. Smith also provides our board with management's perspective on our business operations and conditions, which is crucial to our board's performance of its oversight function.

         Deborah A. Wilson will serve as our Senior Vice President, Chief Financial Officer, Secretary and Treasurer. Ms. Wilson has been serving as the senior vice president and chief financial officer of Walker & Dunlop, LLC or its predecessors since July 2008. As Senior Vice President, Chief Financial Officer, Secretary and Treasurer, Ms. Wilson is responsible for financial reporting, budgeting and accounting, servicing, loan sales, closing and delivery, and, together with the other members of our senior management team, the overall strategic financial direction of our company. Prior to joining Walker & Dunlop, she served as vice president of counterparty risk at Fannie Mae from 2000 to 2008. From 1983 to 1989, she was a member of the financial services audit practice at KPMG LLP and she was a member of KPMG LLP's consulting practice from 1991 to 2000, where her last position was as a partner in the national mortgage banking and real estate consulting practice. At KPMG LLP, she focused on valuation, mergers & acquisitions, and productivity and profitability of commercial/multifamily mortgage banking companies. Ms. Wilson received her Bachelor of Arts in Accounting from Texas A&M University.

         Richard C. Warner will serve as our Senior Vice President and Chief Underwriter. Mr. Warner has been serving as a senior vice president and chief underwriter of Walker & Dunlop, LLC or its predecessors since September 2002. As Senior Vice President and Chief Underwriter, Mr. Warner is

72


Table of Contents


responsible for our portfolio management department, which includes day-to-day management of our Asset Management and Underwriting groups. Prior to joining the company, Mr. Warner held a number of leadership positions with Main America Capital and its successors. From 1994 to 1998, Mr. Warner was the president of Main America Capital, from 1998 to 2000, he was vice president of originations for RFC Commercial, and from 2000 to 2002, he was vice president and branch manager for GMAC Commercial Mortgage. In 1978, Mr. Warner started his career with Canada's Confederation Life Insurance Company, where he held a number of successive positions, ending as mortgage and real estate vice president in 1994. While with Confederation Life Insurance Company, Mr. Warner was a member of the Green Park Financial Board and Loan Committee from 1989 to 1994. Mr. Warner received his Bachelor of Arts in Urban Studies from McGill University.

         Mitchell M. Gaynor will serve as one of our directors. Mr. Gaynor has been a member of our board since July 2010. Mr. Gaynor has served as a board member of Walker & Dunlop, LLC or its predecessors since 1995. Mr. Gaynor also served in various other capacities with Walker & Dunlop since he joined the company in 1987, including as vice president and chief financial officer from 1992 to 1994, senior vice president and chief financial officer from 1994 to 2002, and as interim chief financial officer both from 2005 to 2006 and 2008. Mr. Gaynor has also been a private consultant since 2005. Prior to joining Walker & Dunlop, Mr. Gaynor worked as a product manager for Applied Expert Systems, a financial services software firm, as an analyst for the Saddlebrook Corporation, a bank software company, and as a consultant for ICF, Incorporated, a national consulting firm. Mr. Gaynor received his Bachelor of Science from the Massachusetts Institute of Technology and his Masters in Business Administration from Harvard University.

        Mr. Gaynor brings to our board more than 20 years of industry experience, as well as 15 years of experience as a Walker & Dunlop board member. Mr. Gaynor's in-depth knowledge of our history and his demonstrated financial expertise are assets to our board.

         Richard M. Lucas will serve as one of our directors. Mr. Lucas has been a member of our board since July 2010 and has served as a board member of Walker & Dunlop, LLC since January 2010. Mr. Lucas joined Hilton Worldwide, Inc., a global hospitality company, in May 2008 as executive vice president, general counsel and corporate secretary. Mr. Lucas also serves as a member of Hilton's executive committee. Prior to joining Hilton, Mr. Lucas was a partner at the law firm of Arnold & Porter LLP in Washington, D.C., where he was in private practice for 18 years. At Arnold & Porter, his practice focused on real estate transactions and litigation, primarily in the hospitality and senior living areas. From 2005 to 2008, Mr. Lucas also served as an adjunct faculty member at The George Washington University Law School, where he taught a course on real estate transactions. Mr. Lucas is also a member of the board of directors of the non-profit Juvenile Diabetes Research Foundation Capitol Chapter. Mr. Lucas received his Bachelor of Science in Business Administration from Georgetown University's McDonough School of Business and his Juris Doctor from Yale Law School.

        Mr. Lucas brings to our board two decades of legal experience in real estate transactions and litigation. In addition to his legal acumen, Mr. Lucas brings a strong business perspective to our board due to his executive role at one of the largest companies in the hospitality industry.

         John Rice will serve as one of our directors. Mr. Rice has been a member of our board since July 2010 and has served as a board member of Walker & Dunlop, LLC since January 2010. Mr. Rice serves as chief executive officer of Management Leadership for Tomorrow, a national non-profit organization that he founded in 2001. Management Leadership for Tomorrow equips under-represented minorities with the skills, coaching and relationships that unlock their potential as senior business and community leaders. Prior to Management Leadership for Tomorrow, Mr. Rice was an executive with the National Basketball Association from 1996 to 2000, where he served as managing director of NBA Japan and as director of marketing for Latin America. Before joining the National Basketball Association, Mr. Rice spent four years with the Walt Disney Company in new business development and marketing, and two

73


Table of Contents


years with AT&T. Mr. Rice is also a senior advisor and co-founder of CareerCore, a technology company that provides outsourced career services and mentoring solutions for colleges and corporations. He serves on the Yale University Council, the Board of Visitors of Duke University's Sanford School of Public Policy, and is a member of the Young Presidents' Organization. Mr. Rice received his Bachelor of Arts from Yale University and his Masters in Business Administration from Harvard University.

        Mr. Rice's success with his various entrepreneurial ventures, as well as his many years of marketing and talent development experience, provide our board with valuable business and marketing insights. Additionally, Mr. Rice's leadership in the non-profit sector is consistent with our commitment to community service.

         Edmund F. Taylor will serve as one of our directors. Mr. Taylor has been a member of our board since July 2010 and has served as a board member of Walker & Dunlop, LLC since January 2009. Mr. Taylor is currently a managing director at Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC, where he manages all the global legacy businesses, including commercial real estate in the fixed income department of the bank's investment banking division. Mr. Taylor is a member of the fixed income department's operating committee. Prior to assuming his current role at Credit Suisse, he was chief operating officer of the global securities business in its investment banking division. Before joining Credit Suisse in 1996, Mr. Taylor spent three years in the commercial real estate group at Daiwa Securities America, an investment banking company, where he was a senior trader and deal manager. Prior to that, he spent six years in a variety of roles in Drexel Burnham Lambert's residential mortgage-backed securities business. Mr. Taylor also spent two years at Goldman Sachs where he developed financial models for its commodities business. Mr. Taylor is a member of the Real Estate Roundtable, the Sam Zell Real Estate Institute at the Wharton Graduate School of Business, the American Finance Association and the American Economics Association. Mr. Taylor received his Bachelor of Arts in Economics from Hamilton College and his Masters in Business Administration from the Stern School of Business at New York University.

        Mr. Taylor's in depth knowledge of the real estate industry, his experience with mortgage-backed securities, his senior management experience, and his business affiliations throughout the real estate and investment banking communities provide strong leadership and support to the rest of our board, particularly on capital markets matters.

         Robert A. Wrzosek will serve as one of our directors. Mr. Wrzosek has been a member of our board since July 2010 and has served as a board member of Walker & Dunlop, LLC since November 2009. Mr. Wrzosek is a director in the fixed income department of Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC's investment banking division. At Credit Suisse, Mr. Wrzosek is responsible for the day-to-day operations of Credit Suisse's tax credit equity syndication business and assisting the firm's clients with respect to GSE and HUD financings. Mr. Wrzosek is also responsible for the development and implementation of strategic restructuring or disposition plans related to non-core assets and business units. Prior to joining Credit Suisse in 2006, Mr. Wrzosek was a partner with the law firm of Eichner & Norris PLLC in Washington, D.C. Mr. Wrzosek's legal practice focused on structured financial products, with a specialization in the securitization of tax exempt securities, affordable housing finance and general tax matters. Mr. Wrzosek received a LL.M. in taxation from Georgetown University Law Center, a Juris Doctor from Duke University School of Law, and both a Bachelor of Science and a Bachelor of Arts in Finance and Philosophy, respectively, from Ithaca College.

        Mr. Wrzosek's legal, investment banking and real estate experience, and his familiarity with our core business of originating GSE and HUD loans, provide our board with sound expertise and counsel instrumental to the development and expansion of our company.

74


Table of Contents

Corporate Governance

        We value good corporate governance and have structured our corporate governance in a manner we believe closely aligns our interests with those of our stockholders. Notable features of our corporate governance structure include the following:

    our board of directors is not staggered, with each of our directors subject to re-election annually;

    of the nine persons who will serve on our board of directors upon completion of this offering,                 of our directors have been determined by us to be independent for purposes of the NYSE's corporate governance listing standards and                of our directors will have been determined by us to be independent for purposes of Rule 10A-3 under the Exchange Act;

    we anticipate that at least one of our directors will qualify as an "audit committee financial expert" as defined by the SEC; and

    we do not have a stockholder rights plan or other poison pill.

        We expect that our directors will stay informed about our business by attending meetings of our board of directors and its committees and through supplemental reports and communications. Our independent directors will meet regularly in executive sessions without the presence of our corporate officers or non-independent directors.

Board Committees

        Upon the completion of this offering, our board of directors will establish three standing committees: an audit committee, a compensation committee, and a nominating and corporate governance committee, each comprised of independent directors. Their principal functions are briefly described below. Our board of directors may from time to time establish other committees to facilitate our management.

Audit Committee

        Upon completion of this offering, our audit committee will consist of three of our independent directors. We expect that the chairman of our audit committee will qualify as an "audit committee financial expert" as that term is defined by the applicable SEC regulations and NYSE corporate governance listing standards. We expect that our board of directors will determine that each of the audit committee members is "financially literate" as that term is defined by the NYSE corporate governance listing standards. Prior to the completion of this offering, we expect to adopt an audit committee charter, which will detail the principal functions of the audit committee, including oversight related to:

    our accounting and financial reporting processes;

    the integrity of our consolidated financial statements and financial reporting process;

    our systems of disclosure controls and procedures and internal control over financial reporting;

    our compliance with financial, legal and regulatory requirements;

    the evaluation of the qualifications, independence and performance of our independent registered public accounting firm;

    the performance of our internal audit function; and

    our overall risk profile.

        The audit committee will also be responsible for engaging an independent registered public accounting firm, reviewing with the independent registered public accounting firm the plans and results

75


Table of Contents


of the audit engagement, approving professional services provided by the independent registered public accounting firm, including all audit and non-audit services, reviewing the independence of the independent registered public accounting firm, considering the range of audit and non-audit fees and reviewing the adequacy of our internal accounting controls. The audit committee also will prepare the audit committee report required by SEC regulations to be included in our annual proxy statement.

Compensation Committee

        Upon completion of this offering, our compensation committee will consist of three of our independent directors. Prior to the completion of this offering, we expect to adopt a compensation committee charter, which will detail the principal functions of the compensation committee, including:

    reviewing and approving on an annual basis the corporate goals and objectives relevant to our executive officers' compensation, evaluating our executive officers' performance in light of such goals and objectives and determining and approving the remuneration of our executive officers based on such evaluation;

    reviewing and approving the compensation of our executive officers, subject to the terms and conditions of any pre-existing employment agreements;

    reviewing our executive compensation policies and plans;

    implementing and administering our incentive and equity-based compensation plans;

    determining the number and terms of equity awards to be granted to our directors, executive officers and other employees pursuant to these plans;

    assisting management in complying with our proxy statement and annual report disclosure requirements;

    producing a report on executive compensation to be included in our annual proxy statement; and

    reviewing, evaluating and recommending changes, if appropriate, to the remuneration for directors.

Nominating and Corporate Governance Committee

        Upon completion of this offering, our nominating and corporate governance committee will consist of three of our independent directors. Prior to the completion of this offering, we expect to adopt a nominating and corporate governance committee charter, which will detail the principal functions of the nominating and corporate governance committee, including:

    identifying and recommending to the full board of directors qualified candidates for election as directors and recommending nominees for election as directors at the annual meeting of stockholders;

    developing and recommending to the board of directors corporate governance guidelines and implementing and monitoring such guidelines;

    reviewing and making recommendations on matters involving the general operation of the board of directors, including board size and composition, and committee composition and structure;

    recommending to the board of directors nominees for each committee of the board of directors;

76


Table of Contents

    annually facilitating the assessment of the board of directors' performance as a whole and of the individual directors, as required by applicable law, regulations and the NYSE corporate governance listing standards; and

    overseeing the board of directors' evaluation of management.

Code of Business Conduct and Ethics

        Upon completion of this offering, our board of directors will establish a code of business conduct and ethics that applies to our officers, directors and employees. Among other matters, our code of business conduct and ethics will be designed to deter wrongdoing and to promote:

    honest and ethical conduct, including the ethical handling of actual or apparent conflicts of interest between personal and professional relationships;

    full, fair, accurate, timely and understandable disclosure in our SEC reports and other public communications;

    compliance with applicable governmental laws, rules and regulations;

    prompt internal reporting of violations of the code to appropriate persons identified in the code; and

    accountability for adherence to the code.

        Any waiver of the code of business conduct and ethics for our executive officers or directors will require approval by a majority of our independent directors, and any such waiver will require prompt disclosure as required by law or NYSE regulations.

Compensation Discussion and Analysis

    Compensation Philosophy

        We believe that the primary goals of executive compensation are to retain our existing executive team, provide incentives to grow the company and increase the firm's value to stockholders, and attract new executives who will further enable the company's growth through broadening our management talent.

        Upon completion of this offering, our newly established compensation committee of the board of directors will be responsible for overseeing our compensation program. Although we anticipate that the compensation committee will adhere to the compensation philosophy described above, it is possible that the compensation committee could develop a compensation philosophy, adopt compensation elements or implement such philosophy or elements, in each case in a manner different than that developed, adopted or implemented by Walker & Dunlop, LLC and our current board of directors.

    Elements of Compensation

        Following the consummation of the offering, executive compensation will consist of the following elements, each of which satisfies one of more of our alignment, performance and retention objectives:

    Annual Base Salary.   Base salary will be designed to compensate our named executive officers at a fixed level of compensation that serves as core compensation for the industry knowledge, experience and management skills they apply every day. In determining base salaries, we expect that our compensation committee will consider each executive's role and responsibility, unique skills, future potential with our company, salary levels for similar positions at comparable firms and internal pay equity.

77


Table of Contents

    Cash Bonus.   Cash bonuses will be designed to incentivize our named executive officers at a variable level of compensation that is "at risk," based on the performance of both the company and such individual. In connection with our cash bonus program, we expect that our compensation committee will determine annual and/or long-term performance criteria that change with the needs of our business. We expect our compensation committee to also decide whether the cash bonus will be paid based on the achievement of specific, pre-established financial and operational objectives with formulaic payouts or on the basis of a subjective review of performance with discretionary payouts.

    Equity Awards.   We will provide equity awards pursuant to our Equity Incentive Plan. Equity awards will be designed to reward our named executive officers for long-term stockholder value creation. In determining equity awards, we anticipate that our compensation committee will take into account the company's overall financial performance as well as its performance versus competitor firms. The awards expected to be made under our Equity Incentive Plan in 2010 concurrent with this offering will be granted to recognize such individuals' efforts on our behalf in connection with our formation and this offering, to ensure their alignment with our stockholder's interests, and to provide a retention element to their compensation.

    Retirement Savings Opportunities.   All eligible employees will be able to participate in a 401(k) Retirement Savings Plan, or 401(k) plan. We intend to provide this plan to help our employees save some amount of their cash compensation for retirement in a tax efficient manner. Under the 401(k) plan, employees will be eligible to defer a portion of their salary, and we, at our discretion, may make a matching contribution and/or a profit sharing contribution. We currently do not intend to provide an option for our employees to invest in our stock through the 401(k) plan.

    Health and Welfare Benefits.   We intend to provide to all eligible employees a competitive benefits package, which is expected to include health and welfare benefits, such as medical, dental, disability insurance, and life insurance benefits. The plans under which these benefits will be offered are not expected to discriminate in scope, terms or operation in favor of officers and will be available to all eligible employees.

    Perquisites and Other Benefits.   As a general matter, we do not intend to provide perquisites and other benefits to our named executive officers with an aggregate value in excess of $10,000, because we believe that we can provide better incentives for desired performance with compensation in the forms described above. We recognize, however, that from time to time, perquisites and other benefits may directly or indirectly serve our business purpose, for example, by helping to make our named executive officers more available to us and to maximize their time and attention.

    Compensation Policies

        We do not currently have any formal policies regarding common stock ownership or the allocation of compensation between cash and non-cash components, but encourage our named executive officers to own and hold our common stock to ensure sustained alignment of their interests with those of stockholders. We have not adopted any policies with respect to long-term versus currently-paid compensation, but feel that both elements are necessary for achieving our compensation objectives. Currently paid compensation provides financial stability for each of our named executive officers and immediate reward for superior company and individual performance, while long-term compensation rewards achievement of strategic long-term objectives and contributes towards overall stockholder value.

        Section 162(m) of the Internal Revenue Code generally limits the tax deductibility of compensation paid by a public company to its chief executive officer and certain other highly compensated executive

78


Table of Contents


officers to $1 million in the year the compensation becomes taxable to the executive. There is an exception to the limit on deductibility for performance-based compensation that meets certain requirements. While we consider the impact of this and other tax rules when developing and implementing our executive compensation programs, we also believe that it is important to preserve flexibility in administering compensation programs in a manner designed to promote varying corporate goals. Accordingly, we have not adopted a policy that all compensation must qualify as deductible under Section 162(m) or any other tax rule.

    Role of Board of Directors and Management

        Once our new compensation committee is fully constituted, we anticipate that they will consult with outside compensation consultants from time to time, as necessary, to make further executive compensation decisions. We also anticipate that the Compensation Committee will consider the recommendations of Mr. Walker, our Chairman, President and Chief Executive Officer, regarding any company and individual performance targets, assessments of executive performance and compensation levels generally for our named executive officers. Mr. Walker may discuss his own individual performance with the Compensation Committee and make recommendations regarding his own compensation, but the Compensation Committee will make the final determination in an executive session without Mr. Walker being present, as required by our Compensation Committee charter. Senior members of the human resources, finance, tax and accounting departments may also provide input to the Compensation Committee.

        Based on our compensation philosophy, objectives and other considerations, the board of directors approved the following base salaries for each of our named executive officers, to be effective upon consummation of this offering:

Name
  Base Salary ($)  

William M. Walker

  $    

Howard W. Smith, III

  $    

Deborah A. Wilson

  $    

Richard C. Warner

  $    

        Each named executive officer may also receive a cash bonus at the discretion of the compensation committee.

        In addition, each named executive officer is eligible to participate in the 2010 Long-Term Incentive Plan. Up to 15% of our annualized base payroll as of January 2010 will be made available to a cash bonus pool for payment of bonuses to eligible employees, including our named executive officers. The bonus pool will be funded following completion of the 2010 fiscal year at (i) 100% of the available bonus amount if our adjusted gross income ("AGI") meets or exceeds our target AGI established by our compensation committee, (ii) 50% if AGI is 90% or more but less than 100% of our target AGI, and (iii) 25% if AGI is 80% or more but less than 90% of our target AGI. The bonus pool will not be funded if AGI is less than 80% of our target AGI. Each of our named executive officers will earn a

79


Table of Contents


bonus award equal to their target bonus amount, as set forth below, multiplied by the percentage of the bonus pool funded:

Name
  Target Bonus
Award (% of
2010 Base
Salary)
 

William M. Walker

      %

Howard W. Smith, III

      %

Deborah A. Wilson

      %

Richard C. Warner

      %

        Amounts funded into the bonus pool will be paid out over time, subject to each participant remaining an employee in good standing and the company's achievement of additional earnings targets as follows:

Date
  Payment
Amount
(as a % of
bonus pool)
  Earnings Target
6 months after end of 2010     20%   None

18 months after end of 2010

 

 

30%

 

2011 AGI must meet or exceed 2010 target AGI

30 months after end of 2010

 

 

50%

 

2012 AGI must meet or exceed 2010 target AGI

        The Long-Term Incentive Plan allows for the payment of additional discretionary bonuses of up to 10% of the amount by which our AGI exceeds the target AGI for 2010.

        We believe that the Long-Term Incentive Plan creates strong incentives for our named executive officers and other employees to perform at a high level individually and contribute towards overall company performance. We also believe the plan provides appropriate incentives for long-term, and not just short-term, performance.

        Concurrently with this offering, our named executive officers will be granted options to purchase an aggregate of                        shares of our common stock and                        shares of restricted stock to recognize such individuals' efforts on our behalf in connection with our formation and this offering, to ensure their alignment with our stockholder's interests, and to provide a retention element to their compensation. The individual grants are set forth below:

Name
  Options   Restricted
Stock

William M. Walker

       

Howard W. Smith, III

       

Deborah A. Wilson

       

Richard C. Warner

       

        These compensation packages are reflected, in part, in negotiated employment agreements that we will enter into with each of our named executive officers. The employment agreements with the named executive officers will also include severance and change-in-control provisions. See "—Employment Agreements" and "—Potential Payments Upon Termination or Change-in-Control" for a description of specific terms.

80


Table of Contents

        Until consummation of the formation transactions and this offering, Messrs. Walker, Smith, Warner and Ms. Wilson have been executive officers of Walker & Dunlop, LLC. Compensation has historically consisted of a base salary, an annual discretionary bonus and a long-term incentive bonus. Because Walker & Dunlop, LLC is a private company, equity was not a component of compensation, although, equity in Walker & Dunlop, LLC, or its predecessors, has been sold to the named executive officers over the past decade.

        Decisions regarding base salaries and annual discretionary bonuses for executive officers of Walker & Dunlop, LLC were made by Mr. Walker, our Chairman, President and Chief Executive Officer, acting on behalf of the board, or a committee of the board, based on a combination of considerations, including individual past performance, company performance, market competition for executives and our long-term executive retention objectives. The board of managers, or a committee of the board, considered the recommendations of Mr. Walker, our Chairman, President and Chief Executive Officer, regarding company and individual performance measures to be established for the long-term incentive bonus program and assessments of executive performance. Mr. Walker discussed his own individual performance with the board, or a committee of the board, and made recommendations regarding his own compensation, but the board, or a committee of the board, made the final determination in an executive session.

        Base salaries were unchanged in 2009 from 2008 for executive officers. Further, Mr. Walker's salary was unchanged between 2005 and 2009. In making discretionary bonuses, the board, or a committee of the board, recognized the company's strong performance in 2009, individual contributions to the company's performance and the need to reward such performance. The board also recognized the need to encourage long-term performance and had earlier established a 2009 long-term incentive bonus program for executives and other employees. Amounts under the long-term performance program are determined in accordance with incentive deferred bonus compensation agreements that Walker & Dunlop, LLC entered into with each of its executive officers. Pursuant to these agreements, 25% of the amount by which Walker & Dunlop, LLC's adjusted net income exceeds the targeted adjusted net income for the stated base year is available, on a delayed contingent basis, for payment of incentive bonuses to all employees who are eligible to participate. Each eligible employee, including executive officers, receives his or her allocated portion of such pool for such stated base year, but only if the aggregate adjusted net income of Walker & Dunlop, LLC for the three-year period, beginning with the base year, exceeds the aggregate targeted adjusted net income for the same three-year period. For 2009, Walker & Dunlop, LLC's adjusted net income exceeded the targeted adjusted net income established by the company. However, the bonus amount for 2009 will not become payable until early 2012 and only if the aggregate adjusted net income for years 2009 through 2011 exceeds the aggregate targeted adjusted net income. See "—2009 Grants of Plan-Based Awards" and "—2009 Summary of Compensation Table."

        Upon consummation of the formation transactions and this offering, we will assume all obligations of Walker & Dunlop, LLC under existing deferred bonus compensation arrangements for compensation amounts accrued for prior years but payable in future years, and all executive officers of Walker & Dunlop, Inc. will cease to be employees of Walker & Dunlop, LLC and will cease to receive any compensation from Walker & Dunlop, LLC.

81


Table of Contents

Executive Compensation

        The following table sets forth the compensation paid to or earned by our named executive officers in their capacity as executive officers of Walker & Dunlop, LLC during 2009:


2009 Summary Compensation Table

Name and Principal Position
  Salary
($)
  Bonus
($)
  Non-equity Incentive Plan Compensation
($)
  All Other Compensation
($)
  Total
($)
 

William M. Walker
Chairman, President and Chief Executive Officer

  $ 300,000   $ 400,000   $ 402,831(1)   $ 4,500(2)   $ 1,107,331  

Howard W. Smith, III
Executive Vice President, Chief Operating Officer, and Director

 
$

250,000
 
$

325,000
 
$

402,831(1)
 
$

4,500(2)
 
$

982,331
 

Deborah A. Wilson
Senior Vice President, Chief Financial Officer, Secretary and Treasurer

 
$

250,000
 
$

212,500
 
$

193,359(1)
 
$

4,500(2)
 
$

660,359
 

Richard C. Warner
Senior Vice President and Chief Underwriter

 
$

205,000
 
$

250,000
 
$

193,359(1)
 
$

4,500(2)
 
$

652,859
 

(1)
See "—Narrative Disclosures to Summary Compensation and Grants and Plan-Based Awards Tables."

(2)
Represents company's contribution to the executive's 401(k) plan.


2009 Grants of Plan-Based Awards

Name
  Grant Date   Threshold
($)
  Estimated Possible Payouts
Under Non-Equity Incentive
Plan Awards(1)
Target
($)
  Maximum
($)

William M. Walker

    April 30, 2009   $ 0   $ 402,831   N/A

Howard W. Smith, III

    April 30, 2009   $ 0   $ 402,831   N/A

Deborah A. Wilson

    April 30, 2009   $ 0   $ 193,359   N/A

Richard C. Warner

    April 30, 2009   $ 0   $ 193,359   N/A

(1)
See "— Narrative Disclosures to Summary Compensation and Grants and Plan-Based Awards Tables."

        The 2009 non-equity incentive plan compensation amount in the Summary Compensation Table represents the amount of incentive cash bonus that each named executive officer is eligible to receive for 2009, in accordance with the incentive deferred bonus compensation agreements that Walker & Dunlop, LLC entered into with each of the named executive officers in April 2009. The amounts reflected as target amounts in the Grants of Plan-Based Awards Table represent target amounts that

82


Table of Contents

could be earned by each named executive officer for 2009, depending on the company's 2010 and 2011 operating results. Named executive officers will receive the targeted amount only if our aggregate adjusted net income for years 2009 through 2011 exceeds targeted aggregate adjusted net income for years 2009 through 2011. Otherwise, named executive officers will receive no incentive bonus for 2009. The maximum amount is "N/A" because named executive officers cannot receive any amount other than the targeted amount.

        Prior to the completion of this offering, our board of directors will adopt, and our stockholder is expected to approve, our 2010 Equity Incentive Plan, or Equity Incentive Plan, for the purpose of attracting and retaining non-employee directors, executive officers and other key employees and service providers, including officers, employees and service providers of our subsidiaries and affiliates, and to stimulate their efforts toward our continued success, long-term growth and profitability. The Equity Incentive Plan provides for the grant of options to purchase shares of common stock, share awards (including restricted shares and share units), stock appreciation rights, performance shares, performance units and other equity-based awards. We have reserved a total of                        shares of common stock for issuance pursuant to the Equity Incentive Plan, subject to certain adjustments set forth in the plan. This summary is qualified in its entirety by the detailed provisions of the Equity Incentive Plan, which is filed as an exhibit to the registration statement of which this prospectus is a part.

        Section 162(m) of the Internal Revenue Code limits publicly held companies to an annual deduction for U.S. federal income tax purposes of $1,000,000 for compensation paid to each of their chief executive officer and their three highest compensated executive officers (other than the chief executive officer or the chief financial officer) determined at the end of each year, referred to as covered employees. However, performance-based compensation is excluded from this limitation. The Equity Incentive Plan is designed to permit the compensation committee to grant awards that qualify as performance-based for purposes of satisfying the conditions of Section 162(m), but it is not required under the Equity Incentive Plan that awards qualify for this exception.

        Administration of the Equity Incentive Plan.     The Equity Incentive Plan will be administered by our compensation committee, and the compensation committee will determine all terms of awards under the Equity Incentive Plan. Our compensation committee will also determine who will receive awards under the Equity Incentive Plan, the type of award and its terms and conditions and the number of shares of common stock subject to the award, if the award is equity-based. The compensation committee will also interpret the provisions of the Equity Incentive Plan. During any period of time in which we do not have a compensation committee, the Equity Incentive Plan will be administered by our board of directors or another committee appointed by the board of directors. References below to the compensation committee include a reference to the board of directors or another committee appointed by the board of directors for those periods in which the board of directors or such other committee appointed by the board of directors is acting.

        Eligibility.     All of our employees and the employees of our subsidiaries and affiliates are eligible to receive awards under the Equity Incentive Plan. In addition, our non-employee directors and consultants and advisors who perform services for us and our subsidiaries and affiliates may receive awards under the Equity Incentive Plan, other than incentive stock options. Each member of our compensation committee that administers the Equity Incentive Plan will be both a "non-employee director" within the meaning of Rule 16b-3 of the Exchange Act, and an "outside director" within the meaning of Section 162(m) of the Internal Revenue Code.

83


Table of Contents

        Share Authorization.     As stated above, the number of shares of common stock that may be issued under the Equity Incentive Plan, consisting of authorized but unissued shares, is equal to                        . In connection with share splits, dividends, recapitalizations and certain other events, our board will make proportionate adjustments that it deems appropriate in the aggregate number of shares of common stock that may be issued under the Equity Incentive Plan and the terms of outstanding awards. If any options or share appreciation rights terminate, expire or are canceled, forfeited, exchanged or surrendered without having been exercised or paid or if any share awards, performance shares, performance units or other equity-based awards are forfeited or expire or otherwise terminate without the delivery of any shares of common stock or are settled in cash, the shares of common stock subject to such awards will again be available for purposes of the Equity Incentive Plan.

        The maximum number of shares of common stock subject to options or share appreciation rights that can be issued under the Equity Incentive Plan to any person is                        shares in any single calendar year (or                        in the year that the person is first employed). The maximum number of shares that can be issued under the Equity Incentive Plan to any person other than pursuant to an option or share appreciation right is                        shares in any single calendar year (or                        in the year that the person is first employed). The maximum amount that may be earned as an annual incentive award or other cash award in any calendar year by any one person is $             (or                        in the year that the person is first employed) and the maximum amount that may be earned as a performance award or other cash award in respect of a performance period by any one person is                                     (or                        for a performance period beginning with or immediately after the year that the person is first employed).

        The initial awards described above will become effective concurrently with this offering.

        Options.     The Equity Incentive Plan authorizes our compensation committee to grant incentive stock options (under Section 421 of the Internal Revenue Code) and options that do not qualify as incentive stock options. The exercise price of each option will be determined by the compensation committee, provided that the price cannot be less than 100% of the fair market value of the shares of common stock on the date on which the option is granted. If we were to grant incentive stock options to any 10% stockholder, the exercise price may not be less than 110% of the fair market value of our shares of common stock on the date of grant.

        The term of an option cannot exceed 10 years from the date of grant. If we were to grant incentive stock options to any 10% stockholder, the term cannot exceed five years from the date of grant. The compensation committee determines at what time or times each option may be exercised and the period of time, if any, after retirement, death, disability or termination of employment during which options may be exercised. Options may be made exercisable in installments. The exercisability of options may be accelerated by the compensation committee. The exercise price of an option may not be amended or modified after the grant of the option, and an option may not be surrendered in consideration of or exchanged for a grant of a new option having an exercise price below that of the option which was surrendered or exchanged without stockholder approval.

        The exercise price for any option or the purchase price for restricted shares is generally payable (i) in cash, (ii) by certified check, (iii) to the extent the award agreement provides, by the surrender of shares of common stock (or attestation of ownership of shares of common stock) with an aggregate fair market value on the date on which the option is exercised, of the exercise price, or (iv) to the extent the award agreement provides, by payment through a broker in accordance with procedures established by the Federal Reserve.

        Share Awards.     The Equity Incentive Plan also provides for the grant of share awards (which includes restricted shares and share units). A share award is an award of shares of common stock that may be subject to restrictions on transferability and other restrictions as our compensation committee

84


Table of Contents


determines in its sole discretion on the date of grant. The restrictions, if any, may lapse over a specified period of time or through the satisfaction of conditions, in installments or otherwise, as our compensation committee may determine. A participant who receives a share award will have all of the rights of a stockholder as to those shares, including, without limitation, the right to vote and the right to receive dividends or distributions on the shares, except that the board of directors may require any dividends to be reinvested in shares. During the period, if any, when share awards are non-transferable or forfeitable, a participant is prohibited from selling, transferring, pledging, exchanging, hypothecating or otherwise disposing of his or her award shares. We will retain custody of the certificates and a participant must deliver a stock power to us for each share award.

        Share Appreciation Rights.     The Equity Incentive Plan authorizes our compensation committee to grant share appreciation rights that provide the recipient with the right to receive, upon exercise of the share appreciation right, cash, shares of common stock or a combination of the two. The amount that the recipient will receive upon exercise of the share appreciation right generally will equal the excess of the fair market value of our common stock on the date of exercise over the shares' fair market value on the date of grant. Share appreciation rights will become exercisable in accordance with terms determined by our compensation committee. Share appreciation rights may be granted in tandem with an option grant or independently from an option grant. The term of a share appreciation right cannot exceed 10 years from the date of grant.

        Performance Units.     The Equity Incentive Plan also authorizes our compensation committee to grant performance units. Performance units represent the participant's right to receive a compensation amount, based on the value of the shares of common stock, if performance goals established by the compensation committee are met. Our compensation committee will determine the applicable performance period, the performance goals and such other conditions that apply to the performance unit. Performance goals may relate to our financial performance or the financial performance of our operating units, the participant's performance or such other criteria determined by the compensation committee. If the performance goals are met, performance units will be paid in cash, shares of common stock or a combination thereof.

        Bonuses.     Cash performance bonuses payable under the Equity Incentive Plan may be based on the attainment of performance goals that are established by the compensation committee and relate to one or more performance criteria described in the plan. Cash performance bonuses, for which there is no minimum, must be based upon objectively determinable bonus formulas established in accordance with the plan, as determined by the board.

        Dividend Equivalents.     Our compensation committee may grant dividend equivalents in connection with the grant of any equity-based award. Dividend equivalents may be paid currently or accrued as contingent cash obligations and may be payable in cash, shares of common stock or a combination of the two. Our compensation committee will determine the terms of any dividend equivalents.

        Other Equity-Based Awards.     Our compensation committee may grant other types of equity-based awards under the Equity Incentive Plan. Other equity-based awards are payable in cash, shares of common stock or other equity, or a combination thereof, and may be restricted or unrestricted, as determined by our compensation committee. The terms and conditions that apply to other equity-based awards are determined by the compensation committee.

        Change in Control.     If we experience a change in control in which equity-based awards that are not exercised prior to the change in control will not be assumed or continued by the surviving entity, unless otherwise provided in an award: (i) all restricted shares will vest, and all share units will vest and the underlying shares will be delivered immediately before the change in control, and (ii) at the board of directors' discretion either all options and share appreciation rights will become exercisable            

85


Table of Contents


days before the change in control and terminate upon the consummation of the change in control, or all options, share appreciation rights, restricted shares and share units will be cashed out before the change in control. In the case of performance shares, if more than half of the performance period has lapsed, the performance shares will be converted into restricted shares based on actual performance to date. If less than half of the performance period has lapsed, or if actual performance is not determinable, the performance shares will be converted into restricted shares assuming target performance has been achieved.

        Amendment; Termination.     Our board of directors may amend or terminate the Equity Incentive Plan at any time; provided that no amendment may adversely impair the benefits of participants with outstanding awards. Our stockholders must approve any amendment if such approval is required under applicable law or NYSE regulations. Our stockholders also must approve any amendment that changes the no re-pricing provisions of the plan. Unless terminated sooner by our board of directors or extended with stockholder approval, the Equity Incentive Plan will terminate on the tenth anniversary of the adoption of the plan.

        We intend to enter into employment agreements with each of our named executive officers, which will become effective upon completion of the offering. Our employment agreements will provide for the following:

        Each of these executives will be entitled to receive certain benefits under the agreements if (i) we terminate the executive's employment without cause, (ii) the executive resigns for good reason or (iii) there is a termination without cause within a year following a change of control.

        The amount of compensation payable to our named executive officers upon voluntary termination for good reason (including for changes of control), voluntary termination without good reason, involuntary termination without cause, termination with cause and termination in the event of permanent disability or death of the executive is set forth above in the section of this prospectus entitled "Executive Compensation—Employment Agreements." The other benefits will be conditioned upon the executive's continued compliance with the non-competition, non-solicitation, confidentiality and other covenants contained in the employment agreement. All of the foregoing benefits are conditioned upon the executive's or his or legal representative's execution of a general release of claims.

86


Table of Contents

        The following table summarizes the potential cash payments and estimated equivalent cash value of benefits that will be generally owed to the members of our senior management team under the terms of their employment agreements described above upon termination of those agreements under various scenarios as of December 31, 2010:

Name
  Without Cause/
For Good Reason
  For Good Reason upon
a Change in Control
  Death/Disability  

William M. Walker

  $     $     $    

Howard W. Smith, III

  $     $     $    

Deborah A. Wilson

  $     $     $    

Richard C. Warner

  $     $     $    

Director Compensation

        Prior to the formation transactions and the completion of this offering, each of our directors served as a member of the board of managers of Walker & Dunlop, LLC. Each non-employee member of the board received $2,500 per quarterly board meeting in 2009 and the first six months of 2010.


2009 Director Compensation

Name and Principal Position
  Fees Earned
or Paid in
Cash
($)
  Total
($)
 

Mitchell M. Gaynor

    10,000     10,000  

Richard M. Lucas

    0     0  

John Rice

    0     0  

Edmund F. Taylor

    0     0  

Robert A. Wrzosek

    0     0  

        Following completion of the formation transactions and this offering, we intend to approve and implement a new compensation program for our non-employee directors, including each of the independent director nominees, that consists of annual retainer fees and equity awards. In the future, each non-employee director will receive an annual base fee for his or her services of $            , payable in quarterly installments in conjunction with quarterly meetings of the board of directors, and an annual award of $            of            shares of restricted stock, which will vest on the            -year anniversary of the date of grant, subject to the director's continued service on our board of directors. In addition, each non-employee director who serves on the audit, compensation and nominating and corporate governance committees will receive an annual cash retainer of $            respectively, and the chairs of the audit, compensation and nominating and corporate governance committees will receive an additional annual cash retainer of $            respectively. We will also reimburse each of our directors for their travel expenses incurred in connection with their attendance at full board of directors and committee meetings.

        Concurrently with this offering, we will grant            shares of our restricted stock and          options to purchase shares of our common stock to each of our non-employee directors, pursuant to our Equity Incentive Plan. See "—Equity Incentive Plan." These awards of restricted stock will vest            .

Indemnification Agreements

        We intend to enter into indemnification agreements with each of our executive officers and directors that will obligate us to indemnify them to the maximum extent permitted by Maryland law. The form of indemnification agreement provides that if a director or executive officer is a party or is

87


Table of Contents


threatened to be made a party to any proceeding by reason of such director's or executive officer's status as our director, officer or employee, we must indemnify such director or executive officer for all expenses and liabilities actually and reasonably incurred by him or her, or on his or her behalf, unless it has been established that:

provided, however, that we will have no obligation to (i) indemnify such director or executive officer for a proceeding by or in the right of our company for expenses and liabilities actually and reasonably incurred by him or her, or on his or her behalf, if it has been adjudged that such director or executive officer is liable to us with respect to such proceeding or (ii) indemnify or advance expenses of such director or executive officer for a proceeding brought by such director or executive officer against our company, except for a proceeding brought to enforce indemnification under Section 2-418 of the MGCL or as otherwise provided by our bylaws, our charter, a resolution of the board of directors or an agreement approved by the board of directors. Under the MGCL, a Maryland corporation may not indemnify a director or officer in a suit by or in the right of the corporation in which the director or officer was adjudged liable on the basis that a personal benefit was improperly received.

        Upon application by one of our directors or executive officers to a court of appropriate jurisdiction, the court may order indemnification of such director or executive officer if:

        Notwithstanding, and without limiting, any other provisions of the indemnification agreements, if a director or executive officer is a party or is threatened to be made a party to any proceeding by reason of such director's or executive officer's status as our director, officer or employee, and such director or executive officer is successful, on the merits or otherwise, as to one or more but less than all claims, issues or matters in such proceeding, we must indemnify such director or executive officer for all expenses actually and reasonably incurred by him or her, or on his or her behalf, in connection with each successfully resolved claim, issue or matter, including any claim, issue or matter in such a proceeding that is terminated by dismissal, with or without prejudice.

        We must pay all indemnifiable expenses in advance of the final disposition of any proceeding if the director or executive officer furnishes us with a written affirmation of the director's or executive officer's good faith belief that the standard of conduct necessary for indemnification by us has been

88


Table of Contents


met and a written undertaking to reimburse us if a court of competent jurisdiction determines that the director or executive officer is not entitled to indemnification.

        Our charter and bylaws obligate us, to the maximum extent permitted by Maryland law, to indemnify and to pay or reimburse reasonable expenses in advance of final disposition of a proceeding to (1) any of our present or former directors or officers who is made or threatened to be made a party to the proceeding by reason of his or her service in that capacity or (2) any individual who, while serving as our director or officer and at our request, serves or has served another corporation, partnership, joint venture, trust, employee benefit plan or any other enterprise as a director, officer, partner or trustee of such corporation, partnership, joint venture, trust, employee benefit plan or other enterprise, and who is made or threatened to be made a party to the proceeding by reason of his or her service in that capacity.

Rule 10b5-1 Sales Plans

        Our directors and executive officers may adopt written plans, known as Rule 10b5-1 plans, in which they will contract with a broker to buy or sell shares of our common stock on a periodic basis. Under a Rule 10b5-1 plan, a broker executes trades pursuant to parameters established by the director or executive officer when entering into the plan, without further direction from them. The director or officer may amend a Rule 10b5-1 plan in some circumstances and may terminate a plan at any time. Our directors and executive officers also may buy or sell additional shares outside of a Rule 10b5-1 plan when they are not in possession of material nonpublic information subject to compliance with the terms of our insider trading policy. Prior to the 365-day anniversary of the date of this prospectus (subject to potential extension or early termination), the sale of any shares under such plan would be subject to compliance with the lock-up agreement that the director or executive officer has entered into with the underwriters.

Compensation Committee Interlocks and Insider Participation

        Upon completion of this offering, we do not anticipate that any of our executive officers will serve as a member of a board of directors or compensation committee, or other committee serving an equivalent function, of any other entity that has one or more of its executive officers serving as a member of our board of directors or compensation committee.

89


Table of Contents


PRINCIPAL AND SELLING STOCKHOLDERS

        Immediately prior to the completion of this offering, there will be                        shares of our common stock outstanding and 10 stockholders of record, after giving effect to the formation transactions. The following table sets forth certain information, prior to and after this offering, regarding the ownership of each class of our capital stock by:

        In accordance with SEC rules, each listed person's beneficial ownership includes:

        Unless otherwise indicated, the address of each named person is c/o Walker & Dunlop, Inc., 7501 Wisconsin Avenue, Suite 1200, Bethesda, Maryland 20814. No shares of common stock beneficially owned by any named executive officer, director or director nominee have been pledged as security.

 
  Common Stock Outstanding  
 
  Immediately Prior to
this Offering
  Immediately After
this Offering(1)
 
Beneficial Owner
  Shares
Owned
  Percentage   Shares
Owned
  Percentage  

William M. Walker(2)

                 

Howard W. Smith, III(3)

                 

Deborah A. Wilson(4)

                 

Richard C. Warner(5)

                 

Mitchell M. Gaynor(6)

                 

Richard M. Lucas(7)

                 

John Rice(8)

                 

Edmund F. Taylor(9)

                 

Robert A. Wrzosek(10)

                 

Mallory Walker(11)

                 

Taylor Walker(12)

                 

Column Guaranteed LLC(13)

                 

All directors, director nominees and executive officers as a group (11 persons)

                %

*
Represents less than 1.0% of the common stock outstanding upon the completion of this offering.

(1)
Does not reflect shares of common stock reserved for issuance upon exercise of the underwriters' overallotment option.

90


Table of Contents

(2)
Represents                  shares of common stock received by Mr. Walker in connection with the formation transactions and                  shares of restricted stock granted to Mr. Walker concurrently with this offering.

(3)
Represents                  shares of common stock received by Mr. Smith in connection with the formation transactions and                  shares of restricted stock granted to Mr. Smith concurrently with this offering.

(4)
Represents                  shares of common stock received by Ms. Wilson in connection with the formation transactions and                  shares of restricted stock granted to Ms. Wilson concurrently with this offering.

(5)
Represents                  shares of common stock received by Mr. Warner in connection with the formation transactions and                  shares of restricted stock granted to Mr. Warner concurrently with this offering.

(6)
Represents                  shares of restricted stock to be granted to Mr. Gaynor concurrently with this offering.

(7)
Represents                  shares of restricted stock to be granted to Mr. Lucas concurrently with this offering.

(8)
Represents                  shares of restricted stock to be granted to Mr. Rice concurrently with this offering.

(9)
Represents                  shares of restricted stock to be granted to Mr. Taylor concurrently with this offering.

(10)
Represents                  shares of restricted stock to be granted to Mr. Wrzosek concurrently with this offering.

(11)
Represents                  shares of common stock received by Mr. Walker in connection with the formation transactions. Mr. Walker will sell                   shares of common stock as a selling stockholder in this offering.

(12)
Represents                  shares of common stock received by Mr. Walker in connection with the formation transactions. Mr. Walker will sell                   shares of common stock as a selling stockholder in this offering.

(13)
Represents                  shares of common stock received by Column in connection with the formation transactions.

91


Table of Contents


CERTAIN RELATIONSHIPS AND RELATED TRANSACTIONS

2009 Column Transaction

        In January 2009, W&D, Inc., its affiliate Green Park and Column, an affiliate of Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC, contributed their assets to a newly formed entity, Walker & Dunlop, LLC. The transaction brought together Walker & Dunlop's competencies in debt origination and investment consulting and related services, Green Park's Fannie Mae DUS origination capabilities and Column's Fannie Mae, Freddie Mac and HUD operations, including its healthcare real estate lending business, to form one of the leading providers of commercial real estate financial services in the United States. Substantially all of the assets and liabilities of W&D, Inc. and Green Park (the "GPF Parties"), including its wholly owned subsidiary Green Park Express, LLC, were transferred to Walker & Dunlop, LLC in exchange for 5% and 60% interests, respectively, in Walker & Dunlop, LLC, and certain assets and liabilities of Column were transferred to Walker & Dunlop, LLC for a 35% interest in Walker & Dunlop, LLC. The fair value of the net assets acquired by Walker & Dunlop, LLC from the GPF Parties was approximately $37.3 million, and the fair value of the net assets transferred by Column was approximately $26.4 million. In connection with the 2009 Column transaction, Walker & Dunlop, LLC entered into a transition services agreement with Green Park and Column, which terminated according to its terms on December 31, 2009.

        In connection with the Column transaction, Green Park and W&D, Inc. (the "GPF Parties"), Walker & Dunlop, LLC and Column entered into an agreement, dated January 30, 2009 (the "Column Transaction Agreement"), pursuant to which the GPF Parties and Column agreed to provide indemnification for certain matters. Each of the GPF Parties and Column agreed to indemnify Walker & Dunlop, LLC and its related parties against any damages or expenses that might be incurred from (i) the breach of certain representations and warranties, covenants or agreements of the indemnifying party contained in the Column Transaction Agreement or related documents, (ii) a request or requirement by a third-party that Walker & Dunlop, LLC repurchase a loan originated by Column or the GPF Parties, as applicable, and (iii) any liability with respect to assets and liabilities of Column or the GPF Parties, as applicable, that were specifically excluded by the terms of the Column Transaction Agreement. Pursuant to this provision, we are seeking indemnification from Column for the litigation filed by Capital Funding, as described in "Business—Legal Proceedings." Liability is capped at $10 million for each party, subject to certain exceptions. The cap does not apply to certain excepted warranties or to breaches based on claims not based solely on an asserted breach of a representation or warranty, including claims related to a third party request or requirement that Walker & Dunlop, LLC repurchase a loan originated by a Column or GPF Party, as applicable.

        As a result of the formation transactions, the GPF Parties and Walker & Dunlop, LLC will be our wholly owned subsidiaries, and will no longer have any outside members, officers or directors. The Column indemnity to Walker & Dunlop, LLC (which includes an indemnification for any obligation to repurchase a loan originated by Column as described above) will continue in accordance with its terms. In addition, we have agreed that the GPF Parties' indemnity to Walker & Dunlop, LLC and its current members, including Column, will continue following the formation transactions. With respect to third party loan repurchase obligations, these indemnities survive through January 30, 2019. With respect to breaches of representations and warranties, these indemnities survive until the later of January 30, 2012, or the expiration of the applicable statute of limitations. The survival of the indemnity by the GPF Parties to Walker & Dunlop, LLC and its members, including Column, will permit them, to the extent that they sustain damages resulting from any indemnified matter, to assert claims for indemnification against the GPF Parties for the survival period of the applicable indemnification obligation under the Column Transaction Agreement. As wholly owned subsidiaries of ours, we could be materially and adversely affected by any such indemnity claim made against the GPF Parties, to the extent successful. Other than the matters discussed under "Business—Legal Proceedings" for which we

92


Table of Contents


are seeking indemnification, we are unaware of any potential claims for indemnification by Walker & Dunlop LLC or its members under the Column Transaction Agreement.

Formation Transactions

        Concurrently with the closing of this offering, we will complete certain formation transactions through which Walker & Dunlop, LLC will become a wholly owned subsidiary of Walker & Dunlop, Inc., a newly formed Maryland corporation. In connection with the formation transactions, members of the Walker family, certain of our directors and executive officers and certain other individuals and entities who currently own interests in certain entities which directly or indirectly hold equity interests in Walker & Dunlop, LLC, will contribute their respective interests in such entities to Walker & Dunlop, Inc. for shares of our common stock. As a result of the contributions, we will become responsible for three loans in the aggregate outstanding amount of $30.3 million. In connection with the formation transactions, each of our executive officers, certain directors and Column will receive the following number of shares of our common stock:

        In addition to the shares of common stock to be received in connection with the formation transactions, our executive officers and directors will also benefit from the following:

        Our predecessor, Walker & Dunlop, LLC, provided tax advances to its members on a quarterly basis when it generated taxable income for the members. Tax advances were based on taxable income at the highest federal and local taxes for residents of the District of Columbia. For the six months

93


Table of Contents


ended June 30, 2010, and the years ended December 31, 2009, 2008, and 2007, tax advances were made to William Walker and Howard Smith as provided below:

 
  6/30/10   12/31/09   12/31/08   12/31/07  

William M. Walker

  $ 611,636   $ 242,346   $ 1,275,966   $ 768,594  

Howard W. Smith, III

  $ 459,546   $ 217,600   $ 840,531   $ 542,008  

        Tax advances have generally been repaid from Walker & Dunlop, LLC's distributions in first or second quarter following the tax distribution. As of June 30, 2010, there were $229,657 and $304,627 tax advances for the second quarter of 2010 outstanding to Mr. Smith and Mr. Walker. These amounts were repaid on August 2, 2010 out of their quarterly distributions. The tax advances bear no interest rate.

        On July 8, 2008, Ms. Wilson purchased a 3.2% interest in one of our predecessors, GPF Acquisition, LLC, in return for a $218,946 note held by the company. The note was scheduled to mature on the earlier of December 31, 2018, at Ms. Wilson's termination of employment with the company, or a sale of GPF Acquisition, LLC. The interest rate on the note was equal to the 90-day LIBOR plus 200 basis points. All GPF Acquisition, LLC distributions, except for tax advances, were used to pay down the note. Ms. Wilson paid principal and interest amounts of $48,814 and $26,713 in October 2009. On August 2, 2010, Ms. Wilson repaid the balance of the note in full.

Commercial Real Estate Funds

        W&D Balanced Real Estate Fund I GP, LLC, our wholly owned subsidiary, is the general partner of W&D Balanced Real Estate Fund I LP (the "Balanced Fund"), a commercial real estate fund that has invested approximately $50 million in commercial real estates securities and loans, such as first mortgages, B-notes, mezzanine debt and equity securities. The Balanced Fund has invested approximately $50 million to date and has no further commitments to invest. It is only responsible for managing the investments. All of the limited partnership interests in the Balanced Fund are held by third-party pension funds. Pursuant to the Balanced Fund's partnership agreement, only the limited partners share in regular distributions; our subsidiary, as the general partner, is only entitled to an incentive fee if returns exceed certain pre-established thresholds. To date, the general partner has never received an incentive fee. Our subsidiary has contracted with Walker & Dunlop Fund Management, LLC (the "Advisor"), a registered investment advisor, of which Mr. Walker, our Chairman, President and Chief Executive Officer, is the sole member, for it to provide investment advisory services to the Balanced Fund pursuant to an investment advisory agreement. We provide consulting, overhead and other corporate services to the Advisor pursuant to a corporate services agreement for a fee. In 2009 and the first six months of 2010, the amount of such fees were approximately $686,000 and $343,000, respectively.

        Through W&D Inc., we also provide investment, consulting and related services to Walker & Dunlop Multifamily Equity I, LLC (the "Multifamily Advisor"), in which members of the Walker family, including Mr. Walker, our Chairman, President and Chief Executive Officer, hold 81.1% of the membership interests. The Multifamily Advisor holds a 1% managing member interest in, and serves as the investment advisor pursuant to an investment advisory agreement to, Walker & Dunlop Apartment Fund I, LLC (the "Apartment Fund"), a commercial real estate fund that has invested approximately $45 million in multifamily real estate securities and mezzanine financings and has no further commitments to invest. An institutional investor owns a 99% non-managing member interest in the Apartment Fund. Pursuant to the Apartment Fund's operating agreement, distribution of net cash flow is first distributed to the institutional investor based on an investment yield, then to the Multifamily Advisor, and the balance of the net cash flow of the Apartment Fund is then distributed 99% to the institutional investor and 1% to the Multifamily Advisor. In exchange for the provision of investment, consulting and related services pursuant to a corporate services agreement between the Multifamily

94


Table of Contents


Advisor and W&D, Inc., W&D, Inc. provides corporate services to the Multifamily Advisor in connection with Multifamily Advisor's asset management responsibilities to the Apartment Fund for a fee. In 2009 and the first six months of 2010, the amount of such fees was approximately $329,748 and $101,046, respectively.

Related Party Transaction Policies

        We expect our board of directors to adopt a policy regarding the approval of any "related person transaction," which is any transaction or series of transactions in which we or any of our subsidiaries is or are to be a participant, the amount involved exceeds $120,000, and a "related person" (as defined under SEC rules) has a direct or indirect material interest. Under the policy, a related person would need to promptly disclose to our Chief Compliance Officer any related person transaction and all material facts about the transaction. Our Chief Compliance Officer would then assess and promptly communicate that information to the Audit Committee of our board of directors. Based on its consideration of all of the relevant facts and circumstances, the Audit Committee will decide whether or not to approve such transaction and will generally approve only those transactions that do not create a conflict of interest. If we become aware of an existing related person transaction that has not been pre-approved under this policy, the transaction will be referred to the Audit Committee which will evaluate all options available, including ratification, revision or termination of such transaction. Our policy requires any director who may be interested in a related person transaction to recuse himself or herself from any consideration of such related person transaction.

Equity-Based Awards

        Concurrently with this offering, we will grant options to purchase an aggregate of                  shares of our common stock and                   shares of restricted stock under our Equity Incentive Plan to certain of our employees, including our executive officers, and our independent directors.

Indemnification Agreements

        We intend to enter into indemnification agreements with each of our executive officers and directors that will obligate us to indemnify them to the maximum extent permitted by Maryland law. The form of indemnification agreement provides that if a director or executive officer is a party or is threatened to be made a party to any proceeding by reason of such director's or executive officer's status as our director, officer or employee, we must indemnify such director or executive officer for all expenses and liabilities actually and reasonably incurred by him or her, or on his or her behalf, unless it has been established that:

provided, however, that we will have no obligation to (i) indemnify such director or executive officer for a proceeding by or in the right of our company for expenses and liabilities actually and reasonably incurred by him or her, or on his or her behalf, if it has been adjudged that such director or executive officer is liable to us with respect to such proceeding or (ii) indemnify or advance expenses of such director or executive officer for a proceeding brought by such director or executive officer against our company, except for a proceeding brought to enforce indemnification under Section 2-418 of the

95


Table of Contents


MGCL or as otherwise provided by our charter or bylaws, a resolution of the board of directors or an agreement approved by the board of directors. Under the MGCL, a Maryland corporation may not indemnify a director or officer in a suit by or in the right of the corporation in which the director or officer was adjudged liable on the basis that a personal benefit was improperly received.

Registration Rights Agreement

        Upon completion of this offering, we will enter into a registration rights agreement with regard to shares of our common stock issued in connection with our formation transactions to former direct and indirect equity holders of Walker & Dunlop, LLC, including certain of our executive officers and directors, which we refer to collectively as the registrable shares. Pursuant to the registration rights agreement, we will grant such holders and their direct and indirect transferees demand registration rights to have the registrable shares registered for resale, which registration statement must remain effective for the shorter of two years or until the date on which all of the registrable shares have been sold; provided, however, that these registration rights will only begin to apply one year after the completion of this offering. In addition to demand registration rights, certain holders will receive tag along rights whereby they will have the right to have their shares registered if other persons with registration rights register their shares. The registration rights shall cease to apply when registrable shares can be sold pursuant to Rule 144 without any limitations other than the requirement for current public information regarding the company.

        Notwithstanding the foregoing, we will be permitted to suspend the use, from time to time, of the prospectus that is part of the registration statement (and therefore suspend sales under the registration statement) in the event of certain corporate events affecting us for certain periods, referred to as "blackout periods."

        We will bear all of the costs and expenses incident to our registration requirements under the registration rights agreement, including, without limitation, all registration, filing and stock exchange or FINRA fees, all fees and expenses of complying with securities or "blue sky" laws, all printing expenses, and all fees and disbursements of counsel and independent public accountants retained by us. We have also agreed to indemnify the persons receiving registration rights against specified liabilities, including certain potential liabilities arising under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended (the "Securities Act"), or to contribute the payments such persons may be required to make in respect thereof.

96


Table of Contents


DESCRIPTION OF CAPITAL STOCK

         The following summary of the material terms of our capital stock does not purport to be complete and is subject to and qualified in its entirety by reference to applicable Maryland law and to our charter and bylaws, copies of which are filed as exhibits to the registration statement of which this prospectus is a part. See "Where You Can Find More Information."

General

        Our charter provides that we may issue up to                  shares of common stock, $0.01 par value per share, and                   shares of preferred stock, $0.01 par value per share. Our charter authorizes our board of directors to amend our charter to increase or decrease the aggregate number of authorized shares of common stock or the number of shares of stock of any class or series without stockholder approval. Upon completion of this offering and the formation transactions described in this prospectus,                   shares of common stock will be issued and outstanding on a fully diluted basis (assuming no exercise of the underwriters' overallotment option) or                  shares if the underwriters' overallotment option is exercised in full, and no preferred shares will be issued and outstanding.

        Under Maryland law, stockholders generally are not personally liable for our debts or obligations solely as a result of their status as stockholders.

        Shares of our common stock are not deposits or other obligations of any bank, an insurance policy of any insurance company or insured or guaranteed by the FDIC, any other governmental agency or any insurance company. The shares of common stock will not benefit from any insurance guarantee association coverage or any similar protection.

Shares of Common Stock

Voting Rights of Common Stock

        Except as may otherwise be specified in the terms of any class or series of shares of common stock, each outstanding share of common stock entitles the holder to one vote on all matters submitted to a vote of stockholders, including the election of directors, and, except as provided with respect to any other class or series of shares of capital stock, the holders of such shares of common stock will possess the exclusive voting power. There will be no cumulative voting in the election of directors. Directors are elected by a plurality of the votes cast.

        Under the MGCL, a Maryland corporation generally cannot dissolve, amend its charter, merge, consolidate, sell all or substantially all of its assets, engage in a statutory share exchange or engage in similar transactions outside the ordinary course of business unless declared advisable by the board of directors and approved by the affirmative vote of stockholders holding at least two-thirds of the votes entitled to be cast on the matter unless a lesser percentage (but not less than a majority of all the votes entitled to be cast on the matter) is set forth in the corporation's charter. Our charter provides that these actions (other than certain amendments to the provisions of our charter related to the removal of directors) may be taken if declared advisable by a majority of our board of directors and approved by the vote of stockholders holding a majority of the votes entitled to be cast on the matter. Maryland law also permits a corporation to transfer all or substantially all of its assets without the approval of its stockholders to an entity if all of the equity interests of which are owned, directly or indirectly, by the corporation. In addition, because operating assets may be held by a corporation's subsidiaries, as in our situation, these subsidiaries may be able to transfer all or substantially all of such assets without the approval of our stockholders.

97


Table of Contents

Dividends, Distributions, Liquidation and Other Rights

        Subject to the preferential rights of any other class or series of our stock, holders of shares of our common stock are entitled to receive dividends on such shares of common stock if, as and when authorized by our board of directors, and declared by us out of assets legally available therefor. If we fail to pay dividends on any shares of our preferred stock, if any are then outstanding, generally we may not pay dividends on or repurchase shares of our common stock. Such holders are also entitled to share ratably in the assets of our company legally available for distribution to our stockholders in the event of our liquidation, dissolution or winding up after payment or establishment of reserves for all debts and liabilities of our company and the preferential amounts owing with respect to any outstanding preferred shares.

        Holders of shares of common stock have no preference, conversion, exchange, sinking fund or redemption rights, have no preemptive rights to subscribe for any securities of our company and generally have no appraisal rights, unless our board of directors determines prospectively that appraisal rights will apply to one or more transactions in which holders of our common stock would otherwise be entitled to exercise appraisal rights. Holders of shares of our common stock will have equal dividend, liquidation and other rights.

Power to Reclassify Our Unissued Shares of Stock

        Our charter authorizes our board of directors to classify and reclassify any unissued shares of our common or preferred stock into other classes or series of shares of stock and to establish the number of shares in each class or series and to set the preferences, conversion and other rights, voting powers, restrictions, limitations as to dividends or other distributions, qualifications or terms or conditions of redemption for each such class or series. As a result, our board of directors could authorize the issuance of shares of preferred stock that have priority over the shares of our common stock with respect to dividends, distributions and rights upon liquidation and with other terms and conditions that could have the effect of delaying, deterring or preventing a transaction or a change in control of our company that might involve a premium price for holders of shares of our common stock or otherwise might be in their best interest. No shares of our preferred stock are presently outstanding, and we have no present plans to issue any shares of preferred stock.

Power to Increase or Decrease Authorized Shares of Common Stock and Issue Additional Shares of Common and Preferred Stock

        We believe that the power of our board of directors to amend our charter to increase or decrease the aggregate number of authorized shares of stock, to issue additional authorized but unissued shares of our common stock or preferred stock and to classify or reclassify unissued shares of our common stock or preferred stock and thereafter to cause to issue such classified or reclassified shares of stock will provide us with increased flexibility in structuring possible future financings and acquisitions and in meeting other needs that might arise. The additional classes or series of stock, as well as the additional shares of stock, will be available for issuance without further action by our stockholders, unless such action is required by applicable law or the rules of any stock exchange or automated quotation system on which our securities may be listed or traded. Although our board of directors does not currently intend to do so, it could authorize us to issue a class or series that could, depending upon the terms of the particular class or series, delay, defer or prevent a transaction or a change in control of our company that might involve a premium price for holders of our shares of stock or otherwise be in the best interest of our stockholders. See "Certain Provisions of Maryland Law and of Our Charter and Bylaws—Anti-takeover Effect of Certain Provisions of Maryland Law and of Our Charter and Bylaws."

98


Table of Contents

Preferred Stock

        Our charter authorizes our board of directors to designate and issue one or more classes or series of preferred stock without stockholder approval. Our board of directors may determine the relative rights, preferences and privileges of each class or series of preferred stock so issued, which may be more beneficial than the rights, preferences and privileges attributable to our common stock with respect to dividends, distributions or rights upon liquidation. The issuance of preferred stock could have the effect of delaying, deferring or preventing a transaction or a change in control of our company that might involve a premium price for holders of shares of our common stock or otherwise be in the best interests of the stockholders. The rights, preferences and privileges of holders of shares of our common stock are subject to, and may be adversely affected by, the rights of the holders of preferred stock. Our board of directors has no present plans to issue preferred stock but may do so at any time in the future without stockholder approval.

Transfer Agent and Registrar

        We expect the transfer agent and registrar for our shares of common stock to be                        .

99


Table of Contents


SHARES ELIGIBLE FOR FUTURE SALE

        After giving effect to this offering and the formation transactions described in this prospectus, we will have                  shares of common stock outstanding on a fully diluted basis (assuming no exercise of the underwriters' overallotment option) or                  shares if the underwriters' overallotment option is exercised in full. Of these shares, the                  shares sold in this offering (or                  shares if the underwriters' overallotment option is exercised in full) will be freely transferable without restriction or further registration under the Securities Act, except for any shares purchased in this offering by our "affiliates," as that term is defined by Rule 144 under the Securities Act.

        Our shares of common stock are newly issued securities for which there is no established trading market. No assurance can be given as to (i) the likelihood that an active trading market for our shares of common stock will develop or continue, (ii) the liquidity of any such market, (iii) the ability of the stockholders to sell the shares when desired, or at all, or (iv) the prices that stockholders may obtain for any of the shares. No prediction can be made as to the effect, if any, that future sales of shares or the availability of shares for future sale will have on the trading or market price of our common stock prevailing from time to time. Sales of substantial amounts of shares of common stock, or the perception that such sales could occur, may affect materially and adversely the trading and prevailing market price of our common stock. See "Risk Factors—Risks Related to Our Common Stock."

Rule 144

        After giving effect to this offering,                  shares of our outstanding shares of common stock will be "restricted" securities under the meaning of Rule 144 under the Securities Act, and may not be sold in the absence of registration under the Securities Act unless an exemption from registration is available, including the exemption provided by Rule 144.

        In general, under Rule 144 as currently in effect, beginning 180 days after the date of this prospectus, a person (or persons whose restricted securities are aggregated) who is not deemed to have been an affiliate of ours at any time during the three months preceding a sale, and who has beneficially owned restricted securities within the meaning of Rule 144 for at least six months would be entitled to freely transfer those restricted securities, subject only to the availability of current public information about us. A non-affiliated person who has beneficially owned restricted securities within the meaning of Rule 144 for at least one year would be entitled to sell those shares without regard to the provisions of Rule 144.

        An affiliate of ours who has beneficially owned restricted securities for at least six months would be entitled to sell, within any three-month period, a number of restricted securities that does not exceed the greater of:

        Sales under Rule 144 by our affiliates or persons selling restricted securities on behalf of our affiliates are also subject to manner of sale provisions, notice requirements and the availability of current public information about us.

Lock-Up Agreements

        We and our executive officers, directors, including our director nominees, and participants in our directed share program and the selling stockholders will enter into lock-up agreements with the underwriters of this offering. Under these agreements, neither we nor any of these persons may, without the prior written approval of Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC and Keefe, Bruyette &

100


Table of Contents


Woods, Inc., subject to limited exceptions, (i) offer, pledge, sell, contract to sell, sell any option or contract to purchase, purchase any option or contract to sell, grant any option, right or warrant for the sale of, or otherwise dispose of or transfer, any shares of our common stock or any securities convertible into or exchangeable or exercisable for our common stock, whether now owned or hereafter acquired or with respect to which such person has or hereafter acquires the power of disposition, or file any registration statement under the Securities Act, with respect to any of the foregoing or (ii) enter into any swap, hedge or any other agreement or any transaction that transfers, in whole or in part, directly or indirectly, the economic consequence of ownership of the shares of our common stock, whether any such swap, hedge or transaction is to be settled by delivery of shares of our common stock or other securities, in cash or otherwise. We will be subject to these restrictions for a period of 180 days from the date of this prospectus (the "180-day Restricted Period"). Our executive officers, directors, including our director nominees, participants in our directed share program and the selling stockholders will be subject to these restrictions for a period of 365 days from the date of this prospectus (the "365-day Restricted Period," and together with the 180-day Restricted Period, the "Restricted Periods"). At any time and without public notice, Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC and Keefe, Bruyette & Woods, Inc. may, in their sole discretion, release all or some of the securities from these lock-up agreements.

        The Restricted Periods are subject to extension under limited circumstances. In the event that either: (i) during the period that begins on the date that is 15 calendar days plus 3 business days before the last day of any Restricted Period and ends on the last day of such Restricted Period, we issue an earnings release or material news or a material event relating to us occur; or (ii) prior to the expiration of any Restricted Period, we announce that we will release earnings results during the 16-day period beginning on the last day of such Restricted Period, then such Restricted Period will continue to apply until the expiration of the date that is 15 calendar days plus 3 business days after the date on which the earnings release is issued or the material news or material event relating to us occurs.

Registration Rights Agreement

        Upon completion of this offering, we will enter into a registration rights agreement with regard to an aggregate of                 shares of our common stock issued in connection with our formation transactions to former direct and indirect equity holders of Walker & Dunlop, LLC, including certain of our executive officers and directors. For more information on our registration rights agreement, see "Certain Relationships and Related Transactions—Registration Rights Agreement."

Grants Under Equity Incentive Plan

        Our Equity Incentive Plan provides for the grant of incentive awards to our employees, officers, directors and service providers. Concurrently with this offering, we intend to grant options to purchase an aggregate of                  shares and                  restricted shares to certain of our employees, including our executive officers, and our independent directors upon completion of this offering, and intend to reserve an additional                  shares of common stock for issuance under the plan after this offering.

        We intend to file with the SEC a registration statement on Form S-8 covering the shares of common stock issuable under the Equity Incentive Plan. Shares of our common stock covered by such registration statement, including any shares of our restricted stock and shares of common stock issuable upon the exercise of options, will be eligible for transfer or resale without restriction under the Securities Act unless held by affiliates.

101


Table of Contents


CERTAIN PROVISIONS OF MARYLAND LAW AND OUR CHARTER AND BYLAWS

         The following summary of certain provisions of the MGCL and our charter and bylaws does not purport to be complete and is subject to and qualified in its entirety by reference to applicable Maryland law and to our charter and bylaws, copies of which are filed as exhibits to the registration statement of which this prospectus is a part. See "Where You Can Find More Information."

Our Board of Directors

        Our charter and bylaws provide that the number of directors of our company may be established, increased or decreased only by a majority of our entire board of directors, but may not be fewer than the minimum number required under the MGCL nor more than 15. We expect to have nine directors upon the completion of this offering. Our charter and bylaws provide that any vacancy, including a vacancy created by an increase in the number of directors, may be filled only by a majority of the remaining directors, even if the remaining directors do not constitute a quorum. Any individual elected to fill such vacancy will serve for the remainder of the full term and until a successor is duly elected and qualifies.

        Pursuant to our bylaws, each of our directors is elected by our stockholders to serve until the next annual meeting of stockholders and until his or her successor is duly elected and qualifies under the MGCL. Holders of shares of our common stock will have no right to cumulative voting in the election of directors. Directors are elected by a plurality of the votes cast.

        Our bylaws provide that at least a majority of our directors will be "independent," with independence being defined in the manner established by our board of directors and in a manner consistent with listing standards established by the NYSE.

Removal of Directors

        Our charter provides that, subject to the rights of holders of one or more classes or series of preferred stock to elect or remove one or more directors, a director may be removed only for cause (as defined in our charter) and only by the affirmative vote of at least two-thirds of the votes entitled to be cast generally in the election of directors and that our board of directors has the exclusive power to fill vacant directorships. These provisions may preclude stockholders from removing incumbent directors and filling the vacancies created by such removal with their own nominees.

Business Combinations

        Under the MGCL, certain "business combinations" (including a merger, consolidation, share exchange or, in certain circumstances specified under the statute, an asset transfer or issuance or reclassification of equity securities) between a Maryland corporation and any interested stockholder, or an affiliate of such an interested stockholder, are prohibited for five years after the most recent date on which the interested stockholder becomes an interested stockholder. Maryland law defines an interested stockholder as:

        A person is not an interested stockholder under the statute if the board of directors approve in advance the transaction by which the person otherwise would have become an interested stockholder.

102


Table of Contents


In approving a transaction, however, the board of directors may provide that its approval is subject to compliance, at or after the time of the approval, with any terms and conditions determined by it.

        After such five-year prohibition, any business combination between the company and an interested stockholder must be recommended by the board of directors and approved by the affirmative vote of at least:

These supermajority approval requirements do not apply if, among other conditions, the corporation's common stockholders receive a minimum price (as defined in the MGCL) for their shares and the consideration is received in cash or in the same form as previously paid by the interested stockholder for its shares.

        These provisions of the MGCL do not apply, however, to business combinations that are approved or exempted by a corporation's board of directors prior to the time that the interested stockholder becomes an interested stockholder.

Control Share Acquisitions

        The MGCL provides that "control shares" of a Maryland corporation acquired in a "control share acquisition" have no voting rights except to the extent approved at a special meeting of stockholders by the affirmative vote of at least two-thirds of the votes entitled to be cast by stockholders entitled to exercise or direct the exercise of the voting power in the election of directors generally but excluding: (i) a person who makes or proposes to make a control share acquisition, (ii) an officer of the corporation or (iii) an employee of the corporation who is also a director of the corporation. "Control shares" are voting shares of stock that, if aggregated with all other such shares of stock previously acquired by the acquirer or in respect of which the acquirer is able to exercise or direct the exercise of voting power (except solely by virtue of a revocable proxy), would entitle the acquirer to exercise voting power in electing directors within one of the following ranges of voting power:

Control shares do not include shares the acquiring person is then entitled to vote as a result of having previously obtained stockholder approval. A "control share acquisition" means the acquisition, directly or indirectly, of ownership of, or the power to direct the exercise of voting power with respect to, issued and outstanding control shares, subject to certain exceptions.

        A person who has made or proposes to make a control share acquisition, upon satisfaction of certain conditions (including an undertaking to pay expenses and making an "acquiring person statement" as described in the MGCL), may compel our board of directors to call a special meeting of stockholders to be held within 50 days of demand to consider the voting rights of the control shares. If no request for a special meeting is made, we may present the question at any stockholders meeting.

        If voting rights of control shares are not approved at the meeting or if the acquiring person does not deliver an "acquiring person statement" as required by the statute, then, subject to certain conditions and limitations, the corporation may redeem any or all of the control shares (except those

103


Table of Contents


for which voting rights have previously been approved) for fair value. Fair value is determined, without regard to the absence of voting rights for the control shares, as of the date of the last control share acquisition by the acquirer or of any meeting of stockholders at which the voting rights of such shares are considered and not approved. If voting rights for control shares are approved at a stockholders meeting and the acquirer becomes entitled to vote a majority of the shares entitled to vote, all other stockholders may exercise appraisal rights. The fair value of the shares as determined for purposes of such appraisal rights may not be less than the highest price per share paid by the acquirer in the control share acquisition.

        The control share acquisition statute does not apply (i) to shares acquired in a merger, consolidation or share exchange if we are a party to the transaction or (ii) to acquisitions approved or exempted by the charter or bylaws of the corporation.

Subtitle 8

        Subtitle 8 of Title 3 of the MGCL permits a Maryland corporation with a class of equity securities registered under the Exchange Act and at least three independent directors to elect to be subject, by provision in its charter or bylaws or a resolution of its board of directors and notwithstanding any contrary provision in the charter or bylaws, to any or all of the following five provisions:

        Our charter provides that, at such time as we become eligible to make a Subtitle 8 election, we elect to be subject to the provisions of Subtitle 8 relating to the filling of vacancies on our board of directors. Through provisions in our charter and bylaws unrelated to Subtitle 8, we already (i) require the affirmative vote of the holders of not less than two-thirds of all of the votes entitled to be cast on the matter for the removal of any director from the board, which removal will be allowed only for cause, (ii) vest in the board the exclusive power to fix the number of directorships, subject to limitations set forth in our charter and bylaws, and fill vacancies and (iii) require, unless called by the chairman of our board of directors, our president or chief executive officer or our board of directors, the written request of stockholders of a majority of all votes entitled to be cast at such meeting to call a special meeting to consider and vote on any matter that may properly be considered at a meeting of stockholders. We have not elected to create a classified board. In the future, our board of directors may elect, without stockholder approval, to create a classified board or adopt one or more of the other provisions of Subtitle 8.

Amendment of Our Charter and Bylaws and Approval of Extraordinary Transactions

        Under the MGCL, a Maryland corporation generally cannot dissolve, amend its charter, merge, sell all or substantially all of its assets, engage in a statutory share exchange or engage in similar transactions outside the ordinary course of business unless declared advisable by the board of directors and approved by the affirmative vote of stockholders entitled to cast at least two-thirds of the votes entitled to be cast on the matter unless a lesser percentage, but not less than a majority of all of the votes entitled to be cast on the matter, is set forth in the corporation's charter. Our charter provides that these actions (other than certain amendments to the provisions of our charter related to the

104


Table of Contents


removal of directors) may be taken if declared advisable by a majority of our board of directors and approved by the vote of stockholders holding a majority of the votes entitled to be cast on the matter.

        Our board of directors has the exclusive power to adopt, alter or repeal any provision of our bylaws and to make new bylaws.

Meetings of Stockholders

        Under our bylaws, annual meetings of stockholders are to be held each year at a date and time as determined by our board of directors. Special meetings of stockholders may be called only by a majority of the directors then in office, by the chairman of our board of directors, our president or our chief executive officer. Additionally, subject to the provisions of our bylaws, special meetings of the stockholders shall be called by our secretary upon the written request of stockholders of a majority of the votes entitled to be cast at such meeting. Only matters set forth in the notice of the special meeting may be considered and acted upon at such a meeting. Maryland law and our bylaws provide that any action required or permitted to be taken at a meeting of stockholders may be taken without a meeting by unanimous written consent, if that consent sets forth that action and is signed by each stockholder entitled to vote on the matter.

Advance Notice of Director Nominations and New Business

        Our bylaws provide that, with respect to an annual meeting of stockholders, nominations of persons for election to our board of directors and the proposal of business to be considered by stockholders at the annual meeting may be made only:

        With respect to special meetings of stockholders, only the business specified in our notice of meeting may be brought before the meeting of stockholders. Nominations of persons for election to our board of directors may be made only:

        The purpose of requiring stockholders to give advance notice of nominations and other proposals is to afford our board of directors the opportunity to consider the qualifications of the proposed nominees or the advisability of the other proposals and, to the extent considered necessary by our board of directors, to inform stockholders and make recommendations regarding the nominations or other proposals. The advance notice procedures also permit a more orderly procedure for conducting our stockholder meetings. Although our bylaws do not give our board of directors the power to

105


Table of Contents


disapprove timely stockholder nominations and proposals, our bylaws may have the effect of precluding a contest for the election of directors or proposals for other action if the proper procedures are not followed and of discouraging or deterring a third party from conducting a solicitation of proxies to elect its own slate of directors to our board of directors or to approve its own proposal.

Anti-takeover Effect of Certain Provisions of Maryland Law and Our Charter and Bylaws

        The business combination statute, control share acquisition statute, the provisions of our charter on removal of directors and the advance notice provisions of the bylaws could delay, defer or prevent a transaction or a change in control of our company that might involve a premium price for holders of our common stock or otherwise be in the best interests of our stockholders.

Indemnification and Limitation of Directors' and Officers' Liability

        The MGCL permits a Maryland corporation to include in its charter a provision limiting the liability of its directors and officers to the corporation and its stockholders for money damages except for liability resulting from actual receipt of an improper benefit or profit in money, property or services or active and deliberate dishonesty established by a final judgment as being material to the cause of action. Our charter contains such a provision that eliminates such liability to the maximum extent permitted by Maryland law.

        The MGCL requires a corporation (unless its charter provides otherwise, which our charter does not) to indemnify a director or officer who has been successful, on the merits or otherwise, in the defense of any proceeding to which he or she is made or threatened to be made a party by reason of his or her service in that capacity. The MGCL permits a corporation to indemnify its present and former directors and officers, among others, against judgments, penalties, fines, settlements and reasonable expenses actually incurred by them in connection with any proceeding to which they may be made or are threatened to be made a party by reason of their service in those or other capacities unless it is established that:

        However, under the MGCL, a Maryland corporation may not indemnify a director or officer for an adverse judgment in a suit by or in the right of the corporation or if the director or officer was adjudged liable on the basis that personal benefit was improperly received, unless in either case a court orders indemnification and then only for expenses.

        In addition, the MGCL permits a corporation to advance reasonable expenses to a director or officer upon the corporation's receipt of:

106


Table of Contents

        Our charter and bylaws obligate us, to the fullest extent permitted by Maryland law in effect from time to time, to indemnify and to pay or reimburse reasonable expenses in advance of final disposition of a proceeding without requiring a preliminary determination of the director's or officer's ultimate entitlement to:

        Our charter and bylaws also permit us, with the approval of our board of directors, to indemnify and advance expenses to any person who served a predecessor of ours in any of the capacities described above and to any employee or agent of our company or a predecessor of our company.

        Upon completion of this offering, we intend to enter into indemnification agreements with each of our directors and executive officers that would provide for indemnification to the maximum extent permitted by Maryland law.

        Insofar as the foregoing provisions permit indemnification of directors, officers or persons controlling us for liability arising under the Securities Act, we have been informed that, in the opinion of the SEC, this indemnification is against public policy as expressed in the Securities Act and is therefore unenforceable.

107


Table of Contents


U.S. FEDERAL INCOME TAX CONSIDERATIONS

        The following is a discussion of the material United States federal income tax considerations relating to the holding and disposition of our common stock by a non-U.S. stockholder (as defined below). As used in this section, references to the terms "company," "we," "our," and "us" mean only Walker & Dunlop, Inc. and not its subsidiaries or other lower-tier entities, except as otherwise indicated.

        This summary is based upon the United States Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the "Internal Revenue Code"), U.S. Treasury Regulations, rulings and other administrative interpretations and practices of the Internal Revenue Service (the "IRS") (including administrative interpretations and practices expressed in private letter rulings which are binding on the IRS only with respect to the particular taxpayers who requested and received those rulings), and judicial decisions, all as currently in effect, and all of which are subject to differing interpretations or to change, possibly with retroactive effect. No assurance can be given that the IRS would not assert, or that a court would not sustain, a position contrary to any of the tax consequences described below. We have not sought and will not seek an advance ruling from the IRS regarding any matter discussed in this section. The summary is also based upon the assumption that we will operate the company and its subsidiaries and affiliated entities in accordance with their applicable organizational documents.

        This summary is for general information only, and does not purport to discuss all aspects of U.S. federal income taxation that may be important to a particular investor in light of its investment or tax circumstances, or to investors subject to special tax rules, including:

        This summary assumes that stockholders will hold our common stock as a capital asset, which generally means as property held for investment.

108


Table of Contents

         You are urged to consult your tax advisor regarding the U.S. federal, state, local, and foreign income and other tax consequences to you in light of your particular investment or tax circumstances of acquiring, holding, exchanging, or otherwise disposing of our common stock.

Taxation of Non-U.S. Stockholders

        This section summarizes the taxation of non-U.S. stockholders. For these purposes, a non-U.S. stockholder is a beneficial owner of our common stock that for U.S. federal income tax purposes is other than:

        If an entity or arrangement treated as a partnership for U.S. federal income tax purposes holds our common stock, the U.S. federal income tax treatment of a partner generally will depend upon the status of the partner and the activities of the partnership. A partner of any such partnership holding our common stock should consult its own tax advisor regarding the U.S. federal income tax consequences to the partner of the acquisition, ownership and disposition of our common stock by the partnership.

Distributions

        If distributions are paid on shares of our common stock, the distributions will constitute dividends for U.S. federal income tax purposes to the extent paid from our current or accumulated earnings and profits, as determined under U.S. federal income tax principles. To the extent a distribution exceeds our current and accumulated earnings and profits, it will constitute a return of capital that is applied against and reduces, but not below zero, the adjusted tax basis of your shares in our common stock. Any remainder will constitute gain on the common stock. Dividends paid to a non-U.S. stockholder generally will be subject to withholding of U.S. federal income tax at the rate of 30% or such lower rate as may be specified by an applicable income tax treaty. If the dividend is effectively connected with the non-U.S. stockholder's conduct of a trade or business in the United States or, if a tax treaty requires, attributable to a U.S. permanent establishment maintained by such non-U.S. stockholder, the dividend will not be subject to any withholding tax, provided certification requirements are met, as described below, but will be subject to U.S. federal income tax imposed on net income on the same basis that applies to U.S. persons generally. A non-U.S. stockholder that is taxable as a corporation for U.S. federal income tax purposes may, under certain circumstances, also be subject to a branch profits tax equal to 30%, or such lower rate as may be specified by an applicable income tax treaty, on a portion of its effectively connected earnings and profits for the taxable year

        To claim the benefit of a tax treaty or to claim exemption from withholding because the income is effectively connected with the conduct of a trade or business in the United States, a non-U.S. stockholder must provide a properly executed IRS Form W-8BEN for treaty benefits or W-8ECI for effectively connected income, or such successor forms as the IRS designates, prior to the payment of dividends. These forms must be periodically updated. Non-U.S. stockholders generally may obtain a refund of any excess amounts withheld by timely filing an appropriate claim for refund. Non-U.S.

109


Table of Contents


stockholders should consult their own tax advisors regarding the potential applicability (including their eligibility for the benefits) of any income tax treaty.

Disposition

        A non-U.S. stockholder generally will not be subject to U.S. federal income tax, including by way of withholding, on gain recognized on a sale or other disposition of shares of our common stock unless any one of the following is true:

        We believe that we are not currently, and will not become, a USRPHC. However, because the determination of whether we are a USRPHC depends on the fair market value of our U.S. real property interests relative to the fair market value of our other business assets, there can be no assurance that we will not become a USRPHC in the future. As a general matter, as long as our common stock is regularly traded on an established securities market, however, it will not be treated as a U.S. real property interest with respect to any non-U.S. stockholder that holds no more than 5% of such regularly traded common stock. If we are determined to be a USRPHC and the foregoing exception does not apply, among other things, a purchaser may be required to withhold 10% of the proceeds payable to a non-U.S. stockholder from a disposition of our common stock, and the non-U.S. stockholder generally will be taxed on its net gain derived from the disposition at the graduated U.S. federal income tax rates applicable to United States persons, and may also be subject to alternative minimum tax.

        Unless an applicable treaty provides otherwise, gain described in the first bullet point above will be subject to the U.S. federal income tax imposed on net income on the same basis that applies to U.S. persons generally but will generally not be subject to withholding. A non-U.S. stockholder that is taxable as a corporation for U.S. federal income tax purposes may, under certain circumstances, also be subject to a branch profits tax equal to 30%, or such lower rate as may be specified by an applicable income tax treaty, on such gain. Gain described in the second bullet point above will be subject to a flat 30% U.S. federal income tax, which may be offset by certain U.S. source capital losses. Non-U.S. stockholders should consult any potentially applicable income tax treaties that may provide for different rules.

Information Reporting and Backup Withholding

        Information reporting and backup withholding may apply to dividends paid with respect to our common stock and to proceeds from the sale or other disposition of our common stock. In certain circumstances, non-U.S. stockholders may not be subject to information reporting and backup withholding if they certify under penalties of perjury as to their status as non-U.S. stockholders or otherwise establish an exemption and certain other requirements are met. Non-U.S. stockholders should consult their own tax advisors regarding the application of the information reporting and backup withholding rules to them.

110


Table of Contents

        Backup withholding is not an additional tax. Amounts withheld under the backup withholding rules from a payment to a non-U.S. stockholder generally may be refunded or credited against the non-U.S. stockholder's U.S. federal income tax liability, if any, provided that an appropriate claim is timely filed with the IRS.

Withholding on Payments to Certain Foreign Entities

        The Hiring Incentives to Restore Employment Act imposes withholding taxes on certain types of payments made to "foreign financial institutions" and certain other non-U.S. entities unless additional certification, information reporting and other specified requirements are satisfied. Failure to comply with the new reporting requirements could result in withholding tax being imposed on payments of, among other types of payments, dividends and proceeds of the sales of stock, in any case to foreign intermediaries and certain non-U.S. stockholders. This legislation is generally effective for payments made after December 31, 2012. We will not pay any additional amounts in respect of any amounts withheld. Prospective investors should consult their own tax advisors regarding this new legislation.

U.S. Federal Estate Taxes

        Shares of our common stock owned or treated as owned by an individual who at the time of death is a non-U.S. stockholder are considered U.S. situs assets and will be included in the individual's estate for U.S. federal estate tax purposes, unless an applicable estate tax treaty provides otherwise.

State, Local and Foreign Taxes

        Our stockholders may be subject to state, local or foreign taxation in various jurisdictions, including those in which we or they transact business, own property or reside. We may conduct business or own assets located in numerous U.S. jurisdictions, and may be required to file tax returns in some or all of those jurisdictions. The state, local and foreign tax treatment of our stockholders may not conform to the U.S. federal income tax treatment discussed above. Prospective investors should consult their tax advisors regarding the application and effect of state, local and foreign income and other tax laws on an investment in our common stock.

111


Table of Contents


ERISA CONSIDERATIONS

        A fiduciary of a pension, profit sharing, retirement or other employee benefit plan, or plan, subject to the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as amended ("ERISA"), should consider the fiduciary standards under ERISA in the context of the plan's particular circumstances before authorizing an investment of a portion of such plan's assets in the shares of common stock. Accordingly, such fiduciary should consider (i) whether the investment satisfies the diversification requirements of Section 404(a)(1)(C) of ERISA, (ii) whether the investment is in accordance with the documents and instruments governing the plan as required by Section 404(a)(1)(D) of ERISA, and (iii) whether the investment is prudent under ERISA. In addition to the imposition of general fiduciary standards of investment prudence and diversification, ERISA, and the corresponding provisions of the Internal Revenue Code, prohibit a wide range of transactions involving the assets of the plan and persons who have certain specified relationships to the plan ("parties in interest" within the meaning of ERISA, "disqualified persons" within the meaning of Internal Revenue Code). Thus, a plan fiduciary considering an investment in the shares of common stock also should consider whether the acquisition or the continued holding of the shares of common stock might constitute or give rise to a direct or indirect prohibited transaction that is not subject to an exemption issued by the Department of Labor, or the DOL. Similar restrictions apply to many governmental and foreign plans which are not subject to ERISA. Thus, those considering investing in the shares of common stock on behalf of such a plan should consider whether the acquisition or the continued holding of the shares of common stock might violate any such similar restrictions.

        The DOL, has issued final regulations, or the DOL Regulations, as to what constitutes assets of an employee benefit plan under ERISA. Under the DOL Regulations, if a plan acquires an equity interest in an entity, which interest is neither a "publicly offered security" nor a security issued by an investment company registered under the Investment Company Act of 1940, the plan's assets would include, for purposes of the fiduciary responsibility provision of ERISA, both the equity interest and an undivided interest in each of the entity's underlying assets unless certain specified exceptions apply. The DOL Regulations define a publicly offered security as a security that is "widely held," "freely transferable," and either part of a class of securities registered under the Exchange Act, or sold pursuant to an effective registration statement under the Securities Act (provided the securities are registered under the Exchange Act within 120 days after the end of the fiscal year of the issuer during which the public offering occurred). The shares of common stock are being sold in an offering registered under the Securities Act and will be registered under the Exchange Act.

        The DOL Regulations provided that a security is "widely held" only if it is part of a class of securities that is owned by 100 or more investors independent of the issuer and of one another. A security will not fail to be "widely held" because the number of independent investors falls below 100 subsequent to the initial public offering as a result of events beyond the issuer's control. The company expects the common stock to be "widely held" upon completion of the initial public offering.

        The DOL Regulations provide that whether a security is "freely transferable" is a factual question to be determined on the basis of all relevant facts and circumstances. The DOL Regulations further provide that when a security is part of an offering in which the minimum investment is $10,000 or less, as is the case with this offering, certain restrictions ordinarily will not, alone or in combination, affect the finding that such securities are "freely transferable." We believe that the restrictions imposed under our charter on the transfer of our common stock are limited to the restrictions on transfer generally permitted under the DOL Regulations are not likely to result in the failure of common stock to be "freely transferable." The DOL Regulations only establish a presumption in favor of the finding of free transferability, and, therefore, no assurance can be given that the DOL will not reach a contrary conclusion.

112


Table of Contents

        Accordingly, we believe that our common stock will be publicly offered securities for purposes of the DOL Regulations and that our assets will not be deemed to be "plan assets" of any plan that invests in our common stock.

        Each holder of our common stock will be deemed to have represented and agreed that its purchase and holding of such common stock (or any interest therein) will not constitute or result in a non-exempt prohibited transaction under ERISA or Section 4975 of the Internal Revenue Code or violate any similar laws.

113


Table of Contents


UNDERWRITING (CONFLICTS OF INTEREST)

        We and the selling stockholders are offering the shares of our common stock described in this prospectus through Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC and Keefe, Bruyette & Woods, Inc., as the underwriters in this offering. Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC and Keefe, Bruyette & Woods, Inc. are acting as the joint book-running managers and representatives of the several underwriters. We and the selling stockholders have entered into an underwriting agreement with Keefe, Bruyette & Woods, Inc. and Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC as representative of the underwriters, dated                        , 2010. Subject to the terms and conditions of the Underwriting Agreement, each of the underwriters has severally agreed to purchase from us and the selling stockholders, and we and the selling stockholders have agreed to sell to the underwriters, the number of shares of common stock listed next to its name in the following table (the "Initial Shares").

Underwriter of Shares
  Number  

Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC

       

Keefe, Bruyette & Woods, Inc. 

       
       
 

Total

       
       

        In connection with this offering, the underwriters or securities dealers may distribute the prospectus to investors electronically.

Commissions and Discounts

        Shares of common stock sold by the underwriters to the public will be offered initially at the public offering price set forth on the cover of this prospectus. Any shares of common stock sold by the underwriters to securities dealers may be sold at a discount of up to $            per share from the public offering price. Any of these securities dealers may resell any shares of common stock purchased from the underwriters to other brokers or dealers at a discount of up to $            per share from the public offering price. After the initial public offering, the underwriters may change the offering price and the other selling terms. Sales of shares of common stock made outside of the United States may be made by affiliates of the underwriters.

        The following table shows the per share and total underwriting discounts and commissions we and the selling stockholders will pay to the underwriters, assuming both no exercise and full exercise of the underwriters' over-allotment option to purchase an additional                        shares of common stock:

 
  Company
No Exercise
  Company
Full Exercise
  Selling
Stockholder
No Exercise
  Selling
Stockholder
Full Exercise
 

Per Share

  $     $                
                   

Total

  $     $                
                   

        We estimate that the total expenses of this offering payable by us and the selling stockholders, not including the underwriting discounts and commissions but including our reimbursement of certain expenses of the underwriters, will be approximately $            .

        Prior to this offering, there has been no public market for our common stock. We intend to apply to list our common stock on the New York Stock Exchange under the symbol "             ." The initial public offering price for the common stock will be determined by negotiations among the underwriters, the selling stockholders and us and the initial public offering price of the common stock may not be indicative of the market price following this offering. Among the factors to be considered in determining the initial public offering price of the shares, in addition to prevailing market conditions, will be our historical and projected business, results of operations, liquidity and financial condition, an

114


Table of Contents


assessment of our management and the consideration of the various other matters referenced in this prospectus in relation to the market valuation of other comparable corporations.

Over-allotment Option

        We have granted the underwriters an option to purchase up to                                    additional shares of our common stock (the "Option Shares"), at the public offering price less the underwriting discounts and commissions. The underwriters may exercise this option in whole or from time to time in part solely for the purpose of covering over-allotments, if any, made in connection with this offering. The underwriters have 30 days from the date of this prospectus to exercise this option. If the underwriters exercise this option, each underwriter will be obligated, subject to the conditions in the Underwriting Agreement, to purchase a number of additional shares of our common stock proportionate to such underwriter's initial amount relative to the total amount reflected in the above table.

No Sales of Similar Securities

        We and our executive officers, directors, including our director nominees, participants in our directed share program and the selling stockholders will enter into lock-up agreements with the underwriters. Under these agreements, neither we nor any of these persons may, without the prior written approval of Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC and Keefe, Bruyette & Woods, Inc., subject to limited exceptions, (i) offer, pledge, sell, contract to sell, sell any option or contract to purchase, purchase any option or contract to sell, grant any option, right or warrant for the sale of, or otherwise dispose of or transfer, any shares of our common stock or any securities convertible into or exchangeable or exercisable for our common stock, whether now owned or hereafter acquired or with respect to which such person has or hereafter acquires the power of disposition, or file any registration statement under the Securities Act with respect to any of the foregoing or (ii) enter into any swap, hedge or any other agreement or any transaction that transfers, in whole or in part, directly or indirectly, the economic consequence of ownership of the shares of our common stock, whether any such swap, hedge or transaction is to be settled by delivery of shares of our common stock or other securities, in cash or otherwise. We will be subject to these restrictions for the 180-day Restricted Period. Our executive officers, directors, including our director nominees, participants in our directed share program and the selling stockholders will be subject to the 365-day Restricted Period. At any time and without public notice, Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC and Keefe, Bruyette & Woods, Inc. may, in their sole discretion, release all or some of the securities from these lock-up agreements.

        The Restricted Periods are subject to extension under limited circumstances. In the event that either: (1) during the period that begins on the date that is 15 calendar days plus 3 business days before the last day of any Restricted Period and ends on the last day of such Restricted Period, we issue an earnings release or material news or a material event relating to us occur; or (2) prior to the expiration of any Restricted Period, we announce that we will release earnings results during the 16-day period beginning on the last day of such Restricted Period, then such Restricted Period will continue to apply until the expiration of the date that is 15 calendar days plus 3 business days after the date on which the earnings release is issued or the material news or material event relating to us occurs.

Directed Share Program

        At our request, the underwriters have reserved for sale up to                         percent of the shares of our common stock to be sold in the offering, at the public offering price less the underwriting discounts and commissions, to our directors, officers, and other employees, principal stockholders and related persons. Any shares purchased under this directed share program are subject to the 365-day Restricted Period. The number of shares of our common stock available for sale to the general public will be reduced to the extent these persons purchase such reserved shares. Any reserved shares that are

115


Table of Contents


not so purchased will be offered by the underwriters to the general public on the same basis as the other shares offered by this prospectus.

Indemnification and Contribution

        We and the selling stockholders have agreed to indemnify the underwriters and their affiliates, selling agents and controlling persons against certain liabilities, including liabilities under the Securities Act. If we are unable to provide this indemnification, we will contribute to the payments the underwriters and their affiliates, selling agents and controlling persons may be required to make in respect of those liabilities.

Price Stabilization and Short Positions

        In connection with this offering, the underwriters may engage in activities that stabilize, maintain or otherwise affect the price of our common stock, including:

        Stabilizing transactions consist of bids or purchases made for the purpose of preventing or retarding a decline in the market price of our common stock while this offering is in progress. These transactions may also include making short sales of our common stock, which involve the sale by the underwriters of a greater number of shares of common stock than they are required to purchase in this offering. Short sales may be "covered short sales," which are short positions in an amount not greater than the underwriters' over-allotment option referred to above, or may be "naked short sales," which are short positions in excess of that amount.

        The underwriters may close out any covered short position either by exercising their over-allotment option, in whole or in part, or by purchasing shares in the open market. In making this determination, the underwriters will consider, among other things, the price of shares available for purchase in the open market compared to the price at which they may purchase shares through the over-allotment option. The underwriters must close out any naked short position by purchasing shares in the open market. A naked short position is more likely to be created if the underwriters are concerned that there may be downward pressure on the price of the common stock in the open market that could adversely affect investors who purchased in this offering.

        As a result of these activities, the price of our common stock may be higher than the price that otherwise might exist in the open market. If these activities are commenced, they may be discontinued by the underwriters at any time without notice. The underwriters may carry out these transactions on the New York Stock Exchange, in the over-the-counter market or otherwise.

Passive Market Making

        In connection with this offering, the underwriters and selling group members may engage in passive market making transactions in our common stock on the New York Stock Exchange in accordance with Rule 103 of Regulation M under the Exchange Act during a period before the commencement of offers or sales of common stock and extending through the completion of the distribution of this offering. A passive market maker must display its bid at a price not in excess of the highest independent bid of that security. However, if all independent bids are lowered below the passive market maker's bid, that bid must then be lowered when specified purchase limits are exceeded. Passive market making may cause the price of our common stock to be higher than the price that otherwise would exist in the open market in the absence of those transactions. The underwriters and

116


Table of Contents


dealers are not required to engage in a passive market making and may end passive market making activities at any time.

Affiliations

        The underwriters and their affiliates have provided certain commercial banking, financial advisory and investment banking services for us for which they receive fees.

        The underwriters and their affiliates may from time to time in the future perform services for us and engage in other transactions with us.

Conflicts of Interest

        An affiliate of Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC will own approximately        % of our common stock on a fully diluted basis upon completion of this offering (assuming no exercise of the underwriters' overallotment option) and two members of our board of directors are affiliated with Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC. Because of this relationship, this offering is being conducted in accordance with NASD Rule 2720. This rule requires, among other things, that a qualified independent underwriter has participated in the preparation of, and has exercised the usual standards of "due diligence" with respect to, this prospectus and the registration statement of which this prospectus is a part. Keefe, Bruyette & Woods, Inc. has agreed to act as qualified independent underwriter for this offering and to undertake the legal responsibilities and liabilities of an underwriter under the Securities Act, specifically including those inherent in Section 11 of the Securities Act.

Selling restrictions

European Economic Area

        In relation to each Member State of the European Economic Area which has implemented the Prospectus Directive (each, a "Relevant Member State"), each underwriter has represented and agreed that with effect from and including the date on which the Prospectus Directive is implemented in that Relevant Member State (the "Relative Implementation Date") an offer of shares of common stock which are the subject of the offering contemplated by this prospectus may not be made in that Relevant Member State except that an offer of shares to the public in that Relevant Member State may be made at any time under the following exemptions under the Prospectus Directive, if they have been implemented in that Relevant Member State:

provided that no such offer of shares of common stock shall result in a requirement for the publication by the company or the underwriter of a prospectus pursuant to Article 3 of the Prospectus Directive.

        For the purposes of this provision, the expression "an offer of shares to the public" in relation to any shares in any Relevant Member State means the communication in any form and by any means of sufficient information on the terms of the offer and the shares to be offered so as to enable an investor to decide to purchase or subscribe for the shares, as the same may be varied in that Relevant Member

117


Table of Contents


State by any measure implementing the Prospectus Directive in that Relevant Member State and the expression "Prospectus Directive" means Directive 2003/71/EC and includes any relevant implementing measure in each Relevant Member State.

United Kingdom

        Each underwriter has represented and agreed that:


LEGAL MATTERS

        Certain legal matters relating to this offering, including the validity of common stock offered hereby by us and by the selling stockholders will be passed upon for us by Hogan Lovells US LLP. Sidley Austin LLP will act as counsel to the underwriters.


EXPERTS

        The consolidated and combined financial statements of Walker & Dunlop, our predecessor (collectively, Walker & Dunlop, LLC, Walker & Dunlop Multifamily, Inc., Walker & Dunlop GP, LLC, GPF Acquisition, LLC, W&D, Inc., Green Park Financial Limited Partnership, Green Park Express, LLC, Walker & Dunlop II, LLC and W&D Balanced Real Estate Fund I GP, LLC), as of December 31, 2009 and 2008, and for each of the years in the three-year period ended December 31, 2009, have been included herein in reliance on the report of KPMG LLP, independent registered public accounting firm, appearing elsewhere herein, and upon the authority of said firm as experts in accounting and auditing.

        The Audit Report dated August 2, 2010, except as to Note 7, which is as of                  , on the Consolidated and Combined Financial Statements of Walker & Dunlop as of December 31, 2009 and 2008, and for each of the years in the three-year period ended December 31, 2009, refers to Walker & Dunlop's adoption of SEC Staff Accounting Bulletin No. 109 (included in FASB ASC Subtopic 815, Derivatives and Hedging ), effective January 1, 2008 and FASB Statement No. 159, Fair Value Option for Financial Assets and Financial Liabilities (included in FASB ASC Subtopic 825, Financial Instruments ), effective January 1, 2008.

118


Table of Contents


WHERE YOU CAN FIND MORE INFORMATION

        We maintain a website at www.walkerdunlop.com . Information contained on our website is not incorporated by reference into this prospectus and you should not consider information contained on our website to be part of this prospectus.

        We have filed with the SEC a registration statement on Form S-1, including exhibits, schedules and amendments filed with the registration statement, of which this prospectus is a part, under the Securities Act with respect to the shares of common stock we and the selling stockholders propose to sell in this offering. This prospectus does not contain all of the information set forth in the registration statement and exhibits and schedules to the registration statement. For further information with respect to our company and the shares of common stock to be sold in this offering, reference is made to the registration statement, including the exhibits and schedules thereto. Statements contained in this prospectus as to the contents of any contract or other document referred to in this prospectus are not necessarily complete and, where that contract or other document has been filed as an exhibit to the registration statement, each statement in this prospectus is qualified in all respects by the exhibit to which the reference relates. Copies of the registration statement, including the exhibits and schedules to the registration statement, may be examined without charge at the public reference room of the SEC, 100 F Street, N.E., Washington, DC 20549. Information about the operation of the public reference room may be obtained by calling the SEC at 1-800-SEC-0330. Copies of all or a portion of the registration statement can be obtained from the public reference room of the SEC upon payment of prescribed fees. Our SEC filings, including our registration statement, are also available to you, free of charge, on the SEC's website at http://www.sec.gov .

        As a result of this offering, we will become subject to the information and periodic reporting requirements of the Exchange Act and will file periodic reports and other information with the SEC. These periodic reports and other information will be available for inspection and copying at the SEC's public reference facilities and the website of the SEC referred to above.

119


Table of Contents

INDEX TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
CONTENTS

 
  PAGE

Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

  F-2

Consolidated and Combined Financial Statements of Walker & Dunlop:

   
 

Consolidated and Combined Balance Sheets as of December 31, 2009 and 2008

  F-3
 

Consolidated and Combined Statements of Income for the years ended December 31, 2009, 2008 and 2007

  F-4
 

Consolidated and Combined Statements of Changes in Equity for the years ended December 31, 2009, 2008 and 2007

  F-5
 

Consolidated and Combined Statements of Cash Flows for the years ended December 31, 2009, 2008 and 2007

  F-6
 

Notes to the Consolidated and Combined Financial Statements

  F-7

Schedule IV—Mortgage Loans on Real Estate as of December 31, 2009

 
F-30

Unaudited Condensed Consolidated and Combined Financial Statements of Walker & Dunlop:

   
 

Condensed Consolidated and Combined Balance Sheet as of June 30, 2010

  F-32
 

Condensed Consolidated and Combined Statements of Income for the six-month periods ended June 30, 2010 and 2009

  F-33
 

Condensed Consolidated and Combined Statements of Changes in Equity for the six-month period ended June 30, 2010

  F-34
 

Condensed Consolidated and Combined Statements of Cash Flows for the six-month periods ended June 30, 2010 and 2009

  F-35
 

Notes to the Condensed Consolidated and Combined Financial Statements

  F-36

Column Guaranteed LLC 2008 Financial Statements

 
F-45

F-1


Table of Contents

When the transaction referred to in Note 7 of the Notes to Financial Statements has been consummated, we will be in a position to render the following report.

/s/ KPMG LLP

REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

To the Board of Directors of
Walker & Dunlop, Inc.

        We have audited the accompanying consolidated and combined balance sheets of Walker & Dunlop as of December 31, 2009 and 2008, and the related consolidated and combined statements of income, changes in equity, and cash flows for each of the years in the three-year period ended December 31, 2009. In connection with our audit of the consolidated and combined financial statements, we have also audited financial statement schedule IV as of December 31, 2009. These consolidated and combined financial statements and financial statement schedule are the responsibility of the Company's management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these consolidated and combined financial statements and financial statement schedule based on our audits.

        We conducted our audits in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. An audit also includes assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.

        In our opinion, the consolidated and combined financial statements referred to above present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of Walker & Dunlop as of December 31, 2009 and 2008, and the results of their operations and their cash flows for each of the years in the three-year period ended December 31, 2009, in conformity with U.S. generally accepted accounting principles. Also in our opinion, the related financial statement schedule, when considered in relation to the basic consolidated and combined financial statements taken as a whole, presents fairly, in all material respects, the information set forth therein.

        As discussed in Note 2 to the consolidated and combined financial statements, in 2008 the Company changed its method of accounting for written loan commitments with the adoption of SEC Staff Accounting Bulletin No. 109 (included in FASB ASC Subtopic 815, Derivatives and Hedging) , and adopted, FASB Statement No. 159, Fair Value Option for Financial Assets and Financial Liabilities (included in FASB ASC Subtopic 825, Financial Instruments ), for certain financial assets and liabilities.

McLean, Virginia
August 2, 2010, except as to
Note 7, which is as of

F-2


Table of Contents


WALKER & DUNLOP

Consolidated and Combined Balance Sheets

(in thousands)

 
  December 31,  
 
  2009   2008  

Assets

             
 

Cash and cash equivalents

  $ 10,390   $ 6,812  
 

Restricted cash

    7,516     4,824  
 

Pledged securities, at fair value

    11,643     7,207  
 

Loans held for sale

    101,939     111,711  
 

Servicing fees and other receivables

    15,790     4,468  
 

Derivative assets

    11,153     8,028  
 

Mortgage servicing rights

    81,427     38,943  
 

Intangible assets

    1,398      
 

Other assets

    2,476     1,354  
           

Total Assets

  $ 243,732   $ 183,347  
           

Liabilities and Equity

             

Liabilities

             
 

Accounts payable and other accruals

  $ 18,753   $ 6,207  
 

Performance deposit from borrowers

    4,585     3,195  
 

Derivative liabilities

    6,707     8,384  
 

Guaranty obligation, net of accumulated amortization

    8,751     5,429  
 

Allowance for risk-sharing obligation

    5,552     1,101  
 

Warehouse notes payable

    96,612     107,005  
 

Notes payable

    32,961     38,176  
           

Total Liabilities

  $ 173,921   $ 169,497  
           

Equity

             
 

Members' equity

  $ 30,770   $ 13,850  
 

Non-controlling interest

    39,041      
           

Total Equity

  $ 69,811   $ 13,850  
           

Total Liabilities and Equity

  $ 243,732   $ 183,347  
           

See accompanying notes to consolidated and combined financial statements.

F-3


Table of Contents


WALKER & DUNLOP

Consolidated and Combined Statements of Income

(in thousands)

 
  For the Year Ended
December 31,
 
 
  2009   2008   2007  

Revenues

                   
 

Loan origination related fees

  $ 27,734   $ 14,113   $ 12,829  
 

Gain attributable to mortgage servicing rights

    30,212     15,315     9,101  
 

Servicing fees

    20,981     12,257     12,327  
 

Net warehouse interest income

    4,186     1,787     17  
 

Escrow earnings and other interest income

    1,769     3,428     8,993  
 

Other

    3,879     2,272     7,005  
               
   

Total revenues

  $ 88,761   $ 49,172   $ 50,272  
               

Expenses

                   
 

Personnel

  $ 32,177   $ 17,008   $ 16,779  
 

Amortization and depreciation

    12,917     7,804     9,067  
 

Provision for risk-sharing obligation

    2,265     1,101      
 

Interest expense on corporate debt

    1,684     2,679     3,853  
 

Other operating expenses

    11,114     6,548     4,240  
               
   

Total expenses

  $ 60,157   $ 35,140   $ 33,939  
               
 

Income from operations

  $ 28,604   $ 14,032   $ 16,333  
               
 

Gain on bargain purchase

    10,922          
               

Net income

  $ 39,526   $ 14,032   $ 16,333  
 

Less: non-controlling interest in net income

    14,740          
               

Net income attributable to Walker & Dunlop

  $ 24,786   $ 14,032   $ 16,333  
               

See accompanying notes to consolidated and combined financial statements.

F-4


Table of Contents


WALKER & DUNLOP

Consolidated and Combined Statement of Changes in Equity

For the Years Ended December 31, 2009, 2008 and 2007

(in thousands)

 
  Members'
Capital
  Retained
Earnings
  Members'
Interests
Acquired, at
Cost
  Accumulated
Other
Comprehensive
Income
  Non-
Controlling
Interest
  Total
(Deficit) Equity
 

Balance at January 1, 2007

  $ 1,279   $ 7,089   $ (9,459 ) $ (9 ) $   $ (1,100 )
                           
 

Net income

  $   $ 16,333   $   $   $   $ 16,333  
 

Unrealized loss on hedging instrument

                (33 )       (33 )
                                     
 

Comprehensive income

                                $ 16,300  
                                     
 

Contribution of equity

    840                     840  
 

Dividends

        (7,926 )               (7,926 )
                           

Balance at December 31, 2007

  $ 2,119   $ 15,496   $ (9,459 ) $ (42 ) $   $ 8,114  
                           
 

Net income

  $   $ 14,032   $   $   $   $ 14,032  
 

Unrealized gain on hedging instrument

                20         20  
                                     
 

Comprehensive income

                                $ 14,052  
                                     
 

Contribution of equity

    60                     60  
 

Purchase of members' interest

        (469 )   (354 )           (823 )
 

Dividends

        (7,553 )               (7,553 )
                           

Balance at December 31, 2008

  $ 2,179   $ 21,506   $ (9,813 ) $ (22 ) $   $ 13,850  
                           
 

Net income

  $   $ 24,786   $   $   $ 14,740   $ 39,526  
 

Unrealized gain on hedging instrument

                22         22  
                                     
 

Comprehensive income

                                $ 39,548  
                                     
 

Contribution of equity

    76                 26,400     26,476  
 

Capital reallocation

    (1,077 )   306             771      
 

Purchase of members' interest

            (13 )           (13 )
 

Dividends

        (7,180 )           (2,870 )   (10,050 )
                           

Balance at December 31, 2009

  $ 1,178   $ 39,418   $ (9,826 ) $   $ 39,041   $ 69,811  
                           

See accompanying notes to consolidated and combined financial statements.

F-5


Table of Contents


WALKER & DUNLOP

Consolidated and Combined Statements of Cash Flows

(in thousands)

 
  For the Year Ended
December 31,
 
 
  2009   2008   2007  

Cash flows from operating activities:

                   
 

Net income

  $ 39,526   $ 14,032   $ 16,333  
 

Reconciling adjustments:

                   
   

Gain attributable to mortgage servicing rights

    (30,212 )   (15,315 )   (9,101 )
   

Gain on bargain purchase

    (10,922 )        
   

Gain on sale of MSR, less prepayment of originated

                   
     

mortgage servicing rights

    899     521     2,961  
   

Provision for risk-sharing obligations

    2,265     1,101      
   

Amortization and depreciation

    12,917     6,759     6,106  
   

Loss on disposal of fixed assets

        58      
   

Originations of loans held for sale

    (1,742,482 )   (1,006,858 )   (935,960 )
   

Sales of loans to third parties

    1,752,875     922,153     1,215,760  
   

Changes in:

                   
     

Restricted cash and pledged securities

    1,995     (1,781 )   344  
     

Servicing fees and other receivables

    (11,298 )   99     (1,999 )
     

Derivative fair value adjustment

    (3,676 )   (868 )   19  
     

Intangible and other assets

    (1,098 )   (202 )   (257 )
     

Accounts payable and other accruals

    9,483     (704 )   587  
     

Performance deposits from borrowers

    619     1,530     (574 )
     

Cash paid to settle guaranty agreement

    (498 )       (309 )
               
 

Net cash provided by (used in) operating activities

  $ 20,393   $ (79,475 ) $ 293,910  
               

Cash flows used in investing activities:

                   
 

Capital expenditures

  $ (146 ) $ (228 ) $ (38 )
               
 

Net cash used in investing activities

  $ (146 ) $ (228 ) $ (38 )
               

Cash flows from financing activities:

                   
 

Warehouse notes payable, net

  $ (10,393 ) $ 84,705   $ (279,800 )
 

Notes payable

    (5,215 )   (7,332 )   (3,395 )
 

Contribution of equity

    76     60     841  
 

Dividends

    (10,050 )   (7,553 )   (7,926 )
 

Members' equity acquired at cost

    (13 )   (354 )    
 

Purchase of members' equity

        (469 )    
 

Cash received from acquisition of Column

    8,904          
 

Other

    22     21     (33 )
               
 

Net cash (used in) provided by financing activities

  $ (16,669 ) $ 69,078   $ (290,313 )
               

Net increase (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents

  $ 3,578   $ (10,625 ) $ 3,559  

Cash and cash equivalents—beginning of year

    6,812     17,437     13,878  
               

Cash and cash equivalents—end of year

  $ 10,390   $ 6,812   $ 17,437  
               

Supplemental Disclosure of Cash Flow Information

                   
 

Cash paid to third parties for interest

  $ 4,044   $ 4,978   $ 6,342  
               

See accompanying notes to consolidated and combined financial statements.

F-6


Table of Contents


WALKER & DUNLOP

Notes to Consolidated and Combined Financial Statements

NOTE 1—ORGANIZATION

        These financial statements represent a consolidation and combination of the Walker & Dunlop affiliated companies (the Company), all of which are controlled by an individual owner. W&D, Inc., Walker & Dunlop Multifamily, Inc., Walker & Dunlop GP, LLC, and GPF Acquisition, LLC are entities under common control and are combined herein. Green Park Financial Limited Partnership (Green Park) consolidates its majority-owned subsidiary, Walker & Dunlop, LLC (W&D LLC), and consolidates its wholly owned subsidiaries Walker & Dunlop II, LLC and Green Park Express, LLC and W&D LLC's wholly owned subsidiary, W&D Balanced Real Estate Fund I GP, LLC. Walker & Dunlop MultiFamily, Inc consolidates Green Park. Unless the context otherwise requires, references to "we," "us," "our" and the "Company" mean the Walker & Dunlop combined and consolidated companies.

        We are one of the leading providers of commercial real estate financial services in the United States, with a primary focus on multifamily lending. We originate, sell and service a range of multifamily and other commercial real estate financing products. Our clients are owners and developers of commercial real estate across the country. We originate pursuant to the programs of Fannie Mae and the Federal Home Loan Mortgage Corporation ("Freddie Mac," and together with Fannie Mae, the government-sponsored enterprises, or the "GSEs") and the Federal Housing Administration, a division of the U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development ("HUD"), with which we have long-established relationships. We also originate loans on behalf of institutional investors. We retain servicing rights and asset management responsibilities on nearly all loans that we sell to GSEs and HUD. We are approved as a Fannie Mae Delegated Underwriting and Servicing ("DUS" TM ) lender nationally, a Freddie Mac Program Plus lender in seven states, the District of Columbia and the metropolitan New York area and a HUD Multifamily Accelerated Processing ("MAP") lender nationally. We also originate and service loans for a number of life insurance companies and other institutional investors.

F-7


Table of Contents


WALKER & DUNLOP

Notes to Consolidated and Combined Financial Statements (Continued)

NOTE 1—ORGANIZATION (Continued)

        The principal activities of each of the previously separate affiliated companies are described below.

Entity
  Date and State of Incorporation   Principal Activities

W & D, Inc (formerly Walker & Dunlop, Inc)

  July 1, 1987   5% owner of Walker & Dunlop, LLC
 

("W&D, Inc" a Subchapter S Corporation)

  (Delaware)    

Walker & Dunlop Multifamily, Inc.

  April 25, 1988   50.5% limited partner of Green Park
 

("Multifamily," a Subchapter S Corporation)

  (Delaware)   Financial Limited Partnership ("Green Park")

Green Park Financial Limited Partnership

  July 23, 1990   60% owner of Walker & Dunlop, LLC
 

("Green Park," a Limited Partnership)

  (District of Columbia)   100% owner of Walker & Dunlop II, LLC

      100% owner of Green Park Express, LLC

Green Park Express, LLC

  April 25, 2006   Dormant
 

("GPE," a Limited Liability Company)

  (Delaware)    

Walker & Dunlop II, LLC

  January 26, 2009   0.2% owner of Walker & Dunlop, LLC
 

"W&D II LLC," a Limited Liability Company

  (Delaware)    

Walker & Dunlop GP, LLC

  October 22, 1996   0.5% general partner of Green Park
 

("GP LLC," a Limited Liability Company)

  (Delaware)    

W&D Balanced Real Estate Fund I GP, LLC

  April 23, 2007   Provides overhead and other services to real estate fund
 

("Balanced Fund," a Limited Liability Company)

  (Delaware)    

GPF Acquisition, LLC

  October 23, 2006   49% limited partner of Green Park
 

("GPFA," a Limited Liability Company)

  (Delaware)    

Walker & Dunlop, LLC

  November 2, 2008   Commercial real estate financial services
 

("W&D LLC," a Limited Liability Company)

  (Delaware)    

        On January 30, 2009, substantially all of the assets and liabilities of W&D Inc. and Green Park, companies under the common control of an individual owner, were merged with substantially all of the assets and liabilities of Column Guaranteed LLC (Column), a subsidiary of Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC, effective January 30, 2009 (the Merger), to form Walker & Dunlop, LLC (W&D LLC). The merger was accounted for as an acquisition of Column (Note 3).

NOTE 2—SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES

        Principles of Consolidation and Combination —The consolidated and combined financial statements include the accounts of the Company as defined in Note 1. Combined financial statements are presented due to the common control of the included entities. All material intercompany transactions have been eliminated. We have evaluated all subsequent events through August 2, 2010.

        Cash and Cash Equivalents —The term cash and cash equivalents, as used in the accompanying consolidated and combined financial statements, includes currency on hand, demand deposits with financial institutions, and short-term, highly liquid investments purchased with a maturity of three months or less.

F-8


Table of Contents


WALKER & DUNLOP

Notes to Consolidated and Combined Financial Statements (Continued)

NOTE 2—SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES (Continued)

        Restricted Cash —Restricted cash represents amounts set aside by employees for health care flex spending accounts, deferred compensation, Column advance, and good faith deposits at December 31, 2009 and 2008 as follows ($ in thousands):

 
  Balance at December 31,  
 
  2009   2008  

Good faith deposits

  $ 3,854   $ 3,206  

Column advance

    2,211      

Deferred compensation (Note 10)

    1,419     1,595  

Employee flex deposits

    32     23  
           

  $ 7,516   $ 4,824  
           

        Pledged Securities —As security for its GSE risk sharing obligations (Notes 5 and 10), certain securities have been pledged to the benefit of Fannie Mae to secure the Company's risk sharing obligation. The balances for these pledged securities at December 31, 2009 and 2008, are as follows ($ in thousands):

Investment
  2009   2008   Maturity date  

Toyota Motor Credit Corporation

  $ 1,750   $     January 15, 2010  

Federal Home Loan Bank

    1,852         January 15, 2010  

Toyota Motor Credit Corporation

    1,300         January 27, 2010  

General Electric Capital Services

    1,600         February 3, 2010  

General Electric Capital Services

    1,350         February 12, 2010  

Toyota Motor Credit Corporation

    400         March 1, 2010  

HSBC Finance Corporation

    3,393         March 1, 2010  

Toyota Motor Credit Corporation

        4,165     January 31, 2009  

American Honda Financial Corporation

        1,525     February 23, 2009  

General Electric Capital Services

        1,525     February 24, 2010  
                 
 

Face value of securities

  $ 11,645   $ 7,215        
 

Unamortized discount

    (2 )   (8 )      
                 

  $ 11,643   $ 7,207        
                 

        Asset balances per the financial statements are reduced by the amount of unamortized discount. Amortized cost approximates fair value.

        Concentrations of Credit Risk —Financial instruments, which potentially subject the Company to concentrations of credit risk, consist principally of cash and cash equivalents, loans held for sale and derivative financial instruments.

        The Company places the cash and temporary investments with high-credit-quality financial institutions and believes no significant credit risk exists. The counterparties to the loans held for sale and funding commitments are owners of residential multifamily properties located throughout the United States. Mortgage loans are generally transferred or sold within 2 to 45 days from the date that a mortgage loan is funded.

F-9


Table of Contents


WALKER & DUNLOP

Notes to Consolidated and Combined Financial Statements (Continued)

NOTE 2—SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES (Continued)

        There is no material counterparty risk with respect to the Company's funding commitments in that each potential borrower must make a non-refundable good faith deposit when the funding commitment is executed. The counterparty to the forward sales generally is an investment bank. There is a risk that the purchase price agreed to by Fannie Mae or the other investor will be reduced in the event of a late delivery. The risk for non-delivery of a loan primarily results from the risk that a borrower does not close on the funding commitment in a timely manner, which generally is a risk mitigated by the non-refundable good faith deposit.

        Fair Value Measurement —The Company uses fair value measurements to record fair value adjustments to certain assets and liabilities and to determine fair value disclosures.

        On January 1, 2008, the company adopted SEC Staff Accounting Bulletin 109 (ASC 815-10-S99) which requires that the fair value of written loan commitments that are marked-to-market through earnings should include future cash flows related to mortgage servicing rights. This has the effect of recognizing income on originating loans when loan sale commitments are executed.

        On January 1, 2008, the Company also elected to measure certain financial instruments at fair value (ASC-825). Unrealized gains and losses on financial instruments for which the fair value option has been elected, namely loans held for sale, are included in earnings. Electing to use fair value allows a better offset of the change in fair value of the loan and the derivative instruments used as an economic hedge.

        Loans Held for Sale —Loans held for sale represent originated loans that are generally transferred or sold within 2 to 45 days from the date that a mortgage loan is funded. All originated mortgage loans are recorded and subsequently measured at fair value, unless contemporaneous documentation to the contrary is put in place at the time of the loan's closing. During the period prior to its sale, interest income on the loans held for sale is calculated in accordance with the terms of each individual loan. There were no loans that were on a non-accrual status at December 31, 2009 and 2008.

        Derivative Assets and Liabilities —Certain loan commitments and forward sales commitments meet the definition of a derivative and are recorded at fair value in the consolidated and combined balance sheets. Adjustments to fair value are reflected as a component of income. Prior to our January 1, 2008, adoption of the fair value measurement provisions, certain forward sales commitments qualified as fair value hedges of loans held for sale and are recorded as such in the financial statements.

        Revenue Recognition for Mortgage Servicing Rights Activities —Transfer of financial assets is reported as a sale when (a) the transferor surrenders control over those assets and (b) consideration other than beneficial interests in the transferred assets is received in exchange. The transferor is considered to have surrendered control over transferred assets if, and only if, certain conditions are met. The Company has determined that all loans sold have met these specific conditions and accounts for all transfers of mortgage loans and mortgage participations as completed sales.

        When the mortgage loans are sold, the Company retains the right to service the loan and initially recognizes the Mortgage Servicing Right ("MSR") at fair value. Subsequent to the initial measurement date, mortgage servicing assets are amortized using the effective interest method.

        When loans are sold under the Fannie Mae DUS program, the Company undertakes an obligation to partially guarantee the performance of the loan. At inception, a liability for the fair value of the

F-10


Table of Contents


WALKER & DUNLOP

Notes to Consolidated and Combined Financial Statements (Continued)

NOTE 2—SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES (Continued)


obligation undertaken in issuing the guaranty is recognized. Subsequent to the initial measurement date, the liability is amortized over the life of the guaranty period using the straight-line method.

        Gains and losses on the sales of mortgage loans are recognized based upon the difference between the selling price and the carrying value of the related mortgage loans sold. The gain on the sale of mortgage loans is reported in the accompanying consolidated and combined statements of income as loan origination fees (representing loan origination related fees, net of co-broker fees, collected from the borrower and income attributable to premium pricing) and gain attributable to MSRs, net of Guaranty obligations (representing the fair values assigned to MSRs and Guaranty obligations). The co-broker fees for the years ended December 31, 2009, 2008 and 2007 were $10.1 million, $6.4 million and $2.8 million, respectively.

        Servicing Fees —Fees for servicing mortgage loans are recorded as revenue over the lives of the related mortgage loans (Note 6).

        Amortization —Amortization expense principally relates to mortgage servicing rights (Note 4).

        Deferred Bonuses —Certain members of senior management are eligible to receive bonus compensation if certain financial performance targets are met over specified three-year periods and they are employed at the end of the three-year period. Compensation expense is recognized ratably over the service period. If the officer ceases to be employed by the Company, the accrued liability is reduced to zero and recorded as a reduction of current year compensation expense.

        Other Operating Expenses —Other operating expenses consist primarily of marketing fees, professional fees, travel, entertainment, and office expenses (Note 14).

        Use of Estimates —The preparation of consolidated and combined financial statements in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America requires management to make estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets, liabilities, revenues and expenses, including guaranty obligations, and capitalized mortgage servicing rights, derivative instruments and hedging relationships, and the disclosure of contingent assets and liabilities. Actual results may vary from these estimates.

        Comprehensive Income —Comprehensive income is comprised of net income and other comprehensive income. Other comprehensive income includes changes in unrealized gains and losses on financial instruments. Comprehensive income is presented in the consolidated and combined statements of changes in members' equity.

        Income Taxes —The Company has elected pass-through tax status under the provisions of the Internal Revenue Code and the various states in which they are qualified to do business. As pass through entities, the Company is not subject to federal, state and local income taxes as the owners separately account for their pro-rata share of the Company's items of income, deductions, losses and credits. Therefore, no provision is made in the accompanying financial statements for liabilities for federal, state and local income taxes since such liabilities are the responsibilities of the individual owners. The Company files income tax returns in the applicable U.S federal, state and local jurisdictions and generally is subject to examination by the respective jurisdictions for three years from the filing of a tax return.

F-11


Table of Contents


WALKER & DUNLOP

Notes to Consolidated and Combined Financial Statements (Continued)

NOTE 2—SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES (Continued)

        Recently Issued Accounting Pronouncements —In June 2009, the FASB issued FAS No. 167 (ASC 810) to amend requirements for consolidating variable interest entities. This amendment changes the determination of the primary beneficiary in a variable interest entity. In January 2010, the FASB voted to finalize Accounting Standards Update (ASU) amendments to Accounting Standards Codification (ASC 810) for Certain Investment Funds. The ASU will defer the effective date for a reporting enterprise's interest in certain entities. It addresses concerns that the joint consolidation model under development by the FASB and IASB and may result in a different conclusion for asset managers and that an asset manager consolidating certain funds would not provide useful information to investors. We do not expect these standards to have a material effect on our financial statements.

        In June 2009, the FASB issued FAS No. 166, Accounting for Transfers of Financial Assets—an amendment of FASB Statement 140 (as codified in ASC Topic 860, Transfers and Servicing (ASC 860)). ASU No. 2009-16 issued in December 2009 removes the concept of a qualifying special purpose entity from Topic 860 and removes the exception from applying Topic 810, Consolidation of Variable Interest Entities, for qualifying special purpose entities. This ASU modifies the financial components approach used in ASC 860 and limits the circumstances in which a financial asset, or portion of a financial asset, should be derecognized. Additionally, enhanced disclosures are required to provide financial statement users with greater transparency about transfers of financial assets and a transferor's continuing involvement with transferred financial assets. ASC 860 is effective January 1, 2010. The adoption of the revised guidance is not expected to have a material impact on our financial statements.

NOTE 3—MERGER AND RESTRUCTURING ACTIVITY

        On January 30, 2009, W&D Inc. and Green Park merged with Column to form W&D LLC. The merger transferred substantially all of the assets and liabilities of Green Park and W&D Inc. into W&D LLC in exchange for 60 percent and 5 percent of W&D LLC, respectively. Simultaneously, Column transferred certain assets and liabilities into W&D LLC for a 35 percent interest.

        The merger with Column was treated as an acquisition of Column. The purchase price of Column was allocated to the assets and liabilities acquired based on their estimated fair values at the acquisition date. Green Park and W&D Inc. are related parties under the common control of a single investor. Accordingly, their assets and liabilities transferred to W&D LLC were recorded at the carrying amounts in the records of Green Park and W&D Inc., respectively, at the date of acquisition, January 30, 2009.

F-12


Table of Contents


WALKER & DUNLOP

Notes to Consolidated and Combined Financial Statements (Continued)

NOTE 3—MERGER AND RESTRUCTURING ACTIVITY (Continued)

        Statement of Net Assets Acquired —The following statement of net assets acquired reflects the value assigned to Column's net assets as of the acquisition date ($ in thousands):

 
  January 30, 2009  

ASSETS

       
 

Cash and restricted cash received

  $ 18,028  
 

Servicing fees and other receivables

    499  
 

Mortgage servicing rights

    24,988  
 

Agency licenses

    1,400  
 

Pipeline intangible assets

    759  
 

Below market leases

    300  
       
   

Total assets

  $ 45,974  
       

LIABILITIES

       
 

Accounts payable

  $ 1,131  
 

Contingent obligations

    1,932  
 

Performance deposits from borrowers

    771  
 

Allowance for risk sharing obligations

    2,684  
 

Guaranty obligation

    2,134  
       
   

Total liabilities

  $ 8,652  
       

NET ASSETS

  $ 37,322  
       

        The fair values of the Column assets and liabilities acquired were estimated using discounted cash flow valuation techniques. The estimated cash inflows and outflows from these assets and liabilities acquired were discounted using a market rate of return.

        Contingent Obligations Acquired —The fair value of the net Column assets acquired include certain contingent liabilities that were recorded as of the acquisition date. These contingent liabilities have been recorded at their acquisition date fair values. The contingent liabilities recorded by the Company as of the acquisition date consist of bonus liabilities and recourse obligations under the Fannie Mae DUS program. Fair value was determined as amounts expected to be paid under the arrangements. The effect of discounting these contingencies is not significant.

        Also as a condition of the merger, Column transferred its recourse obligations with respect to the Fannie Mae DUS program to the Company. As a member of the DUS program, Column sold certain multifamily mortgages that it had originated to Fannie Mae and agreed to guarantee one-third of any ultimate loss on the loan should the borrower fail to perform, with Fannie Mae bearing the remainder of the loss. On January 30, 2009, and simultaneous with the merger, the Company reached agreement with Fannie Mae who converted the Column historical loss sharing formula to standard DUS loss sharing whereby the Company bears the first five percent of the loss, and certain amounts after that with a maximum exposure of 20 percent of the original unpaid principal balance of the loan. The Company acquired the servicing of Fannie Mae DUS loans from Column as part of the acquisition.

        At January 30, 2009, the Company estimated the fair value of the risk-sharing obligation as of the acquisition date and recorded the obligation as a component of Guaranty obligations. The Guaranty

F-13


Table of Contents


WALKER & DUNLOP

Notes to Consolidated and Combined Financial Statements (Continued)

NOTE 3—MERGER AND RESTRUCTURING ACTIVITY (Continued)


obligation acquired from Column had three components (a) the fair value of the cost to stand ready to perform under the guarantee provisions for Fannie Mae DUS loans ("stand-ready component"), (b) the fair value of the obligation expected to be paid under the guarantee all loans acquired ("contingent component"), and (c) the fair value of the loss expected to be paid under the guarantee for 1 loan ("risk loss").

        To estimate the fair value of the stand-ready component of the Guaranty obligation acquired from Column, the Company used estimates of future costs to be incurred to monitor and comply with the terms of the guarantee obligation. The total obligation measured using a discounted cash flow technique was estimated to be $0.8 million at January 30, 2009. The stand-ready component is amortized ratably over the life of the loan on a straight-line basis.

        To estimate the fair value of the contingent component acquired from Column, the Company used estimates of the losses expected to be incurred based on a collateral valuation approach adjusted for probability of incurrence. The total contingent component was estimated to be $1.9 million at January 30, 2009. Similar to the stand-ready component, the contingent component is amortized ratably over the life of the loan on a straight-line basis.

        The fair value of the risk sharing obligation acquired from Column was estimated as the amount expected to be paid under the Guaranty obligation. This estimate considered each loan and an assessment of the likelihood of performance under the obligation, and expected losses in the event of performance. Management determined that the likelihood of non-performance was probable for one loan and determined the fair value of the probable loss using a collateral-based approach. The estimated obligation was recorded at fair value and not discounted or adjusted for probability of occurrence. The total fair value of the risk loss was estimated to be $2.1 million at January 30, 2009. The risk of loss is reviewed for adequacy on at least an annual basis and adjusted as circumstances warrant, or as payments are made under the obligation.

        Gain on Bargain Purchase —A gain on bargain purchase is recognized in a business combination in the event the total acquisition date fair value of the identifiable net assets acquired exceeds the fair value of the consideration transferred. The merger was achieved through the exchange of assets and liabilities for equity interests in the Company. The gain on bargain purchase of $10.9 million is calculated as the total acquisition date fair value for the identifiable net assets acquired, less the fair value of the consideration transferred. The table below summarizes the calculation of the gain on bargain purchase ($ in thousands):

Fair value of net assets acquired

  $ 37,322  

Consideration transferred

    (26,400 )
       
 

Gain on bargain purchase

  $ 10,922  
       

        The economic and credit environments at the time of the transaction, combined with participation in certain real estate markets and transactions, has resulted in a number of institutions exiting certain real estate related businesses.

F-14


Table of Contents


WALKER & DUNLOP

Notes to Consolidated and Combined Financial Statements (Continued)

NOTE 3—MERGER AND RESTRUCTURING ACTIVITY (Continued)

        Pro Forma Results —The following pro forma results of operations assume that the acquisition of Column was completed as of January 1, 2009 for 2009 and January 1, 2008 for 2008.

 
  2009   2008  

Revenues

  $ 89,662   $ 72,043  
           

Net income

  $ 38,641   $ 15,469  
           

        The revenues and income reported for the year 2009 for the Company include amounts attributed to Column; however, these amounts cannot be separately reported because the operations of Column have been integrated into those of the Company as part of the merger and the amounts are no longer separately maintained.

NOTE 4—MORTGAGE SERVICING RIGHTS

        Mortgage servicing rights (MSR) represent the fair value of the servicing rights retained by the Company for mortgage loans originated and sold. The capitalized amount is equal to the estimated fair value of the future expected cash flows associated with the servicing rights. The following describes the key assumptions used in calculating each loan's MSR:

        Discount rate —Depending upon loan type, the discount rate used is management's best estimate of market discount rates. The rates used for loans originated were 12% to 15% for each of the three years presented.

        Estimated Life —The estimated life of the MSRs approximates the stated maturity date of the underlying loan and may be reduced by 6 to 12 months based upon the expiration of various types of prepayment penalty lockout provisions prior to that stated maturity date.

        Servicing Cost —The estimated future cost to service the loan for the estimated life of the MSR is subtracted from the estimated future cash flows.

        The fair values of the MSRs at December 31, 2009 and 2008 were $96,685 and $48,700, respectively. Changes in the fair value of MSRs reflect the change in discount rates largely due to changes in interest rates. The Company uses a discounted static cash flow valuation approach and the key economic assumption is the discount rate, for example see the following sensitivities:

    The impact of 100 basis point decrease at December 31, 2009 is $2.4 million.

    The impact of 100 basis point increase at December 31, 2009 is $2.5 million.

        These sensitivities are hypothetical and should be used with caution. These estimates do not include interplay among assumptions and are estimated as a portfolio rather than individual assets.

F-15


Table of Contents


WALKER & DUNLOP

Notes to Consolidated and Combined Financial Statements (Continued)

NOTE 4—MORTGAGE SERVICING RIGHTS (Continued)

        Activity related to capitalized MSRs for each of the years ended December 31, 2009, 2008 and 2007 was as follows ($ in thousands):

 
  2009   2008   2007  

Beginning balance

  $ 38,943   $ 32,994   $ 32,314  

Acquisition date fair value of MSRs contributed by Column acquisition

    24,988          

Additions

    31,119     13,579     10,219  

Amortization

    (12,610 )   (7,110 )   (6,326 )

Write-offs of asset

    (1,013 )   (520 )   (3,213 )
               

Year end balance

  $ 81,427   $ 38,943   $ 32,994  
               

        The rights are being amortized in proportion to and over the period of net servicing income using the effective interest method. The Company reported write downs of MSRs related to loans that were repaid prior to the expected maturity or the servicing rights being sold. These write-offs are included with the amortization and depreciation expense in the accompanying consolidated and combined statements of income. Prepayment fees and sale proceeds from the sale of MSRs totaling $1.3 million, $0.7 million and $2.6 million were collected for 2009, 2008, and 2007 respectively.

        The gain attributable to mortgage servicing rights activities, net of Guaranty obligations consists of the following activity for each of the years ended December 31, 2009, 2008 and 2007 ($ in thousands):

 
  2009   2008   2007  

Gain on mortgage servicing rights activities

  $ 27,329   $ 13,579   $ 10,219  

Reduction in gain for originated guaranty obligation

    (2,082 )   (1,765 )   (1,118 )

Fair value of MSR related to rate lock commitments and mortgage loans held for sale

    4,965     3,501      
               

Total gain attributable to mortgage servicing rights activities

  $ 30,212   $ 15,315   $ 9,101  
               

        Management periodically reviews the capitalized MSRs for impairment. MSRs are measured for impairment on an asset-by-asset basis considering factors such as debt service coverage ratio, property location, loan-to-value ratio and property type. No impairments other than write-offs discussed above have been recognized for the years presented.

NOTE 5—GUARANTY OBLIGATION

        When a loan is sold under the Fannie Mae DUS program, the Company typically agrees to guarantee a portion of the ultimate loss incurred on the loan should the borrower fail to perform. The compensation for this risk is a component of the servicing fee on the loan and is considered in the calculation of MSRs. No guarantee obligation is required for loans sold under the Freddie Mac or HUD loan programs.

        Upon the execution of a guaranty for an unconsolidated entity, the Company recognizes upon inception of the guaranty, the greater of the fair value of the guarantor's obligation to stand ready to perform over the term of the guaranty in the event that specified triggering events or conditions occur

F-16


Table of Contents


WALKER & DUNLOP

Notes to Consolidated and Combined Financial Statements (Continued)

NOTE 5—GUARANTY OBLIGATION (Continued)


(the non-contingent guaranty), or the contingent obligation to make future payments should those triggering events or conditions occur.

        Generally, we record the fair value of the non-contingent obligation as it is the greater of the two at inception of the guaranty. This amount is presented as the "Guaranty obligation" in the financial statements with a corresponding reduction in gain attributable to mortgage servicing rights. The capitalized cost, and resulting reduction to the gain, for the years ended December 31, 2009, 2008 and 2007, was $2.1 million, $1.8 million and $1.1 million, respectively. We subsequently amortize the Guaranty obligation on a straight-line basis over the life of the mortgage loan with a corresponding reduction in amortization expense. The corresponding reduction in amortization expense for all capitalized guarantee obligations was $1.4 million, $0.5 million and $0.8 million for the years ended December 31, 2009, 2008 and 2007, respectively.

        In determining the fair value of the Guaranty obligation at inception, we consider the risk profile of the collateral, historical loss experience, and various market indicators. Generally, the estimated fair value of the Guaranty obligation is based on its present value using a 12-15 percent discount rate (3 to 5 basis points per year) and an estimated life of the loan. The discount rate and estimated life used are consistent with those used for the calculation of the MSR.

        Subsequently, we evaluate the potential contingent guarantee by monitoring the performance of each loan for triggering events or conditions that may signal a potential default. In situations where payment under the contingent guaranty is probable and estimable on a specific loan, we record an additional liability for the estimated allowance for risk sharing through a charge to the provision for risk-sharing obligations in the income statement. Along with a write-off of the loan-specific MSR. A summary of our allowance for risk sharing for the contingent portion of the guarantee obligation for each of the years ended December 31, 2009, 2008, and 2007 was ($ in thousands):

 
  2009   2008   2007  

Balance at January 1

  $ 1,101   $   $ 255  
 

Write offs

    (498 )       (255 )
 

Provision for risk-sharing obligations

    2,265     1,101      
 

Contribution by Column (Note 3)

    2,684          
               

Balance at December 31

  $ 5,552   $ 1,101   $  
               

        As of December 31, 2009 and 2008, the maximum quantifiable contingent liability associated with guarantees was $1.2 billion and $712.0 million, respectively. The maximum quantifiable contingent liability is not representative of the actual loss we would incur. We would be liable for this amount only if all of the loans we service for Fannie Mae, for which we retain some risk of loss, were to default and all of the collateral underlying these loans were worthless.

F-17


Table of Contents


WALKER & DUNLOP

Notes to Consolidated and Combined Financial Statements (Continued)

NOTE 6—SERVICING

        The amount of loans the Company was servicing for various institutional investors was as follows at December 31, 2009 and 2008 ($ in thousands):

 
  2009   2008  

Unpaid principal balance of loans

  $ 13,111,261   $ 6,976,208  
           

        At December 31, 2009 and 2008, custodial escrow accounts relating to loans serviced by the Company totaled $208.7 million and $115.5 million, respectively. These amounts are not included in the accompanying balance sheets as such amounts are not company assets. Certain cash deposits at other financial institutions exceed the FDIC insured limits. The Company places these deposits with major financial institutions where we believe the risk of loss to be minimal.

NOTE 7—FORMATION TRANSACTIONS

        As part of the formation transactions, Walker & Dunlop, Inc. (WDI) was incorporated in Maryland on July 29, 2010, and has had no activity other than its initial capitalization. On                  , 2010, the shares of the Company's interests were exchanged for shares of WDI, resulting in              of shares of our common stock outstanding. This exchange has been treated as a stock-split and earnings per share for all periods presented have been adjusted accordingly.

        Basic EPS and Diluted EPS are computed by dividing income available to common stockholders by the weighted-average number of shares outstanding for the period. Changes in ownership interests during any period are weighted for the portion of the period that they were outstanding. No dilutive securities were issued as part of the formation transaction.

        The following is a calculation of the basic and diluted earnings per share for the years ended December 31 ($ in thousands, except per share data):

 
  2009   2008   2007  

Net income

  $ 39,526   $ 14,032   $ 16,333  

Weighted average number of common shares

                   
               

Basic and diluted income per share

  $     $     $    
               

        The owners of the non-controlling interest have agreed to participate with the members of the Company on an equal basis in the formation of WDI; therefore, their ownership and earnings have been included in this computation.

NOTE 8—NOTES PAYABLE

        Warehouse notes payable —To provide financing to borrowers under GSE and HUD programs, the Company has arranged for warehouse lines of credit totaling $300,000,000 with certain national banks. In support of these credit facilities, the Company has pledged its loans held for sale under the Company's approved programs.

F-18


Table of Contents


WALKER & DUNLOP

Notes to Consolidated and Combined Financial Statements (Continued)

NOTE 8—NOTES PAYABLE (Continued)

        The outstanding borrowings under the warehouse notes payable at December 31, 2009 and 2008 are as follows ($ in thousands):

Institution
  2009   2008   Interest rate

Warehouse facility

  $ 11,149   $ 39,764   Average 30-day LIBOR plus 2.50%

Warehouse facility

    23,514     46,219   Average 30-day LIBOR plus 2.75%

Fannie Mae Repurchase agreement uncommitted line and open maturity

    61,949     21,022   Average 30-day LIBOR plus 1.00%
             
 

Total

  $ 96,612   $ 107,005    
             

        The average 30-day LIBOR was 0.23% and 1.08% as of December 31, 2009 and 2008, respectively. Interest expense under the warehouse notes payable for the years ended December 31, 2009, 2008 and 2007 aggregated $2.3 million, $2.4 million and $2.6 million, respectively. Included in interest expense in 2009, 2008 and 2007 are facility fees of $0.2 million, $0.1 million, and $0.1 million, respectively.

        We have a $150 million committed warehouse line that matures on November 29, 2010. The agreement provides us with the ability to fund our Fannie Mae, Freddie Mac and HUD closings. Advances are made at 100% of the loan balance and borrowings under this line bear interest at the average 30-day LIBOR plus 275 basis points.

        This warehouse line includes various operating and financial covenants at the Walker & Dunlop, LLC entity level, including requirements for a minimum tangible net worth of $75 million, debt to tangible net worth ratio of no more than 6 to 1, minimum liquid assets of at least $7 million, a maximum delinquency rate of no more than 2% (based on the unpaid principal amount of Fannie Mae DUS loans comprising our servicing portfolio that are sixty or more days delinquent), and a maximum delinquency rate increase of no more than 0.5% (based on the aggregate amount of unpaid principal amount of Fannie Mae at risk mortgage loans) from quarter-end to quarter-end. We were in breach of the delinquency rate covenant as of June 30, 2010, based on our delinquency rate increase of 0.7% from March 31, 2010 to June 30, 2010. The lenders under this warehouse line waived the breach, any related cross-defaults were waived and the covenant was amended to increase the maximum delinquency rate increase to 1% from quarter-end to quarter-end.

        We have a $150 million committed warehouse line that matures on June 29, 2011. The agreement provides us with the ability to fund our Fannie Mae, Freddie Mac, and HUD loan closings. Advances are made at 100% of the loan balance and borrowings under this line bear interest at the average 30-day LIBOR plus 250 basis points. This warehouse line includes various operating and financial covenants at the Walker & Dunlop, LLC entity level, including requirements for a minimum adjusted tangible net worth of $85 million, debt to adjusted tangible net worth ratio of no more than 3 to 1, a minimum cash and cash equivalents of at least $7 million, a maximum delinquency rate of no more than 2% (based on the unpaid principal amount of mortgage loans comprising our servicing portfolio that are sixty or more days delinquent) and a maximum delinquency rate increase of no more than 2% (based on the aggregate amount of unpaid principal amount of at risk mortgage loans) from quarter-end to quarter-end.

        We have a $250 million uncommitted facility with Fannie Mae under its As Soon As Pooled funding program. After approval of certain loan documents, Fannie Mae will fund loans after closing and the advances are used to repay the primary warehouse line. Fannie Mae will advance 99% of the

F-19


Table of Contents


WALKER & DUNLOP

Notes to Consolidated and Combined Financial Statements (Continued)

NOTE 8—NOTES PAYABLE (Continued)


loan balance and borrowings under this program bear interest at the average 30-day LIBOR plus 100 basis points. There is no expiration date for this facility.

        We have an unlimited uncommitted warehouse line and repurchase facility that matures March 31, 2011. The line provides us with the ability to fund Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac loans. Advances are made at 100% of the loan balance less warehouse interest costs that will not be funded through the loan purchase settlement. Borrowings under this line bear interest at the average 30-day LIBOR plus 275 basis points. This warehouse line includes various operating and financial covenants at the Walker & Dunlop, LLC entity level, including requirements for a minimum net worth of $2 million and minimum liquid assets of $200,000.

        Notes Payable —Borrowings for notes payable at December 2009 and 2008, are as follows ($ in thousands):

 
  December 31,    
Institution
  2009   2008   Interest rate and repayments

Bank—$7.6 million note due January 28, 2011

  $ 1,892   $ 3,507   7.275% fixed rate with monthly amortization and interest

Bank—$42.5 million note due October 31, 2011

   
30,600
   
34,200
 

average 30-day LIBOR plus 3.50% monthly interest, quarterly principal of $900,000

Three notes to former partners, due in full upon repayment of the $42.5 million bank note

   
469
   
469
 

90-day LIBOR plus 2.00% interest paid monthly, no principal amortization

             
 

Total

 
$

32,961
 
$

38,176
   
             

        The bank debt of $42.5 million was originally scheduled to mature on October 31, 2009; an option to extend the maturity for two years was exercised. The Company has the right to exercise a second option to extend the maturity date to October 31, 2013.

        The bank debt that is due January 28, 2011, and had a remaining balance of $1.9 million at December 31, 2009, is guaranteed by the Company's principal shareholder.

        All of the notes payable, including the warehouse facilities, are senior obligations of the Company.

        The scheduled maturities as of December 31, 2009, for the aggregate of the warehouse notes payable and the notes payable is shown below. The warehouse notes payable obligations are incurred in support of the related Loans held for sale. Amounts advanced under the warehouse notes payable are

F-20


Table of Contents


WALKER & DUNLOP

Notes to Consolidated and Combined Financial Statements (Continued)

NOTE 8—NOTES PAYABLE (Continued)


included in the current year as the amounts are usually drawn and repaid within 2 to 45 days ($ in thousands):

Year
  Maturities  

2010

  $ 101,951  

2011

    27,622  
       

  $ 129,573  
       

NOTE 9—FAIR VALUE MEASUREMENTS

        On January 1, 2008, the Company elected to measure at the time of closing, all loans classified as loans held for sale at fair value pursuant to the provisions of ASC 825, unless contemporaneous documentation to the contrary is put in place at the loan's closing. During 2009 and 2008, no such contemporaneous documentation was put in place, and so all loans held for sale at December 31, 2009 and 2008, are recorded at fair value. Unrealized gains and losses for these loans were included in earnings.

        On January 1, 2008, the Company adopted SFAS 157 (ASC 820) which defines fair value, establishes a framework for measuring fair value in generally accepted accounting principles and expands disclosures about fair value measurements. ASC 820 requires the use of valuation techniques that are consistent with the market approach, the income approach and/or the cost approach. Inputs to valuation techniques refer to the assumptions that market participants would use in pricing the asset or liability. Inputs may be observable, meaning those that reflect the assumptions market participants would use in pricing the asset or liability developed based on market data obtained from independent sources, or unobservable, meaning those that reflect the reporting entity's own assumptions about the assumptions market participants would use in pricing the asset or liability developed based on the best information available in the circumstances. In that regard, ASC 820 establishes a fair value hierarchy for valuation inputs that gives the highest priority to quoted prices in active markets for identical assets or liabilities and the lowest priority to unobservable inputs. The fair value hierarchy is as follows:

    Level 1 —Financial assets and liabilities whose values are based on unadjusted quoted prices in active markets for identical assets or liabilities that the Company has the ability to access.

    Level 2 —Financial assets and liabilities whose values are based on inputs other than quoted prices included in Level 1 that are observable for the asset or liability, either directly or indirectly. These might include quoted prices for similar assets or liabilities in active markets, quoted prices for identical or similar assets or liabilities in markets that are not active, inputs other than quoted prices that are observable for the asset or liability (such as interest rates, volatilities, prepayment speeds, credit risks, etc.) or inputs that are derived principally from or corroborated by market data by correlation or other means.

    Level 3 —Financial assets and liabilities whose values are based on inputs that are both unobservable and significant to the overall valuation.

        The Company's MSRs are measured at fair value on a nonrecurring basis. That is, the instruments are not measured at fair value on an ongoing basis but are subject to fair value adjustments in certain circumstances (for example, when there is evidence of impairment). The Company's MSRs do not trade

F-21


Table of Contents


WALKER & DUNLOP

Notes to Consolidated and Combined Financial Statements (Continued)

NOTE 9—FAIR VALUE MEASUREMENTS (Continued)


in an active, open market with readily observable prices. While sales of MSRs do occur, precise terms and conditions vary with each transaction and are not readily available. Accordingly, the estimated fair value of MSRs using discounted cash flow ("DCF") models that calculate the present value of estimated future net servicing income. The model considers contractually specified servicing fees, prepayment assumptions, delinquency rates, late charges, other ancillary revenue, costs to service and other economic factors. The Company reassesses and periodically adjusts the underlying inputs and assumptions used in the model to reflect observable market conditions and assumptions that a market participant would consider in valuing an MSR asset. MSRs are carried at the lower of amortized cost or estimated fair value.

        A description of the valuation methodologies used for instruments measured at fair value, as well as the general classification of such instruments pursuant to the valuation hierarchy, is set forth below. These valuation methodologies were applied to all of the Company's financial assets and financial liabilities carried at fair value effective January 1, 2008:

    Derivative Instruments —The derivative positions are valued using a discounted cash flow model developed based on changes in the U.S. Treasury rate and other observable market data and are classified within Level 3 of the valuation hierarchy.

    Loans held for sale —The loans held for sale are reported at fair value. The Company determines the fair value of the loans held for sale using discounted cash flow models that incorporate quoted observable prices from market participants. Therefore, the Company classifies these loans held for sale as Level 2.

    Pledged Securities —The pledged securities are valued using quoted market prices from recent trades. Therefore, the Company classifies pledged securities as Level 1.

F-22


Table of Contents


WALKER & DUNLOP

Notes to Consolidated and Combined Financial Statements (Continued)

NOTE 9—FAIR VALUE MEASUREMENTS (Continued)

        The following table summarizes financial assets and financial liabilities measured at fair value on a recurring basis as of December 31, 2009 and 2008, segregated by the level of the valuation inputs within the fair value hierarchy used to measure fair value ($ in thousands):

 
  Quoted Prices in
Active Markets
for Identical
Assets
(Level 1)
  Significant Other
Observable Inputs
(Level 2)
  Significant
Unobservable
Inputs
(Level 3)
  Balance as of
period end
 

December 31, 2009

                         
 

Assets

                         
   

Loans held for sale

  $   $ 101,939   $   $ 101,939  
   

Pledged securities

    11,643             11,643  
   

Derivative assets

            11,153     11,153  
                   
   

Total

  $ 11,643   $ 101,939   $ 11,153   $ 124,735  
                   
 

Liabilities

                         
   

Derivative liabilities

  $   $   $ 6,707   $ 6,707  
                   
   

Total

  $   $   $ 6,707   $ 6,707  
                   

December 31, 2008

                         
 

Assets

                         
   

Loans held for sale

  $   $ 111,711   $   $ 111,711  
   

Pledged securities

    7,207             7,207  
   

Derivative assets

            8,028     8,028  
                   
   

Total

  $ 7,207   $ 111,711   $ 8,028   $ 126,946  
                   
 

Liabilities

                         
   

Derivative liabilities

  $   $   $ 8,384   $ 8,384  
                   
   

Total

  $   $   $ 8,384   $ 8,384  
                   

        Derivative instruments (Level 3) are outstanding for short periods of time (generally less than 45 days) and are not outstanding for more than one period.

F-23


Table of Contents


WALKER & DUNLOP

Notes to Consolidated and Combined Financial Statements (Continued)

NOTE 9—FAIR VALUE MEASUREMENTS (Continued)

        The carrying amounts and the fair values of the Company's financial instruments as of December 31, 2009 and 2008, are presented below ($ in thousands):

 
  December 31, 2009   December 31, 2008  
 
  Carrying
amount
  Fair value   Carrying
amount
  Fair value  

Financial assets:

                         
 

Cash and cash equivalents

  $ 10,390   $ 10,390   $ 6,812   $ 6,812  
 

Restricted cash

    7,516     7,516     4,824     4,824  
 

Pledged securities

    11,643     11,643     7,207     7,207  
 

Derivative assets

    11,153     11,153     8,028     8,028  
                   
   

Total financial assets

  $ 40,702   $ 40,702   $ 26,871   $ 26,871  
                   

Financial liabilities:

                         
 

Derivative liabilities

  $ 6,707   $ 6,707   $ 8,384   $ 8,384  
                   
   

Total financial liabilities

  $ 6,707   $ 6,707   $ 8,384   $ 8,384  
                   

        The following methods and assumptions were used to estimate the fair value of each class of financial instruments for which it is practicable to estimate that value:

        Cash and Cash Equivalent and Restricted Cash:     The carrying amounts, at face value or cost plus accrued interest, approximate fair value because of the short maturity of these instruments.

        Pledged Securities —Consist of highly liquid investments in commercial paper of AAA rated entities. Investments typically have maturities of 90 days or less, and are valued using quoted market prices from recent trades.

        Derivative Instruments —Consist of interest rate lock commitments and forward sale agreements. These instruments are valued using discounted cash flow models ("DCF") developed based on changes in the U.S. Treasury rate and other observable market data. The value was determined after considering the potential impact of collateralization, adjusted to reflect nonperformance risk of both the counterparty and the Company.

        Fair Value of Derivative Instruments and Loans Held for Sale —In the normal course of business, the Company enters into contractual commitments to originate (purchase) and sell multifamily mortgage loans at fixed prices with fixed expiration dates. The commitments become effective when the borrowers "lock-in" a specified interest rate within time frames established by the Company. All mortgagors are evaluated for credit worthiness prior to the extension of the commitment. Market risk arises if interest rates move adversely between the time of the "lock-in" of rates by the borrower and the sale date of the loan to an investor.

        To mitigate the effect of the interest rate risk inherent in providing rate lock commitments to borrowers, the Company's policy is to enter into a sale commitment with the investor simultaneously with the rate lock commitment with the borrower. The sale contract with the investor locks in an interest rate and price for the sale of the loan. The terms of the contract with the investor and the rate lock with the borrower are matched in substantially all respects, with the objective of eliminating interest rate risk to the extent practical. Sale commitments with the investors have an expiration date

F-24


Table of Contents


WALKER & DUNLOP

Notes to Consolidated and Combined Financial Statements (Continued)

NOTE 9—FAIR VALUE MEASUREMENTS (Continued)


that is longer than our related commitments to the borrower to allow, among other things, for the closing of the loan and processing of paperwork to deliver the loan into the sale commitment.

        Both the rate lock commitments to borrowers and the forward sale contracts to buyers are undesignated derivatives and, accordingly, are marked to fair value through other income and expenses. The fair value of the Company's rate lock commitments to borrowers and loans held for sale and the related input levels includes, as applicable:

    the assumed gain/loss of the expected resultant loan sale to the buyer;

    the value of the servicing rights associated with the loan (Level 2); and

    the effects of interest rate movements between the date of the rate lock and the balance sheet date (Level 3).

        The fair value of the Company's forward sales contracts to investors considers effects of interest rate movements between the trade date and the balance sheet date (Level 3). The market price changes are multiplied by the notional amount of the forward sales contracts to measure the fair value.

        The assumed gain/loss considers the amount that the Company has discounted the price to the borrower from par for competitive reasons, if at all, and the excess servicing to be received upon securitization of the loan. The excess servicing is calculated pursuant to the valuation techniques described previously for mortgage servicing rights.

        To calculate the effects of interest rate movements, the Company uses applicable published U.S. Treasury prices, and multiplies the price movement between the rate lock date and the balance sheet date by the notional loan commitment amount. Thus, the value of the servicing rights is included in the fair value measurement and is based upon contractual terms with investors and varies depending on the loan type.

        The fair value of the Company's forward sales contracts to investors solely considers the market price movement of the same type of security between the trade date and the balance sheet date (Level 3). The market price changes are multiplied by the notional amount of the forward sales contracts to measure the fair value.

December 31, 2009
  Notional or
Principal
Amount
  Assumed
Gain (Loss)
on Sale
  Interest Rate
Movement
Effect
  Total Fair
Value
Adjustment
 

Rate lock commitments

  $ 154,948   $ 6,550   $ 4,172   $ 10,722  

Forward sale contracts

    251,560         (6,639 )   (6,639 )

Receivable of loans held for sale

    96,612     2,860     2,467     5,327  
                     

Total

        $ 9,410   $   $ 9,410  
                     

December 31, 2008
                         

Rate lock commitments

  $ 94,520   $ 2,175   $ 5,544   $ 7,719  

Forward sale contracts

    201,589         (8,076 )   (8,076 )

Receivable of loans held for sale

    107,069     2,110     2,532     4,642  
                     

Total

        $ 4,285   $   $ 4,285  
                     

F-25


Table of Contents


WALKER & DUNLOP

Notes to Consolidated and Combined Financial Statements (Continued)

NOTE 9—FAIR VALUE MEASUREMENTS (Continued)

        Other Derivatives —In 2006 we purchased a three-year interest rate cap for to limit the interest rate cost associated with a $42.5 million note due in 3 years. For the years ended December 31, 2008 and 2007, interest expense related to the cap agreement of $0.03 million was recorded as interest expense in the statement of income. In addition for the years December 31, 2009, 2008 and 2007, income of $0.02 million and $0.02 million and expense of $0.03 million, respectively, were recorded to accumulated other comprehensive income as a fair value adjustment.

NOTE 10—LITIGATION, COMMITMENTS AND CONTINGENCIES

        Fannie Mae DUS Related Commitments —Commitments for the origination and subsequent sale and delivery of loans to Fannie Mae represent those mortgage loan transactions where the borrower has locked an interest rate and scheduled closing and the Company has entered into a mandatory delivery commitment to sell the loan to Fannie Mae. As discussed in Note 9, the Company accounts for these commitments as derivatives recorded at fair value.

        The Company is generally required to share the risk of any losses associated with loans sold under the Fannie Mae DUS program (the DUS risk sharing obligation). The Company is required to secure this obligation by assigning restricted cash balances and securities to Fannie Mae. The reserve for loans may be posted over the first 48 months. As of December 31, 2009 and 2008, the Company had pledged cash and securities in excess of these requirements. Under the provisions of the DUS agreement, the Company must also maintain a certain level of liquid assets referred to as the operational and unrestricted portions of the required reserves each year. These requirements were satisfied by the Company as of December 31, 2009 and 2008.

        For most loans we service under the Fannie Mae DUS program, we are currently required to advance 100% of the principal and interest due to noteholders up to 5% of the unpaid principal balance if the borrower is delinquent in making loan payments. Under the HUD program, we are required to advance 100% of the principal and interest payments due to noteholders if the borrower is delinquent in making loan payments. Advances are included in Loan origination related fees and other receivables to the extent such amounts are recoverable.

        Fannie Mae has established benchmark standards for capital adequacy, and reserves the right to terminate the Company's servicing authority for all or some of the portfolio, if at any time it determines that the Company's financial condition is not adequate to support its obligation under the DUS agreement. The Company is required to maintain acceptable net worth as defined in the standards and the Company satisfied the requirements as of December 31, 2009 and 2008. The net worth requirement is derived primarily from unpaid balances on Fannie Mae loans and the level of risk sharing. The net worth requirement and the Company's net worth for 2009 was $41.3 million and $92.5 million, respectively.

        Other Commitments —Effective January 1, 1997, Green Park became party to a Deferred Bonus Trust Agreement with certain senior management officers. The officers will receive bonus compensation if Green Park's financial performance meets set targets over specified three-year periods and they are employed by Green Park or an affiliate of Green Park at the end of the three-year period. As of December 31, 2009 and 2008, cash in the amount of $1.4 million and $1.6 million, respectively, has been classified as restricted cash to fund potential future payouts under this agreement related to 2006-2008, and 2007-2009 financial performance. As of December 31, 2009 and 2008, $1.9 million and

F-26


Table of Contents


WALKER & DUNLOP

Notes to Consolidated and Combined Financial Statements (Continued)

NOTE 10—LITIGATION, COMMITMENTS AND CONTINGENCIES (Continued)


$1.5 million was recorded as a liability related to these three agreements, with the difference between the liability and cash funding representing the incremental non-cash expense expected to be recorded related to these agreements, assuming Green Park's financial performance meets set targets, and all plan participants remain employed by Green Park or an affiliate through January 2010.

        Litigation —Capital Funding Group, Inc. ("Capital Funding") filed a lawsuit in the state circuit court of Montgomery County, Maryland against Walker & Dunlop, LLC for alleged breach of contract, unjust enrichment, and unfair competition arising out of an engagement to potentially refinance a large portfolio of senior healthcare facilities located throughout the United States ("Golden Living Facilities"). Walker & Dunlop, LLC was included in the lawsuit by virtue of its alleged status as a successor to Column, in connection with the January 2009 Column transaction. The plaintiff alleges that a contract existed between the plaintiff and Column and its affiliates whereby the plaintiff provided certain proprietary information to Column and its affiliates in exchange for the right to refinance the Golden Living Facilities. Capital Funding is seeking damages of approximately $30 million or more for each of the three claims in the complaint and injunctive relief for the unfair competition claim.

        The Company believes that Walker & Dunlop, LLC is entitled to indemnification from Column with respect to some or all of the claims arising out of this matter. However, Column has not accepted or rejected the Company's indemnification claim and may not until after the matter has been fully resolved. The Company is unable to estimate an expected loss, if any.

        In the normal course of business, the Companies may be party to various claims and litigation. In the opinion of management, based on the opinion of legal counsel, the resolution of these matters is not expected to have a material adverse effect on the Companies' financial position or future results of operations.

        Lease Commitments —Green Park executed a lease agreement in October 2002, which was subsequently amended in November 2003, to increase the amount of space leased to a full floor (approximately 22,814 square feet). The original lease terminated November 30, 2007, and gave Green Park an option to renew the lease for an additional five years at market rates. On February 28, 2007, Green Park signed an amendment to extend the lease expiration date to November 30, 2012. Rent expense related to this lease is recognized on the straight-line basis over the term of the lease.

        Minimum cash basis operating lease commitments for office space are as follows ($ in thousands):

Year ending December 31,
   
 

2010

  $ 1,469  

2011

    1,384  

2012

    1,307  

2013

    203  

2014

    203  

2015

    7  
       

  $ 4,573  
       

F-27


Table of Contents


WALKER & DUNLOP

Notes to Consolidated and Combined Financial Statements (Continued)

NOTE 11—TRANSACTIONS WITH RELATED PARTIES

        Column, a subsidiary of Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC, owns a 35% interest in Walker & Dunlop, LLC. From time to time Credit Suisse refers HUD related financing opportunities to the Company. Credit Suisse receives a fee directly from the borrower if the loans are approved and closed.

        A subsidiary of the Company has contracted with Walker & Dunlop Fund Management, LLC (the "Advisor"), a registered investment advisor, of which Mr. Walker, our Chairman, President and Chief Executive Officer, is the sole member, for the Advisor to provide investment advisory services to our W&D Balanced Real Estate Fund I LP pursuant to an investment advisory agreement. We provide consulting, overhead and other corporate services to the Advisor pursuant to a corporate services agreement for a fee. In 2009 the amount of such fees was approximately $0.7 million.

        Included as a contra-account in the Company's Members' Equity at December 31, 2009, is a $153,600 stock subscription receivable from the Company's Chief Financial Officer. This amount is the remaining portion due under a stock purchase agreement for the purchase of less than 1% of the Company that was entered into by the CFO as part of the CFO's 2008 employment letter agreement.

        The Company has made tax advances to shareholders or members for quarterly estimated taxes. These tax advances have been repaid through quarterly distributions within 12 months. As of December 31, 2009, tax advances totaling $0.3 million were outstanding. No advances were outstanding at December 31, 2008.

NOTE 12—RETIREMENT PLAN

        The Company has no post-retirement benefit obligations as of December 31, 2009. The Company participates in a 401(k) plan with elective employee deferrals and a stated employer match of 50% of the employee's contribution up to the lesser of (a) 6% of salary or (b) $4,500. Total compensation expense for the 401(k) plan was $0.3 million, $0.2 million, and $0.1 million for 2009, 2008 and 2007, respectively.

NOTE 13—SEGMENTS

        We are one of the leading providers of commercial real estate financial services in the United States, with a primary focus on multifamily lending. We originate a range of multifamily and other commercial real estate loans that are sold to government sponsored enterprises or placed with institutional investors. We also service nearly all of loans that we sell to government sponsored enterprises and a great majority of the loans that we place with institutional investors. Substantially all of our operations involve the delivery and servicing of loan products for our customers. Management makes operating decisions and assesses performance based on an ongoing review of these integrated operations, which constitute the Company's only operating segment for financial reporting purposes.

        We evaluate the performance of our business and allocate our resources based on a single segment concept. No one borrower/key principal accounts for more than 4.0% of our total risk sharing loan portfolio. In 2009, Fannie Mae, and Ginnie Mae-HUD commercial loan programs were directly or indirectly related to 76% and 14%, respectively, of our total revenues.

        An analysis of the investor concentrations and geographic dispersion of our service revenue is shown in the following tables. This information is based on the distribution of the loans serviced for

F-28


Table of Contents


WALKER & DUNLOP

Notes to Consolidated and Combined Financial Statements (Continued)

NOTE 13—SEGMENTS (Continued)


others. The principal balance of the loans serviced for others as of December 31, by investor, was as follows ($ in thousands):

 
  Balance as of December 31,  
 
  2009   2008   2007  

Fannie Mae

  $ 8,623,973   $ 5,182,824   $ 4,309,073  

Freddie Mac

    2,035,021          

Ginnie Mae-HUD

    350,676          

Life insurance companies and other

    2,101,591     1,793,384     1,745,113  
               

Total

  $ 13,111,261   $ 6,976,208   $ 6,054,186  
               

        The principal balance of the loans serviced for others as of December 31, 2009, 2008 and 2007 by geographical area, is as shown in the following table. No other state accounted for more than 5% of revenues in any of the three fiscal years presented. The Company does not have any operations outside of the United States.

 
  Percent of Total UPB  
U.S. State
  2009   2008   2007  

Virginia

    13.7 %   13.5 %   16.0 %

California

    11.9 %   4.0 %   4.5 %

Maryland

    9.6 %   15.9 %   17.4 %

Texas

    8.9 %   9.2 %   5.5 %

Florida

    6.4 %   4.9 %   4.1 %

Pennsylvania

    4.4 %   6.4 %   6.2 %

District of Columbia

    2.5 %   4.7 %   6.0 %

All other

    42.6 %   41.4 %   40.3 %
               

    100.0 %   100.0 %   100.0 %
               

NOTE 14—OTHER OPERATING EXPENSES

        The following is a summary of the major components of other operating expenses for each of the three years ended December 31, 2009, 2008 and 2007 ($ in thousands):

 
  2009   2008   2007  

Professional fees

  $ 4,087   $ 2,052   $ 1,022  

Rent

    1,661     1,201     999  

Travel and entertainment

    1,452     1,009     884  

Marketing and preferred broker

    1,144     925     717  

Office expenses

    850     493     446  

Loan servicing fees to others

    744          

All other

    1,176     868     172  
               

Total

  $ 11,114   $ 6,548   $ 4,240  
               

F-29


Table of Contents

Walker & Dunlop

Schedule IV—Mortgage Loans on Real Estate

December 31, 2009

        Mortgage loans that exceed 3% of total mortgage loans—Loans Held for Sale ($ in thousands)

Loan Name
  Type   State   Interest
Rate
  Final Maturity Date   Periodic Payment Terms   Loan
Amount
  Fair
Market
Value
 

Everglades

  Apartment   AL     4.850   January 1, 2045   35 yr. Amortization   $ 3,960   $ 4,382  

Vestavia Park

  Apartment   AL     5.300   January 1, 2025   15 yr. Amortization     4,000     4,326  

1010 Esplanade

  Apartment   CA     5.130   January 1, 2020   30 yr. Amortization     4,000     4,242  

17 Mile Drive Village

  Apartment   CA     5.530   January 1, 2017   2 yrs. IO, 30 yr. Amort.     13,675     14,422  

Homboldt Gardens

  Apartment   CA     5.750   January 1, 2020   30 yr. Amortization     3,330     3,534  

Glenn Arms

  Apartment   DC     5.250   January 1, 2045   35 yr. Amortization     3,824     4,219  

Promenade

  Apartment   DC     4.560   January 1, 2020   10 yr. Amortization     3,160     3,385  

River Club

  Apartment   DE     5.740   January 1, 2020   30 yr. Amortization     6,400     6,744  

Summer Palms

  Apartment   FL     6.250   January 1, 2017   2 yrs. IO, 25 yr. Amort.     12,400     12,523  

La Maison Whitney

  Apartment   LA     5.880   January 1, 2020   30 yr. Amortization     3,049     3,273  

Cascade Woods

  Apartment   OR     5.580   January 1, 2020   30 yr. Amortization     4,870     5,183  

Brookfall I & II

  Apartment   SC     5.380   January 1, 2020   30 yr. Amortization     3,770     3,978  

Providence Place

  Apartment   TX     7.350   January 1, 2045   30 yr. Amortization     4,683     4,729  

Carrington Square

  Apartment   UT     5.340   January 1, 2020   30 yr. Amortization     13,700     14,676  

Berkley & Warwick Place

  Apartment   VA     6.170   January 1, 2020   30 yr. Amortization     3,989     4,024  

Eagle Pointe

  Apartment   WA     5.810   January 1, 2020   30 yr. Amortization     3,000     3,170  
                                 

                          91,810     96,810  

West Ridge

  Mobile Home
Community
  NM     6.050   January 1, 2020   25 yr. Amortization     4,802     5,129  
                                 
 

Total at December 31, 2009

                        $ 96,612   $ 101,939  
                                 

Notes:

All mortgage loans are originated loans that are held for sale in the near term (usually 2 to 45 days)

1.
There are no prior liens on any of the loans.

2.
All loans are current as to interest and principal payments.

3.
There are no allowance accounts associated any of the loans.

4.
There are no individual loans under 3% of total mortgage loans at December 31, 2009.

5.
No loans were renewed, extended, written-down or reserved against.

6.
No loans were from controlled or other affiliated entities.

F-30


Table of Contents

7.
The following schedule reconciles the mortgage loans for each of the income statement periods presented

 
  Year ended December 31,  
Reconciliation of mortgage loans ($ in thousands):
  2009   2008   2007  

Balance at beginning of year

  $ 111,711   $ 22,543   $ 301,987  
               

Additions:

                   
 

Originations of loans held for sale

    1,650,683     1,369,442     945,160  
               

Total additions

  $ 1,650,683   $ 1,369,442   $ 945,160  
               

Deductions:

                   
 

Sales of loans to third parties

    (1,661,076 )   (1,284,737 )   (1,224,960 )
               

Total deductions

  $ (1,661,076 ) $ (1,284,737 ) $ (1,224,960 )

Changes in fair value

    621     4,463     356  
               

Balance at end of year

  $ 101,939   $ 111,711   $ 22,543  
               

F-31


Table of Contents


WALKER & DUNLOP

Condensed Consolidated and Combined Balance Sheet

(unaudited and in thousands)

 
  June 30,
2010
 

Assets

       
 

Cash and cash equivalents

  $ 14,789  
 

Restricted cash

    6,073  
 

Pledged securities, at fair value

    12,646  
 

Loans held for sale

    94,092  
 

Servicing fees and other receivables

    12,153  
 

Derivative assets

    42,913  
 

Mortgage servicing rights

    90,272  
 

Intangible assets

    1,332  
 

Other assets

    1,834  
       

Total Assets

  $ 276,104  
       

Liabilities and Equity

       

Liabilities

       
 

Accounts payable and other accruals

  $ 20,705  
 

Performance deposit from borrowers

    6,914  
 

Derivative liabilities

    26,563  
 

Guaranty obligation, net of accumulated amortization

    8,502  
 

Allowance for risk-sharing obligation

    5,984  
 

Warehouse notes payable

    88,003  
 

Notes payable

    30,307  
       

Total Liabilites

  $ 186,978  
       

Equity

       
 

Members' equity

  $ 42,998  
 

Non-controlling interest

    46,128  
       

Total Equity

  $ 89,126  
       

Total Liabilities and Equity

  $ 276,104  
       

See accompanying notes to the condensed consolidated and combined finanacial statements.

F-32


Table of Contents


WALKER & DUNLOP

Condensed Consolidated and Combined Statements of Income

(unaudited and in thousands)

 
  Six months ended June 30,  
 
  2010   2009  

Revenue

             
 

Loan origination related fees

  $ 24,844   $ 12,099  
 

Gain attributable to mortgage servicing rights

    21,369     14,142  
 

Servicing fees

    12,780     9,760  
 

Net warehouse interest income

    2,173     2,356  
 

Escrow earnings and other interest income

    1,114     791  
 

Other

    1,335     1,504  
           
 

Total revenues

  $ 63,615   $ 40,652  
           

Expenses

             
 

Personnel

  $ 23,413   $ 12,688  
 

Amortization and depreciation

    8,163     5,356  
 

Provision for risk-sharing obligation

    2,580     323  
 

Interest expense on corporate debt

    697     888  
 

Other operating expenses

    6,293     6,668  
           
 

Total expenses

  $ 41,146   $ 25,923  
           

Income from operations

  $ 22,469   $ 14,729  
           

Gain on bargain purchase

        10,922  
           

Net income

  $ 22,469   $ 25,651  
 

Less: non-controlling interest in net income

   
8,135
   
5,876
 
           

Net income attributable to Walker & Dunlop

  $ 14,334   $ 19,775  
           

See accompanying notes to the condensed consolidated and combined financial statements.

F-33


Table of Contents


WALKER & DUNLOP

Condensed Consolidated and Combined Statement of Changes in Equity

(unaudited and in thousands)

 
  Members'
Capital
  Retained
Earnings
  Members
Interests
Acquired,
at Cost
  Non-
Controlling
Interest
  Total
Equity
 

Balance at December 31, 2009

  $ 1,178   $ 39,418   $ (9,826 ) $ 39,041   $ 69,811  
 

Net income

        14,334         8,135     22,469  
 

Cash repaid to Column

    (159 )               (159 )
 

Dividends declared

        (1,947 )       (1,048 )   (2,995 )
                       

Balance at June 30, 2010

  $ 1,019   $ 51,805   $ (9,826 ) $ 46,128   $ 89,126  
                       

See accompanying notes to the condensed consolidated and combined financial statements.

F-34


Table of Contents


WALKER & DUNLOP

Condensed Consolidated and Combined Statements of Cash Flows

(unaudited and in thousands)

 
  Six months ended June 30,  
 
  2010   2009  

Cash flows from operating activities:

             
 

Net income

  $ 22,469   $ 25,651  
 

Reconciling adjustments:

             
   

Gain attributable to mortgage servicing rights

    (21,369 )   (14,142 )
   

Gain on bargain purchase

        (10,922 )
   

Gain on sale of MSR, less prepayment of originated mortgage servicing rights

    1,661     291  
   

Provision for risk-sharing obligations

    2,580     323  
   

Amortization and depreciation

    8,163     5,356  
   

Originations of loans held for sale

    (1,084,964 )   (861,971 )
   

Sales of loans to third parties

    1,093,573     903,921  
   

Changes in:

             
     

Restricted cash and pledged securities

    440     943  
     

Loan origination fees and other receivables

    3,387     (1,961 )
     

Derivative fair value adjustment

    (9,839 )   (3,115 )
     

Intangible and other assets

    963     (1,576 )
     

Accounts payable and accruals

    (1,043 )   4,147  
     

Performance deposits from borrowers

    2,329     1,989  
     

Cash paid to settle guarantee obligation

    (2,148 )    
           
 

Net cash provided by operating activities

  $ 16,202   $ 48,934  
           

Cash flows used in investing activities:

             
 

Capital expenditures

  $ (381 ) $ (44 )
           
 

Net cash used in investing activities

  $ (381 ) $ (44 )
           

Cash flows from financing activities:

             
 

Warehouse notes payable, net

    (8,609 )   (41,950 )
 

Notes payable

    (2,654 )   (2,593 )
 

Dividends

        (2,135 )
 

Cash contributed by (repaid to) Column

    (159 )   8,904  
 

Other

        11  
           
 

Net cash used in financing activities

  $ (11,422 ) $ (37,763 )
           

Net increase in cash and short term investments

    4,399     11,127  

Cash and short term investments—beginning of period

    10,390     6,812  
           

Cash and short term investments—end of period

  $ 14,789   $ 17,939  
           

Supplemental Disclosure of Cash Flow Information

             
 

Cash paid to third parties for interest

  $ 2,649   $ 1,847  
           

See accompanying notes to the condensed consolidated and combined financial statements

F-35


Table of Contents


WALKER & DUNLOP

Notes to Condensed Consolidated and Combined Financial Statements

NOTE 1—ORGANIZATION

        These financial statements represent a condensed consolidation and combination of the Walker & Dunlop affiliated companies (the Company), all of which are controlled by an individual owner. W&D, Inc., Walker & Dunlop Multifamily, Inc., Walker & Dunlop GP, LLC, and GPF Acquisition, LLC are entities under common control and are combined herein. Green Park Financial Limited Partnership (Green Park) consolidates its majority-owned subsidiary, Walker & Dunlop, LLC (W&D LLC), and its wholly owned subsidiaries Green Park Express, LLC and Walker & Dunlop, LLC and W&D LLC's wholly owned subsidiary, W&D Balanced Real Estate Fund I GP, LLC. Walker & Dunlop MultiFamily, Inc consolidates Green Park. Unless the context otherwise requires, references to "we," "us," "our" and the "Company" mean the Walker & Dunlop combined and consolidated companies.

        We are one of the leading providers of commercial real estate financial services in the United States, with a primary focus on multifamily lending. We originate a range of multifamily and other commercial real estate loans that are placed with or sold to government-sponsored enterprises (GSE) and a great majority of the loans that we place with institutional investors. We also service nearly all loans that we sell to GSEs and a great majority of the loans that we place with institutional investors, and also guarantee a portion of losses on many of the loans we service.

NOTE 2—SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES

        Basis of Presentation —The accompanying unaudited condensed consolidated and combined financial statements have been prepared by management in accordance with U.S. generally accepted accounting principles, or GAAP for interim financial information. Accordingly, these condensed consolidated and combined financial statements do not include all of the information and footnotes required by GAAP for complete financial statements. In the opinion of management, all adjustments (consisting of normal recurring accruals) considered necessary for a fair presentation have been included. All significant intercompany accounts and transactions have been eliminated in the condensed combined consolidated financial statements. The results of operations for the six months ended June 30, 2010 or June 30, 2009, are not necessarily indicative of the results that may be expected for the full year.

        These condensed consolidated and combined financial statements should be read in conjunction with the audited financial statements for the year ended December 31, 2009, and the notes thereto, which contain additional and expanded financial statement disclosures.

        Use of Estimates —The preparation of financial statements in conformity with U.S. generally accepted accounting principles requires management to make estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities, the disclosures of contingent assets and liabilities at the date of the financial statements, and the reported amounts of revenue and expenses during the reporting period. Actual results could differ from those estimates.

        Principles of Consolidation and Combination —The condensed consolidated and combined financial statements include the accounts of Walker & Dunlop and affiliated companies as previously defined in Note 1. The condensed consolidated and combined financial statements are presented due to the common control by an individual owner of the affiliated companies.

F-36


Table of Contents


WALKER & DUNLOP

Notes to Condensed Consolidated and Combined Financial Statements (Continued)

NOTE 2—SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES (Continued)

        Concentrations of Credit Risk —Financial instruments, which potentially subject the Company to concentrations of credit risk, consist principally of cash and cash equivalents, loans held for sale and derivative financial instruments.

        The Company places the cash and temporary investments with high-credit-quality financial institutions and believes no significant credit risk exists. The counterparties to the loans held for sale and funding commitments are owners of residential multifamily properties located throughout the United States. Mortgage loans are generally transferred or sold within 2 to 45 days from the date that a mortgage loan is funded.

        There is no material counterparty risk with respect to the Company's funding commitments in that each potential borrower must make a non-refundable good faith deposit when the funding commitment is executed. The counterparty to the forward sales generally is Fannie Mae or a mortgage backed securities ("MBS") investor. There is a risk that the purchase price agreed to by Fannie Mae or the other investor will be reduced in the event of a late delivery. The risk for non-delivery of a loan primarily results from the risk that a borrower does not close on the funding commitment in a timely manner, which generally is a risk mitigated by the non-refundable good faith deposit.

        Fair Value Measurement —The Company uses fair value measurements to record fair value adjustments to certain assets and liabilities and to determine fair value disclosures (Note 7).

        Derivative Assets and Liabilities —Certain loan commitments and forward sales commitments meet the definition of a derivative and are recorded at fair value in the condensed consolidated and combined balance sheets. Adjustments to fair value are reflected as a component of other income and other expenses in the condensed consolidated and combined statements of income.

        Revenue Recognition for Mortgage Servicing Rights Activities —Transfer of financial assets is reported as a sale when (a) the transferor surrenders control over those assets and (b) consideration other than beneficial interests in the transferred assets is received in exchange. The transferor is considered to have surrendered control over transferred assets if, and only if, certain conditions are met. The Company has determined that all loans sold have met these specific conditions and accounts for all transfers of mortgage loans and mortgage participations as completed sales.

        When the mortgage loans are sold, the Company retains the right to service the loan and initially recognizes the Mortgage Servicing Right ("MSR") at fair value. Subsequent to the initial measurement date, mortgage servicing assets are amortized using the effective interest method.

        When loans are sold under the Fannie Mae DUS program, the Company undertakes an obligation to partially guarantee the performance of the loan. At inception, a liability for the fair value of the obligation undertaken in issuing the guaranty is recognized. Subsequent to the initial measurement date, the liability is amortized over the life of the guaranty period using the straight-line method.

        Gains and losses on the sales of mortgage loans are recognized based upon the difference between the selling price and the carrying value of the related mortgage loans sold less the value attributed to retained MSRs and Guaranty obligations. The gain on the sale of mortgage loans is reported in the accompanying consolidated statements of income as loan origination related fees (representing loan commitment fees collected from the borrower upon origination and income attributable to premium pricing) and gain attributable to MSR, net of Guaranty obligations (representing the fair values assigned to MSRs and Guaranty obligations) less costs of co-brokers that participated in the

F-37


Table of Contents


WALKER & DUNLOP

Notes to Condensed Consolidated and Combined Financial Statements (Continued)

NOTE 2—SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES (Continued)


transaction. The co-broker fees for the six-month periods ended June 30 2010 and 2009 were $8.5 million and $4.6 million, respectively.

        Recently Issued Accounting Pronouncements —In June 2009, the FASB issued FAS No. 167 (ASC 810) to amend requirements for consolidating variable interest entities. This amendment changes the determination of the primary beneficiary in a variable interest entity. In January 2010, the FASB voted to finalize Accounting Standards Update (ASU) amendments to Accounting Standards Codification (ASC 810) for Certain Investment Funds. The ASU will defer the effective date for a reporting enterprise's interest in certain entities. It addresses concerns that the joint consolidation model under development by the FASB and IASB and may result in a different conclusion for asset managers and that an asset manager consolidating certain funds would not provide useful information to investors. The adoption of these standards did not have a material effect on our financial statements.

        In June 2009, the FASB issued FAS No. 166, Accounting for Transfers of Financial Assets—an amendment of FASB Statement 140 (as codified in ASC topic 860, Transfers and Servicing (ASC 860)). ASU No. 2009-16 issued in December 2009 removes the concept of a qualifying special purpose entity from Topic 860 and removes the exception from applying Topic 810, Consolidation of Variable Interest Entities , for qualifying special purpose entities. This ASU modifies the financial components approach used in Topic 860 and limits the circumstances in which a financial asset, or portion of a financial asset, should be derecognized. Additionally, enhanced disclosures are required to provide financial statement users with greater transparency about transfers of financial assets and a transferor's continuing involvement with transferred financial assets. ASC 860 was adopted by the Company on January 1, 2010. The adoption of the revised guidance did not have a material impact on our financial statements.

NOTE 3—MORTGAGE SERVICING RIGHTS

        Mortgage servicing rights (MSR) represent the fair value of the servicing rights retained by the Company for mortgage loans originated and sold. The capitalized amount is equal to the estimated fair value of the future expected cash flows associated with the servicing rights. The following describes the key assumptions used in calculating each loan's MSR:

        Discount rate —Depending upon loan type, the discount rate used is management's best estimate of market discount rates. The rates used for loans originated were 12% to 15% for each of the three years presented.

        Estimated Life —The estimated life of the MSRs approximates the stated maturity date of the underlying loan and may be reduced by 6 to 12 months based upon the expiration of various types of prepayment penalty lockout provisions prior to that stated maturity date.

        Servicing Cost —The estimated future cost to service the loan for the life of the MSR is subtracted from the estimated future cash flows.

        The rights are being amortized in proportion to and over the period of net servicing income using the effective interest method.

        The Company reported write-offs of MSRs related to loans that were repaid prior to the expected maturity or the servicing rights being sold. These amounts are included with the amortization expense in the accompanying condensed consolidated and combined statements of income.

F-38


Table of Contents


WALKER & DUNLOP

Notes to Condensed Consolidated and Combined Financial Statements (Continued)

NOTE 3—MORTGAGE SERVICING RIGHTS (Continued)

        Management periodically reviews the capitalized MSRs for impairment. The fair value of the MSRs at June 30, 2010 was $110 million.

        Activity related to capitalized MSRs for each of the six-month periods ended June 30, 2010 and 2009 was as follows ($ in thousands):

 
  2010   2009  

Beginning balance

  $ 81,427   $ 38,943  

Acquisition date fair value of MSRs contributed by Column acquisition

        24,988  

Additions

    18,601     14,791  

Amortization

    (7,678 )   (6,036 )

Retirements and other

    (2,078 )   (457 )
           

Ending balance

  $ 90,272   $ 72,229  
           

NOTE 4—GUARANTY OBLIGATION

        When a loan is sold to Fannie Mae under the Fannie Mae DUS program, the Company typically agrees to guarantee a portion of the ultimate loss incurred on the loan should the borrower fail to perform. The compensation for this risk is a component of the servicing fee on the loan and is considered in the calculation of MSRs.

        There is no Guaranty obligation for loans sold under the Freddie Mac, HUD or other investor loan programs.

        Upon the execution of a guaranty for an unconsolidated entity, the Company recognizes upon inception of the guaranty, the greater of the fair value of the guarantor's obligation to stand ready to perform over the term of the guaranty in the event that specified triggering events or conditions occur, (the non-contingent guaranty) or the contingent obligation to make future payments should those triggering events or conditions occur.

        Generally, we record the fair value of the non-contingent obligation as it is the greater of the two at inception of the guaranty. This amount is presented as the "Guaranty obligation" in the financial statements with a corresponding reduction in the gain attributable to Mortgage Servicing Rights. The capitalized cost, and resulting reduction to the gain, for the six months ended June 30, 2010 and 2009, was $1.0 million and $1.7 million, respectively. We subsequently amortize the Guaranty obligation on a straight-line basis over the life of the mortgage loan with a corresponding reduction in amortization expense. The corresponding reduction in amortization expense for all capitalized guarantee obligations was $0.7 million and $0.7 million for the six months ended June 30, 2010 and 2009, respectively.

        In determining the fair value of the Guaranty obligation at inception, we consider the risk profile of the collateral, historical loss experience, and various market indicators. Generally, the estimated fair value of its Guaranty obligation is based on it present value using a 12% to 15% discount rate (3 to 5 basis points per year) and an estimated life of the loan. The discount rate and estimated life used are consistent with those used for the calculation of the MSR.

        Subsequently, we evaluate the potential contingent guarantee by monitoring the performance of each loan for triggering events or conditions that may signal a potential default. In situations where

F-39


Table of Contents


WALKER & DUNLOP

Notes to Condensed Consolidated and Combined Financial Statements (Continued)

NOTE 4—GUARANTY OBLIGATION (Continued)


payment under the contingent guaranty is probable and estimable on a specific loan we record an additional liability for the estimated loss in Guaranty obligations through a charge to the Provision for risk sharing obligation in the income statement, along with a write-off of the loan-specific MSR.

        As of June 30, 2010 and 2009, the maximum quantifiable contingent liability associated with guarantees was $1.3 billion and $1.1 million, respectively. The maximum quantifiable contingent liability is not representative of the actual loss we would incur. We would be liable for this amount only if all of the loans we service for Fannie Mae, for which we retain some risk of loss, were to default and all of the collateral underlying these loans were worthless.

NOTE 5—SERVICING

        The aggregate amount of all loans the Company was servicing for various institutional investors at June 30, 2010 was $13.7 billion.

NOTE 6—NOTES PAYABLE

        Warehouse Notes Payable —To originate loans for our customers, we have established warehouse facilities which advance funds to us on a short term basis usually 2-45 days to facilitate us closing our customers loans under pre-approved investor program. The Company has arranged for warehouse lines of credit in excess of $300 million. At June 30, 2010, our warehouse borrowings aggregated $88.0 million under the Bank facilities. The rates under these warehouse facilities continue to be computed based on the average 30-day LIBOR plus 1.0 to 2.75%. Included in interest expense was $0.1 million of loan fees for the six months ended June 30, 2010.

        This warehouse line includes various operating and financial covenants at the Walker & Dunlop, LLC entity level. We were in breach of the delinquency rate covenant as of June 30, 2010, based on our delinquency rate increase of 0.7% on the unpaid principal balance of Fannie Mae Loans with risk sharing from March 31, 2010 to June 30, 2010. The lenders under this warehouse line waived the breach, all related cross-defaults were waived and the covenant was amended to increase the maximum delinquency rate increase to 1% from quarter-end to quarter-end.

        For the six-month periods ended June 30, 2010 and 2009 the Company incurred interest expense on its warehouse facilities of $2.0 million and $1.0 million, respectively.

F-40


Table of Contents


WALKER & DUNLOP

Notes to Condensed Consolidated and Combined Financial Statements (Continued)

NOTE 7—FAIR VALUE MEASUREMENTS

        The Company uses valuation techniques that are consistent with the market approach, the income approach and/or the cost approach. Inputs to valuation techniques refer to the assumptions that market participants would use in pricing the asset or liability. Inputs may be observable, meaning those that reflect the assumptions market participants would use in pricing the asset or liability developed based on market data obtained from independent sources, or unobservable, meaning those that reflect the reporting entity's own assumptions about the assumptions market participants would use in pricing the asset or liability developed based on the best information available in the circumstances. In that regard, ASC 820 establishes a fair value hierarchy for valuation inputs that gives the highest priority to quoted prices in active markets for identical assets or liabilities and the lowest priority to unobservable inputs. The fair value hierarchy is as follows:

    Level 1 —Financial assets and liabilities whose values are based on unadjusted quoted prices in active markets for identical assets or liabilities that the Company has the ability to access.

    Level 2 —Financial assets and liabilities whose values are based on inputs other than quoted prices included in Level 1 that are observable for the asset or liability, either directly or indirectly. These might include quoted prices for similar assets or liabilities in active markets, quoted prices for identical or similar assets or liabilities in markets that are not active, inputs other than quoted prices that are observable for the asset or liability (such as interest rates, volatilities, prepayment speeds, credit risks, etc.) or inputs that are derived principally from or corroborated by market data by correlation or other means.

    Level 3 —Financial assets and liabilities whose values are based on inputs that are both unobservable and significant to the overall valuation.

        The Company's MSRs are measured at fair value on a nonrecurring basis. That is, the instruments are not measured at fair value on an ongoing basis but are subject to fair value adjustments in certain circumstances (for example, when there is evidence of impairment). The Company's MSRs do not trade in an active, open market with readily observable prices. While sales of MSRs do occur, precise terms and conditions vary with each transaction and are not readily available. Accordingly, the estimated fair value of MSRs using discounted cash flow ("DCF") models that calculate the present value of estimated future net servicing income. The model considers and incorporates individual loan characteristics, contractually specified servicing fees, prepayment assumptions, delinquency rates, late charges, other ancillary revenue, costs to service and other economic factors. The Company reassesses and periodically adjusts the underlying inputs and assumptions used in the model to reflect observable market conditions and assumptions that a market participant would consider in valuing an MSR asset. MSRs are carried at the lower of amortized cost or estimated fair value.

F-41


Table of Contents


WALKER & DUNLOP

Notes to Condensed Consolidated and Combined Financial Statements (Continued)

NOTE 7—FAIR VALUE MEASUREMENTS (Continued)

        The carrying amounts and the fair values of the Company's financial instruments as of June 30, 2010, are presented below ($ in thousands):

 
  Carrying
amount
  Fair value  

Financial assets:

             
 

Cash and cash equivalents

  $ 14,789   $ 14,789  
 

Restricted cash

    6,073     6,073  
 

Pledged securities

    12,646     12,646  
 

Derivative assets

    42,913     42,913  
           
   

Total financial assets

  $ 76,421   $ 76,421  
           

Financial liabilities:

             
 

Derivative liabilities

  $ 26,563   $ 26,563  
           
   

Total financial liabilities

  $ 26,563   $ 26,563  
           

        The following methods and assumptions were used to estimate the fair value of each class of financial instruments for which it is practicable to estimate that value:

        Cash and Cash Equivalent and Restricted Cash:     The carrying amounts, at face value or cost plus accrued interest, approximate fair value because of the short maturity of these instruments.

        Pledged Securities —Consist of highly liquid investments in commercial paper of AAA rated entities. Investments typically have maturities of 90 days or less, and are valued using quoted market prices from recent trades.

        Derivative Instruments —Consist of interest rate lock commitments and forward sale agreements. These instruments are valued using discounted cash flow models ("DCF") developed based on changes in the U.S. Treasury rate and other observable market data. The value was determined after considering the potential impact of collateralization adjusted to reflect nonperformance risk of both the counterparty and the Company.

        The fair value of the Company's forward sales contracts to investors solely considers the market price movement of the same type of security between the trade date and the balance sheet date (Level 3). The market price changes are multiplied by the notional amount of the forward sales contracts to measure the fair value. Aggregate contract values at June 30, 2010 are summarized below ($ in thousands):

 
  Notional or
Principal
Amount
  Assumed
Gain (Loss)
on Sale
  Interest Rate
Movement
Effect
  Total Fair
Value
Adjustment
 

Rate lock commitments

  $ 641,137   $ 18,949   $ 23,912   $ 42,861  

Forward sale contracts

    729,178         (26,558 )   (26,558 )

Receivable of loans held for sale

    88,041     3,402     2,646     6,048  
                     
 

Total

        $ 22,351   $   $ 22,351  
                     

F-42


Table of Contents


WALKER & DUNLOP

Notes to Condensed Consolidated and Combined Financial Statements (Continued)

NOTE 8—COMMITMENTS AND CONTINGENCIES

        Fannie Mae DUS Related Commitment —Commitments for the origination and subsequent sale and delivery of loans to Fannie Mae represent those mortgage loan transactions where the borrower has locked an interest rate and scheduled closing and the Company has entered into a mandatory delivery commitment to sell the loan to Fannie Mae. The Company accounts for these commitments as derivatives recorded at fair value (Note 7).

        The Company is generally required to share the risk of any losses associated with loans sold to Fannie Mae under the Fannie Mae DUS program (the Fannie Mae DUS risk sharing obligation). The Company is required to secure this obligation by assigning restricted cash balances and securities to Fannie Mae. The reserve for loans may be posted over the first 48 months.

        Under the provisions of the Fannie Mae DUS agreement, the Company must also maintain a certain level of liquid assets referred to as the operational and unrestricted portions of the required reserves each year for each period presented these requirements were satisfied by the Company. Fannie Mae has established benchmark standards for capital adequacy, and reserves the right to terminate the Company's servicing authority for all or some of the portfolio. For all periods presented the Company satisfied and exceeded the capital adequacy requirements.

        Litigation —Capital Funding Group, Inc. ("Capital Funding") filed a lawsuit in the state circuit court of Montgomery County, Maryland against Walker & Dunlop, LLC for alleged breach of contract, unjust enrichment, and unfair competition arising out of an engagement to potentially refinance a large portfolio of senior healthcare facilities located throughout the United States ("Golden Living Facilities"). Walker & Dunlop, LLC was included in the lawsuit by virtue of its alleged status as a successor to Column, in connection with the January 2009 Column transaction. The plaintiff alleges that a contract existed between the plaintiff and Column and its affiliates whereby the plaintiff provided certain proprietary information to Column and its affiliates in exchange for the right to refinance the Golden Living Facilities. Capital Funding is seeking damages of approximately $30 million or more for each of the three claims in the complaint and injunctive relief for the unfair competition claim.

        The Company believes that Walker & Dunlop, LLC is entitled to indemnification from Column with respect to some or all of the claims arising out of this matter. However, Column has not accepted or rejected the Company's indemnification claim and may not until after the matter has been fully resolved. The Company is unable to estimate an expected loss, if any.

        In the normal course of business, the Companies may be party to various claims and litigation. In the opinion of management, based on the opinion of legal counsel, the resolution of these matters is not expected to have a material adverse effect on the Companies' financial position or future results of operations.

        Other commitments —The Company has entered into an agreement with underwriters pursuant to the registration of common stock securities. The costs are being recorded as incurred.

NOTE 9—TRANSACTIONS WITH RELATED PARTIES

        Column, an affiliate of Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC, owns a 35% interest in Walker & Dunlop, LLC and Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC, an affiliate of Column, is participating as an underwriter for the public common stock offering.

F-43


Table of Contents


WALKER & DUNLOP

Notes to Condensed Consolidated and Combined Financial Statements (Continued)

NOTE 9—TRANSACTIONS WITH RELATED PARTIES (Continued)

        From time to time, the Company has made tax advances to shareholders or members for quarterly estimated taxes. These tax advances generally have been repaid through quarterly distributions within 12 months. As of June 30, 2010 tax advances totaling $1.6 million were outstanding and are included in servicing fees and other receivables. On July 28, 2010 a dividend was declared to be paid net of these advances.

NOTE 10—FORMATION TRANSACTIONS

        As part of the formation transactions, Walker & Dunlop, Inc. (WDI) was incorporated in Maryland on July 29, 2010 and has had no activity other than its initial capitalization. On                                    , 2010, the shares of the Company's interests were exchanged for shares of WDI, resulting in              of shares of our common stock outstanding. This exchange has been treated as a stock-split and earnings per share for all periods presented have been adjusted accordingly.

        Basic EPS and Diluted EPS are computed by dividing income available to common stockholders by the weighted-average number of shares outstanding for the period. Changes in ownership interests during any period are weighted for the portion of the period that they were outstanding. No dilutive securities were issued as part of the formation transaction.

        The following is a calculation of the basic and diluted earnings per share for the six-month periods ended June 30 ($ in thousands, except per share data):

 
  2010   2009  

Net income

  $ 22,469   $ 25,651  

Weighted-average number of common shares

             
           

Basic and diluted income per share

  $     $    
           

        The owners of the non-controlling interest have agreed to participate with the members of the Company on an equal basis in the formation of WDI; therefore, their ownership and earnings have been included in this computation to better reflect the intent of the formation transactions.

F-44


Table of Contents


COLUMN GUARANTEED LLC
(A majority owned subsidiary of Column Financial, Inc.)

Index to Financial Statements

 
  Page

Independent Auditor's Report, March 30, 2009

  F-46

Statement of Financial Condition as of December 31, 2008

 
F-47

Statement of Operations for the Year Ended December 31, 2008

 
F-48

Statement of Changes in Members' Equity for the Year Ended December 31, 2008

 
F-49

Statement of Cash Flows for the Year Ended December 31, 2008

 
F-50

Notes to the Financial Statements

 
F-51

F-45


Table of Contents


Independent Auditors' Report

The Board of Directors
Column Guaranteed, LLC;

        We have audited the accompanying statement of financial condition of Column Guaranteed LLC (the "Company"), a majority owned subsidiary of Column Financial, Inc., as of December 31, 2008 and the related statements of operations, changes in members' equity and cash flows for the year then ended. Those financial statements are the responsibility of the Company's management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these financial statements based on our audit.

        We conducted our audit in accordance with auditing standards generally accepted in the United States of America. Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. An audit includes consideration of internal control over financial reporting as a basis for designing audit procedures that are appropriate in the circumstances, but not for the purpose of expressing an opinion on the effectiveness of the Company's internal control over financial reporting. Accordingly, we express no such opinion. An audit also includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements, assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audit provides a reasonable basis for our opinion.

        In our opinion, the financial statements referred to above present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of the Company as of December 31, 2008, and the results of its operations and its cash flows for the year then ended in conformity with U.S. generally accepted accounting principles.


 

 

/s/ KPMG LLP  

March 30, 2009
New York, New York

F-46


Table of Contents


COLUMN GUARANTEED LLC
(A majority owned subsidiary of Column Financial, Inc.)

Statement of Financial Condition

December 31, 2008

(In thousands)

ASSETS

       

Cash and cash equivalents

  $ 9,231  

Receivables from affiliates

    1,113  

Mortgage loans held for sale (of which $34,379 was encumbered)

    50,378  

Mortgage servicing rights

    26,822  

Accrued interest receivable

    310  

Other assets

    521  
       
 

Total assets

  $ 88,375  
       

LIABILITIES AND MEMBERS' EQUITY

       

Short-term borrowings from an affiliate

  $ 30,549  

Assets sold under agreements to repurchase with an affiliate

    30,941  

Accounts payable and accrued expenses

    5,588  

Payables to parent and affiliates

    1,002  

Guarantees

    8,032  

Other liabilities

    250  
       
 

Total liabilities

    76,362  
       

Majority member's interest

    9,678  

Minority member's interest

    2,335  
       
 

Total members' equity

    12,013  
       
 

Total liabilities and members' equity

  $ 88,375  
       

See accompanying notes to financial statements.

F-47


Table of Contents


COLUMN GUARANTEED LLC
(A majority owned subsidiary of Column Financial, Inc.)

Statement of Operations

Year Ended December 31, 2008

(In thousands)

Revenues:

       
 

Gains from mortgage banking activities

  $ 14,169  
 

Loan servicing and other fees

    4,906  
 

Change in fair value of mortgage servicing rights

    (4,961 )
       

    14,114  
 

Interest income

   
3,796
 
 

Interest expense

    1,684  
       
   

Net interest income

    2,112  
       
   

Total net revenues

    16,226  
       

Expenses:

       
 

Employee compensation and benefits

    10,136  
 

Management fees

    3,140  
 

Communications

    187  
 

Occupancy and equipment rental

    799  
 

Professional fees

    2,934  
 

Impairment of goodwill and intangible assets

    24,126  
 

Other operating expenses

    733  
       
   

Total expenses

    42,055  
       

Net loss

  $ (25,829 )
       

See accompanying notes to financial statements.

F-48


Table of Contents


COLUMN GUARANTEED LLC
(A majority owned subsidiary of Column Financial, Inc.)

Statement of Changes in Members' Equity

Year Ended December 31, 2008

(In thousands)

 
  Majority
Member's
Interest
  Minority
Member's
Interest
  Total
Members'
Equity
 

Balances as of December 31, 2007

  $ 33,102   $ 4,678   $ 37,780  

Net loss

    (23,486 )   (2,343 )   (25,829 )

CSG Share Plan activity

    62         62  
               

Balances as of December 31, 2008

  $ 9,678   $ 2,335   $ 12,013  
               

See accompanying notes to financial statements.

F-49


Table of Contents


COLUMN GUARANTEED LLC
(A majority owned subsidiary of Column Financial, Inc.)

Statement of Cash Flows

Year Ended December 31, 2008

(In thousands)

Cash flows from operating activities:

       
 

Net loss

  $ (25,829 )
 

Adjustments to reconcile net loss to net cash used in operating activities:

       
   

CSG Share Plan activity

    67  
   

Change in the fair value of mortgage servicing rights

    4,961  
   

Impairment of goodwill

    14,126  
   

Impairment of intangible asset

    10,000  
 

Changes in operating assets and operating liabilities:

       
   

Mortgage loans held for sale

    (30,751 )
   

Mortgage servicing rights resulting from transfers of financial assets

    (8,349 )
   

Receivables from parent and affiliates

    (747 )
   

Accrued interest receivable

    140  
   

Other assets

    (453 )
   

Guarantee

    2,161  
   

Payables to parent and affiliates

    (3,195 )
   

Other liabilities

    250  
   

Accounts payable and accrued expenses

    2,192  
       

Net cash used in operating activities

    (35,427 )
       

Cash flows from financing activities:

       
   

Payables to parent and affiliates

    (7,814 )
   

Dividend equivalents on CSG share plan activity

    (5 )
   

Short-term borrowing from affiliate

    30,549  
   

Assets sold under agreements to repurchase with an affiliate

    13,356  
       

Net cash provided by financing activities

    36,086  
       

Increase in cash and cash equivalents

    659  

Cash and cash equivalents as of the beginning of year

    8,572  
       

Cash and cash equivalents as of the end of year

  $ 9,231  
       

SUPPLEMENTAL DISCLOSURE:

       
 

Cash payments for interest

  $ 7,534  
       

See accompanying notes to financial statements.

F-50


Table of Contents


COLUMN GUARANTEED LLC

(A majority owned subsidiary of Column Financial, Inc.)

Notes to Financial Statements

December 31, 2008

1. Summary of Significant Accounting Policies

The Company

        Column Guaranteed LLC (the "Company") is a majority owned subsidiary of Column Financial, Inc. (the "Parent"). The Parent is a wholly owned subsidiary of DLJ Mortgage Capital, Inc., and an indirect wholly owned subsidiary of Credit Suisse (USA), Inc. and Credit Suisse Holdings (USA), Inc. ("CS Holdings") whose ultimate parent is Credit Suisse Group ("CSG").

        On November 26, 2003 the Parent acquired an 80% interest in Investment Property Mortgage, L.L.C. ("IPM") and an 80% interest in certain assets and liabilities of the Income Property Loan Division of Standard Mortgage Corporation ("SMC"). Simultaneously with the closing of the acquisition, IPM was converted from a Louisiana limited liability company to a Delaware limited liability company and renamed Column Guaranteed LLC, and the assets and liabilities acquired from SMC were contributed to the Company. SMC (the "Minority Member"), who previously owned 50% of IPM, retained a minority interest of 20% in the Company. SMC also contributed their remaining 20% of certain assets and liabilities of the Income Property Loan Division.

        The results of the Company's operations are allocated 80% to the Parent and 20% to the Minority Member with the exception of certain expenses related to purchase accounting adjustments, required under Statement of Financial Accounting Standards ("SFAS") No. 141, "Business Combinations". For the year ended December 31, 2008 there were purchase accounting adjustments related to the impairment of goodwill and the indefinite-lived intangible asset. See note 10 for more information.

        The Company originates and services commercial multifamily mortgage loans and is an approved Fannie Mae Delegated Underwriting and Servicing ("DUS™") lender. DUS™ is Fannie Mae's principal line of business for purchasing individual multifamily loans. Fannie Mae delegates the responsibility for originating, underwriting, closing, and delivering multifamily mortgages in accordance with the Fannie Mae Guide to the DUS™ Lenders.

        The Company is also an approved Federal Home Loan Mortgage Corporation ("Freddie Mac") Program Plus® Seller/Servicer. Freddie Mac's Program Plus® network is a group of multifamily loan originators and servicers across the United States. Program Plus® Seller/Servicers are approved for specific geographic areas. The Company's approved geographic territory is Louisiana, Mississippi, Georgia, Hawaii and California. Additionally, the Company is approved to participate in Freddie Mac's Multifamily Targeted Affordable Seller/Servicer Program®.

        The Company is also an approved Federal Housing Administration ("FHA") Title II mortgagee regulated by the U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development ("HUD") (collectively, "HUD Programs"). The Company is also an approved Multifamily Accelerated Processing ("MAP") program lender. MAP is FHA's program designed to delegate much of the underwriting responsibility to lenders, thereby, improving the speed and consistency of FHA underwriting. The Company's FHA Title II and MAP designations allow it to participate in all loan programs offered by HUD to finance multifamily, seniors housing and healthcare facilities.

        The Company is an approved Government National Mortgage Association ("Ginnie Mae") issuer in the Ginnie Mae I Multifamily Mortgage-Backed Securities Program.

F-51


Table of Contents


COLUMN GUARANTEED LLC

(A majority owned subsidiary of Column Financial, Inc.)

Notes to Financial Statements (Continued)

December 31, 2008

1. Summary of Significant Accounting Policies (Continued)

        On January 30, 2009, the Company entered into an agreement with Green Park Financial Limited Partnership and Walker & Dunlop, Inc. (collectively, "Green Park Financial") to form a new entity, Walker & Dunlop LLC ("W&D"), and for each party to contribute certain of their assets related to the origination, underwriting, sale and servicing of multi-family real estate loans made pursuant to the various approved programs with Fannie Mae, Freddie Mac and Ginnie Mae into W&D. In addition, the Company agreed to contribute certain cash consideration all in exchange for a membership interest in W&D (collectively, "Formation Agreement").

        Upon the closing of the Formation Agreement, the Company contributed cash plus its core assets, including certain mortgage servicing rights, along with certain office space and employees to W&D, in exchange for a 35% membership interest in W&D. See Notes 10 and 12 for more information.

        The accompanying financial statements have been prepared from separate records maintained by the Company and may not necessarily be indicative of the financial condition or results of its operations that would have existed if the Company had been operated as an unaffiliated entity.

Significant Accounting Policies

        Basis of financial information.     To prepare the financial statements in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America, management must make certain estimates and assumptions. The reported amounts of assets and liabilities and revenues and expenses are affected by these estimates and assumptions. Estimates, by their nature, are based on judgment and available information. Therefore, actual results could differ materially from these estimates. All significant intercompany balances and transactions have been eliminated.

        Cash and cash equivalents.     Cash and cash equivalents include demand deposits held in banks and certain highly liquid investments with original maturities of 90 days or less.

        Assets sold under agreements to repurchase with an affiliate.     The Company enters into transactions with an affiliate involving assets sold under agreements to repurchase ("repurchase agreements") to finance the Company's mortgage loan inventory. Repurchase agreements are treated as financing arrangements and are carried at contract amounts that reflect the amount at which the mortgage loan inventory will subsequently be repurchased. Interest on such contract amounts is accrued and included in payables to parent and affiliates in the statement of financial condition. As of December 31, 2008 the carrying value of these repurchase agreements approximates fair value. Management determines fair value in a manner similar to determining the fair value of mortgage loans held for sale.

        Fair value.     Certain of the Company's assets and liabilities are carried at fair value. See Note 2 for more information.

        Mortgage loans held for sale.     Mortgage loans held for sale represent commercial mortgage loans originated by the Company and are carried at fair value with the changes in fair value included in gains from mortgage banking activities in the statement of operations. Management determines fair value primarily based upon the forward sales price received for loans sold to Fannie Mae, Freddie Mac and HUD under the DUS™ Program, the Program Plus® Seller/Servicer Program and the FHA Title II

F-52


Table of Contents


COLUMN GUARANTEED LLC

(A majority owned subsidiary of Column Financial, Inc.)

Notes to Financial Statements (Continued)

December 31, 2008

1. Summary of Significant Accounting Policies (Continued)


program respectively. As of December 31, 2008 all mortgage loans held for sale were originated by the Company and were pending sale to Fannie Mae, Freddie Mac, and Ginnie Mae, pursuant to the DUS™ lender agreement, the Program Plus® Seller/Servicer Program, and Multifamily Mortgage-Backed Securities Program, respectively. Originations and sales of mortgage loans held for sale are recorded on a settlement date basis. Interest is accrued on all mortgage loans held for sale with the exception of those that are 90 days delinquent or more.

        Mortgage servicing rights.     Mortgage servicing rights are recognized as an asset when the Company sells loans it originated and retains the right to service the loans. The Company is required under the provisions of the DUS™ program to retain the servicing rights related to Fannie Mae DUS™ loans. The Company also services the Freddie Mac and HUD loans that it originates. Mortgage servicing rights are carried at fair value with changes in fair value recognized in the statement of operations. See Note 4 for more information.

        Goodwill and identifiable intangible asset.     Goodwill represents the amount by which the purchase price exceeds the fair value of the net tangible and intangible assets of an acquired company on the date of acquisition. Goodwill and the indefinite-lived intangible assets are reviewed annually for impairment. Based upon the Company's annual review, the goodwill and the intangible asset were fully impaired. See Notes 10 and 12 for more information.

        Other assets.     Other assets include commitments to sell commercial mortgage whole loans which the Company has elected to account for at fair value and other receivables.

        Gains from mortgage banking activities.     Gains from mortgage banking activities include gains and losses on mortgage loans held for sale and commitments to sell commercial mortgage whole loans. Gains and losses on mortgage loans held for sale are recognized on a settlement date basis. Also included in gains from mortgage banking activities are mortgage whole loan origination fees which are recognized upon origination.

        Loan servicing and other fees.     Loan servicing and other fees are recognized as they are earned over the life of the servicing portfolio.

        Interest income (expense).     Interest income includes interest income on the Company's cash and cash equivalents and mortgage loans held for sale as well as interest income on customer escrow deposits. Interest expense includes interest on short-term borrowings from the Parent and an affiliate and repurchase agreements with an affiliate.

        Management fees.     Certain expenses are allocated to the Company by CS Holdings under a service agreement for services performed on behalf of the Company. The service agreement encompasses compensation and benefits, clearing fees, settlement and transaction processing services, as well as accounting, legal, leased facilities, and other support services, which are incremental to amounts incurred directly by the Company. See Note 3 for more information.

        Share-based compensation.     The Company recognizes compensation expense over the required service period on a straight-line basis for all share options, share units and share awards granted under

F-53


Table of Contents


COLUMN GUARANTEED LLC

(A majority owned subsidiary of Column Financial, Inc.)

Notes to Financial Statements (Continued)

December 31, 2008

1. Summary of Significant Accounting Policies (Continued)


the Credit Suisse Group Master Share Plan (the "Share Plan"). See Notes 3 and 9 for more information.

        Income taxes.     The Company is treated as a partnership for U.S. federal income tax purposes. Therefore, under U.S. tax regulations, the partnership itself is generally not subject to federal, state or local income taxes. Accordingly, federal, state or local income taxes have not been provided for in the accompanying financial statements. Each partner is responsible for reporting their allocable share of the partnership's income, gain, losses, deductions and credits on their individual or corporate tax returns.

        The Company remains open to examination from either federal or Texas jurisdictions for the years 2005 and forward. The Company does not anticipate any settlements that would result in a material change to its financial statements.

Recently Adopted Accounting Standards

FSP SFAS 157-3

        In October 2008, the Financial Accounting Standards Board ("FASB") issued FASB Staff Position ("FSP") SFAS 157-3, "Determining the Fair Value of a Financial Asset When the Market for That Asset Is Not Active" ("FSP SFAS 157-3"). FSP SFAS 157-3 clarifies the application of SFAS No. 157, "Fair Value Measurements" ("SFAS 157") in a market that is not active and provides an example to illustrate key considerations in determining the fair value of a financial asset when the market for that financial asset is not active.

        FSP SFAS 157-3 is effective upon issuance, including prior periods for which financial statements have not been issued. The adoption of FSP SFAS 157-3 did not have a material impact on the Company's financial condition, results of operations or cash flows.

FSP SFAS 133-1 and FIN 45-4

        In September 2008, the FASB issued FSP SFAS 133-1 and FASB Interpretation ("FIN") 45-4, "Disclosures about Credit Derivatives and Certain Guarantees: An Amendment of FASB Statement No. 133 and FASB Interpretation No. 45; and Clarification of the Effective Date of FASB Statement No. 161" ("FSP SFAS 133-1" and "FIN 45-4"). FSP SFAS 133-1 and FIN 45-4 applies to credit derivatives within the scope of FASB Statement No. 133 "Accounting for Derivative Instruments and Hedging Activities" ("SFAS 133") hybrid instruments that have embedded credit derivatives, and guarantees within the scope of FIN No. 45, "Guarantor's Accounting and Disclosure Requirements for Guarantees, Including Indirect Guarantees of Indebtedness of Others—an interpretation of FASB Statements No. 5, 57, and 107 and rescission of FASB Interpretation No. 34" ("FIN 45").

        FSP SFAS 133-1 and FIN 45-4 amends SFAS 133 to require sellers of credit derivatives to disclose information about credit derivatives and hybrid instruments that have embedded credit derivatives. These disclosures include the nature and term of the credit derivative, the maximum potential of future payments the seller could be required to make under the credit derivative, the fair value of the credit

F-54


Table of Contents


COLUMN GUARANTEED LLC

(A majority owned subsidiary of Column Financial, Inc.)

Notes to Financial Statements (Continued)

December 31, 2008

1. Summary of Significant Accounting Policies (Continued)


derivative and the nature of any recourse provisions that would enable the seller to recover from third parties any amounts paid under the credit derivative.

        FSP SFAS 133-1 and FIN 45-4 also amends FIN 45 to include the status of the payment and performance risk of the guarantee. The adoption of FSP SFAS 133-1 and FIN 45-4 did not have an impact on the Company's financial condition, results of operations or cash flows.

Standards to be Adopted in the Future Periods

SFAS 160

        In December 2007, the FASB issued SFAS No. 160, "Noncontrolling Interests in Consolidated Financial Statements—an amendment of ARB No. 51" ("SFAS 160"). SFAS 160 amends Accounting Research Bulletin No. 51 to establish accounting and reporting standards for a noncontrolling interest in a subsidiary and for deconsolidation of a subsidiary.

        SFAS 160 requires the recognition of a noncontrolling interest as equity in the consolidated financial statements and separate from the parent's equity. In addition, net income attributable to the noncontrolling interest must be included in consolidated net income on the face of the consolidated statement of operations. SFAS 160 clarifies that changes in a parent's ownership interest in a subsidiary that do not result in deconsolidation are equity transactions if the parent retains its controlling financial interest. SFAS 160 has additional disclosure requirements that clearly identify and distinguish between the interests of the parent and the interests of the noncontrolling owners.

        SFAS 160 is effective for fiscal years, and interim periods within those fiscal years, beginning on or after December 15, 2008. The Company adopted the presentation and transaction guidance of SFAS 160 as of January 1, 2009.

2. Fair Value of Assets and Liabilities

        The fair value of certain of the Company's assets and liabilities is based on observable inputs. These instruments include commitments to sell commercial mortgage whole loans and mortgage loans held for sale.

        In addition, the Company holds assets for which no prices are available, and which have little or no observable inputs. For these instruments the determination of fair value requires subjective assessment and varying degrees of judgment depending on liquidity, concentration, pricing assumptions and the risks affecting the specific instrument. In such circumstances, valuation is determined based on management's own assumptions about the assumptions that market participants would use in pricing the asset (including assumptions about risk). These instruments include mortgage servicing rights. Valuation techniques for certain of these instruments are described more fully below.

        Further deterioration of financial markets could significantly impact the fair value of these financial instruments and the Company's results of operations and financial condition.

F-55


Table of Contents


COLUMN GUARANTEED LLC

(A majority owned subsidiary of Column Financial, Inc.)

Notes to Financial Statements (Continued)

December 31, 2008

2. Fair Value of Assets and Liabilities (Continued)

Fair Value Hierarchy

        Assets and liabilities recorded in the Company's statement of financial condition at fair value as of December 31, 2008 have been categorized based upon the relative reliability of the fair value measures in accordance with SFAS 157.

        The levels of the fair value hierarchy are defined as follows in SFAS 157:

        Level 1:     Quoted prices (unadjusted) in active markets for identical assets or liabilities that the Company has the ability to access at the measurement date. This level of the fair value hierarchy provides the most reliable evidence of fair value and is used to measure fair value whenever available.

        Level 2:     Inputs other than quoted prices included within Level 1 that are observable for the asset or liability, either directly or indirectly. These inputs include: (a) quoted prices for similar assets or liabilities in active markets; (b) quoted prices for identical or similar assets or liabilities in markets that are not active, that is, markets in which there are few transactions for the asset or liability, the prices are not current, or price quotations vary substantially either over time or among market makers, or in which little information is released publicly; (c) inputs other than quoted prices that are observable for the asset or liability or (d) inputs that are derived principally from or corroborated by observable market data by correlation or other means.

        Level 3:     Inputs that are unobservable for the asset or liability. These inputs reflect the Company's own assumptions about the assumptions that market participants would use in pricing the asset or liability (including assumptions about risk). These inputs are developed based on the best information available in the circumstances, which include the Company's own data. The Company's own data used to develop unobservable inputs are adjusted if information indicates that market participants would use different assumptions.

        Fair value measurements are not adjusted for transaction costs.

F-56


Table of Contents


COLUMN GUARANTEED LLC

(A majority owned subsidiary of Column Financial, Inc.)

Notes to Financial Statements (Continued)

December 31, 2008

2. Fair Value of Assets and Liabilities (Continued)

Quantitative Disclosures of Fair Values

        Following is a tabular presentation of fair value of assets for instruments measured at fair value on a recurring basis:

Fair value of assets and liabilities

December 31, 2008
  Quoted prices in
active markets
for identical
assets or
liabilities
(level 1)
  Significant
other observable
inputs
(level 2)
  Significant
unobservable inputs
(level 3)
  Total at
fair value
 
 
  (In thousands)
 

Assets

                         

Mortgage loans held for sale

  $   $ 50,378   $   $ 50,378  

Mortgage servicing rights

            26,822     26,822  

Other assets

        485         485  
                   

Total assets at fair value

  $   $ 50,863   $ 26,822   $ 77,685  
                   

Liabilities

                         

Other liabilities

  $   $ 250   $   $ 250  
                   

Total liabilities at fair value

  $   $ 250   $   $ 250  
                   

Fair value measurements using significant unobservable inputs (level 3)

December 31, 2008
  Mortgage
servicing rights
  Total  
 
  (In thousands)
 

Assets

             

Balance as of January 1, 2008

  $ 23,434   $ 23,434  

Total losses (unrealized)

    (4,961 )   (4,961 )

Purchases of servicing assets

    8,349     8,349  
           

Balance as of December 31, 2008

  $ 26,822   $ 26,822  
           

F-57


Table of Contents


COLUMN GUARANTEED LLC

(A majority owned subsidiary of Column Financial, Inc.)

Notes to Financial Statements (Continued)

December 31, 2008

2. Fair Value of Assets and Liabilities (Continued)

Gains and losses on assets measured at fair value on a recurring basis using significant unobservable inputs (level 3)

December 31, 2008
  Change in fair
value of
mortgage
servicing rights
 
 
  (In thousands)
 

Total losses included in earnings for the year

  $ (4,961 )

Changes in unrealized losses relating to assets still held at reporting date

  $ (4,961 )

        Both observable and unobservable inputs may be used to determine the fair value of positions that have been classified within level 3. As a result, the unrealized losses for assets within level 3 presented in the table above may include changes in fair value that were attributable to both observable and unobservable inputs.

Qualitative Disclosures of Valuation Techniques

Mortgage loans held for sale

        The fair value of mortgage loans held for sale is primarily based upon the forward sales price received for loans sold to Fannie Mae and Ginnie Mae under the DUS™ Program and the Multifamily Mortgage-Backed Securities Program, respectively, and to Freddie Mac under the Program Plus® Seller/Servicer Program.

Mortgage Servicing Rights

        The fair value of mortgage servicing rights, is determined on the basis of internally developed models using several variables, including discount rates, and the default and early pre-payment rates of loans in the portfolio. The model is designed to discount the anticipated future cash flows including ancillary fees associated with these servicing rights on a loan by loan basis. Servicing fees are based on the amortizing balance of the underlying loan over its estimated life. Included in the model are deductions for the costs to service the loan. The model is updated monthly for changes in the servicing portfolio.

Other Assets and Other Liabilities

        The determination of the fair value of commitments to sell commercial mortgage whole loans which are recorded in other assets and other liabilities in the statement of financial condition involves only a limited degree of subjectivity because the required inputs are observable in the marketplace including the forward sales price received for loans sold.

F-58


Table of Contents


COLUMN GUARANTEED LLC

(A majority owned subsidiary of Column Financial, Inc.)

Notes to Financial Statements (Continued)

December 31, 2008

2. Fair Value of Assets and Liabilities (Continued)

Fair Value Option

        The Company has elected fair value for certain of its financial statement captions as follows:

        Mortgage loans held for sale.     The Company has elected to account for originated mortgage loans held for sale entered into after January 1, 2007 at fair value. These activities are managed on a fair value basis, thus fair value accounting is deemed more appropriate for reporting purposes.

        Other assets and other liabilities.     The Company has elected to account for all commitments to sell commercial mortgage loans entered into after January 1, 2007 at fair value. These activities are managed on a fair value basis, thus fair value accounting is deemed more appropriate for reporting purposes.

Gains/losses on assets where fair value option was elected

December 31, 2008
  Total gains (losses)   Of which related to interest income   Of which related to interest expense   Of which related to gains from mortgage banking activities  
 
  (In thousands)
 

Mortgage loans held for sale

  $ 19,961   $ 2,861   $   $ 17,100  

Other assets

    485             485  

Other liabilities

    (250 )           (250 )

Gains/losses on assets with fair value option elected

December 31, 2008
  Total
gains (losses)
  Of which
related to
credit risk
  Of which not
related to
credit risk
 
 
  (In thousands)
 

Assets

                   

Mortgage loans held for sale

  $ 19,961   $ 19,961   $  

Other assets

    485     485      

Other liabilities

    (250 )   (250 )    

F-59


Table of Contents


COLUMN GUARANTEED LLC

(A majority owned subsidiary of Column Financial, Inc.)

Notes to Financial Statements (Continued)

December 31, 2008

2. Fair Value of Assets and Liabilities (Continued)

Difference between the fair value and the aggregate unpaid principal balances

December 31, 2008
  Of which
at fair
value
  Aggregate
unpaid
principal
  Difference
between
aggregate
fair value
and unpaid
principal
 
 
  (In thousands)
 

Assets

                   

Mortgage loans held for sale

  $ 50,378   $ 50,652   $ 274  

Other assets

    485         485  

Other liabilities

    250         250  

3. Related Party Transactions

        The Company's ultimate parent Credit Suisse Group and its banking subsidiary Credit Suisse, centrally manage their funding activities and lend funds to their subsidiaries and affiliates. The Company relies on Credit Suisse for financing. In the ordinary course of business, the Company enters into significant financing and operating transactions with affiliated companies and believes that these transactions are generally on market terms that could be obtained from unrelated third parties.

        The Company reimburses its Parent and CS Securities for allocated expenses under a service agreement. See Note 1 for more information.

F-60


Table of Contents


COLUMN GUARANTEED LLC

(A majority owned subsidiary of Column Financial, Inc.)

Notes to Financial Statements (Continued)

December 31, 2008

3. Related Party Transactions (Continued)

        The following table sets forth related party assets and liabilities as of December 31, 2008:

 
  (In thousands)  

ASSETS

       

Receivables from affiliates

  $ 1,113  
       

Total assets

  $ 1,113  
       

 

 
  (In thousands)  

LIABILITIES

       

Short-term borrowings from an affiliate

  $ 30,549  

Assets sold under agreements to repurchase with an affiliate

    30,941  

Payables to parent and affiliates

    1,002  
       

Total liabilities

  $ 62,492  
       

        Included in the statement of operations are expenses resulting from various financing activities with certain affiliates as well as fees for services performed for the Company. For the year ended December 31, 2008, interest expense and management fees charged to the Company, by related parties, totaled approximately $1.7 million and $3.1 million, respectively.

        The Company enters into repurchase agreements with an affiliate to finance its mortgage loan inventory. As of December 31, 2008, the fair market value of assets that the Company had pledged to an affiliate was $34 million.

        The Share Plan provides for the grant of equity-based awards to Company employees based on CSG shares pursuant to which employees of the Company may be granted, as compensation, shares or other equity-based awards as compensation for services performed. CS Holdings purchases shares indirectly from CSG to satisfy these awards, but CS Holdings does not require reimbursement from the Company; therefore, amounts associated with these awards are considered a capital contribution to the majority member and credited to paid-in-capital. Amounts contributed by CS Holdings relating to equity-based awards for the year ended December 31, 2008 was $62 thousand. See Notes 1 and 9 for further information on the Company's share-based compensation.

4. Mortgage Servicing Rights

        Mortgage servicing rights are carried at fair value with changes in fair value recognized in the statement of operations. The Company owns servicing rights related to outstanding loan balances of

F-61


Table of Contents


COLUMN GUARANTEED LLC

(A majority owned subsidiary of Column Financial, Inc.)

Notes to Financial Statements (Continued)

December 31, 2008

4. Mortgage Servicing Rights (Continued)


$4.9 billion as of December 31, 2008. The following table presents the mortgage servicing rights activity for the year ended December 31, 2008:

 
  (In thousands)  

Balance at beginning of year

  $ 23,434  
 

Change in fair value(1)

    (4,961 )
 

Mortgage servicing rights resulting from transfers of financial assets

    8,349  
       

Mortgage servicing rights at end of year

  $ 26,822  
       

(1)
Primarily represents changes due to payments and the passage of time.

        The key economic assumptions used in determining the fair value of mortgage servicing rights as of December 31, 2008 are as follows:

Weighted average life (in years)

    8.31  

Prepayment rate (in rate per annum)

    N/A (1)

Weighted average discount rate

    10%-14 %

Expected credit losses (in rate per annum)

    0.25 %

(1)
Commercial mortgage loans typically have prepayment protection in the form of prepayment lockouts and yield maintenance. As a servicer of the Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac programs the Company receives a portion of the prepayment fees representing the lost servicing income and therefore the Company does not expect prepayments to have a significant effect on the fair value of the mortgage servicing rights.

        The commercial mortgage servicing rights valuation process includes the use of a discounted cash flow model to arrive at an estimate of fair value at each balance sheet date. The cash flow assumptions and prepayment assumptions used in the discounted cash flow model are based on empirical data drawn from historical performance of the mortgage servicing rights.

        The cash flow model used to value the mortgage servicing rights is subjected to validation in accordance with the Company's model validation policies. This process includes review of the theoretical soundness of the model and the related development process along with ongoing performance monitoring.

        The variables can change as market conditions change. The current market data utilized in the mortgage servicing rights valuation process and in the assessment of the reasonableness of our valuation is obtained from industry surveys and other market analysis.

5. Borrowings

        Short-term borrowings from affiliates are demand obligations with interest approximating the federal funds rate, the London Interbank Offered Rate or other money market indices. Such borrowings are generally used to finance mortgage loans held for sale. As of December 31, 2008

F-62


Table of Contents


COLUMN GUARANTEED LLC

(A majority owned subsidiary of Column Financial, Inc.)

Notes to Financial Statements (Continued)

December 31, 2008

5. Borrowings (Continued)


short-term borrowings were $30.5 million, none of which was secured by Company-owned assets. The interest rate as of December 31, 2008 was 2.25%.

6. Leases and Commitments

        The Company leases office space under cancelable and non-cancelable lease agreements that expire on various dates through 2011. Rental expense on operating leases was approximately $528 thousand for the year ended December 31, 2008.

        As of December 31, 2008, non-cancelable leases in excess of one year had the following minimum lease commitments:

 
  (In thousands)  

2009

  $ 163  

2010

    100  

2011

    25  
       
 

Total

  $ 288  
       

7. Guarantees

        As part of the Company's commercial mortgage activities, the Company sells certain commercial mortgages that it has originated to Fannie Mae and agrees to guarantee one third of any ultimate loss on the loan should the borrower fail to perform, with Fannie Mae bearing the remainder of the loss. FIN 45 requires disclosure by a guarantor of its maximum potential payment obligations under certain of its guarantees to the extent that it is possible to estimate them. FIN 45 also requires a guarantor to recognize, at the inception of a guarantee, a liability for the fair value of the obligations undertaken in issuing such guarantee, including its ongoing obligation to stand ready to perform over the term of the guarantee in the event that certain events or conditions occur. Pursuant to FIN 45 the Company records a liability associated with its guarantee. The initial guarantee liability is reassessed on a regular basis. On an ongoing basis, the Company monitors the guaranteed loans and, if necessary, increases its liability for any evidenced credit deterioration that inure to the Company by way of its guarantee.

        The following table sets forth the maximum quantifiable contingent liability associated with guarantees as of December 31, 2008 by maturity:

 
  Amount of Guarantee Expiration Per Period  
 
  Less than
1 year
  1-3 years   4-5 years   Over
5 years
  Total
guarantees
 
 
  (In thousands)
 

Credit guarantees

  $ 20,292   $ 31,991   $ 86,133   $ 355,945   $ 494,361  
                       
 

Total guarantees

  $ 20,292   $ 31,991   $ 86,133   $ 355,945   $ 494,361  
                       

        As a result of the Formation Agreement and an agreement with Green Park Financial and Fannie Mae to transfer certain mortgage servicing rights and obligations under the Fannie Mae DUS Program

F-63


Table of Contents


COLUMN GUARANTEED LLC

(A majority owned subsidiary of Column Financial, Inc.)

Notes to Financial Statements (Continued)

December 31, 2008

7. Guarantees (Continued)


("Transfer Agreement"), the Company was legally released from its obligation under the loss share agreement effective January 30, 2009.

        As of December 31, 2008, the Company has recorded a guarantee liability of approximately $8 million. This includes the Company's share of remaining known losses on loans in which the borrower failed to perform, a transfer fee to be paid to Fannie Mae under the Transfer Agreement and cash consideration that will be paid to W&D to assume the obligation.

8. Concentrations of Credit Risk

        The Company is engaged in the origination and servicing of commercial mortgage loans. Mortgage loan transactions are collateralized.

        Credit risk is the potential for loss resulting from the default by a counterparty of its obligations. Exposure to credit risk arises from the inability of the mortgagors to make the required payments as well as changes in the value of the real estate collateralizing the mortgage loans. The Company uses various means to manage its credit risk. Each mortgage facility is individually approved. The approval process includes an analysis of the credit-worthiness of the counterparty and of the real estate provided as collateral. These counterparties are subsequently reviewed on a periodic basis.

9. Share-Based Compensation

        The Company participates in the Share Plan. The Share Plan provides share awards to certain employees based on the fair market value of CSG shares at the time of grant. CSG determines the fair value of share based compensation and allocates compensation expense to different legal entities within CSG based on the legal entity to which an employee renders services. Total compensation expense for share-based compensation recognized in the statement of operations in employee compensation and benefits was $67 thousand.

Share Awards

        For the year ended December 31, 2008, there were no share awards granted to the Company's employees. As of December 31, 2008, there were 404 share awards outstanding.

Share Unit Awards

    Incentive Share Units

        As part of its annual incentive performance process, the Company granted Incentive Share Units ("ISUs"). An ISU is a unit that is similar to shares, but offers additional upside depending on the development of the CSG share price. For each ISU granted, the employee will receive at least one CSG share. In addition, the leverage component can deliver additional upside, which will be determined by the monthly average CSG share price over the three-year period following the grant. Each ISU will vest at a rate of one-third of a share per year over three years, with the potential additional shares vesting on the third anniversary of the grant date, depending on the development of the leverage component.

F-64


Table of Contents


COLUMN GUARANTEED LLC

(A majority owned subsidiary of Column Financial, Inc.)

Notes to Financial Statements (Continued)

December 31, 2008

9. Share-Based Compensation (Continued)

        The number of ISU base and leverage units granted during the year ended December 31, 2008 was 888. The fair value of the ISU base component granted in January 2008 was $49.97 per unit and the fair value of the 2008 ISU leverage component was $9.73 per unit. The number of ISU base and leverage units outstanding as of December 31, 2008 was 5 thousand.

10. Impairment of Goodwill and Identifiable Intangible Asset

        As a result of the formation agreement entered into with Green Park Financial and the pending transfer of the Company's core assets to W&D discussed in Notes 1 and 12, the implied fair value of the Company was determined to be less than its carrying amount. During the year ended December 31, 2008, the Company recorded a $24.1 million charge in the statement of operations related to the impairment of the goodwill and the intangible asset. $2 million of the goodwill impairment charge was allocated to the Minority member and $12.1 million was allocated to the Majority member. The entire intangible asset impairment charge of $10 million was allocated to the Majority member.

11. Agency Capital Requirements

        The Company is subject to HUD, Fannie Mae, Freddie Mac and Ginnie Mae net worth requirements. The Company is required to maintain $250,000 of adjusted net worth to remain a Title II mortgagee in good standing with HUD. The Company is required to maintain $500,000 of adjusted net worth to remain a Ginnie Mae I Multifamily Mortgage-Backed Securities Program issuer in good standing with Ginnie Mae. Freddie Mac requires a minimum net worth of $2 million to remain a Program Plus® approved Seller/Servicer in good standing. The Fannie Mae net worth and liquidity requirements are tied to the size of the Company's Fannie Mae portfolio and are impacted by the credit rating of the Company's parent companies. As of December 31, 2008 the Company's Fannie Mae net worth requirement was $8.3 million. As of December 31, 2008 the Company had adjusted net worth pursuant to Fannie Mae's prescribed calculation of approximately $16.4 million. The Company exceeds Fannie Mae liquidity requirements by approximately 9 times.

12. Subsequent Event (Unaudited)

        On January 30, 2009, the Company entered into the Formation Agreement to contribute certain of their assets and liabilities to a newly formed entity, W&D, in exchange for a 35% membership interest in the new entity. The Company also entered into the Transfer Agreement to transfer certain rights and obligations to W&D. See Notes 1 and 7 for more details.

        In connection with the Company entering into the Formation Agreement, an affiliate purchased the Minority Member's 20% interest in the Company with a carrying value of $2.3 million, plus a $5.1 million payment by the Company, for total consideration of $7.4 million. With this payment, the affiliate now holds a 20% interest in the Company.

        The net consideration provided by the Company on January 30, 2009 to W&D was $34.3 million. This consisted of $43 million in assets, including cash, non-HUD mortgage servicing rights and office space partially offset by the transfer of the Fannie Mae loss sharing obligation and certain payables to employees, together totaling $8.7 million.

F-65


Table of Contents


COLUMN GUARANTEED LLC

(A majority owned subsidiary of Column Financial, Inc.)

Notes to Financial Statements (Continued)

December 31, 2008

12. Subsequent Event (Unaudited) (Continued)

        The Company's 35% membership interest in W&D primarily includes mortgage loans and mortgage servicing rights.

        The Company is expected to operate under the HUD Programs until September 2009. Mortgage servicing rights related to HUD loans of $1.9 million will remain on the Company's statement of financial condition unless and until HUD approval is received or the HUD loans are transferred to a third party at the direction of W&D. During 2009, despite the delayed transfer of the HUD assets, the Company received full compensation for the HUD mortgage servicing rights and as a result the Company recognized a $1.9 million obligation to W&D.

        Effective January 30, 2009, W&D will perform origination, underwriting, sales and servicing of commercial mortgages pursuant to programs sponsored by Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac.

F-66


Table of Contents

        Until                        , 2010 (25 days after the date of this prospectus), all dealers that effect transactions in our common stock, whether or not participating in this offering, may be required to deliver a prospectus. This is in addition to the dealers' obligation to deliver a prospectus when acting as underwriters and with respect to their unsold allotments or subscriptions.

                        Shares

Walker & Dunlop, Inc.

Common Stock

PROSPECTUS

Credit Suisse

Keefe, Bruyette & Woods

                         , 2010


Table of Contents


Part II
INFORMATION NOT REQUIRED IN PROSPECTUS

Item 13.    Other Expenses of Issuance and Distribution.

        The following table itemizes the expenses incurred by us in connection with the issuance and distribution of the securities being registered hereunder. All amounts shown are estimates except for the SEC registration fee and the Financial Industry Regulatory Authority, Inc., or FINRA, filing fee.

SEC registration fee

  $ 10,695  

FINRA filing fee

    15,500  

NYSE listing fee

       

Printing and engraving fees

       

Legal fees and expenses (including Blue Sky fees)

       

Accounting fees and expenses

       

Transfer agent and registrar fees

       

Miscellaneous expenses

       
       

Total

  $    
       

Item 14.    Indemnification of Directors and Officers.

        The Maryland General Corporation Law, or MGCL, permits a Maryland corporation to include in its charter a provision limiting the liability of its directors and officers to the corporation and its stockholders for money damages except for liability resulting from actual receipt of an improper benefit or profit in money, property or services or active and deliberate dishonesty established by a final judgment as being material to the cause of action. Our charter contains such a provision that eliminates such liability to the maximum extent permitted by Maryland law.

        The MGCL requires a corporation (unless its charter provides otherwise, which our charter does not) to indemnify a director or officer who has been successful, on the merits or otherwise, in the defense of any proceeding to which he or she is made or threatened to be made a party by reason of his or her service in that capacity. The MGCL permits a corporation to indemnify its present and former directors and officers, among others, against judgments, penalties, fines, settlements and reasonable expenses actually incurred by them in connection with any proceeding to which they may be made or are threatened to be made a party by reason of their service in those or other capacities unless it is established that:

    the act or omission of the director or officer was material to the matter giving rise to the proceeding and (1) was committed in bad faith or (2) was the result of active and deliberate dishonesty;

    the director or officer actually received an improper personal benefit in money, property or services; or

    in the case of any criminal proceeding, the director or officer had reasonable cause to believe that the act or omission was unlawful.

        However, under the MGCL, a Maryland corporation may not indemnify a director or officer for an adverse judgment in a suit by or in the right of the corporation or if the director or officer was adjudged liable on the basis that personal benefit was improperly received, unless in either case a court orders indemnification and then only for expenses.

II-1


Table of Contents

        In addition, the MGCL permits a corporation to advance reasonable expenses to a director or officer upon the corporation's receipt of:

    a written affirmation by the director or officer of his good faith belief that he or she has met the standard of conduct necessary for indemnification by the corporation; and

    a written undertaking by the director or on the director's behalf to repay the amount paid or reimbursed by the corporation if it is ultimately determined that the director did not meet the standard of conduct.

        Our charter and bylaws obligate us, to the fullest extent permitted by Maryland law in effect from time to time, to indemnify and to pay or reimburse reasonable expenses in advance of final disposition of a proceeding to:

    any present or former director or officer who is made or threatened to be made a party to the proceeding by reason of his or her service in that capacity; or

    any individual who, while a director or officer of our company and at our request, serves or has served another corporation, REIT, partnership, joint venture, trust, employee benefit plan or any other enterprise as a director, officer, partner or trustee of such corporation, REIT, partnership, joint venture, trust, employee benefit plan or other enterprise and who is made or threatened to be made a party to the proceeding by reason of his or her service in that capacity.

        Our charter and bylaws also permit us, with the approval of our board of directors, to indemnify and advance expenses to any person who served a predecessor of ours in any of the capacities described above and to any employee or agent of our company or a predecessor of our company.

        Upon completion of this offering, we intend to enter into indemnification agreements with each of our directors and executive officers that would provide for indemnification to the maximum extent permitted by Maryland law.

        Insofar as the foregoing provisions permit indemnification of directors, officers or persons controlling us for liability arising under the Securities Act, we have been informed that, in the opinion of the SEC, this indemnification is against public policy as expressed in the Securities Act and is therefore unenforceable.

Item 15.    Recent Sales of Unregistered Securities.

        On July 29, 2010, we issued 100 shares of common stock to William M. Walker in connection with the formation and initial capitalization of our company for an aggregate purchase price of $100. These shares were issued in reliance on the exemption set forth in Section 4(2) of the Securities Act and Rule 506 of Regulation D thereunder.

Item 16.    Exhibits and Financial Statement Schedules.

        (a)   Exhibits. The following exhibits are filed as part of this registration statement on Form S-1:

Exhibit No.   Description
  1.1 * Form of Underwriting Agreement

 

2.1

*

Contribution Agreement, dated as of                  , 2010, by and among Mallory Walker, Howard W. Smith, William M. Walker, Taylor Walker, Richard C. Warner, Donna Mighty, Michael Yavinsky, Ted Hermes, Deborah A. Wilson and Walker & Dunlop, Inc.

 

2.2

*

Contribution Agreement, dated as of                  , 2010, between Column Guaranteed LLC and Walker & Dunlop, Inc.

II-2


Table of Contents

Exhibit No.   Description
  3.1 * Form of Articles of Amendment and Restatement of Walker & Dunlop, Inc.

 

3.2

*

Form of Amended and Restated Bylaws of Walker & Dunlop, Inc.

 

4.1

*

Specimen Common Stock Certificate of Walker & Dunlop, Inc.

 

4.2

*

Registration Rights Agreement, by and among Walker & Dunlop, Inc. and Mallory Walker, Taylor Walker, William M. Walker, Howard W. Smith, III, Richard C. Warner, Donna Mighty, Michael Yavinsky, Ted Hermes, Deborah A. Wilson and Column Guaranteed LLC

 

4.3

*

Stockholders Agreement by and among William M. Walker, Mallory Walker, Column Guaranteed LLC and Walker & Dunlop, Inc.

 

5.1

*

Opinion of Hogan Lovells US LLP regarding the validity of the securities being registered

 

10.1

 

Formation Agreement, dated January 30, 2009, by and among Green Park Financial Limited Partnership, Walker & Dunlop, Inc., Column Guaranteed LLC and Walker & Dunlop,  LLC

 

10.2

*

Second Amended and Restated Credit Agreement, dated as of            , 2010, between Walker & Dunlop, LLC, Bank of America, NA and the Lenders party thereto

 

10.3

*†

Employment Agreement, dated                  , between Walker & Dunlop, Inc. and William M. Walker

 

10.4

*†

Employment Agreement, dated                  , between Walker & Dunlop, Inc. and Howard W. Smith,  III

 

10.5

*†

Employment Agreement, dated                  , between Walker & Dunlop, Inc. and Deborah A. Wilson

 

10.6

*†

Employment Agreement, dated                  , between Walker & Dunlop, Inc. and Richard Warner

 

10.7


2008 Incentive Deferred Bonus Compensation Agreement, dated June 16, 2008, by and between Walker & Dunlop GP, LLC and William M. Walker

 

10.8


Amendment to 2008 Incentive Deferred Bonus Compensation Agreement, dated December 31, 2008, by and between Walker & Dunlop GP, LLC and William M. Walker

 

10.9


2008 Incentive Deferred Bonus Compensation Agreement, dated June 16, 2008, by and between Walker & Dunlop GP, LLC and Howard W. Smith, III

 

10.10


Amendment to 2008 Incentive Deferred Bonus Compensation Agreement, dated December 31, 2008, by and between Walker & Dunlop GP, LLC and Howard W. Smith, III

 

10.11


2008 Incentive Deferred Bonus Compensation Agreement, dated June 16, 2008, by and between Walker & Dunlop GP, LLC and Richard C. Warner

 

10.12


Amendment to 2008 Incentive Deferred Bonus Compensation Agreement, dated December 31, 2008, by and between Walker & Dunlop GP, LLC and Richard C. Warner

 

10.13


2009 Incentive Deferred Bonus Compensation Agreement, dated April 30, 2009, by and between Walker & Dunlop GP, LLC and William M. Walker

 

10.14


2009 Incentive Deferred Bonus Compensation Agreement, dated April 30, 2009, by and between Walker & Dunlop GP, LLC and Howard W. Smith, III

 

10.15


2009 Incentive Deferred Bonus Compensation Agreement, dated April 30, 2009, by and between Walker & Dunlop GP, LLC and Richard C. Warner

II-3


Table of Contents

Exhibit No.   Description
  10.16 2009 Incentive Deferred Bonus Compensation Agreement, dated April 30, 2009, by and between Walker & Dunlop GP, LLC and Deborah A. Wilson

 

10.17


2010 Long Term Incentive Plan of Walker & Dunlop, LLC, dated January 1, 2010

 

10.18

*†

Equity Incentive Plan of Walker & Dunlop, Inc.

 

10.19

*†

Form of Restricted Common Stock Award Agreement

 

10.20

*†

Form of Stock Option Award Agreement

 

10.21

*

Form of Indemnification Agreement with officers and directors

 

10.22

 

Amended & Restated Warehousing Credit and Security Agreement, dated October 15, 2009, among Walker & Dunlop LLC and Green Park Financial Limited Partnership (the "Borrowers"); Bank of America, NA and TD Bank, NA (the "Lenders"); and Bank of America, NA as "Credit Agent" (the "A&R Warehouse Agreement")

 

10.23

 

First Amendment to A&R Warehouse Agreement, dated November 30, 2009, by and between the Borrowers, the Credit Agent and the Lenders

 

10.24

 

Second Amendment to A&R Warehouse Agreement, dated March 26, 2010, by and among Walker & Dunlop, LLC, the Credit Agent and the Lenders

 

10.25

 

Third Amendment to A&R Warehouse Agreement, dated July 30, 2010, by and among Walker & Dunlop, LLC, the Credit Agent and the Lenders

 

10.26

 

Warehousing Credit and Security Agreement, dated as of June 30, 2010, between Walker & Dunlop, LLC and PNC Bank, National Association

 

10.27

 

Master Loan Purchase and Sale Agreement, dated as of March 30, 2010, by and between Walker & Dunlop, LLC and Kemps Landing Capital Company, LLC

 

21.1

*

List of Subsidiaries of the Company

 

23.1

 

Consent of KPMG LLP

 

23.2

 

Consent of KPMG LLP

 

23.3

*

Consent of Hogan Lovells US LLP (included in Exhibit 5.1)

 

99.1

*

Consent of            to be named as a director nominee

 

99.2

*

Consent of            to be named as a director nominee

*
To be filed by amendment.

Denotes a management contract or compensation plan, contract or arrangement.

        (b)   Financial Statement Schedules. See page F-1 for an index to the financial statements included in registration statement.

Item 17.    Undertakings.

        (a)   The undersigned registrant hereby undertakes to provide to the underwriters at the closing specified in the underwriting agreement, certificates in such denominations and registered in such names as required by the underwriters to permit prompt delivery to each purchaser.

        (b)   Insofar as indemnification for liabilities arising under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, may be permitted to directors, officers and controlling persons of the registrant pursuant to the

II-4


Table of Contents


foregoing provisions, or otherwise, the registrant has been advised that in the opinion of the Securities and Exchange Commission such indemnification is against public policy as expressed in the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, and is, therefore, unenforceable. In the event that a claim for indemnification against such liabilities (other than the payment by the registrant of expenses incurred or paid by a director, officer or controlling person of the registrant in the successful defense of any action, suit or proceeding) is asserted by such director, officer or controlling person in connection with the securities being registered, the registrant will, unless in the opinion of its counsel the matter has been settled by controlling precedent, submit to a court of appropriate jurisdiction the question whether such indemnification by it is against public policy as expressed in the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, and will be governed by the final adjudication of such issue.

        (c)   The undersigned registrant hereby further undertakes that:

            (1)   For purposes of determining any liability under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, the information omitted from the form of prospectus filed as part of this registration statement in reliance upon Rule 430A and contained in a form of prospectus filed by the registrant pursuant to Rule 424(b)(1) or (4) or Rule 497(h) under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, shall be deemed to be part of this registration statement as of the time it was declared effective.

            (2)   For the purpose of determining any liability under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, each post-effective amendment that contains a form of prospectus shall be deemed to be a new registration statement relating to the securities offered therein, and the offering of such securities at that time shall be deemed to be the initial bona fide offering thereof.

II-5


Table of Contents


SIGNATURES

        Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, the registrant has duly caused this registration statement to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized, in the City of Bethesda, State of Maryland, on August 4, 2010.

    WALKER & DUNLOP, INC.

 

 

By:

 

/s/ WILLIAM M. WALKER

William M. Walker
Chairman, President and Chief Executive Officer

        Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, this registration statement has been signed by the following persons in the capacities and on the dates indicated.

Signature
 
Title
 
Date

 

 

 

 

 
/s/ WILLIAM M. WALKER

William M. Walker
  Chairman, President and Chief Executive Officer and Director (principal executive officer)   August 4, 2010

/s/ DEBORAH A. WILSON

Deborah A. Wilson

 

Senior Vice President, Chief Financial Officer, Secretary and Treasurer (principal financial officer and principal accounting officer)

 

August 4, 2010

/s/ HOWARD W. SMITH, III

Howard W. Smith, III

 

Executive Vice President, Chief Operating Officer and Director

 

August 4, 2010

/s/ MITCHELL M. GAYNOR

Mitchell M. Gaynor

 

Director

 

August 4, 2010

/s/ RICHARD M. LUCAS

Richard M. Lucas

 

Director

 

August 4, 2010

/s/ JOHN RICE

John Rice

 

Director

 

August 4, 2010

/s/ EDMUND F. TAYLOR

Edmund F. Taylor

 

Director

 

August 4, 2010

/s/ ROBERT A. WRZOSEK

Robert A. Wrzosek

 

Director

 

August 4, 2010

II-6


Table of Contents


EXHIBIT INDEX

Exhibit No.   Description
  1.1 * Form of Underwriting Agreement

 

2.1

*

Contribution Agreement, dated as of                  , 2010, by and among Mallory Walker, Howard W. Smith, William M. Walker, Taylor Walker, Richard C. Warner, Donna Mighty, Michael Yavinsky, Ted Hermes, Deborah A. Wilson and Walker & Dunlop, Inc.

 

2.2

*

Contribution Agreement, dated as of                  , 2010, between Column Guaranteed LLC and Walker & Dunlop, Inc.

 

3.1

*

Form of Articles of Amendment and Restatement of Walker & Dunlop, Inc.

 

3.2

*

Form of Amended and Restated Bylaws of Walker & Dunlop, Inc.

 

4.1

*

Specimen Common Stock Certificate of Walker & Dunlop, Inc.

 

4.2

*

Registration Rights Agreement, by and among Walker & Dunlop, Inc. and Mallory Walker, Taylor Walker, William M. Walker, Howard W. Smith, III, Richard C. Warner, Donna Mighty, Michael Yavinsky, Ted Hermes, Deborah A. Wilson and Column Guaranteed LLC

 

4.3

*

Stockholders Agreement by and among William M. Walker, Mallory Walker, Column Guaranteed LLC and Walker & Dunlop, Inc.

 

5.1

*

Opinion of Hogan Lovells US LLP regarding the validity of the securities being registered

 

10.1

 

Formation Agreement, dated January 30, 2009, by and among Green Park Financial Limited Partnership, Walker & Dunlop, Inc., Column Guaranteed LLC and Walker & Dunlop,  LLC

 

10.2

*

Second Amended and Restated Credit Agreement, dated as of            , 2010, between Walker & Dunlop, LLC, Bank of America, NA and the Lenders party thereto

 

10.3

*†

Employment Agreement, dated                  , between Walker & Dunlop, Inc. and William M. Walker

 

10.4

*†

Employment Agreement, dated                  , between Walker & Dunlop, Inc. and Howard W. Smith,  III

 

10.5

*†

Employment Agreement, dated                  , between Walker & Dunlop, Inc. and Deborah A. Wilson

 

10.6

*†

Employment Agreement, dated                  , between Walker & Dunlop, Inc. and Richard Warner

 

10.7


2008 Incentive Deferred Bonus Compensation Agreement, dated June 16, 2008, by and between Walker & Dunlop GP, LLC and William M. Walker

 

10.8


Amendment to 2008 Incentive Deferred Bonus Compensation Agreement, dated December 31, 2008, by and between Walker & Dunlop GP, LLC and William M. Walker

 

10.9


2008 Incentive Deferred Bonus Compensation Agreement, dated June 16, 2008, by and between Walker & Dunlop GP, LLC and Howard W. Smith, III

 

10.10


Amendment to 2008 Incentive Deferred Bonus Compensation Agreement, dated December 31, 2008, by and between Walker & Dunlop GP, LLC and Howard W. Smith, III

 

10.11


2008 Incentive Deferred Bonus Compensation Agreement, dated June 16, 2008, by and between Walker & Dunlop GP, LLC and Richard C. Warner

 

10.12


Amendment to 2008 Incentive Deferred Bonus Compensation Agreement, dated December 31, 2008, by and between Walker & Dunlop GP, LLC and Richard C. Warner

Table of Contents

Exhibit No.   Description
  10.13 2009 Incentive Deferred Bonus Compensation Agreement, dated April 30, 2009, by and between Walker & Dunlop GP, LLC and William M. Walker

 

10.14


2009 Incentive Deferred Bonus Compensation Agreement, dated April 30, 2009, by and between Walker & Dunlop GP, LLC and Howard W. Smith, III

 

10.15


2009 Incentive Deferred Bonus Compensation Agreement, dated April 30, 2009, by and between Walker & Dunlop GP, LLC and Richard C. Warner

 

10.16


2009 Incentive Deferred Bonus Compensation Agreement, dated April 30, 2009, by and between Walker & Dunlop GP, LLC and Deborah A. Wilson

 

10.17


2010 Long Term Incentive Plan of Walker & Dunlop, LLC, dated January 1, 2010

 

10.18

*†

Equity Incentive Plan of Walker & Dunlop, Inc.

 

10.19

*†

Form of Restricted Common Stock Award Agreement

 

10.20

*†

Form of Stock Option Award Agreement

 

10.21

*

Form of Indemnification Agreement with officers and directors

 

10.22

 

Amended & Restated Warehousing Credit and Security Agreement, dated October 15, 2009, among Walker & Dunlop LLC and Green Park Financial Limited Partnership (the "Borrowers"); Bank of America, NA and TD Bank, NA (the "Lenders"); and Bank of America, NA as "Credit Agent" (the "A&R Warehouse Agreement")

 

10.23

 

First Amendment to A&R Warehouse Agreement, dated November 30, 2009, by and between the Borrowers, the Credit Agent and the Lenders

 

10.24

 

Second Amendment to A&R Warehouse Agreement, dated March 26, 2010, by and among Walker & Dunlop, LLC, the Credit Agent and the Lenders

 

10.25

 

Third Amendment to A&R Warehouse Agreement, dated July 30, 2010, by and among Walker & Dunlop, LLC, the Credit Agent and the Lenders

 

10.26

 

Warehousing Credit and Security Agreement, dated as of June 30, 2010, between Walker & Dunlop, LLC and PNC Bank, National Association

 

10.27

 

Master Loan Purchase and Sale Agreement, dated as of March 30, 2010, by and between Walker & Dunlop, LLC and Kemps Landing Capital Company, LLC

 

21.1

*

List of Subsidiaries of the Company

 

23.1

 

Consent of KPMG LLP

 

23.2

 

Consent of KPMG LLP

 

23.3

*

Consent of Hogan Lovells US LLP (included in Exhibit 5.1)

 

99.1

*

Consent of            to be named as a director nominee

 

99.2

*

Consent of            to be named as a director nominee

*
To be filed by amendment.

Denotes a management contract or compensation plan, contract or arrangement.



Exhibit 10.1

 

Execution Version    

 

 

FORMATION AGREEMENT

 

BY AND AMONG

 

GREEN PARK FINANCIAL LIMITED PARTNERSHIP,

(a District of Columbia limited partnership),

 

WALKER & DUNLOP, INC.,

(a Delaware corporation),

 

COLUMN GUARANTEED LLC,

(a Delaware limited liability company),

 

and

 

WALKER & DUNLOP, LLC,

(a Delaware limited liability company)

 

 

January 30, 2009

 

 

Confidential

 



 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

 

 

 

Page

 

 

 

 

1.

DEFINITIONS

1

 

 

 

2.

CONTRIBUTION AND EXCHANGE

14

 

 

 

 

2.1

Agreement to Contribute and Exchange

14

 

2.2

Issuance of Company Units

17

 

2.3

Assumption of Liabilities

17

 

2.4

Post-Closing True-ups

19

 

2.5

Consent of Third Parties

20

 

 

 

 

3.

CLOSING; EFFECTIVE DATE

21

 

 

 

 

 

3.1

Location, Date

21

 

3.2

Deliveries

21

 

 

 

 

4.

REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES WITH RESPECT TO THE GPF PARTIES

22

 

 

 

 

 

4.1

Corporate Status

22

 

4.2

Authorization

23

 

4.3

Consents and Approvals

23

 

4.4

Stock Ownership

23

 

4.5

Financial Statements

23

 

4.6

Title to Contributed GPF Assets and Related Matters

24

 

4.7

Real Property

24

 

4.8

Accounts Receivable

25

 

4.9

Serviced Loans

25

 

4.10

Liabilities

26

 

4.11

Legal Proceedings and Compliance with Law

26

 

4.12

Contracts

27

 

4.13

Insurance

28

 

4.14

Intellectual Property

28

 

4.15

Employee Relations

29

 

4.16

ERISA

29

 

4.17

Absence of Certain Changes

30

 

4.18

Finder’s Fees

31

 

4.19

Additional Information

31

 

4.20

Taxes

31

 

4.21

Limitation of Representations and Warranties

31

 

 

 

 

5.

REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES WITH RESPECT TO CGL

31

 

 

 

 

 

5.1

Corporate Status

31

 

5.2

Authorization

32

 

5.3

Consents and Approvals

32

 

5.4

Capitalization

32

 

5.5

Financial Statements

32

 

5.6

Title to Contributed CGL Assets and Related Matters

33

 

i



 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

(continued)

 

 

 

 

Page

 

 

 

 

 

5.7

Real Property

33

 

5.8

Accounts Receivable

33

 

5.9

Serviced Loans

34

 

5.10

Liabilities

35

 

5.11

Legal Proceedings and Compliance with Law

35

 

5.12

Contracts

36

 

5.13

Insurance

37

 

5.14

Intellectual Property

37

 

5.15

ERISA

38

 

5.16

Absence of Certain Changes

38

 

5.17

Finder’s Fees

39

 

5.18

Additional Information

39

 

5.19

Taxes

39

 

5.20

Limitation of Representations and Warranties

39

 

 

 

 

6.

REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES WITH RESPECT TO THE COMPANY

40

 

 

 

 

 

6.1

Organizational Status

40

 

6.2

Authorization

40

 

6.3

Consents and Approvals

40

 

6.4

Valid Issuance

40

 

6.5

Capitalization

40

 

6.6

Legal Proceedings and Compliance with Law

41

 

6.7

Absence of Liabilities

41

 

6.8

Finder’s Fees

41

 

6.9

Limitation of Representations and Warranties

41

 

 

 

 

7.

COVENANTS OF THE PARTIES

41

 

 

 

 

 

7.1

Conduct of Business

41

 

7.2

Access to Information

43

 

7.3

Satisfaction of Liabilities

43

 

7.4

No Solicitation

43

 

7.5

Update of Disclosure Letters

43

 

7.6

Fulfillment of Closing Conditions

44

 

7.7

Transfer of Affiliated Party Assets

45

 

7.8

Public Announcements

45

 

7.9

Tax Matters

45

 

7.10

Confidentiality

45

 

7.11

Expenses

46

 

7.12

Employees

46

 

7.13

CGL Credit Risk

46

 

7.14

Capmark Contract

46

 

7.15

FHA/HUD Operating Deficit

46

 

7.16

CGL Actual Losses Contribution

46

 

7.17

GPF Actual Losses Contribution

47

 

7.18

HUD Transfer Agreement; HUD Assets

47

 

7.19

Post-Signing Servicing Tapes

47

 

ii



 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

(continued)

 

 

 

 

Page

 

 

 

 

 

7.20

Additional Financial Statements; Reports

47

 

7.21

CGL Affiliate Transactions

47

 

7.22

Estimated CGL Closing Balance Sheet

47

 

 

 

 

8.

CONDITIONS PRECEDENT TO OBLIGATIONS OF CGL

47

 

 

 

 

 

8.1

Representations and Warranties

47

 

8.2

Agreements, Conditions and Covenants

48

 

8.3

Material Adverse Effect

48

 

8.4

Required Consents; Deliverables

48

 

8.5

Legality

48

 

8.6

Disclosure Letters

48

 

8.7

GPF Net Working Capital

48

 

8.8

Mortgage Program Sponsor Transfer Agreements Approval

48

 

8.9

Serviced Loan Portfolio

48

 

8.10

Legal Opinion

48

 

8.11

GPF Contribution

49

 

 

 

 

9.

CONDITIONS PRECEDENT TO OBLIGATIONS OF THE GPF PARTIES

49

 

 

 

 

 

9.1

Representations and Warranties

49

 

9.2

Agreements, Conditions and Covenants

49

 

9.3

Material Adverse Effect

49

 

9.4

Required Consents; Deliverables

49

 

9.5

Legality

49

 

9.6

CGL Disclosure Letter

49

 

9.7

CGL Contributions

50

 

9.8

Mortgage Program Sponsor Transfer Agreements Approval

50

 

9.9

Serviced Loan Portfolio

50

 

9.10

Legal Opinion

50

 

9.11

Commission Agreements

50

 

9.12

Retention Agreement

50

 

9.13

Ownership of CGL

50

 

 

 

 

10.

CONDITIONS PRECEDENT TO OBLIGATIONS OF THE COMPANY

50

 

 

 

 

 

10.1

Representations and Warranties

50

 

10.2

Agreements, Conditions and Covenants

50

 

10.3

Material Adverse Effect

51

 

10.4

Required Consents; Deliverables

51

 

10.5

Legality

51

 

10.6

Disclosure Letter

51

 

10.7

CGL Contributions

51

 

10.8

GPF Net Working Capital

51

 

10.9

Mortgage Program Sponsor Transfer Agreements Approval

51

 

10.10

CGL Serviced Loan Portfolio

51

 

10.11

GPF Serviced Loan Portfolio

51

 

10.12

Legal Opinions

51

 

iii



 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

(continued)

 

 

 

 

Page

 

 

 

 

 

10.13

GPF Contribution

52

 

10.14

Commission Agreements

52

 

10.15

Retention Agreement

52

 

10.16

Ownership of CGL

52

 

10.17

Estimated CGL Closing Balance Sheet

52

 

 

 

 

11.

INDEMNIFICATION

52

 

 

 

 

 

11.1

By CGL

52

 

11.2

By the GPF Parties

52

 

11.3

Procedure for Claims

53

 

11.4

Claims Period

54

 

11.5

Third Party Claims

54

 

11.6

Effect of Investigation or Knowledge

55

 

11.7

Contingent Claims

55

 

11.8

Company Units in Satisfaction of Indemnification Claims

55

 

11.9

Exclusive Remedy

55

 

 

 

 

12.

TERMINATION

56

 

 

 

 

 

12.1

Grounds for Termination

56

 

12.2

Effect of Termination

56

 

 

 

 

13.

GENERAL MATTERS

56

 

 

 

 

 

13.1

Contents of Agreement

56

 

13.2

Amendment, Parties in Interest, Assignment, Etc.

56

 

13.3

Further Assurances

57

 

13.4

Interpretation

57

 

13.5

Counterparts

57

 

13.6

Disclosure Letters

57

 

13.7

Negotiated Agreement

58

 

13.8

Severability

58

 

13.9

Specific Performance

58

 

 

 

 

14.

NOTICES

58

 

 

 

15.

GOVERNING LAW

59

 

 

 

16.

BREAK-UP FEE

59

 

iv



 

FORMATION AGREEMENT

 

This FORMATION AGREEMENT (this “ Agreement ”) is made as of January 30, 2009, by and among Green Park Financial Limited Partnership, a District of Columbia limited partnership (“ GPF ”), Walker & Dunlop, Inc., a Delaware corporation (“ W&D ”), Column Guaranteed LLC, a Delaware limited liability company (“ CGL ”) and Walker & Dunlop, LLC, a Delaware limited liability company (the “ Company ,” and together with GPF, W&D and CGL, the “ Parties ,” and, individually, each a “ Party ”).  Certain other terms are used herein as defined below in Section 1 or elsewhere in this Agreement.

 

Background

 

CGL originates, underwrites, sells and services multifamily real estate loans.

 

GPF originates, underwrites, sells and services multifamily real estate loans.

 

W&D is an Affiliate of GPF that originates, underwrites, sells and services commercial real estate loans, as well as services other third-party real-estate mortgage portfolios.

 

The GPF Parties and CGL desire to create the Company in order to create a vehicle by which they may aggregate their assets and experience for the purpose of enhancing the business of each of GPF, W&D and CGL.

 

This Agreement sets forth the terms and conditions upon which the Parties will contribute certain of their assets to the Company in exchange for Company Units and the Parties will each undertake the various transactions that are conditions precedent to the Closing.

 

Terms and Conditions

 

NOW, THEREFORE, the Parties, intending to be legally bound hereby, for good and valuable consideration, the receipt and sufficiency of which are hereby acknowledged, and in consideration of the mutual covenants contained herein, hereby agree as follows:

 

1.             Definitions .

 

For convenience, certain terms used in more than one part of this Agreement are listed in alphabetical order and defined or referred to below (such terms as well as any other terms defined elsewhere in this Agreement shall be equally applicable to both the singular and plural forms of the terms defined).

 

“Accounts Receivable” means, as of any date, any trade accounts receivable, notes receivable, bid, performance, lease, utility or other deposits, employee advances and any other miscellaneous receivables of a Party (excluding any employee loans to purchase stock).

 

“Acquisition Proposal” is defined in Section 7.4 .

 

“Action” is defined in Section 11.5 .

 

“Affiliates” means, with respect to a particular Party, Persons or entities controlling, controlled by or under common control with that Party, as well as any officers and their nuclear family members, directors and their nuclear family members, and majority-owned entities of that Party and of its other

 

Confidential

 


 

 

Affiliates. For the purposes of the foregoing, ownership, directly or indirectly, of any of the voting stock or other equity interest shall be deemed to constitute control.

 

“Agency Documents” means, with respect to a Party, all of the Contracts with any Mortgage Program Sponsor including but not limited to (i) any relating to Fannie Mae special pool purchase Contracts, Fannie Mae negotiated Contracts, the Fannie Mae DUS and Negotiated Transaction Programs (including the DUS Agreements), (ii) any relating to the Freddie Mac Program Plus, Freddie Mac Targeted Affordable Housing, and (iii) any relating to the multifamily loan and mortgage backed securities program of HUD and Ginnie Mae, including any terms incorporated by reference, such as the Fannie Mae, Freddie Mac, HUD or Ginnie Mae Guides, Handbooks, Regulations and other announcements, under which such Party originates, services, shares losses or has other obligations with respect to such programs.

 

“Agreement” means this Agreement, the Exhibits, the GPF Disclosure Letter, the CGL Disclosure Letter and the Company Disclosure Letter.

 

“Assignment and Assumption Agreements” means those assignment and assumption agreements by and between the Company and each of GPF, W&D and CGL whereby the contributions, assignments and assumptions contemplated by Article 2 shall be consummated, each in substantially the same form as Exhibit A .

 

“Assumed CGL Liabilities” is defined in Section 2.3(c) .

 

“Assumed GPF Liabilities” is defined in Section 2.3(a).

 

“Benefit Plan” means, with respect to a Party, all employment, compensation, vacation, bonus, deferred compensation, incentive compensation, stock purchase, stock option, stock appreciation right or other stock-based incentive, severance, change-in-control, or termination pay, hospitalization or other medical, disability, life or other insurance, supplemental unemployment benefits, profit-sharing, pension or retirement  plans, programs, arrangements, or employee benefit plans of such Party within the meaning of Section 3(3) of ERISA, sponsored, maintained or contributed to or required to be contributed to by such Party or any ERISA Affiliate and any related or separate Contracts, plans, trusts, programs, policies and arrangements that provide benefits of economic value to any present or, to such Party’s knowledge, former employee of such Party or director, or present or former beneficiary, dependent or assignee of any such present or former employee or director.

 

“Bond” means a federally tax-exempt or taxable revenue bond issued by a state or local Governmental Body to provide for the financing of housing properties or other programs that allow for the issuance of tax exempt bonds in connection with housing.

 

“Business” means the entire business, operations and facilities of a Party including the goodwill appurtenant to such business and the furnishing of services to customers thereof.

 

“Business Day” means any day other than a Saturday or Sunday, or a day on which the banking institutions of the City of New York are authorized or obligated by law or executive order to close.

 

“CFI” means Column Financial, Inc.

 

“CFI Backstop Contribution” is defined in Section 7.13 .

 

“CFI Capmark Contribution” is defined in Section 7.14 .

 

2



 

“CFI Employee Contribution” is defined in Section 7.12 .

 

“CFI FHA Contribution” is defined in Section 7.15 .

 

“CGL” is defined above in the preamble.

 

“CGL Actual Losses Contribution” is defined in Section 7.16 .

 

“CGL Actual Losses True-Up Contribution” is defined in Section 7.16 .

 

“CGL Balance Sheet” is defined in Section 5.5 .

 

“CGL Balance Sheet Date” is defined in Section 5.5 .

 

“CGL Closing Balance Sheet” is defined in Section 10.17 .

 

“CGL Closing Certificate” means a certificate of the Chief Executive Officer of CGL to the effect set forth in Sections 9.1, 9.2, 9.7, 9.9, 9.13, 10.1, 10.2, 10.7, 10.10 , and 10.16 , insofar as such Sections relate to CGL, and such certificate shall be deemed a representation of CGL for the purposes of Article 11.

 

“CGL Contracts” is defined in Section 5.12(c) .

 

“CGL Disclosure Letter” means any of the disclosures hereto containing information relating to CGL pursuant to Article 5 and other provisions hereof that has been provided to the GPF Parties and the Company on the date hereof.

 

“CGL Financial Statements” is defined in Section 5.5 .

 

“CGL Real Estate Leases” is defined in Section 5.7(b) .

 

“CGL Required Consents” is defined in Section 5.3 .

 

“CGL Servicing Tape” means CGL’s, or its service provider’s, electronic file (including all tabs displayed therein) identified as “11-30-08 tape 12-8-2008DW.xls” containing financial and collateral mortgage loan terms and characteristics, and other relevant information utilized by CGL in connection with the servicing of the Serviced Loans, in each case as of November 30, 2008 and for each Serviced Loan as to which CGL has Servicing Rights as of November 30, 2008, including for each such Serviced Loan:  (a) the original principal balance, (b) the principal amount outstanding at November 30, 2008, (c) the amount of the escrow and reserves in the custodial accounts, (d) the escrow and reserve payment constants required (each shown separately), (e) the interest rate, if any, paid to borrowers on escrow and reserve balances, (f) the interest rate, (g) the interest only period, if any, (h) the interest rate reset terms and timing, if floating rate, (i) the servicing fee payable to CGL, (j) the amortization term, (k) the loss-sharing levels, loss share percentages, tier and debt service coverage ratios, if a Fannie Mae loan, and (l) the origination date, maturity date, due date, grace period (if any) and other payment terms of each such Serviced Loan, including prepayment limitations, defeasance information, yield maintenance terms and dates, as applicable.

 

“CGL Unrestricted Cash” shall mean, as of the relevant time of determination, cash that is not restricted in any way; any cash pledged to a Mortgage Program Sponsor or any other Person to secure any

 

3



 

liquidity or loss sharing obligations or for other reasons shall be deemed to be restricted for the purposes of this definition.

 

“Charter Documents” means a Person’s certificate or articles of incorporation, certificate defining the rights and preferences of securities, articles of organization, general or limited partnership agreement, certificate of limited partnership, joint venture agreement or similar document governing the entity.

 

“Claim Notice” is defined in Section 11.3(a) .

 

“Claim Response” is defined in Section 11.3(a) .

 

“Closing” is defined in Section 3.1 .

 

“Closing Certificates” means the GPF Closing Certificate, the CGL Closing Certificate and the Company Closing Certificate delivered at the Closing pursuant to Section 3.2 .

 

“Closing Date” is defined in Section 3.1 .

 

“Code” means the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended.

 

“Committed Loans” means any loans for which a Party has issued a commitment letter to a prospective borrower, but has not yet funded.

 

“Company” is defined above in the preamble.

 

“Company Closing Certificate” means a certificate of the Chief Executive Officer of the Company to the effect set forth in Sections 8.1, 8.2, 9.1 and 9.2 , insofar as such Sections apply to the Company, and such certificate shall be deemed a representation of the Company for the purposes of Article 11 .

 

“Company Disclosure Letter” means any of the disclosures hereto containing information relating to the Company pursuant to Article 6 and other provisions hereof that has been provided to the GPF Parties and CGL on the date hereof.

 

“Company Required Consents” is defined in Section 6.3 .

 

“Company Units” means those membership interests of the Company that are designed as “Common Units” in the Operating Agreement.

 

“Confidential Information” means any confidential or proprietary information or Intellectual Property of a Party, or that of any Affiliate of such Party, that is used in its Business, including personnel information, know-how, data, databases, advertising and marketing plans or systems, distribution and sales methods or systems, sales and profit figures, customer and client lists, customer, client information (including principal contacts, addresses and telephone numbers, purchasing history, demographics, payment information and any other information) and any relationships with customers, clients, suppliers and any other Persons who have, or have had, business dealings with such Party’s Business, but shall not include information that (i) was already in the receiving Party’s or its representatives’ possession prior to the date of receipt of such information, (ii) is or becomes available to the receiving Party or its representatives from a source other than the disclosing Party, provided such source is not known by the receiving Party to be bound by a confidentiality agreement with the disclosing Party prohibiting such

 

4



 

disclosure, (iii) is or becomes generally available to the public and/or (iv) was or is independently developed by the receiving Party or its representatives.

 

“Contingent Claim” is defined in Section 11.7 .

 

“Contract” means any written or oral contract, agreement, lease, instrument, or other document or commitment, arrangement, undertaking, practice or authorization that is binding on any Person or its property under any applicable Law.

 

“Contributed CGL Assets” is defined in Section 2.1(c) .

 

“Contributed GPF Assets” is defined in Section 2.1(a) .

 

“Copyrights” means any copyrights and registrations and applications therefore, including all renewals and extensions thereof and rights corresponding thereto in both published and unpublished works throughout the world, owned, used or licensed by a Party or held for use by any Affiliate of a Party in connection with the conduct of such Party’s Business.

 

“Court Order” means any judgment, decree, injunction, order, ruling, writ citation or award of any nature whatsoever of any Governmental Body or other authority that is binding on any Person or its property under applicable Law.

 

“Custom Software” means any computer software that has been developed or designed for use in the Business of Party.

 

“Damages” is defined in Section 11.1 .

 

“Deductible Amount” is defined in Section 11.3(d) .

 

“Default” means (a) a breach, default or violation, (b) the occurrence of an event that with or without the passage of time or the giving of notice, or both, would constitute a breach, default or violation or cause an Encumbrance to arise, or (c) with respect to any Contract, the occurrence of an event that with or without the passage of time or the giving of notice, or both, would give rise to a right of termination, cancellation, amendment, renegotiation or acceleration or a right to receive damages or a payment of penalties.

 

“Document File” means, with respect to any Serviced Loan, the legal files maintained by the relevant Party or its service providers with respect to such Serviced Loan (whether such files are maintained in paper based form or electronic form).

 

“DUS” means Fannie Mae Delegated Underwriting and Servicing.

 

“DUS Agreements” means, with respect to a Party, the Loss Sharing Agreements, reserve agreements and other agreements entered into by such Party in respect of DUS treatment of the origination, sale or servicing of Serviced Loans.

 

“Eligible Employee” is defined in Section 7.12 .

 

“Encumbrances” means any lien, mortgage, security interest, pledge, restriction on transferability, defect of title or other claim, charge or encumbrance of any nature whatsoever on any property or

 

5



 

property interest, including any restriction on the use, voting, transfer, receipt of income or other exercise of any attributes of ownership.

 

“Environmental Condition” means any condition or circumstance, including a Release or the presence of Hazardous Substances, whether created by a Party or any third party, at or relating to any (a) premises at which the Business of such Party has been conducted by such Party, any Affiliate thereof or any predecessor of any of them, (b) at any property owned, leased or operated at any time by such Party, any Person controlled by such Party or any predecessor of any of them or (c) at any property at which wastes have been deposited or disposed by or at the behest or direction of any of the foregoing that does or could reasonably be expected to (i) require abatement or correction under an Environmental Law, (ii) give rise to any civil or criminal liability on the part of such Party under an Environmental Law, or (iii) create a public or private nuisance.

 

“Environmental Law” means all Laws and Court Orders relating to pollution or protection of the environment as well as any principles of common law under which a Person may be held liable for the Release or discharge of any Hazardous Substance into the environment.

 

“Environmental Liability” means any Liability relating to or arising out of any Environmental Condition.

 

“ERISA” means the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as amended.

 

“ERISA Affiliate” means, with respect to a Party, any Person that, together with such Party, is or was at any time treated as a single employer under Section 414 of the Code or Section 4001 of ERISA.

 

“Excepted Warranties” is defined in Section 11.3(d) .

 

“Exchange Act” means the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended.

 

“Excluded CGL Assets” is defined in Section 2.1(d) .

 

“Excluded CGL Liabilities” is defined in Section 2.3(d) .

 

“Excluded GPF Assets” is defined in Section 2.1(b) .

 

“Excluded GPF Liabilities” is defined in Section 2.3(b) .

 

“Expiration Date” is defined in Section 11.4 .

 

“Fannie Mae” means the Federal National Mortgage Association.

 

“Fannie Mae Business” means, with respect to a Party, the origination, underwriting, credit enhancement, financing, refinancing, loan sale and servicing activities of such Party relating to the Serviced Loans, and the Fannie Mae special pool purchase contracts, negotiated contracts, forward purchase contracts, commitments or pipeline transactions of such Party in respect of the DUS and other multifamily programs of Fannie Mae.

 

“Fannie Mae Transfer Agreement” means a transfer agreement by and among Fannie Mae, a GPF Party or CGL, as the case may be, and the Company, relating to the assignment to and assumption by the Company of the GPF Party’s or CGL’s, as the case may be, rights and Liabilities relating to the Fannie Mae Business.

 

6



 

“Freddie Mac” means the Federal Home Loan Mortgage Corp.

 

“Freddie Mac Business” means, with respect to a Party, the origination, underwriting, credit enhancement, debt financing, refinancing, loan sale, and servicing activities of such Party relating to the Serviced Loans, forward purchase contracts, commitments or pipeline transactions of such Party in respect of the Freddie Mac Multifamily Program Plus Seller/Servicer program, the Freddie Mac Targeted Affordable Housing program, and the other multifamily programs of Freddie Mac.

 

“Freddie Mac Transfer Agreement” means a transfer agreement by and among Freddie Mac, CGL and the Company, relating to the assignment to and assumption by the Company of CGL’s rights and Liabilities relating to the Freddie Mac Business.

 

“GAAP” means generally accepted U.S. accounting principles.

 

“Ginnie Mae” means the Government National Mortgage Association.

 

“Governmental Body” means any (a) nation, state, commonwealth, province, territory, county, municipality, district or other jurisdiction of any nature, or any political subdivision thereof, (b) federal, state, local, municipal, foreign or other government or (c) governmental or quasi-governmental authority of any nature (including any governmental division, department, agency, commission, instrumentality, official, organization, regulatory body or other entity and any court, arbitrator or other tribunal).

 

“Governmental Permits” means any permits, licenses, registrations, certificates of occupancy, approvals, privileges or other authorizations of any nature whatsoever, granted, approved or allowed by any Governmental Body.

 

“GPF” is defined above in the preamble.

 

“GPF Actual Losses Contribution” is defined in Section 7.17 .

 

“GPF Balance Sheet” is defined in Section 4.5 .

 

“GPF Balance Sheet Date” is defined in Section 4.5 .

 

“GPF Closing Balance Sheet” is defined in Section 2.4(a) .

 

“GPF Closing Certificate” means a certificate of the Chief Executive Officer of GPF and of the Chief Executive Officer of W&D to the effect set forth in Sections 8.1, 8.2, 8.7, 8.9, 8.11, 10.1, 10.2, 10.8, 10.11 , and 10.13 insofar as such Sections apply to the GPF Parties, and such certificate shall be deemed a representation of the GPF Parties for the purposes of Article 11 .

 

“GPF Contracts” is defined in Section 4.12(c) .

 

“GPF Disclosure Letter” means any of the disclosures hereto containing information relating to the GPF Parties pursuant to Article 4 and other provisions hereof that has been provided to the Company and CGL on the date hereof.

 

“GPF Financial Statements” is defined in Section 4.5 .

 

“GPF Net Working Capital” means, as of the relevant time of determination, (a) the sum of (i) GPF Unrestricted Cash, (ii) any performance, good faith or other deposits received from borrowers to the extent not included in (i), (iii) any cash equivalents of any GPF Party valued at fair market, (iv) all

 

7



 

Accounts Receivable of any GPF Party that are fully-collectible, an obligation of an unrelated party and due within six months, and (v) any prepaid expenses of any GPF Party for a period of no more than six months; less (b) the sum of (i) all accounts payable of any GPF Party due within six months to an unrelated party, (ii) any accrued expenses of any GPF Party for a period of no more than six months and (iii) any performance, good faith or other deposits received from any GPF Party’s borrowers that relate to Contributed GPF Assets; plus (c) the excess, if any, of (i) Loans in Inventory expected to be sold by any GPF Party within 30 days over (ii) any warehouse line of credit or other short term debt obligation used to finance such Loans in Inventory.  For this purpose, “GPF Unrestricted Cash” shall mean, as of the relevant time of determination, any cash of any GPF Party (other than amounts in excess of what is required to satisfy the GPF Net Working Capital Target, which amounts shall not be contributed to the Company pursuant to Section 2.1(a)(i) ) that is not restricted in any way; any cash pledged to a Mortgage Program Sponsor or any other Person to secure any liquidity or loss sharing obligations or for other reasons.  The calculation of GPF Net Working Capital shall be prepared in accordance with GAAP, consistent with the principles and conventions adopted in the preparation of the GPF Balance Sheet.

 

“GPF Net Working Capital Calculation” is defined in Section 2.4(a) .

 

“GPF Net Working Capital Dispute Notice” is defined in Section 2.4(c) .

 

“GPF Net Working Capital Target” is $1.0 million, plus the amount of the GPF Actual Losses Contribution, regardless of whether such contribution is made by GPF.

 

“GPF Parties” means any of GPF and W&D.

 

“GPF Post-Closing Payment” is defined in Section 2.4(b) .

 

“GPF Real Estate Leases” is defined in Section 4.7(b) .

 

“GPF Required Consents” is defined in Section 4.3 .

 

“GPF Servicing Tape” means the electronic files of GPF and W&D (including all tabs displayed therein) identified as “WD-GPF Portfolio Servicing Tape as of 11-30-08.xls” containing financial and collateral mortgage loan terms and characteristics, and other relevant information utilized by GPF in connection with the servicing of the Serviced Loans, in each case as of November 30, 2008 and for each Serviced Loan as to which any GPF Party has Servicing Rights as of November 30, 2008, including for each such Serviced Loan: (a) the original principal balance, (b)  the principal amount outstanding at November 30, 2008, (c) the amount of the escrow and reserves in the custodial accounts, (d) the escrow and reserve payment constants required (each shown separately), (e) the interest rate, if any, paid to borrowers on escrow and reserve balances, (f) the interest rate, (g) the interest only period, if any, (h) the interest rate reset terms and timing, if floating rate, (i) the servicing fee payable to GPF, (j) the amortization term, (k) the loss-sharing levels, loss share percentages, tier and debt service coverage ratios, if a Fannie Mae loan, and (l) the origination date, maturity date, due date, grace period (if any) and other payment terms of each such Serviced Loan, including prepayment limitations, defeasance information, yield maintenance terms and dates, as applicable.

 

“Hazardous Substances” means any toxic, carcinogenic or hazardous gaseous, liquid or solid, material, substance, contaminant or waste that may or could pose a hazard to the environment or human health or safety including (a) any “hazardous substances” as defined by the federal Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation and Liability Act, 42 U.S.C. §§9601 et seq., (b) any “extremely hazardous substance,” “hazardous chemical,” or “toxic chemical” as those terms are defined by the federal Emergency Planning and Community Right-to-Know Act, 42 U.S.C. §§11001 et seq., (c) any

 

8



 

“hazardous waste,” as defined under the federal Solid Waste Disposal Act, as amended by the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act, 42 U.S.C. §§6901 et seq., (d) any “pollutant,” as defined under the federal Water Pollution Control Act, 33 U.S.C. §§1251 et seq., as any of such laws in foregoing clauses (a) through (d) as amended, (e) any material, substance, contaminant or waste, whether gaseous, liquid or solid that is regulated under any Laws or Court Orders that have been or will be enacted, promulgated or issued by any federal, state or local governmental authorities concerning protection of the environment and (f) any asbestos, polychlorinated biphenyls, petroleum, petroleum products and urea formaldehyde and mold.

 

“HUD” means the United States Department of Housing and Urban Development.

 

“HUD Assets” is defined in Section 2.1(c)(xiii) .

 

“HUD Business” means with respect to a Party, the origination, financing, refinancing, loan sale, Ginnie Mae Mortgage Backed securities issuance and servicing activities of such Party relating to the Serviced Loans and Contracts with HUD or Ginnie Mae, commitments or pipeline transactions of such Party in respect of the HUD and Ginnie Mae multifamily programs.

 

“HUD Transfer Agreement” means such agreements, certificates, filings, forms and other documents as are required by HUD, Ginnie Mae or any third party relating to or affecting the assignment to and assumption by the Company of CGL’s rights and Liabilities with respect to the HUD Business or the HUD Assets.

 

“Indemnification Cap” is defined in Section 11.3(d) .

 

“Indemnified CGL Party” is defined in Section 11.2 .

 

“Indemnified GPF Party” is defined in Section 11.1 .

 

“Indemnified Party” is defined in Section 11.3(a) .

 

“Indemnitor” is defined in Section 11.3(a) .

 

“Independent Firm” is defined in Section 2.4(c) .

 

“Independent GPF Net Working Capital Valuation” is defined in Section 2.4(c) .

 

“Intellectual Property” means any Copyrights, Patents, Trademarks, Internet domain names, technology rights and licenses, Trade Secrets, franchises, Software Products, Custom Software formulae, inventions, invention disclosures, ideas, discoveries, innovations and rights in research and development, and commercially practiced processes and inventions, whether patentable or not in any jurisdiction throughout the world and any other intellectual property or any similar, corresponding or equivalent right to any of the foregoing, owned, used or licensed by a Party or held for use by any Affiliate of a Party in connection with the conduct of such Party’s Business.

 

“Knowledge,” “to the knowledge of,” or phrases of similar import, with respect to an individual, means an individual shall be deemed to have knowledge of a particular fact or other matter if that individual is actually aware of that fact or matter.

 

With respect to a Person, other than an individual, “knowledge,” or phrases of similar import, means a Person shall be deemed to have knowledge of a particular fact or other matter if any individual

 

9



 

who is serving, or who has at any time served, as a director, officer, partner, executor or trustee of that Person (or in any similar capacity) has, or at any time had, actual knowledge of that fact or other matter.

 

“Law” means any provision of any constitution, statute, law, treaty, ordinance, regulation, charter  order, rule or guideline of any Governmental Body, including those covering environmental, energy, safety, health, transportation, bribery, record keeping, zoning, antidiscrimination, antitrust, wage and hour, and price and wage control matters, as well as any applicable principle of common law.

 

“Liability” means any direct or indirect liability, indebtedness, obligation, expense, debt, claim, loss, damage, deficiency, guaranty or endorsement of any nature, of or by any Person, whether absolute or contingent, known or unknown, secured or unsecured, recourse or non-recourse, filed or unfiled, accrued or unaccrued, due or to become due, or liquidated or unliquidated.

 

“Liquidated Claim Notice” is defined in Section 11.3(a) .

 

“Litigation” means any lawsuit, action, arbitration, administrative, quasi-administrative or other proceeding, criminal prosecution or investigation or inquiry of any Governmental Body.

 

“Loans in Inventory” means any loan funded by a Party as of the Closing Date and not yet purchased by an investor.

 

“Loss Sharing Agreements” means with respect to a Party, the Fannie Mae Loss Sharing Agreements by and between such Party and Fannie Mae (as such agreements may be amended from time to time).

 

“Material Adverse Effect” means, with respect to a Party, a material and adverse effect, change or development (a) upon the Business, operations, prospects, assets, liabilities, financial condition, value, operating results, cash flow, net worth, reputation or projected profitability of such Party, or (b) adversely affecting the ability of such Party to execute or deliver the Transaction Documents, to perform any of their respective obligations under the Transaction Documents or to consummate any of the transactions contemplated by this Agreement or any other Transaction Document or the ability of Party to receive the full benefit of the transactions contemplated by this Agreement; provided , however , that none of the following shall be deemed, either alone or in combination, to constitute, and none of the following shall be taken into account in determining whether there has been or will be, a Material Adverse Effect: (a) any failure by such Party to meet any internal or published projections, forecasts, or revenue or earnings predictions for any period ending on or after the date of this Agreement; (b) any adverse change, effect, event, occurrence, state of facts or development to the extent attributable to the announcement or pendency of the transactions contemplated by this Agreement; (c) any adverse change, effect, event, occurrence, state of facts or development attributable to conditions affecting the U.S. economy as a whole; (d) any adverse change, effect, event, occurrence, state of facts or development resulting from or relating to (i) compliance with the terms of, or the taking of any action required by, this Agreement, (ii) any change in accounting requirements or principles, or the interpretation or enforcement thereof, (iii) actions required to be taken under applicable laws, rules, or regulations, or agreements disclosed in such Party’s Disclosure Letter, (iv) something consented to in writing by the Party’s entitled to consent to such action, or (v) acts of war, terrorism, or other similar material conflict.

 

“Minor Contracts” means, with respect to a Party, any Contract by which such Party is bound that (a) is not material to such Party’s Business, (b) may be terminated upon 60-days’ notice or less, and (c) involves annual payment of less than $10,000.

 

10



 

“Mortgage” means a mortgage, deed of trust, pledge, or collateral assignment of a property trust beneficiary interest or other instrument creating a Lien on or ownership interest in a Mortgaged Property.

 

“Mortgage Program Sponsor” means each of Fannie Mae, Freddie Mac, HUD and Ginnie Mae.

 

“Mortgage Program Sponsors Transfer Agreements” means the Freddie Mac Transfer Agreement, the Fannie Mae Transfer Agreements, and the HUD Transfer Agreement.

 

“Mortgaged Property” means the underlying property or properties securing any Serviced Loan.

 

“Non-Assignable CGL Contract” is defined in Section 2.5(b) .

 

“Non-Assignable GPF Contract” is defined in Section 2.5(a) .

 

“Operating Agreement” means the form of Amended and Restated Operating Agreement of the Company, in substantially the same form as Exhibit B .

 

“Ordinary course” or “ordinary course of business” means, with respect to an action taken by any Party, an action that (a) is consistent in nature, scope and magnitude with the past practices of such Party and is taken in the ordinary course of the normal, day-to-day operations of such Party, (b) does not require authorization by the board of directors or shareholders of such Party (or by any Person or group of Persons exercising similar authority) and does not require any other separate or special authorization of any nature and (c) is similar in nature, scope and magnitude to actions customarily taken, without any separate or special authorization, in the ordinary course of the normal, day-to-day operations of other Persons that are in the same line of business as such Party.

 

“Parties” is defined above in the preamble.

 

“Party” is defined above in the preamble.

 

“Patents” means any patents together with any extensions, reexaminations and reissues of such patents, patents of addition, patent applications, divisions, continuations, continuations-in-part, and any subsequent filings in any country or jurisdiction claiming priority therefrom, owned, used or licensed by a Party or held for use by any Affiliate of a Party in connection with the conduct of such Party’s Business.

 

“PBGC” means the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation.

 

“Permitted Encumbrances” means, with respect to a Party, (a) except to the extent identified as an Excluded GPF Liability or an Excluded CGL Liability, Encumbrances for Taxes not yet due and payable, (b) statutory landlord’s, mechanic’s, carrier’s, workmen’s, repairmen’s or other similar Encumbrances arising or incurred in the ordinary course of business for amounts which are not due and payable and which would not, individually or in the aggregate, be reasonably expected to have a Material Adverse Effect on such Party’s Business as currently conducted thereon, (c) Encumbrances arising from zoning ordinances which would not, individually or in the aggregate, be reasonably expected to have a Material Adverse Effect on such Party’s Business as currently conducted thereon, and (d) the Encumbrances identified in Section 4.6 of the GPF Disclosure Letter .

 

“Person” means any natural person, business trust, corporation, partnership, limited liability company, joint stock company, proprietorship, association, trust, joint venture, unincorporated association or any other legal entity of whatever nature.

 

11


 

 

“Post-Signing CGL Servicing Tape” is defined in Section 7.19(b) .

 

“Post-Signing CGL Financial Statements” is defined in Section 5.5 .

 

“Post-Signing GPF Financial Statements” is defined in Section 4.5 .

 

“Post-Signing GPF Servicing Tape” is defined in Section 7.19(a) .

 

“Pre-Signing CGL Financial Statements” is defined in Section 5.5 .

 

“Pre-Signing GPF Financial Statements” is defined in Section 4.5 .

 

“Prime Rate” means the prime lending rate as announced by the Federal Reserve Bank.

 

“Real Property” means all rights and interests in or to real property (including any real estate, land, building, condominium, town house or other real property of any nature), including all shares or stock or other ownership interests in cooperative or condominium associations, fee estates, leaseholds and subleaseholds, purchase options, easements, licenses, privileges, hereditaments, appurtenances thereto, rights to access and rights of way, easement or prescriptive right and all Structures, owned by a Party or used in the operation of such Party’s Business, together with any additions thereto or replacements thereof.

 

“Release” means any release, spill, emission, leaching, leaking, migration, dumping, emptying, pumping, injection, deposit, disposal, discharge or dispersal into the indoor or outdoor environment, or into or out of any property.

 

“Resolution Period” is defined in Section 11.3(c) .

 

“Response Period” is defined in Section 11.3(a) .

 

“Securities Act” means the Securities Act of 1933, as amended.

 

“Serviced Loan” means, with respect to a Party, a loan that is secured by a Mortgage on a property or a Bond, in each case, serviced by such Party under any (a) of the mortgage programs of the Mortgage Program Sponsors or (b) other Contracts with a third-party that is not a Mortgage Program Sponsor, or a loan being held by any Party as of the Closing pending sale to a Mortgage Program Sponsor or any other third-party.

 

“Servicing Rights” means rights to service loans pursuant to agreements with a Mortgage Program Sponsor or Contracts with any third party that is not a Mortgage Program Sponsor.

 

“Subleases” means those sublease agreements to be entered into by and between the Company and CGL or CFI, as the case may be, for the sublease by the Company of the properties located in Atlanta, Georgia, Plano, Texas and New Orleans, Louisiana as contemplated by the Transition Services Agreement.

 

“Software Products” means any computer software products which are, or may potentially be, sold, distributed or marketed by a Party, other than “off-the-shelf software,” including all computer operating, security or programming software, that is owned by or licensed to such Party or used, in whole or in part, directly or indirectly, or has been developed or designed for or is in the process of being developed or designed for use, in whole or in part, directly or indirectly, in the conduct of such Party’s

 

12



 

Business of any nature whatsoever, including all systems software, all applications software, whether for general business usage (e.g., accounting, finance, word processing, graphics, spreadsheet analysis, etc.) or specific, unique-to-the-business usage (e.g., telephone call processing, etc.), and any and all documentation and object and source codes related thereto.

 

“Tax Return” means any return, declaration, report, claim for refund, or information return or statement relating to Taxes, including any schedule or attachment thereto, and including any amendment thereof.

 

“Taxes” means all taxes, duties, charges, fees, levies or other assessments (including any similar obligation to pay, withhold or collect) imposed by any taxing authority including income, gross receipts, value-added, excise, withholding, personal property, real estate, sale, use, ad valorem, license, lease, service, severance, stamp, transfer, payroll, employment, customs, duties, alternative, add-on minimum, estimated and franchise taxes (including any interest, penalties or additions attributable to or imposed on or with respect to any such assessment).

 

“Termination Date” is defined in Section 3.1 .

 

“Trade Secrets” means any know-how, trade secrets, formulae, specifications, technical information, data, process technology, plans, drawings (including engineering and auto-cad drawings), proprietary information, blue prints and all documentation related to any of the foregoing, owned, used or licensed by a Party, or held for use by any Affiliate of a Party, in connection with the conduct of such Party’s Business, except for any such item that is generally available to the public.

 

“Trademarks” means any registered trademarks, registered service marks, trademark and service mark applications and unregistered trademarks and service marks, brand names, certification marks, trade names, logos, trade dress, and all goodwill associated with the foregoing throughout the world and registrations in any jurisdictions of, and applications in any jurisdiction to register, the foregoing, including any extension, modification or renewal of any such registration or application, owned, used or licensed by a Party or held for use by any Affiliate of such Party in connection with the conduct of such Party’s Business.

 

“Transaction Documents” means this Agreement, the Assignment and Assumption Agreements, the Mortgage Program Sponsors Transfer Agreements, the Operating Agreement, the Transition Services Agreement and the Subleases.

 

“Transactions” means the contribution of the Contributed GPF Assets and Contributed CGL Assets and the assignment and assumption of the Assumed GPF Liabilities and Assumed CGL Liabilities in exchange for the Company Units to be issued to each of GPF, W&D and CGL, respectively, at the Closing and the other transactions contemplated by the Transaction Documents.

 

“Transition Services Agreement” means the agreement by which GPF, W&D and CGL will each provide certain services to the Company after the Closing and the Company will provide certain services to GPF, W&D and CGL after the Closing, in substantially the same form as Exhibit C .

 

“U.S.” means the United States of America.

 

“Unliquidated Claim” is defined in Section 11.3(a) .

 

13



 

“Walnut Creek Lease” means that certain lease dated December 30, 2005, by and among Fidelity Walnut Creek Limited Partnership, CGL and CFI for CGL’s operations located at Two Ygnacio Center, 2033 North Main Street, Walnut Creek, California.

 

“WARN Act” means the Worker Adjustment and Retraining Notification Act, as amended.

 

“W&D” is defined above in the preamble.

 

2.              Contribution and Exchange .

 

2.1            Agreement to Contribute and Exchange .

 

(a)            At the Closing, each of the GPF Parties shall contribute, grant, convey, assign, transfer and deliver to the Company, and the Company shall accept such contributions, grants, conveyances, assignments, transfers and deliveries from such GPF Parties, all right, title and interest of such GPF Party in and to all of such GPF Party’s assets, properties, and rights of every kind, and description, real, personal and mixed, tangible and intangible, wherever situated, constituting or used in its Business on the Closing Date other than the Excluded GPF Assets (the “ Contributed GPF Assets ”), free and clear of all Encumbrances, other than Permitted Encumbrances, but including the following:

 

(i)                    all cash and cash equivalents (other than amounts in excess of what is required to satisfy the GPF Net Working Capital Target);

 

(ii)                   all Accounts Receivable;

 

(iii)                 all fixed assets, furniture, fixtures, and leasehold improvements;

 

(iv)                 all records with respect to suppliers, employees and other aspects of the GPF Business;

 

(v)                  all Confidential Information;

 

(vi)                 all telephone numbers and facsimile numbers currently used in the GPF Business;

 

(vii)                all office supplies;

 

(viii)               all rights under the GPF Real Estate Leases, and any easements, deposits or other rights pertaining thereto, except to the extent specified in Section 2.5 ;

 

(ix)                  all rights under the relevant Agency Documents, subject to the execution by the relevant parties of each Mortgage Sponsor Transfer Agreement;

 

(x)                   all current and future Servicing Rights, subject to the execution by the relevant parties of each Mortgage Sponsor Transfer Agreement, including Servicing Rights to any GPF Loans in Inventory and any loans made by GPF in California pursuant to the Transition Services Agreement;

 

(xi)                  all revenues and premiums earned, including warehouse net interest income for loans closed by GPF after the Closing Date in California pursuant to the Transition Services Agreement;

 

14



 

(xii)                 all rights to fund and close any GPF Committed Loans (other than Committed Loans for properties in California until such time as the Company obtains a valid license to make loans in such state) and all rights to all performance, good faith or other deposits received from borrowers with respect to such Committed Loans (including those received in respect of Committed Loans for properties in California);

 

(xiii)                all rights under any Governmental Permits, to the extent transferable, except to the extent specified in Section 2.5 ;

 

(xiv)                all rights related to any prepaid expenses;

 

(xv)                 all rights under any insurance Contracts; and

 

(xvi)                all rights and deposits under any Contracts, except to the extent specified in Section 2.5 .

 

(b)            Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Contributed GPF Assets shall not include any of the following (the “ Excluded GPF Assets ”):

 

(i)                    the corporate seals, Charter Documents, minute books, partnership books, tax returns, books of account or other records having to do with the organization of any GPF Party;

 

(ii)                   the rights that accrue or will accrue to any GPF Party under any Transaction Document;

 

(iii)                  all rights of GPF under that certain Warehousing Credit and Security Agreement dated December 5, 2005, by and between GPF and Bank of America, N.A., a national banking association, as amended, and related documents, and that certain Loan Agreement dated December 27, 2004, by and among GPF, National City Bank of Kentucky and Fleet National Bank, as amended, and related documents;

 

(iv)                 any GPF Loans in Inventory, the transfer of which to the Company shall be governed by the Transition Services Agreement, and until such time as the Company obtains a valid license to make loans in California, all rights to fund and close Committed Loans for properties in such state; or

 

(v)                  the assets specified on Schedule 2.1(b) .

 

(c)            At the Closing, CGL shall contribute, grant, convey, assign, transfer and deliver to the Company, and the Company shall accept such contributions, grants, conveyances, assignments, transfers and deliveries from CGL, all right, title and interest of CGL in and to all of CGL’s assets, properties, and rights of every kind, and description, real, personal and mixed, tangible and intangible, wherever situated, constituting or used in CGL’s Business on the Closing Date other than the Excluded CGL Assets (the “ Contributed CGL Assets ”), free and clear of all Encumbrances, other than Permitted Encumbrances, but including the following:

 

(i)                    $16,821,509, plus, if applicable, the amount of the CGL Actual Losses True-Up Contribution, of CGL Unrestricted Cash, and all cash equivalents;

 

(ii)                   all Accounts Receivable;

 

15



 

(iii)                 all fixed assets, furniture, fixtures, and leasehold improvements;

 

(iv)                 all records with respect to suppliers, employees and other aspects of CGL’s Business;

 

(v)                  all Confidential Information;

 

(vi)                 all telephone numbers and facsimile numbers currently used in CGL’s Business;

 

(vii)                all office supplies;

 

(viii)               all rights under the Walnut Creek Lease and any easements, deposits or other rights pertaining thereto, except to the extent specified in Section 2.5 ;

 

(ix)                  all rights under any Governmental Permits, to the extent transferable, except to the extent specified in Section 2.5 ;

 

(x)                   all rights under the relevant Agency Documents, subject to the execution by the relevant parties of each Mortgage Sponsor Transfer Agreement;

 

(xi)                  all current and future Servicing Rights, subject to the execution by the relevant parties of each Mortgage Sponsor Transfer Agreement, including Servicing Rights to any CGL Loans in Inventory;

 

(xii)                 all rights to fund and close any CGL Committed Loans and all performance, good faith or other deposits received from borrowers with respect to such Committed Loans; or

 

(xiii)                the assets specified on Schedule 2.1(c)(xiii)  (the “ HUD Assets ”), provided that such HUD Assets shall be contributed to the Company at the time set forth in Section 2.1(e)  if the HUD Transfer Agreement has not been executed and delivered by all parties thereto at or prior to Closing;

 

(xiv)                all rights related to any prepaid expenses;

 

(xv)                 all rights under any insurance Contracts; and

 

(xvi)                all rights and deposits under any Contracts, except to the extent specified in Section 2.5 .

 

(d)            Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Contributed CGL Assets shall not include any of the following (the “ Excluded CGL Assets ”):

 

(i)                    the corporate seals, Charter Documents, minute books, limited liability books, tax returns, books of account or other records having to do with the organization of CGL;

 

(ii)                   the rights that accrue or will accrue to CGL under any Transaction Document;

 

(iii)                  any CGL Loans in Inventory, the transfer of which to the Company shall be governed by the terms of the Transition Services Agreement; or

 

16



 

(iv)                 the assets specified on Schedule 2.1(d) .

 

(e)            Notwithstanding the foregoing, if the HUD Transfer Agreement is not executed and delivered by all parties thereto at or prior to Closing, then the HUD Assets shall governed by Annex C to the Transition Services Agreement; provided that the representations, warranties, covenants and agreements applicable to the HUD Assets contained in this Agreement shall continue to apply to the HUD Assets.

 

2.2            Issuance of Company Units .

 

(a)            In consideration of grant, sale, conveyance, assignment, transfer and delivery of the Contributed GPF Assets to the Company and the assumption by the Company of the Assumed GPF Liabilities, at the Closing the Company shall issue 299 Company Units to GPF and 25 Company Units to W&D, free and clear of all Encumbrances.

 

(b)            In consideration of grant, sale, conveyance, assignment, transfer and delivery of the Contributed CGL Assets to the Company and the assumption by the Company of the Assumed CGL Liabilities, at the Closing the Company shall issue 175 Company Units to CGL, free and clear of all Encumbrances.

 

2.3            Assumption of Liabilities .

 

(a)            At the Closing, the Company shall assume and agree to pay, discharge or perform, as appropriate, when due only the Liabilities of the GPF Parties specifically identified below in this subsection (a) (the “ Assumed GPF Liabilities ”):

 

(i)                    any Liabilities included in the calculation of the GPF Net Working Capital, but only to the extent and up to the amount included in the final and binding calculation thereof under Section 2.3 ;

 

(ii)                   any post-Closing executory obligations under the GPF Contracts;

 

(iii)                  all Liabilities under the relevant Agency Documents, subject to the execution by the relevant parties of each Mortgage Program Sponsor Transfer Agreement;

 

(iv)                 any post-Closing executory obligations under the GPF Real Estate Leases; and

 

(v)                  any obligations under any Governmental Permits of any GPF Party.

 

(b)            Notwithstanding subsection (a) above or any other provision of this Agreement, the Company is not assuming under this Agreement or any other Transaction Document any Liability that is not specifically identified as an Assumed GPF Liability under subsection (a) above, including any of the following (each, an “ Excluded GPF Liability ”): (i) Liabilities arising out of any Default by any GPF Party of any provision of any Contract; (ii) any Federal, state or local income or other Tax payable by or imposed with respect to any GPF Party’s Business, the Contributed GPF Assets, other properties or operations of any GPF Party, any Affiliate of any GPF Party, or any other party for which any GPF Party might be liable (through law, equity, contract or otherwise), for the period prior to the Closing Date (whether or not such Taxes are due and payable as of or prior to the Closing);  (iii) Liabilities under or in connection with any Excluded GPF Assets; (iv) Liabilities of any GPF Party arising or incurred in connection with the negotiation, preparation and execution of the Transaction Documents and the

 

17



 

Transactions; (v) Liabilities arising from or related to any Contracts of any GPF Party as to which a GPF Required Consent is not obtained by the Closing Date regardless of whether the Company or CGL waive delivery of such GPF Required Consent; (vi) Liabilities to give credits or take other remedial actions for defective goods or services provided by any GPF Party or any of their Affiliates; (vii) Liabilities for money borrowed; (viii) Liabilities of any GPF Party or any of their Affiliates based upon an act or omission of such Person prior to the Closing; (ix) Environmental Liabilities of any GPF Party or any of their Affiliates; (x) Liabilities of any GPF Party or any of their Affiliates relating to any grievance or other claim brought by any current or former employee, member, manager, partner, equity holder or director of any GPF Party or any of their Affiliates or an unrelated third-party (including Governmental Bodies) in respect of any circumstance, condition, occurrence, act or omission occurring on or before the Closing Date; and (xi) any other Liabilities of any GPF Party or any of their Affiliates, regardless of when made or asserted, that are not specifically assumed hereunder.

 

(c)            At the Closing, the Company shall assume and agree to pay, discharge or perform, as appropriate, when due only the Liabilities of CGL specifically identified below in this subsection (c) (the “ Assumed CGL Liabilities ”):

 

(i)                    any Liabilities included set forth on the CGL Closing Balance Sheet, but only to the extent and up to the amounts set forth thereon;

 

(ii)                   any post-Closing executory obligations under the CGL Contracts;

 

(iii)                  all Liabilities under the relevant Agency Documents, subject to the execution by the relevant parties of each Mortgage Program Sponsor Transfer Agreement;

 

(iv)                 any post-Closing executory obligations under the Walnut Creek Lease; and

 

(v)                  all obligations under any Governmental Permits of CGL.

 

(d)            Notwithstanding subsection (c) above or any other provision of this Agreement, the Company is not assuming under this Agreement or any other Transaction Document any Liability that is not specifically identified as an Assumed CGL Liability under subsection (c) above, including any of the following (each, an “ Excluded CGL Liability ”): (i) Liabilities arising out of any Default by CGL or any of its Affiliates of any provision of any Contract; (ii) any Federal, state or local income or other Tax payable by or imposed with respect to the Business of CGL, the Contributed CGL Assets, or other properties or operations of CGL, any Affiliate of CGL; or any other party for which CGL might be liable (through law, equity, contract or otherwise), for the period prior to the Closing Date (whether or not such Taxes are due and payable as of or prior to the Closing); (iii) Liabilities under or in connection with any Excluded CGL Assets; (iv) Liabilities arising prior to the Closing Date or as a result of the Closing for severance, bonuses or any other form of compensation to any employees, agents or independent contractors of CGL, whether or not employed by the Company after the Closing and whether or not arising or under any applicable Law, CGL Benefit Plan or other arrangement with respect thereto; (v) any Liability related to the WARN Act or similar applicable Law, any labor dispute, unfair labor practice, collective bargaining agreement or negotiations undertaken by CGL or any Affiliate thereof with respect to the foregoing; (vi) Liabilities of CGL arising or incurred in connection with the negotiation, preparation and execution of the Transaction Documents and the Transactions; (vii) Liabilities arising from or related to any Contracts of CGL as to which a CGL Required Consent is not obtained by the Closing Date regardless of whether the Company or any GPF Party waives delivery of such CGL Required Consent; (viii) Liabilities to give credits or take other remedial actions for defective goods or services provided by CGL or any of its Affiliates; (ix) Liabilities for money borrowed; (x) Liability of

 

18



 

CGL or any of its Affiliates based upon an act or omission of such Person prior to the Closing; (xi) Environmental Liabilities of CGL; (xii) Liabilities of CGL or any of its Affiliates relating to any grievance or other claim brought by any current or former employee, member, manager, partner, equity holder or director of CGL or its Affiliates or an unrelated third party (including Governmental Bodies) in respect of any circumstance, condition, occurrence, act or omission occurring on or before the Closing Date; (xiii) any payables or expenses of CGL not set forth on the CGL Closing Balance Sheet, or any amounts in excess of the amounts set forth on the CGL Closing Balance Sheet; (xiv) any Liabilities related to CGL’s treatment of individuals not categorized by CGL as its employees, but who are providing or have provided services to CGL; and (xv) any other Liabilities of CGL or its Affiliates, regardless of when made or asserted, that are not specifically assumed hereunder.

 

2.4            Post-Closing True-ups .

 

(a)            Within 15 days after the Closing Date, the GPF Parties shall prepare, or cause to be prepared, and delivered to the Company and CGL a consolidated balance sheet of the GPF Parties immediately prior to Closing (the “ GPF Closing Balance Sheet ”).  In connection with the preparation of the GPF Closing Balance Sheet, the GPF Parties shall calculate the value of the GPF Net Working Capital immediately prior to Closing (the “ GPF Net Working Capital Calculation ”).

 

(b)            Within 10 days after the date upon which the GPF Closing Balance Sheet and GPF Net Working Capital Calculation are delivered to the Company and CGL, or, in the alternative, within 20 days after the final resolution of any dispute of the GPF Net Working Capital Calculation, the GPF Parties shall pay to the Company the amount, if any, by which the GPF Net Working Capital is less than the GPF Net Working Capital Target (the “ GPF Post-Closing Payment ”) by wire transfer of immediately available funds pursuant to wire transfer instructions provided to the GPF Parties by the Company in writing.

 

(c)            CGL may dispute the GPF Net Working Capital Calculation in the manner provided for in this subsection (f).  Within 10 days after CGL’s receipt of the GPF Closing Balance Sheet, CGL shall give the GPF Parties notice of its disagreement with the GPF Net Working Capital Calculation (the “ GPF Net Working Capital Dispute Notice ”), and such notice shall specify in detail the nature of the disagreement.  During the 20 days after the day on which any GPF Net Working Capital Dispute Notice is given, the GPF Parties and CGL shall attempt to resolve such dispute.  If they fail to reach a written agreement regarding the dispute, CGL shall refer the matter to a firm of certified independent accountants that is approved by GPF (the “ Independent Firm ”), and request the Independent Firm to also determine the GPF Net Working Capital (the “ Independent GPF Net Working Capital Valuation ”).  CGL and GPF shall be entitled to have their respective independent accountants or other representatives observe the Independent Firm’s methods of calculation and other activities in determining the Independent GPF Net Working Capital Valuation.  In no event shall the GPF Net Working Capital, as calculated by the Independent Firm, be more than the GPF Parties’ calculation of the GPF Net Working Capital, nor less than the GPF Net Working Capital as calculated by CGL.  CGL shall give the GPF Parties prompt notice of the results of the Independent GPF Net Working Capital Valuation.  The GPF Net Working Capital computed by the Independent Firm shall be the final and binding GPF Net Working Capital for the purposes of determining the GPF Post-Closing Payment.  CGL shall pay the fees and expenses of the Independent Firm with respect to the Independent GPF Net Working Capital Valuation unless the Independent GPF Net Working Capital Valuation changes the amount of the GPF Net Working Capital as determined by the GPF Net Working Capital Calculation by more than 15%, in which case the GPF Parties shall pay such fees and expenses (such fees and expenses to be paid 92.3% by GPF and 7.7% by W&D).

 

19



 

(d)            Any rights accruing to any Party under this Section 2.4 shall be in addition to and independent of the rights to indemnification under Article 11 and any payments made to any Party under this Section 2.4 shall not be subject to the requirements of Article 11 .

 

2.5            Consent of Third Parties .

 

(a)            Nothing in this Agreement shall be construed as an attempt by any GPF Party to assign to the Company pursuant to this Agreement any Contract, Governmental Permit, franchise, claim or asset included in the Contributed GPF Assets that is by its terms or by Law nonassignable without the consent of any other party or parties thereto, unless such consent or approval shall have been given, or as to which all the remedies for the enforcement thereof available to any GPF Party would not by Law pass to the Company as an incident of the assignments provided for by this Agreement (a “ Non-Assignable GPF Contract ”).  To the extent that any GPF Required Consent in respect of, or a novation of, a Non-Assignable GPF Contract shall not have been obtained on or before the Closing Date, CGL and the Company may elect to proceed with the Closing, in which case, the GPF Parties shall continue to use best reasonable efforts to obtain any such GPF Required Consent or novation after the Closing Date until such time as it shall have been obtained, and the GPF Parties shall cooperate with the Company in any economically feasible arrangement to provide that the Company shall receive the interest of any GPF Party in the benefits under such Non-Assignable GPF Contract, including performance by the relevant GPF Party as agent if economically feasible; provided that the Company shall undertake to pay or satisfy the corresponding Liabilities under the terms of such Non-Assignable GPF Contract to the extent that the Company would have been responsible therefor if such consent or approval had been obtained.  Each GPF Party shall pay and discharge, and shall indemnify and hold harmless the Company and its Affiliates from and against, any and all out-of-pocket costs of seeking to obtain or obtaining any such GPF Required Consent whether before or after the Closing Date.  Nothing contained in this Section 2.5 or elsewhere in this Agreement shall be deemed a waiver by the Company of its right to have received on the Closing Date an effective assignment of all of the Contributed GPF Assets or of the covenant of any GPF Party to obtain all of GPF Required Consents, nor shall this Section 2.5 or any other provision of this Agreement be deemed to constitute an agreement to exclude from the Contributed GPF Assets any Contracts as to which a GPF Required Consent may be necessary.

 

(b)            Nothing in this Agreement shall be construed as an attempt by CGL to assign to the Company pursuant to this Agreement any Contract, Governmental Permit, franchise, claim or asset included in the Contributed CGL Assets that is by its terms or by Law nonassignable without the consent of any other party or parties thereto, unless such consent or approval shall have been given, or as to which all the remedies for the enforcement thereof available to CGL would not by Law pass to the Company as an incident of the assignments provided for by this Agreement (a “ Non-Assignable CGL Contract ”).  To the extent that any CGL Required Consent in respect of, or a novation of, a Non-Assignable CGL Contract shall not have been obtained on or before the Closing Date, the GPF Parties and the Company may elect to proceed with the Closing, in which case, CGL shall continue to use best reasonable efforts to obtain any such CGL Required Consent or novation after the Closing Date until such time as it shall have been obtained, and CGL shall cooperate with the Company in any economically feasible arrangement to provide that the Company shall receive the interest of CGL in the benefits under such Non-Assignable CGL Contract, including performance by CGL agent if economically feasible; provided that the Company shall undertake to pay or satisfy the corresponding Liabilities under the terms of such Non-Assignable CGL Contract to the extent that the Company would have been responsible therefor if such consent or approval had been obtained.  CGL shall pay and discharge, and shall indemnify and hold harmless the Company and its Affiliates from and against, any and all out-of-pocket costs of seeking to obtain or obtaining any such CGL Required Consent whether before or after the Closing Date.  Nothing contained in this Section 2.5 or elsewhere in this Agreement shall be deemed a waiver by the Company of its right to have received on the Closing Date an effective assignment of all of the Contributed CGL Assets or of

 

20



 

the covenant of CGL to obtain all of CGL Required Consents, nor shall this Section 2.5 or any other provision of this Agreement be deemed to constitute an agreement to exclude from the Contributed CGL Assets any Contracts as to which a CGL Required Consent may be necessary.

 

3.              Closing; Effective Date .

 

3.1            Location, Date .  The closing for the Transactions (the “ Closing ”) shall be held at the offices of Morgan, Lewis & Bockius LLP in Washington, D.C., at 5:00 p.m. (local time) on the date on which there has been a satisfaction or waiver of the conditions to the consummation of the Transactions set forth in Articles 8, 9, and 10 , but in any event not later than January 30, 2009 (the “ Termination Date ”), unless the Parties agree in writing to another date or place.  The date on which the Closing occurs is referred to herein as the “ Closing Date .”

 

3.2            Deliveries .  At the Closing, subject to the terms and conditions contained herein:

 

(a)            the GPF Parties shall deliver to each of the Company and CGL the following items:

 

(i)                    duly executed counterparts to the Transaction Documents to which any GPF Party is a party;

 

(ii)                   those items that any GPF Party is required to deliver as a condition precedent to the Closing of the Transactions pursuant to Article 9 ;

 

(iii)                  the GPF Closing Certificate;

 

(iv)                 [Reserved];

 

(v)                  those GPF Required Consents (or in lieu thereof waivers) set forth on Schedule 3.2(a)(v) .  Such GPF Required Consents (or in lieu thereof, waivers) shall (A) be in form and substance reasonably satisfactory to CGL, (B) not be subject to the satisfaction of any condition that has not been satisfied or waived, and (C) be in full force and effect; and

 

(vi)                 such other instruments of conveyance and transfer, in form reasonably satisfactory to CGL and its counsel, as shall be necessary and effective to transfer and assign to, and vest in, the Company all of any GPF Party’s right, title and interest in and to the Contributed GPF Assets.  Simultaneously with such deliveries, all such steps will be taken by any GPF Party as may be required to put the Company in actual possession and operating control of the Contributed GPF Assets.

 

(b)            CGL shall deliver to each of the GPF Parties and the Company the following items:

 

(i)                    duly executed counterparts to the Transaction Documents to which it is a party, other than the HUD Transfer Agreement, which may be executed after the Closing;

 

(ii)                   those items that CGL is required to deliver as a condition precedent to the Closing of the Transactions pursuant to Article 8 ;

 

(iii)                  the CGL Closing Certificate;

 

21


 

 

(iv)                 executed releases of any Encumbrance identified on Section 5.6 of the CGL Disclosure Letter in forms reasonably satisfactory to GPF;

 

(v)                  those CGL Required Consents (or in lieu thereof waivers) set forth on Schedule 3.2(b)(v) .  Such CGL Required Consents (or in lieu thereof, waivers) shall (A) be in form and substance reasonably satisfactory to GPF, (B) not be subject to the satisfaction of any condition that has not been satisfied or waived, and (C) be in full force and effect; and

 

(vi)                 such other instruments of conveyance and transfer, in form reasonably satisfactory to GPF and its counsel, as shall be necessary and effective to transfer and assign to, and vest in, the Company all of CGL’s right, title and interest in and to the Contributed CGL Assets.  Simultaneously with such deliveries, all such steps will be taken by CGL as may be required to put the Company in actual possession and operating control of the Contributed CGL Assets.

 

(c)            The Company shall deliver to each of CGL and the GPF Parties the following items:

 

(i)                    duly executed counterparts to the Transaction Documents to which it is a party, other than the HUD Transfer Agreement, which may be executed after Closing;

 

(ii)                   those items that the Company is required to deliver as a condition precedent to the Closing of the Transactions pursuant to Article 10 ;

 

(iii)                 the Company Closing Certificate; and

 

(iv)                 those Company Required Consents (or in lieu thereof waivers) set forth on Schedule 3.2(c)(iv) .  Such Company Required Consents (or in lieu thereof, waivers) shall (A) be in form and substance reasonably satisfactory to each of GPF and CGL, (B) not be subject to the satisfaction of any condition that has not been satisfied or waived, and (C) be in full force and effect.

 

(d)            The Parties shall also deliver to each other the respective agreements, legal opinions and other documents and instruments in addition to good standing certificates, certified resolutions, cross receipts and such other items as may be reasonably requested.

 

4.              Representations and Warranties with Respect to the GPF Parties .

 

The GPF Parties hereby, jointly and severally, represent and warrant to the Company as of the date hereof and as of the Closing Date as follows:

 

4.1            Corporate Status .

 

(a)            GPF is a limited partnership duly formed, validly existing and in good standing under the Laws of the jurisdiction in which it was formed and is duly qualified or licensed to do business as a foreign entity in any jurisdiction where the ownership of any of its assets or the conduct of its Business would require it to be so qualified or licensed, except where the failure to be so qualified or licensed would not reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.  The Charter Documents and bylaws of GPF that have been delivered to CGL as of the date hereof are effective under applicable Laws and are current, correct and complete.

 

(b)            W&D is a corporation duly organized, validly existing and in good standing under the Laws of the jurisdiction in which it was incorporated and is duly qualified or licensed to do

 

22



 

business as a foreign corporation in any jurisdiction where the ownership of any of its assets or the conduct of its Business would require it to be so qualified or licensed, except where the failure to be so qualified or licensed would not reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.  The Charter Documents and bylaws of W&D that have been delivered to CGL as of the date hereof are effective under applicable Laws and are current, correct and complete.

 

4.2            Authorization .

 

(a)            GPF has the requisite power and authority to (i) own the Contributed GPF Assets, (ii) carry on its Business, (iii) execute and deliver the Transaction Documents to which it is or will be a party, (iv) perform the Transactions performed or to be performed by it, and (v) satisfy or perform, as the case may be, its obligations under those Transaction Documents to which it is or will be a party. Such execution, delivery and performance by GPF has been, or upon their execution and delivery will be, duly authorized by all necessary limited partnership action.  Each Transaction Document executed and delivered by GPF has been, or upon their execution and delivery will be, duly executed and delivered by GPF and constitutes a valid and binding obligation of GPF, enforceable against GPF in accordance with its terms, except as such enforceability may be limited or affected by applicable bankruptcy, insolvency, reorganization or other Laws or general application relating to or affecting the rights of creditors and except as enforceability may be limited by rules of Law governing specific performance, injunctive relief or other equitable remedies.

 

(b)            W&D has the requisite power and authority to (i) own or use its assets, as the case may be, (ii) carry on its Business, (iii) execute and deliver the Transaction Documents to which it is or will be a party, (iv) perform the Transactions performed or to be performed by it, and (v) satisfy or perform, as the case may be, its obligations under those Transaction Documents to which it is or will be a party.  Such execution, delivery and performance by W&D has been, or upon their execution and delivery will be, duly authorized by all necessary corporate action.  Each Transaction Document executed and delivered by W&D has been, or upon their execution and delivery will be, duly executed and delivered by W&D and constitutes a valid and binding obligation of W&D, enforceable against W&D in accordance with its terms, except as such enforceability may be limited or affected by applicable bankruptcy, insolvency, reorganization or other Laws or general application relating to or affecting the rights of creditors and except as enforceability may be limited by rules of Law governing specific performance, injunctive relief or other equitable remedies.

 

4.3            Consents and Approvals .  Except for any notices, filings, consents or approvals specified in Section 4.3 of the GPF Disclosure Letter (collectively the “ GPF Required Consents ”), neither the execution and delivery by any GPF Party of the Transaction Documents to which it is a party, nor the performance of the Transactions performed or to be performed by any GPF Party, require any notice filing, consent, renegotiation or approval, constitute a Default, cause any payment obligation to arise under (a) any Law or Court Order to which any GPF Party is subject, (b) the Charter Documents or bylaws of any GPF Party, if not a natural Person, or (c) any Contract, Governmental Permit or other document to which any GPF Party is a party or by which the properties or other assets of any GPF Party may be bound.

 

4.4            Stock Ownership .  The record owners of all of the issued and outstanding limited partnership interests of GPF and the outstanding stock of W&D are as set forth on Section 4.4 of the GPF Disclosure Letter .

 

4.5            Financial Statements .  The GPF Parties have delivered to CGL correct and complete copies of the following (a) audited Consolidated and Combined Financial Statements of Walker & Dunlop, Inc. and Affiliates as of and for the years ended December 31, 2005, 2006 and 2007, which

 

23



 

include the Consolidating and Combining Balance Sheets as of December 31, 2005, 2006 and 2007 and the Consolidating and Combining Statements of Income for the years ended December 31, 2005, 2006 and 2007 of several companies including the GPF Parties, and (b) unaudited Consolidated and Combined Financial Statements of Walker & Dunlop, Inc. and its Affiliates as of and for the eleven-month period ended November 30, 2008, which include the Consolidating and Combining Balance Sheet as of November 30, 2008 and the Consolidating and Combining Statement of Income for the eleven-month period ended November 30, 2008 of several companies including the GPF Parties (the financial statements referred to in clauses (a) and (b) are collectively referred to herein as the “ Pre-Signing GPF Financial Statements ”).  Complete and correct copies of the Pre-Signing GPF Financial Statements are attached hereto as Section 4.5 of the GPF Disclosure Letter .  The Pre-Signing GPF Financial Statements are, and those financial records of the GPF Parties delivered to CGL after the date hereof pursuant to Section 7.20 (the “ Post-Signing GPF Financial Statements ”) will be consistent in all material respects with the books and records of the GPF Parties, and there have not been or will not be any material transactions that have not been or will not be recorded in the accounting records underlying such financial statements.  The Pre-Signing GPF Financial Statements and the Post-Signing GPF Financial Statements are referred to herein, together, as the “ GPF Financial Statements .” The portions of the Consolidating and Combining Statements of Income relating to the GPF Parties included in the Pre-Signing GPF Financial Statements present, and the Post-Signing GPF Financial Statements will present, accurately in all material respects the results of operation of the Business of the GPF Parties for the periods indicated thereon and the portions of the Consolidating and Combining Balance Sheets relating to the GPF Parties included in the Pre-Signing GPF Financial Statements present, and the Post-Signing GPF Financial Statements will present, accurately in all material respects the financial position and assets and liabilities of the GPF Parties as of the dates thereof, subject to normal recurring year-end adjustments and the absence of notes in the case of unaudited GPF Financial Statements.  The Pre-Signing GPF Financial Statements have been, and the Post-Signing GPF Financial Statements will be, prepared in accordance with GAAP consistently applied.  The unaudited Pre-Signing GPF Financial Statements are, and the Post-Signing GPF Financial Statements will be, consistent with the audited financial statements of the GPF Parties.  The balance sheet of the GPF Parties as of November 30, 2008 that is included in the GPF Financial Statements is referred to herein as the “ GPF Balance Sheet ,” and the date thereof is referred to as the “ GPF Balance Sheet Date .”

 

4.6            Title to Contributed GPF Assets and Related Matters .  Except as otherwise set forth in Sections 4.7 or 4.14 , a GPF Party has good title to, valid leasehold interests in or valid licenses to use, all of the Contributed GPF Assets, free from any Encumbrances, other than Permitted Encumbrances.  The Contributed GPF Assets constitute all of the material assets, rights and services required for the continued administration of the GPF Servicing Rights by the Company.  Except for the Excluded GPF Assets, there are no assets or properties that are material to the operation of the Business of any GPF Party that are owned by any Person other than a GPF Party that will not be licensed or leased to the Company under valid, current license arrangements or leases.

 

4.7            Real Property .

 

(a)            No GPF Party owns any Real Property.

 

(b)            Each Contract by which any GPF Party occupies or uses any Real Property (the “ GPF Real Estate Leases ”) is in full force and effect and no GPF Party nor, to any GPF Party’s knowledge, the landlord under any such GPF Real Estate Leases is in material Default thereunder.  Current, correct and complete copies of the GPF Real Estate Leases have been previously delivered to CGL.

 

24



 

(c)            To the knowledge of each GPF Party, each GPF Party has good and valid rights of physical and legal ingress and egress to and from the Real Property occupied or used by it from and to the public systems for all usual street, road and utility purposes and no conditions exist that would result in the termination of such ingress and egress.

 

(d)            The occupation or use by any GPF Party of the Real Property occupied or used by it is in material compliance with all applicable Laws.

 

4.8            Accounts Receivable .  The Accounts Receivable included in the Contributed GPF Assets are bona fide Accounts Receivable created in the ordinary course of any GPF Party’s Business.  Except as noted on Section 4.8 of the GPF Disclosure Letter , to any GPF Party’s knowledge, all of the Accounts Receivable included in the Contributed GPF Assets are collectible within six months from the respective dates of sale, net of any reserves specified in the GPF Balance Sheet.  Section 4.8 of the GPF Disclosure Letter contains a complete and accurate list of all Accounts Receivable included in the Contributed GPF Assets and sets forth the aging of each such Account Receivable as of December 31, 2008.  To the knowledge of any GPF Party, there are no facts or circumstances (other than general conditions affecting the U.S. economy or any GPF Party’s industry and not disproportionately affecting such GPF Party) that are likely to result in any increase in the uncollectibility of such Accounts Receivable.

 

4.9            Serviced Loans .

 

(a)            Section 4.9(a) of the GPF Disclosure Letter sets forth a list of any GPF Party’s Serviced Loans as of November 30, 2008.

 

(b)            GPF or W&D is, and will be, the sole legal, beneficial, equitable and record owner and holder of the Servicing Rights in respect of any GPF Party Serviced Loans, free and clear of any Encumbrances (other than Permitted Encumbrances and a security interest in favor of Bank of America with respect to the servicing proceeds paid to GPF).

 

(c)            The Document File maintained by the applicable GPF Party (or readily available to any GPF Party) for each Serviced Loan of any GPF Party contains, or will contain, in all material respects, an original or a complete and correct copy of each of the financing documents that are required to be contained in such Document File in accordance with such GPF Party’s underwriting policies in effect at the time of the origination of the applicable Serviced Loan, and none of such financing documents relating to any GPF Party’s Serviced Loan has, or will have, in any material respects, been satisfied, canceled, rescinded, or subordinated in any respect by any GPF Party, nor has any GPF Party waived, nor will it waive, any material rights thereunder except as reflected in the Document File relating to such Serviced Loan.

 

(d)            Except as set forth on Section 4.9(d) of the GPF Disclosure Letter , no borrower is, or will be prior to Closing, delinquent by more than 30 days in the payment of any material amounts due under any GPF Party’s Serviced Loan.

 

(e)            Except as set forth on Section 4.9(e) of the GPF Disclosure Letter , none of the GPF Party Serviced Loans are, or will be prior to Closing, in foreclosure.

 

(f)             To the knowledge of any GPF Party, the Serviced Loans listed on Section 4.9(a) of the GPF Disclosure Letter and those loans closed by GPF after the date hereof (i) conformed, or will conform, in all material respects, at the time such Serviced Loan was originated, to the applicable Agency Documents or any other Contracts by which a Serviced Loan was originated and applicable Law, in each case, as to the date it was originated, except as otherwise noted, and (ii) have been, or will be, serviced by

 

25



 

the relevant GPF Party substantially in accordance with the applicable Agency Documents or any other Contracts by which a Serviced Loan is serviced and applicable Law, except as otherwise noted.

 

(g)            The unpaid principal balance per the GPF Servicing Tape as of the last day of the month immediately preceding the Closing Date shall be greater than $4.68 billion.

 

(h)            Each GPF Party has made available to CGL a complete and correct copy of its Servicing Tape. The information contained in the GPF Servicing Tape is, and the information contained in the Post-Signing GPF Servicing Tape shall be, complete and correct in all material respects as of the applicable dates for such information set forth in the applicable clauses of the definition of “GPF Servicing Tape” with respect to each Serviced Loan of any GPF Party as of such applicable dates. The GPF Servicing Tape contains, and the Post-Signing GPF Servicing Tape shall contain, all of the information listed in the clauses of the definition of “GPF Servicing Tape” with respect to each Serviced Loan of any GPF Party as of the applicable dates.

 

(i)             The information contained in the GPF Servicing Tape shall be deemed to be disclosed to CGL and, to the extent the GPF Servicing Tape contains information that should have been but was not disclosed on Section 4.9 of the GPF Disclosure Letter , such information shall be deemed to be incorporated by reference into Section 4.9 of the GPF Disclosure Letter and CGL shall have no rights under Article 11 with respect thereto.

 

4.10          Liabilities .  None of the GPF Parties have any Liabilities, other than (a) as specified on Section 4.10 of the GPF Disclosure Letter , (b) as specified in the GPF Balance Sheet (except as heretofore paid or discharged), (c) as incurred in the ordinary course since the GPF Balance Sheet Date that, individually or in the aggregate, are not material to the Business of any GPF Party, or (d) those created pursuant to this Agreement.

 

4.11          Legal Proceedings and Compliance with Law .

 

(a)            Except as set forth on Section 4.11(a) of the GPF Disclosure Letter , there is no Litigation that is pending or, to any GPF Party’s knowledge, threatened against any GPF Party or any of its Affiliates (i) against or involving, directly or indirectly, the Business of any GPF Party or the Contributed GPF Assets, which, if adversely determined against such GPF Party would not reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect, or (ii) seeking to prevent or challenge any of the Transactions.  Since January 1, 2004, there has been no material Default under any Laws, applicable to the Business of any GPF Party or any Contributed GPF Asset and none of the GPF Parties nor any of its Affiliates has received any written notices, or to the knowledge of the GPF Parties, any oral notice from any Governmental Body since January 1, 2004, regarding any alleged Defaults applicable to the Business of any GPF Party or any Contributed GPF Asset under any Law.  Since January 1, 2004, there has been no material Default with respect to any Court Order applicable to the Business of any GPF Party or any Contributed GPF Asset.

 

(b)            Without limiting the generality of Section 4.11(a) of the GPF Disclosure Letter , except as described in Section 4.11(b) of the GPF Disclosure Letter , to the knowledge of any GPF Party, there has not been any Environmental Condition (i) at the premises at which the Business of any GPF Party has been conducted by any GPF Party or any Affiliate thereof or any predecessor of either of them, (ii) at any Real Property owned, leased or operated at any time by any GPF Party, any Person controlled by any GPF Party or any predecessor of any of them, or (iii) at any property at which wastes have been deposited or disposed by or at the behest or direction of any of the foregoing, except any Environmental Condition which would not reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect, nor has any GPF Party received written notice of any such Environmental Condition.

 

26



 

(c)            Each GPF Party has obtained and is in material compliance with all Governmental Permits relating to its Business or any Contributed GPF Asset, all of which are listed in Section 4.11(c) of the GPF Disclosure Letter along with their respective expiration dates, that are required for the complete operation of its Business as currently operated.  All of such Governmental Permits are currently valid and in full force and a GPF Party has filed such timely and complete renewal applications as may be required with respect to such Governmental Permits.  To the knowledge of any GPF Party, no revocation, cancellation or withdrawal thereof has been threatened.

 

(d)            Section 4.11(d) of the GPF Disclosure Letter sets forth all reviews and audits conducted by any Governmental Body or Mortgage Program Sponsor with respect to any GPF Party or, to the extent relating to the Business of the GPF Parties or any Contributed GPF Asset or Assumed GPF Liability, any of their Affiliates, in each case, since January 1, 2004.

 

4.12          Contracts .

 

(a)            Section 4.12 of the GPF Disclosure Letter lists all Contracts of the following types to which any GPF Party is a party or by which it or a Contributed GPF Asset or Assumed GPF Liability is bound, except for Minor Contracts:

 

(i)                    Contracts with any present or former member, manager, officer, employee, partner or consultant of any GPF Party or any Affiliate thereof;

 

(ii)                   Contracts with any Mortgage Program Sponsor or Governmental Body;

 

(iii)                  any servicing or management Contract or consultancy Contract;

 

(iv)                 Contracts for the future purchase of, or payment for, supplies or products, the performance of services by a third party;

 

(v)                  Contracts for the lease of any personal property, vehicles or other assets used in any GPF Party’s Business;

 

(vi)                 Contracts to sell or supply products or to perform services;

 

(vii)                Contracts to lease to or to operate for any other party any real or personal property;

 

(viii)               any notes, debentures, bonds, conditional sale Contracts, equipment trust Contracts, letter of credit agreements, reimbursement Contracts, loan Contracts or other Contracts for the borrowing or lending of money (excluding loans to or from officers, directors, partners, stockholders or Affiliates of any GPF Party or any members of their immediate families), Contracts or arrangements for a line of credit or for a guarantee of, or other undertaking in connection with, the indebtedness of any other Person;

 

(ix)                  Contracts for any capital expenditure or leasehold improvements;

 

(x)                   any Contracts under which any Encumbrances exist;

 

(xi)                  any other Contract material to the operation of any GPF Party’s Business; and

 

27



 

(xii)                 any other Contracts (other than Minor Contracts and those described in any of clauses (i) through (xi) above) not made in the ordinary course of business.

 

(b)            The GPF Parties have delivered to CGL complete and correct copies of all written Contracts of any GPF Party (other than such Contracts which are Excluded GPF Assets), together with all amendments, supplements or modifications thereto, and accurate descriptions of all material terms of all oral Contracts, set forth or required to be set forth on Section 4.12 of the GPF Disclosure Letter .

 

(c)            The Contracts listed on Section 4.12 of the GPF Disclosure Letter and the Minor Contracts excluded from Section 4.12 of the GPF Disclosure Letter are referred to herein as the “ GPF Contracts .”  No GPF Party is in Default under any GPF Contracts (including any Real Estate Leases and Non-Real Estate Leases).  No GPF Party has received any communication from, or given any communication to, any other party indicating that any GPF Party or such other party, as the case may be, is in Default under any GPF Contract.  To the knowledge of any GPF Party, (i) none of the other parties in any such GPF Contract is in Default thereunder and (ii) each such GPF Contract is enforceable against any other parties thereto in accordance with terms thereof, except as such enforceability may be limited or affected by applicable bankruptcy, insolvency, reorganization or other Laws of general application relating to or affecting the rights of creditors and except as enforceability may be limited by rules of Law governing specific performance, injunctive relief or other equitable remedies.  There are no renegotiations of, attempts to renegotiate or outstanding rights to renegotiate any amounts paid or payable to any GPF Party under current or contemplated Contracts with any Person having the contractual or statutory right to demand or require such renegotiation and, to any GPF Party’s knowledge, no such Person has made any demand for such negotiation.

 

4.13          Insurance Section 4.13 of the GPF Disclosure Letter lists all policies or binders of insurance held by or on behalf of any GPF Party, specifying with respect to each policy the insurer, the amount of the coverage, the type of insurance, the risks insured, the expiration date, the policy number and any pending claims thereunder.  There is no material Default with respect to any such policy or binder, nor has there been any failure to give any notice or present any claim under any such policy or binder in a timely fashion or in the manner or detail required by the policy or binder.  No GPF Party has received written notice, nor to the knowledge of the GPF Parties, oral notice of non-renewal or cancellation with respect to, or disallowance of any claim under, any such policy or binder that has been received by any GPF Party.

 

4.14          Intellectual Property .

 

(a)            Employees .

 

(i)                    To the knowledge of any GPF Party, none of the employees or consultants of any GPF Party or any Affiliate thereof is subject to any contractual or legal restrictions that might interfere with the use of his or her best efforts to promote the interests of any GPF Party.  To the knowledge of any GPF Party, no employee of any GPF Party or Affiliate thereof has entered into any Contract that restricts or limits in any way the scope or type of work in which the employee may be engaged or requires the employee to transfer, assign or disclose information concerning his or her work  to anyone other than a GPF Party.  Section 4.14(a)(i) of the GPF Disclosure Letter lists all Contracts between or among any GPF Party, any employee thereof and a third party that imparts or that imparted an obligation of noncompetition, secrecy, confidentiality or non-disclosure upon any GPF Party, any employee thereof or any third party.

 

28



 

(ii)                   To the knowledge of any GPF Party, no employee or consultant of any of any GPF Party or any Affiliate thereof (A) has used any other Persons’ Confidential Information in the course of his or her work, other than such borrower information as is properly used in the ordinary course of its business, or (B) is, or is currently expected to be, in Default under any term of any Contract relating to any GPF Party’s Confidential Information.

 

(b)            Know-How Necessary for the Business .

 

(i)                    The Intellectual Property included in the Contributed GPF Assets constitutes all of the Intellectual Property that is necessary for the operation of any GPF Party’s Business as operated by any GPF Party and their Affiliates during the past 12 months, other than Intellectual Property contained in the Excluded GPF Assets, if any.  Each GPF Party is the owner of all right, title and interest in and to each item of Intellectual Property owned by it that is included in the Contributed GPF Assets.  In the case of licensed Intellectual Property, each GPF Party has, to any GPF Party’s knowledge, obtained all licenses necessary to freely use and commercially exploit the Intellectual Property used by it that is included in the Contributed GPF Assets, free and clear of any Encumbrances.  To the knowledge of any GPF Party, each GPF Party has the right to use all of the Intellectual Property used by it that is included in the Contributed GPF Assets without payment to a third party.

 

(ii)                   Set forth in Section 4.14(b)(ii) of the GPF Disclosure Letter is a complete and correct list of all URLs that are Contributed GPF Assets.

 

(iii)                  To the knowledge of any GPF Party, none of its Intellectual Property that is a Contributed GPF Asset is infringed or has been challenged or threatened in any way.  To the knowledge of any GPF Party it does not infringe, nor has it been alleged to infringe, any of the Intellectual Property or other proprietary right of any other Person.

 

(iv)                 Except as set forth on Section 4.14(b)(iv) of the GPF Disclosure Letter , each GPF Party has taken all reasonable precautions to protect the secrecy, confidentiality and value of its Confidential Information that is a Contributed GPF Asset.

 

4.15          Employee Relations .  Except as set forth on Section 4.15 of the GPF Disclosure Letter , no GPF Party is (a) a party to, involved in or, to any GPF Party’s knowledge, threatened by, any labor dispute or unfair labor practice charge, (b) currently negotiating any collective bargaining agreement, or (c) currently a party to any collective bargaining agreement.  No GPF Party has experienced any work stoppage during the last three years.  Section 4.15 of the GPF Disclosure Letter contains a complete and correct list of the names, current base salaries and other cash compensation and bonuses paid in respect of performance in the prior fiscal year of all employees (including officers) of any GPF Party engaged in performing services for any GPF Party or who will have a right to receive any cash consideration or other economic benefit as a result of the consummation of any of the Transactions.  No GPF Party has violated the WARN Act or a similar applicable Law.  During the 90 days prior to the date hereof, the GPF Parties have terminated one employee.

 

4.16          ERISA .  For purposes of the following provisions of this Section 4.16 , the term “GPF” includes any ERISA Affiliate of any GPF Party.

 

(a)            Section 4.16 of the GPF Disclosure Letter contains a current, correct and complete list of all Benefit Plans of any GPF Party.  The GPF Parties have delivered to CGL true, correct, and complete copies of (i) all documents constituting each Benefit Plan of any GPF Party, including trust agreements, insurance policies, service agreements, formal and informal amendments thereto, written and

 

29



 

unwritten agreements relating to such Benefit Plan, and (ii) all employee manuals or handbooks containing personnel or employee relations policies.

 

(b)            No GPF Party currently maintains or contributes to a multiemployer plan (as defined in section 3(37) of ERISA), and no GPF Party has incurred any Liability with respect to, or arising from, a multiemployer plan.

 

(c)            The IRS has issued a favorable determination letter for each Benefit Plan identified as a “Qualified Plan” on Section 4.16 of the GPF Disclosure Letter , and each determination letter remains in effect and has not been revoked, nor has anything occurred or failed to occur with respect to the operation or amendment of such plans that could cause it to fail to meet section 401(a) of the Code.

 

(d)            With respect to any Benefit Plan of any GPF Party that is an employee welfare benefit plan (within the meaning of Section 3(1) of ERISA) (i) there is no disqualified benefit, and (ii) no welfare plan provides health or other benefits after an employee’s or former employee’s retirement or other termination of employment except as required by Section 4980B of the Code.

 

4.17          Absence of Certain Changes .  Except as contemplated by this Agreement and, except as disclosed in Section 4.17 of the GPF Disclosure Letter , each GPF Party has conducted its Business in the ordinary course since the GPF Balance Sheet Date, and no GPF Party has:

 

(a)            experienced any change that has had or could reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect;

 

(b)            made any distribution or payment declared or made in respect of its membership interests by way of distributions, dividends, purchase or redemption of interests or otherwise (other than quarterly distributions made in the ordinary course of business);

 

(c)            increased the compensation payable or to become payable to any director, officer, employee or agent, except for increases for non-officer employees made in the ordinary course of business, nor undertaken any other change in any employment or consulting arrangement;

 

(d)            entered into or amended any employment retention, severance, change in control or similar Contract with any Person;

 

(e)            established or amended any Benefit Plan;

 

(f)             sold, assigned or transferred any Contributed GPF Assets, other than those made in the ordinary course of business;

 

(g)            subjected any Contributed GPF Asset to any Encumbrance, other than Permitted Encumbrances;

 

(h)            other than in the ordinary course of business, waived or released of any claim or right or cancellation of any debt held;

 

(i)             made any payments to any Affiliate of a GPF Party, other than in the ordinary course of business;

 

30



 

(j)             entered into or terminated any Contract outside the ordinary course of business; or

 

(k)            taken any action or omitted to take any action that has had or could reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

4.18          Finder’s Fees .  Other than Beekman Advisors, Inc., no Person retained by any GPF Party is or will be entitled to any commission or finder’s or similar fee in connection with the Transactions.

 

4.19          Additional Information Section 4.19 of the GPF Disclosure Letter accurately lists the following:

 

(a)            the names of all officers, directors and managers of each GPF Party;

 

(b)            the names and addresses of every bank and other financial institution at which any GPF Party maintains an account (whether checking, savings or otherwise), lock box or safety deposit box, and the account numbers and names of the individuals having signing authority or other access thereto;

 

(c)            the names of all Persons authorized to borrow money or incur or guarantee indebtedness by or on behalf of any GPF Party; and

 

(d)            the names of any Persons holding powers of attorney from any GPF Party.

 

4.20          Taxes .  Attached to Section 4.20 of the GPF Disclosure Letter are correct and complete copies of all federal, state, local, and foreign income Tax Returns filed with respect to GPF or its Business for taxable periods ended on or after January 1, 2004.  GPF has prepared and filed when due (including any extensions) any Tax Returns that it was required to file in connection with its Business or any Contributed GPF Asset. All Taxes owed by GPF in connection with the Business or any Contributed GPF Asset have been paid.

 

4.21          Limitation of Representations and Warranties .  EACH OF CGL AND THE COMPANY HEREBY ACKNOWLEDGES THAT IF THE CLOSING IS CONSUMMATED, EXCEPT AS MAY EXPRESSLY BE SET FORTH HEREIN, THE, CONTRIBUTED GPF ASSETS AND ASSUMED GPF LIABILITIES ARE BEING TRANSFERRED, ASSIGNED, AND CONVEYED TO THE COMPANY ON AN “AS IS, WHERE IS” BASIS WITH ALL FAULTS, AND WITHOUT ANY WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF ANY NATURE WHATSOEVER INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR CAUSE OR PURPOSE.

 

5.              Representations and Warranties with Respect to CGL .

 

CGL hereby represents and warrants to the Company as of the date hereof and as of the Closing Date as follows:

 

5.1            Corporate Status .  CGL is a limited liability company duly formed, validly existing and in good standing under the Laws of the jurisdiction in which it was formed and is duly qualified or licensed to do business as a foreign entity in any jurisdiction where the ownership of any of its assets or the conduct of its Business would require it to be so qualified or licensed, except where the failure to be so qualified or licensed would not reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.  The Charter

 

31


 

 

Documents of CGL that have been delivered to the GPF Parties and the Company as of the date hereof are effective under applicable Laws and are current, correct and complete.

 

5.2            Authorization .  CGL has the requisite power and authority to (i) own or use the assets used in its Business, as the case may be, (ii) carry on its Business, (iii) execute and deliver the Transaction Documents to which it is or will be a party, (iv) perform the Transactions performed or to be performed by it, and (v) satisfy or perform, as the case may be, its obligations under those Transaction Documents to which it is or will be a party. Such execution, delivery and performance by CGL has been, or upon their execution and delivery will be, duly authorized by all necessary limited liability company action.  Each Transaction Document executed and delivered by CGL has been, or upon their execution and delivery will be, duly executed and delivered by CGL and constitutes a valid and binding obligation of CGL, enforceable against CGL in accordance with its terms, except as such enforceability may be limited or affected by applicable bankruptcy, insolvency, reorganization or other Laws or general application relating to or affecting the rights of creditors and except as enforceability may be limited by rules of Law governing specific performance, injunctive relief or other equitable remedies.

 

5.3            Consents and Approvals .  Except for any notices, filings, consents or approvals specified in Section 5.3 of the CGL Disclosure Letter (collectively, the “ CGL Required Consents ”), neither the execution and delivery by CGL of the Transaction Documents to which it is a party, nor the performance of the Transactions performed or to be performed by CGL, require any notice filing, consent, renegotiation or approval, constitute a Default, cause any payment obligation to arise under (a) any Law or Court Order to which CGL is subject, (b) the Charter Documents or bylaws of CGL, or (c) any Contract, Governmental Permit or other document to which CGL is a party or by which the properties or other assets of CGL may be bound.

 

5.4            Capitalization .

 

(a)            The entire authorized equity interests of CGL and the record owners of all of the issued and outstanding equity interests of CGL are as set forth on Section 5.4 of the CGL Disclosure Letter .  Other than the Charter Documents of CGL, there are no Contracts with any Person with respect to the voting or transfer of any of CGL’s equity interests or with respect to any other aspect of CGL’s affairs.

 

(b)            Except as set forth in CGL’s Charter Documents, CGL is not subject to any option or Contract to repurchase or otherwise acquire or retire any of its equity interests or any warrants, options or other rights to acquire its equity interests.

 

5.5            Financial Statements .  CGL has delivered to the GPF Parties correct and complete copies of the following (a) CGL’s audited balance sheet at December 31, 2005, 2006 and 2007 and the related statements of income and cash flows for the years then ended, and (b) unaudited balance sheet at November 30, 2008, and the related statements of income and cash flows for the eleven-month period then ended (the financial statements referred to in clauses (a) and (b) are collectively referred to herein as the “ Pre-Signing CGL Financial Statements ”).  Complete and correct copies of the Pre-Signing CGL Financial Statements are attached hereto as Section 5.5 of the CGL Disclosure Letter .  The Pre-Signing CGL Financial Statements are, and those financial records of the CGL delivered to the GPF Parties after the date hereof pursuant to Section 7.20 (the “ Post-Signing CGL Financial Statements ”) will be consistent in all material respects with the books and records of CGL, and there have not been or will not be any material transactions that have not been or will not be recorded in the accounting records underlying such financial statements.  The Pre-Signing CGL Financial Statements and the Post-Signing CGL Financial Statements are referred to herein, together, as the “ CGL Financial Statements .” The income statements included in the Pre-Signing CGL Financial Statements present accurately in all material respects the

 

32



 

results of operation of the Business of CGL for the periods indicated thereon.  The Pre-Signing CGL Financial Statements have been, and the Post-Signing CGL Financial Statements will be, prepared in accordance with GAAP consistently applied, and the Pre-Signing CGL Financial Statements present, and the Post-Signing CGL Financial Statements will present, accurately in all material respects the financial position and assets and liabilities of CGL as of the dates thereof, and the results of its operations for the periods then ended, subject to normal recurring year-end adjustments and the absence of notes in the case of unaudited CGL Financial Statements.  The unaudited Pre-Signing CGL Financial Statements are, and the Post-Signing CGL Financial Statements will be, consistent with the audited financial statements of CGL.  The balance sheet of CGL as of November 30, 2008 that is included in the CGL Financial Statements is referred to herein as the “ CGL Balance Sheet ,” and the date thereof is referred to as the “ CGL Balance Sheet Date .”

 

5.6            Title to Contributed CGL Assets and Related Matters .  Except as otherwise set forth in Sections 5.7 or 5.14 , CGL has good title to, valid leasehold interests in or valid licenses to use, all of the Contributed CGL Assets, free from any Encumbrances other than Permitted Encumbrances and those specified in Section 5.6 of the CGL Disclosure Letter .  The Contributed CGL Assets constitute all of the material assets, rights and services, required for the continued administration of CGL’s Servicing Rights and closing of CGL’s Committed Loans and Loans in Inventory by the Company.  Except for the Excluded CGL Assets, there are no assets or properties that are material to the operation of CGL’s Business that are owned by any Person other than CGL that will not be licensed or leased to the Company under valid, current license arrangements or leases.  CGL owns no fixed assets used in the operation of CGL’s Business.

 

5.7            Real Property .

 

(a)            Neither CGL nor its Affiliates owns any Real Property occupied by CGL or used in the operation of CGL’s Business.

 

(b)            Each Contract by which CGL occupies or uses any Real Property (including those Contracts of any Affiliate of CGL relating to Real Property occupied by CGL or used by CGL in the operation of CGL’s Business) (the “ CGL Real Estate Leases ”) is in full force and effect and neither CGL, nor to CGL’s knowledge, the landlord under such CGL Real Estate Lease is in material Default thereunder.  Current, correct and complete copies of the CGL Real Estate Leases have been previously delivered to the GPF Parties and the Company.

 

(c)            To CGL’s knowledge, CGL has good and valid rights of physical and legal ingress and egress to and from the Real Property occupied or used by it from and to the public systems for all usual street, road and utility purposes and no conditions exist that would result in the termination of such ingress and egress.

 

(d)            CGL’s occupation or use of the Real Property occupied or used by it is in material compliance with all applicable Laws.

 

5.8            Accounts Receivable .  The Accounts Receivable that are CGL Contributed Assets are bona fide Accounts Receivable created in the ordinary course of CGL’s Business.  To the knowledge of CGL, all of the Accounts Receivable included in the CGL Contributed Assets are collectible within six months from the respective dates of sale, net of any reserves specified in the CGL Balance Sheet.  Section 5.8 of the CGL Disclosure Letter contains a complete and accurate list of all Accounts Receivable included in the CGL Contributed Assets and sets forth the aging of each such Account Receivable as of December 31, 2008.  To the knowledge of CGL, there are no facts or circumstances (other than general

 

33



 

conditions affecting the U.S. economy or CGL’s industry and not disproportionately affecting CGL) that are likely to result in any increase in the uncollectibility of such Accounts Receivable.

 

5.9            Serviced Loans .

 

(a)            Section 5.9(a) of the CGL Disclosure Letter sets forth a list of CGL Serviced Loans as of November 30, 2008.

 

(b)            CGL is, and will be, the sole legal, beneficial, equitable and record owner and holder of the Servicing Rights in respect of its Serviced Loans, free and clear of any Encumbrances (other than Permitted Encumbrances).

 

(c)            The Document File maintained by CGL (or readily available to CGL) for each CGL Serviced Loan contains, or will contain, in all material respects, an original or a true and correct copy of each of the financing documents that are required to be contained in such Document File in accordance with CGL’s underwriting policies in effect at the time of the origination of the applicable Serviced Loan, and none such financing documents relating to any CGL Serviced Loan has, or will have, in any material respects, been satisfied, canceled, rescinded, or subordinated in any respect by CGL, nor has CGL waived, nor will it waive, any material rights thereunder except as reflected in the Document File relating to such CGL Serviced Loan.

 

(d)            Except as set forth on Section 5.9(d) of the CGL Disclosure Letter , no borrower is, or will be prior to Closing, delinquent by more than 30 days in the payment of any material amounts due under any CGL Serviced Loan.

 

(e)            Except as set forth on Section 5.9(e) of the CGL Disclosure Letter , none of CGL’s Serviced Loans are, or will be prior to Closing, in foreclosure.

 

(f)             To the knowledge of CGL, the Serviced Loans listed on Section 5.9(a) of the CGL Disclosure Letter and those closed by CGL after the date hereof (i) conformed, or will conform, in all material respects, at the time such Serviced Loan was originated, to the applicable Agency Documents or any other Contracts by which a Serviced Loan was originated and applicable Law, in each case, as to the date it was originated, except as otherwise noted, and (ii) have been, or will be, serviced by CGL substantially in accordance with the applicable Agency Documents or any other Contracts by which a Serviced Loan is serviced and applicable Law, except as otherwise noted.

 

(g)            None of CGL’s Serviced Loans are Freddie Mac Targeted Affordable Housing loans, nor (i) are there any Contracts purporting to bind CGL to service or originate any Freddie Mac Targeted Affordable Housing loans, or (ii) as of the Closing will there be any Contracts purporting to bind CGL to service or originate any Freddie Mac Targeted Affordable Housing loans .

 

(h)            The unpaid principal balance as of the last day of the month immediately preceding the Closing Date shall be greater than $4.63 billion.

 

(i)             CGL has made available the Company and the GPF Parties a complete and correct copy of the CGL Servicing Tape. The information contained in the CGL Servicing Tape is, and the information contained in the Post-Signing CGL Servicing Tape shall be, complete and correct in all material respects as of the applicable dates for such information set forth in the applicable clauses of the definition of “CGL Servicing Tape” with respect to each Serviced Loan serviced by CGL as of such applicable dates.  The CGL Servicing Tape contains, and the Post-Signing CGL Servicing Tape shall

 

34



 

contain, all of the information listed in the clauses of the definition of “CGL Servicing Tape” with respect to each CGL Serviced Loan as of the applicable dates.

 

(j)             The information contained in the CGL Servicing Tape shall be deemed to be disclosed to the GPF Parties and, to the extent the CGL Servicing Tape contains information that should have been but was not disclosed on Section 5.9 of the CGL Disclosure Letter , such information shall be deemed to be incorporated by reference into Section 5.9 of the CGL Disclosure Letter and the GPF Parties shall have no rights under Article 12 with respect thereto.

 

5.10          Liabilities .  CGL does not have any Liabilities, other than (a) as specified on Section 5.10 of the CGL Disclosure Letter , (b) as specified in the CGL Balance Sheet (except as heretofore paid or discharged), (c) as incurred in the ordinary course since the CGL Balance Sheet Date that, individually or in the aggregate, are not material to the CGL Business, or (d) those created pursuant to this Agreement.

 

5.11          Legal Proceedings and Compliance with Law .

 

(a)            Except as set forth on Section 5.11(a) of the CGL Disclosure Letter , there is no Litigation that is pending or, to CGL’s knowledge, threatened against CGL or any of its Affiliates (i) against or involving, directly or indirectly, the Business of CGL or any of the assets used in the operation of CGL’s Business which, if adversely determined against CGL, would reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect, or (ii) seeking to prevent or challenge any of the Transactions.  Since January 1, 2004, there has been no material Default under any Laws, applicable to CGL’s Business or any of the assets used in the operation of CGL’s Business and neither CGL nor any of its Affiliates has received any written notices, or to knowledge of CGL, any oral notice from any Governmental Body since January 1, 2004, regarding any alleged Defaults applicable to CGL’s Business or any of the assets used in the operation of CGL’s Business under any Law.  Since January 1, 2004, there has been no material Default with respect to any Court Order applicable to CGL’s Business or any of the assets used in the operation of CGL’s Business.

 

(b)            Without limiting the generality of Section 5.11(a) of the CGL Disclosure Letter , except as described in Section 5.11(b) of the CGL Disclosure Letter , to the knowledge of CGL, there has not been any Environmental Condition (i) at the premises at which CGL’s Business has been conducted by CGL or any of its Affiliates or any predecessor of either of them, (ii) at any Real Property owned, leased or operated at any time by CGL, any Person controlled by CGL or any predecessor of any of them, or (iii) at any property at which wastes have been deposited or disposed by or at the behest or direction of any of the foregoing, except any Environmental Condition which would not reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect, nor has CGL received written notice of any such Environmental Condition.

 

(c)            CGL has obtained and is in material compliance with all Governmental Permits relating to CGL’s Business or any of the assets used in the operation of CGL’s Business that are required for the complete operation of the CGL’s Business as currently operated.  All of such Governmental Permits are currently valid and in full force and CGL has filed such timely and complete renewal applications as may be required with respect to such Governmental Permits.  To the knowledge of CGL, no revocation, cancellation or withdrawal thereof has been threatened.

 

(d)            CGL has provided to the GPF Parties all of the reviews and audits of CGL or, to the extent relating to CGL’s Business or any Contributed CGL Asset or Assumed CGL Liability, any of its Affiliates, conducted by any Governmental Body or Mortgage Program Sponsor, in each case, since January 1, 2004.

 

35



 

5.12          Contracts .

 

(a)            Section 5.12 of the CGL Disclosure Letter lists all Contracts of the following types to which CGL is a party or by which it or any Contributed CGL Asset or Assumed CGL Liability is bound, except for Minor Contracts:

 

(i)                    Contracts with any present or former member, manager, officer, employee, partner or consultant of CGL or any Affiliate thereof;

 

(ii)                   Contracts with any Mortgage Program Sponsor or Governmental Body;

 

(iii)                 any servicing or management Contract or consultancy Contract;

 

(iv)                 Contracts for the future purchase of, or payment for, supplies or products, or for the performance of services by a third party;

 

(v)                  Contracts for the lease of any personal property, vehicles or other assets used in CGL’s Business;

 

(vi)                 Contracts to sell or supply products or to perform services;

 

(vii)                Contracts to lease to or to operate for any other party any real or personal property;

 

(viii)               any notes, debentures, bonds, conditional sale Contracts, equipment trust Contracts, letter of credit agreements, reimbursement Contracts, loan Contracts or other Contracts for the borrowing or lending of money (including loans to or from officers, directors, partners, stockholders or Affiliates of CGL or any members of their immediate families), Contracts or arrangements for a line of credit or for a guarantee of, or other undertaking in connection with, the indebtedness of any other Person;

 

(ix)                  Contracts for any capital expenditure or leasehold improvements;

 

(x)                   any Contracts under which any Encumbrances exist;

 

(xi)                  any other Contract material to the operation of CGL’s Business; and

 

(xii)                 any other Contracts (other than Minor Contracts and those described in any of clauses (i) through (xi) above) not made in the ordinary course of business.

 

(b)            CGL has delivered to the Company and the GPF Parties complete and correct copies of all written Contracts of CGL (other than such Contracts which are Excluded CGL Assets), together with all amendments, supplements or modifications thereto, and accurate descriptions of all material terms of all oral Contracts, set forth or required to be set forth on Section 5.12 of the CGL Disclosure Letter .

 

(c)            The Contracts listed on Section 5.12 of the CGL Disclosure Letter and the Minor Contracts excluded from Section 5.12 of the CGL Disclosure Letter are referred to herein as the “ CGL Contracts .”  CGL is not in Default under any CGL Contracts (including any CGL Real Estate Leases and CGL Non-Real Estate Leases).  CGL has not received any communication from, or given any

 

36



 

communication to, any other party indicating that CGL or such other party, as the case may be, is in Default under any CGL Contract.  To the knowledge of CGL, (i) none of the other parties in any such CGL Contract is in Default thereunder and (ii) each such CGL Contract is enforceable against any other parties thereto in accordance with terms thereof, except as such enforceability may be limited or affected by applicable bankruptcy, insolvency, reorganization or other Laws of general application relating to or affecting the rights of creditors and except as enforceability may be limited by rules of Law governing specific performance, injunctive relief or other equitable remedies.  There are no renegotiations of, attempts to renegotiate or outstanding rights to renegotiate any amounts paid or payable to CGL under current or contemplated Contracts with any Person having the contractual or statutory right to demand or require such renegotiation and, to knowledge of CGL, no such Person has made any demand for such negotiation.

 

5.13          Insurance .  CGL has in place and maintains insurance policies with nationally recognized insurers that are financially sound and reputable.  Such policies are valid, outstanding and enforceable and, when taken together, provide adequate insurance for the CGL Business for all risks normally insured against by a Person carrying on a similar business and are sufficient for compliance with all regulatory requirements applicable to CGL’s Business. Such policies, when taken together, will provide adequate coverages against any current claims and any potential claims made against the CGL Business or CGL’s assets after the date hereof. There is no material Default with respect to any such policy or binder, nor has there been any failure to give any notice or present any claim under any such policy or binder in a timely fashion or in the manner or detail required by the policy or binder.  CGL has not received written notice, nor to the knowledge of CGL, oral notice of non-renewal or cancellation with respect to, or disallowance of any claim under, any such policy or binder that has been received by CGL or the policyholder thereof.

 

5.14          Intellectual Property .

 

(a)            Employees .

 

(i)                    To the knowledge of CGL, none of the employees or consultants of CGL is subject to any contractual or legal restrictions that might interfere with the use of his or her best efforts to promote the interests of CGL.  To the knowledge of CGL, no employee of CGL has entered into any Contract that restricts or limits in any way the scope or type of work in which the employee may be engaged or requires the employee to transfer, assign or disclose information concerning his or her work to anyone other than CGL.  Section 5.14(a)(i) of the CGL Disclosure Letter lists all Contracts between or among CGL, any employee thereof and a third party that imparts or that imparted an obligation of noncompetition, secrecy, confidentiality or non-disclosure upon CGL, any employee thereof or any third party.

 

(ii)                   To the knowledge of CGL, no employee or consultant of any of CGL or any Affiliate thereof (A) has used any other Persons’ Confidential Information in the course of his or her work, other than such borrower information as is properly used in the ordinary course of its business, or (B) is, or is currently expected to be, in Default under any term of any Contract relating to the CGL’s Confidential Information.

 

(b)            Know-How Necessary for the Business .

 

(i)                    The Intellectual Property included in the Contributed CGL Assets constitutes all of the Intellectual Property that is necessary for the operation of CGL’s Business as operated by CGL during the past 12 months, other than Intellectual Property contained in the Excluded CGL Assets, if any.  CGL is the owner of all right, title and interest in and to each item of Intellectual Property owned by it that is included in the Contributed CGL Assets.  In the case of licensed Intellectual

 

37



 

Property that is a Contributed CGL Asset, CGL has, to CGL’s knowledge, obtained all licenses necessary to freely use and commercially exploit the Intellectual Property used by it that is included in the Contributed CGL Assets, free and clear of any Encumbrances.  To the knowledge of CGL, CGL has the right to use all of the Intellectual Property used by it that is included in the Contributed CGL Assets without payment to a third party.

 

(ii)                   Set forth in Section 5.14(b)(ii) of the CGL Disclosure Letter is a complete and correct list of all URLs that are Contributed CGL Assets and a description of all of CGL’s rights with respect thereto.

 

(iii)                  To the knowledge of CGL, none of its Intellectual Property that is a Contributed CGL Asset is infringed or has been challenged or threatened in any way.  To the knowledge of CGL, CGL does not infringe, nor has it been alleged to infringe, any of the Intellectual Property or other proprietary right of any other Person.

 

(iv)                 CGL has taken all reasonable precautions to protect the secrecy, confidentiality and value of all Confidential Information relating to CGL’s Business.

 

5.15          ERISA .  For purposes of the following provisions of this Section 5.15 , the term “CGL” includes any ERISA Affiliate of CGL.

 

(a)            CGL does not currently maintain or contribute to a multiemployer plan (as defined in section 3(37) of ERISA), and CGL has not incurred any Liability with respect to, or arising from, a multiemployer plan.

 

(b)            The IRS has issued a favorable determination letter for each CGL Benefit Plan that is a “Qualified Plan” and each determination letter remains in effect and has not been revoked, nor has anything occurred or failed to occur with respect to the operation or amendment of such plans that could cause it to fail to meet section 401(a) of the Code.

 

(c)            As a result of the Transactions, the Company will not be subject to any Liability with respect to any CGL Benefit Plan under the requirements of ERISA, the Code or any other applicable Laws, including the obligation to contribute to, or make payments or provide benefits from, any CGL Benefit Plan or any Liability to the PBGC.

 

(d)            With respect to any CGL Benefit Plan that is an employee welfare benefit plan (within the meaning of Section 3(1) of ERISA) (i) there is no disqualified benefit, and (ii) no welfare plan provides health or other benefits after an employee’s or former employee’s retirement or other termination of employment except as required by Section 4980B of the Code.

 

5.16          Absence of Certain Changes .  Except as contemplated by this Agreement and, except as disclosed in Section 5.16 of the CGL Disclosure Letter , CGL’s Business has been conducted in the ordinary course since the CGL Balance Sheet Date, and since the CGL Balance Sheet Date, CGL has not:

 

(a)            experienced any change that has had or could reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect;

 

(b)            made any distribution or payment declared or made in respect of its membership interests by way of distributions, dividends, purchase or redemption of interests or otherwise (other than quarterly distributions made in the ordinary course of business);

 

38



 

(c)            increased the compensation payable or to become payable to any manager, officer, employee or agent, except for increases for non-officer employees made in the ordinary course of business, nor undertaken any other change in any employment or consulting arrangement;

 

(d)            entered into or amended any employment retention, severance, change in control or similar Contract with any Person;

 

(e)            established or amended any CGL Benefit Plan, other than general amendments to those CGL Benefit Plans maintained by Affiliates of CGL and in which CGL employees participate;

 

(f)             sold, assigned or transferred any Contributed CGL Assets, other than those made in the ordinary course of business;

 

(g)            subjected any Contributed CGL Asset to any Encumbrance, other than those made in the ordinary course of business;

 

(h)            other than in the ordinary course of business, waived or released any claim or right or cancellation of any debt held;

 

(i)             made any payments to any Affiliate of CGL, other than in the ordinary course of business;

 

(j)             entered into or terminated any Contract outside the ordinary course of business or inconsistent with past practices; or

 

(k)            taken any action or omitted to take any action that has or could reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

5.17          Finder’s Fees .  Other than Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC, no Person retained by CGL, or any Affiliate thereof, is or will be entitled to any commission or finder’s or similar fee in connection with the Transactions.

 

5.18          Additional Information Section 5.18 of the CGL Disclosure Letter accurately lists the following:

 

(a)            the names of all officers and managers of CGL; and

 

(b)            the names and addresses of every bank and other financial institution at which CGL maintains an account (whether checking, savings or otherwise), lock box or safety deposit box, and the account numbers and names of the individuals having signing authority or other access thereto.

 

5.19          Taxes .  Attached to Section 5.19 of the CGL Disclosure Letter are correct and complete copies of all federal and state income Tax Returns filed with respect to CGL or its Business for taxable periods ended on or after January 1, 2004.  CGL has prepared and filed when due (including any extensions) any Tax Returns that it was required to file in connection with its Business or any CGL Contributed Asset. All Taxes owed by CGL in connection with the Business or any CGL Contributed Asset have been paid.

 

5.20          Limitation of Representations and Warranties .  EACH GPF PARTY AND THE COMPANY HEREBY ACKNOWLEDGES THAT IF THE CLOSING IS CONSUMMATED, EXCEPT AS MAY EXPRESSLY BE SET FORTH HEREIN, THE CONTRIBUTED CGL ASSETS AND

 

39



 

ASSUMED CGL LIABILITIES ARE BEING TRANSFERRED, ASSIGNED, AND CONVEYED TO THE COMPANY ON AN “AS IS, WHERE IS” BASIS WITH ALL FAULTS, AND WITHOUT ANY WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF ANY NATURE WHATSOEVER INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR CAUSE OR PURPOSE.

 

6.              Representations and Warranties with Respect to the Company .

 

The Company hereby represents and warrants to each of CGL and the GPF Parties, as follows:

 

6.1            Organizational Status .  The Company is a limited liability company duly formed on November 5, 2008, validly existing and in good standing under the Laws of the jurisdiction of its formation and is qualified to do business in any jurisdiction where it is required to be so qualified.

 

6.2            Authorization .  The Company has the requisite power and authority to execute and deliver the Transaction Documents to which it is a party and to perform the Transactions performed or to be performed by it.  Such execution, delivery and performance by the Company has been duly authorized by all necessary limited liability company action.  Each Transaction Document executed and delivered by the Company has been duly executed and delivered by the Company and constitutes a valid and binding obligation of the Company, enforceable against the Company in accordance with its terms.

 

6.3            Consents and Approvals .  Except as set forth on Section 6.3 of the Company Disclosure Letter (the “ Company Required Consents ”), neither the execution and delivery by the Company of the Transaction Documents to which it is a party, nor the performance of the Transactions performed or to be performed by the Company, require any filing, consent or approval, constitute a Default or cause any payment obligation to arise under (a) any Law or Court Order to which the Company is subject, (b) the Charter Documents or bylaws of the Company, or (c) any Contract, Governmental Permit or other document to which the Company is a party or by which the properties or other assets of the Company may be bound.

 

6.4            Valid Issuance .  Upon the closing of the Transactions and the Company’s receipt of the contributions of CGL and GPF Parties contemplated by Section 2.2 , the Company Units to be issued to each of GPF, W&D and CGL shall be validly issued and fully paid.  Upon such issuance, (a) the Company Units shall not have been issued in violation of any applicable pre-emptive right, right of first refusal, right of first offer or similar right vested in any of the Company’s members, and (b) the Company shall have obtained any waivers and given any notices required to be obtained or given as result of such issuance, as the case may be, under any contract to which the Company is a party.  The issuance of the Company Units contemplated hereby will not violate any federal or state securities Laws in connection with the offer, sale or issuance of such Company Units.

 

6.5            Capitalization .  Immediately prior to the Closing, all of the Company outstanding Company Units will be owned by GPF, and there are no existing options, warrants, calls, Contracts, commitments or other rights of any character (including conversion rights) relating to any other Company Units, although it is likely that the Company will issue certain derivative securities in the future.  At the Closing, the Company will not have any outstanding equity interests or securities convertible or exchangeable for any of its Company Units or containing any profit participation features, nor any rights or options to subscribe for or to purchase its Company Units or any securities convertible into or exchangeable for its Company Units or any equity appreciation rights or phantom equity plan other than the Company Units to be issued at Closing pursuant to Section 2.2 .  Except as set forth in the Company’s Charter Documents, the Company is not and will not be subject to any option or Contract to repurchase or otherwise acquire or retire any of its Company Units or any warrants, options or other rights to acquire its

 

40



 

Company Units.  Other than the Charter Documents of the Company, there are no Contracts with any Person with respect to the voting or transfer of any Company Units or with respect to any other aspect of the Company’s affairs.

 

6.6            Legal Proceedings and Compliance with Law .  There is no Litigation that is pending or threatened against the Company (a) involving, directly or indirectly, the Business of the Company or any of its assets, or (b) seeking to prevent or challenge any of the Transactions.

 

6.7            Absence of Liabilities .  Other than Liabilities incurred in connection with its formation, state qualification and licensure and licensure by the Mortgage Program Sponsors, its obligations under the Transaction Documents and its Charter Documents, the Company has no Liabilities.

 

6.8            Finder’s Fees .  No Person retained by the Company is or will be entitled to any commission or finder’s or similar fee in connection with the Transactions.

 

6.9            Limitation of Representations and Warranties .  EACH OF CGL AND THE GPF PARTIES HEREBY ACKNOWLEDGE THAT IF THE CLOSING IS CONSUMMATED, EXCEPT AS MAY EXPRESSLY BE SET FORTH HEREIN, THE COMPANY SHALL NOT BE DEEMED TO HAVE MADE ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES AS TO ITS BUSINESS, ASSETS AND LIABILITIES, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF ANY NATURE WHATSOEVER INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR CAUSE OR PURPOSE.

 

7.              Covenants of the Parties .

 

7.1            Conduct of Business .  From the date hereof and up to and including the Closing Date, except as contemplated or otherwise consented to in writing by CGL, in the case of any GPF Party or the Company, and GPF and the Company, in the case of CGL, each Party shall carry on its Business in the ordinary course and preserve intact its Business as it is currently organized and shall use commercially reasonable efforts (but shall not be required to increase wages or benefits) to keep available the services of the current employees and agents of such Party and to maintain its relations and goodwill with the suppliers, customers, and any others having a business relation with such Party.  In furtherance of and in addition to such restriction:

 

(a)            no Party will,

 

(i)                    directly or indirectly do any of the following:  (A) sell, pledge, dispose of, or encumber (other than Permitted Encumbrances) any of its assets other than sales of loans originated by such Party to a Mortgage Program Sponsor or other third parties in the ordinary course of business and in conformity with the applicable Agency Documents (as modified by appropriate waivers and past practices accepted by the appropriate Mortgage Program Sponsor) in all material respects, (B) amend or propose to amend its Charter Documents, (C) split, combine or reclassify any outstanding shares of its capital stock or other equity interest, or declare, set aside or pay any dividend or distribution payable in cash, stock, equity interests, property or otherwise with respect to such shares or other equity interest (other than quarterly distributions made in the ordinary course of business), (D) redeem, purchase, acquire or offer to acquire any shares of its capital stock or other equity interest, or (E) enter into any agreement with respect to any of the matters set forth in this Section 7.1 ;

 

41


 

 

 

(ii)                   (A) issue, sell, pledge, or dispose of, or agree to issue, sell, pledge, or dispose of, any additional shares or other equity interests of, or securities convertible into or exchangeable for, or any options, warrants, or rights of any kind to acquire any shares or other equity interests of, its capital stock of any class whether pursuant to any rights agreement, stock or equity plan or otherwise, (B) acquire (by merger, consolidation, or acquisition of stock or assets) any Person or division thereof, (C) incur any debt or issue any debt securities, except in connection with the origination of mortgage backed loans in conformity with the applicable Agency Documents (as modified by appropriate waivers and past practices accepted by the appropriate Mortgage Program Sponsor) in all material respects in the ordinary course of business, or (D) dissolve or otherwise alter its corporate, partnership, or limited liability company existence;

 

(iii)                  (A) enter into any Contract with an Affiliate (or other insider, employee, officer or director) or any other Contract except in the ordinary course of its business, (B) terminate, modify, assign, waive, release or relinquish any Contract rights or amend any material rights or claims not in the ordinary course of its business or except as expressly provided herein, or (C) Default under, or take or fail to take any action that (with or without notice or lapse of time or both) would constitute a Default under any term or provision of any Contract;

 

(iv)                 except as required to comply with applicable Law, take any action to institute or modify any material compensation arrangement, benefit plans, new severance or termination pay practices with respect to any of its directors, managers officers or employees who will provide ongoing services to the Company, or to increase the benefits payable under its compensation, benefit, severance or termination pay practices or otherwise with respect to such individuals;

 

(v)                  other than a change by CGL to its tax accounting for revenue from mortgage servicing rights, make any Tax election, change its method of Tax accounting or settle any claim relating to Taxes, or take any action that could result in the loss or reduction of any deferred tax treatment of such Party (other than losses or reductions arising from changes in its loan portfolio in the ordinary course of business);

 

(vi)                 except as otherwise consented to by the Parties (which consent shall not be unreasonably withheld, conditioned or delayed), hire any new employees;

 

(vii)                other than in the ordinary course of business, make any loans, advances, capital expenditures or capital commitments in excess of $10,000 in the aggregate, other than in respect of the origination of mortgage backed loans in conformity with the applicable Agency Agreements (as modified by appropriate waivers and past practices accepted by the applicable Mortgage Program Sponsor);

 

(viii)               make any loans under the Freddie Mac Targeted Affordable Housing program;

 

(ix)                  compromise, settle or otherwise adjust any claim or Litigation, other than the litigation involving Standard Mortgage Corporation;

 

(x)                   take any action or omit to do any act, which action or omission will cause it to breach any obligation contained in this Agreement or cause any of its representation or warranty not to be true and correct as of the Closing Date;

 

(xi)                  grant any power of attorney; or

 

42



 

(xii)                 agree or otherwise commit, whether in writing or otherwise, to do any of the foregoing.

 

(b)            each Party will: maintain its accounting procedures, cash management practices and its policies, practices and procedures with respect to collection of Accounts Receivable, establishment of reserves for uncollectible accounts, accrual of Accounts Receivable, inventory control, prepayment of expenses, payment of trade accounts payable, accrual of other expenses, deferral of revenue, and acceptance of customer deposits in accordance with its past customs and practices under GAAP.

 

7.2            Access to Information .  From the date hereof and up to and including the Closing Date, each Party shall give the other and its representatives (including their respective accountants, counsel, consultants, employees and such other representatives as a Party may designate from time to time), upon reasonable notice and during normal business hours, reasonable access to the Real Property, contracts, books, records and affairs of such Party; provided, that such access does not interfere with the business or operations of a Party.  Each Party shall cause its officers and employees to furnish to the requesting Party all documents, records and information (and copies thereof) related to its Business as a requesting Party or its representatives may reasonably request.  Notwithstanding the foregoing, nothing in this Section 7.2 shall require any Party to provide access to any information that such Party reasonably believes would impair or preclude its ability to operate its business, or otherwise cause such Party to waive, any attorney/client privilege or other right to confidentiality it may have asserted or that may be available to it with respect to such information, nor shall it require any Party to disclose any of the internal, confidential materials prepared by or for it in connection with the Transactions.

 

7.3            Satisfaction of Liabilities .  After the Closing, CGL and its Affiliates shall satisfy (by payment, forgiveness or otherwise) any Excluded CGL Liability and the GPF Parties and their Affiliates shall satisfy (by payment, forgiveness or otherwise) any Excluded GPF Liability, each in accordance with the terms thereof.

 

7.4            No Solicitation .  From and after the date hereof and up to and including the Termination Date, without the prior written consent of the other Parties, no Party will, and each Party will cause its controlled Affiliates not to, and will cause their respective directors, managers, officers, employees, and other agents and representatives (including any investment banking, legal or accounting firm retained by it or any of them and any individual member or employee of the foregoing) not to: (a) initiate, encourage, solicit or seek, directly or indirectly, any inquiries or the making or implementation of any proposal or offer (including any proposal or offer to its stockholders or any of them) with respect to a merger, acquisition, consolidation, recapitalization, liquidation, dissolution, equity investment or similar transaction involving, or any purchase or license of all or any substantial portion of the assets or any securities of, such Party (any such proposal or offer being hereinafter referred to as an “ Acquisition Proposal ”), (b) engage in any negotiations concerning, or provide any confidential information or data to, or have any substantive discussions with, any Person relating to an Acquisition Proposal, (c) otherwise facilitate or cooperate in any effort or attempt to make, implement or accept an Acquisition Proposal, or (d) enter into Contract with any Person relating to an Acquisition Proposal.  If a Party receives any such inquiries, offers or proposals it shall (a) notify the other Parties orally and in writing of any such inquiries, offers or proposals (including the terms and conditions of any such proposal and the identity of the Person making it), within 24 hours of the receipt thereof, (b) keep the other Parties informed of the status and details of any such inquiry, offer or proposal, and (c) give the other Parties five days’ advance notice of any Contract to be entered into with, or any information to be supplied to, any Person making such inquiry, offer or proposal.

 

7.5            Update of Disclosure Letters .  Between the date hereof and the Closing Date:

 

43



 

(a)            CGL shall promptly disclose to the Company and the GPF Parties in writing any information set forth in the CGL Disclosure Letter that is no longer complete, true or applicable and any information of the nature of that set forth in the CGL Disclosure Letter that arises after the date hereof and that would have been required to be included in the CGL Disclosure Letter if such information had been obtained on the date of delivery thereof.  Any such updates shall not have the effect of curing any breach as of the date hereof of any representation or warranty contained herein and shall not affect any of GPF’s or the Company’s rights under Article 12 with respect thereto.

 

(b)            the GPF Parties shall promptly disclose to the Company and CGL in writing any information set forth in the GPF Disclosure Letter that is no longer complete, true or applicable and any information of the nature of that set forth in the GPF Disclosure Letter that arises after the date hereof and that would have been required to be included in the GPF Disclosure Letter if such information had been obtained on the date of delivery thereof.  Any such updates shall not have the effect of curing any breach as of the date hereof of any representation or warranty contained herein and shall not affect any of CGL’s or the Company’s rights under Article 12 with respect thereto.

 

7.6            Fulfillment of Closing Conditions .

 

(a)            At and prior to the Closing, each Party shall use commercially reasonable efforts to fulfill, and to cause each other to fulfill, as soon as practicable before the Termination Date the conditions specified in Articles 8, 9 and 10 to the extent that the fulfillment of such conditions is within its or his control.  Additionally, each of the Parties shall cause any other controlled Affiliate to take or refrain from taking any action that may be necessary to carry out the Transactions.  In connection with the foregoing, each Party will (i) refrain from any actions that would cause any of its representations and warranties to be inaccurate as of the Closing, and take any reasonable actions within its control that would be necessary to prevent its representations and warranties from being inaccurate as of the Closing, (ii) execute and deliver the applicable agreements and other documents referred to in Articles 8, 9 and 10 , (iii) comply with all applicable Laws in connection with its execution, delivery and performance of this Agreement and the Transactions, (iv) use commercially reasonable efforts to obtain in a timely manner all necessary waivers, consents and approvals required under any Laws, Contracts or otherwise, including obtaining any GPF Required Consents and CGL Required Consents, and (v) use commercially reasonable efforts to take, or cause to be taken, all other actions and to do, or cause to be done, all other things reasonably necessary, proper or advisable to consummate and make effective as promptly as practicable the Transactions.

 

(b)            Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, each of the Parties shall use their commercially reasonable efforts to take, or cause to be taken, all actions and to do, or cause to be done all things necessary, with respect to (i) seeking to obtain prior to the Closing Date all Governmental Permits and Mortgage Program Sponsor approvals as are necessary for the consummation of the Transactions, including such clearances as may be required under any Mortgage Program Sponsor, as set forth below and (ii) seeking to effect all necessary registrations and other filings and submissions of information requested by any Governmental Body or any Mortgage Program Sponsor in connection with this Agreement and the Transactions; provided , however , that such action shall not include commencing or participating in any Litigation or offer or grant of any accommodation (financial or otherwise) to any third party; provided , further , that no Party shall be obligated hereunder to divest, either individually or in the aggregate, of any material portion of its or any of its Affiliate’s assets, rights or properties owned prior to the Closing Date.  As promptly as practicable, each Mortgage Program Sponsor the notifications and other information required to be filed with any Mortgage Program Sponsor with respect to the Transactions.  Each of the Parties shall make available to the other Parties such information relative to its business, assets and property as the other may reasonably request in order to prepare filings or submissions as required by any Mortgage Program Sponsor.  Each of the Parties shall keep the other

 

44



 

Parties apprised in a timely manner of the status and substance of all meaningful actions or communications between it (or its advisors) and any Mortgage Program Sponsor relating to this Agreement or any of the matters described in this subsection (b).  None of the Parties shall take any meaningful actions or enter into any accommodation, resolution or settlement with any such agency or Mortgage Program Sponsor relating to this Agreement or any of the matters described in this subsection (b) without first discussing it with the other Parties.  Each of the Parties each hereby acknowledge that (i) GPF will have primary authority for addressing and resolving any issues with respect to the Transactions that may arise in the course of the Fannie Mae review process and (ii) CGL will have primary authority for addressing and resolving any issues with respect to the Transactions that may arise in the course of the Freddie Mac review process.  The Parties hereby mutually commit to instruct their respective counsel to cooperate with each other and use commercially reasonable efforts to facilitate and expedite the identification and resolution of any such issues and, consequently, approval of the Mortgage Program Sponsors at the earliest practicable date.  CGL shall pay the transfer fee in respect of the Mortgage Program Sponsor Transfer Agreements.

 

7.7            Transfer of Affiliated Party Assets .  From and after the date hereof, to the extent that the Affiliates of any GPF Party, on the one hand, and the Affiliates of CGL, on the other, own or hold for use an asset (other than indebtedness) that is used by any GPF Party or CGL, respectively, in its Business that is intended to be a Contributed GPF Asset or Contributed CGL Asset, respectively, then the GPF Parties and their Affiliates or CGL and its Affiliates, respectively, shall take such commercially reasonable steps as may be necessary or appropriate so that (a) at Closing a GPF Party or CGL, respectively, shall own or have valid and enforceable rights to convey such asset to the Company, or, if such transfer cannot be completed prior to the Closing, then, alternatively, (b) such asset is conveyed to the Company as soon as is reasonably practicable after the Closing, including executing and delivering such additional instruments of conveyance and transfer as may be required to transfer ownership of such asset to the Company and otherwise put the Company in possession of such asset.

 

7.8            Public Announcements .  The Parties shall consult with each other before issuing any press release or making any public statement with respect to this Agreement and the Transactions and, except as may be required by applicable Law, none of the Parties nor any Affiliate thereof shall issue any such press release or make any such public statement without the prior written consent of the other Parties.

 

7.9            Tax Matters .  The GPF Parties and their Affiliates and CGL and its Affiliates each shall: (a) provide all information regarding the Contributed GPF Assets and the Assumed GPF Liabilities and Contributed CGL Assets and Assumed CGL Liabilities, respectively, to the extent such information could be relevant to any Tax Return to be filed by the Company or a Party, (b) make or permit commercially reasonable accommodations with regard to any Assumed GPF Liabilities and Assumed CGL Liabilities, respectively, to minimize gain recognition under Section 731 of the Code, (c) promptly provide notice to the Company and the other Party of any proposed adjustment by a taxing authority for a period prior to the Closing Date with regard to the Party’s Business or the contributed assets, and (d) cooperate fully in any Tax Return required to be filed by the Company, a Party, or an Affiliate of a Party.

 

7.10          Confidentiality .  If the Transactions are not consummated, each Party and its representatives shall treat all Confidential Information as confidential, will not disclose any Confidential Information except to its representatives on a need-to-know basis or if required by law or requested by judicial or regulatory process to be disclosed and shall immediately (a) cease using the Confidential Information, (b) destroy or return to such other Party or Affiliate all Confidential Information and all copies made by it or its representatives of the Confidential Information provided by such other Party or Affiliate (other than such documents and other materials as required by any law or legal process, regulation or internal policies to be retained and any computer records and files containing Confidential

 

45



 

Information that have been created as a result of automatic archiving or back-up procedures), and (c) destroy any and all notes, analyses, compilations, studies or other documents prepared by it or any of its Affiliates or representatives to the extent they contain or reflect any Confidential Information. The return and/or destruction of Confidential Information pursuant to this Section 7.10 shall be certified in writing to the Party providing such Confidential Information by an authorized officer supervising such return and destruction within three Business Days after written request from such Party. Notwithstanding the return or destruction of the Confidential Information pursuant to this Section 7.10 , each Party shall continue to be bound by the obligations of confidentiality and other obligations hereunder with respect to such information.

 

7.11          Expenses .  Except as otherwise provided herein, the Parties shall each pay all of their respective legal, accounting and other expenses incurred by such Party in connection with the Transactions.

 

7.12          Employees .  Prior to Closing, each of the GPF Parties and CGL shall provide the Company a true and correct list of all employees performing services for the Business of the GPF Parties and CGL, respectively, at any time during the past 12 months (“ Eligible Employees ”) identified by name, U.S. social security number (if applicable, and, if not, a valid I-9 Form for such employee), hire date and then current base salary.  Effective as of the Closing Date, each of the GPF Parties and CGL shall terminate the employment of all Eligible Employees, and the Company shall offer employment to all Eligible Employees.  Prior to the Closing, CGL shall have received a contribution of $4,833,205 (the “ CFI Employee Contribution ”) from CFI to be utilized following the Closing in the manner set forth in Sections 3.3.5, 3.3.6 and 3.3.7 of the Operating Agreement.

 

7.13          CGL Credit Risk .  Prior to the Closing, CGL shall cause the $2.5 million letter of credit in favor of Fannie Mae established by HSBC Bank USA to be replaced with $4,754,223.00, which will be contributed to CGL by CFI (the “ CFI Backstop Contribution ”) to fully fund the capital and liquidity required by Fannie Mae, which may equal or exceed the stated Fannie Mae’s DUS capital standards for non-rated entities.

 

7.14          Capmark Contract .  Prior to the Closing, CGL shall have received a contribution of cash from CFI in an amount equal to (a) pay $100,000 on account of termination fee and other costs and expenses in connection with the termination of the Company’s servicing contract with Capmark, plus (b) $400,000 to offset the costs of transferring the services previously provided by Capmark to the Company (the “ CFI Capmark Contribution ”).  If there are fees that result from the actual cancellation of the Capmark contract that are greater than the amount of the CFI Capmark Contribution, then CGL shall promptly pay the amount of such fees over the Company.

 

7.15          FHA/HUD Operating Deficit .  Prior to the Closing, CGL shall have received a contribution of $750,000 from CFI to offset a portion of the operating deficits in CGL’s FHA lending operation (the “ CFI FHA Contribution ”).  CGL may use the CFI FHA Contribution to pay expenses incurred after the Closing related to the HUD Business in accordance with the terms of the Transition Services Agreement.  Immediately following the execution and delivery of the HUD Transfer Agreement by all parties thereto, CGL shall provide GPF with a reasonably acceptable and detailed accounting of any expenses paid by it and contribute the then remaining CFI FHA Contribution to the Company.

 

7.16          CGL Actual Losses Contribution .  Prior to Closing, CGL shall have received a contribution of $2,534,081.00 to cover the actual and estimated losses (as agreed to by the Parties) related to loans in CGL’s Servicing Portfolio, or pre-funded such amount with the applicable Mortgage Program Sponsor (“ CGL Actual Losses Contribution ”).  If the actual losses and estimated losses (as agreed to by the Parties) related to loans in CGL’s Servicing Portfolio at Closing is greater than the CGL Actual

 

46



 

Losses Contribution, then immediately prior to Closing, CGL shall have received a contribution in the amount of such difference (“ CGL Actual Losses True-Up Contribution ”).

 

7.17          GPF Actual Losses Contribution .  Prior to the Closing, the GPF Parties shall have received a contribution to cover actual losses, if known, or estimated losses, if not known, related to loans in the GPF Parties’ Servicing Portfolio, in such amount as is agreed to by the Parties, or pre-funded such amount with the applicable Mortgage Program Sponsor (“ GPF Actual Losses Contribution ”).

 

7.18          HUD Transfer Agreement; HUD Assets .  To the extent not executed and delivered prior to Closing, the Parties will cooperate with each other in accordance with the terms of the Transition Services Agreement to execute and deliver the HUD Transfer Agreement by the time set forth therein.  Immediately following the execution and delivery of the HUD Transfer Agreement by all parties thereto, CGL shall contribute the HUD Assets to the Company.

 

7.19          Post-Signing Servicing Tapes .

 

(a)            Prior to the Closing, each GPF Party shall deliver to the Company and CGL a complete and correct copy of its electronic files containing the information specified in the definition of “GPF Servicing Tape” as of December 31, 2008 (the “ Post-Signing GPF Servicing Tape ”).

 

(b)            Prior to the Closing, CGL shall deliver to the Company and each GPF Party a complete and correct copy of its electronic files containing the information specified in the definition of “CGL Servicing Tape” as of December 31, 2008 (the “ Post-Signing CGL Servicing Tape ”).

 

7.20          Additional Financial Statements; Reports .  Prior to the Closing, CGL shall deliver to the Company and the GPF Parties an unaudited balance sheet of CGL as of December 31, 2008 and the related statements of income and cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2008, and the GPF Parties shall deliver to CGL unaudited Consolidated and Combined Financial Statements of Walker & Dunlop, Inc. and its Affiliates as of and for the year ended December 31, 2008, which shall include the Consolidating and Combining Balance Sheet as of December 31, 2008 and the Consolidating and Combining Statement of Income for the year ended December 31, 2008 of several companies including the GPF Parties.

 

7.21          CGL Affiliate Transactions .  After the Closing, CGL and its Affiliates shall continue to engage in such intra-company and affiliate transactions as are necessary in order for CGL to satisfy (by payment, forgiveness or otherwise) of its obligations under the Transaction Documents.

 

7.22          Estimated CGL Closing Balance Sheet .  Prior to the Closing, CGL shall provide the Company with a good faith estimate of the CGL Closing Balance Sheet.

 

8.              Conditions Precedent to Obligations of CGL .  All obligations of CGL to consummate the Transactions are subject to the satisfaction (or waiver by CGL) prior thereto of each of the conditions set forth in this Article 8 . The waiver by CGL of any condition based upon the accuracy of any representation or warranty of any GPF Party or the Company or the performance of or compliance by any GPF Party or the Company with any covenant or obligation to be performed or complied with by such GPF Party or the Company, will not affect the right to indemnification or reimbursement right or other remedy of CGL or the Company based upon such representations, warranties, covenants and obligations.

 

8.1            Representations and Warranties .  The representations and warranties of each of the Company and the GPF Parties set forth in this Agreement that are qualified by materiality (considered collectively and individually) shall have been true and correct at and as of the date hereof and shall be

 

47



 

true and correct at and as of the Closing Date as if made at and as of the Closing Date, and the representations and warranties that are not so qualified (considered collectively and individually) shall have been true and correct in all material respects at and as of the date hereof and shall be true and correct in all material respects at and as of the Closing Date as if made at and as of the Closing Date, except to the extent that such representations and warranties refer specifically to an earlier date, in which case such representations and warranties shall have been true and correct as of such earlier date, in each case, without taking into account any qualifiers of materiality or qualifiers of similar import or any updates to either of the GPF Disclosure Letter or the Company Disclosure Letter made pursuant to Section 7.5 .

 

8.2            Agreements, Conditions and Covenants .  Each of the Company and the GPF Parties shall have performed or complied with all agreements, conditions and covenants required by this Agreement to be performed or complied with or by them on or before the Closing Date.

 

8.3            Material Adverse Effect .  Since the GPF Balance Sheet Date, there shall not have been any Material Adverse Effect with respect to any GPF Party or its Business nor shall have there been any fact, circumstance or occurrence that has had or could reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect on any GPF Party or its Business that continues to exist on the Closing Date.

 

8.4            Required Consents; Deliverables .  The GPF Parties shall have received all of the GPF Required Consents set forth on Schedule 3.2(a)(v)  and the Company shall have received all of the Company Required Consents set forth on Schedule 3.2(c)(iv) , each in form and substance reasonably satisfactory to CGL, and the GPF Parties and the Company shall each have delivered those items required to be delivered pursuant to Sections 3.2(a ) and 3.2(c) , respectively.

 

8.5            Legality .  No Law or Court Order shall have been enacted, entered, promulgated or enforced by any Governmental Body that is in effect and (a) has the effect of making the Transactions illegal or otherwise prohibiting the consummation of the Transactions, or (b) has a reasonable likelihood of causing a Material Adverse Effect.  CGL shall have received any consent, approval, waiver, clearance or authorization from any Governmental Body or Mortgage Program Sponsor that may be required to consummate the Transactions, including those required by any Mortgage Program Sponsor, and all terminations or expirations or waiting periods imposed by any Governmental Body or Mortgage Program Sponsor necessary for the consummation of the Transactions shall have occurred.

 

8.6            Disclosure Letters .  CGL, in its sole discretion, shall be satisfied with the form and substance of any updates to the GPF Disclosure Letter and the Company Disclosure Letter delivered pursuant to Section 7.5 .

 

8.7            GPF Net Working Capital .  The GPF Net Working Capital shall be equal to or greater than $1.0 million and CGL shall have received a certificate of the Chief Executive Officer of GPF and of the Chief Executive Officer of W&D certifying as to such fact.

 

8.8            Mortgage Program Sponsor Transfer Agreements Approval .  Each Mortgage Program Sponsor Transfer Agreement shall have been executed by the applicable Mortgage Program Sponsor, other than the HUD Transfer Agreement, which may be executed after the Closing.

 

8.9            Serviced Loan Portfolio .  The unpaid principal balance per the Post-Signing GPF Servicing Tape shall be greater than $4.68 billion, and CGL shall have received a certificate of the Chief Executive Officer of GPF and of the Chief Executive Officer of W&D certifying as to such effect.

 

8.10          Legal Opinion .  CGL shall have received the written opinion of Morgan, Lewis & Bockius LLP, counsel to GPF, in form and substance reasonably acceptable to CGL and its counsel.

 

48



 

8.11          GPF Contribution .  The GPF Parties shall have received or pre-funded the GPF Actual Losses Contribution and the GPF Parties shall have provided evidence of such contribution or pre-funding, as applicable, to CGL.

 

9.              Conditions Precedent to Obligations of the GPF Parties .  All obligations of the GPF Parties to consummate the Transactions are subject to the satisfaction (or waiver by the GPF Parties) prior thereto of each of the conditions set forth in this Article 9 . The waiver by any GPF Party of any condition based upon the accuracy of any representation or warranty of CGL or the performance of or compliance by CGL with any covenant or obligation to be performed or complied with by CGL, will not affect the right to indemnification or reimbursement right or other remedy of any GPF Party or the Company based upon such representations, warranties, covenants and obligations.

 

9.1            Representations and Warranties .  The representations and warranties of each of the Company and CGL set forth in this Agreement that are qualified by materiality (considered collectively and individually) shall have been true and correct at and as of the date hereof and shall be true and correct at and as of the Closing Date as if made at and as of the Closing Date, and the representations and warranties that are not so qualified (considered collectively and individually) shall have been true and correct in all material respects at and as of the date hereof and shall be true and correct in all material respects at and as of the Closing Date as if made at and as of the Closing Date, except to the extent that such representations and warranties refer specifically to an earlier date, in which case such representations and warranties shall have been true and correct as of such earlier date, in each case, without taking into account any qualifiers of materiality or qualifiers of similar import or any updates to either of the Company Disclosure Letter or the CGL Disclosure Letter made pursuant to Section 7.5 .

 

9.2            Agreements, Conditions and Covenants .  Each of the Company and CGL shall have performed or complied with all agreements, conditions and covenants required by this Agreement to be performed or complied with or by them on or before the Closing Date.

 

9.3            Material Adverse Effect .  Since the CGL Balance Sheet Date, there shall not have been any Material Adverse Effect with respect to CGL’s Business nor shall have there been any fact, circumstance or occurrence that has had or could reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect on CGL’s Business that continues to exist on the Closing Date.

 

9.4            Required Consents; Deliverables .  CGL shall have received all of the CGL Required Consents set forth on Schedule 3.2(b)(v) , in form and substance reasonably satisfactory to the GPF Parties, and CGL shall have delivered those items required to be delivered pursuant to Section 3.2(b) .

 

9.5            Legality .  No Law or Court Order shall have been enacted, entered, promulgated or enforced by any Governmental Body that is in effect and (a) has the effect of making any of the Transactions illegal or otherwise prohibiting the consummation of such purchase and sale, or (b) has a reasonable likelihood of causing a Material Adverse Effect.  The GPF Parties shall have received any consent, approval, waiver, clearance or authorization from any Governmental Body or Mortgage Program Sponsor that may be required to consummate the Transactions, including those required by any Mortgage Program Sponsor, and all terminations or expirations or waiting periods imposed by any Governmental Body or Mortgage Program Sponsor necessary for the consummation of the Transactions shall have occurred.

 

9.6            CGL Disclosure Letter .  The GPF Parties, in their sole discretion, shall be satisfied with the form and substance of any updates to the CGL Disclosure Letter delivered pursuant to Section 7.5 .

 

49



 

9.7            CGL Contributions .  CFI shall have made or pre-funded, as applicable, the CFI Employee Contribution, CFI Capmark Contribution, CFI FHA Contribution, CFI Backstop Contribution, CGL Actual Losses Contribution and, if applicable, the CGL Actual Losses True-Up Contribution and CGL shall have provided evidence of such contributions or pre-funding, as applicable, to the GPF Parties.

 

9.8            Mortgage Program Sponsor Transfer Agreements Approval .  Each Mortgage Program Sponsor Transfer Agreement shall have been executed by the applicable Mortgage Program Sponsor, other than the HUD Transfer Agreement, which may be executed by HUD after the Closing.

 

9.9            Serviced Loan Portfolio .  The unpaid principal balance per the Post-Signing CGL Servicing Tape shall be greater than $4.63 billion, and the GPF Parties shall have received a certificate of the Chief Executive Officer of CGL certifying to such effect.

 

9.10          Legal Opinion .  GPF shall have received the written opinion of Ballard Spahr Andrews & Ingersoll, LLP, counsel to the CGL, in form and substance reasonably acceptable to GPF and its counsel.

 

9.11          Commission Agreements .  GPF shall have received counterpart signature pages executed by CGL’s loan production personnel to commission agreements between the Company and such personnel, such agreements to be on terms reasonably satisfactory to the GPF Parties.

 

9.12          Retention Agreement .  GPF shall have received counterpart signature pages executed by Verne Murray and Jeff Burns to commission and retention agreements between such personnel and the Company, such agreements to be on terms reasonably satisfactory to the GPF Parties.

 

9.13          Ownership of CGL .  CFI or its Affiliates shall own 100% of the membership interests of CGL.

 

10.            Conditions Precedent to Obligations of the Company .  All obligations of the Company to consummate the Transactions are subject to the satisfaction (or waiver by the Company) prior thereto of each of the conditions set forth in this Article 10 . The waiver by the Company of any condition based upon the accuracy of any representation or warranty of any of CGL or the GPF Parties or the performance of or compliance by any of CGL or the GPF Parties with any covenant or obligation to be performed or complied with by any of CGL or the GPF Parties, will not affect the right to indemnification or reimbursement right or other remedy of the Company based upon such representations, warranties, covenants and obligations.

 

10.1          Representations and Warranties .  The representations and warranties of any of CGL or the GPF Parties set forth in this Agreement that are qualified by materiality (considered collectively and individually) shall have been true and correct at and as of the date hereof and shall be true and correct at and as of the Closing Date as if made at and as of the Closing Date, and the representations and warranties that are not so qualified (considered collectively and individually) shall have been true and correct in all material respects at and as of the date hereof and shall be true and correct in all material respects at and as of the Closing Date as if made at and as of the Closing Date, except to the extent that such representations and warranties refer specifically to an earlier date, in which case such representations and warranties shall have been true and correct as of such earlier date, in each case, without taking into account any qualifiers of materiality or qualifiers of similar import or any updates to the CGL Disclosure Letter or GPF Disclosure Letter made pursuant to Section 7.5 .

 

10.2          Agreements, Conditions and Covenants .  CGL and the GPF Parties shall have performed or complied with all agreements, conditions and covenants required by this Agreement to be performed or complied with or by them on or before the Closing Date.

 

50



 

10.3          Material Adverse Effect .  Since the CGL Balance Sheet Date, there shall not have been any Material Adverse Effect with respect to CGL or its Business nor shall have there been any fact, circumstance or occurrence that has had or could reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect on CGL or its Business that continues to exist on the Closing Date.

 

10.4          Required Consents; Deliverables .  CGL and the GPF Parties shall have received all of the CGL Required Consents set forth on Schedule 3.2(b)(v)  and GPF Required Consents set forth on Schedule 3.2(a)(v) , respectively, in form and substance reasonably satisfactory to the Company, and the GPF Parties and CGL shall have delivered those items required to be delivered pursuant to Sections 3.2(a)  and 3.2(b) , respectively.

 

10.5          Legality .  No Law or Court Order shall have been enacted, entered, promulgated or enforced by any Governmental Body that is in effect and (a) has the effect of making any of the Transactions illegal or otherwise prohibiting the consummation of such purchase and sale, or (b) has a reasonable likelihood of causing a Material Adverse Effect.  The Company shall have received any consent, approval, waiver, clearance or authorization from any Governmental Body or Mortgage Program Sponsor that may be required to consummate the Transactions, including those required by any Mortgage Program Sponsor, and all terminations or expirations or waiting periods imposed by any Governmental Body or Mortgage Program Sponsor necessary for the consummation of the Transactions shall have occurred.

 

10.6          Disclosure Letter .  The Company, in its sole discretion, shall be satisfied with the form and substance of any updates to the CGL Disclosure Letter and the GPF Disclosure Letter delivered pursuant to Section 7.5 .

 

10.7          CGL Contributions .  CFI shall have made or pre-funded, as applicable, the CFI Employee Contribution, CFI Capmark Contribution, CFI FHA Contribution, CFI Backstop Contribution, CGL Actual Losses Contribution, and, if applicable, the CGL Actual Losses True-Up Contribution and provided evidence of such contributions or pre-funding, as applicable, to the Company.

 

10.8          GPF Net Working Capital .  The GPF Net Working Capital shall be $1.0 million and the Company shall have received a certificate of the Chief Executive Officer of GPF and of the Chief Executive Officer of W&D certifying as to such fact.

 

10.9          Mortgage Program Sponsor Transfer Agreements Approval .  Each Mortgage Program Sponsor Transfer Agreement shall have been executed by the applicable Mortgage Program Sponsor, other than the HUD Transfer Agreement, which may be executed by HUD after the Closing.

 

10.10        CGL Serviced Loan Portfolio .  The unpaid principal balance per the Post-Signing CGL Servicing Tape shall be greater than $4.63 billion, and the Company shall have received a certificate of the Chief Executive Officer of CGL certifying to such effect.

 

10.11        GPF Serviced Loan Portfolio .  The unpaid principal balance per the Post-Signing GPF Servicing Tape shall be greater than $4.68 billion, and the Company shall have received a certificate of the Chief Executive Officer of GPF and of the Chief Executive Officer of W&D certifying to such effect.

 

10.12        Legal Opinions .  The Company shall have received a written opinion of Morgan, Lewis & Bockius LLP, counsel to GPF, and from Ballard Spahr Andrews & Ingersoll, LLP, counsel to CGL, in each case, in form and substance reasonably acceptable to the Company and its counsel.

 

51


 

 

10.13       GPF Contribution .  The GPF Parties shall have received or pre-funded the GPF Actual Losses Contribution and the GPF Parties shall have provided evidence of such contribution or pre-funding, as applicable, to the Company.

 

10.14       Commission Agreements .  CGL shall have delivered counterpart signature pages executed by CGL’s loan production personnel to commission agreements between the Company and such personnel, such agreements to be on terms reasonably satisfactory to the Company.

 

10.15       Retention Agreement .  CGL shall have delivered counterpart signature pages executed by Verne Murray and Jeff Burns to commission and retention agreements between the Company and such personnel, such agreements to be on terms reasonably satisfactory to the Company.

 

10.16       Ownership of CGL .  CFI or its Affiliates shall own 100% of the membership interests of CGL.

 

10.17       Estimated CGL Closing Balance Sheet .  CGL shall have delivered a pro-forma balance sheet in the form of the balance sheet set forth on Schedule 10.17 , which shall be in form and substance acceptable to the Company (the “ CGL Closing Balance Sheet ”).

 

11.           Indemnification .

 

11.1         By CGL .  From and after the Closing Date, CGL shall indemnify and hold harmless the Company and its officers, directors, managers, employees, stockholders, members, partners, agents and Affiliates (other than CGL and its respective officers, directors, employees, stockholders, members, partners and agents) (each, an “ Indemnified GPF Party ”) from and against any liabilities, claims, demands, judgments, losses, costs, damages or expenses whatsoever (including reasonable attorneys’, consultants’ and other professional fees and disbursements) of every kind, nature and description incurred by such Indemnified GPF Party in connection therewith, including consequential, special, punitive damages and lost profits and diminution in value (collectively, “ Damages ”) that such Indemnified GPF Party may sustain, suffer or incur and that result from, arise out of or relate to (a) any breach of any of the representations and warranties of CGL contained in this Agreement or any other Transaction Document or in the Closing Certificates, (b) any breach of the covenants or agreements of CGL contained in this Agreement or any other Transaction Document or the Closing Certificates, (c) a request or requirement by a third-party that the Company repurchase a Serviced Loan originated by CGL, (d) any Excluded CGL Liability, (e) any Liability of CGL involving any Excluded CGL Asset and (f) SMC being a member of the Company.

 

11.2         By the GPF Parties .  From and after the Closing Date, the GPF Parties, jointly and severally, shall indemnify and hold harmless the Company and its officers, directors, managers, employees, stockholders, members, partners, agents, and Affiliates (other than the GPF Parties and their respective officers, directors, employees, stockholders, members, partners and agents) (each, an “ Indemnified CGL Party ”) from and against any Damages that such Indemnified CGL Party may sustain, suffer or incur and that result from, arise out of or relate to (a) any breach of any of the respective representations or warranties of any GPF Party contained in this Agreement or any other Transaction Document or in the Closing Certificates, (b) any breach of the respective covenants or agreements of any GPF Party contained in this Agreement or any other Transaction Document or in the Closing Certificates, (c) a request or requirement by a third-party that the Company repurchase a Serviced Loan originated by a GPF Party, (d) any Excluded GPF Liability, and (e) any Liability of any of the GPF Parties involving any Excluded GPF Asset.

 

52



 

11.3         Procedure for Claims .

 

(a)            Any Person who desires to seek indemnification under any part of this Article 11 (each, an “ Indemnified Party ”) shall give written notice in reasonable detail (a “ Claim Notice ”) to each Party responsible or alleged to be responsible for indemnification hereunder (an “ Indemnitor ”).  Such notice shall briefly explain the nature of the claim and the parties known to be invoked, and shall specify the amount thereof.  If the matter to which a claim relates shall not have been resolved as of the date of the Claim Notice, the Indemnified Party shall estimate the amount of the claim in the Claim Notice, but also specify therein that the claim has not yet been liquidated (an “ Unliquidated Claim ”).  If an Indemnified Party gives a Claim Notice for an Unliquidated Claim, the Indemnified Party shall also give a second Claim Notice (the “ Liquidated Claim Notice ”) within 60 days after the matter giving rise to the claim becomes finally resolved, and the Second Claim Notice shall specify the amount of the claim.  Each Indemnitor to which a Claim Notice is given shall respond to any Indemnified Party that has given a Claim Notice (a “ Claim Response ”) within 30 days (the “ Response Period ”) after the later of (i) the date that the Claim Notice is given or (ii) if a Claim Notice is first given with respect to an Unliquidated Claim, the date on which the Liquidated Claim Notice is given.  Any Claim Response shall specify whether or not the Indemnitor giving the Claim Response disputes the claim described in the Claim Notice.  If any Indemnitor fails to give a Claim Response within the Response Period, such Indemnitor shall be deemed not to dispute the claim described in the related Claim Notice.  If any Indemnitor elects not to dispute a claim described in a Claim Notice, whether by failing to give a timely Claim Response in accordance with the terms hereof or otherwise, then the amount of such claim shall be conclusively deemed to be an obligation of such Indemnitor.

 

(b)            If any Indemnitor shall be obligated to indemnify an Indemnified Party pursuant to this Article 11 , such Indemnitor shall pay to such Indemnified Party the amount to which such Indemnified Party shall be entitled within 15 Business Days after the day on which such Indemnitor became so obligated to the Indemnified Party.  If any Indemnitor fails to pay all or part of any indemnification obligation when due, then such Indemnitor shall also be obligated to pay to the applicable Indemnified Party interest on the unpaid amount for each day during which the obligation remains unpaid at an annual rate equal to the Prime Rate plus 5%.

 

(c)            If, during the Response Period, an Indemnified Party receives a Claim Response from the Indemnitor, then for a period of 45 days (the “ Resolution Period ”) after the Indemnified Party’s receipt of such Claim Response, the Indemnified Party and the Indemnitor shall endeavor to resolve any dispute arising therefrom.  In the event that the parties fail to reach a resolution during the Resolution Period, either party shall be entitled to file an action with a court of competent jurisdiction.  If such dispute is resolved by the parties during the Resolution Period, the amount that the parties have specified as the amount to be paid by the Indemnitor, if any, as settlement for such dispute shall be conclusively deemed to be an obligation of such Indemnitor.

 

(d)            Notwithstanding any other provision of this Article 11 , except as provided below in this subsection (d), the Indemnified GPF Parties, on the one hand, and the Indemnified CGL Parties, on the other hand, shall be entitled to indemnification hereunder with respect to the breach of a representation or warranty by CGL, on the one hand, or by any of the GPF Parties, on the other, only when the aggregate of all Damages to such indemnified Parties from all such breach of representations or warranties exceeds $150,000 (the “ Deductible Amount ”) and then only to the extent of such excess amount.  The foregoing limitation with respect to the Deductible Amount shall not apply, however, to (a) any breach of the representations or warranties under Sections 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, or 4.18 , or the first sentence of Section 4.6 , in the case of indemnification sought by an Indemnified CGL Party, or Sections 5.1, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4(a), or 5.17 , or the first sentence of Section 5.6 , in the case of indemnification sought by an Indemnified GPF Party, and, in each case, in the related provisions of the Closing Certificates, and (b) a breach of any representations or warranties of a Party to this Agreement that were made with an intent to mislead or defraud or with a reckless disregard of the accuracy thereof (collectively, the “ Excepted

 

53



 

Warranties ”).  In addition, in the case of the claim for Damages that may be made based on a breach of a representation or warranty as well as on any other item described in clauses (b) through (f) of Section 11.1 or in clauses (b) through (e) of Section 11.2, such limitations regarding the Deductible Amount, and the Indemnification Cap shall not apply to the extent that such claim is not based solely on an asserted breach of a representation or warranty. Other than in the case of the Excepted Warranties, the maximum limitation for claims arising out of or related to any matters set forth in clause (a) of the first sentence of Sections 11.1 and 11.2 shall be $10.0 million (the “ Indemnification Cap ”).  In addition, the calculation of the Deductible Amount and the Sub-Deductible Amount shall include any Damages incurred by an Indemnified Party for which the Indemnified Party would have been entitled to claim indemnification under this Article 11 with respect to a breach of a representation or warranty but for such claim being excluded as a result of the qualification of such representation or warranty by materiality or Material Adverse Effect.  If the Damages for breaches of a Party’s representations or warranties incurred by the Indemnified GPF Parties, on the one hand, or the Indemnified CGL Parties, on the other hand, exceed the Deductible Amount, then such Indemnified GPF Parties, on the one hand, or the Indemnified CGL Parties, on the other hand, may only make claims based upon breaches of representations or warranties that, in each individual case, exceed $10,000 (the “ Sub-Deductible Amount ”); provided that the foregoing limitation shall not apply to Excepted Warranties.  No claim may be made by an Indemnified Party for Damages arising with respect to breaches of Sections 4.9(c), (f) or (h) , or by an Indemnified GPF Party for Damages arising with respect to breaches of Sections 5.9(c), (f) or (h) , unless such Damages are related to claims or actions by a third-party.

 

11.4         Claims Period .  The representations and warranties of the Parties shall survive the Closing.  Any claim for indemnification under this Article 11 shall be made by giving a Claim Notice under Section 11.3 on or before the applicable date (each, an “ Expiration Date ”) specified below in this Section 11.4 , or the claim under this Article 11 shall be invalid.  The following claims shall have the following respective Expiration Dates:

 

(a)            the 18-month anniversary of the Closing Date for any claims that are not specified in any of the succeeding subsections;

 

(b)            the later of the third anniversary of the Closing Date or the date on which the applicable statute of limitations expires for any Damages that result from, arise out of, or relate to (i) any breach of any covenant or agreement contained herein, or (ii) any breach of the Excepted Warranties;

 

(c)            the tenth anniversary of the Closing Date that result from, arise out of, or relate to any of the items in clause (c) of the first sentence of Sections 11.1 or 11.2 ; and

 

(d)            in perpetuity for any Damages that result from, arise out of, or relate to any of the items in clauses (d) and (e) of the first sentence of Sections 11.1 or 11.2 .

 

If more than one of such Expiration Dates applies to a particular claim, the latest of such Expiration Dates shall be the controlling Expiration Date for such claim.  So long as an Indemnified Party gives a Claim Notice for an Unliquidated Claim on or before the applicable Expiration Date, such Indemnified Party shall be entitled to pursue its rights to indemnification regardless of the date on which such Indemnified Party gives the related Liquidated Claim Notice.

 

11.5         Third Party Claims .  An Indemnified Party that desires to seek indemnification under any part of this Article 11 with respect to any actions, suits or other administrative or judicial proceedings (each, an “ Action ”) that may be instituted by a third party shall give each Indemnitor prompt notice of a third party’s institution of such Action.  After such notice, any Indemnitor may, or if so requested by such Indemnified Party, any Indemnitor shall, participate in such Action or assume the defense thereof, with

 

54



 

counsel satisfactory to such Indemnified Party; provided , however , that such Indemnified Party shall have the right to participate at its own expense in the defense of such Action; provided, further, that the Indemnified Party shall not consent to the entry of any judgment or enter into any settlement, except with the written consent of the Indemnitor (which consent shall not be unreasonably withheld).  Any failure to give prompt notice under this Section 11.5 shall not bar an Indemnified Party’s right to claim indemnification under this Article 11 , except to the extent that an Indemnitor shall have been harmed by such failure.

 

11.6         Effect of Investigation or Knowledge .  Any claim by a Party for indemnification shall not be adversely affected by any investigation by or opportunity to investigate afforded to such Party, nor shall such a claim be adversely affected by such Party’s knowledge on or before the Closing Date of any breach of the type specified in the first sentence of Sections 11.1 or 11.2 or of any state of facts that may give rise to such a breach; any such claim shall survive the Closing until the applicable Expiration Date.  The waiver of any condition based on the accuracy of any representation or warranty, or on the performance of or compliance with any covenant or obligation, will not adversely affect the right to indemnification, payment of Damages or other remedy based on such representations, warranties, covenants or obligations.

 

11.7         Contingent Claims .  Nothing herein shall be deemed to prevent an Indemnified Party from making a claim hereunder for potential or contingent claims or demands (a “ Contingent Claim ”); provided that the Claim Notice sets forth the specific basis for any such Contingent Claim to the extent then feasible and the Indemnified Party has reasonable grounds to believe in good faith that such a claim may be made.

 

11.8         Company Units in Satisfaction of Indemnification Claims .  If any Indemnitor agrees that it is obligated to indemnify an Indemnified Party pursuant to this Article 11 , is deemed to be obligated to indemnify an Indemnified Party pursuant to Section 11(a) , or is found by a court of competent jurisdiction to be obligated to indemnify an Indemnified Party pursuant to this Article 11 , and such Indemnitor shall have failed to pay all or any portion of such indemnification obligation within 60 days of the date on which such Indemnitor became so obligated to the Indemnified Party, then the Indemnified Party may elect to have all or any portion of such unpaid claim satisfied by:

 

(i)                    with respect to claims for which the Company is the Indemnified Party, the cancellation of Company Units of which the applicable Indemnitor is the record owner.

 

(ii)                   with respect to claims for which the Indemnified Party is a Person other than the Company, the transfer of Company Units of which the applicable Indemnitor is the record owner.

 

The number of Company Units that shall be so cancelled or transferred, as applicable, in satisfaction of such claims shall be equal to (x) the amount of such claim for which the Indemnitor has elected to receive or have cancelled, as applicable, Company Units of the Indemnitor, divided by (y) $153,714; provided that , to the extent Company Units of GPF are cancelled or transferred pursuant to this Section 11.8 , the number of Company Units so cancelled or transferred shall not result in GPF owning less than 1 Company Unit.  Each Party hereby authorizes the Company to effect cancellations and transfers, as applicable, of Company Units of which such Party is the record owner in accordance with this Section 11.8 and to amend Exhibit A of the Company’s Operation Agreement to reflect such cancellations or transfers.

 

11.9         Exclusive Remedy .  Except as set forth in Section 13.9 or as otherwise specifically set forth in this Agreement, the indemnification rights under this Article 11 are the exclusive rights and

 

55



 

remedies the Parties may have at law or otherwise for any misrepresentation, breach of warranty or failure to fulfill any agreement or covenant hereunder on the part of any Party.

 

12.           Termination .

 

12.1         Grounds for Termination .  The Parties may terminate this Agreement at any time before the Closing as provided below:

 

(a)            by mutual written consent of each of CGL and GPF;

 

(b)            by any Party, if the Closing shall not have been consummated on or before the Termination Date; provided , however , that the right to terminate this Agreement under this subsection (b) shall not be available to any Party whose failure to fulfill any obligation under this Agreement has been the cause of, or resulted in, the failure of the Closing to occur on or before the Termination Date;

 

(c)            by any Party, if a Governmental Body shall have issued a Court Order (which Court Order the parties shall use commercially reasonable efforts to lift) that permanently restrains, enjoins or otherwise prohibits the Transactions, and such Court Order shall have become final and nonappealable;

 

(d)            by GPF, if CGL shall have breached, or failed to comply with, any of its obligations under this Agreement or any representation or warranty made by CGL shall have been incorrect when made, and such breach, failure or misrepresentation is not cured within 20 days after notice thereof, and in either case, any such breaches, failures or misrepresentations, individually or in the aggregate, results or would reasonably be expected to result in a Material Adverse Effect on CGL or its Business; or

 

(e)            by CGL, if any GPF Party or the Company shall have breached, or failed to comply with any of its obligations under this Agreement or any representation or warranty made by it shall have been incorrect when made, and such breach, failure or misrepresentation is not cured within 20 days after notice thereof, and in either case, any such breaches, failures or misrepresentations, individually or in the aggregate, results or would reasonably be expected to result in a Material Adverse Effect on any GPF Party or its Business.

 

12.2         Effect of Termination .  If this Agreement is terminated pursuant to Section 12.1 , the agreements contained in Sections 7.10, 7.11, 15 and 16   shall survive the termination hereof and any Party may pursue any legal or equitable remedies that may be available if such termination is based on a breach of another Party.

 

13.           General Matters .

 

13.1         Contents of Agreement .  This Agreement, together the other Transaction Documents, sets forth the entire understanding of the Parties with respect to the Transactions and supersedes all prior agreements or understandings among the parties regarding those matters.

 

13.2         Amendment, Parties in Interest, Assignment, Etc .  This Agreement may be amended, modified or supplemented only by a written instrument duly executed by each of the Parties. This Agreement shall be binding upon and inure to the benefit of and be enforceable by the respective heirs, legal representatives, successors and permitted assigns of the Parties.  Nothing in this Agreement shall confer any rights upon any Person other than the Parties and their respective heirs, legal representatives, successors and permitted assigns, except as provided in Article 11 .  No Party shall assign this Agreement

 

56



 

or any right, benefit or obligation hereunder.  Any term or provision of this Agreement may be waived at any time by the Party entitled to the benefit thereof by a written instrument duly executed by such Party.  Neither the failure nor the delay by any Party in exercising any right, power or privilege hereunder shall operate as a waiver of such right, power or privilege, and no single or partial exercise of any such right, power or privilege shall preclude any other or further exercise of any such right, power or privilege or the exercise of any other right, power or privilege.  To the maximum extent permitted by applicable Law, (a) no waiver that may be given by a Party shall be applicable except in the specific instance for which it was given, and (b) no notice to or demand on one Party shall be deemed to be a waiver of any obligation of such Party or the right of the Party giving such notice or demand to take further action without notice or demand as provided in this Agreement or the other Transaction Documents.

 

13.3         Further Assurances .  At and after the Closing, the Parties shall execute and deliver any and all documents and take any and all other actions that may be deemed reasonably necessary by their respective counsel to complete the Transactions.

 

13.4         Interpretation .  Unless the context of this Agreement clearly requires otherwise, (a) references to the plural include the singular, the singular the plural, the part the whole, (b) references to any gender include all genders, (c) “including” has the inclusive meaning frequently identified with the phrase “but not limited to,” and (d) references to “hereunder” or “herein” relate to this Agreement.  Any determination as to whether a situation is material shall be made by taking into account the effect of all other provisions of this Agreement that contain a qualification with respect to materiality so that the determination is made after assessing the aggregate effect of all such situations.  The section and other headings contained in this Agreement are for reference purposes only and shall not control or affect the construction of this Agreement or the interpretation thereof in any respect.  Section, subsection, Schedule and Exhibit references are to this Agreement unless otherwise specified.  Each accounting term used herein that is not specifically defined herein shall have the meaning given to it under GAAP.  Any reference to a Party’s being satisfied with any particular item or to a Party’s determination of a particular item presumes that such standard will not be achieved unless such Party shall be satisfied or shall have made such determination in its sole or complete discretion.

 

13.5         Counterparts .  This Agreement may be executed in two or more counterparts, each of which shall be binding as of the date first written above, and, when delivered, all of which shall constitute one and the same instrument.  This Agreement and any documents delivered pursuant hereto, and any amendments hereto or thereto, to the extent signed and delivered by means of a facsimile machine or as an attachment to an electronic mail message in “pdf” or similar format, shall be treated in all manner and respects as an original agreement or instrument and shall be considered to have the same binding legal effect as if it were the original signed version thereof delivered in person.  At the request of any party hereto or to any such agreement or instrument, each other Party shall re-execute original forms thereof and deliver them to all other Parties.  No Party to any such agreement or instrument shall raise the use of a facsimile machine or electronic mail attachment in “pdf” or similar format to deliver a signature or the fact that any signature or agreement or instrument was transmitted or communicated through the use of a facsimile machine or as an attachment to an electronic mail message as a defense to the formation of a contract and each such party forever waives any such defense.  A facsimile signature or electronically scanned copy of a signature shall constitute and shall be deemed to be sufficient evidence of a Party’s execution of this Agreement, without necessity of further proof.  Each such copy shall be deemed an original, and it shall not be necessary in making proof of this Agreement to produce or account for more than one such counterpart.

 

13.6         Disclosure Letters .  Any items listed or described on a Party’s Disclosure Letter shall be listed or described under a caption that specifically identifies the Section(s) of this Agreement to which the item relates (which, in each case, shall constitute the only valid disclosure with respect to such

 

57



 

Section(s)); provided , that if it is readily apparent from a reading of a disclosure that it is applicable to another Section(s), it shall be deemed to qualify such Section(s).

 

13.7         Negotiated Agreement .  The Parties hereby acknowledge that the terms and language of this Agreement were the result of negotiations among the Parties and, as a result, there shall be no presumption that any ambiguities in this Agreement shall be resolved against any particular Party.  Any controversy over construction of this Agreement shall be decided without regard to events of authorship or negotiation.

 

13.8         Severability .  If any term or other provision of this Agreement is held by a court of competent jurisdiction to be invalid, illegal or incapable of being enforced under any applicable Law in any particular respect or under any particular circumstances, then, so long as the economic or legal substance of the Transactions is not affected in any manner materially adverse to any Party, (a) such term or provision shall nevertheless remain in full force and effect in all other respects and under all other circumstances, and (b) all other terms, conditions and provisions of this Agreement shall remain in full force and effect.  Upon such determination that any term or other provision is invalid, illegal or incapable of being enforced, the Parties shall negotiate in good faith to modify this Agreement so as to effect the original intent of the Parties as closely as possible in an acceptable manner so that the Transactions are fulfilled to the fullest extent possible.

 

13.9         Specific Performance .  Each of the Parties hereby acknowledges that the other Parties may be damaged irreparably in the event any provision of this Agreement or any other Transaction Document is not performed in accordance with its specific terms or is otherwise breached.  Accordingly, notwithstanding anything contained in this Agreement to the contrary, each of the Parties hereby acknowledges that the other Parties may be entitled to seek an injunction or injunctions to prevent breaches of the provisions of this Agreement and any other Transaction Document and to seek to enforce specifically this Agreement and any other Transaction Document and the terms and provisions thereof in any action instituted in any court in the United States or in any state having jurisdiction over the parties and the matter in addition to any other equitable remedy to which a Party may be entitled pursuant hereto, including specific performance, rescission or restitution.

 

14.           Notices .

 

All notices that are required or permitted hereunder shall be in writing and shall be sufficient if personally delivered or sent by registered or certified mail, facsimile message or Federal Express or other nationally recognized overnight delivery service.  Any notices shall be deemed given upon the earlier of the date when received at, or the third day after the date when sent by registered or certified mail or the day after the date when sent by Federal Express or facsimile to, the address or facsimile number set forth below, unless such address or facsimile number is changed by notice to the other Parties:

 

If to CGL:

 

 

 

 

 

Column Financial, Inc.

 

 

11 Madison Avenue

 

 

New York, NY 10010-3624

 

 

Attn:

Anand N. Gajjar

 

 

FAX:

212.538.2200

 

 

 

58



 

with a required copy to:

 

 

 

 

 

Credit Suisse

 

 

1 Madison Avenue

 

 

New York, NY 10010

 

 

Attn:

Legal and Compliance Division

 

 

Fax:

212.325.8282

 

 

 

 

 

Ballard Spahr Andrews & Ingersoll, LLP

 

 

601 13 th  Street, NW

 

 

Suite 1000 South

 

 

Washington, DC 20005-3807

 

 

Attn:

Allan R. Winn, Esquire

 

 

FAX:

202.626.9031

 

 

 

 

 

If to any GPF Party or the Company:

 

 

 

 

 

Green Park Financial Limited Partnership

 

 

7501 Wisconsin Avenue, Suite 1200

 

 

Bethesda, MD 20814-6531

 

 

Attn:

Chief Financial Officer

 

 

FAX:

301.634.2151

 

 

 

 

 

with a required copy to:

 

 

 

 

 

Morgan, Lewis & Bockius LLP

 

 

1701 Market Street

 

 

Philadelphia, PA 19103

 

 

Attn:

Michael N. Peterson, Esquire

 

 

FAX:

877.432.9652

 

 

 

15.           Governing Law .

 

This Agreement shall be construed and interpreted in accordance with the internal laws of the State of Delaware without regard to any choice of law or conflict of law, choice of forum or provision, rule or principle that might otherwise refer construction or interpretation of this Agreement to the substantive law of another jurisdiction.  The Parties hereby irrevocably (a) submit themselves to the non-exclusive jurisdiction of the state and federal courts sitting in the State of Delaware, and (b) waive the right and hereby agree not to assert by way of motion, as a defense or otherwise in any action, suit or other legal proceeding brought in any such court, any claim that it, he or she is not subject to the jurisdiction of such court, that such action, suit or proceeding is brought in an inconvenient forum or that the venue of such action, suit or proceeding is improper.  EACH PARTY HEREBY IRREVOCABLY WAIVES ALL RIGHT TO TRIAL BY JURY IN ANY ACTION, PROCEEDING OR COUNTERCLAIM (WHETHER BASED ON CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE) ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO THIS AGREEMENT OR THE ACTIONS OF SUCH PARTY IN THE NEGOTIATION, ADMINISTRATION, PERFORMANCE AND ENFORCEMENT HEREOF.

 

16.           Break-up Fee .  CFI shall reimburse the GPF Parties’ actual costs and expenses incurred after December 1, 2008 as a break-up fee in the event the Closing does not occur on or before January 30, 2009, provided that, the breach or failure of the GPF Parties to comply with their obligations under this Agreement is not the sole cause for the failure of such closing to occur.  CFI shall reimburse the GPF

 

59



 

Parties for such costs and expenses within five business days of receiving documentation thereof from the GPF Parties.

 

{Signature Pages to Follow}

 

60



 

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this Agreement has been executed by the parties hereto as of the day and year first written above.

 

 

 

GREEN PARK FINANCIAL LIMITED PARTNERSHIP

 

 

 

By:

Walker & Dunlop GP, LLC, its Managing

 

 

General Partner

 

 

 

 

By:

/s/ William M. Walker

 

Name:

William M. Walker

 

Title:

Managing Member

 

 

 

 

 

 

WALKER & DUNLOP, INC.

 

 

 

 

 

By:

/s/ William M. Walker

 

Name:

William M. Walker

 

Title:

President and Chief Executive Officer

 

 

 

 

 

 

COLUMN GUARANTEED LLC

 

 

 

 

 

By:

/s/ Anand N. Gajjar

 

Name:

Anand N. Gajjar

 

Title:

Authorized Person

 

 

 

 

 

 

WALKER & DUNLOP, LLC

 

 

 

 

 

By:

/s/ William M. Walker

 

Name:

William M. Walker

 

Title:

President and Chief Executive Officer

 

{Signature Page to Formation Agreement}

 


 

 



Exhibit 10.7

 

Walker, W.

2008

 

INCENTIVE DEFERRED BONUS COMPENSATION AGREEMENT

 

THIS AGREEMENT (“Agreement”), made as of the 16 th  day of June, 2008, by and between Walker & Dunlop GP, LLC (“Employer”) and William M. Walker (“Employee”).

 

WITNESSETH THAT:

 

WHEREAS, Employer has a substantial investment and ownership interest in Green Park Financial Limited Partnership (“Green Park”) which acts as an approved Fannie Mae multifamily lender under the DUS program; and

 

WHEREAS, Employee is serving as Employer’s President and CEO and, in that capacity has senior management responsibility for Green Park’s operations and an important role in Green Park’s success; and

 

WHEREAS, in order to maximize the returns it derives from its substantial investment and ownership in Green Park, Employer desires to provide Employee with an incentive to contribute to the growth of the business and profitability of Green Park and, to that end, the parties desire to enter into this Agreement.

 

NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the foregoing and of the mutual promises hereinafter set forth and of other good and valuable consideration, the sufficiency and receipt of which prior to the execution of these presents is hereby acknowledged, the parties hereto, intending to be legally bound, do hereby agree as follows:

 

1



 

ARTICLE I

 

Definitions

 

Section 1.1 Definitions.

 

When used in this Agreement, the following terms will have the meanings set forth below:

 

(A)          “Base Fiscal Year” means the Fiscal Year to which a Deferred Bonus relates (e.g., Fiscal Year 2008 shall be the Base Fiscal Year for any Deferred Bonus potentially payable to Employee for Fiscal Year 2008).

 

(B)            “Beneficiary” means one or more individuals designated by Employee to receive benefits payable hereunder upon Employee’s death (whether voluntary or involuntary). Employee shall designate his Beneficiary in writing on a form provided by Employer. Employee may change his designated Beneficiary by filing a new form with Employer (at least ten (10) business days prior to the effective date of such change). If no Beneficiary designated by Employee survives Employee, or if Employee fails to designate a Beneficiary, any payments due hereunder upon Employee’s death shall be paid to Employee’s executor or other legal representative.

 

(C)          “Change in Control” shall mean the occurrence of any one or more of the following without Employee’s prior consent (which consent can be conditioned or withheld, with or without cause, in Employee’s sole discretion): (i) the sale or other disposition of all, or substantially all, of the assets of Green Park or Employer; or (ii) the sale or other transfer within any period of twelve (12) consecutive calendar months (either in one transaction or in a series of transactions within such twelve (12) month period) of partnership interests (or stock or other forms of ownership interests, as the case may be) representing

 

2



 

more than fifty percent (50%) of all partnership interests (or all stock or all other forms of ownership interests) in either Green Park or Employer; but not if stock is transferred to a family trust or other entity designed principally to facilitate estate planning.

 

(D)          “Deferred Bonus” means the amount of the deferred bonus potentially payable to Employee on account of a particular Base Fiscal Year in accordance with the provisions hereof.

 

(E)           (i)            “Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period” means, with respect to each Deferred Bonus for each Base Fiscal Year, the period beginning on the first day of the Base Fiscal Year and terminating on various dates as determined in accordance with the following provisions:

 

(a)           If Employee remains continuously in Employer’s employ for a period of three (3) years commencing with the first day of a Base Fiscal Year, or if Employee’s employment with Employer terminates as a result of Employee’s Intentional Death or Disability occurring within a three (3) year period commencing on the first day of a Base Fiscal Year, the last day of the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period applicable to that Base Fiscal Year shall be the last day of the three (3) year period commencing with the first day of the Base Fiscal Year;

 

(b)          If Employee’s employment with Employer terminates as a result of Employee’s Unintentional Death or Disability occurring within a three (3) year period commencing on the first day of a Base Fiscal Year, the last day of the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period applicable to that Base Fiscal Year shall be the date on which Employee’s Unintentional Death or Disability occurs;

 

(c)          If Employee’s employment with Employer terminates as a result of a Termination Without Cause occurring within a three (3) year period commencing on the first day of a Base Fiscal Year, the last day of the Deferred Bonus Earn-

 

3



 

Out Period applicable to that Base Fiscal Year shall be the date on which the Termination Without Cause occurs;

 

(d)          If Employee’s employment with Employer terminates as a result of a Change in Control occurring within a three (3) year period commencing on the first day of a Base Fiscal Year, the last day of the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period applicable to that Base Fiscal Year shall be the date on which the Change in Control occurs; and

 

(e)          If a Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period terminates upon the occurrence of an event (such as, by way of example, a Termination Without Cause of Employee’s employment), that termination (and all consequences associated therewith under the provisions hereof) shall not be affected by the subsequent occurrence of another event (such as, by way of example, a Change in Control) which, but for the prior occurrence of the first event, also would have resulted in a termination of that Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period.

 

(ii)             As hereinafter appears, Employee shall not be entitled to receive a Deferred Bonus, and there shall be no Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period, for any particular Base Fiscal Year if Employee’s employment with Employer terminates as a result of either a Voluntary Resignation or a Termination With Cause which occurs within a three (3) year period commencing on the first day of that Base Fiscal Year.

 

(F)             “Disability” means disability as a result of an accident, illness or mental disorder which results in Employee’s unwillingness or inability, for a period of ninety (90) days (in the aggregate) during any period of twelve (12) consecutive months, substantially to perform the duties assigned to Employee by Employer immediately prior to the commencement of the Disability. For all purposes hereof:

 

4



 

(i)            Employee’s Disability shall be deemed to have occurred as of the last day of the foregoing period of ninety (90) days;

 

(ii)           If Employer and Employee disagree as to whether a Disability has occurred or as to when a period of Disability has begun or ended, and if the disagreement cannot be resolved within fifteen (15) business days after it has first arisen, Employer and Employee shall each, within fifteen (15) business days after the expiration of the first period of fifteen (15) business days, appoint a qualified physician or other medical professional (hereinafter in this Section 1.1(F)(ii) collectively a “Doctor”) (and if either Employer or Employee fails timely to make such an appointment, the Doctor appointed by or for the other party shall resolve all disagreements regarding Disability). The two Doctors (or, if applicable, the one Doctor) shall, as promptly as possible, make a written determination as to all disagreements with respect to the Employee’s Disability; provided, however, that if two Doctors are timely appointed and cannot agree on all matters respecting Employee’s Disability within a period of thirty (30) days after the second of them has been timely appointed, the two of them shall, as promptly as possible thereafter, appoint a third Doctor and all disagreements as to Employee’s Disability shall be determined in writing by a majority of the three Doctors. All good faith decisions made by one or more Doctors regarding Employee’s Disability shall be conclusive and binding on Employer and Employee. If such decisions are made by a single Doctor, all fees and expenses of such Doctor shall be borne equally by Employer and Employee. Otherwise, Employer and Employee shall each pay the fees and expenses of any Doctor appointed by or for it or him and shall, if applicable, bear equally the fees and expenses of any third Doctor.

 

(G)          “Employee” means Donna Mighty and, where appropriate, shall also be deemed to mean his executor, guardian or other legal representative.

 

5



 

(H)            “Employer” means Walker & Dunlop GP, LLC and any successor to, or assignee of, Walker & Dunlop GP, LLC to which Employee has consented, in Employee’s sole discretion.

 

(I)            “Fiscal Year” means a fiscal year of Green Park (presently a calendar

 

year).

 

(J)            “Intentional Death or Disability” means the death or Disability of Employee which results from an injury or illness that is intentionally self-inflicted by Employee or intentionally inflicted upon Employee by a third Person acting, or failing to act, under the control, or at the direction, of Employee.

 

(K)          “Person” means, as the context requires, an individual, partnership, corporation, trust, unincorporated association, joint stock company, or other legal entity or association.

 

(L)           “Schedules” means, collectively, the Schedules attached, or to be attached, hereto.

 

(M)         “Termination With Cause” means the termination by Employer of Employee’s employment with Employer on account of (i) his conviction for the commission of a felony in the course of his employment with Employer, or (ii) his gross, willful and intentional misconduct in connection with his employment with Employer which causes a material decrease in the net profits of Green Park for the Fiscal Year within which such misconduct occurs.

 

(N)          “Termination Without Cause” means the termination by Employer of Employee’s employment with Employer without Employee’s consent for any reason which does not constitute Termination With Cause.

 

6



 

(0)           “Unintentional Death or Disability” means the death or disability of Employee which results from any reason which does not constitute Employee’s Intentional Death or Disability.

 

(P)           “Voluntary Resignation” means the voluntary decision or election by Employee to terminate his employment with Employer for any reason whatsoever other than a material breach by Employer of this Agreement which is not cured within any applicable grace period specified herein.

 

Section 1.2 Certain Other Definitions.

 

When used herein with its initial letter(s) capitalized, a term which is not defined in Section 1.1 shall be given the definition assigned to it elsewhere in this Agreement.

 

Section 1.3 Schedules and Exhibits.

 

Attached hereto and forming an integral part of this Agreement are various Schedules and Exhibits, all of which are incorporated into this Agreement as fully as if the contents thereof were set out in full herein at each point of reference thereto. The provisions of the immediately preceding sentence shall also apply to any Schedules, Exhibits or other attachments which, pursuant to the provisions hereof, are to be prepared and attached hereto in the future. Notwithstanding any other provision hereof, if there is any conflict or inconsistency between the provisions contained in this Agreement and the provisions contained in any Schedule or Exhibit attached hereto (either now or in the future), the provisions of the Schedule or Exhibit shall govern and prevail.

 

7



 

ARTICLE II

 

Determination Of Deferred Bonus

 

Section 2.1 In General.

 

(A)          (i)            As a general matter (unless otherwise agreed by Employer and Employee), Employee’s Deferred Bonus for each Base Fiscal Year commencing after the date hereof shall depend on two factors, namely, the achievement of a base financial target (the “Base Financial Target”) during each such Base Fiscal Year and the achievement of an annualized financial target (the “Annualized Financial Target”) during the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period applicable to such Base Fiscal Year. Commencing sixty (60) days prior to the commencement of each Base Fiscal Year commencing after the date hereof, Employer and Employee shall negotiate in good faith regarding the Base Financial Target for such Base Fiscal Year as well as the Annualized Financial Target for the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period (the foregoing Base Financial Target and Annualized Financial Target being hereinafter collectively referred to as “Targets”). If Employer and Employee agree upon the Targets for a Base Fiscal Year commencing after the date hereof, the Targets for that Base Fiscal Year shall be incorporated in a Schedule which shall be attached hereto and shall become a part hereof. If, despite good faith negotiations, Employer and Employee are unable to agree on the Targets for a Base Fiscal Year commencing after the date hereof prior to the first day of such Base Fiscal Year, the last set of Targets agreed upon (as set out in the last Schedule attached hereto) shall be deemed to be the Targets for that Base Fiscal Year; provided, however, that the foregoing provisions of this sentence shall not be deemed or construed to preclude Employer and Employee from continuing to negotiate (or to agree) regarding the Targets for a particular Base Fiscal Year after the commencement of such Base Fiscal Year if the parties agree to such continued negotiations (or agreement).

 

8



 

(ii)           Notwithstanding the provisions of Section 2.1(A)(i):

 

(a)           If Employee’s employment with Employer terminates (for any reason other than a Voluntary Resignation or a Termination With Cause) during (and not after) a particular Base Fiscal Year, the Base Fiscal Target for that Base Fiscal Year shall be pro-rated by multiplying such Target by a fraction, the numerator of which shall be the number of months (rounded to the nearest whole number) Employee was employed by Employer during such Base Fiscal Year and the denominator of which shall be twelve (12). The pro-rated Base Fiscal Target shall then be compared with Employer’s actual financial performance (or with the other relevant actual financial data) during the portion of the Base Fiscal Year that Employee was employed by Employer in determining whether the pro-rated Base Financial Target was met during such portion of such Base Fiscal Year. In such event, if the pro-rated amount of the Base Financial Target does not exceed Employer’s actual financial performance (or the other relevant actual financial data) during the period of Employee’s employment during the Base Fiscal Year, Employee shall not be entitled to a Deferred Bonus for such Base Fiscal Year. If the pro-rated amount of the Base Financial Target does exceed Employer’s actual financial performance (or the other relevant actual financial data) during such period, Employee’s Deferred Bonus shall (subject to all vesting and other applicable provisions hereof) be based on the amount of such excess and shall not be adjusted as a result of Employer’s actual financial performance (or the other relevant actual financial data) during the remainder of such Base Fiscal Year. In the circumstances described in the first sentence of this Section 2.1(A)(ii), the period within which Employer shall determine whether the Base Financial Target has been met (as provided in Section 2.1(B) hereof) shall commence as of the date of the termination of Employee’s employment and the other provisions of this Agreement shall otherwise continue to apply. Without in any way limiting the generality of the foregoing, the termination of Employee’s employment as a

 

9



 

result of Intentional Death or Disability during the Base Fiscal Year shall not accelerate or otherwise modify the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period applicable to such Base Fiscal Year. Where necessary or appropriate, references in this Agreement to the Base Financial Target shall be deemed to be references to the pro-rated Base Financial Target provided for in this Section 2.1(A)(ii)(a); and

 

(b)           If the last day of a Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period occurs during, rather than after, the Base Fiscal Year (if, for example, Employee is the subject of a Termination Without Cause during the Base Fiscal Year), any Annualized Financial Target for the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period for such Base Fiscal Year will be pro-rated by multiplying such Target by a fraction, the numerator of which shall be the number of months (rounded to the nearest whole number) Employee was employed by Employer during such Base Fiscal Year and the denominator of which shall be twelve (12). The pro-rated Annualized Fiscal Target shall then be compared with Employer’s actual financial performance (or with the other relevant actual financial data) during the portion of the Base Fiscal Year that Employee was employed by Employer in determining whether the pro-rated Annualized Financial Target was met. Where necessary or appropriate, references in this Agreement to the Annualized Financial Target shall be deemed to be references to the pro-rated Annualized Financial Target provided for in this Section 2.1(A)(ii)(b).

 

(B)            As soon as may be practicable, and in any event within sixty (60) days, after the expiration of each Base Fiscal Year, Employer shall determine whether the Base Financial Target was met during such Base Fiscal Year and, if so, the amount of the Deferred Bonus that Employee may receive with respect to such Base Fiscal Year (provided that any applicable Annualized Financial Target, as well as all other applicable vesting requirements, are met during the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period applicable to such Base Fiscal Year). Employer shall promptly advise Employee as to whether the Base Financial Target has been

 

10



 

met during the Base Fiscal Year in question and, if so, the amount of the Deferred Bonus for that Base Fiscal Year as computed by Employer. Employee shall be entitled to review all financial and other records relevant to Employer’s determinations with respect to the achievement of the Base Financial Target, the amount of Employee’s Deferred Bonus, if any, and all related computations. Employer shall give careful and good faith consideration to any bona fide questions raised by Employee regarding Employer’s foregoing determinations and shall make any adjustments therein as Employer deems necessary or appropriate in the light of such questions. Employer’s good faith determination as to the amount of Employee’s Deferred Bonus (either as originally computed or as adjusted) shall, however, be binding and conclusive on Employer and Employee unless the amount in question or controversy as to the size of the Deferred Bonus exceeds $25,000 (in which event such question or controversy shall be referred to, and determined by, arbitration in accordance with Section 4.3 hereof). Once the final amount of Employee’s Deferred Bonus for any Base Fiscal Year has been computed, agreed or determined, such amount shall be memorialized in an addendum which shall also be attached hereto and shall be deemed a part hereof and such amount shall not then thereafter change.

 

(C)          Notwithstanding the foregoing provisions of Sections 2.1 (A) and (B), it is acknowledged and agreed that Green Park has agreed to pay, or reimburse, Employer for any Deferred Bonus Employer pays to Employee pursuant to this Agreement and that this Agreement is premised on the assumption that this payment or reimbursement arrangement shall continue as between Green Park and Employer. If Green Park should refuse to pay or reimburse Employer for any Deferred Bonus attributable to a Base Fiscal Year that is to commence after the date of such refusal by Green Park, Employer shall have the right, in its sole discretion, not to pay Employee any Deferred Bonus for that Base Fiscal Year or to agree upon Targets for that Base Fiscal Year. The provisions of the immediately preceding

 

11


 

sentence shall not, however, apply to the current Fiscal Year (Fiscal Year 2008) or to any subsequent Base Fiscal Year that commences prior to the date, if any, on which Green Park refuses to pay or reimburse Employer for Employee’s Deferred Bonus (it being expressly acknowledged and agreed that, as between Employer and Employee, Employer shall assume the risk of any breach by Green Park of any agreement to reimburse or pay Employer for Employee’s Deferred Bonus as well as the risk that Green Park shall refuse to pay or reimburse Employer for Employee’s Deferred Bonus for a particular Base Fiscal Year after the commencement of that Base Fiscal Year). Employer further agrees with Employee that Employer shall not, in its capacity as a partner in Green Park, vote in favor of, or otherwise approve, any action by Green Park to modify, terminate or cancel Green Park’s agreement to pay or reimburse Employer for Employee’s Deferred Bonus for any subsequent Base Fiscal Year.

 

Section 2.2 Fiscal Year 2008.

 

Employer and Employee have agreed upon the Targets for the computation of Employee’s Deferred Bonus for Fiscal Year 2008 (which Targets are set out in Schedule 1-2008 which is attached hereto and hereby made a part hereof).

 

12



 

ARTICLE III

 

Vesting, Payment and Nonvesting of Deferred Bonus

 

Section 3.1 Vesting of Deferred Bonus.

 

Except as otherwise provided in Section 3.3, Employee’s Deferred Bonus for any particular Base Fiscal Year shall become vested (i.e., shall be deemed fully earned, and not subject to lapse), and shall be payable to or for an Employee in accordance with Section 3.2 in accordance with the following provisions:

 

(A)          If the last day of the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period for a Deferred Bonus for a particular Base Fiscal Year is the last day of the three (3) year period commencing with the first day of that Base Fiscal Year (under the circumstances specified in Section 1.1(E)(i)(a)), and if Green Park meets the Annualized Financial Target during that Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period, then the Deferred Bonus for that Base Fiscal Year shall be deemed fully earned and vested as of the date on which the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period terminates;

 

(B)          If the last day of the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period for a Deferred Bonus for a particular Base Fiscal Year is the day on which Employee’s Unintentional Death or Disability occurs (under the circumstances specified in Section 1.1(E)(i)(b)), and if Green Park meets at least Sixty-Five Percent (65%) of the Annualized Financial Target during that Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period, then the Deferred Bonus for that Base Fiscal Year shall be deemed fully earned and vested as of the date on which the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period terminates;

 

(C)          If the last day of the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period for a Deferred Bonus for a particular Base Fiscal Year is the date on which a Termination Without Cause of Employee’s employment occurs (under the circumstances specified in Section 1.1(E)(i)(c)),

 

13



 

and if Green Park meets at least Seventy-Five Percent (75%) of the Annualized Financial Target during such Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period, then the Deferred Bonus for that Base Fiscal Year shall be deemed fully earned and vested as of the date on which the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period terminates; and

 

(D)          If the last day of the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period for a Deferred Bonus for a particular Base Fiscal Year is the date on which a Change in Control occurs (under the circumstances specified in Section 1.1(E)(i)(d)), then, whether or not Green Park meets the Annualized Financial Target, or any portion thereof, during such Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period, the Deferred Bonus for that Base Fiscal Year shall be deemed fully earned and vested as of the date on which the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period terminates.

 

Section 3.2 Payment of Vested Deferred Bonus.

 

(A)          Employer shall pay Employee (or, if applicable, his Beneficiary) the amount of any Deferred Bonus which vests pursuant to the provisions of Section 3.1 in accordance with the following provisions:

 

(i)             If Employee’s rights to a Deferred Bonus for a Base Fiscal Year vest pursuant to Section 3.1(A), Section 3.1(B) or Section 3.1(C), that Deferred Bonus shall, subject to the provisions of Sections 3.2(B) and 3.2(C), be paid to Employee (or, if applicable, his Beneficiary) within sixty (60) days after the last day of the taxable year in which Employee’s rights to that Deferred Bonus vest; and

 

(ii)            If Employee’s rights to a Deferred Bonus for a Base Fiscal Year vest pursuant to Section 3.1(D), that Deferred Bonus shall be paid to Employee within sixty (60) days after the date on which Employee’s rights to that Deferred Bonus vest.

 

(B)           (i)            Notwithstanding the provisions of Section 3.2(A)(i), when the vesting of Employee’s rights to a Deferred Bonus (pursuant to Section 3.1(A), Section 3.1(B) or

 

14



 

Section 3.1(C)) depends upon the meeting by Green Park of all, or a specified percentage, of an Annualized Financial Target, the payment period of sixty (60) days specified in Section 3.2(A)(i) shall be extended if, and to the extent, necessary in order for a determination to be made (in accordance with the provisions of Section 3.2(C)) as to whether all, or the specified percentage, of the Annualized Financial Target has been met; provided that payment shall be made no later than 2-1/2 months after the last day of the taxable year in which Employee’s rights to the Deferred Bonus vest. An extension of the period within which a vested Deferred Bonus shall be paid shall not extend or defer the date as of which such Deferred Bonus shall be deemed to have vested.

 

(ii)             If the last day of a Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period falls on a day that is other than the last day of a fiscal quarter, Employer may, solely for the purpose of determining whether the relevant Annualized Financial Target has, or has not, been met during that Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period, assume that the relevant financial reports or data for Green Park as of the end of the fiscal quarter that is closest in time to the last day of that Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period is the same as the relevant financial reports or data for Green Park as of the actual last day of that Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period. To illustrate: assume that the first day of the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period for the fiscal Year in question is January 1 and that, because of a Change in Control, the last day of that Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period is May 25. For the sake of convenience, Employer may use the relevant financial reports or data for Green Park as of June 30 (the end of the fiscal quarter that is closest in time to the actual last day of the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period in question) as constituting the relevant financial reports or data for Green Park as of May 25 for the purpose of determining whether the Annualized Financial Target for that Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period has been met. Similarly, if the last day of a Deferred Bonus Earn-Out

 

15



 

Period is October 10, Employer may use the relevant financial reports or data for Green Park as of September 30 for computation purposes as aforesaid.

 

(iii)          If the period for the payment of a vested Deferred Bonus is extended pursuant to the preceding provisions of this Section 3.2(B), Employer shall pay interest on the amount of the Deferred Bonus at an annual rate equal to the Prime Rate plus 1% (or, if lower, at the highest percentage rate allowed by law) during the period such Deferred Bonus is due and unpaid; and provided further that if Employer shall fail timely to pay Employee (or his Beneficiary) a vested Deferred Bonus once Employee’s entitlement thereto has been determined, Employee (or his Beneficiary) shall be entitled to receive interest on the amount of such Deferred Bonus at an annual rate equal to the Prime Rate plus 5% (or, if lower, the highest percentage interest rate allowed by law) during the period such Deferred Bonus is due and unpaid. (For all purposes hereof “Prime Rate” means the prime rate of interest published (on the date from which the Prime Rate is to accrue) by The Wall Street Journal as the base rate for corporate loans posted by a number (normally expressed as a percentage) of the largest banks in the United States of America.)

 

(C)          Whenever the payment of a Deferred Bonus is dependent upon the meeting by Green Park of all, or a specified percentage, of an Annualized Financial Target during a Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period, Employer shall, as promptly as may be practicable after the date on which the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period for such Deferred Bonus terminates and Employer has received such financial reports or data relating to Green Park which are needed in order to determine whether all, or the specified percentage of the Annualized Financial Target has been met, make a written determination as to whether all, or the specified percentage, of such Annualized Financial Target has been met and shall provide Employee with a copy of such written determination. Employee shall have the right to review all financial and other records relevant to such determination. Employer shall give careful and

 

16



 

good faith consideration to any bona fide questions raised by Employee regarding Employer’s determination and shall, if necessary or appropriate, adjust Employer’s determination in light of such questions. Employer’s good faith determination (either as initially made or as thereafter adjusted) as to whether Green Park has met all, or the specified percentage, of the Annualized Financial Target shall, however, be binding and conclusive upon Employer and Employee unless the amount of the Deferred Bonus in question or controversy exceeds $25,000 (in which event all questions or controversies as to whether or not the Deferred Bonus in question has vested shall be referred to, and determined by, arbitration pursuant to Section 4.3 hereof).

 

Section 3.3 Nonvesting of Deferred Bonus.

 

If (A) Employee’s employment with Employer terminates as a result of a Termination With Cause or a Voluntary Resignation at any time during the three (3) year period commencing with the first day of a Base Fiscal Year, or if (B) the Base Financial Target is not met during the Base Fiscal Year, or if (C) vesting of a particular Deferred Bonus is dependent upon the meeting by Green Park of all, or a specified percentage, of an Annualized Financial Target during the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period applicable to such Deferred Bonus and Green Park fails to meet such Annualized Financial Target (or the specified percentage thereof), then, in each of such events, the Deferred Bonus for such Base Fiscal Year shall not vest or become earned and all of Employee’s rights, title and interest in or with respect to such Deferred Bonus shall lapse and be of no further force and effect. The nonvesting of Employee’s rights as to a Deferred Bonus for any particular Base Fiscal Year shall not prejudice or adversely affect in any way Employee’s rights, if any, to receive (or retain) a Deferred Bonus for another Base Fiscal Year.

 

17



 

ARTICLE IV

Other Provisions

 

Section 4.1 Funding; Tax Advances.

 

(A)          Within sixty (60) days after the amount of a Deferred Bonus for a Base Fiscal Year has been determined pursuant to Section 2.1(B) (and assuming that Employee’s rights thereto have not previously lapsed or vested pursuant to any of the provisions of Article III), Employer shall pay the amount of such Deferred Bonus to the trustee of Employer’s Deferred Bonus Trust (the “Trust”), for the account of Employer and Employee, as their respective interests may appear, such payment to be held, administered and disbursed in accordance with the terms of this Agreement and the Trust. Where appropriate, all references to “Employer” in Section 3.2 hereof shall be deemed to be references to the “Trust.”

 

(B)          If Employee’s rights to a Deferred Bonus for a Base Fiscal Year vest under circumstances in which the amount of the Deferred Bonus is deemed to be taxable income to the Employee for Federal, State or local income tax purposes and Employee is, or may be, liable to pay taxes on such deemed income before the Deferred Bonus is paid to Employee, the Trust shall make an advance to Employee in an amount sufficient to permit Employee to pay the full amount of all taxes on such deemed income before such taxes shall become due. Any such advance shall not bear interest, may be repaid to the Trust, in whole or in part, at any time and shall, in any event, be repaid to the Trust in full at the same time the Deferred Bonus is paid to Employee.

 

Section 4.2 No Employment Agreement.

 

This Agreement does not constitute an employment agreement between Employer and Employee but instead is only intended to set out the respective rights and obligations of

 

18



 

the parties with respect to Deferred Bonuses for Fiscal Year 2008 and subsequent Fiscal Years. Without in any way limiting the generality of the foregoing, it is expressly acknowledged and agreed that Employee does not have an employment agreement with Employer and that, unless or until the parties otherwise agree, Employee is an at-will employee of Employer; provided, however, that Employee’s status as an at-will employee shall not prejudice or adversely affect any of Employer’s vested rights hereunder upon any Termination of Employment.

 

Section 4.3 Arbitration.

 

(A)          Any disagreements which, under the provisions of Sections 2.1(B) or 3.2(C) hereof, are referable to arbitration, shall be referred to, and finally determined by, arbitration pursuant to the applicable Rules of Commercial Arbitration (“Rules”) of the American Arbitration Association (“AAA”), subject to the provisions of this Section 4.3. Employer and Employee shall each attempt to resolve any disagreement which is referable to arbitration pursuant to Sections 2.1(B) or 3.2(C) hereof by agreement and each party agrees to negotiate in good faith for a period of at least fifteen (15) business days after any such disagreement has arisen. If, despite such good faith negotiations, the parties are unable to resolve any such disagreement by agreement, then either party may, at any time after the expiration of the foregoing period of fifteen (15) business days, demand arbitration of such disagreement.

 

(B)          If the amount in controversy in the arbitrable disagreement is One Hundred Thousand Dollars ($100,000) or less, the arbitration shall be conducted before a single arbitrator selected by Employer and Employee within thirty (30) days after service of the initial demand for arbitration. If the amount in controversy exceeds One Hundred

 

19



 

Thousand Dollars ($100,000), the arbitration shall be conducted before three (3) arbitrators, one of whom shall be selected by Employer within thirty (30) days after service of the initial demand for arbitration, one of whom shall be selected by Employee within the foregoing thirty (30) day period and one of whom shall be selected by the two arbitrators selected by the parties within thirty (30) days after the second of such arbitrators is selected. Each arbitrator selected pursuant to this Section 4.3(B) shall be independent of both Employer and Employee and shall have at least fifteen (15) years experience in the subject matter of the disagreement to be arbitrated. If any arbitrator is not timely selected within the periods provided for in this Section 4.3(B), such arbitrator shall be appointed by the AAA pursuant to the Rules. Any arbitration pursuant to this Section 4.3 shall be conducted in Bethesda, Maryland, or in such other location as may then be agreed by the parties. A judgment upon the award rendered in any such arbitration shall be final and binding upon the parties and may be entered in any court of competent jurisdiction. All fees and expenses of the arbitrator(s) and all administrative costs of the arbitration shall be borne equally by the parties unless the arbitrator(s) otherwise direct(s). This agreement to arbitrate shall be specifically enforceable.

 

Section 4.4 Governing Law.

 

This Agreement and the rights and liabilities of the parties hereunder shall be governed by, and construed in accordance with, the laws of the State of Maryland without regard to such State’s principles of conflicts of law.

 

20



 

Section 4.5 No Third Party Beneficiary; Spendthrift Clause.

 

(A)          This Agreement is made solely and specifically between and for the benefit of the parties hereto and (subject to Section 4.6) their Beneficiaries, heirs, successors, assigns and legal representatives. No other Person whatsoever shall have any rights, interests or claims hereunder or be entitled to any benefits under or on account of this Agreement as a third parry beneficiary or otherwise.

 

(B)            To the maximum extent permitted by law, neither Employee nor any Beneficiary shall have any power to dispose of or to charge by way of anticipation any vested, potential or other right, title or interest hereunder, and any vested Deferred Bonus payable to Employee or any Beneficiary shall be free and clear of his debts, contracts, dispositions, and anticipations, and shall not be taken or reached by any legal or equitable process.

 

Section 4.6 Benefit and Burden.

 

This Agreement, and the respective rights and obligations of the parties hereunder, may not be assigned, sold, hypothecated, or otherwise transferred, either outright or as security, without the prior written consent of the other party which may be delayed, withheld or conditioned in the sole and absolute discretion of such other party; provided, however, that Employee may designate a Beneficiary without Employer’s consent. Any transfer, or attempted transfer, in violation of the provisions of this Section 4.6 shall be null and void ab initio. Subject to the foregoing provisions of this Section 4.6, the provisions of this Agreement shall be binding upon, and shall inure to the benefit of, the parties hereto, the Employee’s Beneficiary and their respective heirs, successors, legal representatives and permitted assigns.

 

21


 

Section 4.7 Computation of Time.

 

In computing any notice or other period of time prescribed or allowed by any provision of this Agreement, the day of the act, event, or default from which the designated period of time begins to run shall not be included. The last day of the period so computed shall be included, unless it is a Saturday, Sunday or a legal holiday in Bethesda, Maryland, in which event the period runs until the end of the next, day which is not a Saturday, Sunday or such legal holiday. All notice or other periods expire as of 5:00 p.m. (local time in Bethesda, Maryland; on. the last day of the notice or other period.

 

Section 4.8 Entire Agreement; Amendment.

 

(A)          This Agreement contains the entire understanding between Employer and Employee regarding the subject matter hereof and supersedes any prior or contemporaneous understandings or agreements between them respecting such subject matter. There are no representations, warranties, agreements, arrangements or understandings, oral, written or expressed by, or based upon, conduct, between the parties relating to the subject matter hereof which are not fully expressed herein.

 

(B)           This Agreement, including the Schedules hereto, may not be amended, modified, waived, terminated or discharged except by an instrument in writing which is duly executed by the party sought to be charged with any such amendment, modification, waiver, termination or discharge.

 

Section 4.9 Construction.

 

(A)          Common nouns and pronouns shall be deemed to refer to the masculine, feminine, neuter, singular and plural, as the context may require.

 

22



 

(B)           All headings herein are inserted only for convenience and ease of reference and are not to be considered in the construction or interpretation of this Agreement.

 

(C)           Numbered or lettered Articles, sections, subsections, subparts and subparagraphs herein contained refer to Articles, sections, subsections, subparts and subparagraphs of this Agreement unless otherwise expressly stated. The words “herein,” “hereof,” “hereunder,” “hereby,” “this Agreement” and other similar references shall be construed to mean and include this Agreement and all amendments of, supplements to, and Schedules and other attachments to this Agreement unless the context shall clearly indicate or require otherwise.

 

(D)           Employer and Employee have both participated extensively in the negotiation and drafting of this Agreement. Accordingly, this Agreement shall not be interpreted or construed for or against either party as the draftsman hereof.

 

Section 4.10 Notices.

 

Any notices, demands, consents, requests or other communications (hereinafter collectively referred to in this Section 4.10 as “notice”) provided for or permitted to be given pursuant to this Agreement shall be in writing, and shall be delivered by hand, by first-class mail, postage prepaid (with a return receipt requested), or by Federal Express, or by some other commercial overnight delivery service, to the parties at the following addresses:

 

(i) If to Employer:

Walker & Dunlop GP, LLC

 

7501 Wisconsin Avenue, Suite 1200

 

Bethesda, Maryland 20814-6531

 

Attn: Mr. William M. Walker

 

23



 

(ii) If to Employee:

Mr. William M. Walker

 

2708 36 th  Street, NW

 

Washington, DC 20007

 

 

Each notice shall be deemed given on the day it is received or on the day its delivery is refused by or for the addressee, whichever is earlier. Each party may change its address or addressee for notice by giving notice thereof in the manner provided above (such notice to be given at least five (5) business days prior to its effective date).

 

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed and delivered this Agreement as of the date first above written.

 

 

WALKER & DUNLOP GP, LLC

 

 

 

(“Employer”)

 

 

 

Date:

June 16, 2008

 

 

 

 

By:

/s/ Mitchell M. Gaynor

 

 

 

 

 

Mitchell M. Gaynor

 

 

 

 

 

Senior Vice President

 

 

 

 

 

William M. Walker (“Employee”)

 

 

 

Date:

June 16, 2008

 

 

 

 

By:

/s/ William Walker

 

 

 

 

 

William M. Walker

 

 

 

 

 

President and CEO

 

24



 

SCHEDULE 1-2008

 

Formulae for Computation of Deferred Bonus

 

1.            (A) The following is a summary of key defined terms for 2008:

 

(i)                                      Employee: William M. Walker

 

(ii)                                   Base Fiscal Year: January 1, 2008 - December 31, 2008

 

(iii)                                Financial target: The attainment by Green Park of Adjusted Net Income of $15,144,697.00 (representing the 2008 Budget adjusted upward by 80% of sub-servicing costs, and downward by servicing advances)

 

(iv)                               Employee Percentage: 6.5%.

 

(B)            Employee shall be entitled to a Deferred Bonus in the amount equal to (i) the Employee Percentage times (ii) the amount by which Green Park’s Adjusted Net Income in the Base Fiscal Year exceeds the Base Financial Target, subject to all applicable vesting provisions set forth in the foregoing and attached Incentive Deferred Bonus Compensation Agreement (“Agreement”) of which this Schedule 1-2008 is a part. In no event shall the Deferred Bonus be less than zero.

 

2.              Green Park’s Adjusted Net Income during any Base Fiscal Year or during any Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period applicable to such Base Fiscal Year (hereinafter referred to in this Schedule 1-2008 as a “Period”) shall be determined as follows:

 

(A)            The starting point for the determination of such Adjusted Net Income shall be Green Park’s net income for the relevant Fiscal Year, or the relevant Period, as the case may be, determined in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles (“Net Income”) (such Net Income to be based on audited figures, if available, or to become

 

25



 

available in the ordinary course of business. If there has not been, or is not to be in the ordinary course of business, an independent audit to establish Green Park’s audited net income for a particular Fiscal Year or Period, Green Park’s net income for such Fiscal Year or Period shall be determined by Employer in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles and all customary procedures normally utilized in determining Green Park’s audited net income.)

 

(B)           Green Park’s Net Income for Fiscal Year, or during a Period, shall be (i) increased by (a) any reserves or provisions for future loan losses deducted in the computation of such Net Income (except that any actual loan losses deducted in computing such Net Income shall not be added back to such Net Income); and (b) any recoveries or reimbursements received as a result of previously delinquent loan (to the extent not already expensed or deducted in the computation of Net Income); and (c) 80% of any subservicing fees paid to Walker & Dunlop to service Green Park’s loans; and (ii) decreased by the amount of net servicing and delinquency advances made as a result of delinquent loans (to the extent not already expensed or deducted in the computation of Net Income.)

 

(C)           Green Park’s Net Income during a Fiscal Year, as adjusted in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 2(B), shall be Green Park’s “Adjusted Net Income” for that Fiscal Year for the purposes of this Schedule 1-2008.

 

(D)            Green Park’s Net Income during a Period, as adjusted in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 2(B), shall be Green Park’s Net Income” for that Period for the purposes of this Schedule 1-2008.

 

(E)             Green Park’s Adjusted Net Income during a Period shall be multiplied by a fraction, the numerator of which shall be twelve (12) and the denominator of which shall be the number of full calendar months in the Period, and the product of such multiplication

 

26



 

shall be Green Park’s “Average Adjusted Net Income” for that Period for the purposes of this Schedule I-2008.

 

3.              The Annualized Financial Target during the Period applicable to the Base Fiscal Year shall be the attainment by Green Park of an Average Adjusted Net Income equal to, or greater than the Base Financial Target.

 

4.              The operation of the formulae set out in this Schedule 1-2008 may be illustrated by the following examples: for these examples only, assume the following facts: (i) the Base Fiscal Year is January 1, 2002-December 31, 2002; (ii) the Base Financial Target is $10,000,000; and (iii) the Employee Percentage is 10%:

 

(A)            Assume that Employee remains in Employer’s employ from January 1, 2002 until November 30, 2003, on which date Employee has a Voluntary Resignation. Inasmuch as Employee’s employment with Employer terminated due to a Voluntary Resignation prior to the end of the Period applicable to the Base Fiscal Year, Employee is not entitled to his Deferred Bonus for the Base Fiscal Year (even if Green Park achieves both the Base Financial Target and the Annualized Financial Target.)

 

(B)           Assume that Employee remains in the Employer’s employ throughout the Base Fiscal Year and that Green Park’s Adjusted Net Income during the Base Fiscal Year is $11,000,000 (or $1,000,000 more than the Base Financial Target of $10,000,000 for the Base Fiscal Year.) On these assumptions, Employee’s Deferred Bonus for the Base Fiscal Year is $100,000 (10% [the Employee Percentage] time $1,000,000), subject to all applicable vesting provisions set out in the Agreement.

 

(C)           Assume that Employee remains in Employer’s employ from January 1, 2002 through June 30, 2003, on which date Employee’s Intentional Death or Disability occurs. Further assume that Green Park has Adjusted Net Income of $11,000,000 between January 1, 2002, and December 31, 2002, Adjusted Net Income of $10,500,000 between

 

27



 

January 1, 2003, and December 31, 2003, and Adjusted Net Income of $10,000,000 between January 1, 2003, and December 31, 2004. On these assumptions:

 

(i)              Employee’s Deferred Bonus for the Base Fiscal Year is $100,000 (see Paragraph 4(B) above.)

 

(ii)           Green Park’s Average Adjusted Net Income during the Period is $10,500,000. This is determined by multiplying $31,500,000 (Green Park’s Adjusted Net Income during the relevant Period (which began on January 1, 2002, and ended on December 31, 2004) by a fraction, the numerator of which is twelve (12) and the denominator of which is thirty-six (36) (the number of calendar months in the Period), (i.e., $31,500,000 x 12/36 = $10,500,000). Since the Annualized Financial target for the Period is the attainment by Green Park of an Average Adjusted Net Income of $10,000,000 during the Period, and since, on the assumed facts, Green Park’s actual Average Adjusted Net Income is $10,500,000 during the Period, the Annualized Financial Target has been bet. Moreover, since the Base Financial Target was exceeded during the Base Fiscal Year (i.e., Green Park had net Annualized Income during the Base Fiscal Year in excess of $10,000,000) and Employee’s employment with Employer did not terminate as a result of a Voluntary Resignation or a Termination With Cause during the Period, Employee’s rights to a Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period ended.) Pursuant to Section 3.2(A)(i) of the Agreement, the Deferred Bonus shall be due and payable to Employee’s legal representative or Beneficiary within sixty (60) days after December 31, 2004 (unless the time for payment is extended pursuant to Sections 3.2(B) and (C) of the Agreement in order to permit Employer to determine whether the Annualized Financial Target was met during the applicable Period.)

 

(D)          Assume that Employee remains in Employer’s employ from January 1, 2002, through June 30, 2003, on which date Employee’s Unintentional Death or Disability occurs. Further assume that Green Park has Adjusted Net Income of

 

28



 

$11,000,000 between January 1, 2002 and December 31, 2002, and Adjusted Net Income of $2,500,000 between January 1, 2003, and June 30, 2003. On these assumptions:

 

(i)            Employee’s Deferred Bonus for the Base Fiscal Year is $100,000 (see Paragraph 4(B) above.)

 

(ii)           Because Employee’s employment terminated as a result of his/her Unintentional Death or Disability which occurred on June 30,2003, the applicable Period for the Base Fiscal Year began on January 1, 2002, and ended on June 30, 2003.

 

(iii)          Green Park’s Average Adjusted Net Income during the applicable Period is $9,000,000. This is determined by multiplying $13,500,000 (Green Park’s Adjusted Net Income during the Period) times twelve (12) divided by eighteen (18) (the number of calendar months in the Period), (i.e., $13,500,000 x 12/18 = $9,000,000). This Average Net Income is less than the Annualized Financial Target (which is an Average Adjusted Net Income of $10,000,000). However, since Employee’s employment terminated as a result of his/her Unintentional Death or Disability, it is only necessary that Green Park attain 65% of the Annualized Financial Target (or an Average Adjusted Net Income of $6,500,000 ($10,000,000 x 65%) during the Period). Green Park’s actual Average Adjusted Net Income during the Period ($9,000,000) exceeds 65% of the Annualized Financial Target during the Period ($6,500,000) and, therefore, on the assumed facts, the Annualized Financial Target has been met.

 

(iv)          On the assumed facts, Employee’s employment did not terminate as a result of a Voluntary Resignation or a Termination With Cause occurring within the Period. As a result, on the assumed facts, Employee’s rights to a Deferred Bonus for the Base Fiscal Year vested on June 30, 2003 (the last day of the Period). Because the applicable Period ended as a result of Employee’s Unintentional Death or Disability, Employee’s Deferred Bonus for the Base Fiscal Year shall be due and payable to Employee’s

 

29



 

legal representative or Beneficiary within sixty (60) days after December 31, 2004 pursuant to Section 3.1(C) of the Agreement (unless the time for payment is extended in order to permit Employer to determine whether the Annualized Financial Target was met during the Period).

 

(E)            Assume that Employee remains in Employer’s employ from January 1, 2002, through December 31, 2004. Further assume that Green Park has Adjusted Net Income of $11,000,000 between January 1, 2002, and December 31, 2002, Adjusted Net Income of $10,500,000 between January 1, 2003, and December 31, 2003, and Adjusted Net Income of $10,000,000 between January 1, 2004, and December 31, 2004. On these assumptions:

 

(i)            Employee’s Deferred Bonus for the Base Fiscal Year is $100,000 (see Paragraph 4(B) above.)

 

(ii)           Green Park’s Average Adjusted Net Income during the Period is $10,500,000 (see Paragraph 4(C)(ii) above.) Since the Annualized Financial Target for the Period is the attainment by Green Park of an Average Adjusted Net Income of $10,000,000 during the Period, and since, on the assumed facts, Green Park’s actual Average Adjusted Net Income is $10,500,000 during the Period, the Annualized Financial Target has been met. Pursuant to Section 3.2(A)(i) of the Agreement, the Deferred Bonus shall be due and payable to Employee within sixty (60) days after December 31, 2004 (unless the time for payment is extended pursuant to Sections 3.2(B) and (C) of the Agreement in order to permit Employer to determine whether the Annualized Financial Target was met during the applicable Period).

 

5.             The foregoing examples under Paragraph 4 of this Schedule 1-2008 assume that Employee remains in Green Park’s employ throughout the first year of the Period (i.e., throughout the Base Fiscal Year) and that Employee’s employment with Green Park is then terminated at some point during the remainder of such Period. If Employee’s employment

 

30



 

with Green Park is terminated during the first year of such Period (or at any other time during such Period) as a result of a Voluntary Termination or a Termination With Cause, then Employee is not entitled to his Deferred Bonus for the Base Fiscal Year. If Employee’s employment with Green Park is terminated during the first year of such Period for any reason other than a Voluntary Termination or a Termination With Cause, then the computations regarding the amount of Employee’s Deferred Bonus for the Base Fiscal Year are first made as set out in Paragraphs 1 through 3 of this Schedule 1-2008 as adjusted by the provisions of Section 2. 1 (A)(ii)(a) of the Agreement. The foregoing may be illustrated by the following example:

 

(A)        Assume that the Base Financial Target and the Employee Percentage are as set out in Paragraph 4 above; that Employee remains in Employer’s employ from January 1, 2002 until June 25, 2002, on which date Employee’s Intentional Death or Disability occurs. Further assume that Green Park has Adjusted Net Income of $5,500,000 between January 1, 2002, and June 30, 2002; Adjusted Net Income of $11,000,000 between January 1, 2002 and December 31, 2002; Adjusted Net Income of $10,500,000 between January 1, 2003 and December 31, 2003; and Adjusted Net Income of $10,000,000 between January 1, 2004 and December 31, 2004. On these assumptions:

 

(i)            Green Park’s Base Financial Target for the Base Fiscal Year is first pro-rated pursuant to Section 2. 1 (A)(ii)(a) of the Agreement by multiplying that Target ($10,000,000 of Adjusted Net Income) by six (6) (the number of months, rounded to the nearest whole number, that Employee was employed by Green Park during the Base Fiscal Year) and then dividing by twelve (12). The result (or $5,000,000 of Adjusted Net Income) is the pro-rated Base Financial Target for Employee’s Deferred Bonus for the Base Fiscal Year.

 

(ii)            The pro-rated Base Financial Target for the Base Fiscal Year (or $5,000,000 of Adjusted Net Income) is then compared with Green Park’s actual Adjusted

 

31


 

Net Income between January 1, 2002 and June 30, 2002 (or $5,500,000). Since the adjusted Target was exceeded, the amount of Employee’s potential Deferred Bonus for the first six months of the Base Fiscal Year is 10% (the Employee Percentage) of the excess (or $500,000) of actual Adjusted Net Income over the adjusted Base Financial Target amount during that six-month period, or $50,000.

 

(iii)         Notwithstanding Employee’s Intentional Death or Disability during the Base Fiscal Year, the other vesting and payout provisions of the Agreement are not affected (see Agreement, Section 2. 1 (A)(ii)(b)). Since Employee’s termination of employment was caused by his/her Intentional Death or Disability, his Deferred Bonus is only payable under these circumstances if Green Park meets its Annualized Financial Target during the three year Period attributable to the Base Fiscal Year (see Agreement, Sections 1. 1 (E)(i)(a), 2. 1 (A)(ii)(b)). On the assumed facts, Green Park meets its Annualized Financial Target during the latter Period and, accordingly, Employee’s Deferred Bonus of $50,000 for the Base Fiscal Year is payable to Employee’s legal representative or Beneficiary pursuant to the Agreement (see Paragraph 4(D)(iv) above).

 

(B)            Under the example given in Paragraph 5(A), Employee’s employment with Green Park terminated (for a reason other than a Voluntary Resignation or a Termination With Cause) during the Base Fiscal Year but the Period attributable to that Base Fiscal Year continued beyond the end of the Base Fiscal Year. Under certain circumstances, however, Employee’s employment may terminate during a Base Fiscal Year and the Period applicable to such Base Fiscal Year will also terminate during that Base Fiscal Year. In this event, Employee’s entitlement to his Deferred Bonus is determined in accordance with Paragraphs 1 through 3 of this Schedule 1-2005, as adjusted by the provisions of Section 2. 1 (A)(ii)(b) of the Agreement. The foregoing may be illustrated by the following example:

 

32



 

(Percentage are as set out in Paragraph 4 above; that Employee remains in Employer’s employ from January 1, 2002 until June 30, 2002, at which time a Termination Without Cause occurs; and that Green Park has Adjusted Net Income in the amounts and for the periods set out in Paragraph 5(A) above.

 

(ii)            On these assumptions, the adjusted Base Financial Target is met for the first six months of the Base Fiscal Year and Employee’s potential Deferred Bonus for that period is $50,000 (see Paragraph 5(A)(ii)).

 

(i) Assume that the Base Financial Target and the Employee Percentage are as set out in Paragraph 4 above; that Employee remains in Employer’s employ from January 1, 2002 until June 30, 2002, at which time a Termination Without Cause occurs; and that Green Park has Adjusted Net Income in the amounts and for the periods as set out in Paragraph 5(A) above.

 

(ii) On these assumptions, the adjusted Base Financial Target is met for the first six months of the Base Fiscal Year and Employee’s potential Deferred Bonus for that period if $50,000 (see Paragraph 5(A)(ii)).

 

(iii) Because Employee’s employment terminated as of June 30, 2002 as a result of a Termination Without Cause, the Period attributed to the Base Fiscal Year also terminated as of June 30, 2002 (see Agreement, Section 1.1(E)(i)(c)). The Annualized Financial Target for the Base Fiscal Year must, therefore, be pro-rated by multiplying that Target ($10,000,000 of Adjusted Net Income) times six (6) (the number of months rounded, if necessary, to the nearest whole number, that Employee was employed by Green Park during the Base Fiscal Year) and then dividing by twelve (12) (see Agreement, Section 2. 1 (A)(ii)(b)). The result (or $5,000,000 of Adjusted Net Income) is the pro-rated Annualized Financial Target for the Period attributable to the Base Fiscal Year.

 

33



 

(iv)          The pro-rated Annualized Financial Target for the Period attributable to the Base Fiscal Year (or $5,000,000 of Adjusted Net Income) is then compared with Green Park’s actual Adjusted Net Income during that Period (or $5,500,000). Since the adjusted Target was exceeded, and since the Employee’s employment during the Period was not terminated as a result of a Voluntary Retirement or a Termination With Cause, Employee’s Deferred Bonus for the Base Fiscal Year vests of June 30, 2002, and is payable to him in accordance with the terms of the Agreement.

 

6. Unless otherwise defined in this Schedule 1-2008, all capitalized words and phrases in this Schedule 1-2008 shall have the same meanings as are ascribed to them in the Agreement.

 

APPROVED AND ACCEPTED:

 

 

/s/ Mitchell M. Gaynor

 

June 16, 2008

 

 

 

Mitchell M. Gaynor

 

Date

 

 

 

Senior Vice President

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

/s/ William Walker

 

June 16, 2008

 

 

 

William M. Walker

 

Date

 

 

 

President and CEO

 

 

 

34




Exhibit 10.8

 

AMENDMENT TO

INCENTIVE DEFERRED BONUS COMPENSATION AGREEMENT

BETWEEN WALKER & DUNLOP GP, LLC AND

WILLIAM WALKER

 

WHEREAS, Walker & Dunlop GP, LLC (the “Company”) and William Walker (the “Employee”) previously entered into an Incentive Deferred Bonus Compensation Agreement (the “Agreement”) originally effective as of June 16, 2008; and

 

WHEREAS, Section 4.8(B) of the Agreement provides that the Agreement may be amended at any time by written consent of the Company and the Employee; and

 

WHEREAS, the Company and the Employee now wish to amend the Agreement, effective as of January 1, 2009, in order to ensure compliance with the requirements of section 409A of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended, and to make certain other changes to the terms of payment as permitted by applicable transitional guidance.

 

NOW, THEREFORE, the Company and the Employee agree to amend the Agreement, effective as of January 1, 2009, as follows:

 

Section 3.2 is amended by deleting subsection 3.2(A)(ii) in its entirety and inserting the following in lieu thereof:

 

(ii)           If Employee’s rights to a Deferred Bonus for a Base Fiscal Year vest pursuant to Section 3.1(D), the portion of the Deferred Bonus attributable to each respective Base Fiscal Year shall be paid to Employee (or, if applicable, his Beneficiary) within sixty (60) days after the third anniversary of the first day of that Base Fiscal Year.  For example, if the Employee has earned a Deferred Bonus for the 2008 and 2009 Base Fiscal Years and a Change in Control occurs on December 31, 2009, (a) the Employee’s rights to the Deferred Bonus shall become fully earned and vested as of December 31, 2009; (b) the portion of the Deferred Bonus attributable to the 2008 Base Fiscal Year shall be paid to the Employee (or, if applicable, his Beneficiary) within 60 days after January 1, 2011, without regard to whether or not the Employee remains employed with the Company (or any successor entity) on that date; and (c) the portion of the Deferred Bonus attributable to the 2009 Base Fiscal Year shall be paid to the Employee (or, if applicable, his Beneficiary) within 60 days after January 1, 2012, without regard to whether or not the Employee remains employed with the Company (or any successor entity) on that date.

 

1



 

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed this Amendment as of the 31 day of December, 2008.

 

 

WALKER & DUNLOP GP, LLC

 

By:

/s/ Deborah A. Wilson

 

Name:

Deborah A. Wilson

 

Title:

SVP & CFO

 

 

 

 

 

/s/ William Walker

 

William Walker

 

2




Exhibit 10.9

 

Smith, H.

2008

 

INCENTIVE DEFERRED BONUS COMPENSATION AGREEMENT

 

THIS AGREEMENT (“Agreement”), made as of the 16 th  day of June, 2008, by and between Walker & Dunlop GP, LLC (“Employer”) and Howard W. Smith III (“Employee”).

 

WITNESSETH THAT:

 

WHEREAS, Employer has a substantial investment and ownership interest in Green Park Financial Limited Partnership (“Green Park”) which acts as an approved Fannie Mae multifamily lender under the DUS program; and

 

WHEREAS, Employee is serving as Employer’s Executive Vice President & COO and, in that capacity has senior management responsibility for Green Park’s operations and an important role in Green Park’s success; and

 

WHEREAS, in order to maximize the returns it derives from its substantial investment and ownership in Green Park, Employer desires to provide Employee with an incentive to contribute to the growth of the business and profitability of Green Park and, to that end, the parties desire to enter into this Agreement.

 

NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the foregoing and of the mutual promises hereinafter set forth and of other good and valuable consideration, the sufficiency and receipt of which prior to the execution of these presents is hereby acknowledged, the parties hereto, intending to be legally bound, do hereby agree as follows:

 

1



 

ARTICLE I

 

Definitions

 

Section 1.1 Definitions.

 

When used in this Agreement, the following terms will have the meanings set forth below:

 

(A)          “Base Fiscal Year” means the Fiscal Year to which a Deferred Bonus relates (e.g., Fiscal Year 2008 shall be the Base Fiscal Year for any Deferred Bonus potentially payable to Employee for Fiscal Year 2008).

 

(B)            “Beneficiary” means one or more individuals designated by Employee to receive benefits payable hereunder upon Employee’s death (whether voluntary or involuntary). Employee shall designate his Beneficiary in writing on a form provided by Employer. Employee may change his designated Beneficiary by filing a new form with Employer (at least ten (10) business days prior to the effective date of such change). If no Beneficiary designated by Employee survives Employee, or if Employee fails to designate a Beneficiary, any payments due hereunder upon Employee’s death shall be paid to Employee’s executor or other legal representative.

 

(C)           “Change in Control” shall mean the occurrence of any one or more of the following without Employee’s prior consent (which consent can be conditioned or withheld, with or without cause, in Employee’s sole discretion): (i) the sale or other disposition of all, or substantially all, of the assets of Green Park or Employer; or (ii) the sale or other transfer within any period of twelve (12) consecutive calendar months (either in one transaction or in a series of transactions within such twelve (12) month period) of partnership interests (or stock or other forms of ownership interests, as the case may be) representing

 

2



 

more than fifty percent (50%) of all partnership interests (or all stock or all other forms of ownership interests) in either Green Park or Employer; but not if stock is transferred to a family trust or other entity designed principally to facilitate estate planning.

 

(D)          “Deferred Bonus” means the amount of the deferred bonus potentially payable to Employee on account of a particular Base Fiscal Year in accordance with the provisions hereof.

 

(E)           (i)            “Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period” means, with respect to each Deferred Bonus for each Base Fiscal Year, the period beginning on the first day of the Base Fiscal Year and terminating on various dates as determined in accordance with the following provisions:

 

(a)           If Employee remains continuously in Employer’s employ for a period of three (3) years commencing with the first day of a Base Fiscal Year, or if Employee’s employment with Employer terminates as a result of Employee’s Intentional Death or Disability occurring within a three (3) year period commencing on the first day of a Base Fiscal Year, the last day of the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period applicable to that Base Fiscal Year shall be the last day of the three (3) year period commencing with the first day of the Base Fiscal Year;

 

(b)          If Employee’s employment with Employer terminates as a result of Employee’s Unintentional Death or Disability occurring within a three (3) year period commencing on the first day of a Base Fiscal Year, the last day of the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period applicable to that Base Fiscal Year shall be the date on which Employee’s Unintentional Death or Disability occurs;

 

(c)          If Employee’s employment with Employer terminates as a result of a Termination Without Cause occurring within a three (3) year period commencing on the first day of a Base Fiscal Year, the last day of the Deferred Bonus Earn-

 

3



 

Out Period applicable to that Base Fiscal Year shall be the date on which the Termination Without Cause occurs;

 

(d)          If Employee’s employment with Employer terminates as a result of a Change in Control occurring within a three (3) year period commencing on the first day of a Base Fiscal Year, the last day of the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period applicable to that Base Fiscal Year shall be the date on which the Change in Control occurs; and

 

(e)          If a Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period terminates upon the occurrence of an event (such as, by way of example, a Termination Without Cause of Employee’s employment), that termination (and all consequences associated therewith under the provisions hereof) shall not be affected by the subsequent occurrence of another event (such as, by way of example, a Change in Control) which, but for the prior occurrence of the first event, also would have resulted in a termination of that Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period.

 

(ii)             As hereinafter appears, Employee shall not be entitled to receive a Deferred Bonus, and there shall be no Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period, for any particular Base Fiscal Year if Employee’s employment with Employer terminates as a result of either a Voluntary Resignation or a Termination With Cause which occurs within a three (3) year period commencing on the first day of that Base Fiscal Year.

 

(F)             “Disability” means disability as a result of an accident, illness or mental disorder which results in Employee’s unwillingness or inability, for a period of ninety (90) days (in the aggregate) during any period of twelve (12) consecutive months, substantially to perform the duties assigned to Employee by Employer immediately prior to the commencement of the Disability. For all purposes hereof:

 

4



 

(i)            Employee’s Disability shall be deemed to have occurred as of the last day of the foregoing period of ninety (90) days;

 

(ii)           If Employer and Employee disagree as to whether a Disability has occurred or as to when a period of Disability has begun or ended, and if the disagreement cannot be resolved within fifteen (15) business days after it has first arisen, Employer and Employee shall each, within fifteen (15) business days after the expiration of the first period of fifteen (15) business days, appoint a qualified physician or other medical professional (hereinafter in this Section 1.1(F)(ii) collectively a “Doctor”) (and if either Employer or Employee fails timely to make such an appointment, the Doctor appointed by or for the other party shall resolve all disagreements regarding Disability). The two Doctors (or, if applicable, the one Doctor) shall, as promptly as possible, make a written determination as to all disagreements with respect to the Employee’s Disability; provided, however, that if two Doctors are timely appointed and cannot agree on all matters respecting Employee’s Disability within a period of thirty (30) days after the second of them has been timely appointed, the two of them shall, as promptly as possible thereafter, appoint a third Doctor and all disagreements as to Employee’s Disability shall be determined in writing by a majority of the three Doctors. All good faith decisions made by one or more Doctors regarding Employee’s Disability shall be conclusive and binding on Employer and Employee. If such decisions are made by a single Doctor, all fees and expenses of such Doctor shall be borne equally by Employer and Employee. Otherwise, Employer and Employee shall each pay the fees and expenses of any Doctor appointed by or for it or him and shall, if applicable, bear equally the fees and expenses of any third Doctor.

 

(G)           “Employee” means Donna Mighty and, where appropriate, shall also be deemed to mean his executor, guardian or other legal representative.

 

5



 

(H)            “Employer” means Walker & Dunlop GP, LLC and any successor to, or assignee of, Walker & Dunlop GP, LLC to which Employee has consented, in Employee’s sole discretion.

 

(I)             “Fiscal Year” means a fiscal year of Green Park (presently a calendar year).

 

(J)            “Intentional Death or Disability” means the death or Disability of Employee which results from an injury or illness that is intentionally self-inflicted by Employee or intentionally inflicted upon Employee by a third Person acting, or failing to act, under the control, or at the direction, of Employee.

 

(K)          “Person” means, as the context requires, an individual, partnership, corporation, trust, unincorporated association, joint stock company, or other legal entity or association.

 

(L)            “Schedules” means, collectively, the Schedules attached, or to be attached, hereto.

 

(M)         “Termination With Cause” means the termination by Employer of Employee’s employment with Employer on account of (i) his conviction for the commission of a felony in the course of his employment with Employer, or (ii) his gross, willful and intentional misconduct in connection with his employment with Employer which causes a material decrease in the net profits of Green Park for the Fiscal Year within which such misconduct occurs.

 

(N)          “Termination Without Cause” means the termination by Employer of Employee’s employment with Employer without Employee’s consent for any reason which does not constitute Termination With Cause.

 

6



 

(0)           “Unintentional Death or Disability” means the death or disability of Employee which results from any reason which does not constitute Employee’s Intentional Death or Disability.

 

(P)           “Voluntary Resignation” means the voluntary decision or election by Employee to terminate his employment with Employer for any reason whatsoever other than a material breach by Employer of this Agreement which is not cured within any applicable grace period specified herein.

 

Section 1.2 Certain Other Definitions.

 

When used herein with its initial letter(s) capitalized, a term which is not defined in Section 1.1 shall be given the definition assigned to it elsewhere in this Agreement.

 

Section 1.3 Schedules and Exhibits.

 

Attached hereto and forming an integral part of this Agreement are various Schedules and Exhibits, all of which are incorporated into this Agreement as fully as if the contents thereof were set out in full herein at each point of reference thereto. The provisions of the immediately preceding sentence shall also apply to any Schedules, Exhibits or other attachments which, pursuant to the provisions hereof, are to be prepared and attached hereto in the future. Notwithstanding any other provision hereof, if there is any conflict or inconsistency between the provisions contained in this Agreement and the provisions contained in any Schedule or Exhibit attached hereto (either now or in the future), the provisions of the Schedule or Exhibit shall govern and prevail.

 

7



 

ARTICLE II

 

Determination Of Deferred Bonus

 

Section 2.1 In General.

 

(A)          (i)            As a general matter (unless otherwise agreed by Employer and Employee), Employee’s Deferred Bonus for each Base Fiscal Year commencing after the date hereof shall depend on two factors, namely, the achievement of a base financial target (the “Base Financial Target”) during each such Base Fiscal Year and the achievement of an annualized financial target (the “Annualized Financial Target”) during the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period applicable to such Base Fiscal Year. Commencing sixty (60) days prior to the commencement of each Base Fiscal Year commencing after the date hereof, Employer and Employee shall negotiate in good faith regarding the Base Financial Target for such Base Fiscal Year as well as the Annualized Financial Target for the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period (the foregoing Base Financial Target and Annualized Financial Target being hereinafter collectively referred to as “Targets”). If Employer and Employee agree upon the Targets for a Base Fiscal Year commencing after the date hereof, the Targets for that Base Fiscal Year shall be incorporated in a Schedule which shall be attached hereto and shall become a part hereof. If, despite good faith negotiations, Employer and Employee are unable to agree on the Targets for a Base Fiscal Year commencing after the date hereof prior to the first day of such Base Fiscal Year, the last set of Targets agreed upon (as set out in the last Schedule attached hereto) shall be deemed to be the Targets for that Base Fiscal Year; provided, however, that the foregoing provisions of this sentence shall not be deemed or construed to preclude Employer and Employee from continuing to negotiate (or to agree) regarding the Targets for a particular Base Fiscal Year after the commencement of such Base Fiscal Year if the parties agree to such continued negotiations (or agreement).

 

8



 

(ii)           Notwithstanding the provisions of Section 2.1(A)(i):

 

(a)           If Employee’s employment with Employer terminates (for any reason other than a Voluntary Resignation or a Termination With Cause) during (and not after) a particular Base Fiscal Year, the Base Fiscal Target for that Base Fiscal Year shall be pro-rated by multiplying such Target by a fraction, the numerator of which shall be the number of months (rounded to the nearest whole number) Employee was employed by Employer during such Base Fiscal Year and the denominator of which shall be twelve (12). The pro-rated Base Fiscal Target shall then be compared with Employer’s actual financial performance (or with the other relevant actual financial data) during the portion of the Base Fiscal Year that Employee was employed by Employer in determining whether the pro-rated Base Financial Target was met during such portion of such Base Fiscal Year. In such event, if the pro-rated amount of the Base Financial Target does not exceed Employer’s actual financial performance (or the other relevant actual financial data) during the period of Employee’s employment during the Base Fiscal Year, Employee shall not be entitled to a Deferred Bonus for such Base Fiscal Year. If the pro-rated amount of the Base Financial Target does exceed Employer’s actual financial performance (or the other relevant actual financial data) during such period, Employee’s Deferred Bonus shall (subject to all vesting and other applicable provisions hereof) be based on the amount of such excess and shall not be adjusted as a result of Employer’s actual financial performance (or the other relevant actual financial data) during the remainder of such Base Fiscal Year. In the circumstances described in the first sentence of this Section 2.1(A)(ii), the period within which Employer shall determine whether the Base Financial Target has been met (as provided in Section 2.1(B) hereof) shall commence as of the date of the termination of Employee’s employment and the other provisions of this Agreement shall otherwise continue to apply. Without in any way limiting the generality of the foregoing, the termination of Employee’s employment as a

 

9



 

result of Intentional Death or Disability during the Base Fiscal Year shall not accelerate or otherwise modify the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period applicable to such Base Fiscal Year. Where necessary or appropriate, references in this Agreement to the Base Financial Target shall be deemed to be references to the pro-rated Base Financial Target provided for in this Section 2.1(A)(ii)(a); and

 

(b)           If the last day of a Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period occurs during, rather than after, the Base Fiscal Year (if, for example, Employee is the subject of a Termination Without Cause during the Base Fiscal Year), any Annualized Financial Target for the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period for such Base Fiscal Year will be pro-rated by multiplying such Target by a fraction, the numerator of which shall be the number of months (rounded to the nearest whole number) Employee was employed by Employer during such Base Fiscal Year and the denominator of which shall be twelve (12). The pro-rated Annualized Fiscal Target shall then be compared with Employer’s actual financial performance (or with the other relevant actual financial data) during the portion of the Base Fiscal Year that Employee was employed by Employer in determining whether the pro-rated Annualized Financial Target was met. Where necessary or appropriate, references in this Agreement to the Annualized Financial Target shall be deemed to be references to the pro-rated Annualized Financial Target provided for in this Section 2.1(A)(ii)(b).

 

(B)            As soon as may be practicable, and in any event within sixty (60) days, after the expiration of each Base Fiscal Year, Employer shall determine whether the Base Financial Target was met during such Base Fiscal Year and, if so, the amount of the Deferred Bonus that Employee may receive with respect to such Base Fiscal Year (provided that any applicable Annualized Financial Target, as well as all other applicable vesting requirements, are met during the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period applicable to such Base Fiscal Year). Employer shall promptly advise Employee as to whether the Base Financial Target has been

 

10



 

met during the Base Fiscal Year in question and, if so, the amount of the Deferred Bonus for that Base Fiscal Year as computed by Employer. Employee shall be entitled to review all financial and other records relevant to Employer’s determinations with respect to the achievement of the Base Financial Target, the amount of Employee’s Deferred Bonus, if any, and all related computations. Employer shall give careful and good faith consideration to any bona fide questions raised by Employee regarding Employer’s foregoing determinations and shall make any adjustments therein as Employer deems necessary or appropriate in the light of such questions. Employer’s good faith determination as to the amount of Employee’s Deferred Bonus (either as originally computed or as adjusted) shall, however, be binding and conclusive on Employer and Employee unless the amount in question or controversy as to the size of the Deferred Bonus exceeds $25,000 (in which event such question or controversy shall be referred to, and determined by, arbitration in accordance with Section 4.3 hereof). Once the final amount of Employee’s Deferred Bonus for any Base Fiscal Year has been computed, agreed or determined, such amount shall be memorialized in an addendum which shall also be attached hereto and shall be deemed a part hereof and such amount shall not then thereafter change.

 

(C)           Notwithstanding the foregoing provisions of Sections 2.1 (A) and (B), it is acknowledged and agreed that Green Park has agreed to pay, or reimburse, Employer for any Deferred Bonus Employer pays to Employee pursuant to this Agreement and that this Agreement is premised on the assumption that this payment or reimbursement arrangement shall continue as between Green Park and Employer. If Green Park should refuse to pay or reimburse Employer for any Deferred Bonus attributable to a Base Fiscal Year that is to commence after the date of such refusal by Green Park, Employer shall have the right, in its sole discretion, not to pay Employee any Deferred Bonus for that Base Fiscal Year or to agree upon Targets for that Base Fiscal Year. The provisions of the immediately preceding

 

11


 

sentence shall not, however, apply to the current Fiscal Year (Fiscal Year 2008) or to any subsequent Base Fiscal Year that commences prior to the date, if any, on which Green Park refuses to pay or reimburse Employer for Employee’s Deferred Bonus (it being expressly acknowledged and agreed that, as between Employer and Employee, Employer shall assume the risk of any breach by Green Park of any agreement to reimburse or pay Employer for Employee’s Deferred Bonus as well as the risk that Green Park shall refuse to pay or reimburse Employer for Employee’s Deferred Bonus for a particular Base Fiscal Year after the commencement of that Base Fiscal Year). Employer further agrees with Employee that Employer shall not, in its capacity as a partner in Green Park, vote in favor of, or otherwise approve, any action by Green Park to modify, terminate or cancel Green Park’s agreement to pay or reimburse Employer for Employee’s Deferred Bonus for any subsequent Base Fiscal Year.

 

Section 2.2 Fiscal Year 2008.

 

Employer and Employee have agreed upon the Targets for the computation of Employee’s Deferred Bonus for Fiscal Year 2008 (which Targets are set out in Schedule 1-2008 which is attached hereto and hereby made a part hereof).

 

12



 

ARTICLE III

 

Vesting, Payment and Nonvesting of Deferred Bonus

 

Section 3.1 Vesting of Deferred Bonus.

 

Except as otherwise provided in Section 3.3, Employee’s Deferred Bonus for any particular Base Fiscal Year shall become vested (i.e., shall be deemed fully earned, and not subject to lapse), and shall be payable to or for an Employee in accordance with Section 3.2 in accordance with the following provisions:

 

(A)          If the last day of the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period for a Deferred Bonus for a particular Base Fiscal Year is the last day of the three (3) year period commencing with the first day of that Base Fiscal Year (under the circumstances specified in Section 1.1(E)(i)(a)), and if Green Park meets the Annualized Financial Target during that Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period, then the Deferred Bonus for that Base Fiscal Year shall be deemed fully earned and vested as of the date on which the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period terminates;

 

(B)          If the last day of the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period for a Deferred Bonus for a particular Base Fiscal Year is the day on which Employee’s Unintentional Death or Disability occurs (under the circumstances specified in Section 1.1(E)(i)(b)), and if Green Park meets at least Sixty-Five Percent (65%) of the Annualized Financial Target during that Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period, then the Deferred Bonus for that Base Fiscal Year shall be deemed fully earned and vested as of the date on which the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period terminates;

 

(C)          If the last day of the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period for a Deferred Bonus for a particular Base Fiscal Year is the date on which a Termination Without Cause of Employee’s employment occurs (under the circumstances specified in Section 1.1(E)(i)(c)),

 

13



 

and if Green Park meets at least Seventy-Five Percent (75%) of the Annualized Financial Target during such Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period, then the Deferred Bonus for that Base Fiscal Year shall be deemed fully earned and vested as of the date on which the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period terminates; and

 

(D)          If the last day of the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period for a Deferred Bonus for a particular Base Fiscal Year is the date on which a Change in Control occurs (under the circumstances specified in Section 1.1(E)(i)(d)), then, whether or not Green Park meets the Annualized Financial Target, or any portion thereof, during such Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period, the Deferred Bonus for that Base Fiscal Year shall be deemed fully earned and vested as of the date on which the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period terminates.

 

Section 3.2 Payment of Vested Deferred Bonus.

 

(A)          Employer shall pay Employee (or, if applicable, his Beneficiary) the amount of any Deferred Bonus which vests pursuant to the provisions of Section 3.1 in accordance with the following provisions:

 

(i)             If Employee’s rights to a Deferred Bonus for a Base Fiscal Year vest pursuant to Section 3.1(A), Section 3.1(B) or Section 3.1(C), that Deferred Bonus shall, subject to the provisions of Sections 3.2(B) and 3.2(C), be paid to Employee (or, if applicable, his Beneficiary) within sixty (60) days after the last day of the taxable year in which Employee’s rights to that Deferred Bonus vest; and

 

(ii)            If Employee’s rights to a Deferred Bonus for a Base Fiscal Year vest pursuant to Section 3.1(D), that Deferred Bonus shall be paid to Employee within sixty (60) days after the date on which Employee’s rights to that Deferred Bonus vest.

 

(B)           (i)            Notwithstanding the provisions of Section 3.2(A)(i), when the vesting of Employee’s rights to a Deferred Bonus (pursuant to Section 3.1(A), Section 3.1(B) or

 

14



 

Section 3.1(C)) depends upon the meeting by Green Park of all, or a specified percentage, of an Annualized Financial Target, the payment period of sixty (60) days specified in Section 3.2(A)(i) shall be extended if, and to the extent, necessary in order for a determination to be made (in accordance with the provisions of Section 3.2(C)) as to whether all, or the specified percentage, of the Annualized Financial Target has been met; provided that payment shall be made no later than 2-1/2 months after the last day of the taxable year in which Employee’s rights to the Deferred Bonus vest. An extension of the period within which a vested Deferred Bonus shall be paid shall not extend or defer the date as of which such Deferred Bonus shall be deemed to have vested.

 

(ii)             If the last day of a Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period falls on a day that is other than the last day of a fiscal quarter, Employer may, solely for the purpose of determining whether the relevant Annualized Financial Target has, or has not, been met during that Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period, assume that the relevant financial reports or data for Green Park as of the end of the fiscal quarter that is closest in time to the last day of that Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period is the same as the relevant financial reports or data for Green Park as of the actual last day of that Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period. To illustrate: assume that the first day of the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period for the fiscal Year in question is January 1 and that, because of a Change in Control, the last day of that Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period is May 25. For the sake of convenience, Employer may use the relevant financial reports or data for Green Park as of June 30 (the end of the fiscal quarter that is closest in time to the actual last day of the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period in question) as constituting the relevant financial reports or data for Green Park as of May 25 for the purpose of determining whether the Annualized Financial Target for that Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period has been met. Similarly, if the last day of a Deferred Bonus Earn-Out

 

15



 

Period is October 10, Employer may use the relevant financial reports or data for Green Park as of September 30 for computation purposes as aforesaid.

 

(iii)          If the period for the payment of a vested Deferred Bonus is extended pursuant to the preceding provisions of this Section 3.2(B), Employer shall pay interest on the amount of the Deferred Bonus at an annual rate equal to the Prime Rate plus 1% (or, if lower, at the highest percentage rate allowed by law) during the period such Deferred Bonus is due and unpaid; and provided further that if Employer shall fail timely to pay Employee (or his Beneficiary) a vested Deferred Bonus once Employee’s entitlement thereto has been determined, Employee (or his Beneficiary) shall be entitled to receive interest on the amount of such Deferred Bonus at an annual rate equal to the Prime Rate plus 5% (or, if lower, the highest percentage interest rate allowed by law) during the period such Deferred Bonus is due and unpaid. (For all purposes hereof “Prime Rate” means the prime rate of interest published (on the date from which the Prime Rate is to accrue) by The Wall Street Journal as the base rate for corporate loans posted by a number (normally expressed as a percentage) of the largest banks in the United States of America.)

 

(C)          Whenever the payment of a Deferred Bonus is dependent upon the meeting by Green Park of all, or a specified percentage, of an Annualized Financial Target during a Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period, Employer shall, as promptly as may be practicable after the date on which the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period for such Deferred Bonus terminates and Employer has received such financial reports or data relating to Green Park which are needed in order to determine whether all, or the specified percentage of the Annualized Financial Target has been met, make a written determination as to whether all, or the specified percentage, of such Annualized Financial Target has been met and shall provide Employee with a copy of such written determination. Employee shall have the right to review all financial and other records relevant to such determination. Employer shall give careful and

 

16



 

good faith consideration to any bona fide questions raised by Employee regarding Employer’s determination and shall, if necessary or appropriate, adjust Employer’s determination in light of such questions. Employer’s good faith determination (either as initially made or as thereafter adjusted) as to whether Green Park has met all, or the specified percentage, of the Annualized Financial Target shall, however, be binding and conclusive upon Employer and Employee unless the amount of the Deferred Bonus in question or controversy exceeds $25,000 (in which event all questions or controversies as to whether or not the Deferred Bonus in question has vested shall be referred to, and determined by, arbitration pursuant to Section 4.3 hereof).

 

Section 3.3 Nonvesting of Deferred Bonus.

 

If (A) Employee’s employment with Employer terminates as a result of a Termination With Cause or a Voluntary Resignation at any time during the three (3) year period commencing with the first day of a Base Fiscal Year, or if (B) the Base Financial Target is not met during the Base Fiscal Year, or if (C) vesting of a particular Deferred Bonus is dependent upon the meeting by Green Park of all, or a specified percentage, of an Annualized Financial Target during the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period applicable to such Deferred Bonus and Green Park fails to meet such Annualized Financial Target (or the specified percentage thereof), then, in each of such events, the Deferred Bonus for such Base Fiscal Year shall not vest or become earned and all of Employee’s rights, title and interest in or with respect to such Deferred Bonus shall lapse and be of no further force and effect. The nonvesting of Employee’s rights as to a Deferred Bonus for any particular Base Fiscal Year shall not prejudice or adversely affect in any way Employee’s rights, if any, to receive (or retain) a Deferred Bonus for another Base Fiscal Year.

 

17



 

ARTICLE IV

Other Provisions

 

Section 4.1 Funding; Tax Advances.

 

(A)          Within sixty (60) days after the amount of a Deferred Bonus for a Base Fiscal Year has been determined pursuant to Section 2.1(B) (and assuming that Employee’s rights thereto have not previously lapsed or vested pursuant to any of the provisions of Article III), Employer shall pay the amount of such Deferred Bonus to the trustee of Employer’s Deferred Bonus Trust (the “Trust”), for the account of Employer and Employee, as their respective interests may appear, such payment to be held, administered and disbursed in accordance with the terms of this Agreement and the Trust. Where appropriate, all references to “Employer” in Section 3.2 hereof shall be deemed to be references to the “Trust.”

 

(B)          If Employee’s rights to a Deferred Bonus for a Base Fiscal Year vest under circumstances in which the amount of the Deferred Bonus is deemed to be taxable income to the Employee for Federal, State or local income tax purposes and Employee is, or may be, liable to pay taxes on such deemed income before the Deferred Bonus is paid to Employee, the Trust shall make an advance to Employee in an amount sufficient to permit Employee to pay the full amount of all taxes on such deemed income before such taxes shall become due. Any such advance shall not bear interest, may be repaid to the Trust, in whole or in part, at any time and shall, in any event, be repaid to the Trust in full at the same time the Deferred Bonus is paid to Employee.

 

Section 4.2 No Employment Agreement.

 

This Agreement does not constitute an employment agreement between Employer and Employee but instead is only intended to set out the respective rights and obligations of

 

18



 

the parties with respect to Deferred Bonuses for Fiscal Year 2008 and subsequent Fiscal Years. Without in any way limiting the generality of the foregoing, it is expressly acknowledged and agreed that Employee does not have an employment agreement with Employer and that, unless or until the parties otherwise agree, Employee is an at-will employee of Employer; provided, however, that Employee’s status as an at-will employee shall not prejudice or adversely affect any of Employer’s vested rights hereunder upon any Termination of Employment.

 

Section 4.3 Arbitration.

 

(A)          Any disagreements which, under the provisions of Sections 2.1(B) or 3.2(C) hereof, are referable to arbitration, shall be referred to, and finally determined by, arbitration pursuant to the applicable Rules of Commercial Arbitration (“Rules”) of the American Arbitration Association (“AAA”), subject to the provisions of this Section 4.3. Employer and Employee shall each attempt to resolve any disagreement which is referable to arbitration pursuant to Sections 2.1(B) or 3.2(C) hereof by agreement and each party agrees to negotiate in good faith for a period of at least fifteen (15) business days after any such disagreement has arisen. If, despite such good faith negotiations, the parties are unable to resolve any such disagreement by agreement, then either party may, at any time after the expiration of the foregoing period of fifteen (15) business days, demand arbitration of such disagreement.

 

(B)          If the amount in controversy in the arbitrable disagreement is One Hundred Thousand Dollars ($100,000) or less, the arbitration shall be conducted before a single arbitrator selected by Employer and Employee within thirty (30) days after service of the initial demand for arbitration. If the amount in controversy exceeds One Hundred

 

19



 

Thousand Dollars ($100,000), the arbitration shall be conducted before three (3) arbitrators, one of whom shall be selected by Employer within thirty (30) days after service of the initial demand for arbitration, one of whom shall be selected by Employee within the foregoing thirty (30) day period and one of whom shall be selected by the two arbitrators selected by the parties within thirty (30) days after the second of such arbitrators is selected. Each arbitrator selected pursuant to this Section 4.3(B) shall be independent of both Employer and Employee and shall have at least fifteen (15) years experience in the subject matter of the disagreement to be arbitrated. If any arbitrator is not timely selected within the periods provided for in this Section 4.3(B), such arbitrator shall be appointed by the AAA pursuant to the Rules. Any arbitration pursuant to this Section 4.3 shall be conducted in Bethesda, Maryland, or in such other location as may then be agreed by the parties. A judgment upon the award rendered in any such arbitration shall be final and binding upon the parties and may be entered in any court of competent jurisdiction. All fees and expenses of the arbitrator(s) and all administrative costs of the arbitration shall be borne equally by the parties unless the arbitrator(s) otherwise direct(s). This agreement to arbitrate shall be specifically enforceable.

 

Section 4.4 Governing Law.

 

This Agreement and the rights and liabilities of the parties hereunder shall be governed by, and construed in accordance with, the laws of the State of Maryland without regard to such State’s principles of conflicts of law.

 

20



 

Section 4.5 No Third Party Beneficiary; Spendthrift Clause.

 

(A)          This Agreement is made solely and specifically between and for the benefit of the parties hereto and (subject to Section 4.6) their Beneficiaries, heirs, successors, assigns and legal representatives. No other Person whatsoever shall have any rights, interests or claims hereunder or be entitled to any benefits under or on account of this Agreement as a third parry beneficiary or otherwise.

 

(B)            To the maximum extent permitted by law, neither Employee nor any Beneficiary shall have any power to dispose of or to charge by way of anticipation any vested, potential or other right, title or interest hereunder, and any vested Deferred Bonus payable to Employee or any Beneficiary shall be free and clear of his debts, contracts, dispositions, and anticipations, and shall not be taken or reached by any legal or equitable process.

 

Section 4.6 Benefit and Burden.

 

This Agreement, and the respective rights and obligations of the parties hereunder, may not be assigned, sold, hypothecated, or otherwise transferred, either outright or as security, without the prior written consent of the other party which may be delayed, withheld or conditioned in the sole and absolute discretion of such other party; provided, however, that Employee may designate a Beneficiary without Employer’s consent. Any transfer, or attempted transfer, in violation of the provisions of this Section 4.6 shall be null and void ab initio. Subject to the foregoing provisions of this Section 4.6, the provisions of this Agreement shall be binding upon, and shall inure to the benefit of, the parties hereto, the Employee’s Beneficiary and their respective heirs, successors, legal representatives and permitted assigns.

 

21


 

Section 4.7 Computation of Time.

 

In computing any notice or other period of time prescribed or allowed by any provision of this Agreement, the day of the act, event, or default from which the designated period of time begins to run shall not be included. The last day of the period so computed shall be included, unless it is a Saturday, Sunday or a legal holiday in Bethesda, Maryland, in which event the period runs until the end of the next, day which is not a Saturday, Sunday or such legal holiday. All notice or other periods expire as of 5:00 p.m. (local time in Bethesda, Maryland; on. the last day of the notice or other period.

 

Section 4.8 Entire Agreement; Amendment.

 

(A)          This Agreement contains the entire understanding between Employer and Employee regarding the subject matter hereof and supersedes any prior or contemporaneous understandings or agreements between them respecting such subject matter. There are no representations, warranties, agreements, arrangements or understandings, oral, written or expressed by, or based upon, conduct, between the parties relating to the subject matter hereof which are not fully expressed herein.

 

(B)           This Agreement, including the Schedules hereto, may not be amended, modified, waived, terminated or discharged except by an instrument in writing which is duly executed by the party sought to be charged with any such amendment, modification, waiver, termination or discharge.

 

Section 4.9 Construction.

 

(A)          Common nouns and pronouns shall be deemed to refer to the masculine, feminine, neuter, singular and plural, as the context may require.

 

22



 

(B)           All headings herein are inserted only for convenience and ease of reference and are not to be considered in the construction or interpretation of this Agreement.

 

(C)           Numbered or lettered Articles, sections, subsections, subparts and subparagraphs herein contained refer to Articles, sections, subsections, subparts and subparagraphs of this Agreement unless otherwise expressly stated. The words “herein,” “hereof,” “hereunder,” “hereby,” “this Agreement” and other similar references shall be construed to mean and include this Agreement and all amendments of, supplements to, and Schedules and other attachments to this Agreement unless the context shall clearly indicate or require otherwise.

 

(D)           Employer and Employee have both participated extensively in the negotiation and drafting of this Agreement. Accordingly, this Agreement shall not be interpreted or construed for or against either party as the draftsman hereof.

 

Section 4.10 Notices.

 

Any notices, demands, consents, requests or other communications (hereinafter collectively referred to in this Section 4.10 as “notice”) provided for or permitted to be given pursuant to this Agreement shall be in writing, and shall be delivered by hand, by first-class mail, postage prepaid (with a return receipt requested), or by Federal Express, or by some other commercial overnight delivery service, to the parties at the following addresses:

 

(i) If to Employer:

Walker & Dunlop GP, LLC

 

7501 Wisconsin Avenue, Suite 1200

 

Bethesda, Maryland 20814-6531

 

Attn: Mr. William M. Walker

 

23



 

(ii) If to Employee:

Mr. Howard W. Smith III

 

2915 44 th  Street, NW

 

Washington, DC 20016

 

 

Each notice shall be deemed given on the day it is received or on the day its delivery is refused by or for the addressee, whichever is earlier. Each party may change its address or addressee for notice by giving notice thereof in the manner provided above (such notice to be given at least five (5) business days prior to its effective date).

 

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed and delivered this Agreement as of the date first above written.

 

 

WALKER & DUNLOP GP, LLC

 

 

 

(“Employer”)

 

 

 

Date:

June 16, 2008

 

 

 

 

By:

/s/ William Walker

 

 

 

 

 

William M. Walker

 

 

 

 

 

President

 

 

 

 

 

Howard W. Smith III

 

 

 

(“Employee”)

 

 

 

Date:

June 16, 2008

 

 

 

 

By:

/s/ Howard W. Smith III

 

 

 

 

 

Howard W. Smith III

 

 

 

 

 

Executive Vice President

 

24



 

SCHEDULE 1-2008

 

Formulae for Computation of Deferred Bonus

 

1.            (A) The following is a summary of key defined terms for 2008:

 

(i)                                      Employee: Howard W. Smith III

 

(ii)                                   Base Fiscal Year: January 1, 2008 - December 31, 2008

 

(iii)                                Financial target: The attainment by Green Park of Adjusted Net Income of $15,144,697.00 (representing the 2008 Budget adjusted upward by 80% of sub-servicing costs, and downward by servicing advances)

 

(iv)                               Employee Percentage: 6.5%.

 

(B)            Employee shall be entitled to a Deferred Bonus in the amount equal to (i) the Employee Percentage times (ii) the amount by which Green Park’s Adjusted Net Income in the Base Fiscal Year exceeds the Base Financial Target, subject to all applicable vesting provisions set forth in the foregoing and attached Incentive Deferred Bonus Compensation Agreement (“Agreement”) of which this Schedule 1-2008 is a part. In no event shall the Deferred Bonus be less than zero.

 

2.              Green Park’s Adjusted Net Income during any Base Fiscal Year or during any Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period applicable to such Base Fiscal Year (hereinafter referred to in this Schedule 1-2008 as a “Period”) shall be determined as follows:

 

(A)            The starting point for the determination of such Adjusted Net Income shall be Green Park’s net income for the relevant Fiscal Year, or the relevant Period, as the case may be, determined in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles (“Net Income”) (such Net Income to be based on audited figures, if available, or to become

 

25



 

available in the ordinary course of business. If there has not been, or is not to be in the ordinary course of business, an independent audit to establish Green Park’s audited net income for a particular Fiscal Year or Period, Green Park’s net income for such Fiscal Year or Period shall be determined by Employer in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles and all customary procedures normally utilized in determining Green Park’s audited net income.)

 

(B)           Green Park’s Net Income for Fiscal Year, or during a Period, shall be (i) increased by (a) any reserves or provisions for future loan losses deducted in the computation of such Net Income (except that any actual loan losses deducted in computing such Net Income shall not be added back to such Net Income); and (b) any recoveries or reimbursements received as a result of previously delinquent loan (to the extent not already expensed or deducted in the computation of Net Income); and (c) 80% of any subservicing fees paid to Walker & Dunlop to service Green Park’s loans; and (ii) decreased by the amount of net servicing and delinquency advances made as a result of delinquent loans (to the extent not already expensed or deducted in the computation of Net Income.)

 

(C)           Green Park’s Net Income during a Fiscal Year, as adjusted in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 2(B), shall be Green Park’s “Adjusted Net Income” for that Fiscal Year for the purposes of this Schedule 1-2008.

 

(D)            Green Park’s Net Income during a Period, as adjusted in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 2(B), shall be Green Park’s Net Income” for that Period for the purposes of this Schedule 1-2008.

 

(E)             Green Park’s Adjusted Net Income during a Period shall be multiplied by a fraction, the numerator of which shall be twelve (12) and the denominator of which shall be the number of full calendar months in the Period, and the product of such multiplication

 

26



 

shall be Green Park’s “Average Adjusted Net Income” for that Period for the purposes of this Schedule I-2008.

 

3.              The Annualized Financial Target during the Period applicable to the Base Fiscal Year shall be the attainment by Green Park of an Average Adjusted Net Income equal to, or greater than the Base Financial Target.

 

4.              The operation of the formulae set out in this Schedule 1-2008 may be illustrated by the following examples: for these examples only, assume the following facts: (i) the Base Fiscal Year is January 1, 2002-December 31, 2002; (ii) the Base Financial Target is $10,000,000; and (iii) the Employee Percentage is 10%:

 

(A)            Assume that Employee remains in Employer’s employ from January 1, 2002 until November 30, 2003, on which date Employee has a Voluntary Resignation. Inasmuch as Employee’s employment with Employer terminated due to a Voluntary Resignation prior to the end of the Period applicable to the Base Fiscal Year, Employee is not entitled to his Deferred Bonus for the Base Fiscal Year (even if Green Park achieves both the Base Financial Target and the Annualized Financial Target.)

 

(B)           Assume that Employee remains in the Employer’s employ throughout the Base Fiscal Year and that Green Park’s Adjusted Net Income during the Base Fiscal Year is $11,000,000 (or $1,000,000 more than the Base Financial Target of $10,000,000 for the Base Fiscal Year.) On these assumptions, Employee’s Deferred Bonus for the Base Fiscal Year is $100,000 (10% [the Employee Percentage] time $1,000,000), subject to all applicable vesting provisions set out in the Agreement.

 

(C)           Assume that Employee remains in Employer’s employ from January 1, 2002 through June 30, 2003, on which date Employee’s Intentional Death or Disability occurs. Further assume that Green Park has Adjusted Net Income of $11,000,000 between January 1, 2002, and December 31, 2002, Adjusted Net Income of $10,500,000 between

 

27



 

January 1, 2003, and December 31, 2003, and Adjusted Net Income of $10,000,000 between January 1, 2003, and December 31, 2004. On these assumptions:

 

(i)              Employee’s Deferred Bonus for the Base Fiscal Year is $100,000 (see Paragraph 4(B) above.)

 

(ii)           Green Park’s Average Adjusted Net Income during the Period is $10,500,000. This is determined by multiplying $31,500,000 (Green Park’s Adjusted Net Income during the relevant Period (which began on January 1, 2002, and ended on December 31, 2004) by a fraction, the numerator of which is twelve (12) and the denominator of which is thirty-six (36) (the number of calendar months in the Period), (i.e., $31,500,000 x 12/36 = $10,500,000). Since the Annualized Financial target for the Period is the attainment by Green Park of an Average Adjusted Net Income of $10,000,000 during the Period, and since, on the assumed facts, Green Park’s actual Average Adjusted Net Income is $10,500,000 during the Period, the Annualized Financial Target has been bet. Moreover, since the Base Financial Target was exceeded during the Base Fiscal Year (i.e., Green Park had net Annualized Income during the Base Fiscal Year in excess of $10,000,000) and Employee’s employment with Employer did not terminate as a result of a Voluntary Resignation or a Termination With Cause during the Period, Employee’s rights to a Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period ended.) Pursuant to Section 3.2(A)(i) of the Agreement, the Deferred Bonus shall be due and payable to Employee’s legal representative or Beneficiary within sixty (60) days after December 31, 2004 (unless the time for payment is extended pursuant to Sections 3.2(B) and (C) of the Agreement in order to permit Employer to determine whether the Annualized Financial Target was met during the applicable Period.)

 

(D)          Assume that Employee remains in Employer’s employ from January 1, 2002, through June 30, 2003, on which date Employee’s Unintentional Death or Disability occurs. Further assume that Green Park has Adjusted Net Income of

 

28



 

$11,000,000 between January 1, 2002 and December 31, 2002, and Adjusted Net Income of $2,500,000 between January 1, 2003, and June 30, 2003. On these assumptions:

 

(i)            Employee’s Deferred Bonus for the Base Fiscal Year is $100,000 (see Paragraph 4(B) above.)

 

(ii)           Because Employee’s employment terminated as a result of his/her Unintentional Death or Disability which occurred on June 30,2003, the applicable Period for the Base Fiscal Year began on January 1, 2002, and ended on June 30, 2003.

 

(iii)          Green Park’s Average Adjusted Net Income during the applicable Period is $9,000,000. This is determined by multiplying $13,500,000 (Green Park’s Adjusted Net Income during the Period) times twelve (12) divided by eighteen (18) (the number of calendar months in the Period), (i.e., $13,500,000 x 12/18 = $9,000,000). This Average Net Income is less than the Annualized Financial Target (which is an Average Adjusted Net Income of $10,000,000). However, since Employee’s employment terminated as a result of his/her Unintentional Death or Disability, it is only necessary that Green Park attain 65% of the Annualized Financial Target (or an Average Adjusted Net Income of $6,500,000 ($10,000,000 x 65%) during the Period). Green Park’s actual Average Adjusted Net Income during the Period ($9,000,000) exceeds 65% of the Annualized Financial Target during the Period ($6,500,000) and, therefore, on the assumed facts, the Annualized Financial Target has been met.

 

(iv)        On the assumed facts, Employee’s employment did not terminate as a result of a Voluntary Resignation or a Termination With Cause occurring within the Period. As a result, on the assumed facts, Employee’s rights to a Deferred Bonus for the Base Fiscal Year vested on June 30, 2003 (the last day of the Period). Because the applicable Period ended as a result of Employee’s Unintentional Death or Disability, Employee’s Deferred Bonus for the Base Fiscal Year shall be due and payable to Employee’s

 

29



 

legal representative or Beneficiary within sixty (60) days after December 31, 2004 pursuant to Section 3.1(C) of the Agreement (unless the time for payment is extended in order to permit Employer to determine whether the Annualized Financial Target was met during the Period).

 

(E)            Assume that Employee remains in Employer’s employ from January 1, 2002, through December 31, 2004. Further assume that Green Park has Adjusted Net Income of $11,000,000 between January 1, 2002, and December 31, 2002, Adjusted Net Income of $10,500,000 between January 1, 2003, and December 31, 2003, and Adjusted Net Income of $10,000,000 between January 1, 2004, and December 31, 2004. On these assumptions:

 

(i)            Employee’s Deferred Bonus for the Base Fiscal Year is $100,000 (see Paragraph 4(B) above.)

 

(ii)           Green Park’s Average Adjusted Net Income during the Period is $10,500,000 (see Paragraph 4(C)(ii) above.) Since the Annualized Financial Target for the Period is the attainment by Green Park of an Average Adjusted Net Income of $10,000,000 during the Period, and since, on the assumed facts, Green Park’s actual Average Adjusted Net Income is $10,500,000 during the Period, the Annualized Financial Target has been met. Pursuant to Section 3.2(A)(i) of the Agreement, the Deferred Bonus shall be due and payable to Employee within sixty (60) days after December 31, 2004 (unless the time for payment is extended pursuant to Sections 3.2(B) and (C) of the Agreement in order to permit Employer to determine whether the Annualized Financial Target was met during the applicable Period).

 

5.             The foregoing examples under Paragraph 4 of this Schedule 1-2008 assume that Employee remains in Green Park’s employ throughout the first year of the Period (i.e., throughout the Base Fiscal Year) and that Employee’s employment with Green Park is then terminated at some point during the remainder of such Period. If Employee’s employment

 

30



 

with Green Park is terminated during the first year of such Period (or at any other time during such Period) as a result of a Voluntary Termination or a Termination With Cause, then Employee is not entitled to his Deferred Bonus for the Base Fiscal Year. If Employee’s employment with Green Park is terminated during the first year of such Period for any reason other than a Voluntary Termination or a Termination With Cause, then the computations regarding the amount of Employee’s Deferred Bonus for the Base Fiscal Year are first made as set out in Paragraphs 1 through 3 of this Schedule 1-2008 as adjusted by the provisions of Section 2. 1 (A)(ii)(a) of the Agreement. The foregoing may be illustrated by the following example:

 

(A)        Assume that the Base Financial Target and the Employee Percentage are as set out in Paragraph 4 above; that Employee remains in Employer’s employ from January 1, 2002 until June 25, 2002, on which date Employee’s Intentional Death or Disability occurs. Further assume that Green Park has Adjusted Net Income of $5,500,000 between January 1, 2002, and June 30, 2002; Adjusted Net Income of $11,000,000 between January 1, 2002 and December 31, 2002; Adjusted Net Income of $10,500,000 between January 1, 2003 and December 31, 2003; and Adjusted Net Income of $10,000,000 between January 1, 2004 and December 31, 2004. On these assumptions:

 

(i)            Green Park’s Base Financial Target for the Base Fiscal Year is first pro-rated pursuant to Section 2. 1 (A)(ii)(a) of the Agreement by multiplying that Target ($10,000,000 of Adjusted Net Income) by six (6) (the number of months, rounded to the nearest whole number, that Employee was employed by Green Park during the Base Fiscal Year) and then dividing by twelve (12). The result (or $5,000,000 of Adjusted Net Income) is the pro-rated Base Financial Target for Employee’s Deferred Bonus for the Base Fiscal Year.

 

(ii)            The pro-rated Base Financial Target for the Base Fiscal Year (or $5,000,000 of Adjusted Net Income) is then compared with Green Park’s actual Adjusted

 

31


 

Net Income between January 1, 2002 and June 30, 2002 (or $5,500,000). Since the adjusted Target was exceeded, the amount of Employee’s potential Deferred Bonus for the first six months of the Base Fiscal Year is 10% (the Employee Percentage) of the excess (or $500,000) of actual Adjusted Net Income over the adjusted Base Financial Target amount during that six-month period, or $50,000.

 

(iii)         Notwithstanding Employee’s Intentional Death or Disability during the Base Fiscal Year, the other vesting and payout provisions of the Agreement are not affected (see Agreement, Section 2. 1 (A)(ii)(b)). Since Employee’s termination of employment was caused by his/her Intentional Death or Disability, his Deferred Bonus is only payable under these circumstances if Green Park meets its Annualized Financial Target during the three year Period attributable to the Base Fiscal Year (see Agreement, Sections 1. 1 (E)(i)(a), 2. 1 (A)(ii)(b)). On the assumed facts, Green Park meets its Annualized Financial Target during the latter Period and, accordingly, Employee’s Deferred Bonus of $50,000 for the Base Fiscal Year is payable to Employee’s legal representative or Beneficiary pursuant to the Agreement (see Paragraph 4(D)(iv) above).

 

(B)            Under the example given in Paragraph 5(A), Employee’s employment with Green Park terminated (for a reason other than a Voluntary Resignation or a Termination With Cause) during the Base Fiscal Year but the Period attributable to that Base Fiscal Year continued beyond the end of the Base Fiscal Year. Under certain circumstances, however, Employee’s employment may terminate during a Base Fiscal Year and the Period applicable to such Base Fiscal Year will also terminate during that Base Fiscal Year. In this event, Employee’s entitlement to his Deferred Bonus is determined in accordance with Paragraphs 1 through 3 of this Schedule 1-2005, as adjusted by the provisions of Section 2. 1 (A)(ii)(b) of the Agreement. The foregoing may be illustrated by the following example:

 

32



 

(Percentage are as set out in Paragraph 4 above; that Employee remains in Employer’s employ from January 1, 2002 until June 30, 2002, at which time a Termination Without Cause occurs; and that Green Park has Adjusted Net Income in the amounts and for the periods set out in Paragraph 5(A) above.

 

(ii)            On these assumptions, the adjusted Base Financial Target is met for the first six months of the Base Fiscal Year and Employee’s potential Deferred Bonus for that period is $50,000 (see Paragraph 5(A)(ii)).

 

(i) Assume that the Base Financial Target and the Employee Percentage are as set out in Paragraph 4 above; that Employee remains in Employer’s employ from January 1, 2002 until June 30, 2002, at which time a Termination Without Cause occurs; and that Green Park has Adjusted Net Income in the amounts and for the periods as set out in Paragraph 5(A) above.

 

(ii) On these assumptions, the adjusted Base Financial Target is met for the first six months of the Base Fiscal Year and Employee’s potential Deferred Bonus for that period if $50,000 (see Paragraph 5(A)(ii)).

 

(iii) Because Employee’s employment terminated as of June 30, 2002 as a result of a Termination Without Cause, the Period attributed to the Base Fiscal Year also terminated as of June 30, 2002 (see Agreement, Section 1.1(E)(i)(c)). The Annualized Financial Target for the Base Fiscal Year must, therefore, be pro-rated by multiplying that Target ($10,000,000 of Adjusted Net Income) times six (6) (the number of months rounded, if necessary, to the nearest whole number, that Employee was employed by Green Park during the Base Fiscal Year) and then dividing by twelve (12) (see Agreement, Section 2. 1 (A)(ii)(b)). The result (or $5,000,000 of Adjusted Net Income) is the pro-rated Annualized Financial Target for the Period attributable to the Base Fiscal Year.

 

33



 

(iv)          The pro-rated Annualized Financial Target for the Period attributable to the Base Fiscal Year (or $5,000,000 of Adjusted Net Income) is then compared with Green Park’s actual Adjusted Net Income during that Period (or $5,500,000). Since the adjusted Target was exceeded, and since the Employee’s employment during the Period was not terminated as a result of a Voluntary Retirement or a Termination With Cause, Employee’s Deferred Bonus for the Base Fiscal Year vests of June 30, 2002, and is payable to him in accordance with the terms of the Agreement.

 

6. Unless otherwise defined in this Schedule 1-2008, all capitalized words and phrases in this Schedule 1-2008 shall have the same meanings as are ascribed to them in the Agreement.

 

APPROVED AND ACCEPTED:

 

 

/s/ William Walker

 

June 16, 2008

 

 

 

William M. Walker

 

Date

 

 

 

President

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

/s/ Howard W. Smith III

 

June 16, 2008

 

 

 

Howard W. Smith III

 

Date

 

 

 

Executive Vice President

 

 

 

34




Exhibit 10.10

 

AMENDMENT TO

INCENTIVE DEFERRED BONUS COMPENSATION AGREEMENT

BETWEEN WALKER & DUNLOP GP, LLC AND

HOWARD W. SMITH

 

WHEREAS, Walker & Dunlop GP, LLC (the “Company”) and Howard W. Smith (the “Employee”) previously entered into an Incentive Deferred Bonus Compensation Agreement (the “Agreement”) originally effective as of June 16, 2008; and

 

WHEREAS, Section 4.8(B) of the Agreement provides that the Agreement may be amended at any time by written consent of the Company and the Employee; and

 

WHEREAS, the Company and the Employee now wish to amend the Agreement, effective as of January 1, 2009, in order to ensure compliance with the requirements of section 409A of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended, and to make certain other changes to the terms of payment as permitted by applicable transitional guidance.

 

NOW, THEREFORE, the Company and the Employee agree to amend the Agreement, effective as of January 1, 2009, as follows:

 

Section 3.2 is amended by deleting subsection 3.2(A)(ii) in its entirety and inserting the following in lieu thereof:

 

(ii)           If Employee’s rights to a Deferred Bonus for a Base Fiscal Year vest pursuant to Section 3.1(D), the portion of the Deferred Bonus attributable to each respective Base Fiscal Year shall be paid to Employee (or, if applicable, his Beneficiary) within sixty (60) days after the third anniversary of the first day of that Base Fiscal Year.  For example, if the Employee has earned a Deferred Bonus for the 2008 and 2009 Base Fiscal Years and a Change in Control occurs on December 31, 2009, (a) the Employee’s rights to the Deferred Bonus shall become fully earned and vested as of December 31, 2009; (b) the portion of the Deferred Bonus attributable to the 2008 Base Fiscal Year shall be paid to the Employee (or, if applicable, his Beneficiary) within 60 days after January 1, 2011, without regard to whether or not the Employee remains employed with the Company (or any successor entity) on that date; and (c) the portion of the Deferred Bonus attributable to the 2009 Base Fiscal Year shall be paid to the Employee (or, if applicable, his Beneficiary) within 60 days after January 1, 2012, without regard to whether or not the Employee remains employed with the Company (or any successor entity) on that date.

 

1



 

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed this Amendment as of the 31 day of December, 2008.

 

 

WALKER & DUNLOP GP, LLC

 

By:

/s/ Deborah A. Wilson

 

Name:

Deborah A. Wilson

 

Title:

SVP & CFO

 

 

 

 

 

/s/ Howard W. Smith III

 

Howard W. Smith

 

2




Exhibit 10.11

 

Warner, R.

2008

 

INCENTIVE DEFERRED BONUS COMPENSATION AGREEMENT

 

THIS AGREEMENT (“Agreement”), made as of the 16th day of June, 2008, by and between Walker & Dunlop GP, LLC (“Employer”) and Richard C. Warner (“Employee”).

 

WITNESSETH THAT:

 

WHEREAS, Employer has a substantial investment and ownership interest in Green Park Financial Limited Partnership (“Green Park”) which acts as an approved Fannie Mae multifamily lender under the DUS program; and

 

WHEREAS, Employee is serving as Employer’s Senior Vice President and Chief Underwriter and, in that capacity has senior management responsibility for Green Park’s operations and an important role in Green Park’s success; and

 

WHEREAS, in order to maximize the returns it derives from its substantial investment and ownership in Green Park, Employer desires to provide Employee with an incentive to contribute to the growth of the business and profitability of Green Park and, to that end, the parties desire to enter into this Agreement.

 

NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the foregoing and of the mutual promises hereinafter set forth and of other good and valuable consideration, the sufficiency and receipt of which prior to the execution of these presents is hereby acknowledged, the parties hereto, intending to be legally bound, do hereby agree as follows:

 

1



 

ARTICLE I

 

Definitions

 

Section 1.1 Definitions.

 

When used in this Agreement, the following terms will have the meanings set forth below:

 

(A)          “Base Fiscal Year” means the Fiscal Year to which a Deferred Bonus relates (e.g., Fiscal Year 2008 shall be the Base Fiscal Year for any Deferred Bonus potentially payable to Employee for Fiscal Year 2008).

 

(B)            “Beneficiary” means one or more individuals designated by Employee to receive benefits payable hereunder upon Employee’s death (whether voluntary or involuntary). Employee shall designate his Beneficiary in writing on a form provided by Employer. Employee may change his designated Beneficiary by filing a new form with Employer (at least ten (10) business days prior to the effective date of such change). If no Beneficiary designated by Employee survives Employee, or if Employee fails to designate a Beneficiary, any payments due hereunder upon Employee’s death shall be paid to Employee’s executor or other legal representative.

 

(C)           “Change in Control” shall mean the occurrence of any one or more of the following without Employee’s prior consent (which consent can be conditioned or withheld, with or without cause, in Employee’s sole discretion): (i) the sale or other disposition of all, or substantially all, of the assets of Green Park or Employer; or (ii) the sale or other transfer within any period of twelve (12) consecutive calendar months (either in one transaction or in a series of transactions within such twelve (12) month period) of partnership interests (or stock or other forms of ownership interests, as the case may be) representing

 

2



 

more than fifty percent (50%) of all partnership interests (or all stock or all other forms of ownership interests) in either Green Park or Employer; but not if stock is transferred to a family trust or other entity designed principally to facilitate estate planning.

 

(D)          “Deferred Bonus” means the amount of the deferred bonus potentially payable to Employee on account of a particular Base Fiscal Year in accordance with the provisions hereof.

 

(E)           (i)            “Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period” means, with respect to each Deferred Bonus for each Base Fiscal Year, the period beginning on the first day of the Base Fiscal Year and terminating on various dates as determined in accordance with the following provisions:

 

(a)           If Employee remains continuously in Employer’s employ for a period of three (3) years commencing with the first day of a Base Fiscal Year, or if Employee’s employment with Employer terminates as a result of Employee’s Intentional Death or Disability occurring within a three (3) year period commencing on the first day of a Base Fiscal Year, the last day of the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period applicable to that Base Fiscal Year shall be the last day of the three (3) year period commencing with the first day of the Base Fiscal Year;

 

(b)          If Employee’s employment with Employer terminates as a result of Employee’s Unintentional Death or Disability occurring within a three (3) year period commencing on the first day of a Base Fiscal Year, the last day of the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period applicable to that Base Fiscal Year shall be the date on which Employee’s Unintentional Death or Disability occurs;

 

(c)          If Employee’s employment with Employer terminates as a result of a Termination Without Cause occurring within a three (3) year period commencing on the first day of a Base Fiscal Year, the last day of the Deferred Bonus Earn-

 

3



 

Out Period applicable to that Base Fiscal Year shall be the date on which the Termination Without Cause occurs;

 

(d)          If Employee’s employment with Employer terminates as a result of a Change in Control occurring within a three (3) year period commencing on the first day of a Base Fiscal Year, the last day of the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period applicable to that Base Fiscal Year shall be the date on which the Change in Control occurs; and

 

(e)          If a Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period terminates upon the occurrence of an event (such as, by way of example, a Termination Without Cause of Employee’s employment), that termination (and all consequences associated therewith under the provisions hereof) shall not be affected by the subsequent occurrence of another event (such as, by way of example, a Change in Control) which, but for the prior occurrence of the first event, also would have resulted in a termination of that Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period.

 

(ii)             As hereinafter appears, Employee shall not be entitled to receive a Deferred Bonus, and there shall be no Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period, for any particular Base Fiscal Year if Employee’s employment with Employer terminates as a result of either a Voluntary Resignation or a Termination With Cause which occurs within a three (3) year period commencing on the first day of that Base Fiscal Year.

 

(F)             “Disability” means disability as a result of an accident, illness or mental disorder which results in Employee’s unwillingness or inability, for a period of ninety (90) days (in the aggregate) during any period of twelve (12) consecutive months, substantially to perform the duties assigned to Employee by Employer immediately prior to the commencement of the Disability. For all purposes hereof:

 

4



 

(i)            Employee’s Disability shall be deemed to have occurred as of the last day of the foregoing period of ninety (90) days;

 

(ii)           If Employer and Employee disagree as to whether a Disability has occurred or as to when a period of Disability has begun or ended, and if the disagreement cannot be resolved within fifteen (15) business days after it has first arisen, Employer and Employee shall each, within fifteen (15) business days after the expiration of the first period of fifteen (15) business days, appoint a qualified physician or other medical professional (hereinafter in this Section 1.1(F)(ii) collectively a “Doctor”) (and if either Employer or Employee fails timely to make such an appointment, the Doctor appointed by or for the other party shall resolve all disagreements regarding Disability). The two Doctors (or, if applicable, the one Doctor) shall, as promptly as possible, make a written determination as to all disagreements with respect to the Employee’s Disability; provided, however, that if two Doctors are timely appointed and cannot agree on all matters respecting Employee’s Disability within a period of thirty (30) days after the second of them has been timely appointed, the two of them shall, as promptly as possible thereafter, appoint a third Doctor and all disagreements as to Employee’s Disability shall be determined in writing by a majority of the three Doctors. All good faith decisions made by one or more Doctors regarding Employee’s Disability shall be conclusive and binding on Employer and Employee. If such decisions are made by a single Doctor, all fees and expenses of such Doctor shall be borne equally by Employer and Employee. Otherwise, Employer and Employee shall each pay the fees and expenses of any Doctor appointed by or for it or him and shall, if applicable, bear equally the fees and expenses of any third Doctor.

 

(G)           “Employee” means Donna Mighty and, where appropriate, shall also be deemed to mean his executor, guardian or other legal representative.

 

5



 

(H)            “Employer” means Walker & Dunlop GP, LLC and any successor to, or assignee of, Walker & Dunlop GP, LLC to which Employee has consented, in Employee’s sole discretion.

 

(I)             “Fiscal Year” means a fiscal year of Green Park (presently a calendar year).

 

(J)            “Intentional Death or Disability” means the death or Disability of Employee which results from an injury or illness that is intentionally self-inflicted by Employee or intentionally inflicted upon Employee by a third Person acting, or failing to act, under the control, or at the direction, of Employee.

 

(K)          “Person” means, as the context requires, an individual, partnership, corporation, trust, unincorporated association, joint stock company, or other legal entity or association.

 

(L)            “Schedules” means, collectively, the Schedules attached, or to be attached, hereto.

 

(M)         “Termination With Cause” means the termination by Employer of Employee’s employment with Employer on account of (i) his conviction for the commission of a felony in the course of his employment with Employer, or (ii) his gross, willful and intentional misconduct in connection with his employment with Employer which causes a material decrease in the net profits of Green Park for the Fiscal Year within which such misconduct occurs.

 

(N)          “Termination Without Cause” means the termination by Employer of Employee’s employment with Employer without Employee’s consent for any reason which does not constitute Termination With Cause.

 

6



 

(0)           “Unintentional Death or Disability” means the death or disability of Employee which results from any reason which does not constitute Employee’s Intentional Death or Disability.

 

(P)           “Voluntary Resignation” means the voluntary decision or election by Employee to terminate his employment with Employer for any reason whatsoever other than a material breach by Employer of this Agreement which is not cured within any applicable grace period specified herein.

 

Section 1.2 Certain Other Definitions.

 

When used herein with its initial letter(s) capitalized, a term which is not defined in Section 1.1 shall be given the definition assigned to it elsewhere in this Agreement.

 

Section 1.3 Schedules and Exhibits.

 

Attached hereto and forming an integral part of this Agreement are various Schedules and Exhibits, all of which are incorporated into this Agreement as fully as if the contents thereof were set out in full herein at each point of reference thereto. The provisions of the immediately preceding sentence shall also apply to any Schedules, Exhibits or other attachments which, pursuant to the provisions hereof, are to be prepared and attached hereto in the future. Notwithstanding any other provision hereof, if there is any conflict or inconsistency between the provisions contained in this Agreement and the provisions contained in any Schedule or Exhibit attached hereto (either now or in the future), the provisions of the Schedule or Exhibit shall govern and prevail.

 

7



 

ARTICLE II

 

Determination Of Deferred Bonus

 

Section 2.1 In General.

 

(A)          (i)            As a general matter (unless otherwise agreed by Employer and Employee), Employee’s Deferred Bonus for each Base Fiscal Year commencing after the date hereof shall depend on two factors, namely, the achievement of a base financial target (the “Base Financial Target”) during each such Base Fiscal Year and the achievement of an annualized financial target (the “Annualized Financial Target”) during the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period applicable to such Base Fiscal Year. Commencing sixty (60) days prior to the commencement of each Base Fiscal Year commencing after the date hereof, Employer and Employee shall negotiate in good faith regarding the Base Financial Target for such Base Fiscal Year as well as the Annualized Financial Target for the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period (the foregoing Base Financial Target and Annualized Financial Target being hereinafter collectively referred to as “Targets”). If Employer and Employee agree upon the Targets for a Base Fiscal Year commencing after the date hereof, the Targets for that Base Fiscal Year shall be incorporated in a Schedule which shall be attached hereto and shall become a part hereof. If, despite good faith negotiations, Employer and Employee are unable to agree on the Targets for a Base Fiscal Year commencing after the date hereof prior to the first day of such Base Fiscal Year, the last set of Targets agreed upon (as set out in the last Schedule attached hereto) shall be deemed to be the Targets for that Base Fiscal Year; provided, however, that the foregoing provisions of this sentence shall not be deemed or construed to preclude Employer and Employee from continuing to negotiate (or to agree) regarding the Targets for a particular Base Fiscal Year after the commencement of such Base Fiscal Year if the parties agree to such continued negotiations (or agreement).

 

8



 

(ii)           Notwithstanding the provisions of Section 2.1(A)(i):

 

(a)           If Employee’s employment with Employer terminates (for any reason other than a Voluntary Resignation or a Termination With Cause) during (and not after) a particular Base Fiscal Year, the Base Fiscal Target for that Base Fiscal Year shall be pro-rated by multiplying such Target by a fraction, the numerator of which shall be the number of months (rounded to the nearest whole number) Employee was employed by Employer during such Base Fiscal Year and the denominator of which shall be twelve (12). The pro-rated Base Fiscal Target shall then be compared with Employer’s actual financial performance (or with the other relevant actual financial data) during the portion of the Base Fiscal Year that Employee was employed by Employer in determining whether the pro-rated Base Financial Target was met during such portion of such Base Fiscal Year. In such event, if the pro-rated amount of the Base Financial Target does not exceed Employer’s actual financial performance (or the other relevant actual financial data) during the period of Employee’s employment during the Base Fiscal Year, Employee shall not be entitled to a Deferred Bonus for such Base Fiscal Year. If the pro-rated amount of the Base Financial Target does exceed Employer’s actual financial performance (or the other relevant actual financial data) during such period, Employee’s Deferred Bonus shall (subject to all vesting and other applicable provisions hereof) be based on the amount of such excess and shall not be adjusted as a result of Employer’s actual financial performance (or the other relevant actual financial data) during the remainder of such Base Fiscal Year. In the circumstances described in the first sentence of this Section 2.1(A)(ii), the period within which Employer shall determine whether the Base Financial Target has been met (as provided in Section 2.1(B) hereof) shall commence as of the date of the termination of Employee’s employment and the other provisions of this Agreement shall otherwise continue to apply. Without in any way limiting the generality of the foregoing, the termination of Employee’s employment as a

 

9



 

result of Intentional Death or Disability during the Base Fiscal Year shall not accelerate or otherwise modify the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period applicable to such Base Fiscal Year. Where necessary or appropriate, references in this Agreement to the Base Financial Target shall be deemed to be references to the pro-rated Base Financial Target provided for in this Section 2.1(A)(ii)(a); and

 

(b)           If the last day of a Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period occurs during, rather than after, the Base Fiscal Year (if, for example, Employee is the subject of a Termination Without Cause during the Base Fiscal Year), any Annualized Financial Target for the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period for such Base Fiscal Year will be pro-rated by multiplying such Target by a fraction, the numerator of which shall be the number of months (rounded to the nearest whole number) Employee was employed by Employer during such Base Fiscal Year and the denominator of which shall be twelve (12). The pro-rated Annualized Fiscal Target shall then be compared with Employer’s actual financial performance (or with the other relevant actual financial data) during the portion of the Base Fiscal Year that Employee was employed by Employer in determining whether the pro-rated Annualized Financial Target was met. Where necessary or appropriate, references in this Agreement to the Annualized Financial Target shall be deemed to be references to the pro-rated Annualized Financial Target provided for in this Section 2.1(A)(ii)(b).

 

(B)            As soon as may be practicable, and in any event within sixty (60) days, after the expiration of each Base Fiscal Year, Employer shall determine whether the Base Financial Target was met during such Base Fiscal Year and, if so, the amount of the Deferred Bonus that Employee may receive with respect to such Base Fiscal Year (provided that any applicable Annualized Financial Target, as well as all other applicable vesting requirements, are met during the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period applicable to such Base Fiscal Year). Employer shall promptly advise Employee as to whether the Base Financial Target has been

 

10



 

met during the Base Fiscal Year in question and, if so, the amount of the Deferred Bonus for that Base Fiscal Year as computed by Employer. Employee shall be entitled to review all financial and other records relevant to Employer’s determinations with respect to the achievement of the Base Financial Target, the amount of Employee’s Deferred Bonus, if any, and all related computations. Employer shall give careful and good faith consideration to any bona fide questions raised by Employee regarding Employer’s foregoing determinations and shall make any adjustments therein as Employer deems necessary or appropriate in the light of such questions. Employer’s good faith determination as to the amount of Employee’s Deferred Bonus (either as originally computed or as adjusted) shall, however, be binding and conclusive on Employer and Employee unless the amount in question or controversy as to the size of the Deferred Bonus exceeds $25,000 (in which event such question or controversy shall be referred to, and determined by, arbitration in accordance with Section 4.3 hereof). Once the final amount of Employee’s Deferred Bonus for any Base Fiscal Year has been computed, agreed or determined, such amount shall be memorialized in an addendum which shall also be attached hereto and shall be deemed a part hereof and such amount shall not then thereafter change.

 

(C)            Notwithstanding the foregoing provisions of Sections 2.1 (A) and (B), it is acknowledged and agreed that Green Park has agreed to pay, or reimburse, Employer for any Deferred Bonus Employer pays to Employee pursuant to this Agreement and that this Agreement is premised on the assumption that this payment or reimbursement arrangement shall continue as between Green Park and Employer. If Green Park should refuse to pay or reimburse Employer for any Deferred Bonus attributable to a Base Fiscal Year that is to commence after the date of such refusal by Green Park, Employer shall have the right, in its sole discretion, not to pay Employee any Deferred Bonus for that Base Fiscal Year or to agree upon Targets for that Base Fiscal Year. The provisions of the immediately preceding

 

11


 

sentence shall not, however, apply to the current Fiscal Year (Fiscal Year 2008) or to any subsequent Base Fiscal Year that commences prior to the date, if any, on which Green Park refuses to pay or reimburse Employer for Employee’s Deferred Bonus (it being expressly acknowledged and agreed that, as between Employer and Employee, Employer shall assume the risk of any breach by Green Park of any agreement to reimburse or pay Employer for Employee’s Deferred Bonus as well as the risk that Green Park shall refuse to pay or reimburse Employer for Employee’s Deferred Bonus for a particular Base Fiscal Year after the commencement of that Base Fiscal Year). Employer further agrees with Employee that Employer shall not, in its capacity as a partner in Green Park, vote in favor of, or otherwise approve, any action by Green Park to modify, terminate or cancel Green Park’s agreement to pay or reimburse Employer for Employee’s Deferred Bonus for any subsequent Base Fiscal Year.

 

Section 2.2 Fiscal Year 2008.

 

Employer and Employee have agreed upon the Targets for the computation of Employee’s Deferred Bonus for Fiscal Year 2008 (which Targets are set out in Schedule 1-2008 which is attached hereto and hereby made a part hereof).

 

12



 

ARTICLE III

 

Vesting, Payment and Nonvesting of Deferred Bonus

 

Section 3.1 Vesting of Deferred Bonus.

 

Except as otherwise provided in Section 3.3, Employee’s Deferred Bonus for any particular Base Fiscal Year shall become vested (i.e., shall be deemed fully earned, and not subject to lapse), and shall be payable to or for an Employee in accordance with Section 3.2 in accordance with the following provisions:

 

(A)          If the last day of the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period for a Deferred Bonus for a particular Base Fiscal Year is the last day of the three (3) year period commencing with the first day of that Base Fiscal Year (under the circumstances specified in Section 1.1(E)(i)(a)), and if Green Park meets the Annualized Financial Target during that Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period, then the Deferred Bonus for that Base Fiscal Year shall be deemed fully earned and vested as of the date on which the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period terminates;

 

(B)           If the last day of the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period for a Deferred Bonus for a particular Base Fiscal Year is the day on which Employee’s Unintentional Death or Disability occurs (under the circumstances specified in Section 1.1(E)(i)(b)), and if Green Park meets at least Sixty-Five Percent (65%) of the Annualized Financial Target during that Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period, then the Deferred Bonus for that Base Fiscal Year shall be deemed fully earned and vested as of the date on which the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period terminates;

 

(C)           If the last day of the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period for a Deferred Bonus for a particular Base Fiscal Year is the date on which a Termination Without Cause of Employee’s employment occurs (under the circumstances specified in Section 1.1(E)(i)(c)),

 

13



 

and if Green Park meets at least Seventy-Five Percent (75%) of the Annualized Financial Target during such Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period, then the Deferred Bonus for that Base Fiscal Year shall be deemed fully earned and vested as of the date on which the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period terminates; and

 

(D)          If the last day of the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period for a Deferred Bonus for a particular Base Fiscal Year is the date on which a Change in Control occurs (under the circumstances specified in Section 1.1(E)(i)(d)), then, whether or not Green Park meets the Annualized Financial Target, or any portion thereof, during such Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period, the Deferred Bonus for that Base Fiscal Year shall be deemed fully earned and vested as of the date on which the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period terminates.

 

Section 3.2 Payment of Vested Deferred Bonus.

 

(A)          Employer shall pay Employee (or, if applicable, his Beneficiary) the amount of any Deferred Bonus which vests pursuant to the provisions of Section 3.1 in accordance with the following provisions:

 

(i)             If Employee’s rights to a Deferred Bonus for a Base Fiscal Year vest pursuant to Section 3.1(A), Section 3.1(B) or Section 3.1(C), that Deferred Bonus shall, subject to the provisions of Sections 3.2(B) and 3.2(C), be paid to Employee (or, if applicable, his Beneficiary) within sixty (60) days after the last day of the taxable year in which Employee’s rights to that Deferred Bonus vest; and

 

(ii)            If Employee’s rights to a Deferred Bonus for a Base Fiscal Year vest pursuant to Section 3.1(D), that Deferred Bonus shall be paid to Employee within sixty (60) days after the date on which Employee’s rights to that Deferred Bonus vest.

 

(B)            (i)            Notwithstanding the provisions of Section 3.2(A)(i), when the vesting of Employee’s rights to a Deferred Bonus (pursuant to Section 3.1(A), Section 3.1(B) or

 

14



 

Section 3.1(C)) depends upon the meeting by Green Park of all, or a specified percentage, of an Annualized Financial Target, the payment period of sixty (60) days specified in Section 3.2(A)(i) shall be extended if, and to the extent, necessary in order for a determination to be made (in accordance with the provisions of Section 3.2(C)) as to whether all, or the specified percentage, of the Annualized Financial Target has been met; provided that payment shall be made no later than 2-1/2 months after the last day of the taxable year in which Employee’s rights to the Deferred Bonus vest. An extension of the period within which a vested Deferred Bonus shall be paid shall not extend or defer the date as of which such Deferred Bonus shall be deemed to have vested.

 

(ii)             If the last day of a Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period falls on a day that is other than the last day of a fiscal quarter, Employer may, solely for the purpose of determining whether the relevant Annualized Financial Target has, or has not, been met during that Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period, assume that the relevant financial reports or data for Green Park as of the end of the fiscal quarter that is closest in time to the last day of that Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period is the same as the relevant financial reports or data for Green Park as of the actual last day of that Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period. To illustrate: assume that the first day of the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period for the fiscal Year in question is January 1 and that, because of a Change in Control, the last day of that Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period is May 25. For the sake of convenience, Employer may use the relevant financial reports or data for Green Park as of June 30 (the end of the fiscal quarter that is closest in time to the actual last day of the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period in question) as constituting the relevant financial reports or data for Green Park as of May 25 for the purpose of determining whether the Annualized Financial Target for that Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period has been met. Similarly, if the last day of a Deferred Bonus Earn-Out

 

15



 

Period is October 10, Employer may use the relevant financial reports or data for Green Park as of September 30 for computation purposes as aforesaid.

 

(iii)          If the period for the payment of a vested Deferred Bonus is extended pursuant to the preceding provisions of this Section 3.2(B), Employer shall pay interest on the amount of the Deferred Bonus at an annual rate equal to the Prime Rate plus 1% (or, if lower, at the highest percentage rate allowed by law) during the period such Deferred Bonus is due and unpaid; and provided further that if Employer shall fail timely to pay Employee (or his Beneficiary) a vested Deferred Bonus once Employee’s entitlement thereto has been determined, Employee (or his Beneficiary) shall be entitled to receive interest on the amount of such Deferred Bonus at an annual rate equal to the Prime Rate plus 5% (or, if lower, the highest percentage interest rate allowed by law) during the period such Deferred Bonus is due and unpaid. (For all purposes hereof “Prime Rate” means the prime rate of interest published (on the date from which the Prime Rate is to accrue) by The Wall Street Journal as the base rate for corporate loans posted by a number (normally expressed as a percentage) of the largest banks in the United States of America.)

 

(C)           Whenever the payment of a Deferred Bonus is dependent upon the meeting by Green Park of all, or a specified percentage, of an Annualized Financial Target during a Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period, Employer shall, as promptly as may be practicable after the date on which the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period for such Deferred Bonus terminates and Employer has received such financial reports or data relating to Green Park which are needed in order to determine whether all, or the specified percentage of the Annualized Financial Target has been met, make a written determination as to whether all, or the specified percentage, of such Annualized Financial Target has been met and shall provide Employee with a copy of such written determination. Employee shall have the right to review all financial and other records relevant to such determination. Employer shall give careful and

 

16



 

good faith consideration to any bona fide questions raised by Employee regarding Employer’s determination and shall, if necessary or appropriate, adjust Employer’s determination in light of such questions. Employer’s good faith determination (either as initially made or as thereafter adjusted) as to whether Green Park has met all, or the specified percentage, of the Annualized Financial Target shall, however, be binding and conclusive upon Employer and Employee unless the amount of the Deferred Bonus in question or controversy exceeds $25,000 (in which event all questions or controversies as to whether or not the Deferred Bonus in question has vested shall be referred to, and determined by, arbitration pursuant to Section 4.3 hereof).

 

Section 3.3 Nonvesting of Deferred Bonus.

 

If (A) Employee’s employment with Employer terminates as a result of a Termination With Cause or a Voluntary Resignation at any time during the three (3) year period commencing with the first day of a Base Fiscal Year, or if (B) the Base Financial Target is not met during the Base Fiscal Year, or if (C) vesting of a particular Deferred Bonus is dependent upon the meeting by Green Park of all, or a specified percentage, of an Annualized Financial Target during the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period applicable to such Deferred Bonus and Green Park fails to meet such Annualized Financial Target (or the specified percentage thereof), then, in each of such events, the Deferred Bonus for such Base Fiscal Year shall not vest or become earned and all of Employee’s rights, title and interest in or with respect to such Deferred Bonus shall lapse and be of no further force and effect. The nonvesting of Employee’s rights as to a Deferred Bonus for any particular Base Fiscal Year shall not prejudice or adversely affect in any way Employee’s rights, if any, to receive (or retain) a Deferred Bonus for another Base Fiscal Year.

 

17



 

ARTICLE IV

Other Provisions

 

Section 4.1 Funding; Tax Advances.

 

(A)          Within sixty (60) days after the amount of a Deferred Bonus for a Base Fiscal Year has been determined pursuant to Section 2.1(B) (and assuming that Employee’s rights thereto have not previously lapsed or vested pursuant to any of the provisions of Article III), Employer shall pay the amount of such Deferred Bonus to the trustee of Employer’s Deferred Bonus Trust (the “Trust”), for the account of Employer and Employee, as their respective interests may appear, such payment to be held, administered and disbursed in accordance with the terms of this Agreement and the Trust. Where appropriate, all references to “Employer” in Section 3.2 hereof shall be deemed to be references to the “Trust.”

 

(B)           If Employee’s rights to a Deferred Bonus for a Base Fiscal Year vest under circumstances in which the amount of the Deferred Bonus is deemed to be taxable income to the Employee for Federal, State or local income tax purposes and Employee is, or may be, liable to pay taxes on such deemed income before the Deferred Bonus is paid to Employee, the Trust shall make an advance to Employee in an amount sufficient to permit Employee to pay the full amount of all taxes on such deemed income before such taxes shall become due. Any such advance shall not bear interest, may be repaid to the Trust, in whole or in part, at any time and shall, in any event, be repaid to the Trust in full at the same time the Deferred Bonus is paid to Employee.

 

Section 4.2 No Employment Agreement.

 

This Agreement does not constitute an employment agreement between Employer and Employee but instead is only intended to set out the respective rights and obligations of

 

18



 

the parties with respect to Deferred Bonuses for Fiscal Year 2008 and subsequent Fiscal Years. Without in any way limiting the generality of the foregoing, it is expressly acknowledged and agreed that Employee does not have an employment agreement with Employer and that, unless or until the parties otherwise agree, Employee is an at-will employee of Employer; provided, however, that Employee’s status as an at-will employee shall not prejudice or adversely affect any of Employer’s vested rights hereunder upon any Termination of Employment.

 

Section 4.3 Arbitration.

 

(A)         Any disagreements which, under the provisions of Sections 2.1(B) or 3.2(C) hereof, are referable to arbitration, shall be referred to, and finally determined by, arbitration pursuant to the applicable Rules of Commercial Arbitration (“Rules”) of the American Arbitration Association (“AAA”), subject to the provisions of this Section 4.3. Employer and Employee shall each attempt to resolve any disagreement which is referable to arbitration pursuant to Sections 2.1(B) or 3.2(C) hereof by agreement and each party agrees to negotiate in good faith for a period of at least fifteen (15) business days after any such disagreement has arisen. If, despite such good faith negotiations, the parties are unable to resolve any such disagreement by agreement, then either party may, at any time after the expiration of the foregoing period of fifteen (15) business days, demand arbitration of such disagreement.

 

(B)          If the amount in controversy in the arbitrable disagreement is One Hundred Thousand Dollars ($100,000) or less, the arbitration shall be conducted before a single arbitrator selected by Employer and Employee within thirty (30) days after service of the initial demand for arbitration. If the amount in controversy exceeds One Hundred

 

19



 

Thousand Dollars ($100,000), the arbitration shall be conducted before three (3) arbitrators, one of whom shall be selected by Employer within thirty (30) days after service of the initial demand for arbitration, one of whom shall be selected by Employee within the foregoing thirty (30) day period and one of whom shall be selected by the two arbitrators selected by the parties within thirty (30) days after the second of such arbitrators is selected. Each arbitrator selected pursuant to this Section 4.3(B) shall be independent of both Employer and Employee and shall have at least fifteen (15) years experience in the subject matter of the disagreement to be arbitrated. If any arbitrator is not timely selected within the periods provided for in this Section 4.3(B), such arbitrator shall be appointed by the AAA pursuant to the Rules. Any arbitration pursuant to this Section 4.3 shall be conducted in Bethesda, Maryland, or in such other location as may then be agreed by the parties. A judgment upon the award rendered in any such arbitration shall be final and binding upon the parties and may be entered in any court of competent jurisdiction. All fees and expenses of the arbitrator(s) and all administrative costs of the arbitration shall be borne equally by the parties unless the arbitrator(s) otherwise direct(s). This agreement to arbitrate shall be specifically enforceable.

 

Section 4.4 Governing Law.

 

This Agreement and the rights and liabilities of the parties hereunder shall be governed by, and construed in accordance with, the laws of the State of Maryland without regard to such State’s principles of conflicts of law.

 

20



 

Section 4.5 No Third Party Beneficiary; Spendthrift Clause.

 

(A)          This Agreement is made solely and specifically between and for the benefit of the parties hereto and (subject to Section 4.6) their Beneficiaries, heirs, successors, assigns and legal representatives. No other Person whatsoever shall have any rights, interests or claims hereunder or be entitled to any benefits under or on account of this Agreement as a third parry beneficiary or otherwise.

 

(B)            To the maximum extent permitted by law, neither Employee nor any Beneficiary shall have any power to dispose of or to charge by way of anticipation any vested, potential or other right, title or interest hereunder, and any vested Deferred Bonus payable to Employee or any Beneficiary shall be free and clear of his debts, contracts, dispositions, and anticipations, and shall not be taken or reached by any legal or equitable process.

 

Section 4.6 Benefit and Burden.

 

This Agreement, and the respective rights and obligations of the parties hereunder, may not be assigned, sold, hypothecated, or otherwise transferred, either outright or as security, without the prior written consent of the other party which may be delayed, withheld or conditioned in the sole and absolute discretion of such other party; provided, however, that Employee may designate a Beneficiary without Employer’s consent. Any transfer, or attempted transfer, in violation of the provisions of this Section 4.6 shall be null and void ab initio. Subject to the foregoing provisions of this Section 4.6, the provisions of this Agreement shall be binding upon, and shall inure to the benefit of, the parties hereto, the Employee’s Beneficiary and their respective heirs, successors, legal representatives and permitted assigns.

 

21


 

Section 4.7 Computation of Time.

 

In computing any notice or other period of time prescribed or allowed by any provision of this Agreement, the day of the act, event, or default from which the designated period of time begins to run shall not be included. The last day of the period so computed shall be included, unless it is a Saturday, Sunday or a legal holiday in Bethesda, Maryland, in which event the period runs until the end of the next, day which is not a Saturday, Sunday or such legal holiday. All notice or other periods expire as of 5:00 p.m. (local time in Bethesda, Maryland; on. the last day of the notice or other period.

 

Section 4.8 Entire Agreement; Amendment.

 

(A)          This Agreement contains the entire understanding between Employer and Employee regarding the subject matter hereof and supersedes any prior or contemporaneous understandings or agreements between them respecting such subject matter. There are no representations, warranties, agreements, arrangements or understandings, oral, written or expressed by, or based upon, conduct, between the parties relating to the subject matter hereof which are not fully expressed herein.

 

(B)           This Agreement, including the Schedules hereto, may not be amended, modified, waived, terminated or discharged except by an instrument in writing which is duly executed by the party sought to be charged with any such amendment, modification, waiver, termination or discharge.

 

Section 4.9 Construction.

 

(A)          Common nouns and pronouns shall be deemed to refer to the masculine, feminine, neuter, singular and plural, as the context may require.

 

22



 

(B)           All headings herein are inserted only for convenience and ease of reference and are not to be considered in the construction or interpretation of this Agreement.

 

(C)           Numbered or lettered Articles, sections, subsections, subparts and subparagraphs herein contained refer to Articles, sections, subsections, subparts and subparagraphs of this Agreement unless otherwise expressly stated. The words “herein,” “hereof,” “hereunder,” “hereby,” “this Agreement” and other similar references shall be construed to mean and include this Agreement and all amendments of, supplements to, and Schedules and other attachments to this Agreement unless the context shall clearly indicate or require otherwise.

 

(D)           Employer and Employee have both participated extensively in the negotiation and drafting of this Agreement. Accordingly, this Agreement shall not be interpreted or construed for or against either party as the draftsman hereof.

 

Section 4.10 Notices.

 

Any notices, demands, consents, requests or other communications (hereinafter collectively referred to in this Section 4.10 as “notice”) provided for or permitted to be given pursuant to this Agreement shall be in writing, and shall be delivered by hand, by first-class mail, postage prepaid (with a return receipt requested), or by Federal Express, or by some other commercial overnight delivery service, to the parties at the following addresses:

 

(i) If to Employer:

Walker & Dunlop GP, LLC

 

7501 Wisconsin Avenue, Suite 1200

 

Bethesda, Maryland 20814-6531

 

Attn: Mr. William M. Walker

 

23



 

(ii) If to Employee:

Mr. Richard C. Warner

 

18007 Calico Circle

 

Olney, MD 20832

 

 

Each notice shall be deemed given on the day it is received or on the day its delivery is refused by or for the addressee, whichever is earlier. Each party may change its address or addressee for notice by giving notice thereof in the manner provided above (such notice to be given at least five (5) business days prior to its effective date).

 

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed and delivered this Agreement as of the date first above written.

 

 

WALKER & DUNLOP GP, LLC

 

 

 

  (“Employer”)

 

 

 

Date:

June 16, 2008

 

 

 

 

By:

/s/ William Walker

 

 

 

 

 

William W. Walker

 

 

 

 

 

President

 

 

 

Richard C. Warner (“Employee”)

 

 

 

Date:

June 16, 2008

 

 

 

 

By:

/s/ Richard Warner

 

 

 

 

 

Richard C. Warner

 

 

 

 

 

Senior Vice President

 

24



 

SCHEDULE 1-2008

 

Formulae for Computation of Deferred Bonus

 

1.            (A) The following is a summary of key defined terms for 2008:

 

(i)                                      Employee: Richard C. Warner

 

(ii)                                   Base Fiscal Year: January 1, 2008 - December 31, 2008

 

(iii)                                Financial target: The attainment by Green Park of Adjusted Net Income of $15,144,697.00 (representing the 2008 Budget adjusted upward by 80% of sub-servicing costs, and downward by servicing advances)

 

(iv)                               Employee Percentage: 5.0%.

 

(B)            Employee shall be entitled to a Deferred Bonus in the amount equal to (i) the Employee Percentage times (ii) the amount by which Green Park’s Adjusted Net Income in the Base Fiscal Year exceeds the Base Financial Target, subject to all applicable vesting provisions set forth in the foregoing and attached Incentive Deferred Bonus Compensation Agreement (“Agreement”) of which this Schedule 1-2008 is a part. In no event shall the Deferred Bonus be less than zero.

 

2.              Green Park’s Adjusted Net Income during any Base Fiscal Year or during any Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period applicable to such Base Fiscal Year (hereinafter referred to in this Schedule 1-2008 as a “Period”) shall be determined as follows:

 

(A)            The starting point for the determination of such Adjusted Net Income shall be Green Park’s net income for the relevant Fiscal Year, or the relevant Period, as the case may be, determined in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles (“Net Income”) (such Net Income to be based on audited figures, if available, or to become

 

25



 

available in the ordinary course of business. If there has not been, or is not to be in the ordinary course of business, an independent audit to establish Green Park’s audited net income for a particular Fiscal Year or Period, Green Park’s net income for such Fiscal Year or Period shall be determined by Employer in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles and all customary procedures normally utilized in determining Green Park’s audited net income.)

 

(B)           Green Park’s Net Income for Fiscal Year, or during a Period, shall be (i) increased by (a) any reserves or provisions for future loan losses deducted in the computation of such Net Income (except that any actual loan losses deducted in computing such Net Income shall not be added back to such Net Income); and (b) any recoveries or reimbursements received as a result of previously delinquent loan (to the extent not already expensed or deducted in the computation of Net Income); and (c) 80% of any subservicing fees paid to Walker & Dunlop to service Green Park’s loans; and (ii) decreased by the amount of net servicing and delinquency advances made as a result of delinquent loans (to the extent not already expensed or deducted in the computation of Net Income.)

 

(C)           Green Park’s Net Income during a Fiscal Year, as adjusted in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 2(B), shall be Green Park’s “Adjusted Net Income” for that Fiscal Year for the purposes of this Schedule 1-2008.

 

(D)            Green Park’s Net Income during a Period, as adjusted in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 2(B), shall be Green Park’s Net Income” for that Period for the purposes of this Schedule 1-2008.

 

(E)             Green Park’s Adjusted Net Income during a Period shall be multiplied by a fraction, the numerator of which shall be twelve (12) and the denominator of which shall be the number of full calendar months in the Period, and the product of such multiplication

 

26



 

shall be Green Park’s “Average Adjusted Net Income” for that Period for the purposes of this Schedule I-2008.

 

3.              The Annualized Financial Target during the Period applicable to the Base Fiscal Year shall be the attainment by Green Park of an Average Adjusted Net Income equal to, or greater than the Base Financial Target.

 

4.              The operation of the formulae set out in this Schedule 1-2008 may be illustrated by the following examples: for these examples only, assume the following facts: (i) the Base Fiscal Year is January 1, 2002-December 31, 2002; (ii) the Base Financial Target is $10,000,000; and (iii) the Employee Percentage is 10%:

 

(A)            Assume that Employee remains in Employer’s employ from January 1, 2002 until November 30, 2003, on which date Employee has a Voluntary Resignation. Inasmuch as Employee’s employment with Employer terminated due to a Voluntary Resignation prior to the end of the Period applicable to the Base Fiscal Year, Employee is not entitled to his Deferred Bonus for the Base Fiscal Year (even if Green Park achieves both the Base Financial Target and the Annualized Financial Target.)

 

(B)           Assume that Employee remains in the Employer’s employ throughout the Base Fiscal Year and that Green Park’s Adjusted Net Income during the Base Fiscal Year is $11,000,000 (or $1,000,000 more than the Base Financial Target of $10,000,000 for the Base Fiscal Year.) On these assumptions, Employee’s Deferred Bonus for the Base Fiscal Year is $100,000 (10% [the Employee Percentage] time $1,000,000), subject to all applicable vesting provisions set out in the Agreement.

 

(C)           Assume that Employee remains in Employer’s employ from January 1, 2002 through June 30, 2003, on which date Employee’s Intentional Death or Disability occurs. Further assume that Green Park has Adjusted Net Income of $11,000,000 between January 1, 2002, and December 31, 2002, Adjusted Net Income of $10,500,000 between

 

27



 

January 1, 2003, and December 31, 2003, and Adjusted Net Income of $10,000,000 between January 1, 2003, and December 31, 2004. On these assumptions:

 

(i)              Employee’s Deferred Bonus for the Base Fiscal Year is $100,000 (see Paragraph 4(B) above.)

 

(ii)           Green Park’s Average Adjusted Net Income during the Period is $10,500,000. This is determined by multiplying $31,500,000 (Green Park’s Adjusted Net Income during the relevant Period (which began on January 1, 2002, and ended on December 31, 2004) by a fraction, the numerator of which is twelve (12) and the denominator of which is thirty-six (36) (the number of calendar months in the Period), (i.e., $31,500,000 x 12/36 = $10,500,000). Since the Annualized Financial target for the Period is the attainment by Green Park of an Average Adjusted Net Income of $10,000,000 during the Period, and since, on the assumed facts, Green Park’s actual Average Adjusted Net Income is $10,500,000 during the Period, the Annualized Financial Target has been bet. Moreover, since the Base Financial Target was exceeded during the Base Fiscal Year (i.e., Green Park had net Annualized Income during the Base Fiscal Year in excess of $10,000,000) and Employee’s employment with Employer did not terminate as a result of a Voluntary Resignation or a Termination With Cause during the Period, Employee’s rights to a Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period ended.) Pursuant to Section 3.2(A)(i) of the Agreement, the Deferred Bonus shall be due and payable to Employee’s legal representative or Beneficiary within sixty (60) days after December 31, 2004 (unless the time for payment is extended pursuant to Sections 3.2(B) and (C) of the Agreement in order to permit Employer to determine whether the Annualized Financial Target was met during the applicable Period.)

 

(D)          Assume that Employee remains in Employer’s employ from January 1, 2002, through June 30, 2003, on which date Employee’s Unintentional Death or Disability occurs. Further assume that Green Park has Adjusted Net Income of

 

28



 

$11,000,000 between January 1, 2002 and December 31, 2002, and Adjusted Net Income of $2,500,000 between January 1, 2003, and June 30, 2003. On these assumptions:

 

(i)            Employee’s Deferred Bonus for the Base Fiscal Year is $100,000 (see Paragraph 4(B) above.)

 

(ii)           Because Employee’s employment terminated as a result of his/her Unintentional Death or Disability which occurred on June 30,2003, the applicable Period for the Base Fiscal Year began on January 1, 2002, and ended on June 30, 2003.

 

(iii)          Green Park’s Average Adjusted Net Income during the applicable Period is $9,000,000. This is determined by multiplying $13,500,000 (Green Park’s Adjusted Net Income during the Period) times twelve (12) divided by eighteen (18) (the number of calendar months in the Period), (i.e., $13,500,000 x 12/18 = $9,000,000). This Average Net Income is less than the Annualized Financial Target (which is an Average Adjusted Net Income of $10,000,000). However, since Employee’s employment terminated as a result of his/her Unintentional Death or Disability, it is only necessary that Green Park attain 65% of the Annualized Financial Target (or an Average Adjusted Net Income of $6,500,000 ($10,000,000 x 65%) during the Period). Green Park’s actual Average Adjusted Net Income during the Period ($9,000,000) exceeds 65% of the Annualized Financial Target during the Period ($6,500,000) and, therefore, on the assumed facts, the Annualized Financial Target has been met.

 

(iv)          On the assumed facts, Employee’s employment did not terminate as a result of a Voluntary Resignation or a Termination With Cause occurring within the Period. As a result, on the assumed facts, Employee’s rights to a Deferred Bonus for the Base Fiscal Year vested on June 30, 2003 (the last day of the Period). Because the applicable Period ended as a result of Employee’s Unintentional Death or Disability, Employee’s Deferred Bonus for the Base Fiscal Year shall be due and payable to Employee’s

 

29



 

legal representative or Beneficiary within sixty (60) days after December 31, 2004 pursuant to Section 3.1(C) of the Agreement (unless the time for payment is extended in order to permit Employer to determine whether the Annualized Financial Target was met during the Period).

 

(E)            Assume that Employee remains in Employer’s employ from January 1, 2002, through December 31, 2004. Further assume that Green Park has Adjusted Net Income of $11,000,000 between January 1, 2002, and December 31, 2002, Adjusted Net Income of $10,500,000 between January 1, 2003, and December 31, 2003, and Adjusted Net Income of $10,000,000 between January 1, 2004, and December 31, 2004. On these assumptions:

 

(i)            Employee’s Deferred Bonus for the Base Fiscal Year is $100,000 (see Paragraph 4(B) above.)

 

(ii)           Green Park’s Average Adjusted Net Income during the Period is $10,500,000 (see Paragraph 4(C)(ii) above.) Since the Annualized Financial Target for the Period is the attainment by Green Park of an Average Adjusted Net Income of $10,000,000 during the Period, and since, on the assumed facts, Green Park’s actual Average Adjusted Net Income is $10,500,000 during the Period, the Annualized Financial Target has been met. Pursuant to Section 3.2(A)(i) of the Agreement, the Deferred Bonus shall be due and payable to Employee within sixty (60) days after December 31, 2004 (unless the time for payment is extended pursuant to Sections 3.2(B) and (C) of the Agreement in order to permit Employer to determine whether the Annualized Financial Target was met during the applicable Period).

 

5.             The foregoing examples under Paragraph 4 of this Schedule 1-2008 assume that Employee remains in Green Park’s employ throughout the first year of the Period (i.e., throughout the Base Fiscal Year) and that Employee’s employment with Green Park is then terminated at some point during the remainder of such Period. If Employee’s employment

 

30



 

with Green Park is terminated during the first year of such Period (or at any other time during such Period) as a result of a Voluntary Termination or a Termination With Cause, then Employee is not entitled to his Deferred Bonus for the Base Fiscal Year. If Employee’s employment with Green Park is terminated during the first year of such Period for any reason other than a Voluntary Termination or a Termination With Cause, then the computations regarding the amount of Employee’s Deferred Bonus for the Base Fiscal Year are first made as set out in Paragraphs 1 through 3 of this Schedule 1-2008 as adjusted by the provisions of Section 2. 1 (A)(ii)(a) of the Agreement. The foregoing may be illustrated by the following example:

 

(A)        Assume that the Base Financial Target and the Employee Percentage are as set out in Paragraph 4 above; that Employee remains in Employer’s employ from January 1, 2002 until June 25, 2002, on which date Employee’s Intentional Death or Disability occurs. Further assume that Green Park has Adjusted Net Income of $5,500,000 between January 1, 2002, and June 30, 2002; Adjusted Net Income of $11,000,000 between January 1, 2002 and December 31, 2002; Adjusted Net Income of $10,500,000 between January 1, 2003 and December 31, 2003; and Adjusted Net Income of $10,000,000 between January 1, 2004 and December 31, 2004. On these assumptions:

 

(i)            Green Park’s Base Financial Target for the Base Fiscal Year is first pro-rated pursuant to Section 2. 1 (A)(ii)(a) of the Agreement by multiplying that Target ($10,000,000 of Adjusted Net Income) by six (6) (the number of months, rounded to the nearest whole number, that Employee was employed by Green Park during the Base Fiscal Year) and then dividing by twelve (12). The result (or $5,000,000 of Adjusted Net Income) is the pro-rated Base Financial Target for Employee’s Deferred Bonus for the Base Fiscal Year.

 

(ii)            The pro-rated Base Financial Target for the Base Fiscal Year (or $5,000,000 of Adjusted Net Income) is then compared with Green Park’s actual Adjusted

 

31


 

Net Income between January 1, 2002 and June 30, 2002 (or $5,500,000). Since the adjusted Target was exceeded, the amount of Employee’s potential Deferred Bonus for the first six months of the Base Fiscal Year is 10% (the Employee Percentage) of the excess (or $500,000) of actual Adjusted Net Income over the adjusted Base Financial Target amount during that six-month period, or $50,000.

 

(iii)         Notwithstanding Employee’s Intentional Death or Disability during the Base Fiscal Year, the other vesting and payout provisions of the Agreement are not affected (see Agreement, Section 2. 1 (A)(ii)(b)). Since Employee’s termination of employment was caused by his/her Intentional Death or Disability, his Deferred Bonus is only payable under these circumstances if Green Park meets its Annualized Financial Target during the three year Period attributable to the Base Fiscal Year (see Agreement, Sections 1. 1 (E)(i)(a), 2. 1 (A)(ii)(b)). On the assumed facts, Green Park meets its Annualized Financial Target during the latter Period and, accordingly, Employee’s Deferred Bonus of $50,000 for the Base Fiscal Year is payable to Employee’s legal representative or Beneficiary pursuant to the Agreement (see Paragraph 4(D)(iv) above).

 

(B)            Under the example given in Paragraph 5(A), Employee’s employment with Green Park terminated (for a reason other than a Voluntary Resignation or a Termination With Cause) during the Base Fiscal Year but the Period attributable to that Base Fiscal Year continued beyond the end of the Base Fiscal Year. Under certain circumstances, however, Employee’s employment may terminate during a Base Fiscal Year and the Period applicable to such Base Fiscal Year will also terminate during that Base Fiscal Year. In this event, Employee’s entitlement to his Deferred Bonus is determined in accordance with Paragraphs 1 through 3 of this Schedule 1-2005, as adjusted by the provisions of Section 2. 1 (A)(ii)(b) of the Agreement. The foregoing may be illustrated by the following example:

 

32



 

(Percentage are as set out in Paragraph 4 above; that Employee remains in Employer’s employ from January 1, 2002 until June 30, 2002, at which time a Termination Without Cause occurs; and that Green Park has Adjusted Net Income in the amounts and for the periods set out in Paragraph 5(A) above.

 

(ii)            On these assumptions, the adjusted Base Financial Target is met for the first six months of the Base Fiscal Year and Employee’s potential Deferred Bonus for that period is $50,000 (see Paragraph 5(A)(ii)).

 

(i) Assume that the Base Financial Target and the Employee Percentage are as set out in Paragraph 4 above; that Employee remains in Employer’s employ from January 1, 2002 until June 30, 2002, at which time a Termination Without Cause occurs; and that Green Park has Adjusted Net Income in the amounts and for the periods as set out in Paragraph 5(A) above.

 

(ii) On these assumptions, the adjusted Base Financial Target is met for the first six months of the Base Fiscal Year and Employee’s potential Deferred Bonus for that period if $50,000 (see Paragraph 5(A)(ii)).

 

(iii) Because Employee’s employment terminated as of June 30, 2002 as a result of a Termination Without Cause, the Period attributed to the Base Fiscal Year also terminated as of June 30, 2002 (see Agreement, Section 1.1(E)(i)(c)). The Annualized Financial Target for the Base Fiscal Year must, therefore, be pro-rated by multiplying that Target ($10,000,000 of Adjusted Net Income) times six (6) (the number of months rounded, if necessary, to the nearest whole number, that Employee was employed by Green Park during the Base Fiscal Year) and then dividing by twelve (12) (see Agreement, Section 2. 1 (A)(ii)(b)). The result (or $5,000,000 of Adjusted Net Income) is the pro-rated Annualized Financial Target for the Period attributable to the Base Fiscal Year.

 

33



 

(iv)          The pro-rated Annualized Financial Target for the Period attributable to the Base Fiscal Year (or $5,000,000 of Adjusted Net Income) is then compared with Green Park’s actual Adjusted Net Income during that Period (or $5,500,000). Since the adjusted Target was exceeded, and since the Employee’s employment during the Period was not terminated as a result of a Voluntary Retirement or a Termination With Cause, Employee’s Deferred Bonus for the Base Fiscal Year vests of June 30, 2002, and is payable to him in accordance with the terms of the Agreement.

 

6. Unless otherwise defined in this Schedule 1-2008, all capitalized words and phrases in this Schedule 1-2008 shall have the same meanings as are ascribed to them in the Agreement.

 

APPROVED AND ACCEPTED:

 

 

/s/ William Walker

 

June 16, 2008

 

 

 

William W. Walker

 

Date

 

 

 

President and CEO

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

/s/ Richard Warner

 

June 16, 2008

 

 

 

Richard C. Warner

 

Date

 

 

 

Senior Vice President

 

 

 

34




Exhibit 10.12

 

AMENDMENT TO

INCENTIVE DEFERRED BONUS COMPENSATION AGREEMENT

BETWEEN WALKER & DUNLOP GP, LLC AND

RICHARD WARNER

 

WHEREAS, Walker & Dunlop GP, LLC (the “Company”) and Richard Warner (the “Employee”) previously entered into an Incentive Deferred Bonus Compensation Agreement (the “Agreement”) originally effective as of June 16, 2008; and

 

WHEREAS, Section 4.8(B) of the Agreement provides that the Agreement may be amended at any time by written consent of the Company and the Employee; and

 

WHEREAS, the Company and the Employee now wish to amend the Agreement, effective as of January 1, 2009, in order to ensure compliance with the requirements of section 409A of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended, and to make certain other changes to the terms of payment as permitted by applicable transitional guidance.

 

NOW, THEREFORE, the Company and the Employee agree to amend the Agreement, effective as of January 1, 2009, as follows:

 

Section 3.2 is amended by deleting subsection 3.2(A)(ii) in its entirety and inserting the following in lieu thereof:

 

(ii)           If Employee’s rights to a Deferred Bonus for a Base Fiscal Year vest pursuant to Section 3.1(D), the portion of the Deferred Bonus attributable to each respective Base Fiscal Year shall be paid to Employee (or, if applicable, his Beneficiary) within sixty (60) days after the third anniversary of the first day of that Base Fiscal Year.  For example, if the Employee has earned a Deferred Bonus for the 2008 and 2009 Base Fiscal Years and a Change in Control occurs on December 31, 2009, (a) the Employee’s rights to the Deferred Bonus shall become fully earned and vested as of December 31, 2009; (b) the portion of the Deferred Bonus attributable to the 2008 Base Fiscal Year shall be paid to the Employee (or, if applicable, his Beneficiary) within 60 days after January 1, 2011, without regard to whether or not the Employee remains employed with the Company (or any successor entity) on that date; and (c) the portion of the Deferred Bonus attributable to the 2009 Base Fiscal Year shall be paid to the Employee (or, if applicable, his Beneficiary) within 60 days after January 1, 2012, without regard to whether or not the Employee remains employed with the Company (or any successor entity) on that date.

 

1



 

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed this Amendment as of the 31st day of December, 2008.

 

 

 

WALKER & DUNLOP GP, LLC

 

By:

/s/ Deborah A. Wilson

 

Name:

Deborah A. Wilson

 

Title:

SVP & CFO

 

 

 

 

 

/s/ Richard Warner

 

Richard Warner

 

2




Exhibit 10.13

 

Walker, W.

2009

 

INCENTIVE DEFERRED BONUS COMPENSATION AGREEMENT

 

THIS AGREEMENT (“Agreement”), made as of the 30 th  day of April , 2009, by and between Walker & Dunlop, LLC (“Employer”) and William M. Walker (“Employee”).

 

WITNESSETH THAT:

 

WHEREAS, Employee is serving as Employer’s President & Chief Executive Officer and, in that capacity has senior management responsibility for Employer’s operations and an important role in Employer’s success; and

 

WHEREAS, in order to maximize returns, Employer desires to provide Employee with an incentive to contribute to the growth of the business and profitability of the Employer and, to that end, the parties desire to enter into this Agreement.

 

NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the foregoing and of the mutual promises hereinafter set forth and of other good and valuable consideration, the sufficiency and receipt of which prior to the execution of these presents is hereby acknowledged, the parties hereto, intending to be legally bound, do hereby agree as follows:

 

1



 

ARTICLE I

 

Definitions

 

Section 1.1             Definitions.

 

When used in this Agreement, the following terms will have the meanings set forth below:

 

(A)          “Annualized Financial Target” means, with respect to a Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period, the aggregate Adjusted Net Income equal to or greater than the aggregate of the Base Financial Targets for each Fiscal Year contained within the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period.

 

(B)           “Adjusted Net Income” for a given period means Employer’s net income as determined in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles (“Net Income”) over that period, decreased by the non-recurring gain on sale of assets.

 

(C)           “Base Financial Target” means an amount budgeted at the discretion of Employer with respect to each Fiscal Year or Base Fiscal Year.  Once determined, the Base Financial Target applicable to each relevant Fiscal Year shall be listed on a Schedule or Exhibit to this Agreement.

 

(D)          “Base Fiscal Year” means the Fiscal Year to which a Deferred Bonus relates (e.g., Fiscal Year 2009 shall be the Base Fiscal Year for any Deferred Bonus potentially payable to Employee for Fiscal Year 2009 Plan).

 

(E)           “Beneficiary” means one or more individuals designated by Employee to receive benefits payable hereunder upon Employee’s death (whether voluntary or involuntary). Employee shall designate his Beneficiary in writing on a form provided by Employer. Employee may change his designated Beneficiary by filing a new form with

 

2



 

Employer (at least ten (10) business days prior to the effective date of such change). If no Beneficiary designated by Employee survives Employee, or if Employee fails to designate a Beneficiary, any payments due hereunder upon Employee’s death shall be paid to Employee’s executor or other legal representative.

 

(F)           “Change of Control” means the sale or transfer of substantially all equity interests or assets of the Employer to a third party, if the acquiring entity does not assume liability for the benefits provided hereunder pursuant to said transaction and Employer does not otherwise agree to continue or maintain this Agreement.

 

(G)           “Deferred Bonus” means the amount of the deferred bonus potentially payable to Employee on account of a particular Base Fiscal Year in accordance with the provisions hereof.

 

(H)          “Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period” means, with respect to each Deferred Bonus for each Base Fiscal Year, the period beginning on the first day of the Base Fiscal Year and terminating on the earliest to occur of the following:

 

(i)            the last day of the three (3) year period commencing with the first day of the Base Fiscal Year;

 

(ii)           the date of a Change of Control; or

 

(iii)          the date of Plan Termination.

 

(I)            “Deferred Compensation Pool” means, with respect to a Base Fiscal Year, 25% of the excess of (i) Employer’s Adjusted Net Income for that Base Fiscal Year, over (ii) the Base Financial Target for that Base Fiscal Year.

 

(J)            “Disability” means any physical or mental impairment which, in the opinion of Employer, based upon a competent medical examination, renders Employee unable to continue the performance of Employee’s regular duties with Employer and is expected to be permanent in duration or to continue for a period of 12 months or more. Employer shall have

 

3



 

absolute discretion to determine if and when a Disability has occurred for purposes of this Agreement, provided that nothing contained herein shall prevent Employee from submitting to Employer, at Employee’s expense, any evidence of disability that Employee deems relevant to said determination.

 

(K)          “Employee” means William M. Walker and, where appropriate, shall also be deemed to mean his executor, guardian or other legal representative.

 

(L)           “Employee Percentage” means the percentage of the Deferred Compensation Pool determined by Employer and specified in a Schedule or Exhibit attached hereto which shall be used to determine the amount of Employee’s Deferred Bonus for each respective Base Fiscal Year, as provided in Section 2.1.

 

(M)         “Employer” means Walker & Dunlop, LLC and any successor to, or assignee of, Walker & Dunlop, LLC to which Employee has consented, in Employee’s sole discretion, which will not be unreasonably withheld.

 

(N)          “Fiscal Year” means a fiscal year of Employer (presently a calendar

 

year).

 

(O)          “Person” means, as the context requires, an individual, partnership, corporation, trust, unincorporated association, joint stock company, or other legal entity or association.

 

(P)           “Plan Termination” means the voluntary termination of this Agreement by Employer pursuant to the provisions of Section 4.9(B).

 

(Q)          “Schedules” means, collectively, the Schedules attached, or to be attached, hereto.

 

(R)           “Termination With Cause” means the termination by Employer of Employee’s employment with Employer on account of (i) Employee’s conviction for the

 

4



 

commission of a felony in the course of his employment with Employer, or (ii) Employee’s gross, willful and intentional misconduct in connection with his employment with Employer.

 

(S)           “Termination Without Cause” means the termination by Employer of Employee’s employment with Employer without Employee’s consent for any reason which does not constitute Termination With Cause.

 

(T)           “Voluntary Resignation” means the voluntary decision or election by Employee to terminate his employment with Employer for any reason whatsoever other than a material breach by Employer of this Agreement which is not cured within any applicable grace period specified herein.

 

Section 1.2           Certain Other Definitions.

 

When used herein with its initial letter(s) capitalized, a term which is not defined in Section 1.1 shall be given the definition assigned to it elsewhere in this Agreement.

 

Section 1.3           Schedules and Exhibits.

 

Attached hereto and forming an integral part of this Agreement may be various Schedules and Exhibits, all of which are incorporated into this Agreement as fully as if the contents thereof were set out in full herein at each point of reference thereto. The provisions of the immediately preceding sentence shall also apply to any Schedules, Exhibits or other attachments which, pursuant to the provisions hereof, are to be prepared and attached hereto in the future. Notwithstanding any other provision hereof, if there is any conflict or inconsistency between the provisions contained in this Agreement and the provisions contained in any Schedule or Exhibit attached hereto (either now or in the future), the provisions of the Schedule or Exhibit shall govern and prevail.

 

5



 

ARTICLE II

 

Determination Of Deferred Bonus

 

Section 2.1             Amount of Deferred Bonus.

 

Subject to the vesting and forfeiture provisions outlined in Article III hereof, Employee shall be entitled to a Deferred Bonus for each Base Fiscal Year in an amount equal to (A) the Deferred Compensation Pool for that Base Fiscal Year (if any), multiplied by (B) Employee’s Employee Percentage for that Base Fiscal Year.

 

Section 2.2             Determination of Attainment of Financial Targets .

 

As soon as practicable, and in any event within sixty (60) days after the expiration of each Base Fiscal Year, Employer shall determine whether the Base Financial Target was met during such Base Fiscal Year and shall certify the amount of the Deferred Compensation Pool for that Base Fiscal Year, if applicable.  Employer shall promptly advise Employee as to whether the Base Financial Target has been met during the Base Fiscal Year in question and, if so, the amount of the Deferred Bonus for that Base Fiscal Year as computed by Employer. Employee shall be entitled to review all financial and other records relevant to Employer’s determinations with respect to the achievement of the Base Financial Target, the amount of Employee’s Deferred Bonus, if any, and all related computations. Employer shall give careful and good faith consideration to any bona fide questions raised by Employee regarding Employer’s foregoing determinations and shall make any adjustments therein as Employer deems necessary or appropriate in the light of such questions. Employer’s good faith determination as to the attainment of the Base Financial Target or other targets or computations relevant to the determination of Employee’s Deferred Bonus shall, however, be binding and conclusive on Employer and Employee unless the amount in question or

 

6



 

controversy as to the size of the Deferred Bonus exceeds $25,000 (in which event such question or controversy shall be referred to, and determined by, arbitration in accordance with Section 4.4 hereof). Once the final amount of Employee’s Deferred Bonus for any Base Fiscal Year has been computed, agreed or determined, such amount shall be memorialized in an addendum which shall also be attached hereto and shall be deemed a part hereof and such amount shall not then thereafter change.

 

7



 

ARTICLE III

 

Vesting, Forfeiture, and Payment of Deferred Bonus

 

Section 3.1             Vesting of Deferred Bonus — Annualized Financial Target Satisfied.

 

Each Employee’s vested status with regard to the Deferred Bonus for a Base Fiscal Year shall be determined as of the last day of the applicable Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period.  If, as of the last day of the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period, the Annualized Financial Target has been satisfied, each Employee’s vested status with respect to the Deferred Bonus for the applicable Base Fiscal Year shall be determined in accordance with the following rules:

 

(A)          If Employee has remained continuously employed by Employer until the last day of the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period, Employee shall become 100% vested in Employee’s Deferred Bonus for the applicable Base Fiscal Year provided that Employee remains employed by Employer until the date that the Deferred Bonus is actually paid.

 

(B)           If, prior to the last day of the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period, Employee was Terminated With Cause or terminated employment due to a Voluntary Resignation, Employee shall forfeit any and all right to a Deferred Bonus for the applicable Base Fiscal Year.

 

(C)           If, prior to the last day of the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period, Employee died, became Disabled, or was Terminated Without Cause, Employee (or his Beneficiary) shall obtain a vested right in a portion of his Deferred Bonus for the applicable Base Fiscal Year in an amount equal to a fraction, the numerator of which is the number of months Employee was employed by Employer beginning on the first day of the Base Fiscal Year and ending on the date of death, Disability, or termination (rounded to the nearest whole month), and the denominator of which is the number of whole months contained in the Deferred

 

8



 

Bonus Earn-Out Period (i.e., thirty-six (36) months for a Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period that does not end early due to Plan Termination).

 

(D)          In the case that the last day of a Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period occurs due to a Change of Control, the Annualized Financial Target shall be deemed to have been automatically satisfied without regard to Employer’s actual Adjusted Net Income.  In such a case, Employee’s vested status shall be determined as of the date of the Change of Control using the rules outlined in subsections (A), (B), or (C) above, as applicable, treating the date of the Change of Control as the last day of the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period.

 

(E)           In the case that the last day of a Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period occurs due to a Plan Termination, the Annualized Financial Target shall be deemed to have been satisfied provided that Adjusted Net Income, as of the date of Plan Termination, equals or exceeds the Annualized Financial Target, as pro-rated through the date of Plan Termination. In such a case, Employee’s vested status shall be determined as of the date of the Plan Termination using the rules outlined in subsections (A), (B), (C), or (D) above, as applicable, treating the date of Plan Termination as the last day of the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period.

 

Section 3.2             Forfeiture of Deferred Bonus.

 

Notwithstanding Section 3.1 above, Employee’s right to a Deferred Bonus for any particularly Base Fiscal Year shall be immediately and fully forfeited if either of the following events occurs:

 

(A)          Employee’s employment with Employer terminates as a result of a Termination With Cause or a Voluntary Resignation prior to the date following the last day of the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period for that Base Fiscal Year on which the Deferred Bonus is paid; or

 

9



 

(B)           the relevant Annualized Financial Target applicable to the Deferred Bonus for that Base Fiscal Year is not satisfied.

 

If one of the events delineated in (A) or (B) occurs with respect to a Base Fiscal Year, Employee’s Deferred Bonus for such Base Fiscal Year shall not vest and shall be forfeited in its entirety, and all of Employee’s rights, title and interest in or with respect to such Deferred Bonus shall lapse and be of no further force and effect. The forfeiture of Employee’s rights as to a Deferred Bonus for any particular Base Fiscal Year shall not prejudice or adversely affect in any way Employee’s rights, if any, to receive (or retain) a Deferred Bonus for another Base Fiscal Year.

 

Section 3.3            Payment of Vested Deferred Bonus.

 

(A)         Employer shall pay Employee (or, if applicable, his Beneficiary) the vested portion of any Deferred Bonus which vests pursuant to the provisions of Section 3.1 in accordance with the following provisions:

 

(i)             if the last day of the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period which results in the vesting of Employee’s Deferred Bonus occurs as a result of a Plan Termination, that Deferred Bonus shall be paid to Employee (or, if applicable, his Beneficiary) within sixty (60) days after the date of Plan Termination; and

 

(ii)            if the last day of the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period occurs for any reason other than Plan Termination, that Deferred Bonus shall be paid to Employee on January 31 of the taxable year immediately following the taxable year in which Employee’s rights to that Deferred Bonus vest, unless further time is needed to determine the attainment of the Annualized Financial Target, as described more fully below.

 

(B)            The payment period specified above shall be extended if, and to the extent, necessary in order for a determination to be made as to whether the Annualized Financial

 

10



 

Target has been met; provided that payment shall be made no later than 2-1/2 months after the last day of the taxable year in which Employee’s rights to the Deferred Bonus vest. An extension of the period within which a vested Deferred Bonus shall be paid shall not extend or defer the date as of which such Deferred Bonus shall be deemed to have vested.

 

(C)         Whenever the payment of a Deferred Bonus is dependent upon the meeting by Employer of all, or a specified percentage, of an Annualized Financial Target during a Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period, Employer shall, as promptly as may be practicable after the date on which the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period for such Deferred Bonus terminates and Employer has received such financial reports or data relating to Employer which are needed in order to determine whether all, or the specified percentage of the Annualized Financial Target has been met, make a written determination as to whether all, or the specified percentage, of such Annualized Financial Target has been met and shall provide Employee with a copy of such written determination. Employee shall have the right to review all financial and other records relevant to such determination. Employer shall give careful and good faith consideration to any bona fide questions raised by Employee regarding Employer’s determination and shall, if necessary or appropriate, adjust Employer’s determination in light of such questions. Employer’s good faith determination (either as initially made or as thereafter adjusted) as to whether Employer has met all, or the specified percentage, of the Annualized Financial Target shall, however, be binding and conclusive upon Employer and Employee unless the amount of the Deferred Bonus in question or controversy exceeds $25,000 (in which event all questions or controversies as to whether or not the Deferred Bonus in question has vested shall be referred to, and determined by, arbitration pursuant to Section 4.4 hereof).

 

11


 

ARTICLE IV

Other Provisions

 

Section 4.1             Funding.

 

The Deferred Bonus provided for hereunder shall be an unfunded obligation of Employer.  Employee and any Beneficiaries shall have the status of general unsecured creditors of Employer with respect to payment of any Deferred Bonus provided hereunder.  At no time shall Employee be deemed to have any lien, right, title or interest in or to any specific investment or to any assets of the Company.  At all times, the Company shall be the owner of any assets used to satisfy the Company’s obligations hereunder.

 

Section 4.2             Tax Advances.

 

If Employee’s rights to a Deferred Bonus for a Base Fiscal Year vest under circumstances in which the amount of the Deferred Bonus is deemed to be taxable income to the Employee for Federal, State or local income tax purposes and Employee is, or may be, liable to pay taxes on such deemed income before the Deferred Bonus is paid to Employee, Employer may, at its discretion, make an advance to Employee in an amount sufficient to permit Employee to pay the full amount of all taxes on such deemed income before such taxes shall become due. Any such advance shall not bear interest, and may be repaid to Employer, in whole or in part, at any time.  Any subsequent payment of the Deferred Bonus to Employee shall be adjusted to reflect any amount previously advanced pursuant to this Section 4.2.

 

12



 

Section 4.3             No Employment Agreement.

 

This Agreement does not constitute an employment agreement between Employer and Employee but instead is only intended to set out the respective rights and obligations of the parties with respect to Deferred Bonuses for Fiscal Year 2009 and subsequent Fiscal Years. Without in any way limiting the generality of the foregoing, it is expressly acknowledged and agreed that Employee does not have an employment agreement with Employer and that, unless or until the parties otherwise agree, Employee is an at-will employee of Employer; provided, however, that Employee’s status as an at-will employee shall not prejudice or adversely affect any of Employer’s vested rights hereunder upon any Termination of Employment.

 

Section 4.4             Arbitration.

 

(A)         Any disagreements which are referable to arbitration under the provisions of this Agreement, shall be referred to, and finally determined by, arbitration pursuant to the applicable Rules of Commercial Arbitration (“Rules”) of the American Arbitration Association (“AAA”), subject to the provisions of this Section 4.4. Employer and Employee shall each attempt to resolve any disagreement which is referable to arbitration by agreement and each party agrees to negotiate in good faith for a period of at least fifteen (15) business days after any such disagreement has arisen. If, despite such good faith negotiations, the parties are unable to resolve any such disagreement by agreement, then either party may, at any time after the expiration of the foregoing period of fifteen (15) business days, demand arbitration of such disagreement.

 

(B)          If the amount in controversy in the arbitrable disagreement is One Hundred Thousand Dollars ($100,000) or less, the arbitration shall be conducted before a single arbitrator selected by Employer and Employee within thirty (30) days after service of the

 

13



 

initial demand for arbitration. If the amount in controversy exceeds One Hundred Thousand Dollars ($100,000), the arbitration shall be conducted before three (3) arbitrators, one of whom shall be selected by Employer within thirty (30) days after service of the initial demand for arbitration, one of whom shall be selected by Employee within the foregoing thirty (30) day period and one of whom shall be selected by the two arbitrators selected by the parties within thirty (30) days after the second of such arbitrators is selected. Each arbitrator selected pursuant to this Section 4.4(B) shall be independent of both Employer and Employee and shall have at least fifteen (15) years experience in the subject matter of the disagreement to be arbitrated. If any arbitrator is not timely selected within the periods provided for in this Section 4.4(B), such arbitrator shall be appointed by the AAA pursuant to the Rules. Any arbitration pursuant to this Section 4.4 shall be conducted in Bethesda, Maryland, or in such other location as may then be agreed by the parties. A judgment upon the award rendered in any such arbitration shall be final and binding upon the parties and may be entered in any court of competent jurisdiction. All fees and expenses of the arbitrator(s) and all administrative costs of the arbitration shall be borne equally by the parties unless the arbitrator(s) otherwise direct(s). This agreement to arbitrate shall be specifically enforceable.

 

Section 4.5             Governing Law.

 

This Agreement and the rights and liabilities of the parties hereunder shall be governed by, and construed in accordance with, the laws of the State of Maryland without regard to such State’s principles of conflicts of law.

 

14



 

Section 4.6             No Third Party Beneficiary; Spendthrift Clause.

 

(A)          This Agreement is made solely and specifically between and for the benefit of the parties hereto and (subject to Section 4.7) their Beneficiaries, heirs, successors, assigns and legal representatives. No other Person whatsoever shall have any rights, interests or claims hereunder or be entitled to any benefits under or on account of this Agreement as a third parry beneficiary or otherwise.

 

(B)            To the maximum extent permitted by law, neither Employee nor any Beneficiary shall have any power to dispose of or to charge by way of anticipation any vested, potential or other right, title or interest hereunder, and any vested Deferred Bonus payable to Employee or any Beneficiary shall be free and clear of his debts, contracts, dispositions, and anticipations, and shall not be taken or reached by any legal or equitable process.

 

Section 4.7             Benefit and Burden.

 

This Agreement, and the respective rights and obligations of the parties hereunder, may not be assigned, sold, hypothecated, or otherwise transferred, either outright or as security, without the prior written consent of the other party which may be delayed, withheld or conditioned in the sole and absolute discretion of such other party; provided, however, that Employee may designate a Beneficiary without Employer’s consent. Any transfer, or attempted transfer, in violation of the provisions of this Section 4.7 shall be null and void ab initio. Subject to the foregoing provisions of this Section 4.7, the provisions of this Agreement shall be binding upon, and shall inure to the benefit of, the parties hereto, the Employee’s Beneficiary and their respective heirs, successors, legal representatives and permitted assigns.

 

15



 

Section 4.8             Computation of Time.

 

In computing any notice or other period of time prescribed or allowed by any provision of this Agreement, the day of the act, event, or default from which the designated period of time begins to run shall not be included. The last day of the period so computed shall be included, unless it is a Saturday, Sunday or a legal holiday in Bethesda, Maryland, in which event the period runs until the end of the next, day which is not a Saturday, Sunday or such legal holiday. All notice or other periods expire as of 5:00 p.m. (local time in Bethesda, Maryland) on the last day of the notice or other period.

 

Section 4.9             Entire Agreement; Amendment and Termination.

 

(A)          This Agreement contains the entire understanding between Employer and Employee regarding the subject matter hereof and supersedes any prior or contemporaneous understandings or agreements between them respecting such subject matter. There are no representations, warranties, agreements, arrangements or understandings, oral, written or expressed by, or based upon, conduct, between the parties relating to the subject matter hereof which are not fully expressed herein.

 

(B)           This Agreement, including the Schedules hereto, may not be amended, modified, waived, or discharged except by an instrument in writing which is duly executed by the party sought to be charged with any such amendment, modification, waiver, termination or discharge; provided, however, that this Agreement may be terminated at any time at the discretion of Employer.

 

Section 4.10           Construction.

 

(A)          Common nouns and pronouns shall be deemed to refer to the masculine, feminine, neuter, singular and plural, as the context may require.

 

16



 

(B)           All headings herein are inserted only for convenience and ease of reference and are not to be considered in the construction or interpretation of this Agreement.

 

(C)           Numbered or lettered Articles, sections, subsections, subparts and subparagraphs herein contained refer to Articles, sections, subsections, subparts and subparagraphs of this Agreement unless otherwise expressly stated. The words “herein,” “hereof,” “hereunder,” “hereby,” “this Agreement” and other similar references shall be construed to mean and include this Agreement and all amendments of, supplements to, and Schedules and other attachments to this Agreement unless the context shall clearly indicate or require otherwise.

 

(D)           Employer and Employee have both participated extensively in the negotiation and drafting of this Agreement. Accordingly, this Agreement shall not be interpreted or construed for or against either party as the draftsman hereof.

 

Section 4.11           Notices.

 

Any notices, demands, consents, requests or other communications (hereinafter collectively referred to in this Section 4.11 as “notice”) provided for or permitted to be given pursuant to this Agreement shall be in writing, and shall be delivered by hand, by first-class mail, postage prepaid (with a return receipt requested), or by Federal Express, or by some other commercial overnight delivery service, to the parties at the following addresses:

 

(i) If to Employer:

Walker & Dunlop, LLC

 

7501 Wisconsin Avenue, Suite 1200

 

Bethesda, Maryland 20814

 

Attn: Mr. Mallory Walker

 

 

(ii) If to Employee:

William M. Walker

 

3601 Newark Street, NW

 

Washington , DC 20016

 

17



 

Each notice shall be deemed given on the day it is received or on the day its delivery is refused by or for the addressee, whichever is earlier. Each party may change its address or addressee for notice by giving notice thereof in the manner provided above (such notice to be given at least five (5) business days prior to its effective date).

 

Section 4.12           Examples.

 

The operation of the provisions of this Agreement can be illustrated by the following examples.  Assume the Base Fiscal Year is 2009, with Base Financial Targets and achievement of Adjusted Net Income as provided in the table below:

 

 

 

 

Target

 

Actual
Adjusted Net
Income

 

Deferred
Compensation
Pool

 

 

Base Financial Target (2009)

 

$

10

M (budgeted)

$

14

M

=(14-10)*.25 = $1M

 

 

Base Financial Target (2010)

 

$

12

M

$

7

M

 

 

 

Base Financial Target (2011)

 

$

14

M

$

16

M

 

 

 

Totals

 

$

36

M

$

37

M

 

 

 

(A)          Because Employer’s Adjusted Net Income for the 2009 Base Fiscal Year ($14 million) was $4 million greater than the Base Financial Target for that year ($10 million), the Deferred Compensation Pool for that year is $1 million ($4 million multiplied by 25%).

 

(B)           Assume that Employee X has an Employee Percentage of 10%, and continues employment with Employer through the date the Deferred Bonus is actually paid, on or about January 31, 2012.  Because, as of the last day of the 2011 Fiscal Year, aggregate Adjusted Net Income ($37 million) exceeds the aggregate of the Base Financial Targets for the three Fiscal Years contained in the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period ($36 million), the Annualized

 

18



 

Financial Target is satisfied and Employee X becomes 100% vested in his Deferred Bonus for the 2009 Fiscal Year as of December 31, 2011.  Employee X will receive a distribution of his Deferred Bonus in the amount of $100,000 ($1 million Deferred Compensation Pool multiplied by 10% Employee Percentage) on or about January 31, 2012.

 

(C)           Assume that Employee Y has an Employee Percentage of 10% and incurs a Disability on July 1, 2010.  Because, as of the last day of the 2011 Fiscal Year, aggregate Adjusted Net Income ($37 million) exceeds the aggregate of the Base Financial Targets for the three Fiscal Years contained in the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period ($36 million), the Annualized Financial Target is satisfied and Employee Y becomes 50% vested (18 months of employment from the first day of the Base Fiscal Year through the date of Disability, divided by 36 months) in his Deferred Bonus for the 2009 Fiscal Year as of December 31, 2011.  Employee Y will receive a distribution of his Deferred Bonus in the amount of $50,000 ($1 million Deferred Compensation Pool multiplied by 10% Employee Percentage multiplied by 50% vested percentage) on or about January 31, 2012.  The remaining $50,000 unvested Deferred Bonus is forfeited.

 

19



 

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed and delivered this Agreement as of the date first above written.

 

 

WALKER & DUNLOP, LLC

 

 

 

  (“Employer”)

 

 

 

Date:

April 30, 2009

 

 

 

 

By:

/s/ Mallory Walker

 

 

 

 

 

Mallory Walker

 

 

 

 

 

Chairman

 

 

 

 

 

William M. Walker (“Employee”)

 

 

 

 

Date:

April 30, 2009

 

 

 

 

By:

/s/ William Walker

 

 

 

 

 

William M. Walker

 

 

 

 

 

President &

 

 

 

 

 

Chief Executive Officer

 

20



 

SCHEDULE 1-2009

 

Formulae for Computation of Deferred Bonus

 

1.            (A)           The following is a summary of key defined terms for 2009:

 

(i)            Employee: William M. Walker

 

(ii)                                   Base Fiscal Year: January 1, 2009 - December 31, 2009

 

(iii)                                Base Financial Target: $25,272,927.00

 

(iv)           Deferred Compensation Pool:  25% of the difference between 2009 Adjusted Net Income minus the Base Financial Target

 

(v)            Employee Percentage: 25% of Deferred Compensation Pool

 

(B)            Employee shall be entitled to a Deferred Bonus in the amount equal to (i) the Employee Percentage times (ii) the Deferred Compensation Pool, subject to all applicable vesting provisions set forth in the foregoing and attached Incentive Deferred Bonus Compensation Agreement (“Agreement”) of which this Schedule 1-2009 is a part. In no event shall the Deferred Bonus be less than zero.

 

2.               Unless otherwise defined in this Schedule 1-2009, all capitalized words and phrases in this Schedule 1-2009 shall have the same meanings as are ascribed to them in the Agreement.

 

21



 

APPROVED AND ACCEPTED:

 

 

/s/ Mallory Walker

 

April 30, 2009

 

 

 

Mallory Walker

 

Date

 

 

 

Chairman

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

/s/ William Walker

 

April 30, 2009

 

 

 

William M. Walker

 

Date

 

 

 

President & Chief Executive Officer

 

 

 

22




Exhibit 10.14

 

Smith, H.

2009

 

INCENTIVE DEFERRED BONUS COMPENSATION AGREEMENT

 

THIS AGREEMENT (“Agreement”), made as of the 30 th  day of April , 2009, by and between Walker & Dunlop, LLC (“Employer”) and Howard W. Smith III (“Employee”).

 

WITNESSETH THAT:

 

WHEREAS, Employee is serving as Employer’s Executive Vice President & Chief Operating Officer and, in that capacity has senior management responsibility for Employer’s operations and an important role in Employer’s success; and

 

WHEREAS, in order to maximize returns, Employer desires to provide Employee with an incentive to contribute to the growth of the business and profitability of the Employer and, to that end, the parties desire to enter into this Agreement.

 

NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the foregoing and of the mutual promises hereinafter set forth and of other good and valuable consideration, the sufficiency and receipt of which prior to the execution of these presents is hereby acknowledged, the parties hereto, intending to be legally bound, do hereby agree as follows:

 

1



 

ARTICLE I

 

Definitions

 

Section 1.1             Definitions.

 

When used in this Agreement, the following terms will have the meanings set forth below:

 

(A)          “Annualized Financial Target” means, with respect to a Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period, the aggregate Adjusted Net Income equal to or greater than the aggregate of the Base Financial Targets for each Fiscal Year contained within the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period.

 

(B)           “Adjusted Net Income” for a given period means Employer’s net income as determined in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles (“Net Income”) over that period, decreased by the non-recurring gain on sale of assets.

 

(C)           “Base Financial Target” means an amount budgeted at the discretion of Employer with respect to each Fiscal Year or Base Fiscal Year.  Once determined, the Base Financial Target applicable to each relevant Fiscal Year shall be listed on a Schedule or Exhibit to this Agreement.

 

(D)          “Base Fiscal Year” means the Fiscal Year to which a Deferred Bonus relates (e.g., Fiscal Year 2009 shall be the Base Fiscal Year for any Deferred Bonus potentially payable to Employee for Fiscal Year 2009 Plan).

 

(E)           “Beneficiary” means one or more individuals designated by Employee to receive benefits payable hereunder upon Employee’s death (whether voluntary or involuntary). Employee shall designate his Beneficiary in writing on a form provided by Employer. Employee may change his designated Beneficiary by filing a new form with Employer (at least ten (10) business days prior to the effective date of such change). If no

 

2



 

Beneficiary designated by Employee survives Employee, or if Employee fails to designate a Beneficiary, any payments due hereunder upon Employee’s death shall be paid to Employee’s executor or other legal representative.

 

(F)           “Change of Control” means the sale or transfer of substantially all equity interests or assets of the Employer to a third party, if the acquiring entity does not assume liability for the benefits provided hereunder pursuant to said transaction and Employer does not otherwise agree to continue or maintain this Agreement.

 

(G)           “Deferred Bonus” means the amount of the deferred bonus potentially payable to Employee on account of a particular Base Fiscal Year in accordance with the provisions hereof.

 

(H)          “Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period” means, with respect to each Deferred Bonus for each Base Fiscal Year, the period beginning on the first day of the Base Fiscal Year and terminating on the earliest to occur of the following:

 

(i)            the last day of the three (3) year period commencing with the first day of the Base Fiscal Year;

 

(ii)           the date of a Change of Control; or

 

(iii)          the date of Plan Termination.

 

(I)            “Deferred Compensation Pool” means, with respect to a Base Fiscal Year, 25% of the excess of (i) Employer’s Adjusted Net Income for that Base Fiscal Year, over (ii) the Base Financial Target for that Base Fiscal Year.

 

(J)            “Disability” means any physical or mental impairment which, in the opinion of Employer, based upon a competent medical examination, renders Employee unable to continue the performance of Employee’s regular duties with Employer and is expected to be permanent in duration or to continue for a period of 12 months or more. Employer shall have absolute discretion to determine if and when a Disability has occurred for purposes of this

 

3



 

Agreement, provided that nothing contained herein shall prevent Employee from submitting to Employer, at Employee’s expense, any evidence of disability that Employee deems relevant to said determination.

 

(K)          “Employee” means Howard W. Smith III and, where appropriate, shall also be deemed to mean his executor, guardian or other legal representative.

 

(L)           “Employee Percentage” means the percentage of the Deferred Compensation Pool determined by Employer and specified in a Schedule or Exhibit attached hereto which shall be used to determine the amount of Employee’s Deferred Bonus for each respective Base Fiscal Year, as provided in Section 2.1.

 

(M)         “Employer” means Walker & Dunlop, LLC and any successor to, or assignee of, Walker & Dunlop, LLC to which Employee has consented, in Employee’s sole discretion, which will not be unreasonably withheld.

 

(N)          “Fiscal Year” means a fiscal year of Employer (presently a calendar

 

year).

 

(O)          “Person” means, as the context requires, an individual, partnership, corporation, trust, unincorporated association, joint stock company, or other legal entity or association.

 

(P)           “Plan Termination” means the voluntary termination of this Agreement by Employer pursuant to the provisions of Section 4.9(B).

 

(Q)          “Schedules” means, collectively, the Schedules attached, or to be attached, hereto.

 

(R)           “Termination With Cause” means the termination by Employer of Employee’s employment with Employer on account of (i) Employee’s conviction for the

 

4



 

commission of a felony in the course of his employment with Employer, or (ii) Employee’s gross, willful and intentional misconduct in connection with his employment with Employer.

 

(S)           “Termination Without Cause” means the termination by Employer of Employee’s employment with Employer without Employee’s consent for any reason which does not constitute Termination With Cause.

 

(T)           “Voluntary Resignation” means the voluntary decision or election by Employee to terminate his employment with Employer for any reason whatsoever other than a material breach by Employer of this Agreement which is not cured within any applicable grace period specified herein.

 

Section 1.2           Certain Other Definitions.

 

When used herein with its initial letter(s) capitalized, a term which is not defined in Section 1.1 shall be given the definition assigned to it elsewhere in this Agreement.

 

Section 1.3           Schedules and Exhibits.

 

Attached hereto and forming an integral part of this Agreement may be various Schedules and Exhibits, all of which are incorporated into this Agreement as fully as if the contents thereof were set out in full herein at each point of reference thereto. The provisions of the immediately preceding sentence shall also apply to any Schedules, Exhibits or other attachments which, pursuant to the provisions hereof, are to be prepared and attached hereto in the future. Notwithstanding any other provision hereof, if there is any conflict or inconsistency between the provisions contained in this Agreement and the provisions contained in any Schedule or Exhibit attached hereto (either now or in the future), the provisions of the Schedule or Exhibit shall govern and prevail.

 

5



 

ARTICLE II

 

Determination Of Deferred Bonus

 

Section 2.1             Amount of Deferred Bonus.

 

Subject to the vesting and forfeiture provisions outlined in Article III hereof, Employee shall be entitled to a Deferred Bonus for each Base Fiscal Year in an amount equal to (A) the Deferred Compensation Pool for that Base Fiscal Year (if any), multiplied by (B) Employee’s Employee Percentage for that Base Fiscal Year.

 

Section 2.2             Determination of Attainment of Financial Targets .

 

As soon as practicable, and in any event within sixty (60) days after the expiration of each Base Fiscal Year, Employer shall determine whether the Base Financial Target was met during such Base Fiscal Year and shall certify the amount of the Deferred Compensation Pool for that Base Fiscal Year, if applicable.  Employer shall promptly advise Employee as to whether the Base Financial Target has been met during the Base Fiscal Year in question and, if so, the amount of the Deferred Bonus for that Base Fiscal Year as computed by Employer. Employee shall be entitled to review all financial and other records relevant to Employer’s determinations with respect to the achievement of the Base Financial Target, the amount of Employee’s Deferred Bonus, if any, and all related computations. Employer shall give careful and good faith consideration to any bona fide questions raised by Employee regarding Employer’s foregoing determinations and shall make any adjustments therein as Employer deems necessary or appropriate in the light of such questions. Employer’s good faith determination as to the attainment of the Base Financial Target or other targets or computations relevant to the determination of Employee’s Deferred Bonus shall, however, be binding and conclusive on Employer and Employee unless the amount in question or

 

6



 

controversy as to the size of the Deferred Bonus exceeds $25,000 (in which event such question or controversy shall be referred to, and determined by, arbitration in accordance with Section 4.4 hereof). Once the final amount of Employee’s Deferred Bonus for any Base Fiscal Year has been computed, agreed or determined, such amount shall be memorialized in an addendum which shall also be attached hereto and shall be deemed a part hereof and such amount shall not then thereafter change.

 

7



 

ARTICLE III

 

Vesting, Forfeiture, and Payment of Deferred Bonus

 

Section 3.1             Vesting of Deferred Bonus — Annualized Financial Target Satisfied.

 

Each Employee’s vested status with regard to the Deferred Bonus for a Base Fiscal Year shall be determined as of the last day of the applicable Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period.  If, as of the last day of the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period, the Annualized Financial Target has been satisfied, each Employee’s vested status with respect to the Deferred Bonus for the applicable Base Fiscal Year shall be determined in accordance with the following rules:

 

(A)          If Employee has remained continuously employed by Employer until the last day of the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period, Employee shall become 100% vested in Employee’s Deferred Bonus for the applicable Base Fiscal Year provided that Employee remains employed by Employer until the date that the Deferred Bonus is actually paid.

 

(B)           If, prior to the last day of the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period, Employee was Terminated With Cause or terminated employment due to a Voluntary Resignation, Employee shall forfeit any and all right to a Deferred Bonus for the applicable Base Fiscal Year.

 

(C)           If, prior to the last day of the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period, Employee died, became Disabled, or was Terminated Without Cause, Employee (or his Beneficiary) shall obtain a vested right in a portion of his Deferred Bonus for the applicable Base Fiscal Year in an amount equal to a fraction, the numerator of which is the number of months Employee was employed by Employer beginning on the first day of the Base Fiscal Year and ending on the date of death, Disability, or termination (rounded to the nearest whole month), and the denominator of which is the number of whole months contained in the Deferred

 

8



 

Bonus Earn-Out Period (i.e., thirty-six (36) months for a Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period that does not end early due to Plan Termination).

 

(D)          In the case that the last day of a Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period occurs due to a Change of Control, the Annualized Financial Target shall be deemed to have been automatically satisfied without regard to Employer’s actual Adjusted Net Income.  In such a case, Employee’s vested status shall be determined as of the date of the Change of Control using the rules outlined in subsections (A), (B), or (C) above, as applicable, treating the date of the Change of Control as the last day of the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period.

 

(E)           In the case that the last day of a Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period occurs due to a Plan Termination, the Annualized Financial Target shall be deemed to have been satisfied provided that Adjusted Net Income, as of the date of Plan Termination, equals or exceeds the Annualized Financial Target, as pro-rated through the date of Plan Termination. In such a case, Employee’s vested status shall be determined as of the date of the Plan Termination using the rules outlined in subsections (A), (B), (C), or (D) above, as applicable, treating the date of Plan Termination as the last day of the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period.

 

Section 3.2             Forfeiture of Deferred Bonus.

 

Notwithstanding Section 3.1 above, Employee’s right to a Deferred Bonus for any particularly Base Fiscal Year shall be immediately and fully forfeited if either of the following events occurs:

 

(A)          Employee’s employment with Employer terminates as a result of a Termination With Cause or a Voluntary Resignation prior to the date following the last day of the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period for that Base Fiscal Year on which the Deferred Bonus is paid; or

 

9



 

(B)           the relevant Annualized Financial Target applicable to the Deferred Bonus for that Base Fiscal Year is not satisfied.

 

If one of the events delineated in (A) or (B) occurs with respect to a Base Fiscal Year, Employee’s Deferred Bonus for such Base Fiscal Year shall not vest and shall be forfeited in its entirety, and all of Employee’s rights, title and interest in or with respect to such Deferred Bonus shall lapse and be of no further force and effect. The forfeiture of Employee’s rights as to a Deferred Bonus for any particular Base Fiscal Year shall not prejudice or adversely affect in any way Employee’s rights, if any, to receive (or retain) a Deferred Bonus for another Base Fiscal Year.

 

Section 3.3            Payment of Vested Deferred Bonus.

 

(A)          Employer shall pay Employee (or, if applicable, his Beneficiary) the vested portion of any Deferred Bonus which vests pursuant to the provisions of Section 3.1 in accordance with the following provisions:

 

(i)             if the last day of the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period which results in the vesting of Employee’s Deferred Bonus occurs as a result of a Plan Termination, that Deferred Bonus shall be paid to Employee (or, if applicable, his Beneficiary) within sixty (60) days after the date of Plan Termination; and

 

(ii)            if the last day of the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period occurs for any reason other than Plan Termination, that Deferred Bonus shall be paid to Employee on January 31 of the taxable year immediately following the taxable year in which Employee’s rights to that Deferred Bonus vest, unless further time is needed to determine the attainment of the Annualized Financial Target, as described more fully below.

 

(B)            The payment period specified above shall be extended if, and to the extent, necessary in order for a determination to be made as to whether the Annualized Financial

 

10



 

Target has been met; provided that payment shall be made no later than 2-1/2 months after the last day of the taxable year in which Employee’s rights to the Deferred Bonus vest. An extension of the period within which a vested Deferred Bonus shall be paid shall not extend or defer the date as of which such Deferred Bonus shall be deemed to have vested.

 

(C)         Whenever the payment of a Deferred Bonus is dependent upon the meeting by Employer of all, or a specified percentage, of an Annualized Financial Target during a Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period, Employer shall, as promptly as may be practicable after the date on which the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period for such Deferred Bonus terminates and Employer has received such financial reports or data relating to Employer which are needed in order to determine whether all, or the specified percentage of the Annualized Financial Target has been met, make a written determination as to whether all, or the specified percentage, of such Annualized Financial Target has been met and shall provide Employee with a copy of such written determination. Employee shall have the right to review all financial and other records relevant to such determination. Employer shall give careful and good faith consideration to any bona fide questions raised by Employee regarding Employer’s determination and shall, if necessary or appropriate, adjust Employer’s determination in light of such questions. Employer’s good faith determination (either as initially made or as thereafter adjusted) as to whether Employer has met all, or the specified percentage, of the Annualized Financial Target shall, however, be binding and conclusive upon Employer and Employee unless the amount of the Deferred Bonus in question or controversy exceeds $25,000 (in which event all questions or controversies as to whether or not the Deferred Bonus in question has vested shall be referred to, and determined by, arbitration pursuant to Section 4.4 hereof).

 

11


 

ARTICLE IV

Other Provisions

 

Section 4.1            Funding.

 

The Deferred Bonus provided for hereunder shall be an unfunded obligation of Employer.  Employee and any Beneficiaries shall have the status of general unsecured creditors of Employer with respect to payment of any Deferred Bonus provided hereunder.  At no time shall Employee be deemed to have any lien, right, title or interest in or to any specific investment or to any assets of the Company.  At all times, the Company shall be the owner of any assets used to satisfy the Company’s obligations hereunder.

 

Section 4.2            Tax Advances.

 

If Employee’s rights to a Deferred Bonus for a Base Fiscal Year vest under circumstances in which the amount of the Deferred Bonus is deemed to be taxable income to the Employee for Federal, State or local income tax purposes and Employee is, or may be, liable to pay taxes on such deemed income before the Deferred Bonus is paid to Employee, Employer may, at its discretion, make an advance to Employee in an amount sufficient to permit Employee to pay the full amount of all taxes on such deemed income before such taxes shall become due. Any such advance shall not bear interest, and may be repaid to Employer, in whole or in part, at any time.  Any subsequent payment of the Deferred Bonus to Employee shall be adjusted to reflect any amount previously advanced pursuant to this Section 4.2.

 

12



 

Section 4.3            No Employment Agreement.

 

This Agreement does not constitute an employment agreement between Employer and Employee but instead is only intended to set out the respective rights and obligations of the parties with respect to Deferred Bonuses for Fiscal Year 2009 and subsequent Fiscal Years. Without in any way limiting the generality of the foregoing, it is expressly acknowledged and agreed that Employee does not have an employment agreement with Employer and that, unless or until the parties otherwise agree, Employee is an at-will employee of Employer; provided, however, that Employee’s status as an at-will employee shall not prejudice or adversely affect any of Employer’s vested rights hereunder upon any Termination of Employment.

 

Section 4.4            Arbitration.

 

(A)          Any disagreements which are referable to arbitration under the provisions of this Agreement, shall be referred to, and finally determined by, arbitration pursuant to the applicable Rules of Commercial Arbitration (“Rules”) of the American Arbitration Association (“AAA”), subject to the provisions of this Section 4.4. Employer and Employee shall each attempt to resolve any disagreement which is referable to arbitration by agreement and each party agrees to negotiate in good faith for a period of at least fifteen (15) business days after any such disagreement has arisen. If, despite such good faith negotiations, the parties are unable to resolve any such disagreement by agreement, then either party may, at any time after the expiration of the foregoing period of fifteen (15) business days, demand arbitration of such disagreement.

 

(B)          If the amount in controversy in the arbitrable disagreement is One Hundred Thousand Dollars ($100,000) or less, the arbitration shall be conducted before a single arbitrator selected by Employer and Employee within thirty (30) days after service of the initial demand for arbitration. If the amount in controversy exceeds One Hundred Thousand

 

13



 

Dollars ($100,000), the arbitration shall be conducted before three (3) arbitrators, one of whom shall be selected by Employer within thirty (30) days after service of the initial demand for arbitration, one of whom shall be selected by Employee within the foregoing thirty (30) day period and one of whom shall be selected by the two arbitrators selected by the parties within thirty (30) days after the second of such arbitrators is selected. Each arbitrator selected pursuant to this Section 4.4(B) shall be independent of both Employer and Employee and shall have at least fifteen (15) years experience in the subject matter of the disagreement to be arbitrated. If any arbitrator is not timely selected within the periods provided for in this Section 4.4(B), such arbitrator shall be appointed by the AAA pursuant to the Rules. Any arbitration pursuant to this Section 4.4 shall be conducted in Bethesda, Maryland, or in such other location as may then be agreed by the parties. A judgment upon the award rendered in any such arbitration shall be final and binding upon the parties and may be entered in any court of competent jurisdiction. All fees and expenses of the arbitrator(s) and all administrative costs of the arbitration shall be borne equally by the parties unless the arbitrator(s) otherwise direct(s). This agreement to arbitrate shall be specifically enforceable.

 

Section 4.5            Governing Law.

 

This Agreement and the rights and liabilities of the parties hereunder shall be governed by, and construed in accordance with, the laws of the State of Maryland without regard to such State’s principles of conflicts of law.

 

Section 4.6            No Third Party Beneficiary; Spendthrift Clause.

 

(A)          This Agreement is made solely and specifically between and for the benefit of the parties hereto and (subject to Section 4.7) their Beneficiaries, heirs, successors, assigns

 

14



 

and legal representatives. No other Person whatsoever shall have any rights, interests or claims hereunder or be entitled to any benefits under or on account of this Agreement as a third parry beneficiary or otherwise.

 

(B)            To the maximum extent permitted by law, neither Employee nor any Beneficiary shall have any power to dispose of or to charge by way of anticipation any vested, potential or other right, title or interest hereunder, and any vested Deferred Bonus payable to Employee or any Beneficiary shall be free and clear of his debts, contracts, dispositions, and anticipations, and shall not be taken or reached by any legal or equitable process.

 

Section 4.7            Benefit and Burden.

 

This Agreement, and the respective rights and obligations of the parties hereunder, may not be assigned, sold, hypothecated, or otherwise transferred, either outright or as security, without the prior written consent of the other party which may be delayed, withheld or conditioned in the sole and absolute discretion of such other party; provided, however, that Employee may designate a Beneficiary without Employer’s consent. Any transfer, or attempted transfer, in violation of the provisions of this Section 4.7 shall be null and void ab initio. Subject to the foregoing provisions of this Section 4.7, the provisions of this Agreement shall be binding upon, and shall inure to the benefit of, the parties hereto, the Employee’s Beneficiary and their respective heirs, successors, legal representatives and permitted assigns.

 

Section 4.8            Computation of Time.

 

In computing any notice or other period of time prescribed or allowed by any provision of this Agreement, the day of the act, event, or default from which the designated

 

15



 

period of time begins to run shall not be included. The last day of the period so computed shall be included, unless it is a Saturday, Sunday or a legal holiday in Bethesda, Maryland, in which event the period runs until the end of the next, day which is not a Saturday, Sunday or such legal holiday. All notice or other periods expire as of 5:00 p.m. (local time in Bethesda, Maryland) on the last day of the notice or other period.

 

Section 4.9            Entire Agreement; Amendment and Termination.

 

(A)          This Agreement contains the entire understanding between Employer and Employee regarding the subject matter hereof and supersedes any prior or contemporaneous understandings or agreements between them respecting such subject matter. There are no representations, warranties, agreements, arrangements or understandings, oral, written or expressed by, or based upon, conduct, between the parties relating to the subject matter hereof which are not fully expressed herein.

 

(B)          This Agreement, including the Schedules hereto, may not be amended, modified, waived, or discharged except by an instrument in writing which is duly executed by the party sought to be charged with any such amendment, modification, waiver, termination or discharge; provided, however, that this Agreement may be terminated at any time at the discretion of Employer.

 

Section 4.10          Construction.

 

(A)          Common nouns and pronouns shall be deemed to refer to the masculine, feminine, neuter, singular and plural, as the context may require.

 

(B)          All headings herein are inserted only for convenience and ease of reference and are not to be considered in the construction or interpretation of this Agreement.

 

16



 

(C)          Numbered or lettered Articles, sections, subsections, subparts and subparagraphs herein contained refer to Articles, sections, subsections, subparts and subparagraphs of this Agreement unless otherwise expressly stated. The words “herein,” “hereof,” “hereunder,” “hereby,” “this Agreement” and other similar references shall be construed to mean and include this Agreement and all amendments of, supplements to, and Schedules and other attachments to this Agreement unless the context shall clearly indicate or require otherwise.

 

(D)           Employer and Employee have both participated extensively in the negotiation and drafting of this Agreement. Accordingly, this Agreement shall not be interpreted or construed for or against either party as the draftsman hereof.

 

Section 4.11          Notices.

 

Any notices, demands, consents, requests or other communications (hereinafter collectively referred to in this Section 4.11 as “notice”) provided for or permitted to be given pursuant to this Agreement shall be in writing, and shall be delivered by hand, by first-class mail, postage prepaid (with a return receipt requested), or by Federal Express, or by some other commercial overnight delivery service, to the parties at the following addresses:

 

(i) If to Employer:

Walker & Dunlop, LLC

 

7501 Wisconsin Avenue, Suite 1200

 

Bethesda, Maryland 20814

 

Attn: Mr. William M. Walker

 

 

(ii) If to Employee:

Howard W. Smith III

 

2915 44th Street, NW

 

Washington , DC 20016

 

17



 

Each notice shall be deemed given on the day it is received or on the day its delivery is refused by or for the addressee, whichever is earlier. Each party may change its address or addressee for notice by giving notice thereof in the manner provided above (such notice to be given at least five (5) business days prior to its effective date).

 

Section 4.12          Examples.

 

The operation of the provisions of this Agreement can be illustrated by the following examples.  Assume the Base Fiscal Year is 2009, with Base Financial Targets and achievement of Adjusted Net Income as provided in the table below:

 

 

 

Target

 

Actual
Adjusted Net
Income

 

Deferred
Compensation
Pool

 

Base Financial Target (2009)

 

$

10

M (budgeted)

$

14

M

=(14-10)*.25 = $1M

 

Base Financial Target (2010)

 

$

12

M

$

7

M

 

 

Base Financial Target (2011)

 

$

14

M

$

16

M

 

 

Totals

 

$

36

M

$

37

M

 

 

 

(A)          Because Employer’s Adjusted Net Income for the 2009 Base Fiscal Year ($14 million) was $4 million greater than the Base Financial Target for that year ($10 million), the Deferred Compensation Pool for that year is $1 million ($4 million multiplied by 25%).

 

(B)          Assume that Employee X has an Employee Percentage of 10%, and continues employment with Employer through the date the Deferred Bonus is actually paid, on or about January 31, 2012.  Because, as of the last day of the 2011 Fiscal Year, aggregate Adjusted Net Income ($37 million) exceeds the aggregate of the Base Financial Targets for the three Fiscal Years contained in the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period ($36 million), the Annualized

 

18



 

Financial Target is satisfied and Employee X becomes 100% vested in his Deferred Bonus for the 2009 Fiscal Year as of December 31, 2011.  Employee X will receive a distribution of his Deferred Bonus in the amount of $100,000 ($1 million Deferred Compensation Pool multiplied by 10% Employee Percentage) on or about January 31, 2012.

 

(C)          Assume that Employee Y has an Employee Percentage of 10% and incurs a Disability on July 1, 2010.  Because, as of the last day of the 2011 Fiscal Year, aggregate Adjusted Net Income ($37 million) exceeds the aggregate of the Base Financial Targets for the three Fiscal Years contained in the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period ($36 million), the Annualized Financial Target is satisfied and Employee Y becomes 50% vested (18 months of employment from the first day of the Base Fiscal Year through the date of Disability, divided by 36 months) in his Deferred Bonus for the 2009 Fiscal Year as of December 31, 2011.  Employee Y will receive a distribution of his Deferred Bonus in the amount of $50,000 ($1 million Deferred Compensation Pool multiplied by 10% Employee Percentage multiplied by 50% vested percentage) on or about January 31, 2012.  The remaining $50,000 unvested Deferred Bonus is forfeited.

 

19



 

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed and delivered this Agreement as of the date first above written.

 

 

WALKER & DUNLOP, LLC

 

 

 

  ( “Employer” )

 

 

 

 

Date:

April 30, 2009

 

 

 

 

By:

/s/ William Walker

 

 

 

 

 

William M. Walker

 

 

 

 

 

President &

 

 

 

 

 

Chief Executive Officer

 

 

 

 

 

Howard W. Smith III ( “Employee” )

 

 

 

 

Date:

April 30, 2009

 

 

 

 

By:

/s/ Howard W. Smith III

 

 

 

 

 

Howard W. Smith III

 

 

 

 

 

Executive Vice President &

 

 

 

 

 

Chief Operating Officer

 

20



 

SCHEDULE 1-2009

 

Formulae for Computation of Deferred Bonus

 

1.            (A)           The following is a summary of key defined terms for 2009:

 

(i)            Employee: Howard W. Smith III

 

(ii)                                   Base Fiscal Year: January 1, 2009 - December 31, 2009

 

(iii)                                Base Financial Target: $25,272,927.00

 

(iv)           Deferred Compensation Pool:  25% of the difference between 2009 Adjusted Net Income minus the Base Financial Target

 

(v)            Employee Percentage: 25% of Deferred Compensation Pool

 

(B)           Employee shall be entitled to a Deferred Bonus in the amount equal to (i) the Employee Percentage times (ii) the Deferred Compensation Pool, subject to all applicable vesting provisions set forth in the foregoing and attached Incentive Deferred Bonus Compensation Agreement (“Agreement”) of which this Schedule 1-2009 is a part. In no event shall the Deferred Bonus be less than zero.

 

2.              Unless otherwise defined in this Schedule 1-2009, all capitalized words and phrases in this Schedule 1-2009 shall have the same meanings as are ascribed to them in the Agreement.

 

21



 

APPROVED AND ACCEPTED:

 

 

/s/ William Walker

 

April 30, 2009

 

 

 

William M. Walker

 

Date

 

 

 

President  & Chief Executive Officer

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

/s/ Howard W. Smith III

 

April 30, 2009

 

 

 

Howard W. Smith III

 

Date

 

 

 

Executive Vice President & Chief Operating Officer

 

 

 

22




Exhibit 10.15

 

Warner, R.

2009

 

INCENTIVE DEFERRED BONUS COMPENSATION AGREEMENT

 

THIS AGREEMENT (“Agreement”), made as of the 30 th  day of April , 2009, by and between Walker & Dunlop, LLC (“Employer”) and Richard Warner (“Employee”).

 

WITNESSETH THAT:

 

WHEREAS, Employee is serving as Employer’s Senior Vice President & Chief Underwriter and, in that capacity has senior management responsibility for Employer’s operations and an important role in Employer’s success; and

 

WHEREAS, in order to maximize returns, Employer desires to provide Employee with an incentive to contribute to the growth of the business and profitability of the Employer and, to that end, the parties desire to enter into this Agreement.

 

NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the foregoing and of the mutual promises hereinafter set forth and of other good and valuable consideration, the sufficiency and receipt of which prior to the execution of these presents is hereby acknowledged, the parties hereto, intending to be legally bound, do hereby agree as follows:

 

1



 

ARTICLE I

 

Definitions

 

Section 1.1             Definitions.

 

When used in this Agreement, the following terms will have the meanings set forth below:

 

(A)          “Annualized Financial Target” means, with respect to a Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period, the aggregate Adjusted Net Income equal to or greater than the aggregate of the Base Financial Targets for each Fiscal Year contained within the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period.

 

(B)           “Adjusted Net Income” for a given period means Employer’s net income as determined in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles (“Net Income”) over that period, decreased by the non-recurring gain on sale of assets.

 

(C)           “Base Financial Target” means an amount budgeted at the discretion of Employer with respect to each Fiscal Year or Base Fiscal Year.  Once determined, the Base Financial Target applicable to each relevant Fiscal Year shall be listed on a Schedule or Exhibit to this Agreement.

 

(D)          “Base Fiscal Year” means the Fiscal Year to which a Deferred Bonus relates (e.g., Fiscal Year 2009 shall be the Base Fiscal Year for any Deferred Bonus potentially payable to Employee for Fiscal Year 2009 Plan).

 

(E)           “Beneficiary” means one or more individuals designated by Employee to receive benefits payable hereunder upon Employee’s death (whether voluntary or involuntary). Employee shall designate his Beneficiary in writing on a form provided by Employer. Employee may change his designated Beneficiary by filing a new form with Employer (at least ten (10) business days prior to the effective date of such change). If no

 

2



 

Beneficiary designated by Employee survives Employee, or if Employee fails to designate a Beneficiary, any payments due hereunder upon Employee’s death shall be paid to Employee’s executor or other legal representative.

 

(F)           “Change of Control” means the sale or transfer of substantially all equity interests or assets of the Employer to a third party, if the acquiring entity does not assume liability for the benefits provided hereunder pursuant to said transaction and Employer does not otherwise agree to continue or maintain this Agreement.

 

(G)           “Deferred Bonus” means the amount of the deferred bonus potentially payable to Employee on account of a particular Base Fiscal Year in accordance with the provisions hereof.

 

(H)          “Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period” means, with respect to each Deferred Bonus for each Base Fiscal Year, the period beginning on the first day of the Base Fiscal Year and terminating on the earliest to occur of the following:

 

(i)            the last day of the three (3) year period commencing with the first day of the Base Fiscal Year;

 

(ii)           the date of a Change of Control; or

 

(iii)          the date of Plan Termination.

 

(I)            “Deferred Compensation Pool” means, with respect to a Base Fiscal Year, 25% of the excess of (i) Employer’s Adjusted Net Income for that Base Fiscal Year, over (ii) the Base Financial Target for that Base Fiscal Year.

 

(J)            “Disability” means any physical or mental impairment which, in the opinion of Employer, based upon a competent medical examination, renders Employee unable to continue the performance of Employee’s regular duties with Employer and is expected to be permanent in duration or to continue for a period of 12 months or more. Employer shall have absolute discretion to determine if and when a Disability has occurred for purposes of this

 

3



 

Agreement, provided that nothing contained herein shall prevent Employee from submitting to Employer, at Employee’s expense, any evidence of disability that Employee deems relevant to said determination.

 

(K)          “Employee” means Richard Warner and, where appropriate, shall also be deemed to mean his executor, guardian or other legal representative.

 

(L)           “Employee Percentage” means the percentage of the Deferred Compensation Pool determined by Employer and specified in a Schedule or Exhibit attached hereto which shall be used to determine the amount of Employee’s Deferred Bonus for each respective Base Fiscal Year, as provided in Section 2.1.

 

(M)         “Employer” means Walker & Dunlop, LLC and any successor to, or assignee of, Walker & Dunlop, LLC to which Employee has consented, in Employee’s sole discretion, which will not be unreasonably withheld.

 

(N)          “Fiscal Year” means a fiscal year of Employer (presently a calendar year).

 

(O)          “Person” means, as the context requires, an individual, partnership, corporation, trust, unincorporated association, joint stock company, or other legal entity or association.

 

(P)           “Plan Termination” means the voluntary termination of this Agreement by Employer pursuant to the provisions of Section 4.9(B).

 

(Q)          “Schedules” means, collectively, the Schedules attached, or to be attached, hereto.

 

(R)           “Termination With Cause” means the termination by Employer of Employee’s employment with Employer on account of (i) Employee’s conviction for the

 

4



 

commission of a felony in the course of his employment with Employer, or (ii) Employee’s gross, willful and intentional misconduct in connection with his employment with Employer.

 

(S)           “Termination Without Cause” means the termination by Employer of Employee’s employment with Employer without Employee’s consent for any reason which does not constitute Termination With Cause.

 

(T)           “Voluntary Resignation” means the voluntary decision or election by Employee to terminate his employment with Employer for any reason whatsoever other than a material breach by Employer of this Agreement which is not cured within any applicable grace period specified herein.

 

Section 1.2           Certain Other Definitions.

 

When used herein with its initial letter(s) capitalized, a term which is not defined in Section 1.1 shall be given the definition assigned to it elsewhere in this Agreement.

 

Section 1.3           Schedules and Exhibits.

 

Attached hereto and forming an integral part of this Agreement may be various Schedules and Exhibits, all of which are incorporated into this Agreement as fully as if the contents thereof were set out in full herein at each point of reference thereto. The provisions of the immediately preceding sentence shall also apply to any Schedules, Exhibits or other attachments which, pursuant to the provisions hereof, are to be prepared and attached hereto in the future. Notwithstanding any other provision hereof, if there is any conflict or inconsistency between the provisions contained in this Agreement and the provisions contained in any Schedule or Exhibit attached hereto (either now or in the future), the provisions of the Schedule or Exhibit shall govern and prevail.

 

5



 

ARTICLE II

 

Determination Of Deferred Bonus

 

Section 2.1             Amount of Deferred Bonus.

 

Subject to the vesting and forfeiture provisions outlined in Article III hereof, Employee shall be entitled to a Deferred Bonus for each Base Fiscal Year in an amount equal to (A) the Deferred Compensation Pool for that Base Fiscal Year (if any), multiplied by (B) Employee’s Employee Percentage for that Base Fiscal Year.

 

Section 2.2             Determination of Attainment of Financial Targets .

 

As soon as practicable, and in any event within sixty (60) days after the expiration of each Base Fiscal Year, Employer shall determine whether the Base Financial Target was met during such Base Fiscal Year and shall certify the amount of the Deferred Compensation Pool for that Base Fiscal Year, if applicable.  Employer shall promptly advise Employee as to whether the Base Financial Target has been met during the Base Fiscal Year in question and, if so, the amount of the Deferred Bonus for that Base Fiscal Year as computed by Employer. Employee shall be entitled to review all financial and other records relevant to Employer’s determinations with respect to the achievement of the Base Financial Target, the amount of Employee’s Deferred Bonus, if any, and all related computations. Employer shall give careful and good faith consideration to any bona fide questions raised by Employee regarding Employer’s foregoing determinations and shall make any adjustments therein as Employer deems necessary or appropriate in the light of such questions. Employer’s good faith determination as to the attainment of the Base Financial Target or other targets or computations relevant to the determination of Employee’s Deferred Bonus shall, however, be binding and conclusive on Employer and Employee unless the amount in question or

 

6



 

controversy as to the size of the Deferred Bonus exceeds $25,000 (in which event such question or controversy shall be referred to, and determined by, arbitration in accordance with Section 4.4 hereof). Once the final amount of Employee’s Deferred Bonus for any Base Fiscal Year has been computed, agreed or determined, such amount shall be memorialized in an addendum which shall also be attached hereto and shall be deemed a part hereof and such amount shall not then thereafter change.

 

7



 

ARTICLE III

 

Vesting, Forfeiture, and Payment of Deferred Bonus

 

Section 3.1             Vesting of Deferred Bonus — Annualized Financial Target Satisfied.

 

Each Employee’s vested status with regard to the Deferred Bonus for a Base Fiscal Year shall be determined as of the last day of the applicable Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period.  If, as of the last day of the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period, the Annualized Financial Target has been satisfied, each Employee’s vested status with respect to the Deferred Bonus for the applicable Base Fiscal Year shall be determined in accordance with the following rules:

 

(A)          If Employee has remained continuously employed by Employer until the last day of the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period, Employee shall become 100% vested in Employee’s Deferred Bonus for the applicable Base Fiscal Year provided that Employee remains employed by Employer until the date that the Deferred Bonus is actually paid.

 

(B)           If, prior to the last day of the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period, Employee was Terminated With Cause or terminated employment due to a Voluntary Resignation, Employee shall forfeit any and all right to a Deferred Bonus for the applicable Base Fiscal Year.

 

(C)           If, prior to the last day of the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period, Employee died, became Disabled, or was Terminated Without Cause, Employee (or his Beneficiary) shall obtain a vested right in a portion of his Deferred Bonus for the applicable Base Fiscal Year in an amount equal to a fraction, the numerator of which is the number of months Employee was employed by Employer beginning on the first day of the Base Fiscal Year and ending on the date of death, Disability, or termination (rounded to the nearest whole month), and the denominator of which is the number of whole months contained in the Deferred

 

8



 

Bonus Earn-Out Period (i.e., thirty-six (36) months for a Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period that does not end early due to Plan Termination).

 

(D)          In the case that the last day of a Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period occurs due to a Change of Control, the Annualized Financial Target shall be deemed to have been automatically satisfied without regard to Employer’s actual Adjusted Net Income.  In such a case, Employee’s vested status shall be determined as of the date of the Change of Control using the rules outlined in subsections (A), (B), or (C) above, as applicable, treating the date of the Change of Control as the last day of the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period.

 

(E)           In the case that the last day of a Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period occurs due to a Plan Termination, the Annualized Financial Target shall be deemed to have been satisfied provided that Adjusted Net Income, as of the date of Plan Termination, equals or exceeds the Annualized Financial Target, as pro-rated through the date of Plan Termination. In such a case, Employee’s vested status shall be determined as of the date of the Plan Termination using the rules outlined in subsections (A), (B), (C), or (D) above, as applicable, treating the date of Plan Termination as the last day of the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period.

 

Section 3.2             Forfeiture of Deferred Bonus.

 

Notwithstanding Section 3.1 above, Employee’s right to a Deferred Bonus for any particularly Base Fiscal Year shall be immediately and fully forfeited if either of the following events occurs:

 

(A)          Employee’s employment with Employer terminates as a result of a Termination With Cause or a Voluntary Resignation prior to the date following the last day of the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period for that Base Fiscal Year on which the Deferred Bonus is paid; or

 

9



 

(B)           the relevant Annualized Financial Target applicable to the Deferred Bonus for that Base Fiscal Year is not satisfied.

 

If one of the events delineated in (A) or (B) occurs with respect to a Base Fiscal Year, Employee’s Deferred Bonus for such Base Fiscal Year shall not vest and shall be forfeited in its entirety, and all of Employee’s rights, title and interest in or with respect to such Deferred Bonus shall lapse and be of no further force and effect. The forfeiture of Employee’s rights as to a Deferred Bonus for any particular Base Fiscal Year shall not prejudice or adversely affect in any way Employee’s rights, if any, to receive (or retain) a Deferred Bonus for another Base Fiscal Year.

 

Section 3.3            Payment of Vested Deferred Bonus.

 

(A)          Employer shall pay Employee (or, if applicable, his Beneficiary) the vested portion of any Deferred Bonus which vests pursuant to the provisions of Section 3.1 in accordance with the following provisions:

 

(i)             if the last day of the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period which results in the vesting of Employee’s Deferred Bonus occurs as a result of a Plan Termination, that Deferred Bonus shall be paid to Employee (or, if applicable, his Beneficiary) within sixty (60) days after the date of Plan Termination; and

 

(ii)            if the last day of the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period occurs for any reason other than Plan Termination, that Deferred Bonus shall be paid to Employee on January 31 of the taxable year immediately following the taxable year in which Employee’s rights to that Deferred Bonus vest, unless further time is needed to determine the attainment of the Annualized Financial Target, as described more fully below.

 

(B)            The payment period specified above shall be extended if, and to the extent, necessary in order for a determination to be made as to whether the Annualized Financial

 

10



 

Target has been met; provided that payment shall be made no later than 2-1/2 months after the last day of the taxable year in which Employee’s rights to the Deferred Bonus vest. An extension of the period within which a vested Deferred Bonus shall be paid shall not extend or defer the date as of which such Deferred Bonus shall be deemed to have vested.

 

(C)         Whenever the payment of a Deferred Bonus is dependent upon the meeting by Employer of all, or a specified percentage, of an Annualized Financial Target during a Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period, Employer shall, as promptly as may be practicable after the date on which the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period for such Deferred Bonus terminates and Employer has received such financial reports or data relating to Employer which are needed in order to determine whether all, or the specified percentage of the Annualized Financial Target has been met, make a written determination as to whether all, or the specified percentage, of such Annualized Financial Target has been met and shall provide Employee with a copy of such written determination. Employee shall have the right to review all financial and other records relevant to such determination. Employer shall give careful and good faith consideration to any bona fide questions raised by Employee regarding Employer’s determination and shall, if necessary or appropriate, adjust Employer’s determination in light of such questions. Employer’s good faith determination (either as initially made or as thereafter adjusted) as to whether Employer has met all, or the specified percentage, of the Annualized Financial Target shall, however, be binding and conclusive upon Employer and Employee unless the amount of the Deferred Bonus in question or controversy exceeds $25,000 (in which event all questions or controversies as to whether or not the Deferred Bonus in question has vested shall be referred to, and determined by, arbitration pursuant to Section 4.4 hereof).

 

11


 

ARTICLE IV

 

Other Provisions

 

Section 4.1                                       Funding.

 

The Deferred Bonus provided for hereunder shall be an unfunded obligation of Employer.  Employee and any Beneficiaries shall have the status of general unsecured creditors of Employer with respect to payment of any Deferred Bonus provided hereunder.  At no time shall Employee be deemed to have any lien, right, title or interest in or to any specific investment or to any assets of the Company.  At all times, the Company shall be the owner of any assets used to satisfy the Company’s obligations hereunder.

 

Section 4.2                                       Tax Advances.

 

If Employee’s rights to a Deferred Bonus for a Base Fiscal Year vest under circumstances in which the amount of the Deferred Bonus is deemed to be taxable income to the Employee for Federal, State or local income tax purposes and Employee is, or may be, liable to pay taxes on such deemed income before the Deferred Bonus is paid to Employee, Employer may, at its discretion, make an advance to Employee in an amount sufficient to permit Employee to pay the full amount of all taxes on such deemed income before such taxes shall become due. Any such advance shall not bear interest, and may be repaid to Employer, in whole or in part, at any time.  Any subsequent payment of the Deferred Bonus to Employee shall be adjusted to reflect any amount previously advanced pursuant to this Section 4.2.

 

12



 

Section 4.3                                       No Employment Agreement.

 

This Agreement does not constitute an employment agreement between Employer and Employee but instead is only intended to set out the respective rights and obligations of the parties with respect to Deferred Bonuses for Fiscal Year 2009 and subsequent Fiscal Years. Without in any way limiting the generality of the foregoing, it is expressly acknowledged and agreed that Employee does not have an employment agreement with Employer and that, unless or until the parties otherwise agree, Employee is an at-will employee of Employer; provided, however, that Employee’s status as an at-will employee shall not prejudice or adversely affect any of Employer’s vested rights hereunder upon any Termination of Employment.

 

Section 4.4                                       Arbitration.

 

(A)                             Any disagreements which are referable to arbitration under the provisions of this Agreement, shall be referred to, and finally determined by, arbitration pursuant to the applicable Rules of Commercial Arbitration (“Rules”) of the American Arbitration Association (“AAA”), subject to the provisions of this Section 4.4. Employer and Employee shall each attempt to resolve any disagreement which is referable to arbitration by agreement and each party agrees to negotiate in good faith for a period of at least fifteen (15) business days after any such disagreement has arisen. If, despite such good faith negotiations, the parties are unable to resolve any such disagreement by agreement, then either party may, at any time after the expiration of the foregoing period of fifteen (15) business days, demand arbitration of such disagreement.

 

(B)                               If the amount in controversy in the arbitrable disagreement is One Hundred Thousand Dollars ($100,000) or less, the arbitration shall be conducted before a single arbitrator selected by Employer and Employee within thirty (30) days after service of the initial demand for arbitration. If the amount in controversy exceeds One Hundred Thousand

 

13



 

Dollars ($100,000), the arbitration shall be conducted before three (3) arbitrators, one of whom shall be selected by Employer within thirty (30) days after service of the initial demand for arbitration, one of whom shall be selected by Employee within the foregoing thirty (30) day period and one of whom shall be selected by the two arbitrators selected by the parties within thirty (30) days after the second of such arbitrators is selected. Each arbitrator selected pursuant to this Section 4.4(B) shall be independent of both Employer and Employee and shall have at least fifteen (15) years experience in the subject matter of the disagreement to be arbitrated. If any arbitrator is not timely selected within the periods provided for in this Section 4.4(B), such arbitrator shall be appointed by the AAA pursuant to the Rules. Any arbitration pursuant to this Section 4.4 shall be conducted in Bethesda, Maryland, or in such other location as may then be agreed by the parties. A judgment upon the award rendered in any such arbitration shall be final and binding upon the parties and may be entered in any court of competent jurisdiction. All fees and expenses of the arbitrator(s) and all administrative costs of the arbitration shall be borne equally by the parties unless the arbitrator(s) otherwise direct(s). This agreement to arbitrate shall be specifically enforceable.

 

Section 4.5                                       Governing Law.

 

This Agreement and the rights and liabilities of the parties hereunder shall be governed by, and construed in accordance with, the laws of the State of Maryland without regard to such State’s principles of conflicts of law.

 

Section 4.6                                       No Third Party Beneficiary; Spendthrift Clause.

 

(A)                               This Agreement is made solely and specifically between and for the benefit of the parties hereto and (subject to Section 4.7) their Beneficiaries, heirs, successors, assigns

 

14



 

and legal representatives. No other Person whatsoever shall have any rights, interests or claims hereunder or be entitled to any benefits under or on account of this Agreement as a third parry beneficiary or otherwise.

 

(B)                                      To the maximum extent permitted by law, neither Employee nor any Beneficiary shall have any power to dispose of or to charge by way of anticipation any vested, potential or other right, title or interest hereunder, and any vested Deferred Bonus payable to Employee or any Beneficiary shall be free and clear of his debts, contracts, dispositions, and anticipations, and shall not be taken or reached by any legal or equitable process.

 

Section 4.7                                       Benefit and Burden.

 

This Agreement, and the respective rights and obligations of the parties hereunder, may not be assigned, sold, hypothecated, or otherwise transferred, either outright or as security, without the prior written consent of the other party which may be delayed, withheld or conditioned in the sole and absolute discretion of such other party; provided, however, that Employee may designate a Beneficiary without Employer’s consent. Any transfer, or attempted transfer, in violation of the provisions of this Section 4.7 shall be null and void ab initio. Subject to the foregoing provisions of this Section 4.7, the provisions of this Agreement shall be binding upon, and shall inure to the benefit of, the parties hereto, the Employee’s Beneficiary and their respective heirs, successors, legal representatives and permitted assigns.

 

Section 4.8                                       Computation of Time.

 

In computing any notice or other period of time prescribed or allowed by any provision of this Agreement, the day of the act, event, or default from which the designated

 

15



 

period of time begins to run shall not be included. The last day of the period so computed shall be included, unless it is a Saturday, Sunday or a legal holiday in Bethesda, Maryland, in which event the period runs until the end of the next, day which is not a Saturday, Sunday or such legal holiday. All notice or other periods expire as of 5:00 p.m. (local time in Bethesda, Maryland) on the last day of the notice or other period.

 

Section 4.9                                       Entire Agreement; Amendment and Termination.

 

(A)                               This Agreement contains the entire understanding between Employer and Employee regarding the subject matter hereof and supersedes any prior or contemporaneous understandings or agreements between them respecting such subject matter. There are no representations, warranties, agreements, arrangements or understandings, oral, written or expressed by, or based upon, conduct, between the parties relating to the subject matter hereof which are not fully expressed herein.

 

(B)                                 This Agreement, including the Schedules hereto, may not be amended, modified, waived, or discharged except by an instrument in writing which is duly executed by the party sought to be charged with any such amendment, modification, waiver, termination or discharge; provided, however, that this Agreement may be terminated at any time at the discretion of Employer.

 

Section 4.10                                 Construction.

 

(A)                               Common nouns and pronouns shall be deemed to refer to the masculine, feminine, neuter, singular and plural, as the context may require.

 

(B)                                 All headings herein are inserted only for convenience and ease of reference and are not to be considered in the construction or interpretation of this Agreement.

 

16



 

(C)                                 Numbered or lettered Articles, sections, subsections, subparts and subparagraphs herein contained refer to Articles, sections, subsections, subparts and subparagraphs of this Agreement unless otherwise expressly stated. The words “herein,” “hereof,” “hereunder,” “hereby,” “this Agreement” and other similar references shall be construed to mean and include this Agreement and all amendments of, supplements to, and Schedules and other attachments to this Agreement unless the context shall clearly indicate or require otherwise.

 

(D)                                  Employer and Employee have both participated extensively in the negotiation and drafting of this Agreement. Accordingly, this Agreement shall not be interpreted or construed for or against either party as the draftsman hereof.

 

Section 4.11                                 Notices.

 

Any notices, demands, consents, requests or other communications (hereinafter collectively referred to in this Section 4.11 as “notice”) provided for or permitted to be given pursuant to this Agreement shall be in writing, and shall be delivered by hand, by first-class mail, postage prepaid (with a return receipt requested), or by Federal Express, or by some other commercial overnight delivery service, to the parties at the following addresses:

 

(i) If to Employer:

Walker & Dunlop, LLC

 

7501 Wisconsin Avenue, Suite 1200

 

Bethesda, Maryland 20814

 

Attn: Mr. William M. Walker

 

 

(ii) If to Employee:

Richard Warner

 

18007 Calico Circle

 

Olney , MD 20832

 

17



 

Each notice shall be deemed given on the day it is received or on the day its delivery is refused by or for the addressee, whichever is earlier. Each party may change its address or addressee for notice by giving notice thereof in the manner provided above (such notice to be given at least five (5) business days prior to its effective date).

 

Section 4.12                                 Examples.

 

The operation of the provisions of this Agreement can be illustrated by the following examples.  Assume the Base Fiscal Year is 2009, with Base Financial Targets and achievement of Adjusted Net Income as provided in the table below:

 

 

 

 

Target

 

Actual
Adjusted Net
Income

 

Deferred
Compensation
Pool

 

 

Base Financial Target (2009)

 

$

10

M (budgeted)

$

14

M

=(14-10)*.25 = $1M

 

 

Base Financial Target (2010)

 

$

12

M

$

7

M

 

 

 

Base Financial Target (2011)

 

$

14

M

$

16

M

 

 

 

Totals

 

$

36

M

$

37

M

 

 

 

(A)                               Because Employer’s Adjusted Net Income for the 2009 Base Fiscal Year ($14 million) was $4 million greater than the Base Financial Target for that year ($10 million), the Deferred Compensation Pool for that year is $1 million ($4 million multiplied by 25%).

 

(B)                                 Assume that Employee X has an Employee Percentage of 10%, and continues employment with Employer through the date the Deferred Bonus is actually paid, on or about January 31, 2012.  Because, as of the last day of the 2011 Fiscal Year, aggregate Adjusted Net Income ($37 million) exceeds the aggregate of the Base Financial Targets for the three Fiscal Years contained in the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period ($36 million), the Annualized

 

18



 

Financial Target is satisfied and Employee X becomes 100% vested in his Deferred Bonus for the 2009 Fiscal Year as of December 31, 2011.  Employee X will receive a distribution of his Deferred Bonus in the amount of $100,000 ($1 million Deferred Compensation Pool multiplied by 10% Employee Percentage) on or about January 31, 2012.

 

(C)                                 Assume that Employee Y has an Employee Percentage of 10% and incurs a Disability on July 1, 2010.  Because, as of the last day of the 2011 Fiscal Year, aggregate Adjusted Net Income ($37 million) exceeds the aggregate of the Base Financial Targets for the three Fiscal Years contained in the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period ($36 million), the Annualized Financial Target is satisfied and Employee Y becomes 50% vested (18 months of employment from the first day of the Base Fiscal Year through the date of Disability, divided by 36 months) in his Deferred Bonus for the 2009 Fiscal Year as of December 31, 2011.  Employee Y will receive a distribution of his Deferred Bonus in the amount of $50,000 ($1 million Deferred Compensation Pool multiplied by 10% Employee Percentage multiplied by 50% vested percentage) on or about January 31, 2012.  The remaining $50,000 unvested Deferred Bonus is forfeited.

 

19



 

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed and delivered this Agreement as of the date first above written.

 

 

 

WALKER & DUNLOP, LLC

 

 

 

( “Employer” )

 

 

 

Date:

April 30, 2009

 

 

 

 

By:

/s/ William Walker

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

William M. Walker

 

 

 

 

 

President &

 

 

 

 

 

Chief Executive Officer

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Richard Warner ( “Employee” )

 

 

 

 

Date:

April 30, 2009

 

 

 

 

By:

/s/ Richard Warner

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Richard Warner

 

 

 

 

 

Senior Vice President &

 

 

 

 

 

Chief Underwriter

 

20



 

SCHEDULE 1-2009

 

Formulae for Computation of Deferred Bonus

 

1.                                      (A)                                 The following is a summary of key defined terms for 2009:

 

(i)                                      Employee: Richard Warner

 

(ii)                                   Base Fiscal Year: January 1, 2009 - December 31, 2009

 

(iii)                                Base Financial Target: $25,272,927.00

 

(iv)                                 Deferred Compensation Pool:  25% of the difference between 2009 Adjusted Net Income minus the Base Financial Target

 

(v)                                    Employee Percentage: 12% of Deferred Compensation Pool

 

(B)                                    Employee shall be entitled to a Deferred Bonus in the amount equal to (i) the Employee Percentage times (ii) the Deferred Compensation Pool, subject to all applicable vesting provisions set forth in the foregoing and attached Incentive Deferred Bonus Compensation Agreement (“Agreement”) of which this Schedule 1-2009 is a part. In no event shall the Deferred Bonus be less than zero.

 

2.                                             Unless otherwise defined in this Schedule 1-2009, all capitalized words and phrases in this Schedule 1-2009 shall have the same meanings as are ascribed to them in the Agreement.

 

21



 

APPROVED AND ACCEPTED:

 

 

/s/ William Walker

 

April 30, 2009

 

 

 

William M. Walker

 

Date

 

 

 

President & Chief Executive Officer

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

/s/ Richard Warner

 

April 30, 2009

 

 

 

Richard Warner

 

Date

 

Senior Vice President & Chief Underwriter

 

22




Exhibit 10.16

 

Wilson, D.

2009

 

INCENTIVE DEFERRED BONUS COMPENSATION AGREEMENT

 

THIS AGREEMENT (“Agreement”), made as of the 30 th  day of April , 2009, by and between Walker & Dunlop, LLC (“Employer”) and Deborah A. Wilson (“Employee”).

 

WITNESSETH THAT:

 

WHEREAS, Employee is serving as Employer’s Senior Vice President & Chief Financial Officer and, in that capacity has senior management responsibility for Employer’s operations and an important role in Employer’s success; and

 

WHEREAS, in order to maximize returns, Employer desires to provide Employee with an incentive to contribute to the growth of the business and profitability of the Employer and, to that end, the parties desire to enter into this Agreement.

 

NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the foregoing and of the mutual promises hereinafter set forth and of other good and valuable consideration, the sufficiency and receipt of which prior to the execution of these presents is hereby acknowledged, the parties hereto, intending to be legally bound, do hereby agree as follows:

 

1



 

ARTICLE I

 

Definitions

 

Section 1.1             Definitions.

 

When used in this Agreement, the following terms will have the meanings set forth below:

 

(A)          “Annualized Financial Target” means, with respect to a Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period, the aggregate Adjusted Net Income equal to or greater than the aggregate of the Base Financial Targets for each Fiscal Year contained within the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period.

 

(B)           “Adjusted Net Income” for a given period means Employer’s net income as determined in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles (“Net Income”) over that period, decreased by the non-recurring gain on sale of assets.

 

(C)           “Base Financial Target” means an amount budgeted at the discretion of Employer with respect to each Fiscal Year or Base Fiscal Year.  Once determined, the Base Financial Target applicable to each relevant Fiscal Year shall be listed on a Schedule or Exhibit to this Agreement.

 

(D)          “Base Fiscal Year” means the Fiscal Year to which a Deferred Bonus relates (e.g., Fiscal Year 2009 shall be the Base Fiscal Year for any Deferred Bonus potentially payable to Employee for Fiscal Year 2009 Plan).

 

(E)           “Beneficiary” means one or more individuals designated by Employee to receive benefits payable hereunder upon Employee’s death (whether voluntary or involuntary). Employee shall designate her Beneficiary in writing on a form provided by Employer. Employee may change her designated Beneficiary by filing a new form with Employer (at least ten (10) business days prior to the effective date of such change). If no

 

2



 

Beneficiary designated by Employee survives Employee, or if Employee fails to designate a Beneficiary, any payments due hereunder upon Employee’s death shall be paid to Employee’s executor or other legal representative.

 

(F)           “Change of Control” means the sale or transfer of substantially all equity interests or assets of the Employer to a third party, if the acquiring entity does not assume liability for the benefits provided hereunder pursuant to said transaction and Employer does not otherwise agree to continue or maintain this Agreement.

 

(G)           “Deferred Bonus” means the amount of the deferred bonus potentially payable to Employee on account of a particular Base Fiscal Year in accordance with the provisions hereof.

 

(H)          “Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period” means, with respect to each Deferred Bonus for each Base Fiscal Year, the period beginning on the first day of the Base Fiscal Year and terminating on the earliest to occur of the following:

 

(i)            the last day of the three (3) year period commencing with the first day of the Base Fiscal Year;

 

(ii)           the date of a Change of Control; or

 

(iii)          the date of Plan Termination.

 

(I)            “Deferred Compensation Pool” means, with respect to a Base Fiscal Year, 25% of the excess of (i) Employer’s Adjusted Net Income for that Base Fiscal Year, over (ii) the Base Financial Target for that Base Fiscal Year.

 

(J)            “Disability” means any physical or mental impairment which, in the opinion of Employer, based upon a competent medical examination, renders Employee unable to continue the performance of Employee’s regular duties with Employer and is expected to be permanent in duration or to continue for a period of 12 months or more. Employer shall have absolute discretion to determine if and when a Disability has occurred for purposes of this

 

3



 

Agreement, provided that nothing contained herein shall prevent Employee from submitting to Employer, at Employee’s expense, any evidence of disability that Employee deems relevant to said determination.

 

(K)          “Employee” means Deborah A. Wilson and, where appropriate, shall also be deemed to mean her executor, guardian or other legal representative.

 

(L)           “Employee Percentage” means the percentage of the Deferred Compensation Pool determined by Employer and specified in a Schedule or Exhibit attached hereto which shall be used to determine the amount of Employee’s Deferred Bonus for each respective Base Fiscal Year, as provided in Section 2.1.

 

(M)         “Employer” means Walker & Dunlop, LLC and any successor to, or assignee of, Walker & Dunlop, LLC to which Employee has consented, in Employee’s sole discretion, which will not be unreasonably withheld.

 

(N)          “Fiscal Year” means a fiscal year of Employer (presently a calendar year).

 

(O)          “Person” means, as the context requires, an individual, partnership, corporation, trust, unincorporated association, joint stock company, or other legal entity or association.

 

(P)           “Plan Termination” means the voluntary termination of this Agreement by Employer pursuant to the provisions of Section 4.9(B).

 

(Q)          “Schedules” means, collectively, the Schedules attached, or to be attached, hereto.

 

(R)           “Termination With Cause” means the termination by Employer of Employee’s employment with Employer on account of (i) Employee’s conviction for the

 

4



 

commission of a felony in the course of her employment with Employer, or (ii) Employee’s gross, willful and intentional misconduct in connection with her employment with Employer.

 

(S)           “Termination Without Cause” means the termination by Employer of Employee’s employment with Employer without Employee’s consent for any reason which does not constitute Termination With Cause.

 

(T)           “Voluntary Resignation” means the voluntary decision or election by Employee to terminate her employment with Employer for any reason whatsoever other than a material breach by Employer of this Agreement which is not cured within any applicable grace period specified herein.

 

Section 1.2           Certain Other Definitions.

 

When used herein with its initial letter(s) capitalized, a term which is not defined in Section 1.1 shall be given the definition assigned to it elsewhere in this Agreement.

 

Section 1.3           Schedules and Exhibits.

 

Attached hereto and forming an integral part of this Agreement may be various Schedules and Exhibits, all of which are incorporated into this Agreement as fully as if the contents thereof were set out in full herein at each point of reference thereto. The provisions of the immediately preceding sentence shall also apply to any Schedules, Exhibits or other attachments which, pursuant to the provisions hereof, are to be prepared and attached hereto in the future. Notwithstanding any other provision hereof, if there is any conflict or inconsistency between the provisions contained in this Agreement and the provisions contained in any Schedule or Exhibit attached hereto (either now or in the future), the provisions of the Schedule or Exhibit shall govern and prevail.

 

5



 

ARTICLE II

 

Determination Of Deferred Bonus

 

Section 2.1             Amount of Deferred Bonus.

 

Subject to the vesting and forfeiture provisions outlined in Article III hereof, Employee shall be entitled to a Deferred Bonus for each Base Fiscal Year in an amount equal to (A) the Deferred Compensation Pool for that Base Fiscal Year (if any), multiplied by (B) Employee’s Employee Percentage for that Base Fiscal Year.

 

Section 2.2             Determination of Attainment of Financial Targets .

 

As soon as practicable, and in any event within sixty (60) days after the expiration of each Base Fiscal Year, Employer shall determine whether the Base Financial Target was met during such Base Fiscal Year and shall certify the amount of the Deferred Compensation Pool for that Base Fiscal Year, if applicable.  Employer shall promptly advise Employee as to whether the Base Financial Target has been met during the Base Fiscal Year in question and, if so, the amount of the Deferred Bonus for that Base Fiscal Year as computed by Employer. Employee shall be entitled to review all financial and other records relevant to Employer’s determinations with respect to the achievement of the Base Financial Target, the amount of Employee’s Deferred Bonus, if any, and all related computations. Employer shall give careful and good faith consideration to any bona fide questions raised by Employee regarding Employer’s foregoing determinations and shall make any adjustments therein as Employer deems necessary or appropriate in the light of such questions. Employer’s good faith determination as to the attainment of the Base Financial Target or other targets or computations relevant to the determination of Employee’s Deferred Bonus shall, however, be binding and conclusive on Employer and Employee unless the amount in question or

 

6



 

controversy as to the size of the Deferred Bonus exceeds $25,000 (in which event such question or controversy shall be referred to, and determined by, arbitration in accordance with Section 4.4 hereof). Once the final amount of Employee’s Deferred Bonus for any Base Fiscal Year has been computed, agreed or determined, such amount shall be memorialized in an addendum which shall also be attached hereto and shall be deemed a part hereof and such amount shall not then thereafter change.

 

7



 

ARTICLE III

 

Vesting, Forfeiture, and Payment of Deferred Bonus

 

Section 3.1             Vesting of Deferred Bonus — Annualized Financial Target Satisfied.

 

Each Employee’s vested status with regard to the Deferred Bonus for a Base Fiscal Year shall be determined as of the last day of the applicable Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period.  If, as of the last day of the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period, the Annualized Financial Target has been satisfied, each Employee’s vested status with respect to the Deferred Bonus for the applicable Base Fiscal Year shall be determined in accordance with the following rules:

 

(A)          If Employee has remained continuously employed by Employer until the last day of the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period, Employee shall become 100% vested in Employee’s Deferred Bonus for the applicable Base Fiscal Year provided that Employee remains employed by Employer until the date that the Deferred Bonus is actually paid.

 

(B)           If, prior to the last day of the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period, Employee was Terminated With Cause or terminated employment due to a Voluntary Resignation, Employee shall forfeit any and all right to a Deferred Bonus for the applicable Base Fiscal Year.

 

(C)           If, prior to the last day of the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period, Employee died, became Disabled, or was Terminated Without Cause, Employee (or her Beneficiary) shall obtain a vested right in a portion of her Deferred Bonus for the applicable Base Fiscal Year in an amount equal to a fraction, the numerator of which is the number of months Employee was employed by Employer beginning on the first day of the Base Fiscal Year and ending on the date of death, Disability, or termination (rounded to the nearest whole month), and the denominator of which is the number of whole months contained in the Deferred

 

8



 

Bonus Earn-Out Period (i.e., thirty-six (36) months for a Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period that does not end early due to Plan Termination).

 

(D)          In the case that the last day of a Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period occurs due to a Change of Control, the Annualized Financial Target shall be deemed to have been automatically satisfied without regard to Employer’s actual Adjusted Net Income.  In such a case, Employee’s vested status shall be determined as of the date of the Change of Control using the rules outlined in subsections (A), (B), or (C) above, as applicable, treating the date of the Change of Control as the last day of the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period.

 

(E)           In the case that the last day of a Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period occurs due to a Plan Termination, the Annualized Financial Target shall be deemed to have been satisfied provided that Adjusted Net Income, as of the date of Plan Termination, equals or exceeds the Annualized Financial Target, as pro-rated through the date of Plan Termination. In such a case, Employee’s vested status shall be determined as of the date of the Plan Termination using the rules outlined in subsections (A), (B), (C), or (D) above, as applicable, treating the date of Plan Termination as the last day of the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period.

 

Section 3.2             Forfeiture of Deferred Bonus.

 

Notwithstanding Section 3.1 above, Employee’s right to a Deferred Bonus for any particularly Base Fiscal Year shall be immediately and fully forfeited if either of the following events occurs:

 

(A)          Employee’s employment with Employer terminates as a result of a Termination With Cause or a Voluntary Resignation prior to the date following the last day of the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period for that Base Fiscal Year on which the Deferred Bonus is paid; or

 

9



 

(B)           the relevant Annualized Financial Target applicable to the Deferred Bonus for that Base Fiscal Year is not satisfied.

 

If one of the events delineated in (A) or (B) occurs with respect to a Base Fiscal Year, Employee’s Deferred Bonus for such Base Fiscal Year shall not vest and shall be forfeited in its entirety, and all of Employee’s rights, title and interest in or with respect to such Deferred Bonus shall lapse and be of no further force and effect. The forfeiture of Employee’s rights as to a Deferred Bonus for any particular Base Fiscal Year shall not prejudice or adversely affect in any way Employee’s rights, if any, to receive (or retain) a Deferred Bonus for another Base Fiscal Year.

 

Section 3.3            Payment of Vested Deferred Bonus.

 

(A)          Employer shall pay Employee (or, if applicable, her Beneficiary) the vested portion of any Deferred Bonus which vests pursuant to the provisions of Section 3.1 in accordance with the following provisions:

 

(i)             if the last day of the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period which results in the vesting of Employee’s Deferred Bonus occurs as a result of a Plan Termination, that Deferred Bonus shall be paid to Employee (or, if applicable, her Beneficiary) within sixty (60) days after the date of Plan Termination; and

 

(ii)            if the last day of the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period occurs for any reason other than Plan Termination, that Deferred Bonus shall be paid to Employee on January 31 of the taxable year immediately following the taxable year in which Employee’s rights to that Deferred Bonus vest, unless further time is needed to determine the attainment of the Annualized Financial Target, as described more fully below.

 

(B)            The payment period specified above shall be extended if, and to the extent, necessary in order for a determination to be made as to whether the Annualized Financial

 

10



 

Target has been met; provided that payment shall be made no later than 2-1/2 months after the last day of the taxable year in which Employee’s rights to the Deferred Bonus vest. An extension of the period within which a vested Deferred Bonus shall be paid shall not extend or defer the date as of which such Deferred Bonus shall be deemed to have vested.

 

(C)         Whenever the payment of a Deferred Bonus is dependent upon the meeting by Employer of all, or a specified percentage, of an Annualized Financial Target during a Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period, Employer shall, as promptly as may be practicable after the date on which the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period for such Deferred Bonus terminates and Employer has received such financial reports or data relating to Employer which are needed in order to determine whether all, or the specified percentage of the Annualized Financial Target has been met, make a written determination as to whether all, or the specified percentage, of such Annualized Financial Target has been met and shall provide Employee with a copy of such written determination. Employee shall have the right to review all financial and other records relevant to such determination. Employer shall give careful and good faith consideration to any bona fide questions raised by Employee regarding Employer’s determination and shall, if necessary or appropriate, adjust Employer’s determination in light of such questions. Employer’s good faith determination (either as initially made or as thereafter adjusted) as to whether Employer has met all, or the specified percentage, of the Annualized Financial Target shall, however, be binding and conclusive upon Employer and Employee unless the amount of the Deferred Bonus in question or controversy exceeds $25,000 (in which event all questions or controversies as to whether or not the Deferred Bonus in question has vested shall be referred to, and determined by, arbitration pursuant to Section 4.4 hereof).

 

11


 

ARTICLE IV

 

Other Provisions

 

Section 4.1                                       Funding.

 

The Deferred Bonus provided for hereunder shall be an unfunded obligation of Employer.  Employee and any Beneficiaries shall have the status of general unsecured creditors of Employer with respect to payment of any Deferred Bonus provided hereunder.  At no time shall Employee be deemed to have any lien, right, title or interest in or to any specific investment or to any assets of the Company.  At all times, the Company shall be the owner of any assets used to satisfy the Company’s obligations hereunder.

 

Section 4.2                                       Tax Advances.

 

If Employee’s rights to a Deferred Bonus for a Base Fiscal Year vest under circumstances in which the amount of the Deferred Bonus is deemed to be taxable income to the Employee for Federal, State or local income tax purposes and Employee is, or may be, liable to pay taxes on such deemed income before the Deferred Bonus is paid to Employee, Employer may, at its discretion, make an advance to Employee in an amount sufficient to permit Employee to pay the full amount of all taxes on such deemed income before such taxes shall become due. Any such advance shall not bear interest, and may be repaid to Employer, in whole or in part, at any time.  Any subsequent payment of the Deferred Bonus to Employee shall be adjusted to reflect any amount previously advanced pursuant to this Section 4.2.

 

12



 

Section 4.3                                       No Employment Agreement.

 

This Agreement does not constitute an employment agreement between Employer and Employee but instead is only intended to set out the respective rights and obligations of the parties with respect to Deferred Bonuses for Fiscal Year 2009 and subsequent Fiscal Years. Without in any way limiting the generality of the foregoing, it is expressly acknowledged and agreed that Employee does not have an employment agreement with Employer and that, unless or until the parties otherwise agree, Employee is an at-will employee of Employer; provided, however, that Employee’s status as an at-will employee shall not prejudice or adversely affect any of Employer’s vested rights hereunder upon any Termination of Employment.

 

Section 4.4                                       Arbitration.

 

(A)                             Any disagreements which are referable to arbitration under the provisions of this Agreement, shall be referred to, and finally determined by, arbitration pursuant to the applicable Rules of Commercial Arbitration (“Rules”) of the American Arbitration Association (“AAA”), subject to the provisions of this Section 4.4. Employer and Employee shall each attempt to resolve any disagreement which is referable to arbitration by agreement and each party agrees to negotiate in good faith for a period of at least fifteen (15) business days after any such disagreement has arisen. If, despite such good faith negotiations, the parties are unable to resolve any such disagreement by agreement, then either party may, at any time after the expiration of the foregoing period of fifteen (15) business days, demand arbitration of such disagreement.

 

(B)                               If the amount in controversy in the arbitrable disagreement is One Hundred Thousand Dollars ($100,000) or less, the arbitration shall be conducted before a single arbitrator selected by Employer and Employee within thirty (30) days after service of the

 

13



 

initial demand for arbitration. If the amount in controversy exceeds One Hundred Thousand Dollars ($100,000), the arbitration shall be conducted before three (3) arbitrators, one of whom shall be selected by Employer within thirty (30) days after service of the initial demand for arbitration, one of whom shall be selected by Employee within the foregoing thirty (30) day period and one of whom shall be selected by the two arbitrators selected by the parties within thirty (30) days after the second of such arbitrators is selected. Each arbitrator selected pursuant to this Section 4.4(B) shall be independent of both Employer and Employee and shall have at least fifteen (15) years experience in the subject matter of the disagreement to be arbitrated. If any arbitrator is not timely selected within the periods provided for in this Section 4.4(B), such arbitrator shall be appointed by the AAA pursuant to the Rules. Any arbitration pursuant to this Section 4.4 shall be conducted in Bethesda, Maryland, or in such other location as may then be agreed by the parties. A judgment upon the award rendered in any such arbitration shall be final and binding upon the parties and may be entered in any court of competent jurisdiction. All fees and expenses of the arbitrator(s) and all administrative costs of the arbitration shall be borne equally by the parties unless the arbitrator(s) otherwise direct(s). This agreement to arbitrate shall be specifically enforceable.

 

Section 4.5                                       Governing Law.

 

This Agreement and the rights and liabilities of the parties hereunder shall be governed by, and construed in accordance with, the laws of the State of Maryland without regard to such State’s principles of conflicts of law.

 

14



 

Section 4.6                                       No Third Party Beneficiary; Spendthrift Clause.

 

(A)                               This Agreement is made solely and specifically between and for the benefit of the parties hereto and (subject to Section 4.7) their Beneficiaries, heirs, successors, assigns and legal representatives. No other Person whatsoever shall have any rights, interests or claims hereunder or be entitled to any benefits under or on account of this Agreement as a third parry beneficiary or otherwise.

 

(B)                                      To the maximum extent permitted by law, neither Employee nor any Beneficiary shall have any power to dispose of or to charge by way of anticipation any vested, potential or other right, title or interest hereunder, and any vested Deferred Bonus payable to Employee or any Beneficiary shall be free and clear of her debts, contracts, dispositions, and anticipations, and shall not be taken or reached by any legal or equitable process.

 

Section 4.7                                       Benefit and Burden.

 

This Agreement, and the respective rights and obligations of the parties hereunder, may not be assigned, sold, hypothecated, or otherwise transferred, either outright or as security, without the prior written consent of the other party which may be delayed, withheld or conditioned in the sole and absolute discretion of such other party; provided, however, that Employee may designate a Beneficiary without Employer’s consent. Any transfer, or attempted transfer, in violation of the provisions of this Section 4.7 shall be null and void ab initio. Subject to the foregoing provisions of this Section 4.7, the provisions of this Agreement shall be binding upon, and shall inure to the benefit of, the parties hereto, the Employee’s Beneficiary and their respective heirs, successors, legal representatives and permitted assigns.

 

15



 

Section 4.8                                       Computation of Time.

 

In computing any notice or other period of time prescribed or allowed by any provision of this Agreement, the day of the act, event, or default from which the designated period of time begins to run shall not be included. The last day of the period so computed shall be included, unless it is a Saturday, Sunday or a legal holiday in Bethesda, Maryland, in which event the period runs until the end of the next, day which is not a Saturday, Sunday or such legal holiday. All notice or other periods expire as of 5:00 p.m. (local time in Bethesda, Maryland) on the last day of the notice or other period.

 

Section 4.9                                       Entire Agreement; Amendment and Termination.

 

(A)                               This Agreement contains the entire understanding between Employer and Employee regarding the subject matter hereof and supersedes any prior or contemporaneous understandings or agreements between them respecting such subject matter. There are no representations, warranties, agreements, arrangements or understandings, oral, written or expressed by, or based upon, conduct, between the parties relating to the subject matter hereof which are not fully expressed herein.

 

(B)                                 This Agreement, including the Schedules hereto, may not be amended, modified, waived, or discharged except by an instrument in writing which is duly executed by the party sought to be charged with any such amendment, modification, waiver, termination or discharge; provided, however, that this Agreement may be terminated at any time at the discretion of Employer.

 

Section 4.10                                 Construction.

 

(A)                               Common nouns and pronouns shall be deemed to refer to the masculine, feminine, neuter, singular and plural, as the context may require.

 

16



 

(B)                                 All headings herein are inserted only for convenience and ease of reference and are not to be considered in the construction or interpretation of this Agreement.

 

(C)                                 Numbered or lettered Articles, sections, subsections, subparts and subparagraphs herein contained refer to Articles, sections, subsections, subparts and subparagraphs of this Agreement unless otherwise expressly stated. The words “herein,” “hereof,” “hereunder,” “hereby,” “this Agreement” and other similar references shall be construed to mean and include this Agreement and all amendments of, supplements to, and Schedules and other attachments to this Agreement unless the context shall clearly indicate or require otherwise.

 

(D)                                  Employer and Employee have both participated extensively in the negotiation and drafting of this Agreement. Accordingly, this Agreement shall not be interpreted or construed for or against either party as the draftsman hereof.

 

Section 4.11                                 Notices.

 

Any notices, demands, consents, requests or other communications (hereinafter collectively referred to in this Section 4.11 as “notice”) provided for or permitted to be given pursuant to this Agreement shall be in writing, and shall be delivered by hand, by first-class mail, postage prepaid (with a return receipt requested), or by Federal Express, or by some other commercial overnight delivery service, to the parties at the following addresses:

 

(i) If to Employer:

Walker & Dunlop, LLC

 

7501 Wisconsin Avenue, Suite 1200

 

Bethesda, Maryland 20814

 

Attn: Mr. William M. Walker

 

 

(ii) If to Employee:

Deborah A. Wilson

 

20269 Water Mark Place

 

Potomac Falls , VA 20165

 

17



 

Each notice shall be deemed given on the day it is received or on the day its delivery is refused by or for the addressee, whichever is earlier. Each party may change its address or addressee for notice by giving notice thereof in the manner provided above (such notice to be given at least five (5) business days prior to its effective date).

 

Section 4.12                                 Examples.

 

The operation of the provisions of this Agreement can be illustrated by the following examples.  Assume the Base Fiscal Year is 2009, with Base Financial Targets and achievement of Adjusted Net Income as provided in the table below:

 

 

 

 

Target

 

Actual
Adjusted Net
Income

 

Deferred
Compensation
Pool

 

 

Base Financial Target (2009)

 

$

10

M (budgeted)

$

14

M

=(14-10)*.25 = $1M

 

 

Base Financial Target (2010)

 

$

12

M

$

7

M

 

 

 

Base Financial Target (2011)

 

$

14

M

$

16

M

 

 

 

Totals

 

$

36

M

$

37

M

 

 

 

(A)                               Because Employer’s Adjusted Net Income for the 2009 Base Fiscal Year ($14 million) was $4 million greater than the Base Financial Target for that year ($10 million), the Deferred Compensation Pool for that year is $1 million ($4 million multiplied by 25%).

 

(B)                                 Assume that Employee X has an Employee Percentage of 10%, and continues employment with Employer through the date the Deferred Bonus is actually paid, on or about January 31, 2012.  Because, as of the last day of the 2011 Fiscal Year, aggregate Adjusted Net Income ($37 million) exceeds the aggregate of the Base Financial Targets for the three Fiscal Years contained in the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period ($36 million), the Annualized

 

18



 

Financial Target is satisfied and Employee X becomes 100% vested in her Deferred Bonus for the 2009 Fiscal Year as of December 31, 2011.  Employee X will receive a distribution of her Deferred Bonus in the amount of $100,000 ($1 million Deferred Compensation Pool multiplied by 10% Employee Percentage) on or about January 31, 2012.

 

(C)                                 Assume that Employee Y has an Employee Percentage of 10% and incurs a Disability on July 1, 2010.  Because, as of the last day of the 2011 Fiscal Year, aggregate Adjusted Net Income ($37 million) exceeds the aggregate of the Base Financial Targets for the three Fiscal Years contained in the Deferred Bonus Earn-Out Period ($36 million), the Annualized Financial Target is satisfied and Employee Y becomes 50% vested (18 months of employment from the first day of the Base Fiscal Year through the date of Disability, divided by 36 months) in her Deferred Bonus for the 2009 Fiscal Year as of December 31, 2011.  Employee Y will receive a distribution of her Deferred Bonus in the amount of $50,000 ($1 million Deferred Compensation Pool multiplied by 10% Employee Percentage multiplied by 50% vested percentage) on or about January 31, 2012.  The remaining $50,000 unvested Deferred Bonus is forfeited.

 

19



 

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed and delivered this Agreement as of the date first above written.

 

 

 

WALKER & DUNLOP, LLC

 

 

 

(“Employer”)

 

 

 

Date:

April 30, 2009

 

 

 

 

By:

/s/ William Walker

 

 

 

 

 

William M. Walker

 

 

 

 

 

President &

 

 

 

 

 

Chief Executive Officer

 

 

 

 

 

Deborah A. Wilson (“Employee”)

 

 

 

Date:

April 30, 2009

 

 

 

 

By:

/s/ Deborah A. Wilson

 

 

 

 

 

Deborah A. Wilson

 

 

 

 

 

Senior Vice President &

 

 

 

 

 

Chief Financial Officer

 

20



 

SCHEDULE 1-2009

 

Formulae for Computation of Deferred Bonus

 

1.                                      (A)                                 The following is a summary of key defined terms for 2009:

 

(i)                                      Employee: Deborah A. Wilson

 

(ii)                                   Base Fiscal Year: January 1, 2009 - December 31, 2009

 

(iii)                                Base Financial Target: $25,272,927.00

 

(iv)                                 Deferred Compensation Pool:  25% of the difference between 2009 Adjusted Net Income minus the Base Financial Target

 

(v)                                    Employee Percentage: 12% of Deferred Compensation Pool

 

(B)                                    Employee shall be entitled to a Deferred Bonus in the amount equal to (i) the Employee Percentage times (ii) the Deferred Compensation Pool, subject to all applicable vesting provisions set forth in the foregoing and attached Incentive Deferred Bonus Compensation Agreement (“Agreement”) of which this Schedule 1-2009 is a part. In no event shall the Deferred Bonus be less than zero.

 

2.                                             Unless otherwise defined in this Schedule 1-2009, all capitalized words and phrases in this Schedule 1-2009 shall have the same meanings as are ascribed to them in the Agreement.

 

21



 

APPROVED AND ACCEPTED:

 

 

/s/ William Walker

 

April 30, 2009

 

 

 

William M. Walker

 

Date

 

 

 

President & Chief Executive Officer

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

/s/ Deborah A. Wilson

 

April 30, 2009

 

 

 

Deborah A. Wilson

 

Date

 

Senior Vice President & Chief Financial Officer

 

22




Exhibit 10.17

 

WALKER & DUNLOP, LLC

LONG TERM INCENTIVE PLAN

 



 

WALKER & DUNLOP, LLC

LONG TERM INCENTIVE PLAN

 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

 

 

Page

PREAMBLE

 

3

ARTICLE I

 

3

DEFINITIONS

3

1.1

Additional Bonus

3

1.2

Adjusted GAAP Income or AGI

3

1.3

Base Compensation

3

1.4

Base Plan

3

1.5

Base Plan Percentage

3

1.6

Base Year Earnings Target

3

1.7

Beneficiary

4

1.8

Bonus Pool

4

1.9

Change of Control

4

1.10

Code

4

1.11

Company

4

1.12

Disability

4

1.13

Earnings Target

4

1.14

Effective Date

4

1.15

Good Standing

4

1.16

Participant

4

1.17

Plan

4

1.18

Plan Year

5

ARTICLE II

5

ELIGIBILITY

5

2.1

Eligibility

5

ARTICLE III

5

EMPLOYMENT

5

3.1

No Employment Agreement Created

5

ARTICLE IV

5

AMOUNT OF BONUS

5

4.1

Bonus Pool

5

4.2

Allocation of Bonus Pool Among Participants

6

ARTICLE V

6

VESTING AND PAYMENT OF BONUS

6

5.1

Vesting

6

5.2

Payment

6

5.3

Death or Disability

7

5.4

Change of Control

7

5.5

Form of Payment

7

5.6

Tax Withholding

7

ARTICLE VI

7

PARTICIPANTS’ RIGHTS

7

6.1

Participants’ Rights

7

ARTICLE VII

8

MISCELLANEOUS

8

7.1

Alienability and Assignment Prohibition

8

7.2

Binding Obligation of Company and Any Successor in Interest

8

7.3

Amendment or Termination

8

7.4

Claims Procedure

8

7.5

Mediation

9

7.6

Arbitration

9

7.7

Employment and Other Rights

9

7.8

Governing Law

9

 

2



 

THIS LONG TERM INCENTIVE PLAN is established effective this 1 st  day of January, 2010, by WALKER & DUNLOP, LLC (the “Company”).

 

PREAMBLE

 

This Plan is established by the Company for the exclusive benefit of the Participants and Beneficiaries (as defined herein).  The rights of the Participants and Beneficiaries shall be determined in accordance with the terms and provisions of this Plan.

 

The purpose of this Plan is to attract and retain the services of non-commissioned senior executive employees whose judgment, abilities and experience contribute to the company’s immediate and long-term success. The above statement is not intended to exclude special circumstances where management feels that one or more commissioned employee also plays an important role in management and should be included in the plan, but it is intended to emphasize the fact that the plan rewards management, not production.

 

The Plan is further intended to constitute an arrangement that provides solely for “short-term deferrals” as that term is defined for purposes of Section 409A of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the “Code”) and that is accordingly exempt from the requirements of Code Section 409A.

 

ARTICLE I

DEFINITIONS

 

1.1           “Additional Bonus” means the bonus described in Section 4.1(b).

 

1.2           “Adjusted GAAP Income” or “AGI”  means the Company’s income as determined under generally accepted accounting principles (“GAAP”), adjusted to eliminate (1) interest and fees paid on stock acquisition debt, and (2) proceeds from the sale of non-routine assets such as mortgage servicing for which the present value is capitalized and made a part of GAAP earnings.

 

1.3           “Base Compensation” means the amount of taxable compensation paid to a Participant by the Company that is treated as base wages, excluding bonuses, commissions, expense reimbursements, or other nonrecurring or contingent forms of payment.

 

1.4           “Base Plan” means the bonus described in Section 4.1(a).

 

1.5           “Base Plan Percentage” means the percentage of the Base Plan Bonus Pool that is funded, pursuant to Section 4.1(a).

 

1.6           “Base Year AGI Target” means the AGI Target applicable to an award under this Plan in the first Plan Year in which the award was made or to which the award

 

3



 

is attributable. The Base Year AGI Target must be approved by the Company’s Board of Directors

 

1.7           “Beneficiary” means the person or persons designated to receive any amount in the event of the death of the Participant.

 

1.8           “Bonus Pool” means the total amount allocated for award under the Base Plan or as an Additional Bonus, as applicable, as described in Section 4.1.

 

1.9           “Change of Control” means the sale or transfer of a majority equity interest in the firm to a non-related third party or the sale or transfer of 50% or more of the tangible assets of the Company to a non-related third party, if, and only if, the acquiring entity or an affiliate of such entity does not assume liability for the benefits provided hereunder pursuant to said transaction and/or the Company does not otherwise agree to continue or maintain this Plan. See Section 7.2 below.

 

1.10         “Code” means the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended, and any successor statute thereof, as interpreted by the rules and regulations issued there under, in each case as in effect from time to time.  References to sections of the Code shall be construed also to refer to any successor sections.

 

1.11         “Company” means Walker & Dunlop, LLC, and any affiliated company to which the obligations under this Plan are assigned or any successor in interest.

 

1.12         “Disability” or “Disabled” means any physical or mental impairment which, in the opinion of the Company, based upon a competent medical examination, renders a Participant unable to continue the performance of Participant’s regular duties with the Company and is expected to be permanent in duration or to continue for a period of 12 months or more. The Company shall have absolute discretion to determine if and when a Disability has occurred for purposes of this Plan, provided that nothing contained herein shall prevent a Participant from submitting to the Company, at Participant’s expense, any evidence of disability that Participant deems relevant to said determination.

 

1.13         “AGI Target” means the projected AGI reflected in the Company’s budget for a Plan Year.

 

1.14         “Effective Date” means January 1, 2010.

 

1.15         “Good Standing” is defined as that term is defined for purposes of the Company’s Employee Handbook.

 

1.16         “Participant” means an employee of the Company who has been designated by the Company to participate in the Base Plan or to receive an Additional Bonus.

 

1.17         “Plan” means this instrument, and all amendments thereto, if any.

 

4



 

1.18         “Plan Year” means a 12-month period beginning on January 1 st  and ending on the following December 31 st  of each year, beginning January 1, 2010, and ending on the date all liabilities to all Participants under this Plan have been satisfied.

 

ARTICLE II

ELIGIBILITY

 

2.1           Eligibility .  Eligibility under this Plan is limited to a select group of key employees each of whom has been designated to participate by the Company’s Chief Executive Officer.

 

ARTICLE III

EMPLOYMENT

 

3.1           No Employment Agreement Created .  No provision of this Plan shall be deemed to restrict or limit any existing employment agreement by and between the Company and the Participant nor shall any conditions herein create specific employment rights to the Participant nor limit the right of the Company to discharge the Participant with or without cause.

 

ARTICLE IV

AMOUNT OF BONUS

 

4.1           Bonus Pool .   Amounts payable under the terms of the Plan shall be limited to the amounts funded to the Bonus Pool, which shall consist of the Base Plan and the Additional Bonus.

 

(a)           Base Plan .  The maximum amount that may be funded to the Base Plan Bonus Pool with respect to a given Plan Year shall be an amount that equals fifteen percent (15%) of the Company’s annualized base payroll as of the first day of that Plan Year.  The Base Plan Bonus Pool shall not be funded until the completion of the Plan Year, and then shall be funded over the Plan term, as defined in Section 5.2, only in the applicable amount provided below based on the extent to which the Company’s AGI for that Plan Year satisfies the AGI Target applicable to that Plan Year:

 

5



 

AGI Expressed as Percentage
of AGI Target

 

Base Plan Percentage

Below 80%

 

0%

80% - 89.9%

 

25%

90% - 99.9%

 

50%

100% or greater

 

100%

 

(b)           Additional Bonus .  The total amount available under the Plan for issuance as an Additional Bonus with respect to a Plan Year shall be equal to 10% of the amount by which the Company’s AGI for that Plan Year exceeds the AGI Target applicable to that Plan Year.

 

4.2           Allocation of Bonus Pool Among Participants .

 

(a)           Base Plan .

 

(i)            Each Participant in the Base Plan shall be provided with an Individual Target, which may be expressed as a dollar amount or as a percentage of the Participant’s Base Compensation.

 

(ii)           The total dollar amount of all Individual Targets awarded under the Base Plan to all Participants for a Plan Year shall not exceed fifteen percent (15%) of the Company’s base payroll as of the first day of the Plan Year.

 

(iii)          The amount payable to each Participant as a bonus under the Base Plan (subject to the vesting rules described in Article V) shall be the Participant’s Individual Target times the Base Plan Percentage as determined in Section 4.1(a) reduced pro-rata to the extent required to comply with Section 4.2(a)(ii).

 

(b)           Additional Bonus .  Amounts credited to the Additional Bonus Pool under Section 4.2(b) may be allocated among one or more employees at the discretion of the Chief Executive Officer of the Company.  An employee may receive an Additional Bonus even if the employee is not a Participant in the Base Plan.

 

ARTICLE V

VESTING AND PAYMENT OF BONUS

 

5.1           Vesting .  A Participant’s right to receive payment of a bonus, whether under the Base Plan or as an Additional Bonus, shall be unvested and forfeitable at all times until the date of payment specified below.

 

5.2           Payment .  A Participant’s bonus, to the extent funded under Article IV, whether under the Base Plan or as an Additional Bonus, shall be paid in the following amounts on the following dates, provided that the Participant remains an employee of the

 

6



 

Company in Good Standing as of the payment date and that any applicable earnings targets have been satisfied as identified in the table below:

 

Date

 

Payment Amount

 

Earnings Target

6 months after end of Plan Year

 

20

%

None

18 months after end of Plan Year

 

30

%

Company AGI in the year following the Plan Year must meet or exceed Base Year AGI Target

30 months after end of Plan Year

 

50

%

Company AGI in the second year following the Plan Year must meet or exceed Base Year AGI Target

 

Any amounts that are not paid due to a Participant’s failure to remain an employee in Good Standing or the Company’s failure to meet applicable earnings targets shall be forfeited and shall not be reallocated to other Participants.

 

5.3           Death or Disability . In the event that a Participant dies or becomes Disabled while an employee of the Company in Good Standing, any remaining unpaid benefits under this Plan shall be paid to the Participant or the Participant’s Beneficiary, as applicable, at the times indicated in Section 5.2, provided that applicable AGI Targets have been satisfied as of each payment date.

 

5.4           Change of Control .  In the event that the Company experiences a Change of Control, any amounts that have been funded to the Bonus Pool as of the date of the Change of Control with respect to any preceding Plan Year shall be deemed fully vested and immediate payment of the full amount of any such funded bonus shall be made to all Participants who remain employees of the Company in Good Standing as of the date of the Change of Control.

 

5.5           Form of Payment .  Amounts payable under the Plan shall be paid in the form of a lump sum in cash.

 

5.6           Tax Withholding .  To the extent required by the law, the Company shall withhold from payments made hereunder the taxes required to be withheld by the federal or any state or local government.

 

ARTICLE VI

PARTICIPANTS’ RIGHTS

 

6.1           Participants’ Rights .  The Participant and any Beneficiaries shall have the status of general unsecured creditors of the Company.  The Plan constitutes a mere contingent promise by the Company to pay the Participant a bonus in the future.  Consequently, the Company shall not have any obligation to set aside, earmark or entrust

 

7



 

any fund or money with which to pay its obligations under this Plan.  The Participant and any Beneficiaries shall be and remain general creditors of the Company in the same manner as any other creditor having a general claim for matured and unpaid compensation.  The Participant, the Participant’s Beneficiary, or any other person claiming through the Participant, shall only have the right to receive from the Company the benefits specified in this Plan.

 

At no time shall the Participant be deemed to have any lien, right, title or interest in or to any specific investment or to any assets of the Company.  At all times, the Company shall be the owner of any assets used to satisfy the Company’s obligations hereunder.

 

ARTICLE VII

MISCELLANEOUS

 

7.1           Alienability and Assignment Prohibition .  The Participant’s or Beneficiary’s right to benefit payments under the Plan shall not be subject in any manner to anticipation, alienation, sale, transfer, assignment, pledge, encumbrance, attachment, or garnishment by creditors of the Participant or the Participant’s Beneficiaries.

 

7.2           Binding Obligation of Company and Any Successor in Interest .  The Company expressly agrees that it shall not merge or consolidate into or with another corporation or sell substantially all of its assets to another corporation, firm or person until such corporation, firm, person or an affiliate thereof expressly agrees, in writing, to assume and discharge the duties and obligations of the Company under this Plan unless the Company decides to immediately vest all unfunded amounts and pay-out the Plan in full.

 

7.3           Amendment or Termination .  The Company expects the Plan to be permanent but, since future conditions affecting the Company cannot be anticipated or foreseen, the Company must necessarily and does hereby reserve the right to amend, modify or terminate the Plan at any time.  In the event the Company terminates this Plan, any bonuses that remain unpaid shall be vested and paid in a single lump in cash as soon as administratively practicable on or after the date selected by the Company for termination of the Plan, but not later than March 15 th  of the Plan Year following the date selected by the Board for termination of the Plan.

 

7.4           Claims Procedure .  The Company has discretionary authority to interpret the terms of this Plan and apply such terms in a uniform, nondiscriminatory manner.  In the event any claim by the Participant or his Beneficiary is denied as to the amount and/or the method of payment under the Plan, the Participant or Beneficiary shall be given prompt notice in writing of such denial, which notice shall set forth the reason for the denial.  The Participant or Beneficiary may, by filing notice in writing with the Company within sixty (60) days after the date of such notice of denial, request review of such denial.  The Company shall review such denial, and shall state its decision, in writing, in a manner calculated to be understood, to the Participant or Beneficiary concerned.

 

8



 

7.5           Mediation .  The Participant or his Beneficiary may request a further review by filing notice in writing with the Company within sixty (60) days after the date of notice of denial in Section 7.4, in which case, the claim will be subject to mediation.  If the Company and the Participant or his Beneficiary cannot agree upon a mediator, each shall select one name from a list of mediators maintained by any bona fide dispute resolution provider or other private mediator; the two selected shall then choose a third person who will serve as mediator. The first mediation session shall occur within forty-five (45) calendar days following the notice of denial of a claim.

 

7.6           Arbitration .

 

The Participant or Beneficiary may, by filing notice in writing with the Company within sixty (60) days after the date of the first mediation session, request arbitration of the claim. Any dispute or controversy arising under or in connection with this Plan that is not resolved by mediation shall be settled exclusively by arbitration in the State of Maryland by three arbitrators in accordance with the National Rules for the Resolution of Employment Disputes of the American Arbitration Association in effect at the time of submission to arbitration.  Judgment may be entered on the arbitrators’ award in any court having jurisdiction.  For purposes of entering any judgment upon an award rendered by the arbitrators, any or all of the following courts have jurisdiction:  (i) the United States District Court for the Fourth Circuit, (ii) any of the courts of the State of Maryland, or (iii) any other court having jurisdiction.  Any service of process or notice requirements in any such proceeding shall be satisfied if the rules of such court relating thereto have been substantially satisfied.  The Company and the Participant, or his Beneficiary, waive, to the fullest extent permitted by applicable law, any objection which it may now or hereafter have to such jurisdiction and any defense of inconvenient forum.  A judgment upon an award rendered by the arbitrators may be enforced in other jurisdictions by suit on the judgment or in any other manner provided by law.  Each party shall bear its or his costs and expenses arising in connection with any arbitration proceeding pursuant to this Section 7.6.

 

7.7           Employment and Other Rights .  This Plan creates no rights whatsoever in the Participant to continue in the employ of the Company for any length of time, nor does it affect the right of the Participant to participate in or be covered by any other pension, profit sharing, welfare benefit, bonus or other supplemental compensation plan or fringe benefit program of the Company.

 

7.8           Governing Law .  To the extent not preempted by the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, this Plan shall be construed, administered and enforced according to the laws of the State of Maryland.

 

9


 



Exhibit 10.22

 

EXECUTION VERSION

 

 

AMENDED AND RESTATED WAREHOUSING
CREDIT AND SECURITY AGREEMENT

 

 

AMONG

 

 

WALKER & DUNLOP, LLC

a Delaware limited liability company

 

AND

 

GREEN PARK FINANCIAL LIMITED PARTNERSHIP,

a District of Columbia limited partnership

AS BORROWERS

 

 

AND

 

 

BANK OF AMERICA, N.A.,

a national banking association

 

AND

 

TD BANK, N.A.,
a national banking association

 

AS LENDERS, TOGETHER WITH ANY OTHER LENDERS PARTY HERETO

 

 

AND

 

 

BANK OF AMERICA, N.A.,

 

AS CREDIT AGENT

 

 

DATED AS OF OCTOBER 15, 2009

 

 



 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

1.      THE CREDIT

1

1.1

The Warehousing Commitment

1

1.2

Expiration of Warehousing Commitment

2

1.3

Warehousing Notes

2

1.4

Replacement of Warehousing Note

2

1.5

Nature of Obligations

3

1.6

Agreements Relating to GPF as a Borrower and the Existing Agreement

3

2.      PROCEDURES FOR OBTAINING ADVANCES

1

2.1

Warehousing Advances

1

2.2

Funding Advances

1

3.      INTEREST, PRINCIPAL AND FEES

1

3.1

Interest

1

3.2

Interest Limitation

1

3.3

Principal Payments

2

3.4

Non-Usage Fee

4

3.5

Miscellaneous Fees and Charges

4

3.6

Overdraft Advances

4

3.7

Method of Making Payments

5

3.8

Billings

5

3.9

Late Charges

6

3.10

Additional Provisions Relating to Interest Rate

6

3.11

Continuing Authority of Authorized Representatives

8

4.      COLLATERAL

1

4.1

Grant of Security Interest

1

4.2

Maintenance of Collateral Records

2

4.3

Release of Security Interest in Pledged Loans and Pledged Securities

3

4.4

Collection and Servicing Rights

4

4.5

Return of Collateral at End of Warehousing Commitment

4

4.6

Delivery of Collateral Documents

5

4.7

Borrowers Remain Liable

5

5.      CONDITIONS PRECEDENT

1

5.1

Initial Advance

1

5.2

Each Advance

3

5.3

New Fannie Mae Special Program Agreements

4

5.4

Force Majeure

4

6.      GENERAL REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES

1

6.1

Place of Business

1

6.2

Organization; Good Standing; Subsidiaries

1

6.3

Authorization and Enforceability

1

6.4

Approvals

2

6.5

Financial Condition

2

6.6

Litigation

2

6.7

Compliance with Laws

3

6.8

Regulation U

3

 

i



 

6.9

Investment Company Act

3

6.10

Payment of Taxes

3

6.11

Agreements

4

6.12

Title to Properties

4

6.13

ERISA

4

6.14

No Retiree Benefits

4

6.15

Assumed Names

4

6.16

Servicing

5

6.17

Foreign Asset Control Regulations

5

7.      AFFIRMATIVE COVENANTS

1

7.1

Payment of Obligations

1

7.2

Financial Statements

1

7.3

Other Borrower Reports

1

7.4

Maintenance of Existence; Conduct of Business

2

7.5

Compliance with Applicable Laws

3

7.6

Inspection of Properties and Books; Operational Reviews

3

7.7

Notice

3

7.8

Payment of Debt, Taxes and Other Obligations

4

7.9

Insurance

4

7.10

Closing Instructions

4

7.11

Subordination of Certain Indebtedness

5

7.12

Other Loan Obligations

5

7.13

ERISA

5

7.14

Use of Proceeds of Warehousing Advances

5

8.      NEGATIVE COVENANTS

1

8.1

Contingent Liabilities

1

8.2

Restrictions on Fundamental Changes

1

8.3

Subsidiaries

1

8.4

Deferral of Subordinated Debt

2

8.5

Loss of Eligibility, Licenses or Approvals

2

8.6

Accounting Changes

2

8.7

Leverage Ratio

2

8.8

Minimum Tangible Net Worth

2

8.9

Minimum Liquid Assets

3

8.10

Servicing Delinquencies

3

8.11

Distributions to Partners

3

8.12

Transactions with Affiliates

3

8.13

Recourse Servicing Contracts

4

9.      SPECIAL REPRESENTATIONS, WARRANTIES AND COVENANTS CONCERNING COLLATERAL

1

9.1

Special Representations and Warranties Concerning Eligibility as Seller/Servicer of Mortgage Loans

1

9.2

Special Representations and Warranties Concerning Warehousing Collateral

1

9.3

Special Affirmative Covenants Concerning Warehousing Collateral

4

9.4

Special Negative Covenants Concerning Warehousing Collateral

5

 

ii



 

9.5

Special Representation and Warranty Concerning Fannie Mae DUS Program Reserve Requirements

6

9.6

Special Representations and Warranties Concerning Special Fannie Mae Mortgage Loans

6

9.7

Special Covenants Concerning Special Fannie Mae Mortgage Loans

6

9.8

Special Representations and Warranties Concerning FHA Mortgage Loans

7

10.      DEFAULTS; REMEDIES

1

10.1

Events of Default

1

10.2

Remedies

3

10.3

Insufficiency of Proceeds

6

10.4

Credit Agent Appointed Attorney-in-Fact

6

10.5

Right of Set-Off

7

11.      THE CREDIT AGENT AND THE LENDERS

1

11.1

Appointment

1

11.2

Duties of Credit Agent; Administration of Loan by Credit Agent

1

11.3

Delegation of Duties

1

11.4

Exculpatory Provisions

1

11.5

Reliance by Credit Agent

2

11.6

Notice of Default

2

11.7

Lenders’ Credit Decisions

2

11.8

Credit Agent’s Reimbursement and Indemnification

3

11.9

Credit Agent in its Individual Capacity

3

11.10

Successor Credit Agent

3

11.11

Duties in Case of Enforcement

4

11.12

Respecting Loans and Payments

4

11.13

Assignment and Participation

8

11.14

Administrative Matters

10

12.      MISCELLANEOUS

1

12.1

Notices

1

12.2

Reimbursement Of Expenses; Indemnity

2

12.3

Financial Information

3

12.4

Terms Binding Upon Successors; Survival of Representations

3

12.5

Pledge to Federal Reserve Banks

3

12.6

Confidentiality

3

12.7

Governing Law

4

12.8

Amendments

4

12.9

Relationship of the Parties

4

12.10

Severability

5

12.11

Consent to Credit References

5

12.12

Counterparts

5

12.13

Headings/Captions

5

12.14

Entire Agreement

5

12.15

Consent to Jurisdiction

6

12.16

Waiver of Jury Trial

6

12.17

Waiver of Punitive, Consequential, Special or Indirect Damages

6

12.18

U.S. Patriot Act

7

 

iii



 

12.19

Merger of Obligations

7

13.      DEFINITIONS

1

13.1

Defined Terms

1

13.2

Other Definitional Provisions; Terms of Construction

15

 

iv



 

EXHIBITS

 

Exhibit A

Form of Warehousing Advance Request

 

 

Exhibit B FNMA/DUS

Procedures and Documentation for Fannie Mae DUS Loans and Other Fannie Mae Mortgage Loans

 

 

Exhibit B FNMA/NT

Procedures and Documentation for Fannie Mae Negotiated Transactions Loans

 

 

Exhibit B FHA/GNMA

Procedures and Documentation for FHA Mortgage Loans and Ginnie Mae Mortgage Backed Securities

 

 

Exhibit B-Freddie Mac

 

Program Plus Loans

Procedures and Documentation for Freddie Mac Program Plus Loans

 

 

Exhibit C

Eligible Loans and Other Assets

 

 

Exhibit D

Authorized Representatives

 

 

Exhibit E

Master Credit Facilities

 

 

Exhibit F

Subsidiaries

 

 

Exhibit G

Assumed Names

 

 

Exhibit H

Servicing Portfolio

 

 

Exhibit I

Form of Compliance Certificate

 

 

Exhibit J

Lines of Credit

 

 

Exhibit K

Foreign Qualifications and Licenses

 

 

Exhibit L

Miscellaneous Fees and Charges

 

 

Exhibit M

Form of Assignment and Acceptance

 

 

Exhibit N

Commitment Amounts, Commitment Percentages, Notice Information

 

v



 

AMENDED AND RESTATED WAREHOUSING
CREDIT AND SECURITY AGREEMENT

 

AMENDED AND RESTATED WAREHOUSING CREDIT AND SECURITY AGREEMENT , dated as of October 15, 2009, among Walker & Dunlop, LLC, a Delaware limited liability company (“ W&D ”), GREEN PARK FINANCIAL LIMITED PARTNERSHIP, a District of Columbia limited partnership (“ GPF ;” GPF and W&D being referred to herein, individually as a “ Borrower ” and collectively as, the “ Borrowers ”), BANK OF AMERICA, N.A., a national banking association (in its individual capacity, “ Bank of America ”), TD BANK, N.A., a national banking association (“ TD Bank ,” together with Bank of America, in its capacity as a lender hereunder, and any Additional Lenders as may from time to time become parties hereto, being referred to individually, as a “ Lender ,” and collectively, as the “ Lenders ”), and Bank of America, as administrative agent for the Lenders (in such capacity, the “ Credit Agent ”).

 

Preliminary Statement

 

Borrowers and Bank of America are parties to a certain Warehousing Credit and Security Agreement dated as of January 30, 2009 (the “ Existing Agreement ”), pursuant to which Bank of America committed to make advances to Borrowers from time to time subject to and on the terms and conditions set forth therein (with such advances, and all related obligations, including, without limitation, interest thereon and fees and expenses, being referred to herein as “ Existing Agreement Obligations ”).

 

Borrowers have requested Lenders to (a) allocate the Existing Agreement Obligations among the Lenders, to be continued under this Agreement as Warehousing Advances (as to the outstanding principal amount thereof; referred to herein as “ Existing Warehousing Advances ”) and as Obligations of the same type hereunder as under the Existing Agreement with respect to other Existing Agreement Obligations, and (b) agree to amend and restate the Existing Agreement to, among other things, (i) add TD Bank as a Lender, and (ii) provide for additional Warehousing Advances to be made by Lenders from time to time to GPF during the GPF Transition Period and to W&D during the term hereof.

 

Lenders have agreed to the requests of Borrowers described in the preceding paragraph, but only on, and subject to, the terms and conditions set forth in this Agreement.

 

NOW, THEREFORE, for good and valuable consideration, the receipt and sufficiency of which are hereby acknowledged, the parties to this Agreement agree that, as of the Closing Date, the Existing Agreement is hereby amended and restated as follows:

 

1.                                       THE CREDIT

 

1.1                                The Warehousing Commitment

 

1.1(a)                             On the terms and subject to the conditions and limitations of this Agreement, including Exhibit C , Lenders agree to (a) continue Existing Warehousing Advances as Warehousing Advances under this Agreement (and hereafter to be referred to an treated

 

1-1



 

as such), (b) make additional Warehousing Advances to GPF from the Closing Date to the last Business Day of the GPF Transition Period, and (c) make Warehousing Advances to W&D from the Closing Date to the Business Day immediately preceding the Warehousing Maturity Date, during which applicable period Borrowers may borrow, repay and reborrow in accordance with the provisions of this Agreement. Lenders have no obligation to make or maintain Warehousing Advances if, after giving effect to each requested Warehousing Advance, the aggregate outstanding principal amount of all Warehousing Advances would exceed the Warehousing Credit Limit.  No Lender shall be obligated to make Warehousing Advances if, after giving effect to each requested Warehousing Advance, the aggregate outstanding principal amount of such Lender’s Warehousing Advances would exceed such Lender’s Warehousing Commitment Amount.  While a Default or Event of Default exists, Lenders may refuse to make any additional Warehousing Advances to Borrowers. All Warehousing Advances under this Agreement constitute a single indebtedness, and all of the Collateral is security for the Warehousing Notes and for the performance of all of the Obligations.

 

1.1(b)                            On the Closing Date, the Credit Agent will coordinate with the Lenders, and the Lenders shall make, appropriate allocations, adjustments, and advances among themselves in order to properly reflect their respective Commitment Percentages of all Existing Agreement Obligations.

 

1.2                                Expiration of Warehousing Commitment

 

The Warehousing Commitment expires on the earlier of (“ Warehousing Maturity Date ”): (a) November 30, 2009, as such date may be extended in writing by Lenders, in their sole discretion, on which date the Warehousing Commitment will expire of its own term and the Warehousing Advances together with all accrued and unpaid interest and costs and expenses will become due and payable without the necessity of Notice or action by Credit Agent or Lenders; and (b) the date the Warehousing Commitment is terminated and the Warehousing Advances become due and payable under Section 10.2(a) or 10.2(b).

 

1.3                                Warehousing Notes

 

Warehousing Advances are evidenced by Borrowers’ promissory notes, payable to Lenders on the form prescribed by Credit Agent (each a Warehousing Note ”). The term “ Warehousing Note ” as used in this Agreement includes all amendments, restatements, renewals or replacements of the original Warehousing Note and all substitutions for it. All terms and provisions of the Warehousing Note are incorporated into this Agreement.  Bank of America’s Warehousing Note under (and as defined in) the Existing Agreement shall be amended and restated as a Warehousing Note under this Agreement, and shall be considered a continuation of the extension of credit thereunder.

 

1.4                                Replacement of Warehousing Note

 

Upon receipt of an affidavit of an officer of a Lender as to the loss, theft, destruction or mutilation of a Warehousing Note or any other security document which is not of public record,

 

1-2



 

and, in the case of any such loss, theft, destruction or mutilation, upon cancellation of such Warehousing Note or other security document and receipt by Borrowers of customary indemnification from Lender,  Borrowers will issue, in lieu thereof, a replacement note or other security document in the same principal amount thereof and otherwise of like tenor.

 

1.5                                Nature of Obligations

 

All Warehousing Advances (including the Existing Advances from and after the date hereof) made under this Agreement constitute a single joint and several Indebtedness of Borrowers, and all of the Collateral granted by Borrowers is security for the payment and performance of the Obligations of both Borrowers. The amendment and restatement of the Existing Agreement is not intended by the parties to constitute either a novation or a discharge or satisfaction of the indebtedness and obligations under the Existing Loan Agreement, which indebtedness and obligations shall remain outstanding hereunder on the terms and conditions hereinafter provided. The aggregate amount of all Warehousing Advances outstanding from time to time under this Agreement may hereinafter collectively be referred to as the “Loan.”

 

1.6                                Agreements Relating to GPF as a Borrower and the Existing Agreement

 

GPF shall only be a “Borrower” hereunder for as long as, and only to the minimum extent that, it requires Existing Warehousing Advances to be maintained and new Warehousing Advances to be made, in order to perform its obligations under the Transition Services Agreement, as in effect as of the date hereof or as hereafter amended (or performance thereof waived) with Credit Agent’s consent (and with Required Lenders consent if such proposed amendment or waiver would materially affect the interests of Lenders under this Agreement).  GPF and W&D agree to keep Credit Agent regularly, and at Credit Agent’s request from time to time, informed of the status of the ongoing provision of Transition Services, and promptly upon the end of the GPF Transition Period.  At any time following Notice from Borrowers to the Credit Agent of the end of the GPF Transition Period and repayment in full of Existing Warehouse Advances and all other Warehousing Advances made to GPF, and provided no Default or Event of Default has occurred and is continuing, upon the written request of GPF and W&D, GPF shall be removed as a “Borrower” hereunder and the Credit Agent shall provide such evidence of such removal as GPF shall reasonably request.

 

End of Article 1

 

1-3



 

2.                                       PROCEDURES FOR OBTAINING ADVANCES

 

2.1                                Warehousing Advances

 

Either Borrower may obtain a Warehousing Advance under this Agreement, by delivering to Credit Agent a completed and signed request for a Warehousing Advance on Credit Agent’s then current form (“ Warehousing Advance Request ”), not later than 3:00 p.m. on the Business Day before the Business Day on which such Borrower desires the Warehousing Advance. Warehousing Advance Requests received by Credit Agent after 3:00 p.m. on a Business Day will be deemed received on the following Business Day, provided, however, on a case-by-case basis at the request of a Borrower, the Credit Agent may, in its sole discretion (and without thereby establishing any course of dealing), extend such 3:00 p.m. cut-off time to a later time on the subject Business Day.  Subject to the delivery of a Warehousing Advance Request and the satisfaction of the conditions set forth in Sections 5.1 and 5.2, Borrowers may obtain a Warehousing Advance under this Agreement upon compliance with the procedures set forth in this Section and in the applicable Exhibit B , including delivery to Credit Agent of all Collateral Documents required to be delivered on the applicable dates specified in this Agreement for such delivery. Credit Agent’s current form of Warehousing Advance Request is set forth in Exhibit A . Upon not less than five (5) Business Days’ prior Notice to Borrowers, Credit Agent may modify its form of Warehousing Advance Request and any other Exhibit or document referred to in this Section to conform to current legal requirements or Lender practices and, as so modified, those Exhibits and documents will become part of this Agreement.

 

2.2                                Funding Advances

 

Credit Agent shall notify each Lender no later than 12:00 noon on the date of the requested Warehousing Advance of Credit Agent’s receipt of a Warehousing Advance Request and of such Lender’s Commitment Percentage of such Warehousing Advance. To make a Warehousing Advance, each Lender shall wire transfer to a specified account of Credit Agent prior to 1:00 p.m. on the date of such Warehousing Advance, and Credit Agent shall make such Warehousing Advance available to the requesting Borrower only upon receipt of each Lenders’ Commitment Percentage thereof.  Neither Credit Agent nor any Lender shall have any obligation to fund a non-funding Lender’s Commitment Percentage of any Warehousing Advance.

 

End of Article 2

 

2-1


 

3.                                       INTEREST, PRINCIPAL AND FEES

 

3.1                                Interest

 

3.1(a)                             Except as otherwise provided in this Section, Borrowers must pay interest on the unpaid amount of each Warehousing Advance from the date the Warehousing Advance is made until it is paid in full at the Applicable Rate as in effect from time to time.

 

3.1(b)                            Credit Agent computes interest on the basis of the actual number of days in each month and a year of 360 days. Borrowers must pay interest monthly in arrears, not later than 9 days after the date of Credit Agent’s invoice or, if applicable, 2 days after the date of Credit Agent’s account analysis statement, commencing with the first month following the Closing Date and on the Warehousing Maturity Date.

 

3.1(c)                             If, for any reason, (i) a Borrower repays a Warehousing Advance on the same day that it was made, or (ii) a Borrower instructs Credit Agent not to make a previously requested Warehousing Advance after Credit Agent and Lenders have reserved funds or made other arrangements necessary to enable Credit Agent and Lenders to fund that Warehousing Advance, Borrowers agree to pay to Credit Agent, without limiting the provisions of Section 3.10, (x) for the account of Credit Agent, an administrative fee equal to 1 day of interest on that Warehousing Advance at the rate of 1.50% per annum, and (y) for the ratable account of all Lenders (based on Commitment Percentages) who funded the subject Warehousing Advance, interest thereon at the Applicable Rate notwithstanding repayment prior to the cut-off time specified in Section 3.7(a) (unless the reason for such repayment is due to the failure of the underlying transaction to close). Borrower must pay all such administrative fees and interest within 9 days after the date of Credit Agent’s invoice or, if applicable, within 2 days after the date of Credit Agent’s account analysis statement.

 

3.1(d)                            After an Event of Default occurs and upon Notice to Borrowers by Credit Agent, the unpaid amount of each Warehousing Advance will bear interest at the Default Rate until paid in full.

 

3.1(e)                             Credit Agent will adjust the rates of interest provided for in this Agreement as of the effective date of each change in the applicable Reference Rate. Credit Agent’s determination of such rates of interest as of any date of determination is conclusive and binding, absent manifest error.

 

3.2                                Interest Limitation

 

If, at any time, the rate of interest, together with all amounts which constitute or are deemed under any applicable law to constitute interest and which are reserved, charged or taken by a Lender or Credit Agent as compensation for fees, services or expenses incidental to the making, negotiating or collecting of Warehousing Advances, shall be deemed by any competent court of law, governmental agency or tribunal to exceed the maximum rate of interest permitted to be charged by a Lender or Credit Agent to Borrowers under applicable law, then, during such time as such rate of interest would be deemed excessive, that portion of each sum paid attributable to that portion of such interest rate that exceeds the maximum rate of interest so permitted shall be

 

3-1



 

deemed a voluntary prepayment of principal (or, if no Obligations are then outstanding, shall be repaid to the Borrower). As used herein, the term “applicable law” shall mean the law in effect as of the date hereof; provided , however , that in the event there is a change in the law which results in a higher permissible rate of interest, then this Agreement shall be governed by such new law as of its effective date.

 

3.3                                Principal Payments

 

3.3(a)                             Borrowers must pay Credit Agent the outstanding principal amount of all Warehousing Advances together with all accrued and unpaid interest thereon, and any unpaid costs and expenses, on the Warehousing Maturity Date.

 

3.3(b)                            Except as otherwise provided in Section 3.1, Borrowers may prepay any portion of the Warehousing Advances without premium or penalty at any time.

 

3.3(c)                             Upon telephonic or written Notice to Borrowers by Credit Agent, Borrowers must pay to Credit Agent, and Borrowers authorize Credit Agent to charge their respective Operating Accounts for, the amount of any outstanding Warehousing Advance against a specific Pledged Asset upon the earliest occurrence of any of the following events:

 

(1)                                   For any Pledged Loan, the Warehouse Period elapses.

 

(2)                                   For any Pledged Loan, the Shipped Period elapses.

 

(3)                                   On the date a Warehousing Advance was made if the Pledged Loan to be funded by that Warehousing Advance has not closed and funded.

 

(4)                                   One (1) Business Day elapses from the date a Warehousing Advance was made against a Pledged Loan, without receipt of the Collateral Documents relating to that Pledged Loan required to be delivered on that date, or such Collateral Documents, upon examination by Credit Agent, are found not to be in compliance with the requirements of this Agreement or the related Purchase Commitment.

 

(5)                                   Ten (10) Business Days elapse without the return of a Collateral Document delivered by Credit Agent to Borrower under a Trust Receipt for correction or completion.

 

(6)                                   On the date on which a Pledged Loan is determined to have been originated based on untrue, incomplete or inaccurate information or otherwise to be subject to fraud, whether or not either Borrower had knowledge of the misrepresentation, incomplete or inaccurate information or fraud.

 

(7)                                   On the date on which a Borrower knows, has reason to know, or receives Notice from Credit Agent, that (A) one or more of the representations and warranties set forth in Article 9 were inaccurate or incomplete in any material respect on any date when made or deemed made or became inaccurate or incomplete after any such date, or (B) either Borrower has failed to perform or comply with any covenant, term or condition applicable to it set forth in Article 9.

 

3-2



 

(8)                                   On the date on which a Pledged Loan or a Lien prior to the Mortgage securing repayment of the Pledged Loan has been in default for a period of 60 days or more (it being understood that, as provided in Section 9.2(o), no Warehousing Advance will be made against any Mortgage Loan which is in default).

 

(9)                                   On the mandatory delivery date of the related Purchase Commitment if the specific Pledged Loan has not been delivered under the Purchase Commitment prior to such mandatory delivery date, or on the date the related Purchase Commitment expires or is terminated.

 

(10)                             Three (3) Business Days after the date a Pledged Loan is rejected for purchase by an Investor unless another Purchase Commitment is provided within that three (3) Business Day period.

 

(11)                             Upon the sale, other disposition or prepayment of any Pledged Asset or, with respect to a Pledged Loan included in an Eligible Mortgage Pool, upon the sale or other disposition of the related Agency Security.

 

(12)                             With respect to any Pledged Loan, any of the Collateral Documents, upon examination by Credit Agent, are found not to be in compliance with the requirements of this Agreement or the related Purchase Commitment.

 

(13)                             If, after giving effect to a new Warehousing Advance against a Pledged Loan or to the payment of existing Warehousing Advances against Pledged Loans, any of the limitations set forth in Exhibit C have been exceeded.

 

3.3(d)                            In addition to the payments required by Sections 3.3(a) and 3.3(b), if the principal amount of any Pledged Loan is prepaid in whole or in part while a Warehousing Advance is outstanding against the Pledged Loan, Borrowers must pay to Credit Agent, without the necessity of prior demand or Notice from Lender, and Borrowers authorize Credit Agent to charge their respective Operating Accounts for, the amount of the prepayment, to be applied against the Warehousing Advance.

 

3.3(e)                             The proceeds of the sale or other disposition of Pledged Assets must be paid directly by the Investor to the applicable Borrower’s Cash Collateral Account. The applicable Borrower must give Notice to Credit Agent in writing or by telephone (and if by telephone, followed promptly by written Notice) of the Pledged Assets for which proceeds have been received. Upon receipt of such Borrower’s Notice, Credit Agent will apply any proceeds deposited into the applicable Cash Collateral Account to the payment of the Warehousing Advances related to the Pledged Assets identified by such Borrower in its Notice, and those Pledged Assets will be considered to have been redeemed from pledge to the extent the related Warehousing Advance has been paid in full. Credit Agent is entitled to rely upon a Borrower’s affirmation that deposits in the applicable Cash Collateral Account represent payments from Investors for the purchase of the Pledged Assets specified by such Borrower in its Notice. If the payment from an Investor for the purchase of Pledged Assets is less than the outstanding Warehousing Advances against the Pledged Assets identified by a Borrower in its Notice, the

 

3-3



 

Borrower must pay to Credit Agent, and Borrowers authorize Credit Agent to charge Borrowers’ Operating Accounts for, an amount equal to that deficiency. As long as no Default or Event of Default exists, Credit Agent will return to the applicable Borrower any excess payment from an Investor for Pledged Assets.

 

3.3(f)                               Credit Agent reserves the right to revalue any Pledged Loan or Pledged Security. Borrowers must pay to Credit Agent, without the necessity of prior demand or Notice from Credit Agent, and Borrowers authorize Credit Agent to charge Borrowers’ Operating Accounts for, any amount required after any such revaluation to reduce the principal amount of the Warehousing Advance outstanding against the revalued Pledged Loan or Pledged Security to an amount equal to the Advance Rate for the applicable type of Pledged Loan or Pledged Security multiplied by the Fair Market Value of the Pledged Loan or Pledged Security.

 

3.4                                Non-Usage Fee

 

At the end of each Calendar Quarter during the term of this Agreement, Credit Agent will determine the average usage of the Warehousing Credit Limit by calculating the arithmetic daily average of the Warehousing Advances outstanding during such Calendar Quarter (“ Used Portion ”). If the Used Portion for such Calendar Quarter is less than an amount equal to fifty percent (50%) of the Warehousing Credit Limit, Credit Agent will then subtract the Used Portion from the Warehousing Credit Limit, and the result will be known as the “ Unused Portion. ” Borrowers must pay to Credit Agent, for the ratable account of Lenders based on their Commitment Percentages, a fee (“ Non-Usage Fee ”) in an amount of 0.125% per annum of the Unused Portion during such Calendar Quarter.  The Non-Usage Fee is payable quarterly, in arrears. Borrowers must pay the Non-Usage Fee within 9 days after the date of Credit Agent’s invoice or, if applicable, within 2 days after the date of Credit Agent’s account analysis statement. If the date set forth in clause (a) of the definition of Warehousing Maturity Date occurs on a day other than the last day of a Calendar Quarter, Borrowers must pay the prorated portion of the Non-Usage Fee due from the beginning of the then current Calendar Quarter to and including that date. Borrowers are not entitled to a reduction in the amount of the Non-Usage Fee under any circumstance. Credit Agent’s determination of the Non-Usage Fee is computed on the basis of the actual number of days in each subject Calendar Quarter (or portion thereof) and a year of 360 days, and is conclusive and binding, absent manifest error.

 

3.5                                Miscellaneous Fees and Charges

 

Borrowers must pay or reimburse Credit Agent, as applicable, for all Miscellaneous Fees and Charges. Borrowers must pay all Miscellaneous Fees and Charges within 9 days after the date of Credit Agent’s invoice or, if applicable, within 2 days after the date of Lender’s account analysis statement.

 

3.6                                Overdraft Advances

 

If, under the authorization given by a Borrower pursuant to this Agreement, Credit Agent debits a Borrower’s Operating Account to honor an item presented against an Operating Account and that debit or direction results in an overdraft, Credit Agent may make an additional advance to

 

3-4



 

fund that overdraft (“ Overdraft Advance ”). Borrowers must pay (a) the outstanding amount of any Overdraft Advance, within 1 Business Day after the date of the Overdraft Advance, and (b) interest on the amount of the Overdraft Advance, at a rate per annum equal to the Applicable Rate plus 2%, within 9 days after the date of Credit Agent’s invoice or, if applicable, within 2 days after the date of Credit Agent’s  account analysis statement.

 

3.7                                Method of Making Payments

 

3.7(a)                             All payments of interest, principal and fees shall be made in lawful money of the United States in immediately available funds, without counterclaim or setoff and free and clear of, and without any deduction or withholding for, any taxes or other payments by wire transfer to Lender, or as otherwise provided in this Agreement. Payments shall be credited on the Business Day on which immediately available funds are received prior to 2:00 P.M.; payments received after 2:00 P.M. shall be credited on the next Business Day. All payments shall be applied first to the payment of all fees, expenses, and other amounts due to Credit Agent and/or Lenders (excluding principal and interest), then to accrued interest, and the balance on account of outstanding principal, provided, however, that, after the occurrence and during the continuation of an Event of Default, payments will be applied to the Obligations as Credit Agent determines. If the due date is not a Business Day, payment is due on, and interest will accrue to, the next Business Day.

 

3.7(b)                            Borrowers authorize Credit Agent to charge Borrowers’ Operating Accounts for any interest or fees due and payable to Credit Agent and/or Lenders on or after the 9th day after the date of Credit Agent’s invoice or, if applicable, on or after the 2nd day after the date of Credit Agent’s account analysis statement, without the necessity of prior demand or Notice from Credit Agent.

 

3.7(c)                             While a Default or Event of Default exists, Borrowers authorize Credit Agent to charge Borrowers’ Operating Accounts for any Obligations due and payable to Credit Agent or Lenders, without the necessity of prior demand or Notice from Credit Agent.

 

3.7(d)                            All payments made on account of the Obligations shall be made by the Borrowers to Credit Agent for distribution to the Lenders, except for fees payable to Credit Agent for its own account. No principal payments resulting from the refinancing, sale or other disposition of Pledged Loans or Pledged Securities shall be deemed to have been received by Credit Agent until Credit Agent has also received the Notice required under Section 3.3(e). All amounts received by Credit Agent on account of the Obligations for distribution to the Lenders shall be disbursed to the Lenders by wire transfer on the date of receipt if received by the Credit Agent by the applicable deadlines for payment thereof, or, if received later, by 12:00 noon on the next succeeding Business Day, without any interest payable by Credit Agent thereon.

 

3.8          Billings

 

Any changes in the interest rate and in the outstanding amount of the Obligations which occur between the date of any billing and the due date of any payment may be reflected in adjustments

 

3-5



 

in the billing for a subsequent month. Neither the failure of Credit Agent to submit a bill, nor any error in any such bill shall excuse Borrowers from the obligation to make full payment of all Borrowers’ payment obligations when due.

 

3.9                                Late Charges

 

Borrowers shall pay, upon billing therefor, a “ Late Charge ” equal to three percent (3%) of the amount of any payment of principal (other than principal due at the Warehousing Maturity Date or the date on which Credit Agent accelerates the time for payment of the Loan after the occurrence of an Event of Default), interest, or fees, which are not paid within ten (10) days of the due date thereof.  Late Charges are: (a) payable in addition to, and not in limitation of, the Default Rate; (b) intended to compensate Credit Agent and Lenders for administrative and processing costs incident to late payments; (c) not interest; and (d) not subject to refund or rebate or credit against any other amount due.

 

3.10                         Additional Provisions Relating to Interest Rate

 

3.10(a)                       If Credit Agent has determined, after the date hereof, that the adoption or the becoming effective of, or any change in, or any change by any governmental authority, central bank or comparable agency charged with the interpretation or administration thereof in the interpretation or administration of, any applicable law, rule or regulation regarding capital adequacy, or compliance by any Lender with any request or directive regarding capital adequacy (whether or not having the force of law) of any such authority, central bank or comparable agency, has or would have the effect of reducing the rate of return on such Lender’s capital or assets as a consequence of its commitments or obligations hereunder to a level below that which Lender could have achieved but for such adoption, effectiveness, change or compliance (taking into consideration Lender’s policies with respect to capital adequacy), then, upon notice from Credit Agent to Borrowers and delivery by Credit Agent of a statement setting forth the reduction in the rate of return experienced by the affected Lender and the amount necessary to compensate such Lender under this Section 3.10(a), Borrowers shall be obligated to pay to the affected Lender such additional amount or amounts as will compensate such Lender for such reduction.  Each determination by Credit Agent of amounts owing under this Section shall, absent manifest error, be conclusive and binding on the parties hereto.

 

3.10(b)                      If Credit Agent determines (which determination shall be conclusive) that (i) by reason of circumstances affecting the relevant market, adequate and reasonable means do not exist for ascertaining the Applicable Daily Floating LIBOR Rate for any day; or (ii) the BBA LIBOR Daily Floating Rate will not adequately and fairly reflect the cost to Lenders of funding (including maintaining) Warehousing Advances, then Credit Agent shall give Borrowers prompt notice thereof, and, so long as such condition remains in effect, the Loan (and all outstanding and future Warehousing Advances under the Loan) shall bear interest at the Applicable Base Rate.

 

3.10(c)                       Any and all payments by Borrowers to or for the account of Credit Agent and/or Lenders hereunder shall be made free and clear of and without deduction for any and all

 

3-6



 

present or future taxes, duties, levies, imposts, deductions, charges or withholdings, and all liabilities with respect thereto, excluding taxes imposed on Credit Agent’s or any Lender’s income, and franchise taxes imposed on it, by the jurisdiction under the laws of which Credit Agent and/or any Lender is organized or any political subdivision thereof (all such non-excluded taxes, duties, levies, imposts, deductions, charges, withholdings, and liabilities being hereinafter referred to as “ Taxes ”).  If either Borrower shall be required by law to deduct any Taxes from or in respect of any sum payable under this Agreement to Credit Agent and/or any Lender, (i) the sum payable shall be increased as necessary so that after making all required deductions (including deductions applicable to additional sums payable under this Section 3.10(c)) Credit Agent and Lenders receive an amount equal to the sum they would have received had no such deductions been made, (ii) the affected Borrower shall make such deductions, (iii) the affected Borrower shall pay the full amount deducted to the relevant taxation authority or other authority in accordance with applicable law, and (iv) the affected Borrower shall furnish to Credit Agent the original or a certified copy of a receipt evidencing payment thereof.

 

3.10(d)                      Borrowers also agree to pay any and all present or future stamp or documentary taxes and any other excise or property taxes or charges or similar levies which arise from any payment made under this Agreement or from the execution or delivery of, or otherwise with respect to, this Agreement (hereinafter referred to as “ Other Taxes ”).  Further, if either Borrower shall be required to deduct or pay any Taxes or Other Taxes from or in respect of any sum payable under this Agreement to Lender, Borrowers shall also pay to Credit Agent, at the time interest is paid, such additional amount that Credit Agent specifies is necessary to preserve the after-tax yield (after factoring in all taxes, including taxes imposed on or measured by net income) that Credit Agent and Lenders would have received if such Taxes or Other Taxes had not been imposed.

 

3.10(e)                       Borrowers agree to indemnify Credit Agent and each Lender for (i) the full amount of Taxes and Other Taxes (including, without limitation, any Taxes or Other Taxes imposed or asserted by any jurisdiction on amounts payable under this Section 3.10) paid by any of them and any liability (including penalties, interest, and expenses) arising therefrom or with respect thereto; (ii) any other amounts payable under Section 3.10; and (iii) any liability (including additions to tax, penalties, interest and expenses) arising therefrom or with respect thereto, in each case whether or not such Taxes or Other Taxes were correctly or legally imposed or asserted by the relevant Governmental Authority.  Payment under this Section 3.10(e) shall be made within 30 days after the date Credit Agent makes a demand therefor.

 

3.10(f)                         In the event that either Borrower is required to pay or withhold any amount pursuant to Sections 3.10(c), 3.10(d), or 3.10(e), which results in Borrowers paying more than would have been the case without regard to such Sections (an “ Excess Payment ”), Borrowers shall have the option to terminate the Warehousing Commitment in its entirety (but not in part) and this Agreement (other than as to those provisions which by their terms survive the termination of this Agreement), by giving Notice to Credit Agent specifying the effective date of such termination, which Notice may be given no earlier than three (3) Business Days after making an Excess Payment and no later than thirty

 

3-7



 

(30) days after making an Excess Payment.  Upon the effective date of the termination of this Agreement by Borrowers pursuant to this Section, Borrowers shall pay all of the Obligations in full.

 

3.10(g)                      Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained elsewhere in this Agreement, if (x) any change in law shall make it unlawful for any Lender to make Warehousing Advances as LIBOR Loans, or to maintain outstanding Warehousing Advances as LIBOR Loans or to give effect to its obligations as contemplated hereby with respect to the Loan or any particular Warehousing Advance as a LIBOR Loan or (y) at any time Credit Agent reasonably determines that the making or continuance of LIBOR Loans has become impracticable as a result of a contingency occurring after the date hereof which adversely affects the London interbank market, the Credit Agent , may, by written notice to Borrowers (i) declare that LIBOR Loans will not thereafter be made by any Lender hereunder, whereupon all subsequent Warehousing Advances will be made as Base Rate Loans unless such declaration shall be subsequently withdrawn; and/or (ii) require that any then outstanding Warehousing Advances be converted to Base Rate Loans (and thereby bear interest at the Applicable Base Rate), as of the effective date of such notice.

 

3.11                         Continuing Authority of Authorized Representatives

 

Credit Agent is authorized to rely upon the continuing authority of the Persons hereafter designated by Borrowers (“ Authorized Representatives ”) to bind Borrowers with respect to all matters pertaining to the Loan and the Loan Documents, including, but not limited to, the submission of requests for Warehousing Advances, and certificates with regard thereto, instructions with regard to the Operating Accounts and, to the extent permitted under this Agreement, the Collateral, and matters pertaining to the procedures and documentation for Warehousing Advances. Such authorization may be changed only upon written notice to Credit Agent accompanied by evidence, reasonably satisfactory to Credit Agent, of the authority of the person giving such notice and such notice shall be effective not sooner than five (5) Business Days following receipt thereof by Credit Agent. The Authorized Representatives as of the Closing Date are listed on Exhibit D . Credit Agent shall have a right of approval, not to be unreasonably withheld or delayed, over the identity of the Authorized Representatives so as to assure Credit Agent that each Authorized Representative is a responsible and senior official of the respective Borrowers.

 

End of Article 3

 

3-8



 

4.                                       COLLATERAL

 

4.1                                Grant of Security Interest

 

As security for the payment of their respective obligations under the Warehousing Notes and for the payment and performance of all of the Obligations, each Borrower grants a security interest to Credit Agent, as agent for the Lenders, in all of such Borrower’s right, title and interest in and to the following described property, whether now owned or whether acquired or arising after the date of this Agreement (“ Collateral ”):

 

4.1(a)                             All amounts advanced by Credit Agent or Lenders to or for the account of either Borrower under this Agreement to fund a Mortgage Loan until that Mortgage Loan is closed and those funds disbursed.

 

4.1(b)                            All Mortgage Loans, including all Mortgage Notes, Mortgages and Security Agreements evidencing or securing those Mortgage Loans, that are delivered or caused to be delivered to Credit Agent (including delivery to a third party on behalf of Credit Agent), or that otherwise come into the possession, custody or control of Credit Agent or any Lender (including the possession, custody or control of a third party on behalf of Credit Agent), in each case in respect of which Credit Agent or a Lender has made a Warehousing Advance under this Agreement, and with respect to any such Mortgage Loan that is a Special Fannie Mae Mortgage Loan, all of the subject Borrower’s right, title and interest in and to the subject Master Credit Facility Agreement and all Mortgage Notes and other agreements, documents and instruments executed and delivered in connection with, or otherwise relating to and referenced in the subject Master Credit Facility Agreement (collectively, “ Pledged Loans ”).

 

4.1(c)                             All Mortgage-backed Securities that are created in whole or in part on the basis of Pledged Loans or that are delivered or caused to be delivered to Credit Agent or that otherwise come into the possession, custody or control of Credit Agent or any Lender, or its agent, bailee or custodian as assignee, or that are pledged to Credit Agent or, for such purpose are registered by book-entry in the name of Credit Agent (including registration in the name of a third party on behalf of Credit Agent), in each case in respect of which a Warehousing Advance has been made by Credit Agent or a Lender under this Agreement (collectively, “ Pledged Securities ”).

 

4.1(d)                            All private mortgage insurance and all commitments issued by the FHA to insure or guarantee any Pledged Loan; all Purchase Commitments held by either Borrower covering Pledged Loans or Pledged Securities, and all proceeds from the sale of Pledged Loans or Pledged Securities to Investors pursuant to those Purchase Commitments; and all personal property, contract rights, servicing rights or contracts and servicing fees and income or other proceeds, amounts and payments payable to either Borrower as compensation or reimbursement, accounts, payments, intangibles and general intangibles of every kind relating to Pledged Loans, Pledged Securities, Purchase Commitments, FHA commitments and private mortgage insurance and commitments relating to Pledged Loans and Pledged Securities, and all other documents or instruments relating to Pledged Loans and Pledged Securities, including any interest

 

4-1



 

of either Borrower in any fire, casualty or hazard insurance policies and any awards made by any public body or decreed by any court of competent jurisdiction for a taking or for degradation of value in any eminent domain proceeding as the same relate to Pledged Loans.

 

4.1(e)                             All escrow accounts, documents, instruments, files, surveys, certificates, correspondence, appraisals, computer programs, tapes, discs, cards, accounting records (including all information, records, tapes, data, programs, discs and cards) necessary or helpful in the administration or servicing of the Collateral) and other information and data of either Borrower relating to the Collateral.

 

4.1(f)                               The Operating Accounts, the Cash Collateral Accounts, and all cash, whether now existing or acquired after the date of this Agreement, delivered to or otherwise in the possession of Credit Agent, any Lender, or Credit Agent’s or any Lender’s agent, bailee or custodian or designated on the books and records of either Borrower as assigned and pledged to Credit Agent and/or Lenders, including all cash deposited in the Cash Collateral Account.

 

4.1(g)                            All Hedging Arrangements related to the Collateral (“ Pledged Hedging Arrangements ”) and each Borrower’s accounts in which those Hedging Arrangements are held (“ Pledged Hedging Accounts ”), including all rights to payment arising under the Pledged Hedging Arrangements and the Pledged Hedging Accounts, except that Lender’s security interest in the Pledged Hedging Arrangements and Pledged Hedging Accounts applies only to benefits, including rights to payment, related to the Collateral.

 

4.1(h)                            All cash and non-cash proceeds of the Collateral, including all dividends, distributions and other rights in connection with, and all additions to, modifications of and replacements for, the Collateral, and all products and proceeds of the Collateral, together with whatever is receivable or received when the Collateral or proceeds of Collateral are sold, collected, exchanged or otherwise disposed of, whether such disposition is voluntary or involuntary, including all rights to payment with respect to any cause of action affecting or relating to the Collateral or proceeds of Collateral.

 

4.2                                Maintenance of Collateral Records

 

As long as the Warehousing Commitment is outstanding or there remain any Obligations to be paid or performed under this Agreement or under any other Loan Document, Borrowers must preserve and maintain, at their respective chief executive office and principal place of business or in a regional office approved by Credit Agent, or in the office of a computer service bureau engaged by the applicable Borrower and approved by Credit Agent and, upon request, make available to Credit Agent the originals, or copies in any case where the originals have been delivered to Credit Agent or to an Investor, of the Mortgage Notes, Mortgages and Security Agreements included in Pledged Loans, Mortgage-backed Securities delivered to Lender as Pledged Securities, Purchase Commitments, and all related Mortgage Loan documents and instruments, and all files, surveys, certificates, correspondence, appraisals, computer programs, tapes, discs, cards, accounting records and other information and data relating to the Collateral.

 

4-2


 

4.3                                Release of Security Interest in Pledged Loans and Pledged Securities

 

4.3(a)                             Except as provided in Section 4.3(b), Credit Agent will release its security interest in the Pledged Loans and all of the Collateral related to the Pledged Loans, as such Collateral is described in Sections 4.1(d) and 4.1(e), only against payment to Credit Agent of the Release Amount in connection with those Pledged Loans. If Pledged Loans are transferred to a pool custodian or an Investor for inclusion in a Mortgage Pool and Credit Agent’s security interest in the Pledged Loans and all of the Collateral related to the Pledged Loans, as such Collateral is described in Sections 4.1(d) and 4.1(e) included in the Mortgage Pool is not released before the issuance of the related Mortgage-backed Security, then that Mortgage-backed Security, when issued, is a Pledged Security, Lender’s security interest continues in the Pledged Loans and all of the Collateral related to the Pledged Loans, as such Collateral is described in Sections 4.1(d) and 4.1(e), backing that Pledged Security and Credit Agent is entitled to possession of the Pledged Security in the manner provided in this Agreement.

 

4.3(b)                            If Pledged Loans are transferred to an Approved Custodian and included in an Eligible Mortgage Pool, Credit Agent’s security interest in the Pledged Loans and all of the Collateral related to the Pledged Loans, as such Collateral is described in Sections 4.1(d) and 4.1(e), included in the Eligible Mortgage Pool will be released upon the delivery of the Agency Security to Credit Agent (including delivery to or registration in the name of a third party on behalf of Lender) and that Agency Security is a Pledged Security. Credit Agent’s security interest in that Pledged Security will be released only against payment to Credit Agent of the Release Amount in connection with the Mortgage Loans backing that Pledged Security.

 

4.3(c)                             Credit Agent has the exclusive right to possession of all Pledged Securities or, if Pledged Securities are issued in book-entry form or issued in certificated form and delivered to a clearing corporation (as that term is defined in the Uniform Commercial Code of Massachusetts) or its nominee, Credit Agent has the right to have the Pledged Securities registered in the name of a securities intermediary (as that term is defined in the Uniform Commercial Code of Massachusetts) in an account containing only customer securities and credited to an account of Credit Agent. Credit Agent has no duty or obligation to deliver Pledged Securities to an Investor or to credit Pledged Securities to the account of an Investor or an Investor’s designee except against payment for those Pledged Securities. Borrowers acknowledge that Credit Agent may enter into one or more standing arrangements with securities intermediaries with respect to Pledged Securities issued in book entry form or issued in certificated form and delivered to a clearing corporation or its designee, under which the Pledged Securities are registered in the name of the securities intermediary, and Borrowers agree, upon request of Credit Agent, to execute and deliver to those securities intermediaries their respective written concurrence in any such standing arrangements.

 

4.3(d)                            If no Default or Event of Default occurs, Borrowers may redeem a Pledged Loan and all of the Collateral related to the Pledged Loans, as such Collateral is described in Sections 4.1(d) and 4.1(e), or Pledged Security from Credit Agent’s security interest by notifying Credit Agent of its intention to redeem the Pledged Loan or Pledged Security from pledge and paying, or causing an Investor to pay, to Credit Agent, for application

 

4-3



 

as a prepayment on the principal balance of the Warehousing Note, the Release Amount in connection with the Pledged Loan or the Pledged Loans backing that Pledged Security.

 

4.3(e)                             After a Default or Event of Default occurs, Credit Agent may, with no liability to either Borrower or any other Person, continue to release its security interest in any Pledged Loan and all of the Collateral related to the Pledged Loans, as such Collateral is described in Sections 4.1(d) and 4.1(e), or Pledged Security against payment of the Release Amount for that Pledged Loan or for the Pledged Loans backing that Pledged Security.

 

4.3(f)                               The amount to be paid by Borrowers to obtain the release of Credit Agent’s security interest in a Pledged Loan and all of the Collateral related to the Pledged Loans, as such Collateral is described in Sections 4.1(d) and 4.1(e) (“ Release Amount ”) will be (1) in connection with the sale of a Pledged Loan by Credit Agent while an Event of Default exists, the amount paid to Credit Agent in a commercially reasonable disposition of that Pledged Loan and (2) otherwise, until an Event of Default occurs, the principal amount of the Warehousing Advance outstanding against the Pledged Loan.

 

4.4                                Collection and Servicing Rights

 

4.4(a)                             If no Event of Default exists, Borrowers may service and receive and collect directly all sums payable to Borrowers in respect of the Collateral other than proceeds of any Purchase Commitment or proceeds of the sale of any Collateral. All proceeds of any Purchase Commitment or any other sale of Collateral must be paid directly to the Cash Collateral Account for application as provided in this Agreement.

 

4.4(b)                            After an Event of Default, Credit Agent or its designee is entitled to service and receive and collect all sums payable to either Borrower in respect of the Collateral, and in such case, subject to any applicable requirements of Fannie Mae (1) Credit Agent or its designee in its discretion may, in its own name, in the name of Borrower or otherwise, demand, sue for, collect or receive any money or property at any time payable or receivable on account of or in exchange for any of the Collateral, but Credit Agent has no obligation to do so, (2) Borrower must, if Credit Agent requests it to do so, hold in trust for the benefit of Credit Agent and immediately pay to Credit Agent at its office designated by Notice, all amounts received by Borrower upon or in respect of any of the Collateral, advising Credit Agent as to the source of those funds, and (3) all amounts so received and collected by Credit Agent will be held by it as part of the Collateral and applied by Credit Agent as provided in this Agreement.  Notwithstanding the foregoing, no such rights may be exercised while any obligations are outstanding under the GPFA Term Loan, and such rights in any event shall be junior and subordinate to the GPFA Term Loan.

 

4.5                                Return of Collateral at End of Warehousing Commitment

 

If (a) the Warehousing Commitment has expired or has been terminated, and (b) no Warehousing Advances, interest or other Obligations are outstanding and unpaid, Credit Agent will release its security interest and will deliver all Collateral in its possession to the applicable Borrower at

 

4-4



 

such Borrower’s expense. A Borrower’s acknowledgement or receipt for any Collateral released or delivered to such Borrower under any provision of this Agreement is a complete and full acquittance for the Collateral so returned, and Credit Agent and Lenders are discharged from any liability or responsibility for that Collateral.

 

4.6                                Delivery of Collateral Documents

 

4.6(a)                             Credit Agent may deliver documents relating to the Collateral to a Borrower for correction or completion under a Trust Receipt.

 

4.6(b)                            If no Default or Event of Default exists, upon delivery by a Borrower to Credit Agent of shipping instructions pursuant to the applicable Exhibit B , Credit Agent will deliver the Mortgage Notes evidencing Pledged Loans or Pledged Securities together with all related loan documents and pool documents previously received by Credit Agent under the requirements of the applicable Exhibit B to the designated Investor or Approved Custodian or to another party designated by such Borrower and acceptable to Credit Agent in its sole discretion.

 

4.6(c)                             If a Default or Event of Default exists, Credit Agent may, without liability to either Borrower or any other Person, continue to deliver Pledged Loans or Pledged Securities, together with all related loan documents and pool documents in Credit Agent’s possession, to the applicable Investor or Approved Custodian or to another party acceptable to Credit Agent in its sole discretion.

 

4.7                                Borrowers Remain Liable

 

Anything herein to the contrary notwithstanding, each Borrower shall remain liable under each item of the Collateral granted by it to observe and perform all the conditions and obligations to be observed and performed by it thereunder, all in accordance with the terms thereof and any other agreement giving rise thereto, and in accordance with and pursuant to the terms and provisions thereof. Whether or not the Credit Agent has exercised any rights in any of the Collateral, neither the Credit Agent nor any Lender shall have any obligation or liability (other than for gross negligence or willful misconduct) under any of the Collateral (or any agreement giving rise thereto) by reason of or arising out of this Agreement or the receipt by the Credit Agent of any payment relating thereto, nor shall the Credit Agent nor any Lender be obligated in any manner to perform any of the obligations of a Borrower under or pursuant to any of the Collateral (or any agreement giving rise thereto) to make any payment, to make any inquiry as to the nature or the sufficiency of any payment received by it or as to the sufficiency of any performance by any party under any of the Collateral (or any agreement giving rise thereto), to present or file any claim, to take any action to enforce any performance or to collect the payment of any amounts which may have been assigned to it or to which it may be entitled at any time or times.

 

End of Article 4

 

4-5



 

5.                                       CONDITIONS PRECEDENT

 

5.1                                Initial Advance

 

The effectiveness of this Agreement is subject to the satisfaction, in the sole discretion of Credit Agent, of the following conditions precedent:

 

5.1(a)                             Credit Agent must receive the following, all of which must be satisfactory in form and content to Credit Agent, in its sole discretion:

 

(1)                                   The Fee Letters, the Warehousing Notes respectively payable to each Lender, and this Agreement, duly executed by the Borrowers.

 

(2)                                   Each Borrower’s organizational documents, certified as true and complete by an appropriate officer or other Person.

 

(3)                                   Certificates of legal existence and good standing from the District of Columbia for GPF and the Secretary of State of Delaware for W&D, dated within thirty (30) days of the date of this Agreement.

 

(4)                                   Such certificates of resolutions or other action, incumbency certificates and/or other certificates of responsible officers of each Borrower as Credit Agent may require evidencing (A) the authority of each Borrower to enter into this Agreement and the other Loan Documents to which such Borrower is a party and (B) the identity, authority and capacity of each Authorized Representative thereof authorized to act as an Authorized Representative in connection with this Agreement and the other Loan Documents to which such Borrower is a party.

 

(5)                                   Assumed Name Certificates dated within 30 days of the date of this Agreement for any assumed name used by Borrower in the conduct of its business.

 

(6)                                   Uniform Commercial Code, tax lien and judgment searches of the appropriate public records for each Borrower that do not disclose the existence of any Lien on the Collateral other than in favor of Credit Agent.

 

(7)                                   Copies of each Borrower’s errors and omissions insurance policy or mortgage impairment insurance policy, and blanket bond coverage policy, or certificates in lieu of policies, showing compliance by such Borrower as of the date of this Agreement with the related provisions of Section 7.9.

 

(8)                                   Receipt by Credit Agent and Lenders of any fees due on the date of this Agreement pursuant to the Fee Letters.

 

(9)                                   An opinion from counsel for each Borrower in form and substance satisfactory to Credit Agent concerning, among other matters (i) the legal existence, good standing and qualification to business of each Borrower, (ii) the power and

 

5-1



 

authority of each Borrower to enter into and perform the Loan Documents to which it is a party, (iv) the authorization of the individuals executing and delivering Loan Documents on behalf of each Borrower to do so, (v) the enforceability of each Borrower’s obligations under the Loan Documents, (vi) the absence of any pending or threatened material litigation against either Borrower, (vii) the validity and perfection of Credit Agent’s Lender’s security interest in the Collateral, (viii) the non-contravention of Borrowers’ obligations under the Loan Documents under the Borrowers’ charter documents or under any agreements or legal proceedings to which either of them is a party or by which either of them is bound, and (ix) such other matters as Credit Agent reasonably shall request consistent with loan facilities similar to the loan facility established by this Agreement.

 

(10)                             Copies of such documentation concerning Borrower’s status as a DUS lender as Credit Agent shall request, including any amendments to the W&D Fannie Mae DUS Agreements entered into subject to the Existing Agreement.

 

(11)                             Copies of such documentation concerning W&D’s status as a Freddie Mac Program Plus seller and servicer, if applicable, as Credit Agent shall request, including all amendments to any such documents entered into subsequent to the Existing Agreement.

 

(12)                             Such financial statements and other information as Credit Agent shall have reasonably requested.

 

(13)                             Such other documents as Credit Agent reasonably may require, duly executed and delivered, and evidence satisfactory to Credit Agent of the occurrence of any further conditions precedent to the closing of the credit facility established hereby.

 

5.1(b)                            If, as of the date of this Agreement, either Borrower has any indebtedness for borrowed money to any of its partners or Affiliates or any director, officer, member, or shareholder of any partner or any Affiliate of any partner, the Person to whom such Borrower is indebted must have executed a subordination of debt agreement, on the form prescribed by Credit Agent (each, a “ Subordination of Debt Agreement ”); and Credit Agent must have received an executed copy of that Subordination of Debt Agreement, certified an Authorized Representative to be true and complete and in full force and effect as of the date of the Closing Date.

 

5.1(c)                             Credit Agent shall have filed such Uniform Commercial Code financing statements, in such jurisdictions, as Credit Agent shall have determined to be appropriate in order to perfect the security interest in the Collateral granted by Borrower pursuant to this Agreement or any other Loan Document.

 

5.1(d)                            No Defaults or Events of Default shall have occurred and be continuing under the Existing Agreement (as such terms are defined therein), and the representations and warranties of the Borrowers thereunder shall be true, correct and complete (except as to

 

5-2



 

matters which speak to a specific date, or changes specifically contemplated and permitted by the Existing Agreement).

 

5.1(e)                             Borrowers shall have (i) paid to the Credit Agent and Lenders, as applicable, all amounts due as of the Closing Date pursuant to any Fee Letters, and (ii) paid or reimbursed the Credit Agent and the Lenders for all their respective attorneys’ fees and expenses incurred in connection with this Agreement and the other Loan Documents.

 

5.2                                Each Advance

 

The effectiveness of this Agreement, including each Lender’s obligation to make Warehousing Advances is subject to the satisfaction, in the sole discretion of Credit Agent, as of the date of each Warehousing Advance, of the following additional conditions precedent:

 

5.2(a)                             A Borrower must have delivered to Credit Agent the Warehousing Advance Request and the Collateral Documents required by, and must have satisfied the procedures and substantive requirements set forth in, Article 2 and the Exhibits described in that Article. All items delivered to Credit Agent must be satisfactory to Credit Agent in form and content, and Credit Agent may reject any item that does not satisfy the requirements of this Agreement or the applicable Purchase Commitment.

 

5.2(b)                            Credit Agent must have received evidence satisfactory to it as to the making or continuation of any book entry or the due filing and recording in all appropriate offices of all financing statements and other instruments necessary to perfect the security interest of Credit Agent in the Collateral under the Uniform Commercial Code or other applicable law.

 

5.2(c)                             The representations and warranties of Borrowers contained in Article 6 and Article 9 must be accurate and complete in all material respects as if made on and as of the date of each Warehousing Advance.

 

5.2(d)                            Borrowers must have performed all agreements to be performed by them under this Agreement, and after giving effect to the requested Warehousing Advance, no Default or Event of Default will exist under this Agreement.

 

5.2(e)                             Except with respect to GPF as contemplated by the Transaction Documents, there shall not have been any material adverse change in the financial condition, business, or affairs of either Borrower since the date of this Agreement which in Credit Agent’s good faith judgment may jeopardize in a material manner the ability of either Borrower to perform fully its obligations under each applicable Loan Document.

 

5.2(f)                               Credit Agent shall have received and approved such other documents, and certificates as Credit Agent reasonably may request, in form and substance reasonably satisfactory to Credit Agent.

 

5.2(g)                            Prior to any Warehousing Advance being made against any otherwise Eligible Loan, W&D shall have provided to Credit Agent copies of all documents, agreements and other materials and information concerning W&D’s status as an originator and seller of

 

5-3



 

such type of Mortgage Loan for the applicable Federal Agency as Credit Agent may require.

 

Delivery of a Warehousing Advance Request by a Borrower will be deemed a representation by the Borrowers that all conditions set forth in this Section have been satisfied as of the date of the Warehousing Advance.

 

5.3                                New Fannie Mae Special Program Agreements

 

With the prior written consent of Credit Agent and Required Lenders, Borrowers may amend Exhibit E to add a new Master Credit Facility Agreement. An amendment to Exhibit E is not effective, and Lenders have no obligation to make Warehousing Advances against Special Fannie Mae Mortgage Loans under any new Master Credit Facility Agreement, until Borrowers have satisfied the following conditions precedent (in addition to satisfy all other applicable requirements of this Agreement):

 

5.3(a)                             The representations and warranties of Borrowers contained in Article 6 must be accurate and complete in all material respects as if made on and as of the date of, and after giving effect to, the amendment to Exhibit E .

 

5.3(b)                            If requested by Credit Agent, Credit Agent must receive from counsel for Borrowers an updated opinion, in form and substance satisfactory to Credit Agent, addressed to Credit Agent and Lenders and dated the date of the amendment to Exhibit E , covering such matters relating to the Master Credit Facility Agreement and related documents as Lender may reasonably request.

 

5.4                                Force Majeure

 

Notwithstanding Borrowers’ satisfaction of the conditions set forth in this Agreement, Lenders have no obligation to make a Warehousing Advance if Credit Agent or any Lender is prevented from obtaining the funds necessary to make a Warehousing Advance, or is otherwise prevented from making a Warehousing Advance as a result of any fire, flood or other casualty, failure of power, strike, lockout or other labor trouble, banking moratorium, embargo, sabotage, confiscation, condemnation, riot, civil disturbance, insurrection, act of terrorism, war or other activity of armed forces, act of God or other similar reason beyond the control of Credit Agent or any Lender. Lenders will make the requested Warehousing Advance as soon as reasonably possible following the occurrence of such an event (provided that all applicable terms and conditions relating to such Warehousing Advance continue to be satisfied).

 

End of Article 5

 

5-4



 

6.                                       GENERAL REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES

 

Borrowers represent and warrant to Credit Agent and Lenders, as of the date of this Agreement and as of the date of each Warehousing Advance Request and the making of each Warehousing Advance, that:

 

6.1                                Place of Business

 

Each Borrower’s chief executive office and principal place of business is 7501 Wisconsin Avenue, Suite 1200, Bethesda, MD, 20814-6531.

 

6.2                                Organization; Good Standing; Subsidiaries

 

GPF is a limited partnership duly organized, validly existing and in good standing under the laws of the District of Columbia, W&D is a limited liability company duly organized, validly existing and in good standing under the laws of the State of Delaware, and each has the full legal power and authority to own its property and to carry on its business as currently conducted. Borrowers are duly qualified respectively as a foreign limited partnership and foreign limited liability company to do business and are in good standing in each jurisdiction in which the transaction of its business makes qualification necessary, except in jurisdictions, if any, where a failure to be in good standing has no material adverse effect on such Borrower’s business, operations, assets or financial condition as a whole. For the purposes of this Agreement, good standing includes qualification for all licenses and payment of all taxes required in the jurisdiction of its formation and in each jurisdiction in which the applicable Borrower transacts business. Exhibit K hereto sets forth all foreign qualifications and mortgage lender and mortgage servicer licenses held by each Borrower.  Neither Borrower has any Subsidiaries except as set forth on Exhibit F , which sets forth with respect to each Subsidiary, its name, address, jurisdiction of organization, each state in which it is qualified to do business and the percentage ownership of its Equity Interests by the applicable Borrower. Each of such Subsidiaries is duly organized, validly existing and in good standing under the laws of the jurisdiction of its organization, and has the full legal power and authority to own its property and to carry on its business as currently conducted.

 

6.3                                Authorization and Enforceability

 

Each Borrower has the power and authority to execute, deliver and perform this Agreement, the Warehousing Notes and the other Loan Documents to which such Borrower is a party and to make the borrowings under this Agreement. The execution, delivery and performance by each Borrower of this Agreement, the Warehousing Notes and the other Loan Documents to which such Borrower is party and the making of the borrowings under this Agreement, and the Warehousing Notes, have been duly and validly authorized by all necessary limited partnership or limited liability company action, as applicable, on the part of such Borrower (none of which actions has been modified or rescinded, and all of which actions are in full force and effect) and do not and will not conflict with or violate any provision of law, of any judgments binding upon such Borrower, or of the certificate of limited partnership or partnership agreement of GPF or the certificate of formation or operating agreement of W&D, conflict with or result in a breach of, constitute a default or require any consent under, or result in or require the acceleration of any

 

6-1



 

indebtedness of either Borrower under any agreement, instrument or indenture to which such Borrower is a party or by which either Borrower or its property may be bound or affected, or result in the creation of any Lien upon any property or assets of either Borrower (other than the Lien on the Collateral granted under this Agreement). This Agreement, the Warehousing Notes and the other Loan Documents to which either Borrower is a party constitute the legal, valid and binding obligations of such Borrower, enforceable in accordance with their respective terms, except that enforceability may be limited by bankruptcy, insolvency or other such laws affecting the enforcement of creditors’ rights and general principles of equity.

 

6.4                                Approvals

 

The execution and delivery of this Agreement, the Warehousing Notes and the other Loan Documents and the performance of Borrowers’ obligations under this Agreement, the Warehousing Note and the other Loan Documents and the validity and enforceability of this Agreement, the Warehousing Notes and the other Loan Documents do not require any license, consent, approval or other action of any agency, commission, instrumentality or other regulatory body or authority (in each case, whether federal, state or local, domestic or foreign) other than those that have been obtained and remain in full force and effect.

 

6.5                                Financial Condition

 

The balance sheet of GPF (and, if applicable, GPF’s Subsidiaries) as of each Statement Date, and the related statements of income, cash flows and changes in partners’ equity for the fiscal period ended on each Statement Date, furnished to Credit Agent and Lenders, fairly present the financial condition of GPF (and, if applicable, GPF’s Subsidiaries) as at that Statement Date and the results of its operations for the fiscal period ended on that Statement Date. GPF had, on each Statement Date, no known material liabilities, direct or indirect, fixed or contingent, matured or unmatured, or liabilities for taxes, long-term leases or unusual forward or long-term commitments not disclosed by, or reserved against in, those financial statements, and at the present time there are no material unrealized or anticipated losses from any loans, advances or other commitments of GPF except as previously disclosed to Credit Agent and Lenders in writing. Those financial statements were prepared in accordance with GAAP applied on a consistent basis throughout the periods involved. Except as completed pursuant to the Transaction Documents, (a) since the Audited Statement Date, there has been no material adverse change in the business, operations, assets or financial condition of GPF (and, if applicable, GPF’s Subsidiaries), nor (b) is GPF aware of any state of facts that (with or without notice or lapse of time or both) would or could result in any such material adverse change.  All schedules and reports furnished by GPF to Credit Agent and/or any Lender, including, without limitation, schedules of contingent liabilities and off balance sheet transactions, were true, accurate and complete, and did not omit any information necessary in order to make any provided information not misleading in any material respect.

 

6.6                                Litigation

 

As of the date hereof, there are no actions, claims, suits or proceedings pending or, to either Borrower’s knowledge, threatened or reasonably anticipated against or affecting either Borrower or any Subsidiary of either Borrower in any court or before any arbitrator or before any agency,

 

6-2



 

board, bureau, commission, instrumentality or other administrative or regulatory body (in each case, whether federal, state or local, domestic or foreign) that, if adversely determined, may reasonably be expected to result in a material adverse change in either Borrower’s business, operations, assets or financial condition as a whole, or that would affect the validity or enforceability of this Agreement, the Warehousing Notes or any other Loan Document.

 

6.7                                Compliance with Laws

 

Neither Borrower nor any Subsidiary of either Borrower is in violation of any provision of any law, or of any judgment, award, rule, regulation, order, decree, writ or injunction of any court or public regulatory body or authority that could result in a material adverse change in either Borrower’s business, operations, assets or financial condition as a whole or that would affect the validity or enforceability of this Agreement, the Warehousing Notes or any other Loan Document.

 

6.8                                Regulation U

 

Neither Borrower is engaged principally, or as one of its important activities, in the business of extending credit for the purpose of purchasing or carrying Margin Stock, and no part of the proceeds of any Warehousing Advance made under this Agreement will be used to purchase or carry any Margin Stock or to extend credit to others for the purpose of purchasing or carrying any Margin Stock.

 

6.9                                Investment Company Act

 

Neither Borrower is an “investment company” or controlled by an “investment company” within the meaning of the Investment Company Act.

 

6.10                         Payment of Taxes

 

GPF and each of its Subsidiaries has filed or caused to be filed all federal, state and local income, excise, property and other tax returns that are required to be filed with respect to the operations of GPF and its Subsidiaries, all such returns are true and correct and GPF and each of its Subsidiaries has paid or caused to be paid all taxes shown on those returns or on any assessment, to the extent that those taxes have become due, including all FICA payments and withholding taxes, if appropriate. The amounts reserved as a liability for income and other taxes payable in the financial statements described in Section 6.5 are sufficient for payment of all unpaid federal, state and local income, excise, property and other taxes, whether or not disputed, of GPF and its Subsidiaries accrued for or applicable to the period and on the dates of those financial statements and all years and periods prior to those financial statements and for which Borrower and its Subsidiaries may be liable in their own right or as transferee of the assets of, or as successor to, any other Person. No tax Liens have been filed and no material claims are being asserted against GPF, any Subsidiary of GPF or any property of GPF or any Subsidiary of GPF with respect to any taxes, fees or charges.

 

6-3


 

6.11                         Agreements

 

Other than the Transaction Documents, neither Borrower nor any Subsidiary of either Borrower is a party to any agreement, instrument or indenture or subject to any restriction materially and adversely affecting its business, operations, assets or financial condition, except as disclosed in the financial statements described in Section 6.5. Neither Borrower nor any Subsidiary of either Borrower is in default in the performance, observance or fulfillment of any of the obligations, covenants or conditions contained in any agreement, instrument, or indenture which default could result in a material adverse change in either Borrower’s business, operations, assets or financial condition as a whole. No holder of any indebtedness of either Borrower or of any of their respective Subsidiaries has given notice of any asserted default under that indebtedness, and no liquidation or dissolution of either Borrower or of any of their respective Subsidiaries and no receivership, insolvency, bankruptcy, reorganization or other similar proceedings relative to either Borrower or of any of their respective Subsidiaries or any of its or their properties is pending or to the knowledge of either Borrower, threatened.

 

6.12                         Title to Properties

 

Each Borrower and each Subsidiary of each Borrower has good, valid, insurable and (in the case of real property) marketable title to all of its properties and assets (whether real or personal, tangible or intangible) reflected on the financial statements described in Section 6.5, except for those properties and assets that a Borrower has disposed of since the date of those financial statements either in the ordinary course of business or because they were no longer used or useful in the conduct of such Borrower’s or Subsidiary’s business. All of Borrowers’ properties and assets are free and clear of all Liens except as disclosed in Borrowers’ financial statements (or in the Base Line Projections, in the case of W&D).

 

6.13                         ERISA

 

Each Plan is in compliance with all applicable requirements of ERISA and the Internal Revenue Code and with all material applicable rulings and regulations issued under the provisions of ERISA and the Internal Revenue Code setting forth those requirements, except where any failure to comply would not result in a material loss to either Borrower or any ERISA Affiliate. All of the minimum funding standards or other contribution obligations applicable to each Plan have been satisfied. No Plan is a Multiemployer Plan or a defined-benefit pension plan subject to Title IV of ERISA.

 

6.14                         No Retiree Benefits

 

Except as required under Section 4980B of the Internal Revenue Code, Section 601 of ERISA or applicable state law, neither Borrower nor any Subsidiary of either Borrower is obligated to provide post-retirement medical or insurance benefits with respect to employees or former employees.

 

6.15                         Assumed Names

 

Neither Borrower originates Mortgage Loans or otherwise conducts business under any names other than its legal name and the assumed names set forth on Exhibit G . Borrowers have made all

 

6-4



 

filings and taken all other action as may be required under the laws of any jurisdiction in which each respectively originates Mortgage Loans or otherwise conducts business under any assumed name. Borrowers’ use of the assumed names set forth on Exhibit G does not conflict with any other Person’s legal rights to any such name, nor otherwise give rise to any liability by either Borrower to any other Person. Borrowers may amend Exhibit G to add or delete any assumed names used by a Borrower to conduct business. An amendment to Exhibit G to add an assumed name is not effective until a Borrower has delivered to Credit Agent an assumed name certificate in the jurisdictions in which the assumed name is to be used, which must be satisfactory in form and content to Credit Agent in its sole discretion.  In connection with any amendment to delete a name from Exhibit G , the affected Borrower represents and warrants that it has ceased using that assumed name in all jurisdictions.

 

6.16                         Servicing

 

Exhibit H is a true and complete list of each Borrower’s Servicing Portfolio as of July 31, 2009. All of Borrowers’ Servicing Contracts are in full force and effect, and are unencumbered by Liens other than pursuant to the GPFA Term Loan. No event of default or event that, with notice or lapse of time or both, would become an event of default, exists under any of Borrowers’ Servicing Contracts.

 

6.17                         Foreign Asset Control Regulations.

 

Neither the making of the Warehousing Advances nor the use of the proceeds of any thereof (or any other Loan)  will violate the Trading With the Enemy Act (50 U.S.C. § 1 et seq., as amended) (the “ Trading With the Enemy Act ”) or any of the foreign assets control regulations of the United States Treasury Department (31 CFR, Subtitle B, Chapter V, as amended) (the “ Foreign Assets Control Regulations ”) or any enabling legislation or executive order relating thereto (which for the avoidance of doubt shall include, but shall not be limited to (a) Executive Order 13224 of September 21, 2001 Blocking Property and Prohibiting Transactions With Persons Who Commit, Threaten to Commit, or Support Terrorism (66 Fed. Reg. 49079 (2001)) (the “ Executive Order ”) and (b) the Uniting and Strengthening America by Providing Appropriate Tools Required to Intercept and Obstruct Terrorism Act of 2001 (Public Law 107-56).  Furthermore, none of the Borrowers or their Affiliates (a) is or will become a “blocked person” as described in the Executive Order, the Trading With the Enemy Act or the Foreign Assets Control Regulations or (b) engages or will engage in any dealings or transactions, or be otherwise associated, with any such “blocked person.”

 

End of Article 6

 

6-5



 

7.                                       AFFIRMATIVE COVENANTS

 

As long as the Warehousing Commitment is outstanding or there remain any Obligations to be paid or performed under this Agreement or under any other Loan Document, Borrowers must, unless Credit Agent and the Required Lenders (or all of the Lenders, if required pursuant to Section 11.14(a)) consent in writing:

 

7.1                                Payment of Obligations

 

Punctually pay or cause to be paid all Obligations, including the Obligations payable under this Agreement and the Warehousing Notes, in accordance with their terms.

 

7.2                                Financial Statements

 

Deliver to Credit Agent, in form and detail reasonably satisfactory to Credit Agent:

 

7.2(a)                             As soon as available and in any event within one hundred twenty (120) days after the end of each fiscal year of W&D, audited fiscal year-end statements of income and cash flows of W&D for that year, and the related audited balance sheet as of the end of that year (setting forth in comparative form the corresponding figures for the preceding fiscal year), all in reasonable detail and accompanied by (1) an opinion as to those financial statements in form and substance reasonably satisfactory to Credit Agent and prepared by an independent  certified public accounting firm reasonably acceptable to Credit Agent (it being acknowledged by Credit Agent that KPMG currently is an acceptable independent certified public accounting firm) and (2) if then available or otherwise within fifteen (15) days of receipt by W&D, any management letters, management reports or other supplementary comments or reports delivered by those accountants to W&D or its governing board, body, manager, general partner, or the like;

 

7.2(b)                            As soon as available and in any event within sixty (60) days after the end of each Fiscal Quarter of W&D, including its last Fiscal Quarter, interim statements of income of W&D, separately, and on a combining basis with Green Park, for that fiscal quarter and the period from the beginning of the fiscal year to end of that fiscal quarter, and the related balance sheet (including contingent liabilities) as at the end of that fiscal quarter, all in reasonable detail, subject, however, to year-end audit adjustments;

 

7.2(c)                             Together with each delivery of financial statements required by this Section, a Compliance Certificate substantially in the form of Exhibit I .

 

7.3                                Other Borrower Reports

 

Deliver to Credit Agent:

 

7.3(a)                             As soon as available and in any event within sixty (60) days after the end of each Calendar Quarter, a consolidated report (“ Servicing Portfolio Report ”) as of the end of the Calendar Quarter, as to all Mortgage Loans the servicing rights to which are owned by W&D, and separately for GPF during the Transition Services Period with respect

 

7-1



 

any servicing rights GPF owns and has not transferred to W&D (in each case, specified by investor type, recourse and non-recourse) regardless of whether the Mortgage Loans are Pledged Loans. The Servicing Portfolio Report must be in similar summary form as previously presented to Credit Agent (or as Credit Agent otherwise may agree), and must, at a minimum, indicate which Mortgage Loans (1) are current and in good standing, (2) are more than 30, 60 or 90 days past due, (3) are the subject of pending bankruptcy or foreclosure proceedings, or (4) have been converted (through foreclosure or other proceedings in lieu of foreclosure) into real estate owned by a Borrower, and include, by Mortgage Loan type (x) weighted average coupon, (y) weighted average maturity, and (z) weighted average servicing fee.

 

7.3(b)                            As soon as available and in any event within sixty (60) days after the end of each Calendar Quarter, a consolidated loan production report as of the end of that Calendar Quarter, presenting the total dollar volume and the number of Mortgage Loans originated and closed or purchased during that Calendar Quarter and for the fiscal year-to-date, specified by property type, loan type and Investor to whom each Mortgage Loan was sold.

 

7.3(c)                             Other reports in respect of Pledged Assets, including, without limitation, copies of purchase confirmations issued by Investors purchasing Pledged Loans from either Borrower, in such detail and at such times as Credit Agent in its discretion may reasonably request.

 

7.3(d)                            With reasonable promptness, all further information regarding the business, operations, assets or financial condition of either Borrower as Credit Agent may reasonably request, including copies of any audits completed by Fannie Mae, Freddie Mac, HUD, FHA or Ginnie Mae.

 

7.3(e)                             As soon as available and in any event within 30 days after the end of each Calendar Quarter, a report as of the end of such Calendar Quarter detailing all requests that either Borrower repurchase Mortgage Loans and the status of each such request and any indemnification or similar agreement to which either Borrower is a party in connection with any such request.

 

7.4                                Maintenance of Existence; Conduct of Business

 

Preserve and maintain its existence as a limited partnership as to GPF and a limited liability company as to W&D, in good standing and all of its rights, privileges, licenses and franchises necessary or desirable in the normal conduct of its business, including its eligibility as lender, seller/servicer or issuer as described under Section 9.1; conduct its business in an orderly and efficient manner; maintain a net worth of acceptable assets as required for maintaining Borrowers’ respective eligibility as lender, seller/servicer or issuer as described under Section 9.1; and make no material change in the nature or character of its business or engage in any business in which it was not engaged on the date of this Agreement, except as contemplated by the Transaction Documents.

 

7-2



 

7.5                                Compliance with Applicable Laws

 

Comply with the requirements of all applicable laws, rules, regulations and orders of any governmental authority, a breach of which could result in a material adverse change in Borrowers’ business, operations, assets, or financial condition as a whole or on the enforceability of this Agreement, the Warehousing Notes, any other Loan Document or any Collateral, except where contested in good faith and by appropriate proceedings.

 

7.6                                Inspection of Properties and Books; Operational Reviews

 

Permit Credit Agent, any Lender, and any Assignee or Participant (and their authorized representatives) to discuss the business, operations, assets and financial condition of Borrowers and their Subsidiaries with GPF’s General Partner, W&D’s senior officers, and other management officials, agents and employees, and to examine and make copies or extracts of Borrowers’ and their Subsidiaries’ books of account, all at such reasonable times as Credit Agent, any Lender, or any Participant may request. Provide their accountants with a copy of this Agreement promptly after its execution and authorize and instruct them to answer candidly all questions that the officers of Credit Agent, any Lender, or any Participant or any authorized representatives of Credit Agent, any Lender, or any Participant may address to them in reference to the financial condition or affairs of Borrowers and their Subsidiaries. Borrowers may have representatives in attendance at any meetings held between the officers or other representatives of Credit Agent, any Lender, or any Participant and Borrowers’ accountants under this authorization. Permit Credit Agent, any Lender, or any Participant (and their authorized representatives) access to Borrowers’ premises and records for the purpose of conducting a review of Borrowers’ general mortgage business methods, policies and procedures, auditing its loan files and reviewing the financial and operational aspects of Borrowers’ business.

 

7.7                                Notice

 

Give prompt Notice to Credit Agent of (a) any action, suit or proceeding instituted by or against either Borrower or any of their Subsidiaries or the General Partner in any federal or state court or before any agency, board, bureau, commission, instrumentality or other administrative or regulatory body (in each case, whether federal, state or local, domestic or foreign), which action, suit or proceeding has at issue in excess of $100,000, or any such proceedings threatened against either Borrower or any of their Subsidiaries or the General Partner in a writing containing the details of that action, suit or proceeding; (b) the filing, recording or assessment of any Lien for any federal, state or local taxes, assessments or other governmental charges against either Borrower, any of their assets or any of their Subsidiaries or the General Partner, other than a Lien for taxes, assessments or other governmental charges on real property securing or that previously secured an individual Mortgage Loan that is not a Pledged Loan; (c) an Event of Default; (d) a Default that continues for more than 4 days; (e) the suspension, revocation or termination of either Borrower’s eligibility, in any respect, as lender, seller/servicer or issuer as described under Section 9.1 or the suspension, revocation or termination of any other license or approval required for either Borrower to engage in the business of originating, acquiring and, if applicable, servicing Mortgage Loans; (f) the imposition of any other adverse regulatory or administrative action or sanction on or against either Borrower or the General Partner by any agency, board, bureau, commission, instrumentality or other administrative or regulatory body

 

7-3



 

(in each case, whether federal, state or local, domestic or foreign) that could result in a material adverse change in a Borrower’s business, operations, assets or financial condition as a whole or that could affect the validity or enforceability of any Pledged Asset; (g) the transfer, loss, nonrenewal or termination of any Servicing Contracts to which either Borrower is a party, or which is held for the benefit of either Borrower, and the reason for that transfer, loss, nonrenewal or termination; (h) any Prohibited Transaction with respect to any Plan, specifying the nature of the Prohibited Transaction and what action the subject Borrower proposes to take with respect to it; and (i) any other action, event or condition of any nature that could lead to or result in a material adverse change in the business, operations, assets or financial condition of either Borrower or any of their Subsidiaries or the General Partner.

 

7.8                                Payment of Debt, Taxes and Other Obligations

 

Pay, perform and discharge, or cause to be paid, performed and discharged, all of the obligations and indebtedness of Borrowers and their Subsidiaries, all taxes, assessments and governmental charges or levies imposed upon either Borrower or their Subsidiaries or upon their respective income, receipts or properties before those taxes, assessments and governmental charges or levies become past due, and all lawful claims for labor, materials and supplies or otherwise that, if unpaid, could become a Lien or charge upon any of their respective properties or assets. Borrowers and their Subsidiaries are not required to pay, however, any taxes, assessments and governmental charges or levies or claims for labor, materials or supplies for which such Borrower or its Subsidiaries have obtained an adequate bond or insurance or that are being contested in good faith and by proper proceedings that are being reasonably and diligently pursued and for which proper reserves have been created.

 

7.9                                Insurance

 

Maintain blanket bond coverage and errors and omissions insurance with such companies and in such amounts as satisfy prevailing requirements applicable to a lender, seller/servicer or issuer as described under Section 9.1, and liability insurance and fire and other hazard insurance on its properties, in each case with responsible insurance companies acceptable to Credit Agent, in such amounts and against such risks as is customarily carried by similar businesses operating in the same location. Within 30 days after Notice from Credit Agent, obtain such additional insurance as Credit Agent may reasonably require, all at the sole expense of Borrowers. Copies of such policies must be furnished to Credit Agent without charge upon request of Credit Agent.

 

7.10                         Closing Instructions

 

Indemnify and hold Credit Agent and each Lender harmless from and against any loss, including reasonable attorneys’ fees and costs, attributable to the failure of any title insurance company, agent or attorney to comply with a Borrower’s disbursement or instruction letter relating to any Mortgage Loan. Credit Agent has the right to pre-approve each Borrower’s choice of title insurance company, agent or attorney, unless already approved by Fannie Mae, Freddie Mac, or FHA, as applicable, and a Borrower’s disbursement or instruction letter to them in any case in which a Borrower intends to obtain a Warehousing Advance against the Mortgage Loan to be created at settlement or to pledge that Mortgage Loan as Collateral under this Agreement.

 

7-4



 

7.11                         Subordination of Certain Indebtedness

 

Cause any indebtedness of either Borrower for borrowed money to any partner or Affiliate or any member, shareholder, director or officer of any partner or Affiliate of such Borrower, to be subordinated to the Obligations by the execution and delivery to Credit Agent of a Subordination of Debt Agreement, on the form prescribed by Credit Agent, certified by the corporate secretary of the applicable Borrower to be true and complete and in full force and effect.

 

7.12                         Other Loan Obligations

 

Perform all material obligations under the terms of each loan agreement, note, mortgage, security agreement or debt instrument by which either Borrower is bound or to which any of its property is subject, and promptly notify Credit Agent in writing of a declared default under or the termination, cancellation, reduction or nonrenewal of any of its other lines of credit or agreements with any other lender. Exhibit J is a true and complete list of all such lines of credit or agreements as of the date of this Agreement. Borrowers must give Credit Agent and Lenders at least 30 days Notice before entering into any new lines of credit or agreements.

 

7.13                         ERISA

 

Maintain and cause each ERISA Affiliate to maintain each Plan in compliance with all material applicable requirements of ERISA and of the Internal Revenue Code and with all applicable rulings and regulations issued under the provisions of ERISA and of the Internal Revenue Code, and not, and not permit any ERISA Affiliate to, (a) engage in any transaction in connection with which a Borrower or any ERISA Affiliate would be subject to either a civil penalty assessed pursuant to Section 502(i) of ERISA or a tax imposed by Section 4975 of the Internal Revenue Code, in either case in an amount exceeding $25,000 or (b) fail to make full payment when due of all amounts that, under the provisions of any Plan, a Borrower or any ERISA Affiliate is required to pay as contributions to that Plan, or permit to exist any accumulated funding deficiency (as such term is defined in Section 302 of ERISA and Section 412 of the Internal Revenue Code), whether or not waived, with respect to any Plan in an aggregate amount exceeding $25,000.

 

7.14                         Use of Proceeds of Warehousing Advances

 

Use the proceeds of each Warehousing Advance solely for the purpose of funding Eligible Loans and against the pledge of those Eligible Loans as Collateral.

 

End of Article 7

 

7-5



 

8.                                       NEGATIVE COVENANTS

 

As long as the Warehousing Commitment is outstanding or there remain any Obligations to be paid or performed, Borrowers must not, either directly or indirectly, without the prior written consent of Credit Agent and Required Lenders (or all of the Lenders, if required pursuant to Section 11.14(a)):

 

8.1                                Contingent Liabilities

 

Assume, guarantee, endorse or otherwise become contingently liable for the obligation of any Person except (a) by endorsement of negotiable instruments for deposit or collection in the ordinary course of business and (b) for obligations arising in connection with the sale of Mortgage Loans with recourse in the ordinary course of a Borrower’s business.

 

8.2                                Restrictions on Fundamental Changes

 

8.2(a)                             Reorganize, spin-off, consolidate with, merge with or into, or enter into any analogous reorganization or transaction with any Person.

 

8.2(b)                            Amend or otherwise modify GPF’s certificate of limited partnership or partnership agreement, or W&D’s certificate of formation or operating agreement.

 

8.2(c)                             Liquidate, wind up or dissolve (or suffer any liquidation or dissolution).

 

8.2(d)                            Except as contemplated and permitted by the Transaction Documents, cease actively to engage in the business of originating or acquiring Mortgage Loans, or if applicable, servicing Mortgage Loans, or make any other material change in the nature or scope of the business in which a Borrower engages as of the date of this Agreement.

 

8.2(e)                             Sell, assign, lease, convey, transfer or otherwise dispose of (whether in one transaction or a series of transactions) all or any substantial part of a Borrower’s business or assets, whether now owned or acquired after the Closing Date, other than, in the ordinary course of business and to the extent not otherwise prohibited by this Agreement, sales of (1) Mortgage Loans, (2) Mortgage-backed Securities and (3) Servicing Contracts.

 

8.2(f)                               Acquire by purchase or in any other transaction all or substantially all of the business or property, or stock or other ownership interests of any Person.

 

8.2(g)                            Permit any Subsidiary of a Borrower to do or take any of the foregoing actions.

 

8.3                                Subsidiaries

 

Form or acquire, or permit any Subsidiary of a Borrower to form or acquire, any Person that would thereby become a Subsidiary.

 

8-1



 

8.4                                Deferral of Subordinated Debt

 

Pay any Subordinated Debt of a Borrower in advance of its stated maturity or, after a Default or Event of Default under this Agreement has occurred, make any payment of any kind on any Subordinated Debt of a Borrower until all of the Obligations have been paid and performed in full and any applicable preference period has expired.

 

8.5                                Loss of Eligibility, Licenses or Approvals

 

Take any action, or fail or omit to take any action, that would (a) cause a Borrower to lose all or any part of its status as an eligible lender, seller/servicer or issuer as described under Section 9.1 or all or any part of any other license or approval required for a Borrower to engage in the business of originating, acquiring and, if applicable, servicing Mortgage Loans or (b) result in the imposition of any other adverse regulatory or administrative action or sanction on or against a Borrower by any agency board, bureau, commission, instrumentality or other administrative or regulatory body (in each case, whether federal, state or local, domestic or foreign) that could result in a material adverse change in a Borrower’s business, operations, assets or financial condition as a whole or that could affect the validity or enforceability of any Pledged Loan.

 

8.6                                Accounting Changes

 

Make, or permit any Subsidiary of a Borrower to make, any significant change in accounting treatment or reporting practices, except as required by GAAP, or change its fiscal year or the fiscal year of any Subsidiary of a Borrower.  If any changes in GAAP would result in any material deviation in the method of calculating and results of testing compliance with any financial covenant hereunder, such financial covenant shall continue to be calculated and tested as if such change in GAAP had not occurred, unless otherwise specifically agreed in writing by Lender after full disclosure by Borrowers.

 

8.7                                Leverage Ratio

 

Permit W&D’s Leverage Ratio at any time to exceed 6 to 1.

 

8.8                                Minimum Tangible Net Worth

 

Permit W&D’s Adjusted Tangible Net Worth at any time to be less than the applicable amount set forth below as of the dates, and during the applicable periods, set forth below, to be tested as of such dates and on the last day of each Fiscal Quarter occurring during each applicable period, or otherwise not to be in compliance with applicable requirements of  HUD, Investors (including Freddie Mac) or Fannie Mae.

 

 

Specified Date and Period

 

Applicable
Minimum Amount

 

 

 

Closing Date to October 30, 2009

 

$

60,000,000

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

October 31, 2009 and thereafter

 

$

65,000,000

 

 

 

8-2



 

8.9                                Minimum Liquid Assets

 

Permit W&D’s Liquid Assets at any time to be less than the applicable amount set forth below as of the dates, and during the applicable periods, set forth below, to be tested as of the such dates and on the last day of each Fiscal Quarter occurring during each applicable period, or otherwise not to be in compliance with applicable requirements of  HUD, Investors (including Freddie Mac) or Fannie Mae.

 

 

Specified Date and Period

 

Applicable
Minimum Amount

 

 

 

Closing Date to October 30, 2009

 

$

6,000,000

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

October 31, 2009 and thereafter

 

$

7,000,000

 

 

 

8.10                         Servicing Delinquencies

 

Permit (i) the aggregate unpaid principal amount of Fannie Mae DUS Mortgage Loans comprising W&D’s Servicing Portfolio which are sixty (60) or more days past due or otherwise in default at any time to exceed two percent (2%) of the aggregate unpaid principal balance of all Fannie Mae DUS Mortgage Loans comprising W&D’s Servicing Portfolios at such time, or (ii) the aggregate unpaid principal amount of At Risk Mortgage Loans comprising W&D’s Servicing Portfolio which are sixty (60) or more days past due or otherwise in default to increase by more than one-half percent (.5%) from the last day of a Fiscal Quarter to the last day of the following Fiscal Quarter.

 

8.11                         Distributions to Partners

 

Make any distributions to a Borrower’s Partners (including any purchase or redemption of Equity Interests) if a Default or Event of Default exists or would occur as a result of the dividend or distribution.

 

8.12                         Transactions with Affiliates

 

Directly or indirectly (a) make any loan, advance, extension of credit or capital contribution to any of a Borrower’s Affiliates, (b) sell, transfer, pledge or assign any of its assets to or on behalf of those Affiliates, (c) merge or consolidate with or purchase or acquire assets from those Affiliates, or (d) pay management fees to or on behalf of those Affiliates, other than (i) payments attributable to reasonable overhead and administrative charges allocated to a Borrower by the Affiliates, (ii) reasonable subservicing fees payable to Affiliates for their servicing of the Servicing Portfolio, (iii) advances to Affiliates in an aggregate amount outstanding at any time not exceeding $250,000, made in accordance with current practices as described by the Borrowers to Credit Agent and Lenders, and (iv) loans from W&D to GPF pursuant to the specific provisions of Section 4.4.3 of the Operating Agreement.

 

8-3


 

8.13                         Recourse Servicing Contracts

 

Except for Servicing Contracts involving Fannie Mae DUS Mortgage Loans, and conduit originations for which Borrower notifies Lender under Section 7.3(e), acquire or enter into Servicing Contracts under which a Borrower must repurchase or indemnify the holder of the Mortgage Loans as a result of defaults on the Mortgage Loans at any time during the term of those Mortgage Loans.

 

End of Article 8

 

8-4



 

9.                                       SPECIAL REPRESENTATIONS, WARRANTIES AND COVENANTS CONCERNING COLLATERAL

 

9.1                                Special Representations and Warranties Concerning Eligibility as Seller/Servicer of Mortgage Loans

 

9.1(a)                             W&D represents and warrants to Credit Agent and Lenders, as of the date of this Agreement and as of the date of each Warehousing Advance Request and the making of each Warehousing Advance, that W&D is approved, qualified and in good standing as:

 

(1)                         A Fannie Mae-approved seller/servicer of Mortgage Loans, eligible to originate, purchase, hold, sell and service Mortgage Loans to be sold to Fannie Mae under the following programs:

 

(a)                                   Fannie Mae DUS Program; and

 

(b)                                  Fannie Mae Aggregation Program.

 

(2)                         A Freddie Mac Program Plus seller/servicer of Mortgage Loans.

 

9.1(b)                            Notwithstanding the foregoing, it is acknowledged, understood and agreed that W&D is in the process of obtaining its California mortgage lending license.  Until W&D obtains such license, Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac have each agreed to allow GPF to originate loans secured by properties located in the State of California under their respective programs referred to above, and sell those loans to W&D for subsequent purchase by Fannie Mae or Freddie Mac, as applicable, which arrangement between W&D and GPF is in accordance with applicable provisions of the Transition Services Agreement.

 

9.1(c)                             W&D represents and warrants to the Credit Agent and the Lenders that approval is currently pending for W&D to be: (i) an FHA/HUD approved mortgagee, (ii) a HUD MAP Lender, and (iii) a Ginnie Mae approved servicer.  W&D shall regularly keep Credit Agent and Lenders informed of the status of (and promptly notify the Credit Agent and Lenders of any material action with respect to) the foregoing approvals.

 

9.2                                Special Representations and Warranties Concerning Warehousing Collateral

 

Borrowers represents and warrants to Credit Agent and Lenders, as of the date of this Agreement and as of the date of each Warehousing Advance Request and the making of each Warehousing Advance, that:

 

9.2(a)                             Borrowers have not selected the Collateral in a manner so as to affect adversely Credit Agent’s or Lender’s interests.

 

9.2(b)                            A Borrower is the legal and equitable owner and holder, free and clear of all Liens (other than Liens granted under this Agreement), of the Pledged Loans and the Pledged Securities. All Pledged Loans, Pledged Securities and related Purchase Commitments have been duly authorized and validly issued to a Borrower, and all of the foregoing items of Collateral comply with all of the requirements of this Agreement, and have

 

9-1



 

been and will continue to be validly pledged or assigned to Lender, subject to no other Liens.

 

9.2(c)                             Borrowers have, and will continue to have, the full right, power and authority to pledge the Collateral pledged and to be pledged by it under this Agreement.

 

9.2(d)                            Each Mortgage Loan and each related document included in the Pledged Loans (1) has been duly executed and delivered by the parties to that Mortgage Loan and that related document, (2) has been made in compliance with all applicable laws, rules and regulations (including all laws, rules and regulations relating to usury), (3) is and will continue to be a legal, valid and binding obligation, enforceable in accordance with its terms, without setoff, counterclaim or defense in favor of the mortgagor under the Mortgage Loan or any other obligor on the Mortgage Note, (4) has not been modified, amended or any requirements of which waived, except in a writing that is part of the Collateral Documents, and (5) complies and will continue to comply with the terms of this Agreement, the related Purchase Commitment, and the standard practices of the applicable Federal Agency or Investor.

 

9.2(e)                             Each Pledged Loan is secured by a Mortgage on real property and improvements located in one of the states of the United States or the District of Columbia.

 

9.2(f)                               Each Pledged Loan has been closed or will be closed and funded with the Warehousing Advance made against it.

 

9.2(g)                            Except for FHA Construction Mortgage Loans and Special Fannie Mae Mortgage Loans, each Mortgage Loan has been fully advanced in the face amount of its Mortgage Note.

 

9.2(h)                            Each Pledged Loan is a First Mortgage Loan, unless permitted to be a Subordinate Mortgage Loan under Exhibit C (in which case such Pledged Loan may only be a Second Mortgage Loan or a Third Mortgage Loan).

 

9.2(i)                                Each First Mortgage Loan is secured by a First Mortgage on the real property and improvements described in or covered by that Mortgage.

 

9.2(j)                                Each First Mortgage Loan has or will have a title insurance policy, in ALTA form or equivalent, from a recognized title insurance company, insuring the priority of the Lien of the Mortgage and meeting the usual requirements of Investors purchasing those Mortgage Loans.

 

9.2(k)                             The real property securing each Pledged Loan has been evaluated or appraised in accordance with Title Xl of FIRREA, USPAP, and the requirements of the applicable Federal Agency or Investor.

 

9.2(l)                                Each Subordinate Mortgage Loan (to the extent Subordinate Mortgage Loans are permitted by Exhibit C ) is a Second Mortgage Loan or a Third Mortgage Loan on the premises described in that Mortgage.  With respect to each Second Mortgage Loan and Third Mortgage Loan, a Borrower shall be the servicer, and the lender with respect to

 

9-2



 

such Second Mortgage Loan and Third Mortgage Loan shall also be the lender with respect to the senior Mortgage Loan on such Property.

 

9.2(m)                          To the extent required by the related Purchase Commitment or by Investors generally for similar Mortgage Loans, each Subordinate Mortgage Loan has or will have a title insurance policy, in ALTA form or equivalent, from a recognized title insurance company, insuring the priority of the Lien of the Mortgage and meeting the usual requirements of Investors purchasing those Mortgage Loans.

 

9.2(n)                            The Mortgage Note for each Pledged Loan is (1) payable or endorsed to the order of a Borrower, (2) an “instrument” within the meaning of Article 9 of the Uniform Commercial Code of all applicable jurisdictions and (3) is denominated and payable in United States dollars.

 

9.2(o)                            No default exists under any Mortgage Loan when such Mortgage Loan first is included as a Pledged Loans, and no default has existed for 60 days or more under any such Mortgage Loan at any time thereafter.

 

9.2(p)                            No party to a Mortgage Loan or any related document is in violation of any applicable law, rule or regulation that would impair the collectability of the Mortgage Loan or the performance by the mortgagor or any other obligor of his or her obligations under the Mortgage Note or any related document.

 

9.2(q)                            All fire and casualty policies covering the real property and improvements encumbered by each Mortgage included in the Pledged Loans (1) name and will continue to name Borrower and its successors and assigns as the insured under a standard mortgagee clause, (2) are and will continue to be in full force and effect and (3) afford and will continue to afford insurance against fire and such other risks as are usually insured against in the broad form of extended coverage insurance generally available.

 

9.2(r)                               Pledged Loans secured by real property and improvements located in a special flood hazard area designated as such by the Director of the Federal Emergency Management Agency are and will continue to be covered by special flood insurance under the National Flood Insurance Program.

 

9.2(s)                             The real property and improvements securing each Pledged Loan are free of damage or waste and are in good repair, and no improvement located on or being a part of such real property violates any applicable zoning law or regulation (unless constituting a legal non-conforming use or improvement).

 

9.2(t)                               No notice of any partial or total condemnation has been given with respect to the real property and improvements securing any Pledged Loan.

 

9.2(u)                            Each Pledged Loan against which a Warehousing Advance has been or will be made on the basis of a Purchase Commitment, meets all of the requirements of that Purchase Commitment, and each Pledged Security against which a Warehousing Advance is outstanding meets all of the requirements of the related Purchase Commitment.

 

9-3



 

9.2(v)                            Pledged Loans that are intended to be exchanged for Agency Securities comply or, prior to the issuance of the Agency Securities will comply, with the requirements of any governmental instrumentality, department or agency issuing or guaranteeing the Agency Securities.

 

9.2(w)                          None of the Pledged Loans is a graduated payment Mortgage Loan or has a shared appreciation or other contingent interest feature, and each Pledged Loan provides for periodic payments of all accrued interest on the Mortgage Loan on at least a monthly basis.

 

9.2(x)                              Neither Borrower nor any of either Borrower’s Affiliates has any ownership interest, right to acquire any ownership interest or equivalent economic interest in any property securing a Pledged Loan or the mortgagor under the Pledged Loan or any other obligor on the Mortgage Note for such Pledged Loan.

 

9.2(y)                            The original assignments of Mortgage delivered to Lender for each Pledged Loan are in recordable form and comply with all applicable laws and regulations governing the filing and recording of such documents.

 

9.2(z)                              None of the mortgagors, guarantors or other obligors of any Pledged Loan is a Person named in any Restriction List and to whom the provision of financial services is prohibited or otherwise restricted by applicable law.

 

9.3                                Special Affirmative Covenants Concerning Warehousing Collateral

 

As long as the Warehousing Commitment is outstanding or there remain any Obligations to be paid or performed under this Agreement or under any other Loan Document, Borrowers must, unless Credit Agent and the Required Lenders (or all of the Lenders, if required pursuant to Section 11.14(a)) consent in writing:

 

9.3(a)                             Warrant and defend the right, title and interest of Credit Agent, for itself and as agent of Lenders, in and to the Collateral against the claims and demands of all Persons.

 

9.3(b)                            Service or cause to be serviced all Pledged Loans in accordance with the standard requirements of the issuers of Purchase Commitments covering them and all applicable Federal Agency requirements, including taking all actions necessary to enforce the obligations of the obligors under such Mortgage Loans. Service or cause to be serviced all Mortgage Loans backing Pledged Securities in accordance with applicable governmental requirements and requirements of issuers of Purchase Commitments covering them. Hold all escrow funds collected in respect of Pledged Loans and Mortgage Loans backing Pledged Securities in trust, without commingling the same with non-custodial funds, and apply them for the purposes for which those funds were collected.

 

9.3(c)                             Execute and deliver to Credit Agent, with respect to the Collateral, those further instruments of sale, pledge, assignment or transfer, and those powers of attorney, as required by Credit Agent, and do and perform all matters and things necessary or desirable to be done or observed, for the purpose of effectively creating, maintaining

 

9-4



 

and preserving the security and benefits intended to be afforded Credit Agent and Lenders under this Agreement.

 

9.3(d)                            Notify Credit Agent within 2 Business Days of any default under, or of the termination of, any Purchase Commitment relating to any Pledged Loan, Eligible Mortgage Pool or Pledged Security.

 

9.3(e)                             Promptly comply in all respects with the terms and conditions of all Purchase Commitments, and all extensions, renewals and modifications or substitutions of or to all Purchase Commitments. Deliver or cause to be delivered to the Investor the Pledged Loans and Pledged Securities to be sold under each Purchase Commitment not later than the mandatory delivery date of the Pledged Loans or Pledged Securities under the Purchase Commitment.

 

9.3(f)                               Compare the names of every mortgagor, guarantor and other obligor of every Mortgage Loan, together with appropriate identifying information concerning those Persons obtained by Borrower, against every Restriction List, and make certain that none of the mortgagors, guarantors or other obligors of any Mortgage Loan is a Person named in any Restriction List and to whom the provision of financial services is prohibited or otherwise restricted by applicable law.

 

9.3(g)                            Other than with respect to Fannie Mae DUS Mortgage Loans, prior to the origination by a Borrower of any Mortgage Loans for sale to a Federal Agency, such Borrower shall have entered into an agreement among Credit Agent, the Investor under the applicable Purchase Commitment, and such Borrower, pursuant to which such Investor agrees to send all cash proceeds of Mortgage Loans sold by such Borrower to such Investor to the applicable Cash Collateral Account.

 

9.4                                Special Negative Covenants Concerning Warehousing Collateral

 

As long as the Warehousing Commitment is outstanding or there remain any Obligations to be paid or performed, Borrowers must not, either directly or indirectly, without the prior written consent of Credit Agent and the Required Lenders (or all of the Lenders, if required pursuant to Section 11.14(a)):

 

9.4(a)                             Amend, modify, or waive any of the terms and conditions of, or settle or compromise any claim in respect of, any Pledged Loans or Pledged Securities.

 

9.4(b)                            Sell, transfer or assign (other than assignments from GPF to W&D pursuant to the GPF Origination Services), or grant any option with respect to, or pledge (except under this Agreement and, with respect to each Pledged Loan or Pledged Security, the related Purchase Commitment) any of the Collateral or any interest in any of the Collateral.

 

9.4(c)                             Make any compromise, adjustment or settlement in respect of any of the Collateral or accept any consideration other than cash in payment or liquidation of the Collateral.

 

9-5



 

9.5                                Special Representation and Warranty Concerning Fannie Mae DUS Program Reserve Requirements

 

Borrowers represent and warrant to Credit Agent and Lenders that Borrowers will have met the Fannie Mae DUS Program requirements for lender reserves for each Fannie Mae DUS Mortgage Loan to be funded by a Warehousing Advance, at such time as required by Fannie Mae under the Fannie Mae DUS Program.

 

9.6                                Special Representations and Warranties Concerning Special Fannie Mae Mortgage Loans

 

Borrowers represent and warrant to Credit Agent and Lenders, as of the date of this Agreement and as of the date of each Warehousing Advance Request and the making of each Warehousing Advance, that at the time of any Warehousing Advance against a Special Fannie Mae Mortgage Loan:

 

9.6(a)                             The related Master Credit Facility Agreement and the Mortgage Notes evidencing the Special Fannie Mae Mortgage Loan are in full force and effect and constitute the legal, valid and binding obligations of the parties to those agreements and instruments, enforceable against those parties in accordance with their terms.

 

9.6(b)                            All of the Mortgages and pledges of Mortgage Notes securing the Special Fannie Mae Mortgage Loan under the related Master Credit Facility Agreement are in full force and effect, constitute the legal, valid and binding obligations of the parties to those agreements and instruments, enforceable against such parties in accordance with their terms, and, in the case of Mortgages, constitute valid, perfected first priority Liens on the underlying property, subject only to Liens specified as exceptions in the original title insurance policy related to each Mortgage, and in the case of pledges of Mortgage Notes, constitute a valid, perfected first priority Lien on those Mortgage Notes, which is in turn secured by valid, perfected, first priority Liens on the underlying property, subject only to Liens specified in the original title insurance policy related to that Mortgage Loan.

 

9.6(c)                             The Special Fannie Mae Mortgage Loan is in compliance with all terms of the related Master Credit Facility Agreement and the related Special Fannie Mae Pool Purchase Contract.

 

9.7                                Special Covenants Concerning Special Fannie Mae Mortgage Loans

 

As long as the Warehousing Commitment is outstanding or there remain any Obligations to be paid or performed, Borrowers must, unless Credit Agent and the Required Lenders (or all of the Lenders, if required pursuant to Section 11.14(a)) consent in writing:

 

9.7(a)                             Promptly provide Credit Agent with copies of any amendment, supplement, restatement or other modification of any Master Credit Facility Agreement, the promissory notes evidencing the Special Fannie Mae Mortgage Loans made under that agreement or the related Special Fannie Mae Pool Purchase Contract.

 

9-6



 

9.7(b)                            Not amend, restate, renew or replace the Mortgage Notes evidencing a Special Fannie Mae Mortgage Loan or the related Master Credit Facility Agreement or the related Special Fannie Mae Pool Purchase Contract, at any time that a Warehousing Advance is outstanding against that Special Fannie Mae Mortgage Loan.

 

9.7(c)                             Not, while any Warehousing Advance is outstanding against any Special Fannie Mae Mortgage Loan, borrow against such Special Fannie Mae Mortgage Loan (or any advance thereunder) from any other Person, or grant a security interest therein in favor of any Person other than Lender.

 

9.8                                Special Representations and Warranties Concerning FHA Mortgage Loans

 

Borrowers represent and warrant to Credit Agent and Lenders, as of the date of each Advance Request and the making of each Warehousing Advance, that:

 

9.8(a)                             Each FHA-insured Mortgage Loan included in the Pledged Loans meets all applicable governmental requirements for such insurance. W&D has complied and will continue to comply with all laws, rules and regulations with respect to the FHA insurance of each Pledged Loan designated by W&D as an FHA-insured Mortgage Loan, and such insurance is and will continue to be in full force and effect.

 

9.8(b)                            For FHA-insured Pledged Loans that will be used to back Ginnie Mae Mortgage-backed Securities, W&D has received from Ginnie Mae the Confirmation Notice for Request of Additional Commitment Authority and Confirmation Notice for Request of Pool Numbers, and there remains available under those agreements a commitment on the part of Ginnie Mae sufficient to permit the issuance of Ginnie Mae Mortgage-backed Securities in an amount at least equal to the amount of the Pledged Loans designated by W&D as the Mortgage Loans to be used to back those Ginnie Mae Mortgage-backed Securities; each of those Confirmation Notices is in full force and effect; each of those Pledged Loans has been assigned by W&D to one of those Pool Numbers and a portion of the available Ginnie Mae Commitment has been allocated to this Agreement by W&D, in an amount at least equal to those Pledged Loans; and each of those assignments and allocations has been reflected in the books and records of W&D.

 

End of Article 9

 

9-7



 

10.                                DEFAULTS; REMEDIES

 

10.1                         Events of Default

 

The occurrence of any of the following is an event of default (“ Event of Default ”):

 

10.1(a)                       Borrowers fail to pay the principal of any Warehousing Advance when due, whether at stated maturity, by acceleration, or otherwise; or fails to pay interest on any Warehousing Advance when due hereunder; or fails to pay, within any applicable grace period, any other amount due under this Agreement or any other Obligation of Borrowers to Lender.

 

10.1(b)                      Borrowers fail to perform or comply with any term or condition applicable to it contained in any Section of Article 7 or Article 8.

 

10.1(c)                       Except as contemplated by the Transaction Documents, the suspension, revocation or termination of a Borrower’s eligibility, in any respect, as lender, seller/servicer or issuer as described under Section 9.1 or of any other license or approval required for either Borrower to engage in the business of originating, acquiring and, if applicable, servicing Mortgage Loans; or the imposition of any other adverse regulatory or administrative action or sanction on or against a Borrower by any agency, board, bureau, commission, instrumentality or other administrative or regulatory body (in each case, whether federal, state or local, domestic or foreign) that could result in a material adverse change in either Borrower’s business, operations, assets or financial condition as a whole or that could affect the validity or enforceability of any Pledged Loan.

 

10.1(d)                      Any representation or warranty made or deemed made by a Borrower under this Agreement, in any other Loan Document or in any written statement or certificate at any time given by a Borrower, other than the representations and warranties set forth in Article 9 with respect to specific Pledged Loans, is inaccurate or incomplete in any material respect on the date as of which it is made or deemed made.

 

10.1(e)                       Borrowers default in the performance of or compliance with any term contained in this Agreement or any other Loan Document other than those referred to in Sections 10.1(a), 10.1(b), 10.1(c) or 10.1(d) and such default has not been remedied or waived in writing within 30 days after the earliest of (1) receipt by Borrowers of Notice from Credit Agent of that default, (2) receipt by Credit Agent of Notice from Borrowers of that default or (3) the date Borrowers should have notified Credit Agent of that default under the applicable clause of Section 7.7.

 

10.1(f)                         A Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries or any General Partner default under any other Indebtedness in excess of $500,000 (individually or in the aggregate) and such default continues for more than thirty (30) days.

 

10.1(g)                      An “event of default” (however defined) occurs under any agreement between a Borrower and Bank of America other than this Agreement and the other Loan Documents.

 

10-1



 

10.1(h)                      A case (whether voluntary or involuntary) is filed by or against either Borrower or any Subsidiary or the General Partner of Borrower under any applicable bankruptcy, insolvency or other similar federal or state law; or a court of competent jurisdiction appoints a receiver (interim or permanent), liquidator, sequestrator, trustee, custodian or other officer having similar powers over a Borrower or any Subsidiary or the General Partner, or over all or a substantial part of their respective properties or assets, and, if filed against such party, such action is contested by such party, such action is not dismissed within 45 days, and, during such period as such party is contesting such action, there is a stay in effect; or a Borrower or any Subsidiary General Partner of a Borrower (1) consents to the appointment of or possession by a receiver (interim or permanent), liquidator, sequestrator, trustee, custodian or other officer having similar powers over a Borrower or any Subsidiary or General Partner of Borrower or over all or a substantial part of their respective properties or assets, (2) makes an assignment for the benefit of creditors, or (3) fails, or admits in writing its inability, to pay its debts as those debts become due.

 

10.1(i)                          A Borrower fails to perform any contractual obligation to repurchase Mortgage Loans, if such obligations in the aggregate exceed $5,000,000.

 

10.1(j)                          Any money judgment, writ or warrant of attachment or similar process involving an amount in excess of $100,000 is entered or filed against a Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries or General Partner or any of their respective properties or assets and remains undischarged, unvacated, unbonded or unstayed for a period of 30 days or 5 days before the date of any proposed sale under that money judgment, writ or warrant of attachment or similar process.

 

10.1(k)                       Any order, judgment or decree decreeing the dissolution of a Borrower or General Partner is entered and remains undischarged or unstayed for a period of 20 days.

 

10.1(l)                          A Borrower or the General Partner purports to disavow any of its Obligations or contests the validity or enforceability of any Loan Document.

 

10.1(m)                    Credit Agent’s and/or any Lender’s security interest on any portion of the Collateral becomes unenforceable or otherwise impaired.

 

10.1(n)                      A material adverse change occurs in Borrowers’ financial condition, business, properties or assets, operations or prospects, or in Borrowers’ ability to repay the Obligations.

 

10.1(o)                      Any Lien for any tax, assessment or other governmental charge (i) is filed or is otherwise enforced against a Borrower or any of its property, including any of the Collateral, other than a Lien for taxes, assessments or other governmental charges on real property securing or that previously secured an individual Mortgage Loan that is not a Pledged Loan, or (ii) obtains priority that is equal to or greater than the priority of Credit Agent’s security interest in any of the Collateral.

 

10-2


 

10.1(p)                      Any Partner transfers, directly or indirectly, any of its Equity Interests of a Borrower; or any new General Partner is admitted to GPF; or any Partner withdraws from a Borrower.

 

10.1(q)                      Walker & Dunlop GP, LLC ceases to be the Managing General Partner of GPF.

 

10.2                         Remedies

 

10.2(a)                       If an Event of Default described in Section 10.1(h) occurs with respect to a Borrower, the Warehousing Commitment will automatically terminate and the unpaid principal amount of and accrued interest on the Warehousing Notes and all other Obligations will automatically become due and payable, without presentment, demand or other Notice or requirements of any kind, all of which Borrowers expressly waive.

 

10.2(b)                      If any other Event of Default occurs, Credit Agent may, and at the direction of Required Lenders shall, by Notice to Borrowers, terminate the Warehousing Commitment and declare the Obligations to be immediately due and payable.

 

10.2(c)                       If any Event of Default occurs, Credit Agent may, and at the direction of Required Lenders shall, also take any of the following actions:

 

(1)                                   Foreclose upon or otherwise enforce its security interest in and Lien on the Collateral to secure all payments and performance of the Obligations in any manner permitted by law or provided for in the Loan Documents.

 

(2)                                   Notify all obligors under any of the Collateral that the Collateral has been assigned to Credit Agent (or to another Person designated by Credit Agent) and that all payments on that Collateral are to be made directly to Credit Agent (or such other Person); settle, compromise or release, in whole or in part, any amounts any obligor or Investor owes on any of the Collateral on terms acceptable to Credit Agent (with the Required Lenders’ consent in the case of the release of any Pledged Loan or Pledged Security for an amount less than the outstanding Warehousing Advance against such Pledged Loan or Pledged Security); enforce payment and prosecute any action or proceeding involving any of the Collateral; and where any Collateral is in default, foreclose on and enforce any Liens securing that Collateral in any manner permitted by law and sell any property acquired as a result of those enforcement actions.

 

(3)                                   Prepare and submit for filing Uniform Commercial Code amendment statements evidencing the assignment to Lender or its designee of any Uniform Commercial Code financing statement filed in connection with any item of Collateral.

 

(4)                                   Subject to the rights of the lenders under the GPFA Term Loan, act, or contract with a third party to act at Borrowers’ expense, as servicer or subservicer of Collateral requiring servicing and perform all obligations required under any Collateral, including Servicing Contracts and Purchase Commitments.

 

10-3



 

(5)                                   Require Borrowers to assemble and make available to Credit Agent the Collateral and all related books and records at a place designated by Credit Agent.

 

(6)                                   Enter onto property where any Collateral or related books and records are located and take possession of those items with or without judicial process; and obtain access to Borrower’s respective data processing equipment, computer hardware and software relating to the Collateral and use all of the foregoing and the information contained in the foregoing in any manner Credit Agent deems necessary for the purpose of effectuating its rights under this Agreement and any other Loan Document.

 

(7)                                   Before the disposition of the Collateral, prepare it for disposition in any manner and to the extent Credit Agent deems appropriate.

 

(8)                                   Exercise all rights and remedies of a secured creditor under the Uniform Commercial Code of Massachusetts or other applicable law, including selling or otherwise disposing of all or any portion of the Collateral at one or more public or private sales, whether or not the Collateral is present at the place of sale, for cash or credit or future delivery, on terms and conditions and in the manner as Credit Agent may determine, including sale under any applicable Purchase Commitment. Borrower waives any right it may have to prior notice of the sale of all or any portion of the Collateral to the extent allowed by applicable law. If notice is required under applicable law, Credit Agent will give the applicable Borrower not less than 10 days’ notice of any public sale or of the date after which any private sale may be held. Borrowers agree that 10 days’ notice is reasonable notice. Credit Agent may, without notice or publication, adjourn any public or private sale one or more times by announcement at the time and place fixed for the sale, and the sale may be held at any time or place announced at the adjournment. In the case of a sale of all or any portion of the Collateral on credit or for future delivery, the Collateral sold on those terms may be retained by Credit Agent until the purchaser pays the selling price or takes possession of the Collateral. Credit Agent has no liability to either Borrower if a purchaser fails to pay for or take possession of Collateral sold on those terms, and in the case of any such failure, Credit Agent may sell the Collateral again upon notice complying with this Section.

 

(9)                                   Instead of or in conjunction with exercising the power of sale authorized by Section 10.2(c)(8), Credit Agent may proceed by suit at law or in equity to collect all amounts due on the Collateral, or to foreclose Credit Agent’s Lien on and sell all or any portion of the Collateral pursuant to a judgment or decree of a court of competent jurisdiction.

 

(10)                             Proceed against Borrowers, or either of them, on the Warehousing Notes.

 

(11)                             Retain all excess proceeds from the sale or other disposition of the Collateral (“ Liquidation Proceeds ”), and apply them to the payment of the Obligations under Section 11.12(c).

 

10-4



 

10.2(d)                      Neither Credit Agent nor any Lender will incur any liability as a result of the commercially reasonable sale or other disposition of all or any portion of the Collateral at any public or private sale or other disposition. Each Borrower waives (to the extent permitted by law) any claims it may have against Credit Agent or any Lender arising by reason of the fact that the price at which the Collateral may have been sold at a private sale was less than the price that might have been obtained at a public sale, or was less than the aggregate amount of the outstanding Warehousing Advances, accrued and unpaid interest on those Warehousing Advances, and unpaid fees, even if Credit Agent accepts the first offer received and does not offer the Collateral to more than one offeree. Each Borrower agrees that any sale of Collateral under the terms of a Purchase Commitment, or any other disposition of Collateral arranged by Borrower, whether before or after the occurrence of an Event of Default, will be deemed to have been made in a commercially reasonable manner.

 

10.2(e)                       Each Borrower acknowledges that Mortgage Loans are collateral of a type that is the subject of widely distributed standard price quotations and that Mortgage-backed Securities are collateral of a type that is customarily sold on a recognized market. Each Borrower waives any right it may have to prior notice of the sale of Pledged Securities, and agrees that Credit Agent or any Lender may purchase Pledged Loans and Pledged Securities at a private sale of such Collateral.

 

10.2(f)                         Each Borrower specifically waives and releases (to the extent permitted by law) any equity or right of redemption, stay or appraisal that either Borrower has or may have under any rule of law or statute now existing or adopted after the date of this Agreement, and any right to require Credit Agent or any Lender to (1) proceed against any Person, (2) proceed against or exhaust any of the Collateral or pursue its rights and remedies against the Collateral in any particular order or (3) pursue any other remedy within its power. Neither Credit Agent nor any Lender is required to take any action to preserve any rights of Borrower against holders of mortgages having priority to the Lien of any Mortgage or Security Agreement included in the Collateral or to preserve Borrower’s rights against other prior parties.

 

10.2(g)                      Credit Agent or a Lender may, but is not obligated to, advance any sums or do any act or thing necessary to uphold or enforce the Lien and priority of, or the security intended to be afforded by, any Mortgage or Security Agreement included in the Collateral, including payment of delinquent taxes or assessments and insurance premiums. All advances, charges, costs and expenses, including reasonable attorneys’ fees and disbursements, incurred or paid by Credit Agent or a Lender in exercising any right, power or remedy conferred by this Agreement, or in the enforcement of this Agreement, together with interest on those amounts at the Default Rate, from the time paid by Credit Agent or a Lender until repaid by Borrowers, are deemed to be principal outstanding under this Agreement and the Warehousing Notes.

 

10.2(h)                      No failure or delay on the part of Credit Agent or any Lender to exercise any right, power or remedy provided in this Agreement or under any other Loan Document, at law or in equity, will operate as a waiver of that right, power or remedy. No single or partial exercise by Credit Agent or any Lender of any right, power or remedy provided under

 

10-5



 

this Agreement or any other Loan Document, at law or in equity, precludes any other or further exercise of that right, power or remedy by Credit Agent or any Lender, or Credit Agent’s or any Lender’s exercise of any other right, power or remedy. Without limiting the foregoing, each Borrower waives all defenses based on the statute of limitations to the extent permitted by law. The remedies provided in this Agreement and the other Loan Documents are cumulative and are not exclusive of any remedies provided at law or in equity.

 

10.2(i)                          Each Borrower grants Credit Agent a license or other right to use, without charge, Borrower’s computer programs, other programs, labels, patents, copyrights, rights of use of any name, trade secrets, trade names, trademarks, service marks and advertising matter, or any property of a similar nature, as it pertains to the Collateral, in advertising for sale and selling any of the Collateral and Borrower’s rights under all licenses and all other agreements related to the foregoing inure to Credit Agent’s and Lender’s benefit until the Obligations are paid in full.

 

10.3                         Insufficiency of Proceeds

 

If Liquidation Proceeds are insufficient to cover the costs and expenses of the sale, disposition or other enforcement rights with respect to the Collateral and payment in full of all Obligations (applied in accordance with Section 11.12(c)), Borrowers are jointly and severally liable for the deficiency.  Nothing herein shall require Credit Agent or Lenders to look to all or any portion of the Collateral prior to, or in lieu of, pursuing any other right or remedy, any or all of which may be pursued in any order and at any time, including at the same time.

 

10.4                         Credit Agent Appointed Attorney-in-Fact

 

Each Borrower appoints Credit Agent its attorney-in-fact, with full power of substitution, for the purpose of carrying out the provisions of this Agreement, the Warehousing Notes and the other Loan Documents and taking any action and executing any instruments that Credit Agent deems necessary or advisable to accomplish that purpose. Each Borrower’s appointment of Credit Agent as attorney-in-fact is irrevocable and coupled with an interest. Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, Credit Agent may give notice of its security interest in and Lien on the Collateral to any Person, either in a Borrower’s name or in its own name, endorse all Pledged Loans or Pledged Securities payable to the order of either Borrower, change or cause to be changed the book-entry registration or name of subscriber or Investor on any Pledged Security, prepare and submit for filing Uniform Commercial Code amendment statements with respect to any Uniform Commercial Code financing statements filed in connection with any item of Collateral or receive, endorse and collect all checks made payable to the order of a Borrower representing payment on account of the principal of or interest on, or the proceeds of sale of, any of the Pledged Loans or Pledged Securities and give full discharge for those transactions.  The foregoing appointment shall be effective immediately with respect to ministerial matters, and upon the occurrence of an Event of Default with respect to all other matters.

 

10-6



 

10.5                         Right of Set-Off

 

Each Borrower hereby grants to Credit Agent and each Lender a continuing lien, security interest and right of setoff as security for all liabilities and obligations to Credit Agent and each Lender, whether now existing or hereafter arising, upon and against all deposits, credits, collateral and property, now or hereafter in the possession, custody safekeeping or control of Credit Agent or any Lender or any entity under the control of Credit Agent or such Lender, and their respective successors and assigns or in transit to any of them, other than third-party custodial accounts maintained by Borrower at Credit Agent or any Lender.  If Borrowers default in the payment of any Obligation or in the performance of any of its duties under the Loan Documents, Credit Agent or any applicable Lender may, without Notice to or demand on either Borrower (which Notice or demand each Borrower expressly waives), set-off, appropriate or apply any property of either Borrower held at any time by Credit Agent or any applicable Lender, or any indebtedness at any time owed by Credit Agent or any applicable Lender to or for the account of a Borrower, against the Obligations, whether or not those Obligations have matured.  ANY AND ALL RIGHTS TO REQUIRE CREDIT AGENT OR ANY APPLICABLE LENDER TO EXERCISE ITS RIGHTS OR REMEDIES WITH RESPECT TO ANY OTHER COLLATERAL WHICH SECURES THE LOANS, PRIOR TO EXERCISING ITS RIGHT OF SETOFF WITH RESPECT TO SUCH NON-CUSTODIAL DEPOSITS, CREDITS OR OTHER PROPERTY OF BORROWER, ARE HEREBY KNOWINGLY, VOLUNTARILY AND IRREVOCABLY WAIVED.

 

End of Article 10

 

10-7



 

11.                                THE CREDIT AGENT AND THE LENDERS

 

11.1                         Appointment

 

Each Lender hereby irrevocably designates and appoints Bank of America as Credit Agent of such Lender to act as specified herein and in the other Loan Documents, and each such Lender hereby irrevocably authorizes the Credit Agent to take such actions, exercise such powers and perform such duties as are expressly delegated to or conferred upon the Credit Agent by the terms of this Agreement and the other Loan Documents, together with such other powers as are reasonably incidental thereto.  The Credit Agent agrees to act as such upon the express conditions contained in this Section 11. The Credit Agent shall not have any duties or responsibilities except those expressly set forth herein or in the other Loan Documents, nor shall it have any fiduciary relationship with any Lender, and no implied covenants, responsibilities, duties, obligations or liabilities shall be read into this Agreement or otherwise exist against the Credit  Agent.  The provisions of this Section 11 are solely for the benefit of the Credit Agent and the Lenders, and neither the Borrowers nor any other Person shall have any rights as third party beneficiaries of any of the provisions hereof.

 

11.2                         Duties of Credit Agent; Administration of Loan by Credit Agent

 

The Credit Agent shall be responsible for administering the Loan on a day-to-day basis.  In the exercise of such administrative duties, the Credit Agent shall use the same diligence and standard of care that is customarily used by the Credit  Agent with respect to similar loans held by the Credit Agent solely for its own account.

 

11.3                         Delegation of Duties

 

The Credit Agent may execute any of its duties under this Agreement or any other Loan Document by or through its agents or attorneys-in-fact, and shall be entitled to the advice of counsel concerning all matters pertaining to its rights and duties hereunder or under the Loan Documents.  The Credit Agent shall not be responsible to the Lenders for the negligence or misconduct of any agents or attorneys-in-fact selected by it with reasonable care.

 

11.4                         Exculpatory Provisions

 

Neither the Credit Agent nor any of its officers, directors, employees, agents, attorneys-in-fact or affiliates shall be liable to the Lenders for any action lawfully taken or omitted to be taken by it or them under or in connection with this Agreement or the other Loan Documents, except for its or their gross negligence or willful misconduct, as finally determined by a court of competent jurisdiction.  Neither the Credit Agent nor any of its officers, directors, employees, agents, attorneys-in-fact or affiliates shall be responsible to the Lenders for or have any duty to the Lenders to ascertain, inquire into, or verify (i) any recital, statement, representation or warranty made by a Borrower or any of their officers or agents contained in this Agreement or the other Loan Documents or in any certificate or other document delivered in connection therewith; (ii) the performance or observance of any of the covenants or agreements contained in, or the conditions of, this Agreement or the other Loan Documents; (iii) the state or condition of any properties of either Borrower or any other obligor hereunder constituting Collateral for the Obligations of either Borrower hereunder, or any information contained in the books or records

 

11-1



 

of the Borrower; (iv) the validity, enforceability, collectability, effectiveness or genuineness of this Agreement or any other Loan Document or any other certificate, document or instrument furnished in connection therewith; or (v) the validity, priority or perfection of any lien securing or purporting to secure the Obligations or the value or sufficiency of any of the Collateral.

 

11.5                         Reliance by Credit Agent

 

The Credit Agent shall be entitled to rely, and shall be fully protected in relying, upon any notice, consent, certificate, affidavit, or other document or writing believed by it to be genuine and correct and to have been signed, sent or made by the proper person or persons, and upon the advice and statements of legal counsel (including, without, limitation, counsel to the Borrowers), independent accountants and other experts selected by the Credit Agent.  The Credit Agent shall be fully justified in failing or refusing to take any action under this Agreement or any other Loan Document unless it shall first receive such advice or concurrence of the Required Lenders as it deems appropriate or it shall first be indemnified to its satisfaction by the Lenders against any and all liability and expense which may be incurred by it by reason of the taking or failing to take any such action.  With respect to the Lenders, the Credit Agent shall in all cases be fully protected in acting, or in refraining from acting, under this Agreement and the other Loan Documents in accordance with any written request of the Required Lenders, and each such request of the Required Lenders, and any action taken or failure to act by the Credit Agent pursuant thereto, shall be binding upon all of the Lenders; provided, however, that the Credit Agent shall not be required in any event to act, or to refrain from acting, in any manner which is contrary to the Loan Documents or to applicable law, or without specific indemnification satisfactory to Credit Agent in its discretion.

 

11.6                         Notice of Default

 

The Credit Agent shall not be deemed to have knowledge or notice of the occurrence of any Default or Event of Default unless the Credit Agent has actual knowledge of the same or has received notice from a Lender or the Borrower referring to this Agreement, describing such Default or Event of Default and stating that such notice is a “notice of default”.  In the event that the Credit Agent obtains such actual knowledge or receives such a notice, the Credit Agent shall give prompt notice thereof to each of the Lenders.  Credit Agent may (but shall not be obligated to) take such action, or refrain from taking such action, with respect to any such Default or Event of Default as it shall deem advisable in the best interest of the Lenders.  If a Lender shall have knowledge of a Default or an Event of Default, it shall forthwith give Notice thereof to the Credit Agent. If the Credit Agent shall have knowledge of a Default or Event of Default, it shall forthwith give Notice thereof to each Lender and to Borrowers.

 

11.7                         Lenders’ Credit Decisions

 

Each Lender acknowledges that it has, independently and without reliance upon the Credit Agent or any other Lender, and based on the financial statements prepared by the Borrowers and such other documents and information as it has deemed appropriate, made its own credit analysis and investigation into the business, assets, operations, property, and financial and other condition of the Borrowers and has made its own decision to enter into this Agreement and the other Loan Documents.  Each Lender also acknowledges that it will, independently and without reliance

 

11-2



 

upon the Credit Agent or any other Lender, and based on such documents and information as it shall deem appropriate at the time, continue to make its own credit decisions in determining whether or not conditions precedent to funding any Loan hereunder have been satisfied and in taking or not taking any action under this Agreement and the other Loan Documents.

 

11.8                         Credit Agent’s Reimbursement and Indemnification

 

The Lenders agree to reimburse and indemnify the Credit Agent, ratably in proportion to their respective Commitment Percentages, for (i) any out-of-pocket expenses not reimbursed by the Borrowers for which the Credit Agent is entitled to reimbursement by the Borrowers under this Agreement or the other Loan Documents, (ii) any other expenses incurred by the Credit Agent on behalf of the Lenders in connection with the preparation, execution, delivery, administration, amendment, waiver and/or enforcement of this Agreement and the other Loan Documents, and (iii) any liabilities, obligations, losses, damages, penalties, actions, judgments, suits, costs, expenses or disbursements of any kind and nature whatsoever which may imposed on, incurred by or asserted against the Credit Agent in any way relating to or arising out of this Agreement or the other Loan Documents or any other document delivered in connection therewith or any transaction contemplated thereby, or the enforcement of any of the terms hereof or thereof, provided that no Lender shall be liable for any of the foregoing to the extent that they arise from the gross negligence or willful misconduct of the Credit Agent (or, subject to the last sentence of Section 11.3, of its agents or permitted delegees), as finally determined by a court of competent jurisdiction.  If any indemnity furnished to the Credit Agent for any purpose shall, in the opinion of the Credit Agent, be insufficient or become impaired, the Credit Agent may call for additional indemnity and cease, or not commence, to do the action indemnified against until such additional indemnity is furnished.

 

11.9                         Credit Agent in its Individual Capacity

 

With respect to its Warehousing Commitment as a Lender, and the Warehousing Advances made by it and the Warehousing Note issued to it, the Credit Agent shall have the same rights and powers hereunder and under any other Loan Document as any Lender and may exercise the same as though it were not the Credit Agent, and the term “Lender” or “Lenders” shall, unless the context otherwise indicates, include the Credit Agent in its individual capacity.  The Credit Agent and its subsidiaries and affiliates may accept deposits from, lend money to, and generally engage in any kind of commercial or investment banking, trust, advisory or other business with the Borrowers or any subsidiary or affiliate of the Borrowers as if it were not the Credit Agent hereunder.

 

11.10                  Successor Credit Agent

 

The Credit Agent may resign at any time by giving forty-five (45) days’ prior written notice to the Lenders and Borrowers.  Upon any such resignation, the Required Lenders shall have the right to appoint a successor Credit Agent, and, provided no Default or Event of Default has occurred and is continuing, the Borrowers shall have the right to approve such successor Credit Agent, provided further, such approval shall not be unreasonably withheld.  If no successor Credit Agent shall have been so appointed by the Required Lenders and accepted such appointment within forty-five (45) days after the retiring Credit Agent’s giving notice of

 

11-3



 

resignation then the retiring Credit Agent may appoint, on behalf of the Borrowers and the Lenders, a successor Credit Agent.  Upon the acceptance of any appointment as Credit Agent hereunder by a successor Credit Agent, such successor Credit Agent shall thereupon succeed to and become vested with all the rights, powers, privileges and duties of the retiring Credit Agent, and the retiring Credit Agent shall be discharged from its duties and obligations hereunder and under the other Loan Documents.  After any retiring Credit Agent’s resignation hereunder, the provisions of this Section 11 shall continue in effect for its benefit in respect of any actions taken or omitted to be taken by it while it was acting as the Credit Agent hereunder.

 

11.11                  Duties in Case of Enforcement

 

In case one or more Events of Default have occurred and shall be continuing, and whether or not acceleration of the Obligations shall have occurred, the Credit Agent may, and shall, at the request of the Required Lenders, and provided that the Lenders have given to the Credit Agent such additional indemnities and assurances against expenses and liabilities as the Credit Agent may reasonably request, proceed to enforce the provisions of this Agreement and the other Loan Documents respecting the foreclosure of mortgages, the sale or other disposition of all or any part of the Collateral and the exercise of any other legal or equitable rights or remedies as it may have hereunder or under any other Loan Document or otherwise by virtue of applicable law, or to refrain from so acting if similarly requested by the Required Lenders.  The Credit Agent shall be fully protected with respect to the Lenders in so acting or refraining from acting upon the instruction of the Required Lenders, and such instruction shall be binding upon all the Lenders.  The Required Lenders may direct the Credit Agent in writing as to the method and the extent of any such foreclosure, sale or other disposition or the exercise of any other right or remedy, the Lenders hereby agreeing to indemnify and hold the Credit Agent harmless from all costs and liabilities incurred in respect of all actions taken or omitted in accordance with such direction, provided that the Credit Agent need not comply with any such direction to the extent that the Credit Agent reasonably believes the Credit Agent’s compliance with such direction to be unlawful or commercially unreasonable in any applicable jurisdiction.  The Credit Agent may, in its discretion, but without obligation, in the absence of direction from the Required Lenders, take such interim actions as it believes necessary to preserve the rights of the Lenders hereunder and in and to any Collateral securing the Obligations, including, but not limited to, petitioning a court for injunctive relief, appointment of a receiver or preservation of the proceeds of any Collateral.  Each of the Lenders acknowledges and agrees that no individual Lender may, except as expressly provided in this Agreement, separately enforce or exercise any of the provisions of any of the Loan Documents, including, without limitation, the Notes, other than through the Credit Agent.

 

11.12                  Respecting Loans and Payments

 

11.12(a)                 Nature of Obligations of Lenders .  The  obligations of the Lenders hereunder are several and not joint.  Failure of any Lender to fulfill its obligations hereunder shall not result in any other Lender becoming obligated to advance more than its Commitment Percentage of the Loan, nor shall such failure release or diminish the obligations of any other Lender to fund its  Commitment Percentage provided herein.

 

11-4



 

11.12(b)                Payments to Credit Agent .  All payments of principal of and interest on the Loan or the Warehousing Notes shall be made to the Credit Agent by the Borrowers or any other obligor for the account of the Lenders in immediately available funds as provided in the Warehousing Notes and this Agreement. Except as otherwise expressly provided herein, the Credit Agent agrees to use its reasonable best efforts to promptly to distribute to each Lender, on the same Business Day upon which each such payment is made (if received prior to 2:00 p.m. on such Business Day), such Lender’s proportionate share of each such payment in immediately available funds excluding Liquidation Proceeds which shall be distributed in accordance with Section 11.12(c), below.  The Credit Agent shall upon each distribution promptly notify the Borrowers of such distribution and each Lender of the amounts distributed to it applicable to principal of, and interest on, the proportionate share held by the applicable Lender.  Each payment to the Credit Agent under the first sentence of this Section shall constitute a payment by the Borrowers to each Lender in the amount of such Lender’s proportionate share of such payment, and any such payment to the Credit Agent shall not be considered outstanding for any purpose after the date of such payment by the Borrowers to the Credit Agent without regard to whether or when the Credit Agent makes distribution thereof as provided above.  If any payment received by the Credit Agent from a Borrower is insufficient to pay both all accrued interest and all principal then due and owing, the Credit Agent shall first apply such payment to all outstanding interest of the Borrowers until paid in full and shall then apply the remainder of such payment to all principal of such Borrower then due and owing, and shall distribute the payment to each Lender accordingly.

 

11.12(c)                 Distribution of Liquidation Proceeds .  Subject to the terms and conditions hereof, the Credit Agent shall distribute all Liquidation Proceeds in the order and manner set forth below:

 

First:                                                                      To the Credit Agent, towards any fees and any expenses for which the Credit Agent is entitled to reimbursement under this Agreement or the other Loan Documents not theretofore paid to the Credit Agent.

 

Second:                                                      To all applicable Lenders in accordance with their proportional share based upon their respective Commitment Percentages until all Lenders have been reimbursed for all expenses which such Lenders have previously paid to the Credit Agent and not theretofore paid to such Lenders.

 

Third:                                                                 To all Lenders in accordance with their proportional share based upon their respective Commitment Percentages until all Lenders have been paid in full all principal and interest due to such Lenders under the Loan, with each Lender applying such proceeds for purposes of this Agreement first against the outstanding principal balance due to such Lender under the Loan and then to accrued and unpaid interest due under the Loan.

 

11-5


 

Fourth:                                                          To all applicable Lenders in accordance with their proportional share based upon their respective Commitment Percentages until all Lenders have been paid in full all other amounts due to such Lenders under the Loan including, without limitation, any costs and expenses incurred directly by such Lenders to the extent such costs and expenses are reimbursable to such Lenders by the Borrower under the Loan Documents.

 

Fifth:                                                                     To any applicable Lender (including the Credit Agent), or applicable Affiliate thereof, any costs and expenses incurred directly by such Lender or Affiliate as a result of any breach of any Hedging Arrangement specifically hedging Borrowers’ interest bearing obligations under this Agreement and of which Hedging Arrangement Credit Agent had been provided Notice (and all details thereof) prior to its establishment.

 

Sixth:                                                                    To the Borrowers or such third parties as may be entitled to claim such Liquidation Proceeds.

 

11.12(d)                Adjustments .  If, after Credit Agent has paid each Lender’s proportionate share of any payment received or applied by Credit Agent in respect of the Loan, that payment is rescinded or must otherwise be returned or paid over by Credit Agent, whether pursuant to any bankruptcy or insolvency law, sharing of payments clause of any loan agreement or otherwise, each Lender shall, at Credit Agent’s request, promptly return its proportionate share of such payment or application to Credit Agent, together with the Lender’s proportionate share of any interest or other amount required to be paid by Credit Agent with respect to such payment or application.

 

11.12(e)                 Sharing of Payments .  Each of the Lenders agrees with each other Lender that if such Lender shall receive from a Borrower, whether by voluntary payment, exercise of the right of setoff, counterclaim, cross action, enforcement of the claim evidenced by the Warehousing Notes held by such Lender, proceedings against a Borrower at law or in equity, or proof thereof in bankruptcy, reorganization, liquidation, receivership or similar proceedings, or otherwise, and shall retain and apply to the payment of the Warehousing Notes of the Borrowers held by such Lender any amount in excess of its ratable portion of the payments received by all of the Lenders with respect to the Warehousing Notes held by all of the Lenders, such Lender will give Credit Agent prompt Notice thereof, and will make such disposition and arrangements with the other Lenders with respect to such excess, either by way of distribution, pro tanto assignment of claims, subrogation or otherwise as shall result in each Lender receiving in respect of the Warehousing Notes held by it its proportionate payment as contemplated by this Agreement; provided that if all or any part of such excess payment is thereafter recovered from such Lender, such disposition and arrangements shall be rescinded and the amount restored to the extent of such recovery, but without interest.

 

11.12(f)                   Distribution by Credit Agent .  If in the opinion of the Credit Agent distribution of any amount received by it in such capacity hereunder or under the Warehousing Notes or

 

11-6



 

under any of the other Loan Documents might involve any liability, it may refrain from making distribution until its right to make distribution shall have been adjudicated by a court of competent jurisdiction or has been resolved by the mutual consent of all Lenders.  In addition, the Credit Agent may request full and complete indemnity, in form and substance satisfactory to it, prior to making any such distribution.  If a court of competent jurisdiction shall adjudge that any amount received and distributed by the Credit Agent is to be repaid, each person to whom any such distribution shall have been made shall either repay to the Credit Agent its proportionate share of the amount so adjudged to be repaid or shall pay over to the same in such manner and to such persons as shall be determined by such court.

 

11.12(g)                Delinquent Lender .

 

(1)                                   If for any reason any Lender shall fail or refuse to make available to Credit Agent its pro rata share of any Warehousing Advances, expenses or setoff (a “ Delinquent Lender ”), or, unless subject to a bona fide dispute shall fail or refuse to abide by any other of its obligations under this Agreement and, in any of the foregoing circumstances such failure or refusal is not cured within ten (10) days after receipt from the Credit Agent of written notice thereof, then, in addition to the rights and remedies that may be available to Credit Agent, other Lenders, the Borrowers or any other party at law or in equity, and not at limitation thereof, (i) such Delinquent Lender’s right to participate in the administration of, or decision-making rights related to, the Loans, this Agreement or the other Loan Documents shall be suspended during the pendency of such failure or refusal, and (ii) a Delinquent Lender shall be deemed to have assigned any and all payments due to it from the Borrowers, whether on account of outstanding Warehousing Advances, interest, fees or otherwise, to the remaining non-delinquent Lenders for application to, and reduction of, their proportionate shares of all outstanding Loans until, as a result of application of such assigned payments the Lenders’ respective pro rata shares of all outstanding Loans shall have returned to those in effect immediately prior to such delinquency and without giving effect to the nonpayment causing such delinquency.  The Delinquent Lender’s decision-making and participation rights and rights to payments as set forth in clauses (i) and (ii) hereinabove shall be restored only upon the payment by the Delinquent Lender of its pro rata share of any Loans or expenses as to which it is delinquent, together with interest thereon at the Default Rate from the date when originally due until the date upon which any such amounts are actually paid.

 

(2)                                   The non-delinquent Lenders shall also have the right, but not the obligation, in their respective, sole and absolute discretion, to acquire for no cash consideration, ( pro   rata , based on the respective Warehousing Commitments of those Lenders electing to exercise such right) the Delinquent Lender’s Commitment to fund future Loans (the “ Future Commitment ”).  Upon any such purchase of the pro rata share of any Delinquent Lender’s Future Commitment, the Delinquent Lender’s share in future Loans and its rights under the Loan Documents with respect thereto shall terminate on the date of purchase, and the Delinquent Lender shall promptly execute all documents reasonably requested to surrender and transfer

 

11-7



 

such interest, including, if so requested, an Assignment and Acceptance.  Each Delinquent Lender shall indemnify Credit Agent and each non-delinquent Lender from and against any and all loss, damage or expenses, including but not limited to reasonable attorneys’ fees and funds advanced by Credit Agent or by any non-delinquent Lender, on account of a Delinquent Lender’s failure to timely fund its pro rata share of a Loan or to otherwise perform its obligations under the Loan Documents.

 

(3)                                   In the event that the non-delinquent Lenders elect not to acquire the Future Commitment, then, so long as no Default or Event of Default has occurred and is continuing, the Borrowers may either (i) demand that the Delinquent Lender, and upon such demand the Delinquent Lender shall, promptly assign its Commitment Percentage of the Loan to an Assignee subject to and in accordance with the provisions of Section 11.13(a) for a purchase price equal to the aggregate principal balance of the Loan then owing to the Delinquent Lender plus any accrued but unpaid interest thereon and accrued but unpaid fees owing to the Delinquent Lender, or (ii)  pay to the Delinquent Lender the aggregate principal balance of the Loan then owing to the Delinquent Lender plus any accrued but unpaid interest thereon and accrued but unpaid fees owing to the Delinquent Lender, whereupon the Delinquent Lender shall no longer be a party hereto or have any rights or obligations hereunder or under any of the other Loan Documents.  Each of the Credit Agent and the Delinquent Lender shall reasonably cooperate in effectuating the replacement of such Delinquent Lender under this Section, but at no time shall the Credit Agent, such Delinquent Lender nor any other Lender be obligated in any way whatsoever to initiate any such replacement or to assist in finding an Assignee.  The exercise by Borrowers of their rights under this Section shall be at Borrowers’ sole cost and expenses and at no cost or expense to the Credit Agent, the Delinquent Lender or any of the other Lenders.

 

11.12(h)                Holders .  The Credit Agent may deem and treat the payee of any Warehousing Note as the owner thereof for all purposes hereof unless and until a written notice of the assignment, transfer or endorsement thereof, as the case may be, shall have been filed with the Credit Agent.  Any request, authority or consent of any person or entity who, at the time of making such request or giving such authority or consent, is the holder of any Warehousing Note shall be conclusive and binding on any subsequent holder, transferee or endorsee, as the case may be, of such Warehousing Note or of any Warehousing Note or Warehousing Notes issued in exchange therefor.

 

11.13                  Assignment and Participation

 

11.13(a)                 Assignment by Lenders .  Each Lender may assign to one or more banks or other financial institutions (each an “ Assignee ”) all or a portion of its interests, rights and obligations under this Agreement (including all or a portion of its Commitment Percentage and Warehousing Commitment and the same portion of the Loan at the time owing to it and the Warehousing Notes held by it), upon satisfaction of the following conditions: (a) each of the Credit Agent and the Borrowers shall have given its prior written consent to such assignment (provided that, in the case of the Borrowers, such

 

11-8



 

consent will not be unreasonably withheld and shall not be required if a Default or Event of Default shall have occurred and be continuing); (b) each such assignment shall be of a constant, and not a varying, percentage of all the assigning Lender’s rights and obligations under this Agreement, (c)  prior to the occurrence of an Event of Default, each assignment shall be in an amount that is at least $10,000,000.00 and is a whole multiple of $250,000.00, and (d) the parties to such assignment shall execute and deliver to the Credit Agent, for recording in the Register (as hereinafter defined), an Assignment and Acceptance, substantially in the form of Exhibit M hereto (an “ Assignment and Acceptance ”), together with any Warehousing Notes subject to such assignment.  Upon such execution, delivery, acceptance and recording, from and after the effective date specified in each Assignment and Acceptance, which effective date shall be at least five (5) Business Days after the execution thereof, (x) the assignee thereunder shall be a party hereto and, to the extent provided in such Assignment and Acceptance, have the rights and obligations of a Lender hereunder, and (y) the assigning Lender shall, to the extent provided in such assignment and upon payment to the Credit Agent of the registration fee referred to in Section 11.13(b), be released from its obligations under this Agreement.

 

11.13(b)                Register .  The Credit Agent shall maintain a copy of each Assignment and Acceptance delivered to it and a register or similar list (the “ Register ”) for the recordation of the names and addresses of the Lenders and the Commitment Percentage of, and principal amount of the Loan owing to the Lenders from time to time.  The entries in the Register shall be conclusive, in the absence of manifest error, and the Borrowers, the Credit Agent and the Lenders may treat each person whose name is recorded in the Register as a Lender hereunder for all purposes of this Agreement.  The Register shall be available for inspection by each Borrower and the Lenders at any reasonable time and from time to time upon reasonable prior notice.  Upon each such recordation, the assigning Lender agrees to pay to the Credit Agent a registration fee in the sum of $5,000.00.

 

11.13(c)                 New Warehousing Notes .  Upon its receipt of an Assignment and Acceptance executed by the parties to such assignment, together with each Warehousing Note subject to such assignment, the Credit Agent shall (a) record the information contained therein in the Register, and (b) give prompt notice thereof to the Borrowers and the Lenders (other than the assigning Lender).  Within five (5) Business Days after receipt of such notice, the Borrowers (or W&D, separately, if after the GPF Transition Period), at their respective own expense, shall execute and deliver to the Credit Agent, in exchange for each surrendered Warehousing Note, a new Warehousing Note to the order of such Assignee in an amount equal to the amount assumed by such Assignee pursuant to such Assignment and Acceptance and, if the assigning Lender has retained some portion of its obligations hereunder, a new Warehousing Note to the order of the assigning Lender in an amount equal to the amount retained by it hereunder.  Such new Warehousing Notes shall provide that they are replacements for the surrendered Warehousing Notes, shall be in an aggregate principal amount equal to the aggregate principal amount of the surrendered Warehousing Notes, shall be dated the effective date of such Assignment and Acceptance and shall otherwise be substantially in the form of the assigned Warehousing Notes.  The surrendered Warehousing Notes shall be cancelled and returned to the Borrower.

 

11-9



 

11.13(d)                Participations .  Each Lender may sell participations to one or more banks or other financial institutions (each a “ Participant ”) in all or a portion of such Lender’s rights and obligations under this Agreement and the other Loan Documents; provided that (a) each such participation shall be in a minimum amount of $5,000,000.00, (b) any such sale or participation shall not affect the rights and duties of the selling Lender hereunder to the Borrowers or the Credit Agent, and (c) the only rights granted to the Participant pursuant to such participation arrangements with respect to waivers, amendments or modifications of the Loan Documents shall be the rights to approve waivers, amendments or modifications that would reduce the principal of or the interest rate on any Loans, extend the term or increase the amount of the Warehousing Commitment of such Lender as it relates to such Participant, reduce the amount of any commitment fees to which such Participant is entitled or extend any regularly scheduled payment date for interest.

 

11.13(e)                 Disclosure .  The Borrowers agree that, in addition to disclosures made in accordance with standard and customary banking practices, any Lender may disclose information obtained by such Lender pursuant to this Agreement to Assignees or Participants and potential Assignees or Participants hereunder; provided that such Assignees or Participants or potential Assignees or potential Participants shall agree (a) to treat in confidence such information unless such information otherwise becomes public knowledge, (b) not to disclose such information to a third party, except as required by law or legal process and (c) not to make use of such information for purposes of transactions unrelated to such contemplated assignment or participation.

 

11.13(f)                   Miscellaneous Assignment Provisions .  Any assigning Lender shall retain its rights to be indemnified pursuant to Section 12.2(b) with respect to any claims or actions arising prior to the date of such assignment.  If any Assignee is not incorporated under the laws of the United States of America or any state thereof, it shall, prior to the date on which any interest or fees are payable hereunder or under any of the other Loan Documents for its account, deliver to the Borrower and the Credit Agent certification as to  exemption from deduction or withholding of any United States federal income taxes.

 

11.13(g)                Assignment by Borrower .  Neither Borrower may assign or transfer any of its rights or obligations hereunder or any other Loan Document without the prior written consent of Credit Agent and each of the Lenders.

 

11.14                  Administrative Matters

 

11.14(a)                 Amendment, Waiver, Consent, Etc.   Except as otherwise provided in this Agreement, no term or provision of this Agreement or any other Loan Document may be modified, changed, waived, discharged or terminated, nor may any consent required or permitted by this Agreement or any other Loan Document be given, unless such modification, change, waiver, discharge, termination or consent receives the written approval of the Required Lenders.

 

Notwithstanding the foregoing, any proposed waiver, modification, change, amendment, waiver, discharge, termination, or consent which would:

 

11-10



 

(1)                                   extend the Warehousing Maturity Date, the scheduled date for the payment of interest or fees payable hereunder, or the date for any mandatory payment of principal, shall require the consent of all Lenders,

 

(2)                                   reduce the principal of, or rate of interest or fees on, any Lender’s Warehousing Advances or any Lender’s Warehousing Commitment, shall require the consent of each affected Lender,

 

(3)                                   modify any Lender’s Commitment Percentage, shall require the consent of each affected Lender,

 

(4)                                   result in a Warehousing Advance being made against Collateral which does not satisfy the applicable requirements of this Agreement, shall require the consent of all Lenders,

 

(5)                                   modify the definition of “Required Lenders,” or of the number or percentage of Lenders that are required to take action under the Loan Documents, shall require the consent of all Lenders,

 

(6)                                   release any Pledged Loan, Pledged Security, or other material item of Collateral, except as expressly contemplated by the Loan Documents or in connection with a sale of such Collateral permitted hereunder, shall require the consent of all Lenders,

 

(7)                                   amend this Section 11.14(a), shall require the consent of all Lenders.

 

It is expressly agreed and understood that (x) the failure by the Required Lenders to elect to accelerate amounts outstanding hereunder or to terminate the obligation of the Lenders to make Warehousing Advances hereunder shall not constitute an amendment or waiver of any term or provision of this Agreement, and (y) without the consent of the Credit Agent, no such action referred to above shall amend, modify or waive any provision of this Article or any other provision of any Loan Document which relates to the rights or obligations of the Credit Agent.

 

11.14(b)                Deemed Consent or Approval .  With respect to any requested amendment, waiver, consent or other action which requires the approval of the Required Lenders or all of the Lenders, as the case may be, in accordance with the terms of this Agreement, or if the Credit Agent is required hereunder to seek, or desires to seek, the approval of the Required Lenders or all of the Lenders, as the case may be, prior to undertaking a particular action or course of conduct, the Credit Agent in each such case shall provide each Lender with written notice of any such request for amendment, waiver or consent or any other requested or proposed action or course of conduct, accompanied by such detailed background information and explanations as may be reasonably necessary to determine whether to approve or disapprove such amendment, waiver, consent or other action or course of conduct.  The Credit Agent may (but shall not be required to) include in any such notice, printed in capital letters or boldface type, a legend substantially to the following effect:

 

11-11



 

“THIS COMMUNICATION REQUIRES IMMEDIATE RESPONSE.  FAILURE TO RESPOND WITHIN TEN (10) CALENDAR DAYS FROM THE RECEIPT OF THIS COMMUNICATION SHALL CONSTITUTE A DEEMED APPROVAL BY THE ADDRESSEE OF THE ACTION REQUESTED BY THE BORROWERS OR THE COURSE OF CONDUCT PROPOSED BY THE CREDIT AGENT AND RECITED ABOVE,”

 

and if the foregoing legend is included by the Credit Agent in its communication, a Lender shall be deemed to have approved or consented to such action or course of conduct for all purposes hereunder if such Lender fails to object to such action or course of conduct by written notice to the Credit Agent within ten (10) calendar days of such Lender’s receipt of such notice.

 

End of Article 11

 

11-12



 

12.                                MISCELLANEOUS

 

12.1                         Notices

 

Except where telephonic or facsimile notice is expressly authorized by this Agreement, all communications required or permitted to be given or made under this Agreement (“ Notices ”) must be in writing and must be sent by manual delivery, overnight courier or United States mail (postage prepaid), addressed as follows (or at such other address as may be designated by Borrower or Lender in a Notice to the other):

 

If to GPF:

 

Green Park Financial Limited Partnership

7501 Wisconsin Avenue

Suite 1200

Bethesda, MD 20814-6531

Attention: Deborah A. Wilson, CFO

Facsimile: (301) 634-2150

 

 

 

If to W&D

 

Walker & Dunlop, LLC

7501 Wisconsin Avenue

Suite 1200

Bethesda, MD 20814-6531

Attention: Deborah A. Wilson, CFO

Facsimile: (301) 634-2150

 

 

 

In each case with a copy to

 

Morgan, Lewis & Bockius LLP

1701 Market Street

Philadelphia, PA 19103-2921

Attention: Michael J. Pedrick

Facsimile: (215) 963-5001

 

 

 

If to Credit Agent:

 

Bank of America, N.A.

Mail Stop: MA5-503-04-16

One Federal Street

Boston, MA 02110

Attention: Jane Huntington

Facsimile: (617) 346-5025

 

 

 

with a copy to:

 

Riemer & Braunstein LLP

Three Center Plaza

Boston, MA 02108

Attention: Ronald N. Braunstein, Esquire

Facsimile: (617) 880-3456

 

 

 

If to any Lender:

 

at the address set forth for such Lender on

Exhibit N   hereto

 

All periods of Notice will be measured from the date of delivery if delivered manually or by facsimile, from the first Business Day after the date of sending if sent by overnight courier or

 

12-1



 

from 4 days after the date of mailing if sent by United States mail, except that Notices to Credit Agent under Article 2 and Section 3.3(e) will be deemed to have been given only when actually received by Credit Agent. Each Borrower authorizes Credit Agent to accept Borrower’s Warehousing Advance Requests, shipping requests, wire transfer instructions, security delivery instructions and other routine communications concerning the Warehousing Commitment and the Collateral transmitted to Credit Agent by electronic transmission (including facsimile or e-mail) and those documents, when transmitted to Credit Agent by electronic transmission have the same force and effect as the originals.

 

12.2        Reimbursement Of Expenses; Indemnity

 

12.2(a)                       Whether or not the transactions contemplated hereby shall be consummated, Borrowers jointly and severally agrees to pay promptly: (i) all the actual and reasonable out-of-pocket costs and expenses of Credit Agent and each Lender for preparation of the Loan Documents and any consents, amendments, waivers, or other modifications thereto; (ii) the reasonable fees, expenses, and disbursements of counsel to Credit Agent and each Lender in connection with the negotiation, preparation, execution, and administration of the Loan Documents and any consents, amendments, waivers, or other modifications thereto and any other documents or matters requested by either Borrower; (iii) all other actual and reasonable out-of-pocket costs and expenses incurred by Credit Agent and each Lender in connection with the establishment of the facility, the syndication of the Warehousing Commitment and the negotiation, preparation, and execution of the Loan Documents and any consents, amendments, waivers, or other modifications thereto and the transactions contemplated thereby; and (iv) all reasonable out-of-pocket expenses (including reasonable attorneys  fees and costs, which attorneys may be employees of Credit Agent or a Lender and the fees and costs of appraisers, brokers, investment bankers or other experts retained by Credit Agent or any Lender) incurred by Credit Agent and each Lender in connection with (x) the enforcement of or preservation of rights under any of the Loan Documents against either Borrower or any other Person, or the administration thereof, (y) any refinancing or restructuring of the credit arrangements provided under this Agreement in the nature of a “work-out” or pursuant to any insolvency or bankruptcy proceedings, and (z) any litigation, proceeding or dispute whether arising hereunder or otherwise, in any way related to Credit Agent’s or any Lender’s relationship with either  Borrower, except to the extent arising out of such Person’s bad faith, gross negligence, willful misconduct or material breach of this Agreement or any other Loan Document, as finally determined by a court of competent jurisdiction. The covenants of this Section shall survive payment or satisfaction of payment of amounts owing with respect to the Warehousing Notes. The amount of all such expenses shall, until paid, bear interest at the rate applicable to principal hereunder (including the Default Rate) and be an Obligation secured by any Collateral.

 

12.2(b)                      Borrowers jointly and severally shall indemnify and hold harmless Credit Agent, Lenders and their respective parents, affiliates, officers, directors, employees, attorneys, and agents (“ Indemnified Party ”) from and against any and all claims, actions and suits whether groundless or otherwise, and from and against any and all liabilities, losses, damages and expenses of every nature and character arising out of this Agreement or any of the other Loan Documents or the transactions contemplated hereby (“ Damages ”)

 

12-2



 

including, without limitation (i) any actual or proposed use by either Borrower or any of their Subsidiaries of the proceeds of the Loan, (ii) either Borrowers or any of their Subsidiaries entering into or performing this Agreement or any of the other Loan Documents, or (iii) with respect to a Borrower and its Subsidiaries and their respective properties and assets, the violation of any applicable law, in each case including, without limitation, the reasonable fees and disbursements of counsel and allocated costs of internal counsel incurred in connection with any such investigation, litigation or other proceeding; provided , however , that no Indemnified Party shall be entitled to indemnification if a court of competent jurisdiction finally determines (all appeals having been exhausted or waived) that such Indemnified Party acted in bad faith, with willful misconduct, gross negligence, or material breach of this Agreement or any other Loan Document.  In litigation, or the preparation therefor, Credit Agent and Lenders shall be entitled to select their respective own counsel and, in addition to the foregoing indemnity, Borrowers jointly and severally agree to pay promptly the reasonable fees and expenses of such counsel. If, and to the extent that the obligations of Borrowers under this Section 12.2(b) are unenforceable for any reason, Borrowers jointly and severally agree to make the maximum contribution to the payment in satisfaction of such obligations which is permissible under applicable law. The provisions of this Section 12.2(b) shall survive the repayment of the Loan and the termination of the obligations of Credit Agent and Lenders hereunder.

 

12.3                         Financial Information

 

All financial statements and reports furnished to Credit Agent and/or any Lender under this Agreement must be prepared in accordance with GAAP, applied on a basis consistent with that applied in preparing the most recent Audited Financial Statement of GPF provided to Lender.

 

12.4                         Terms Binding Upon Successors; Survival of Representations

 

The terms and provisions of this Agreement are binding upon and inure to the benefit of Borrowers, Credit Agent, Lenders and their respective successors and permitted assigns. All of Borrowers’ representations, warranties, covenants and agreements survive the making of any Warehousing Advance, and, except where a longer period is set forth in this Agreement, remain effective for as long as the Warehousing Commitment is outstanding or there remain any Obligations to be paid or performed.

 

12.5                         Pledge to Federal Reserve Banks

 

Any Lender may at any time pledge or assign all or any portion of its rights under the Loan Documents (including, without limitation, any portion of its Warehousing Note) to any of the Federal Reserve Banks organized under Section 4 of the Federal Reserve Act, 12 U.S.C.  Section 341.  No such pledge or assignment or enforcement thereof shall release Lender from its obligations under any of the Loan Documents.

 

12.6                         Confidentiality

 

Credit Agent and Lenders agree to maintain the confidentiality of the Information (as defined below), except that Information may be disclosed (a) to their and their Affiliates’ directors,

 

12-3


 

officers, employees and agents, including accountants, legal counsel and other advisors (it being understood that the Persons to whom such disclosure is made will be informed of the confidential nature of such Information and instructed to keep such Information confidential); (b) to the extent requested by any regulatory authority; (c) to the extent required by applicable laws or regulations or by any subpoena or similar legal process; (d) to any other party to this Agreement; (e) in connection with the exercise of any remedies hereunder or under any other Loan Document or any suit, action or proceeding relating to this Agreement or any Loan Document or the enforcement of rights hereunder or thereunder; (f) to any actual or prospective counterparty (or its advisors) to any swap or to any credit derivative transaction relating to either Borrower and its obligations; (g) with the consent of a Borrower; (h) subject to an agreement containing provisions substantially the same as those of this Section, any Assignee or any prospective Assignee; and (i) to the extent such Information (i) becomes publicly available other than as a result of a breach of this Section, or (ii) becomes available to the disclosing Person on a nonconfidential basis from a source other than a Borrower.  For purposes of this Section, “Information” means all information received from a Borrower relating to such Borrower or its business, other than any such information that is available to Credit Agent or a Lender on a nonconfidential basis prior to disclosure by the Borrower; provided that, in the case of information received from a Borrower after the date hereof, such information is clearly identified at the time of delivery as confidential.  The Credit Agent and Lenders shall be considered to have complied with their respective obligations to maintain the confidentiality of Information as provided in this Section if such Person has exercised the same degree of care to maintain the confidentiality of such Information as such Person would accord to its own confidential information.

 

12.7                         Governing Law

 

This Agreement and the rights and obligations of the parties hereunder shall be construed and interpreted in accordance with the laws of the Commonwealth of Massachusetts (excluding the laws applicable to conflicts or choice of law).

 

12.8                         Amendments

 

This Agreement may not be amended, modified, or supplemented except in accordance with the provisions of Section 11.14(a) hereof.

 

12.9                         Relationship of the Parties

 

This Agreement provides for the making of Warehousing Advances by Lenders, the requirement of Warehousing Advances by Borrowers, the payment of interest on those Warehousing Advances, and the payment of certain fees by Borrowers to Credit Agent and Lenders. The relationship between Credit Agent, Lenders and Borrowers is limited to that of creditor and secured party on the part of Credit Agent and Lenders and of debtor on the part of Borrowers. The provisions of this Agreement and the other Loan Documents for compliance with financial covenants and the delivery of financial statements and other operating reports are intended solely for the benefit of Credit Agent and Lenders to protect their interests as creditors and secured party. Nothing in this Agreement creates or may be construed as permitting or obligating Credit Agent or any Lender to act as a financial or business advisor or consultant to either Borrower, as

 

12-4



 

permitting or obligating Credit Agent or any Lender to control either Borrower or to conduct either Borrower’s operations, as creating any fiduciary obligation on the part of Credit Agent or any Lender to either Borrower, or as creating any joint venture, partnership, agency or other similar relationship between Credit Agent or any Lender and either Borrower. Each Borrower acknowledges that it has had the opportunity to obtain the advice of experienced counsel of its own choice in connection with the negotiation and execution of the Loan Documents and to obtain the advice of that counsel with respect to all matters contained in the Loan Documents, including the waivers of jury trial and of punitive, consequential, special or indirect damages contained in Sections 12.16 and 12.17, respectively. Each Borrower further acknowledges that it is experienced with respect to financial and credit matters and has made its own independent decisions to apply to Credit Agent and Lenders for credit and to execute and deliver this Agreement.

 

12.10                  Severability

 

If any provision of this Agreement or any other Loan Document is declared to be illegal or unenforceable in any respect, that provision is null and void and of no force and effect to the extent of the illegality or unenforceability, and does not affect the validity or enforceability of any other provision of the Agreement or such other Loan Document.

 

12.11                  Consent to Credit References

 

Each Borrower consents to the disclosure of information regarding Borrower and its Subsidiaries and their relationships with Credit Agent and Lenders to Persons making credit inquiries to Credit Agent or a Lender. This consent is revocable by Borrowers at any time upon Notice to Credit Agent and each Lender as provided in Section 12.1.

 

12.12                  Counterparts

 

This Agreement may be executed in any number of counterparts, each of which will be deemed an original, but all of which together constitute but one and the same instrument.

 

12.13                  Headings/Captions

 

The captions or headings in this Agreement and the other Loan Documents are for convenience only and in no way define, limit or describe the scope or intent of any provision of this Agreement or any other Loan Document.

 

12.14                  Entire Agreement

 

This Agreement, the Warehousing Notes and the other Loan Documents are intended by the parties as the final, complete and exclusive statement of the transactions evidenced by thereby.  All prior or contemporaneous promises, agreements and understandings, whether oral or written, are deemed to be superseded by this Agreement, the Warehousing Notes and the other Loan Documents, and no party is relying on any promise, agreement or understanding not set forth in this Agreement, the Warehousing Notes or the other Loan Documents.

 

12-5



 

12.15      Consent to Jurisdiction

 

EACH BORROWER AGREES THAT ANY SUIT FOR THE ENFORCEMENT OF THIS AGREEMENT OR ANY OF THE OTHER LOAN DOCUMENTS MAY BE BROUGHT IN THE COURTS OF THE COMMONWEALTH OF MASSACHUSETTS OR ANY FEDERAL COURT SITTING THEREIN AND CONSENTS TO THE NONEXCLUSIVE JURISDICTION OF SUCH COURT AND SERVICE OF PROCESS IN ANY SUCH SUIT BEING MADE UPON A BORROWER BY MAIL AT THE ADDRESS SET FORTH HEREIN. EACH BORROWER HEREBY WAIVES ANY OBJECTION THAT IT MAY NOW OR HEREAFTER HAVE TO THE VENUE OF ANY SUCH SUIT OR ANY SUCH COURT OR THAT SUCH SUIT IS BROUGHT IN AN INCONVENIENT FORUM.

 

12.16                  Waiver of Jury Trial

 

BORROWERS, CREDIT AGENT, AND LENDERS (BY ACCEPTANCE OF THIS AGREEMENT) MUTUALLY HEREBY KNOWINGLY, VOLUNTARILY AND INTENTIONALLY WAIVE THE RIGHT TO A TRIAL BY JURY IN RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM BASED HEREON, ARISING OUT OF, UNDER OR IN CONNECTION WITH THIS AGREEMENT OR ANY OTHER LOAN DOCUMENTS CONTEMPLATED TO BE EXECUTED IN CONNECTION HEREWITH OR ANY COURSE OF CONDUCT, COURSE OF DEALINGS, STATEMENTS (WHETHER VERBAL OR WRITTEN) OR ACTIONS OF ANY PARTY, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY COURSE OF CONDUCT, COURSE OF DEALINGS, STATEMENTS OR ACTIONS OF CREDIT AGENT OR ANY LENDER RELATING TO THE ADMINISTRATION OF THE LOANS OR ENFORCEMENT OF THE LOAN DOCUMENTS, AND AGREE THAT NO PARTY WILL SEEK TO CONSOLIDATE ANY SUCH ACTION WITH ANY OTHER ACTION IN WHICH A JURY TRIAL CANNOT BE OR HAS NOT BEEN WAIVED.

 

12.17                  Waiver of Punitive, Consequential, Special or Indirect Damages

 

EACH BORROWER WAIVES ANY RIGHT IT MAY HAVE TO SEEK PUNITIVE, CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES FROM CREDIT AGENT OR ANY LENDER OR ANY OF CREDIT AGENT’S OR ANY LENDER’S AFFILIATES, OFFICERS, DIRECTORS, EMPLOYEES, ATTORNEYS, OR AGENTS WITH RESPECT TO ANY AND ALL ISSUES PRESENTED IN ANY ACTION, PROCEEDING, CLAIM OR COUNTERCLAIM BROUGHT BY BORROWER AGAINST CREDIT AGENT OR ANY LENDER OR ANY OF CREDIT AGENT’S OR ANY LENDER’S AFFILIATES, OFFICERS, DIRECTORS, EMPLOYEES, ATTORNEYS, OR AGENTS WITH RESPECT TO ANY MATTER ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THIS AGREEMENT OR ANY OTHER LOAN DOCUMENT. THIS WAIVER OF THE RIGHT TO SEEK PUNITIVE, CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES IS KNOWINGLY AND VOLUNTARILY GIVEN BY EACH BORROWER, AND IS INTENDED TO ENCOMPASS EACH INSTANCE AND EACH ISSUE FOR WHICH THE RIGHT TO SEEK PUNITIVE, CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES WOULD OTHERWISE APPLY. CREDIT AGENT AND EACH LENDER IS AUTHORIZED AND DIRECTED TO SUBMIT THIS AGREEMENT TO ANY COURT HAVING JURISDICTION OVER THE SUBJECT MATTER AND THE PARTIES TO THIS AGREEMENT AS CONCLUSIVE EVIDENCE OF

 

12-6



 

THIS WAIVER OF THE RIGHT TO SEEK PUNITIVE, CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES.

 

12.18                  U.S. Patriot Act

 

Each Lender hereby notifies the Borrowers that pursuant to the requirements of the USA PATRIOT Act (Title III of Pub. L. 107-56 (signed into law October 26, 2001)) (the “ Act ”), it is required to obtain, verify and record information that identifies the Borrowers, which information includes the name and address of each Borrower and other information that will allow such Lender to identify each Borrower in accordance with the Act.

 

12.19                  Merger of Obligations

 

Borrowers understand and agree that their respective duties and obligations under the Existing Agreement merge with and into this Agreement, except as expressly modified by this Agreement. Borrowers agree that their respective duties and obligations under the Existing Agreement are not satisfied or extinguished by the execution and delivery of this Agreement.

 

End of Article 12

 

12-7



 

13.                                DEFINITIONS

 

13.1                         Defined Terms

 

In addition to terms defined elsewhere in this Agreement, when used in this Agreement and, unless otherwise defined therein, in any other Loan Document (and including, unless otherwise defined therein, in any Schedules or Exhibits to this Agreement and to the other Loan Documents), capitalized terms defined below or elsewhere in this Agreement have the following meanings:

 

Advance Rate ” means, with respect to any Eligible Loan, the Advance Rate set forth in Exhibit C for that type of Eligible Loan.

 

Affiliate ” means, when used with reference to any Person, (a) each Person that, directly or indirectly, controls, is controlled by or is under common control with, the Person referred to, (b) each Person that beneficially owns or holds, directly or indirectly, 5% or more of any class of voting Equity Interests of the Person referred to, (c) each Person, 5% or more of the voting Equity Interests of which is beneficially owned or held, directly or indirectly, by the Person referred to, and (d) each of such Person’s officers, directors, joint venturers and partners. For these purposes, the term “control” (including the terms “controlled by” and “under common control with”) means the possession, directly or indirectly, of the power to direct or cause the direction of the management and policies of the Person in question.

 

Agency Security ” means a Mortgage-backed Security issued or guaranteed by Fannie Mae, Freddie Mac, or Ginnie Mae.

 

Agreement ” means this Amended and Restated Warehousing Credit and Security Agreement, either as originally executed or as it may be amended, restated, renewed or replaced, and including all Exhibits and Schedules hereto.

 

Applicable Base Rate ” means, for any day, the Base Rate for such day plus the Applicable Margin.

 

Applicable Daily Floating LIBOR Rate ” means, for any day, a rate per annum equal to the BBA LIBOR Daily Floating Rate for such day, plus the Applicable Margin.

 

Applicable Margin ” means (a) for LIBOR Loans, 2.00%, and (b) for Base Rate Loans, 2.00%.

 

Applicable Rate ” means, for any day (a) except as otherwise required from time to time pursuant to Section 3.10(b) or 3.10(g), the Applicable Daily Floating LIBOR Rate for such day, or (b) if, and only for as long as, required from time to time pursuant to Section 3.10(b) or 3.10(g), the Applicable Base Rate for each applicable day.

 

Approved Custodian ” means Fannie Mae, Freddie Mac, and any pool custodian or other Person that Credit Agent deems acceptable, in its sole discretion, to hold Mortgage Loans for inclusion in a Mortgage Pool or to hold Mortgage Loans as agent for an Investor that has issued a Purchase Commitment for those Mortgage Loans.

 

13-1



 

Assignee ” has the meaning set forth in Section 11.13(a).

 

Assignment and Acceptance ” has the meaning set forth in Section 11.13(a).

 

At Risk Mortgage Loans ” means Mortgage Loans as to which W&D has any loss sharing arrangement or otherwise are with recourse to W&D.

 

Audited Statement Date ” means the date of a Borrower’s most recent audited financial statements (and, if applicable, such Borrower’s Subsidiaries, on a consolidated basis) delivered to Credit Agent under this Agreement.

 

Authorized Representatives ” has the meaning set forth in Section 3.11.

 

Base Rate ” means, on any day, the greater of (a) the Prime Rate in effect for such day, and (b) the sum of (i) the Federal Funds Rate for such day, plus (ii) 0.50%.

 

Base Rate Loan ” means the Loan (or any particular Warehousing Advance) at any time while it bears interest at the Applicable Base Rate.

 

BBA LIBOR Daily Floating Rate ” means, for any day, a fluctuating rate of interest per annum equal to the British Bankers Association LIBOR Rate (“ BBA LIBOR ”) as published by Reuters (or other commercially available sources providing quotations of BBA LIBOR as selected by Credit Agent from time to time) as determined for each such day at approximately 11:00 a.m. London time two (2) London Banking Days prior to the date in question, for U.S. dollar deposits (for delivery on the date in question, or, if not a London Banking Day, on the immediately preceding London Banking Day) with a one month term, as adjusted from time to time in Credit Agent’s reasonable discretion for reserve requirements, deposit insurance assessment rates and other regulatory costs. If such rate is not published by Reuters or any other such commercially available source at such time for any reason, then such rate will be determined by such alternate method as reasonably selected by Credit Agent.

 

Borrower ” and “ Borrowers ” have the meanings set forth in the first paragraph of this Agreement.

 

Business Day ” means any (a) day other than Saturday or Sunday, or (b) day of the year on which offices of Bank of America, N.A. are not required or authorized by law to be closed for business in Boston, Massachusetts. If any day on which a payment is due is not a Business Day, then the payment shall be due on the next day following which is a Business Day. Further, if there is no corresponding day for a payment in the given calendar month (e.g., there is no “February 30th”), the payment shall be due on the last Business Day of the calendar month.

 

C&D System ” means Fannie Mae’s Multifamily Committing and Delivery system.

 

Calendar Quarter ” means the 3 month period beginning on each January 1, April 1, July 1 or October 1.

 

Cash Collateral Account ” means the Credit Agent access only demand deposit accounts maintained at Credit Agent and designated for receipt of the proceeds of the sale or other

 

13-2



 

disposition of Collateral (account no. 004602273011 for GPF, and account no. 14999-23825 for W&D).

 

Closing Date ” means, subject to the Borrowers’ satisfaction of the conditions set forth in Article 5, the date as of which this Agreement is executed as first above written.

 

Collateral ” has the meaning set forth in Section 4.1.

 

Collateral Documents ” means, with respect to each Mortgage Loan, (a) the Mortgage Note, the Mortgage and all other documents including, if applicable, any Security Agreement, executed in connection with or relating to the Mortgage Loan, (b) as applicable, the original lender’s ALTA Policy of Title Insurance or its equivalent, documents evidencing the FHA Commitment to Insure, or private mortgage insurance, the appraisal, the environmental assessment, the engineering report, certificates of casualty or hazard insurance, credit information on the maker of the Mortgage Note, (c) any other document listed in the applicable Exhibit B and (d) any other document that is customarily desired for inspection or transfer incidental to the purchase of any Mortgage Note by an Investor or that is customarily executed by the seller of a Mortgage Note to an Investor.

 

Committed Purchase Price ” means for an Eligible Loan (a) the dollar price as set forth in the Purchase Commitment or, if the price is not expressed in dollars, the product of the Mortgage Note Amount multiplied by the price (expressed as a percentage) as set forth in the Purchase Commitment for the Eligible Loan, or (b) if the Eligible Loan is to be used to back an Agency Security, an amount equal to the product of the Mortgage Note Amount multiplied by the price (expressed as a percentage) as set forth in the Purchase Commitment for the Agency Security.

 

Commitment Percentage ” means, as of the date of determination, as to each Lender (i) prior to the Warehousing Commitments being terminated or reduced to zero, the percentage obtained by dividing (y) such Lender’s Warehousing Commitment Amount, by (z) the aggregate Warehousing Commitment Amounts of all Lenders, and (ii) from and after the time that all Warehousing Commitments have been terminated or reduced to zero, the percentage obtained by dividing (y) the aggregate outstanding principal amount of such Lender’s Warehousing Advances by (z) the aggregate outstanding principal amount of all Warehousing Advances.  The initial Commitment Percentages of each Lender is set forth opposite the name of such Lender on Exhibit N or in the Assignment and Acceptance pursuant to which such Lender becomes a party hereto, as applicable.

 

Compliance Certificate ” means a certificate executed on behalf of a Borrower by its General Partner or other management official having principal financial accounting responsibilities, substantially in the form of Exhibit I .

 

Damages ” has the meaning set forth in Section 12.2(b).

 

Default ” means the occurrence of any event or existence of any condition that, but for the giving of Notice, the lapse of time or both would constitute an Event of Default.

 

Default Rate ” means, on any day, a rate per annum equal to the Applicable Rate on such day plus 4%.

 

13-3



 

Delinquent Lender ” has the meaning set forth in Section 11.12(g).

 

Eligible Loan ” means a Mortgage Loan that satisfies the conditions and requirements set forth in Exhibit C .

 

Eligible Mortgage Pool ” means a Mortgage Pool for which (a) an Approved Custodian has issued its initial certification, (b) there exists a Purchase Commitment covering the Agency Security to be issued on the basis of that certification and (c) the Agency Security will be delivered to Credit Agent.

 

Equity Interests ” means all shares, interests, participations or other equivalents, however, designated, of or in a Person (other than a natural person), whether or not voting, including common stock, membership interests, partnership interests, warrants, preferred stock, convertible debentures and all agreements, instruments and documents convertible, in whole or in part, into any one or more of the foregoing.

 

ERISA ” means the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 and all rules and regulations promulgated under that statute, as amended, and any successor statute, rules, and regulations.

 

ERISA Affiliate ” means any trade or business (whether or not incorporated) that is a member of a group of which a Borrower is a member and that is treated as a single employer under Section 414 of the Internal Revenue Code.

 

Event of Default ” means any of the conditions or events set forth in Section 10.1.

 

Excess Payment ” has the meaning set forth in Section 3.10(f).

 

Existing Agreement ” has the meaning specified in the Preliminary Statement.

 

Existing Agreement Obligations ” has the meaning specified in the Preliminary Statement.

 

Existing Warehousing Advances ” has the meaning specified in the Preliminary Statement.

 

Fair Market Value ” means, at any time for an Eligible Loan or a related Pledged Security (if the Eligible Loan is to be used to back a Pledged Security) as of any date of determination, the market price for such Eligible Loan or Pledged Security, determined by Credit Agent based on market data for similar Mortgage Loans or Pledged Securities and such other criteria as Credit Agent deems appropriate in its sole discretion.

 

Fannie Mae ” means Fannie Mae, a corporation created under the laws of the United States, and any successor corporation or other entity.

 

Fannie Mae Aggregation Program ” means Fannie Mae’s program for the purchase of Mortgage Loans described in the Aggregation Product Line portion of Fannie Mae’s Negotiated Transactions Guide.

 

Fannie Mae DUS Mortgage Loan ” has the meaning specified in Exhibit C .

 

13-4



 

Fannie Mae DUS Program ” means Fannie Mae’s program for the purchase of Mortgage Loans originated under Fannie Mae’s Delegated Underwriting and Servicing Guide, as amended from time to time.

 

Fannie Mae Loan Loss Reserves ” means reserves established by Borrower to absorb estimated future losses related to Fannie Mae DUS Mortgage Loans.

 

Federal Agency ” means FHA, Fannie Mae, Freddie Mac, or any other instrumentality or agency of the United States of America or corporation organized under the laws of the United States of America which insures, guaranties or purchases Mortgage Loans.

 

Fee Letters ” means those certain fee letters to be entered into on or before the Closing Date between the Credit Agent and the Borrowers and the Lenders and the Borrowers, on mutually acceptable terms and conditions.

 

FHA ” means the Federal Housing Administration and any successor agency or other entity.

 

FHA Construction Mortgage Loan ” means an FHA fully-insured Mortgage Loan for the construction or substantial rehabilitation of Multi-Family Properties.

 

FHA Mortgage Loan ” means an FHA Construction Mortgage Loan or an FHA Permanent Mortgage Loan.

 

FHA Permanent Mortgage Loan ” means an FHA fully-insured Mortgage Loan secured by a Mortgage on a Multi-Family Property.

 

FICA ” means the Federal Insurance Contributions Act and all rules and regulations promulgated under that statute, as amended, and any successor statute, rules and regulations.

 

FIRREA ” means the Financial Institutions Reform, Recovery and Enforcement Act of 1989 and all rules and regulations promulgated under that statute, as amended, and any successor statute, rules, and regulations.

 

First Mortgage ” means a Mortgage that constitutes a first Lien on the real property and improvements described in or covered by that Mortgage.

 

First Mortgage Loan ” means a Mortgage Loan secured by a First Mortgage.

 

Formation Agreement ” means the Formation Agreement dated as of January 30, 2009 by and among GPF, Walker & Dunlop, Inc., Column Guaranteed, LLC, and W&D.

 

Freddie Mac ” means Freddie Mac, or other Federal Agency to which the powers and duties of Freddie Mac have been transferred.

 

Freddie Mac Approval ” means the conditional approval of W&D as a Freddie Mac Program Plus seller, dated December 23, 2008.

 

Freddie Mac Program Plus ” means Freddie Mac’s Program Plus Seller/Servicer program.

 

13-5



 

Future Commitment ” has the meaning set forth in Section 11.12(g).

 

GAAP ” means generally accepted accounting principles set forth in opinions and pronouncements of the Accounting Principles Board and the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants and in statements and pronouncements of the Financial Accounting Standards Board, or in opinions, statements or pronouncements of any other entity approved by a significant segment of the accounting profession, which are applicable to the circumstances as of the date of determination.

 

General Partner ” means the General Partner of GPF from time to time.

 

Ginnie Mae ” means the Government National Mortgage Association or other Federal Agency as to which the powers and duties of the Governmental National Mortgage Association have been transferred.

 

Ginnie Mae Security ” means a security representing an undivided fractional interest in an Eligible Mortgage Pool, which security is issued and guaranteed as to payment of principal and interest by Ginnie Mae to an extent consistent with Ginnie Mae’s customary practices, without regard as to whether W&D collects any payments on such Mortgage Loans.

 

GPFA Term Loan ” means the term loan made by the lenders pursuant to the GPFA Term Loan Agreement.

 

GPFA Term Loan Agreement ” means that certain Amended and Restated Credit Agreement entered into as of January 30, 2009 among GPF ACQUISITION, LLC, WALKER & DUNLOP MULTIFAMILY, INC., WALKER & DUNLOP GP, LLC, GPF, W&D, each lender from time to time party thereto and BANK OF AMERICA, N.A., as Administrative Agent and Collateral Agent, as from time to time amended, modified, supplemented, restated, or extended.

 

GPF Origination Services ” means the undertaking of GPF to originate Fannie Mae DUS Mortgage Loans, to be transferred to W&D prior to sale, pursuant to the Transition Services Agreement.

 

GPF Transition Period ” means the period during which GPF provides services to W&D pursuant to the Transition Services Agreement.

 

Hedging Arrangements ” means, with respect to any Person, any agreements or other arrangements (including interest rate swap agreements, collars, derivatives, interest rate cap agreements and forward sale agreements) entered into to protect that Person against changes in interest rates or the market value of assets.

 

HUD ” means the Department of Housing and Urban Development, and any successor agency or other entity.

 

HUD MAP Lender ” means a lender approved by HUD under its Multifamily Accelerated Processing program.

 

13-6


 

Indebtedness ” means, as to any Person, all obligations, contingent and otherwise, that in accordance with GAAP should be classified upon the consolidated balance sheet of such Person and such Person’s Subsidiaries as liabilities, or to which reference should be made by footnotes thereto, including in any event and whether or not so classified: (a) all obligations for borrowed money or other extensions of credit whether secured or unsecured, absolute or contingent, including, without limitation, unmatured reimbursement obligations with respect to letters of credit or guarantees issued for the account of or on behalf of such Person and its Subsidiaries and all obligations representing the deferred purchase price of property; (b) all obligations evidenced by bonds, notes, debentures or other similar instruments; (c) all liabilities secured by any mortgage, pledge, security interest, lien, charge, or other encumbrance existing on property owned or acquired subject thereto, whether or not the liability secured thereby shall have been assumed; (d) all guarantees, endorsements and other contingent obligations whether direct or indirect, in respect of indebtedness of others or otherwise, including any obligations under Hedging Arrangements and otherwise with respect to puts, swaps, and other similar undertakings, any obligation to supply funds to or in any manner to invest in, directly or indirectly, the debtor, to purchase indebtedness, or to assure the owner of indebtedness against loss, through an agreement to purchase goods, supplies, or services for the purpose of enabling the debtor to make payment of the indebtedness held by such owner or otherwise, and the obligations to reimburse the issuer in respect of any letters of credit; and (e) that portion of all obligations arising under capital leases that is required to be capitalized on the consolidated balance sheet of such Person and its Subsidiaries; but excluding, in all events obligations arising under operating leases and accounts payable arising in the ordinary course of business.

 

Indemnified Party ” has the meaning set forth in Section 12.2(b).

 

Interim Statement Date ” means the date of the most recent unaudited financial statements of a Borrower (and, if applicable, such Borrower’s Subsidiaries, on a consolidated basis) delivered to Credit Agent under this Agreement.

 

Internal Revenue Code ” means the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, Title 26 of the United States Code, and all rules, regulations and interpretations issued under those statutory provisions, as amended, and any subsequent or successor federal income tax law or laws, rules, regulations and interpretations.

 

Investment Company Act ” means the Investment Company Act of 1940 and all rules and regulations promulgated under that statute, as amended, and any successor statute, rules and regulations.

 

Investor ” means (a) a Federal Agency, or (b) a financially responsible private institution that Credit Agent deems acceptable from time to time, in its sole discretion, to issue Purchase Commitments with respect to a particular category of Eligible Loans.

 

Late Charge ” has the meaning set forth in Section 3.9.

 

Lender ” has the meaning set forth in the first paragraph of this Agreement.

 

Leverage Ratio ” means the ratio of a Person’s Indebtedness to Tangible Net Worth, except that for purposes of calculating a Person’s Leverage Ratio, Indebtedness arising under Hedging

 

13-7



 

Arrangements, to the extent of assets arising under those Hedging Arrangements, may be excluded from that Person’s Indebtedness.

 

LIBOR Loan ” means the Loan (or any particular Warehousing Advance) at any time it is being maintained at a rate of interest based upon the BBA LIBOR Daily Floating Rate (the Applicable Rate for which shall be the Applicable Daily Floating LIBOR Rate).

 

Lien ” means any lien, mortgage, deed of trust, pledge, security interest, charge or encumbrance of any kind (including any conditional sale or other title retention agreement, any lease in the nature of such an agreement and any agreement to give any security interest).

 

Liquid Assets ” means the following unrestricted and unencumbered assets owned by a Person (and, if applicable, that Person’s Subsidiaries, on a consolidated basis) as of any date of determination: (a) cash, (b) funds on deposit in accounts with any bank located in the United States (net of the aggregate amount payable under all outstanding and unpaid checks, drafts and similar items drawn by a Person against those accounts for purposes other than funding Mortgage Loans against which Warehousing Advances have been or will be made), (c) investment grade commercial paper, (d) money market funds, and (e) marketable securities actively traded on a major U.S. exchange.

 

Liquidation Proceeds ” has the meaning set forth in Section 10.2(c)(11).

 

Loan Documents ” means this Agreement, the Warehousing Notes, any agreement of a Borrower relating to Subordinated Debt, and each other document, instrument or agreement executed by a Borrower in connection with any of those documents, instruments and agreements, or establishing or evidencing an Obligation, including, without limitation, pursuant to a Hedging Arrangement with a Lender (including Credit Agent) or an Affiliate as the counterparty, to the extent specifically hedging Borrowers’ interest bearing obligations under this Agreement and of which Hedging Arrangement Credit Agent had been provided Notice (and all details thereof) prior to its establishment, each as originally executed or as any of the same may be amended, restated, renewed or replaced.

 

London Banking Day ” is a Business Day on which banks in London are open for business and dealing in offshore dollars.

 

Margin Stock ” has the meaning assigned to that term in Regulation U of the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System, as amended.

 

Master Credit Facility Agreement ” means any agreement between a Borrower and one or more mortgagors and (if applicable) other obligors described on Exhibit E (as amended in accordance with Section 5.3), under which a Borrower makes Special Fannie Mae Mortgage Loans to those mortgagors and other obligors secured by Mortgages on Multifamily Properties, as long as Fannie Mae has agreed, on terms satisfactory to Credit Agent and Required Lenders, to issue an Agency Security in exchange for a 100% participation in each Special Fannie Mae Mortgage Loan.

 

Miscellaneous Fees and Charges ” means, without duplication, the miscellaneous fees set forth on Exhibit L and/or in the custodial agreement and related documents and fee schedule

 

13-8



 

previously, or to be, entered into by Credit Agent (or an affiliate) and either Borrower on or before the Closing Date, and all miscellaneous disbursements, charges and expenses incurred by or on behalf of Credit Agent for the handling and administration of Warehousing Advances and Collateral, including custodial fees, costs for Uniform Commercial Code, tax lien and judgment searches conducted by Credit Agent, filing fees, charges for wire transfers (outgoing and incoming) and check processing charges, charges for security delivery fees, charges for overnight delivery of Collateral to Investors, recording fees, service fees and overdraft charges. Upon not less than 3 Business Days’ prior Notice to Borrowers, Credit Agent may modify such Miscellaneous Fees and Charges (and Exhibit L , as may be appropriate) to conform to current Credit Agent practices.

 

Mortgage ” means a mortgage or deed of trust on real property that, except in the case of an FHA Construction Mortgage Loan, is improved and substantially completed.

 

Mortgage-backed Securities ” means securities that are secured or otherwise backed by Mortgage Loans.

 

Mortgage Loan ” means any loan evidenced by a Mortgage Note and secured by a Mortgage and, if applicable, a Security Agreement.

 

Mortgage Note ” means a promissory note secured by one or more Mortgages and, if applicable, one or more Security Agreements.

 

Mortgage Note Amount ” means, as of any date of determination, the then outstanding and unpaid principal amount of a Mortgage Note (whether or not an additional amount is available to be drawn under that Mortgage Note).

 

Mortgage Pool ” means a pool of one or more Pledged Loans on the basis of which a Mortgage-backed Security is to be issued.

 

Multiemployer Plan ” means a “multiemployer plan” as defined in Section 4001(a)(3) of ERISA, to which either Borrower or any ERISA Affiliate of a Borrower has any obligation with respect to its employees.

 

Multifamily Property ” means real property that contains or that will contain more than 4 dwelling units.

 

Non-Usage Fee ” has the meaning set forth in Section 3.4.

 

Notices ” has the meaning set forth in Section 12.1.

 

Obligations ” means all indebtedness, obligations and liabilities of Borrowers or either of them to Credit Agent or Lenders (whether now existing or arising after the date of this Agreement, voluntary or involuntary, joint or several, direct or indirect, absolute or contingent, liquidated or unliquidated, or decreased or extinguished and later increased and however created or incurred), including, without limitation, Borrowers’ several or joint and several obligations and liabilities to Credit Agent and Lenders (a) under the Loan Documents, (b) for disbursements made by Credit Agent or a Lender for a Borrower’s account, (c) for overdrafts (which, if permitted, shall be at

 

13-9



 

Credit Agent’s sole discretion), (d) for automated clearinghouse exposure, (e) under Hedging Arrangements with a Lender (including Credit Agent) or an Affiliate as the counterparty, to the extent specifically hedging Borrowers’ interest bearing obligations under this Agreement and of which Hedging Arrangement Credit Agent had been provided Notice (and all details thereof) prior to its establishment, and (f) under any cash management or related agreements.

 

Operating Accounts ” means the demand deposit accounts maintained at Credit Agent respectively in Borrower’s name and designated for funding that portion of each Eligible Loan not funded by a Warehousing Advance made against that Eligible Loan and for returning any excess payment from an Investor for a Pledged Loan or Pledged Security (as of the date hereof, account no. 004602273516 with respect to GPF and account no. 004625970919 with respect to W&D).

 

Operating Agreement ” means the Operating Agreement of W&D dated as of January 30, 2009 as amended pursuant to Amendment No. 1, Amendment No. 2, and Amendment No. 3, each dated as of July 22, 2009.

 

Other Fannie Mae Mortgage Loan ” has the meaning set forth in Exhibit C .

 

Other Taxes ” has the meaning set forth in Section 3.10(d).

 

Overdraft Advance ” has the meaning set forth in Section 3.6.

 

Participant ” has the meaning set forth in Section 11.13(d).

 

Partner ” means any Person holding an Equity Interest in a Borrower.

 

Partnership Agreement ” means that certain Second Amended and Restated Agreement of Limited Partnership of Green Park Financial Limited Partnership dated as of November 12, 1996, as the same may be amended or supplemented from time to time.

 

Person ” means and includes natural persons, corporations, limited liability companies, limited liability partnerships, limited partnerships, general partnerships, joint stock companies, joint ventures, associations, companies, trusts, banks, trust companies, land trusts, business trusts or other organizations, whether or not legal entities, and governments and agencies and political subdivisions of those governments.

 

Plan ” means each employee benefit plan (whether in existence on the date of this Agreement or established after that date), as that term is defined in Section 3 of ERISA, maintained for the benefit of directors, officers or employees of a Borrower or any ERISA Affiliate.

 

Pledged Hedging Accounts ” has the meaning set forth in Section 4.1(g).

 

Pledged Hedging Arrangements ” has the meaning set forth in Section 4.1(g).

 

Pledged Investment Property ” means Eligible Investments held by a Borrower in a Pledged Account.

 

13-10



 

Pledged Loans ” has the meaning set forth in Section 4.1(b).

 

Pledged Securities ” has the meaning set forth in Section 4.1(c).

 

Prime Rate ” means on any day, the rate of interest per annum then most recently established by the Credit Agent as its “prime rate,” it being understood and agreed that such rate is set by Credit Agent as a general reference rate of interest, taking into account such factors as Credit Agent may deem appropriate, that it is not necessarily the lowest or best rate actually charged to any customer or a favored rate, that it may not correspond with future increases or decreases in interest rates charged by other lenders or market rates in general, and that Credit Agent may make various business or other loans at rates of interest having no relationship to such rate.  If Credit Agent ceases to exist or to establish or publish a prime rate from which the Prime Rate is then determined, the applicable variable rate from which the Prime Rate is determined thereafter shall be instead the prime rate reported in The Wall Street Journal (or the average prime rate if a high and a low prime rate are therein reported), and the Prime Rate shall change without notice with each change in such prime rate as of the date such change is reported.

 

Prohibited Transaction ” has the meanings set forth for such term in Section 4975 of the Internal Revenue Code and Section 406 of ERISA.

 

Property ” means a Multifamily Property securing a Mortgage Loan.

 

Purchase Commitment ” means an unconditional, fixed price, irrevocable written commitment, in form and substance satisfactory to Credit Agent, issued in favor of a Borrower by an Investor under which that Investor commits to purchase Mortgage Loans or Mortgage-backed Securities.

 

Rating Agency ” means any nationally recognized statistical rating organization that in the ordinary course of its business rates Mortgage-backed Securities.

 

Reference Rate ” means, as applicable for determining the Applicable Rate for any day, the BBA LIBOR Daily Floating Rate or the Base Rate for such day.

 

Register ” has the meaning set forth in Section 11.13(b).

 

Release Amount ” has the meaning set forth in Section 4.3(f).

 

Required Lenders ” means, as of any particular date (a) if no Warehousing Advances are outstanding, Lenders whose Warehousing Commitment Amounts aggregate at least 51% of the Warehousing Commitment Amounts of all Lenders who are not Delinquent Lenders, or (b) if any Warehousing Advances are outstanding, Lenders holding at least 51% of the aggregate unpaid principal amount of all then outstanding Warehousing Advances of Lenders who are not Delinquent Lenders.  No Lender which is a Delinquent Lender shall be considered a “Lender” for the purposes of determining the “Required Lenders.”

 

Restriction List ” and “ Restriction Lists ” means each and every list of Persons who are Specially Designated Nationals and Blocked Persons or otherwise are Persons to whom the Government of the United States prohibits or otherwise restricts the provision of financial services. For the purposes of this Agreement, Restriction Lists include the list of Specially Designated Nationals

 

13-11



 

and Blocked Persons established pursuant to Executive Order 13224 (September 23, 2001) and maintained by the U.S. Department of the Treasury’s Office of Foreign Assets Control or any successor agency or other entity, U.S. Department of the Treasury, current as of the day the Restriction List is used for purposes of comparison in accordance with the requirements of this Agreement.

 

Second Mortgage ” means a Mortgage that constitutes a second Lien on the real property and improvements described in or covered by that Mortgage.

 

Second Mortgage Loan ” means a Mortgage Loan secured by a Second Mortgage.

 

Security Agreement ” means a security agreement or other agreement that creates a Lien on personal property, including furniture, fixtures and equipment, to secure repayment of a Mortgage Loan.

 

Servicing Contract ” means, with respect to any Person, the arrangement, whether or not in writing, under which that Person has the right to service Mortgage Loans.

 

Servicing Portfolio ” means, as to any Person, the unpaid principal balance of Mortgage Loans serviced by that Person under Servicing Contracts, minus the principal balance of all Mortgage Loans that are serviced by that Person for others under subservicing arrangements.

 

Servicing Portfolio Report ” has the meaning set forth in Section 7.3(a).

 

Shipped Period ” means the maximum number of days specified in Exhibit C during which a Warehousing Advance may remain outstanding against a Pledged Loan that has been sent to (a) an Investor or a custodian for an Investor for examination and purchase under a Purchase Commitment, (b) an Approved Custodian for examination and inclusion in an Eligible Mortgage Pool or (c) a pool custodian for examination and inclusion in a Mortgage Pool.

 

Special Fannie Mae Bailee Agreement ” means an agreement among Borrower, Lender and Fannie Mae, on the form prescribed by Credit Agent and acceptable to Fannie Mae, with respect to Credit Agent’s security interest (for itself and Lenders) in Borrower’s interest in one or more Mortgage Notes evidencing a Special Fannie Mae Mortgage Loan.

 

Special Fannie Mae Mortgage Loan ” has the meaning set forth in Exhibit C .

 

Special Fannie Mae Pool Purchase Contract ” means an agreement, on terms satisfactory to Credit Agent, under which Fannie Mae agrees to purchase a 100% participation in Special Fannie Mae Mortgage Loans in exchange for Agency Securities.

 

Specially Designated Nationals or Blocked Persons ” means Persons which are owned or controlled by, or acting on behalf of, the government of target countries or are associated with international narcotics trafficking or terrorism.

 

Statement Date ” means the Audited Statement Date or the Interim Statement Date, as applicable.

 

13-12



 

Subordinated Debt ” means all indebtedness of a Borrower for borrowed money that is effectively subordinated in right of payment to all present and future Obligations either (1) under a Subordination of Debt Agreement on the form prescribed by Credit Agent or (2) otherwise on terms acceptable to Credit Agent.

 

Subordinate Mortgage ” means a Mortgage that constitutes a Lien that is not a first Lien on the real property and improvements described in or covered by that Mortgage.

 

Subordinate Mortgage Loan ” means a Mortgage Loan secured by a Subordinate Mortgage for which all prior Mortgage Loans on that Property are being serviced by a Borrower under a Servicing Contract, and for which all prior Mortgage Loans on that Property have been sold to, or are subject to a Purchase Commitment issued by, Fannie Mae or Freddie Mac.

 

Subordination of Debt Agreement ” has the meaning set forth in Section 5.1(b).

 

Subsidiary ” means any corporation, partnership, association or other business entity in which more than 50% of the shares of stock or other ownership interests having voting power for the election of directors, managers, trustees or other Persons performing similar functions is at the time owned or controlled by any Person either directly or indirectly through one or more Subsidiaries of that Person.

 

Tangible Net Worth ” means the excess of a Person’s (and, if applicable, that Person’s Subsidiaries, on a consolidated basis) total assets minus total liabilities as of the date of determination, each determined in accordance with GAAP applied in a manner consistent with the most recent audited financial statements delivered to Credit Agent under this Agreement, plus Fannie Mae Loan Loss Reserves. For purposes of calculating a Person’s Tangible Net Worth, advances or loans to partners, employees, Affiliates or shareholders, members, directors, officers, or employees of any general partner, investments in Affiliates, assets pledged to secure any liabilities not included in the Indebtedness of that Person, intangible assets, those other assets that would be deemed by HUD to be non-acceptable in calculating adjusted net worth in accordance with its requirements in effect as of that date, as those requirements appear in the “Consolidated Audit Guide for Audits of HUD Programs,” and other assets Credit Agent deems unacceptable, in its sole discretion, must be excluded from that Person’s total assets.

 

Taxes ” has the meaning set forth in Section 3.10(c).

 

Third Mortgage ” means a Mortgage that constitutes a third Lien on the real property and improvements described in or covered by that Mortgage.

 

Third Mortgage Loan ” means a Mortgage Loan secured by a Third Mortgage.

 

Third Party Originated Loan ” means a Mortgage Loan originated and funded by a third party (other than with funds provided by a Borrower at closing to purchase the Mortgage Loan) and subsequently purchased by a Borrower.  “ Third Party Originated Loan ” shall not include a Mortgage Loan originated by GPF pursuant to the Transition Services Agreement and subsequently contributed to W&D for sale in accordance with the provisions thereof.

 

13-13



 

Transaction Documents means the Formation Agreement, the Operating Agreement, the Transition Services Agreement, and each document, instrument and agreement executed and delivered by any Person in connection with the Transaction.

 

Transition Services Agreement means the Transition Services Agreement dated as of January 30, 2009 by and among GPF, Walker & Dunlop, Inc., Column Guaranteed, LLC, and W&D.

 

Trust Receipt ” means a trust receipt in a form approved by and under which Credit Agent may deliver any document relating to the Collateral to Borrower for correction or completion.

 

Unused Portion ” has the meaning set forth in Section 3.4.

 

Used Portion ” has the meaning set forth in Section 3.4.

 

USPAP ” means the Appraisal Foundation’s Uniform Standards of Professional Appraisal Practice, as in effect from time to time.

 

W&D Fannie Mae DUS Agreements ” means the various agreements between W&D and Fannie Mae establishing W&D as a Fannie Mae-approved seller/servicer under the Fannie Mae DUS Program, and the terms and conditions thereof.

 

Warehouse Period ” means, for any Eligible Loan, the maximum number of days a Warehousing Advance against that type of Eligible Loan may remain outstanding as set forth in Exhibit C .

 

Warehousing Advance ” means a disbursement by Lenders under Section 1.1.

 

Warehousing Advance Request ” has the meaning set forth in Section 2.1.

 

Warehousing Collateral Value ” means, as of any date of determination, (a) with respect to any Eligible Loan, the lesser of (1) the amount of any Warehousing Advance made, or that could be made, against such Eligible Loan under Exhibit C or (2) an amount equal to the Advance Rate for the applicable type of Eligible Loan multiplied by the Fair Market Value of such Eligible Loan; and (b) if Eligible Loans have been exchanged for Agency Securities, the lesser of (1) the amount of any Warehousing Advances outstanding against the Eligible Loans backing the Agency Securities or (2) an amount equal to the Advance Rates for the applicable types of Eligible Loans backing the Agency Securities multiplied by the Fair Market Value of the Agency Securities.

 

Warehousing Commitment ” means the obligation of each Lender to make Warehousing Advances to Borrowers under Section 1.1.

 

Warehousing Commitment Amount ” means, for any Lender, at any date, that dollar amount designated opposite such Lender’s name on Exhibit N as its Warehousing Commitment Amount, as the same may be amended from time to time in accordance with this Agreement.

 

Warehousing Credit Limit ” means the sum of the Warehousing Commitment Amounts of all of the Lenders.

 

13-14



 

Warehousing Maturity Date ” has the meaning set forth in Section 1.2.

 

Warehousing Note ” has the meaning set forth in Section 1.3.

 

13.2                         Other Definitional Provisions; Terms of Construction

 

13.2(a)                       Accounting terms not otherwise defined in this Agreement have the meanings given to those terms under GAAP.

 

13.2(b)                      Defined terms may be used in the singular or the plural, as the context requires.

 

13.2(c)                       All references to time of day mean the then applicable time in Boston, Massachusetts, unless otherwise expressly provided.

 

13.2(d)                      References to Sections, Exhibits, Schedules and like references are to Sections, Exhibits, Schedules and the like of this Agreement unless otherwise expressly provided.

 

13.2(e)                       The words “include,” “includes” and “including” are deemed to be followed by the phrase “without limitation.”

 

13.2(f)                         Unless the context in which it is used otherwise clearly requires, the word “or” has the inclusive meaning represented by the phrase “and/or.”

 

13.2(g)                      All incorporations by reference of provisions from other agreements are incorporated as if such provisions were fully set forth into this Agreement, and include all necessary definitions and related provisions from those other agreements. All provisions from other agreements incorporated into this Agreement by reference survive any termination of those other agreements until the Obligations of Borrowers under this Agreement and the Warehousing Notes are irrevocably paid in full and the Warehousing Commitment is terminated.

 

13.2(h)                      All references to the Uniform Commercial Code are deemed to be references to the Uniform Commercial Code in effect on the date of this Agreement in the applicable jurisdiction.

 

13.2(i)                          Unless the context in which it is used otherwise clearly requires, all references to days, weeks and months mean calendar days, weeks and months.

 

End of Article 13

 

13-15



 

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have caused this Agreement to be duly executed as of the date first above written.

 

 

GREEN PARK FINANCIAL LIMITED PARTNERSHIP, a District of Columbia limited partnership

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

By:

WALKER & DUNLOP GP, LLC,

 

 

a Delaware limited liability company

 

Its:

Managing General Partner

 

 

 

 

 

By

/s/ William Walker

 

 

Name:

William M. Walker

 

 

Title:

Managing Member

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

WALKER & DUNLOP, LLC

 

 

 

 

By

/s/William M. Walker

 

Name:

William M. Walker

 

Title:

President and Chief Executive Officer

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

BANK OF AMERICA, N.A., as Credit Agent and a Lender

 

 

 

 

 

By

/s/Jane E. Huntington

 

Name:

Jane E. Huntington

 

Title:

Senior Vice President

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

TD BANK, N.A., as a Lender

 

 

 

 

 

By

/s/William J. Olsen

 

Name:

William J. Olsen

 

Title:

Regional Vice President

 

S-1




Exhibit 10.23

 

FIRST AMENDMENT TO AMENDED AND RESTATED WAREHOUSING

CREDIT AND SECURITY AGREEMENT

 

THIS FIRST AMENDMENT TO AMENDED AND RESTATED WAREHOUSING CREDIT AND SECURITY AGREEMENT (this “ Amendment ”) is made as of November 30, 2009, by and between GREEN PARK FINANCIAL LIMITED PARTNERSHIP and WALKER & DUNLOP, LLC (collectively, the “ Borrowers ”), BANK OF AMERICA, N.A., as credit agent (the “ Credit Agent ”), and the lenders party hereto (the “ Lenders ”). Capitalized terms used herein without definition have the meanings specified therefor in that certain Amended and Restated Warehousing Credit and Security Agreement dated as of October 15, 2009, among the Borrowers, the Credit Agent, and the Lenders (the “ Loan Agreement ”).

 

R E C I T A L S

 

The Borrowers, the Credit Agent, and the Lenders desire to amend the Loan Agreement on the terms and conditions set forth herein.

 

GPF has no Warehousing Advances outstanding under the Loan Agreement, and does not anticipate any new Warehousing Advances being required to be made to it pursuant to the Transition Services Agreement (as defined in the Loan Agreement).

 

NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the agreements of the parties set forth herein, and for other good and valuable consideration, the receipt and sufficiency of which are hereby acknowledged, the parties hereto agree as follows:

 

1.              Amendment . Effective as of the Effective Date (as hereafter defined), the Loan Agreement is amended as follows:

 

(a)          Clause (a) of Section 1.2 of the Loan Agreement is hereby amended by replacing the date “November 30, 2009” where it appears therein with the date “November 29, 2010.”

 

(b)          Section 8.8 is hereby deleted in its entirety and replaced with the following:

 

“8.8      Minimum Tangible Net Worth

 

Permit W&D’s Adjusted Tangible Net Worth at any time to be (i) less than $75,000,000, to be tested on the last day of each Fiscal Quarter occurring, or (ii) otherwise not in compliance with applicable requirements of HUD, Investors (including Freddie Mac) or Fannie Mae.”

 

(c)           Section 13.1 is hereby amended by deleting the following definitions in their entirety, and replacing them with the following:

 

Applicable Margin ” means (a) for LIBOR Loans, 2.75%, and (b) for Base Rate Loans, 2.75%.

 



 

Required Lenders ” means, as of any particular date (a) if no Warehousing Advances are outstanding, Lenders whose Warehousing Commitment Amounts aggregate at least 51% of the Warehousing Commitment Amounts of all Lenders who are not Delinquent Lenders, or (b) if any Warehousing Advances are outstanding, Lenders holding at least 51% of the aggregate unpaid principal amount of all then outstanding Warehousing Advances of Lenders who are not Delinquent Lenders; provided, however, that at any time that the Credit Agent holds not less than the lesser of (a) a Commitment Percentage equal to or greater than 33-1/3%, or (b) a Warehousing Commitment Amount of not less than $50,000,000, the term “Required Lenders” shall include the Credit Agent. No Lender which is a Delinquent Lender shall be considered a “Lender” for the purposes of determining the “Required Lenders.”

 

(d)          Exhibit C to the Loan Agreement is hereby deleted in its entirety and replaced with the form of Exhibit C annexed hereto.

 

(e)           GPF is hereby removed as a Borrower from the Loan Agreement for all purposes, and all applicable corresponding changes reflecting the deletion of GPF are deemed made.

 

2.               Accordion Option .

 

(a)          Capitalized Terms used in this Section 2 which are not defined in the Loan Agreement or defined elsewhere in this Amendment have the meanings specified therefor in Section 2(g), below.

 

(b)          At the request of the Borrowers as provided herein, the Warehousing Commitment Amount may be increased by an amount of up to $50,000,000 (bringing the total Warehousing Commitment Amount to a maximum of $150,000,000), upon the Credit Agent’s determination that the Accordion Conditions have been fully satisfied. In such event, subject to all applicable provisions of the Accordion Loan Documents, the Lenders and the Accordion Lenders shall thereafter make Warehousing Advances to the Borrowers based upon the increased Warehousing Commitment Amount and their respective Commitment Percentages. The obligations of the Lenders and the Accordion Lenders shall be several and not joint.

 

(c)           With respect to any increase to the Warehousing Commitment Amount requested by the Borrowers, the Borrowers hereby acknowledge and agree as follows:

 

(i)             The request for such increase (the “ Accordion Notice ”) must (A) be in writing, and (B) specify the amount of the requested increase to the Warehousing Commitment Amount, which requested increase (x) may not exceed $50,000,000, and (y) must be at least $15,000,000.

 

2



 

(ii)            Credit Agent will manage all aspects of the proposed syndication of the requested increase to the Warehousing Commitment Amount, including, without limitation, the final allocations of the increased Warehousing Commitment Amount among the Lenders and the Accordion Lenders, the respective Commitment Percentages, and the allocation of interest and fees.

 

(iii)           After the Borrowers’ request to increase the Warehousing Commitment Amount, the Borrowers shall cooperate with the Credit Agent in connection with the efforts of the Credit Agent to achieve a Successful Accordion Syndication, to include, among other things: (a) permitting and facilitating direct contact during the syndication between each Borrower’s senior officers, representatives and advisors, on the one hand, and prospective lenders, on the other hand, at such times and places as the Credit Agent may reasonably request; (b) providing to the Credit Agent and prospective Accordion Lenders all financial and other information as they may reasonably request, including, without limitation, projections and forecasts; and (c) assistance in the preparation of a confidential information memorandum and other marketing materials to be used in connection with the proposed syndication of the requested increased Warehousing Commitment Amount.

 

(d)          The Borrowers may give only one Accordion Notice.

 

(e)           The Credit Agent (i) is only agreeing to use reasonable and customary efforts to achieve a Successful Accordion Syndication, (ii) is not, nor is any Lender, agreeing or committing to increase the amount of its Warehousing Commitment, and (iii) is not guarantying that any efforts to achieve a Successful Accordion Syndication will succeed.

 

(f)           Credit Agent may elect, in its discretion, to abandon its efforts to achieve Successful Accordion Syndication if it determines that such efforts are not likely to succeed. In such event, (i) the Credit Agent and Lenders shall have no obligation to increase the existing Warehousing Commitment Amount, (ii) the Credit Agent and the Lenders shall have no liability to the Borrowers or any other Person with respect to the efforts undertaken by the Credit Agent in connection therewith or the failure to achieve a Successful Accordion Syndication, and (iii) the Borrowers promptly shall reimburse the Credit Agent for all costs and expenses incurred by the Credit Agent in its syndication efforts.

 

(g)           As used herein, the following terms have the following meanings:

 

Accordion Conditions ” means the satisfaction of all of the following conditions precedent, each as determined by the Credit Agent:

 

(a)            A Successful Accordion Syndication shall have been achieved (including, without limitation, the execution and delivery by all applicable parties

 

3



 

of all Accordion Loan Documents and the satisfaction of all applicable conditions set forth therein) within thirty (30) days after the Credit Agent’s receipt of the Accordion Notice;

 

(b)          As of the date of the Accordion Notice and as of the effective date of the increase to the Warehousing Commitment Amount, no Default or Event of Default shall have then occurred and be continuing;

 

(c)           The Borrowers shall have paid all fees required by this Agreement and in any other agreement between the Borrowers and the Credit Agent; and

 

(d)          The Borrowers shall have paid all fees, costs, and expenses (including, without limitation, all attorneys’ reasonable fees) incurred by the Credit Agent, the Lenders, and the Accordion Lenders in connection with the Successful Accordion Syndication and the preparation, negotiation, execution, and delivery of the Accordion Loan Documents.

 

Commitment Percentage ” means, in the event of a Successful Accordion Syndication, the respective Warehousing Commitments of the Lenders and each Accordion Lender, expressed as a percentage of the total increased Warehousing Commitment Amount.

 

Accordion Lender ” means each lender, acceptable to the Credit Agent, in its discretion, and reasonably acceptable to the Borrowers, which makes an Accordion Commitment and becomes a “Lender” obligated to make Warehousing Advances pursuant to the terms and conditions of the Accordion Loan Documents.

 

Accordion Loan Documents ” means such amendments, restatements, and modifications of the existing Loan Documents, together with any additional documents, instruments and agreements, deemed necessary or desirable in the sole discretion of the Credit Agent to evidence and effectuate a Successful Accordion Syndication, and the resulting increase to the Warehousing Commitment Amount, all of the foregoing in form and substance satisfactory to the Credit Agent, the Borrower, the Accordion Lenders, and the Required Lenders if the Lenders would be adversely affected thereby (or if otherwise required by this Agreement).

 

Successful Accordion Syndication ” means the arrangement of commitments from one or more Accordion Lenders by the Credit Agent, on terms and conditions acceptable to the Credit Agent in all respects, resulting in an increase in the Warehousing Commitment Amount by the amount requested by the Borrowers in the Accordion Notice (or such lesser amount as may be agreed upon by the Credit Agent and the Borrower) pursuant to the Accordion Loan Documents.

 

4



 

3.               Acknowledgments by Borrowers . The Borrowers acknowledge, confirm and agree that:

 

(a)            This Amendment is a Loan Document, and all references in any Loan Document to the Borrowers’ Obligations shall mean and include the Obligations as amended by this Amendment.

 

(b)            Except as provided herein, the terms and conditions of the Loan Agreement and the other Loan Documents remain in full force and effect, and the Borrowers hereby (x) ratify, confirm and reaffirm all and singular of the terms and conditions of the Loan Agreement and the other Loan Documents, and (y) represent and warrant that:

 

(i)            no Default or Event of Default exists as of the date the Borrowers execute this Amendment, nor will a Default or Event of Default exist as of the Effective Date.

 

(ii)           the representations and warranties made by the Borrowers in the Loan Agreement and the other Loan Documents are true and correct as of the date hereof, and will be true and correct as of the Effective Date, except as to (1) matters which speak to a specific date, (2) changes in the ordinary course to the extent permitted and contemplated by the Loan Agreement, and (3) as reflected in the updated Exhibits annexed to this Amendment.

 

(iii)          the Borrowers have the power and authority and legal right to execute, deliver and perform this Amendment, have taken all necessary action to authorize the execution, delivery, and performance of this Amendment, and the person executing and delivering this Amendment on behalf of each Borrower is duly authorized to do so.

 

(iv)         this Amendment constitutes the legal, valid and binding obligation of the Borrowers, enforceable against the Borrowers in accordance with its terms, subject to the effect of applicable bankruptcy and other similar laws affecting the rights of creditors generally and the effect of equitable principles whether applied in an action at law or a suit in equity.

 

(v)          Exhibits   D , E , F , G , H , J , and K attached hereto are true, correct, and complete updates as of the Effective Date of the corresponding Exhibits to the Loan Agreement.

 

(c)            The Borrowers shall promptly pay upon receipt of an invoice or statement therefor the reasonable attorneys’ fees and expenses and disbursements incurred by the Credit Agent and the Lenders in connection with this Amendment and any prior matters involving the Loan.

 

5



 

(d)              Each Borrower acknowledges that it has no defenses, set offs or counterclaims with respect to any of its obligations to the Credit Agent or the Lenders, and hereby releases, waives, and forever relinquishes all claims, demands, obligations, liabilities, and causes of action whatever kind or nature, whether known or unknown, which it has or may have as of the date hereof and as of the Effective Date against the Credit Agent or any Lender, or their respective affiliates, officers, directors, employees, agents, attorneys, independent contractors, and predecessors, together with their successors and assigns, directly or indirectly arising out of or based upon any matter connected with the Loan Agreement or the administration thereof or the obligations created thereby (including pursuant to this Amendment).

 

4.              Conditions Precedent . This Amendment shall be effective upon the satisfaction by the Borrowers of, or written waiver by the Credit Agent and the Lenders of, the following conditions and any other conditions set forth in this Amendment, by no later than 4:00 p.m. (Boston time) on the date of this Amendment, as such time and date may be extended in writing by the Credit Agent and the Lenders, in their sole discretion (with the date, if at all, by which such conditions have been satisfied or waived being referred to herein as, the “ Effective Date ”), failing which this Amendment and all related documents shall be null and void at the option of the Credit Agent and the Lenders:

 

(a)            Delivery by the Borrowers to the Credit Agent and each Lender of the following:

 

(i)            This Amendment, duly executed by the Borrowers, the Credit Agent and each Lender.

 

(ii)           An opinion of counsel to the Borrowers in form and substance satisfactory to the Credit Agent and the Lenders.

 

(iii)          Such other documents as the Credit Agent or any Lender reasonably may require, duly executed and delivered.

 

(b)            No Default or Event of Default shall have occurred and be continuing.

 

(c)            In addition to all other expense payment and reimbursement obligations of the Borrowers under the Loan Agreement and other Loan Documents, the Borrowers will, promptly following their receipt of an appropriate invoice therefor, pay or reimburse the Credit Agent and each Lender for all of their respective reasonable out of pocket costs and expenses (including, without limitation, reasonable attorneys’ fees and expenses and disbursements) incurred in connection with the preparation of this Amendment and any other documents in connection herewith and the matters addressed in and contemplated by, this Amendment.

 

(d)            The Borrowers shall have executed and delivered to (i) the Credit Agent, and (ii) the Lenders, separate Fee Letters, in form and substance acceptable to the Credit

 

6



 

Agent and the Lenders, respectively, and the Credit Agent and the Lenders shall have received payment in immediately available funds of all amounts payable thereunder in connection with this Amendment.

 

5.              Miscellaneous .

 

(a)            This Amendment shall be governed in accordance with the internal laws of the Commonwealth of Massachusetts (without regard to conflict of laws principles) as an instrument under seal.

 

(b)            This Amendment may be executed in one or more counterparts, each of which when so executed shall be deemed to be an original, but all of which when taken together shall constitute one and the same instrument. Signatures transmitted electronically (including by fax or e-mail) shall have the same legal effect as originals, but each party nevertheless shall deliver original signed counterparts of this Amendment to each other party, upon request.

 

(c)            This Amendment constitutes the complete agreement among the Borrowers, the Credit Agent, and the Lenders with respect to the subject matter of this Amendment and supersedes all prior agreements and understanding relating to the subject matter of this Amendment, and may not be modified, altered, or amended except in accordance with the Loan Agreement.

 

(d)            Time is of the essence with respect to all aspects of this Amendment.

 

[Remainder of page intentionally left blank]

 

7



 

Executed as a sealed instrument as of the date first above written.

 

 

GREEN PARK FINANCIAL LIMITED

PARTNERSHIP, a District of Columbia limited

partnership

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

By:

WALKER & DUNLOP GP, LLC,

 

 

a Delaware limited liability company

 

Its:

Managing General Partner

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

By

/s/ Deborah A. Wilson

 

 

Its:

SVP-CFO

 

 

 

 

 

WALKER & DUNLOP, LLC

 

 

 

 

 

By

/s/ Deborah A. Wilson

 

Name:

Deborah A. Wilson

 

Title:

SVP-CFO

 

 

 

 

 

BANK OF AMERICA, N.A., as Credit Agent and a

 

Lender

 

 

 

 

 

By

/s/ Jane E. Huntington

 

Name:

Jane E. Huntington

 

Title:

Senior Vice President

 

 

 

 

 

TD BANK, N.A., as a Lender

 

 

 

 

 

By

/s/ William J. Olsen

 

Name:

William J. Olsen

 

Title:

Regional Vice President

 

Signature page to First Amendment

 




Exhibit 10.24

 

SECOND AMENDMENT TO AMENDED AND RESTATED WAREHOUSING
CREDIT AND SECURITY AGREEMENT

 

THIS SECOND AMENDMENT TO AMENDED AND RESTATED WAREHOUSING CREDIT AND SECURITY AGREEMENT (this “ Amendment ”) is made as of March  26, 2010, by and among WALKER & DUNLOP, LLC (the “ Borrower ”), BANK OF AMERICA, N.A., as credit agent (the “ Credit Agent ”), and the lenders party hereto (the “ Lenders ”). Capitalized terms used herein without definition have the meanings specified therefor in that certain Amended and Restated Warehousing Credit and Security Agreement dated as of October  15, 2009, among the Borrower, Green Park Financial Limited Partnership, the Credit Agent, and the Lenders (as amended to date, the “ Loan Agreement ”).

 

RECITALS

 

At the request of the Borrower, the Credit Agent and the Lenders have agreed to increase the Warehousing Credit Limit to $150,000,000, and Bank of America and TD Bank each have agreed to increase their respective Warehousing Commitment Amounts to $75,000,000.

 

The Borrower, the Credit Agent, and the Lenders desire to amend the Loan Agreement on the terms and conditions set forth herein.

 

NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the agreements of the parties set forth herein, and for other good and valuable consideration, the receipt and sufficiency of which are hereby acknowledged, the parties hereto agree as follows:

 

1.                                       Amendment . Effective as of the Effective Date (as hereafter defined), the Loan Agreement is amended as follows:

 

(a)                                  The definition of the term “ Warehousing Credit Limit ” as set forth in Section 13.1 of the Loan Agreement is hereby deleted in its entirety and replaced with the following:

 

Warehousing Credit Limit ” means $150,000,000.00.”

 

(b)                                  Exhibit N to the Loan Agreement is hereby deleted and replaced with the form of Exhibit N to this Amendment.

 

2.                                       Termination of Accordion Option . The accordion option established pursuant to the First Amendment to the Loan Agreement dated as of November  30, 2009 is hereby terminated.

 

3.                                       Replacement Warehousing Notes . To evidence the respective new Warehousing Commitment Amounts of the Lenders as set forth above, on or before the Effective Date the Borrower will execute and deliver directly to the Lenders amended and restated Warehousing Notes, each dated as of the Effective Date and each in the face amount of $75,000,000 (the “ Replacement Notes ”), to replace and supersede their respective existing Warehousing Notes.

 



 

4.                                       Acknowledgments by Borrower . The Borrower acknowledges, confirms and agrees that:

 

(a)                                  This Amendment is a Loan Document, and all references in any Loan Document to the Borrower’s Obligations shall mean and include the Obligations as amended by this Amendment.

 

(b)                                  Except as provided herein, the terms and conditions of the Loan Agreement and the other Loan Documents remain in full force and effect, and the Borrower hereby (x) ratifies, confirms and reaffirms all and singular of the terms and conditions of the Loan Agreement and the other Loan Documents, and (y) represents and warrants that:

 

(i)                                      No Default or Event of Default exists as of the date the Borrower executes this Amendment, nor will a Default or Event of Default exist as of the Effective Date.

 

(ii)                                   The representations and warranties made by the Borrower in the Loan Agreement and the other Loan Documents are true and correct as of the date hereof, and will be true and correct as of the Effective Date, except as to (1) matters which speak to a specific date, and (2) changes in the ordinary course to the extent permitted and contemplated by the Loan Agreement.

 

(iii)                                The Borrower has the power and authority and legal right to execute, deliver and perform this Amendment and the Replacement Notes, has taken all necessary action to authorize the execution, delivery, and performance of this Amendment and the Replacement Notes, and the person executing and delivering on behalf of the Borrower this Amendment is, and the Replacement Notes will be, duly authorized to do so.

 

(iv)                               This Amendment does, and the Replacement Notes will upon their execution and delivery, constitute the legal, valid and binding obligation of the Borrower, enforceable against the Borrower in accordance with their terms, subject to the effect of applicable bankruptcy and other similar laws affecting the rights of creditors generally and the effect of equitable principles whether applied in an action at law or a suit in equity.

 

(c)                                   The Borrower shall promptly pay upon receipt of an invoice or statement therefor the reasonable attorneys’ fees and expenses and disbursements incurred by the Credit Agent and the Lenders in connection with this Amendment and the Replacement Notes.

 

2



 

(d)                                  The Borrower acknowledges that it has no defenses, set offs or counterclaims with respect to any of its obligations to the Credit Agent or the Lenders, and hereby releases, waives, and forever relinquishes all claims, demands, obligations, liabilities, and causes of action whatever kind or nature, whether known or unknown, which it has or may have as of the date hereof and as of the Effective Date against the Credit Agent or any Lender, or their respective affiliates, officers, directors, employees, agents, attorneys, independent contractors, and predecessors, together with their successors and assigns, directly or indirectly arising out of or based upon any matter connected with the Loan Agreement or the administration thereof or the obligations created thereby (including pursuant to this Amendment).

 

5.                                       Conditions Precedent . This Amendment shall be effective upon the satisfaction by the Borrower of, or written waiver by the Credit Agent and the Lenders of, the following conditions and any other conditions set forth in this Amendment, by no later than 4:00 p.m. (Boston time) on the date of this Amendment, as such time and date may be extended in writing by the Credit Agent and the Lenders, in their sole discretion (with the date, if at all, by which such conditions have been satisfied or waived being referred to herein as, the “ Effective Date ”), failing which this Amendment and all related documents shall be null and void at the option of the Credit Agent and the Lenders:

 

(a)                                  Delivery by the Borrower to the Credit Agent and each Lender of the

following:

 

(i)                                           This Amendment, duly executed by the Borrower, the Credit Agent and each Lender.

 

(ii)                                        The Replacements Notes, duly executed by the Borrower (with the originals thereof to be delivered directly to the respective Lenders and copies to be delivered to the Credit Agent).

 

(iii)                                     A certificate of an appropriate officer of the Borrower as to (A) the authority of the Borrower to enter into this Amendment, and (B) the identity, authority and capacity of each Person executing and delivering in the name of and on behalf of the Borrower this Amendment, the Replacement Notes, and any documents, instruments, and other agreements related hereto or to be delivered hereunder.

 

(iv)                                    Such other documents as the Credit Agent or any Lender reasonably may require, duly executed and delivered.

 

(b)                                  No Default or Event of Default shall have occurred and be continuing.

 

(c)                                   In addition to all other expense payment and reimbursement obligations of the Borrower under the Loan Agreement and other Loan Documents, the Borrower will,

 

3



 

promptly following receipt of an appropriate invoice therefor, pay or reimburse the Credit Agent and each Lender for all of their respective reasonable out of pocket costs and expenses (including, without limitation, reasonable attorneys’ fees and expenses and disbursements) incurred in connection with the preparation of this Amendment, the Replacement Notes, and any other documents in connection herewith and the matters addressed in and contemplated by this Amendment.

 

(d)                                  The Borrower shall have paid directly to each Lender an additional commitment fee in the amount of $43,056.

 

6.                                       Miscellaneous .

 

(a)                                  This Amendment shall be governed in accordance with the internal laws of the Commonwealth of Massachusetts (without regard to conflict of laws principles) as an instrument under seal.

 

(b)                                  This Amendment may be executed in one or more counterparts, each of which when so executed shall be deemed to be an original, but all of which when taken together shall constitute one and the same instrument. Signatures transmitted electronically (including by fax or e-mail) shall have the same legal effect as originals, but each party nevertheless shall deliver original signed counterparts of this Amendment to each other party, upon request.

 

(c)                                   This Amendment constitutes the complete agreement among the Borrower, the Credit Agent, and the Lenders with respect to the subject matter of this Amendment and supersedes all prior agreements and understanding relating to the subject matter of this Amendment, and may not be modified, altered, or amended except in accordance with the Loan Agreement.

 

(d)                                  Time is of the essence with respect to all aspects of this Amendment.

 

[Remainder of page intentionally left blank]

 

4



 

Executed as a sealed instrument as of the date first above written.

 

 

WALKER & DUNLOP, LLC

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

By

/s/ William M. Walker

 

Name:

William M. Walker

 

Title:

President and Chief Executive Officer

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

BANK OF AMERICA, N.A., as Credit Agent and a Lender

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

By

/s/ Jane E. Huntington

 

Name:

Jane E. Huntington

 

Title:

Senior Vice President

 

 

 

 

 

 

TD BANK, N.A., as a Lender

 

 

 

 

 

 

By

/s/ William J. Olsen

 

Name:

William J. Olsen

 

Title:

Regional Vice President

 

Signature page to Second Amendment

 




Exhibit 10.25

 

THIRD AMENDMENT TO AMENDED AND RESTATED WAREHOUSING
CREDIT AND SECURITY AGREEMENT

 

THIS THIRD AMENDMENT TO AMENDED AND RESTATED WAREHOUSING CREDIT AND SECURITY AGREEMENT (this “ Amendment ”) is made as of July 30, 2010, by and among WALKER & DUNLOP, LLC (the “ Borrower ”), BANK OF AMERICA, N.A., as credit agent (the “ Credit Agent ”), and the lenders party hereto (the “ Lenders ”). Capitalized terms used herein without definition have the meanings specified therefor in that certain Amended and Restated Warehousing Credit and Security Agreement dated as of October 15, 2009, among the Borrower, Green Park Financial Limited Partnership, the Credit Agent, and the Lenders (as amended to date, the “ Loan Agreement ”).

 

RECITALS

 

The Borrower, the Credit Agent, and the Lenders desire to amend the Loan Agreement on the terms and conditions set forth herein.

 

NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the agreements of the parties set forth herein, and for other good and valuable consideration, the receipt and sufficiency of which are hereby acknowledged, the parties hereto agree as follows:

 

1.           Amendment. Subject to the satisfaction or waiver of the conditions set forth in Section 3 hereof, effective as of June 30, 2010, the Loan Agreement is here by amended by deleting Section 8.10 thereof in its entirety and replacing it with the following:

 

“8.10   Servicing Delinquencies

 

Permit (i) the aggregate unpaid principal amount of Fannie Mae DUS Mortgage Loans comprising W&D’s Servicing Portfolio which are sixty (60) or more days past due or otherwise in default at any time to exceed two percent (2%) of the aggregate unpaid principal balance of all Fannie Mae DUS Mortgage Loans comprising W&D’s Servicing Portfolios at such time, or (ii) the aggregate unpaid principal amount of At Risk Mortgage Loans comprising W&D’s Servicing Portfolio which are sixty (60) or more days past due or otherwise in default to increase from the last day of a Fiscal Quarter to the last day of the following Fiscal Quarter (with each such last day of each such following Fiscal Quarter being referred to herein as a “ Measurement Date ”) by more than (x) with respect to Measurement Dates occurring prior to June 30, 2010, one-half percent (0.5%), and (y) with respect to Measurement Dates occurring on and after June 30, 2010, one percent (1.0%).”

 

2.           Acknowledgments by Borrower . The Borrower acknowledges, confirms and agrees that:

 



 

(a)           This Amendment is a Loan Document, and all references in any Loan Document to the Borrower’s Obligations shall mean and include the Obligations as amended by this Amendment.

 

(b)           Except as provided herein, the terms and conditions of the Loan Agreement and the other Loan Documents remain in full force and effect, and the Borrower hereby (x) ratifies, confirms and reaffirms all and singular of the terms and conditions of the Loan Agreement and the other Loan Documents, and (y) represents and warrants that:

 

(i)              After giving effect to this Amendment, no Default or Event of Default exists as of the date the Borrower executes this Amendment, nor will a Default or Event of Default exist as of the Effective Date.

 

(ii)             The representations and warranties made by the Borrower in the Loan Agreement and the other Loan Documents are true and correct as of the date hereof, and will be true and correct as of the Effective Date, except as to (1) matters which speak to a specific date, and (2) changes in the ordinary course to the extent permitted and contemplated by the Loan Agreement.

 

(iii)            The Borrower has the power and authority and legal right to execute, deliver and perform this Amendment, has taken all necessary action to authorize the execution, delivery, and performance of this Amendment, and the person executing and delivering on behalf of the Borrower this Amendment is duly authorized to do so.

 

(iv)            This Amendment has been duly executed and delivered by the Borrower, and constitutes the legal, valid and binding obligation of the Borrower, enforceable against the Borrower in accordance with its terms, subject to the effect of applicable bankruptcy and other similar laws affecting the rights of creditors generally and the effect of equitable principles whether applied in an action at law or a suit in equity.

 

(c)           The Borrower shall promptly pay upon receipt of an invoice or statement therefor the reasonable attorneys’ fees and expenses and disbursements incurred by the Credit Agent and the Lenders in connection with this Amendment.

 

(d)           The Borrower acknowledges that it has no defenses, set offs or counterclaims with respect to any of its obligations to the Credit Agent or the Lenders, and hereby releases, waives, and forever relinquishes all claims, demands, obligations, liabilities, and causes of action whatever kind or nature, whether known or unknown, which it has or may have as of the date hereof and as of the Effective Date against the Credit Agent or any Lender, or their respective affiliates, officers, directors, employees, agents, attorneys, independent contractors, and predecessors, together with their

 

2



 

successors and assigns, directly or indirectly arising out of or based upon any matter connected with the Loan Agreement or the administration thereof or the obligations created thereby (including pursuant to this Amendment).

 

3.             Conditions Precedent . This Amendment shall be effective upon the satisfaction by the Borrower of, or written waiver by the Credit Agent and the Lenders of, the following conditions and any other conditions set forth in this Amendment, by no later than 4:00 p.m. (Boston time) on the date of this Amendment, as such time and date may be extended in writing by the Credit Agent and the Lenders, in their sole discretion (with the date, if at all, by which such conditions have been satisfied or waived being referred to herein as, the “ Effective Date ”), failing which this Amendment and all related documents shall be null and void at the option of the Credit Agent and the Lenders:

 

(a)           Delivery by the Borrower to the Credit Agent and each Lender of the following:

 

(i)           This Amendment, duly executed by the Borrower, the Credit Agent and each Lender.

 

(ii)          Such other documents as the Credit Agent or any Lender reasonably may require, duly executed and delivered.

 

(b)           The Borrower shall have paid to the Credit Agent, for the account of the Lenders to be shared equally by the Lenders, a non-refundable, fully earned amendment fee in the amount of $10,000.00.

 

(c)           No Default or Event of Default shall have occurred and be continuing.

 

(d)           In addition to all other expense payment and reimbursement obligations of the Borrower under the Loan Agreement and other Loan Documents, the Borrower will, promptly following its receipt of an appropriate invoice therefor, pay or reimburse the Credit Agent and each Lender for all of their respective reasonable out of pocket costs and expenses (including, without limitation, reasonable attorneys’ fees and expenses and disbursements) incurred in connection with the preparation of this Amendment and any other documents in connection herewith and the matters addressed in and contemplated by this Amendment.

 

4.           Miscellaneous .

 

(a)           This Amendment shall be governed in accordance with the internal laws of the Commonwealth of Massachusetts (without regard to conflict of laws principles) as an instrument under seal.

 

3



 

(b)         This Amendment may be executed in one or more counterparts, each of which when so executed shall be deemed to be an original, but all of which when taken together shall constitute one and the same instrument. Signatures transmitted electronically (including by fax or e-mail) shall have the same legal effect as originals, but each party nevertheless shall deliver original signed counterparts of this Amendment to each other party, upon request.

 

(c)          This Amendment constitutes the complete agreement among the Borrower, the Credit Agent, and the Lenders with respect to the subject matter of this Amendment and supersedes all prior agreements and understanding relating to the subject matter of this Amendment, and may not be modified, altered, or amended except in accordance with the Loan Agreement.

 

(d)                                  Time is of the essence with respect to all aspects of this Amendment.

 

[Remainder of page intentionally left blank]

 

4



 

Executed as a sealed instrument as of the date first above written.

 

 

WALKER & DUNLOP, LLC

 

 

 

By

/s/ William M. Walker

 

Name:

William M. Walker

 

Title:

President & CEO

 

 

 

 

 

BANK OF AMERICA, N.A., as Credit Agent and a Lender

 

 

 

 

 

By

/s/ Jane E. Huntington

 

Name:

Jane E. Huntington

 

Title:

Senior Vice President

 

 

 

 

 

TD BANK, N.A., as a Lender

 

 

 

 

 

By

/s/ Brian R. Mundy

 

Name:

Brian R. Mundy

 

Title:

Senior Vice President

 

Signature page to Third Amendment

 




Exhibit 10.26

 

 

 

WAREHOUSING

CREDIT AND SECURITY AGREEMENT

 

 

BETWEEN

 

 

WALKER & DUNLOP, LLC

a Delaware limited liability company

AS BORROWER

 

 

and

 

 

PNC Bank, National Association

a national banking association

AS LENDER

 

 

DATED AS OF JUNE 30, 2010

 

 

 



 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

 

 

Page

1.

THE CREDIT

1

 

 

 

 

1.1

The Warehousing Commitment

1

 

1.2

Expiration of Warehousing Commitment

1

 

1.3

Warehousing Note

2

 

1.4

Replacement of Warehousing Note

2

 

1.5

Nature of Obligations

2

 

1.6

Replacement Facility

2

 

 

 

 

2.

PROCEDURES FOR OBTAINING ADVANCES

2

 

 

 

 

2.1

Warehousing Advances

2

 

 

 

 

3.

INTEREST, PRINCIPAL AND FEES

3

 

 

 

 

3.1

Interest

3

 

3.2

Interest Limitation

3

 

3.3

Principal Payments

4

 

3.4

Facility Fee

6

 

3.5

Administrative Fee

6

 

3.6

Miscellaneous Fees and Charges

6

 

3.7

Overdraft Advances

7

 

3.8

Method of Making Payments

7

 

3.9

Billings

7

 

3.10

Late Charges

8

 

3.11

Additional Provisions Relating to Interest Rate

8

 

3.12

Continuing Authority of Authorized Representatives

10

 

 

 

 

4.

COLLATERAL

10

 

 

 

 

4.1

Grant of Security Interest

10

 

4.2

Maintenance of Collateral Records

12

 

4.3

Release of Security Interest in Pledged Loans and Pledged Securities

12

 

4.4

Collection and Servicing Rights

13

 

4.5

Return of Collateral at End of Warehousing Commitment

14

 

4.6

Delivery of Collateral Documents

14

 

4.7

Borrower Remains Liable

14

 

 

 

 

5.

CONDITIONS PRECEDENT

15

 

 

 

 

5.1

Initial Advance

15

 

5.2

Each Advance

16

 

5.3

Force Majeure

17

 

 

 

 

6.

GENERAL REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES

17

 

 

 

 

6.1

Place of Business

18

 

i



 

 

6.2

Organization; Good Standing

18

 

6.3

Authorization and Enforceability

18

 

6.4

Approvals

18

 

6.5

Financial Condition

19

 

6.6

Litigation

19

 

6.7

Compliance with Laws

19

 

6.8

Regulation U

19

 

6.9

Investment Company Act

19

 

6.10

Payment of Taxes

20

 

6.11

Agreements

20

 

6.12

Title to Properties

20

 

6.13

ERISA

20

 

6.14

No Retiree Benefits

21

 

6.15

Assumed Names

21

 

6.16

Servicing

21

 

6.17

Foreign Asset Control Regulations

21

 

 

 

 

7.

AFFIRMATIVE COVENANTS

22

 

 

 

 

7.1

Payment of Obligations

22

 

7.2

Financial Statements

22

 

7.3

Other Borrower Reports

22

 

7.4

Maintenance of Existence; Conduct of Business

23

 

7.5

Compliance with Applicable Laws

23

 

7.6

Inspection of Properties and Books; Operational Reviews

24

 

7.7

Notice

24

 

7.8

Payment of Taxes and Other Obligations

25

 

7.9

Insurance

25

 

7.10

Closing Instructions

25

 

7.11

Subordination of Certain Indebtedness

26

 

7.12

Other Loan Obligations

26

 

7.13

ERISA

26

 

7.14

Use of Proceeds of Warehousing Advances

26

 

7.15

Investor Instructions

26

 

7.16

Sale of Mortgage Loan to Investor

27

 

 

 

 

8.

NEGATIVE COVENANTS

27

 

 

 

 

8.1

[Intentionally Deleted]

27

 

8.2

Contingent Liabilities

27

 

8.3

Restrictions on Fundamental Changes

27

 

8.4

Subsidiaries

28

 

8.5

Loss of Eligibility, Licenses or Approvals

28

 

8.6

Accounting Changes

28

 

8.7

Minimum Adjusted Tangible Net Worth

28

 

8.8

Maximum Indebtedness to Adjusted Tangible Net Worth

28

 

8.9

[Intentionally Deleted]

29

 

8.10

[Intentionally Deleted]

29

 

ii



 

 

8.11

Minimum Cash and Cash Equivalents

29

 

8.12

Servicing Delinquencies

29

 

8.13

Dividends and Distributions

29

 

8.14

Transactions with Affiliates

29

 

8.15

Recourse Servicing Contracts

29

 

 

 

 

9.

SPECIAL REPRESENTATIONS, WARRANTIES AND COVENANTS CONCERNING COLLATERAL

30

 

 

 

 

9.1

Special Representations and Warranties Concerning Warehousing Collateral

30

 

9.2

Special Affirmative Covenants Concerning Warehousing Collateral

32

 

9.3

Special Negative Covenants Concerning Warehousing Collateral

34

 

9.4

Special Representations and Warranties Concerning Eligibility as Fannie Mae Approved Seller/Servicer of Mortgage Loans

34

 

9.5

Special Representation and Warranty Concerning Fannie Mae DUS Program Reserve Requirements

34

 

9.6

Special Representations and Warranties Concerning FHA Mortgage Loans

34

 

9.7

Special Representations and Warranties Concerning Eligibility as Freddie Mac Program Plus Seller/Servicer of Mortgage Loans

35

 

 

 

 

10.

DEFAULTS; REMEDIES

35

 

 

 

 

10.1

Events of Default

35

 

10.2

Remedies

37

 

10.3

Insufficiency of Proceeds

40

 

10.4

Lender Appointed Attorney-in-Fact

40

 

10.5

Right of Set-Off

40

 

 

 

 

11.

MISCELLANEOUS

41

 

 

 

 

 

11.1

Notices

41

 

11.2

Reimbursement Of Expenses; Indemnity

42

 

11.3

Financial Information

43

 

11.4

Terms Binding Upon Successors; Survival of Representations

43

 

11.5

Pledge to Federal Reserve Banks

44

 

11.6

Governing Law

44

 

11.7

Amendments

44

 

11.8

Relationship of the Parties

44

 

11.9

Severability

44

 

11.10

Consent to Credit References

45

 

11.11

Counterparts

45

 

11.12

Headings/Captions

45

 

11.13

Entire Agreement

45

 

11.14

Consent to Jurisdiction

45

 

11.15

Waiver of Jury Trial

45

 

11.16

Waiver of Punitive, Consequential, Special or Indirect Damages

46

 

11.17

U.S. Patriot Act

46

 

11.18

Assignments and Participations

46

 

iii



 

 

11.19

Confidentiality

47

 

 

 

 

12.

DEFINITIONS

47

 

 

 

 

12.1

Defined Terms

47

 

12.2

Other Definitional Provisions; Terms of Construction

58

 

iv



 

EXHIBITS

 

Exhibit A

Form of Warehousing Note

Exhibit B FNMA/DUS

Procedures and Documentation for Fannie Mae DUS Loans and Other Fannie Mae Mortgage Loans

Exhibit B FHA/GNMA

Procedures and Documentation for FHA Mortgage Loans and Ginnie Mae Mortgage Backed Securities

Exhibit B Freddie Mac Program Plus

Loans Procedures and Documentation for Program Plus Loans

Exhibit C

Form of Warehousing Advance Request

Exhibit D

Eligible Loans and Other Assets

Exhibit E

Authorized Representatives

Exhibit F

[Intentionally Omitted]

Exhibit G

Assumed Names

Exhibit H

Servicing Portfolio

Exhibit I

Form of Compliance Certificate

Exhibit J

Lines of Credit

Exhibit K

Foreign Qualifications and Licenses

Exhibit L

Miscellaneous Fees and Charges

Exhibit M

Form of Assignment and Assumption Agreement

Exhibit N-1

Form of Joint Escrow and Bailee Letter

Exhibit N-2

Form of Escrow Letter

Exhibit N-2

Form of Bailee Letter

Exhibit O

Form of Assignment of Mortgage Note and Mortgage

Exhibit P.

Confidentiality Agreement

 

v



 

WAREHOUSING

CREDIT AND SECURITY AGREEMENT

 

THIS WAREHOUSING CREDIT AND SECURITY AGREEMENT, dated as of June 30, 2010, is made between WALKER & DUNLOP, LLC, a Delaware limited liability company (“ Borrower ”) and PNC Bank, National Association, a national banking association (“ Lender ”).

 

Preliminary Statement

 

A.            Borrower has requested, and Lender has agreed, to extend financial accommodations to Borrower pursuant to the terms and conditions set forth herein.

 

NOW, THEREFORE, for good and valuable consideration, the receipt and sufficiency of which are hereby acknowledged, the parties to this Agreement agree as follows:

 

1.                                                 THE CREDIT

 

1.1                                          The Warehousing Commitment

 

1.1(a)                           On the terms and subject to the conditions and limitations of this Agreement, the Lender agrees to make Warehousing Advances to Borrower from the Closing Date to the fifth (5 th ) Business Day immediately preceding the Warehousing Maturity Date, during which applicable period Borrower may borrow, repay and reborrow in accordance with the provisions of this Agreement.  The Lender has no obligation to make or maintain Warehousing Advances if, after giving effect to each requested Warehousing Advance, the aggregate outstanding principal amount of all Warehousing Advances would exceed the Warehousing Credit Limit.  While a Default or Event of Default exists, the Lender may refuse to make any additional Warehousing Advances to Borrower.  All Warehousing Advances under this Agreement constitute a single indebtedness, and all of the Collateral is security for the Warehousing Note and for the performance of all of the Obligations.

 

1.2                                          Expiration of Warehousing Commitment

 

Subject to the extension right set forth below in this Section 1.2, the Warehousing Commitment expires on the earlier of (“ Warehousing Maturity Date ”): (a) June 29, 2011 (the “ Stated Maturity Date ”), on which date the Warehousing Commitment will expire of its own term and the Warehousing Advances together with all accrued and unpaid interest and costs and expenses will become due and payable without the necessity of Notice or action by the Lender; and (b) the date the Warehousing Commitment is terminated and the Warehousing Advances become due and payable under Section 10.2(a)  or 10.2(b) .  Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Borrower shall have the option (the “ Extension Option ”) to extend the Stated Maturity Date for an addition period of 364 days from the Stated Maturity Date (the “ Extension Period ”), based upon substantially identical terms and condition set forth in this Agreement.  The Borrower must give the Lender Notice of its election to exercise the Extension Option no earlier than ninety (90) days and no later than thirty (30) days of the Stated Maturity Date, and no Default or Event of Default, shall exist as of either (i) the date the Borrower gives the Lender Notice of its election to exercise

 



 

the Extension Option or (ii) the Stated Maturity Date.  In the event the Borrower satisfies the conditions set forth in this Section 1.2 and the Stated Maturity Date is to be extended, the Borrower and Lender shall enter into an amendment to this Agreement in form and content acceptable to both parties, evidencing such extension.

 

1.3                                          Warehousing Note

 

Warehousing Advances are evidenced by Borrower’s promissory note, payable to the Lender in the form attached hereto as Exhibit A (the “ Warehousing Note ”).  The term “ Warehousing Note ” as used in this Agreement includes all amendments, restatements, renewals or replacements of the original Warehousing Note and all substitutions for it.  All terms and provisions of the Warehousing Note are incorporated into this Agreement.

 

1.4                                          Replacement of Warehousing Note

 

Upon receipt of an affidavit of an officer of Lender as to the loss, theft, destruction or mutilation of the Warehousing Note or any other security document which is not of public record, and, in the case of any such loss, theft, destruction or mutilation, upon cancellation of such Warehousing Note or other security document and receipt by the Borrower of customary indemnification from Lender, the Borrower will issue, in lieu thereof, a replacement note or other security document in the same principal amount thereof and otherwise of like tenor.

 

1.5                                          Nature of Obligations

 

The aggregate amount of all Warehousing Advances outstanding from time to time under this Agreement may hereinafter collectively be referred to as the “ Loan .”

 

1.6                                          Replacement Facility

 

This Agreement refinances and replaces in its entirety that certain Third Amended and Restated Loan Agreement dated as of January 30, 2009 (the “2009 Agreement”) originally entered into by and among Green Park Financial Limited Partnership, Walker & Dunlop, LLC and the Lender (as successor to National City Bank), individually and as Agent.  Upon the effectiveness of this Agreement, the 2009 Agreement shall be deemed terminated.

 

2.                                                 PROCEDURES FOR OBTAINING ADVANCES

 

2.1                                          Warehousing Advances

 

The Borrower may obtain a Warehousing Advance under this Agreement by delivering to the Lender a completed and signed request for a Warehousing Advance on the Lender’s then current form (“ Warehousing Advance Request ”), not later than 3:00 p.m. on the Business Day that is one (1) Business Day before the Business Day on which Borrower desires the Warehousing Advance.  Warehousing Advance Requests received by the Lender after 3:00 p.m. on a Business Day will be deemed received on the following Business Day, provided , however , on a case-by-case basis at the request of the Borrower, the Lender may, in its sole discretion (and without thereby establishing any course of dealing), extend such 3:00 p.m. cut-off time to a later time on the subject Business Day.  Subject to the delivery of a Warehousing Advance Request and the

 

2



 

satisfaction of the conditions set forth in Sections 5.1 and 5.2 , the Borrower may obtain a Warehousing Advance under this Agreement upon compliance with the procedures set forth in this Section and in the applicable Exhibit B , including delivery to the Lender of all Collateral Documents required to be delivered on the applicable dates specified in this Agreement for such delivery.  The Lender’s current form of Warehousing Advance Request is set forth in Exhibit C .  Upon not less than five (5) Business Days’ prior Notice to the Borrower, the Lender may modify its form of Warehousing Advance Request and any other Exhibit or document referred to in this Section to conform to current legal requirements or Lender practices and, as so modified, those Exhibits and documents will become part of this Agreement.

 

3.                                                 INTEREST, PRINCIPAL AND FEES

 

3.1                                          Interest

 

3.1(a)                           Except as otherwise provided in this Section, the Borrower must pay interest on the unpaid amount of each Warehousing Advance from the date the Warehousing Advance is made until it is paid in full at the Applicable Rate as in effect from time to time.  The Borrower must pay the Lender accrued interest on each Warehousing Advance on the Warehousing Advance Due Date or upon prepayment of such Warehousing Advance.

 

3.1(b)                           The Lender computes interest on the basis of the actual number of days in each month and a year of 360 days.  The Borrower must pay interest on outstanding Warehouse Advances in arrears on the Warehousing Advance Due Date and on the Warehousing Maturity Date.

 

3.1(c)                            If, for any reason, (i) the Borrower repays a Warehousing Advance on the same day that it was made, or (ii) a Borrower instructs the Lender not to make a previously requested Warehousing Advance after the Lender has reserved funds or made other arrangements necessary to enable the Lender to fund that Warehousing Advance, the Borrower agrees to pay to the Lender, without limiting the provisions of Section 3.11 , for the account of the Lender, interest thereon at the Applicable Rate for one day notwithstanding repayment prior to the cut-off time specified in Section 3.8(a)  (unless the reason for such repayment is due to the failure of the underlying transaction to close).  The Borrower must pay all such interest within five (5) Business Days after the date of the Lender’s notice thereof.

 

3.1(d)                           After an Event of Default occurs, the unpaid amount of each Warehousing Advance will bear interest at the Default Rate until paid in full.

 

3.1(e)                            The Lender will adjust the rates of interest provided for in this Agreement as of the effective date of each change in the applicable Reference Rate.  The Lender’s determination of such rates of interest as of any date of determination is conclusive and binding, absent manifest error.

 

3.2                                          Interest Limitation

 

If, at any time, the rate of interest, together with all amounts which constitute or are deemed under any applicable law to constitute interest and which are reserved, charged or taken by the

 

3



 

Lender as compensation for fees, services or expenses incidental to the making, negotiating or collecting of Warehousing Advances, shall be deemed by any competent court of law, governmental agency or tribunal to exceed the maximum rate of interest permitted to be charged by the Lender to the Borrower under applicable law, then, during such time as such rate of interest would be deemed excessive, that portion of each sum paid attributable to that portion of such interest rate that exceeds the maximum rate of interest so permitted shall be deemed a voluntary prepayment of principal (or, if no Obligations are then outstanding, shall be repaid to the Borrower).  As used herein, the term “applicable law” shall mean the law in effect as of the date hereof; provided ,   however , that in the event there is a change in the law which results in a higher permissible rate of interest, then this Agreement shall be governed by such new law as of its effective date.

 

3.3                                          Principal Payments

 

3.3(a)                           The Borrower must pay the Lender the outstanding principal amount of each Warehousing Advance, together with all accrued and unpaid interest thereon, on the applicable Warehousing Advance Due Date.  Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Borrower must pay the Lender the outstanding principal amount of all Warehousing Advances together with all accrued and unpaid interest thereon, and any unpaid costs and expenses, on the Warehousing Maturity Date.

 

3.3(b)                           Except as otherwise provided in Section 3.1 , the Borrower may prepay any portion of the Warehousing Advances, together with all accrued and unpaid interest on the portion so prepaid, without premium or penalty at any time.

 

3.3(c)                            The Borrower must pay to the Lender, and the Borrower authorizes the Lender to charge its Operating Accounts for, the amount of any outstanding Warehousing Advance, together with all accrued and unpaid interest thereon, against a specific Pledged Loan or Pledged Security upon the earliest occurrence of any of the following events:

 

(i)                                      On the date a Warehousing Advance was made if the Pledged Loan to be funded by that Warehousing Advance has not closed and funded.

 

(ii)                                   Three (3) Business Days elapse from the date a Warehousing Advance was made against a Pledged Loan, without receipt of the Collateral Documents relating to that Pledged Loan required to be delivered on that date, or if such Collateral Documents, upon examination by the Lender, are found not to be in compliance with the requirements of this Agreement or the related Purchase Commitment and Borrower has not delivered Collateral Documents in compliance with the requirements of this Agreement or the related Purchase Commitment within three (3) Business Days of receipt by the Borrower of Notice from the Lender specifying the non-compliant items.

 

(iii)                                Ten (10) Business Days elapse without the return of a Collateral Document delivered by the Lender to the Borrower under a Trust Receipt for correction or completion.

 

4


 

 

(iv)                               On the date on which a Pledged Loan is determined to have been originated based on untrue, incomplete or inaccurate information or to be subject to fraud, whether or not the Borrower had knowledge of the misrepresentation, incomplete or inaccurate information or fraud.

 

(v)                                  On the date on which the Borrower knows, has reason to know, or receives Notice from the Lender, that (A) one or more of the representations and warranties set forth in Article 9 were inaccurate or incomplete in any material respect on any date when made or deemed made or became inaccurate or incomplete in any material respect after any such date, or (B) the Borrower has failed to perform or comply with any covenant, term or condition applicable to it set forth in Article 9 .

 

(vi)                               On the date on which a Pledged Loan or an obligation secured by a Lien senior to the Mortgage securing repayment of the Pledged Loan has been in default for a period of 60 days or more (it being understood that, as provided in Section 9.1(q) , no Warehousing Advance will be made against any Mortgage Loan which is in default).

 

(vii)                            On the mandatory delivery date of the related Purchase Commitment if the specific Pledged Loan has not been delivered under the Purchase Commitment on or prior to such mandatory delivery date, or on the date the related Purchase Commitment expires or is terminated.

 

(viii)                         Three (3) Business Days after the date a Pledged Loan is rejected for purchase by an Investor unless another Purchase Commitment is provided within that three (3) Business Day period.

 

(ix)                               Upon the sale, other disposition or prepayment of any Pledged Loan or Pledged Security or, with respect to a Pledged Loan included in an Eligible Mortgage Pool, upon the sale or other disposition of the related Agency Security.

 

(x)                                  With respect to any Pledged Loan, any of the Collateral Documents, upon examination by the Lender, are found not to be in compliance with the requirements of this Agreement or the related Purchase Commitment.

 

(xi)                               If, after giving effect to a new Warehousing Advance against a Pledged Loan or to the payment of existing Warehousing Advances against Pledged Loans, any of the limitations set forth in Exhibit D have been exceeded.

 

3.3(d)                           In addition to the payments required by Sections 3.3(a)  and 3.3(c) , if the principal amount of any Pledged Loan is prepaid in whole or in part while a Warehousing Advance is outstanding against the Pledged Loan, the Borrower must pay to the Lender, without the necessity of prior demand or Notice from the Lender, and the Borrower authorizes the Lender to charge its Operating Accounts for, the amount of the prepayment, to be applied against the Warehousing Advance.

 

5



 

3.3(e)                            The proceeds of the sale or other disposition of any Pledged Loan or Pledged Security must be paid directly by the Investor to the Borrower’s Cash Collateral Account.  The Borrower must give Notice to the Lender in writing of the Pledged Loan or Pledged Security for which proceeds have been received (including Notice to the Lender in writing of any prepayment).  Upon receipt of such Notice, the Lender will apply any proceeds deposited into the applicable Cash Collateral Account to the payment of the Warehousing Advances related to the Pledged Loan or Pledged Security identified by the Borrower in its Notice, and such Pledged Loan or Pledged Security will be considered to have been redeemed from pledge to the extent the related Warehousing Advance has been paid in full.  The Lender is entitled to rely upon a Borrower’s affirmation that deposits in the applicable Cash Collateral Account represent payments from Investors for the purchase of the Pledged Loan or Pledged Security specified by the Borrower in its Notice.  If the payment from an Investor for the purchase of a Pledged Loan or Pledged Security is less than the outstanding Warehousing Advances against such Pledged Loan or Pledged Security identified by the Borrower in its Notice, the Borrower must pay to the Lender, and the Borrower authorizes the Lender to charge the Borrower’s Operating Accounts for, an amount equal to that deficiency.  As long as no Default or Event of Default exists, the Lender will return to the Borrower any excess payment from an Investor for such Pledged Loan or Pledged Security.

 

3.3(f)                             The Lender reserves the right at any time to revalue any Pledged Loan or Pledged Security.  The Borrower must pay to the Lender, without the necessity of prior demand or Notice from the Lender, and the Borrower authorizes the Lender to charge Borrower’s Operating Accounts for, any amount required after any such revaluation to reduce the principal amount of the Warehousing Advance outstanding against the revalued Pledged Loan or Pledged Security to an amount equal to the Advance Rate for the applicable type of Pledged Loan or Pledged Security multiplied by the Fair Market Value of the Pledged Loan or Pledged Security.

 

3.4                                          Facility Fee

 

The Borrower shall pay to the Lender a facility fee in the amount of three-tenths of one percent (.3%) per annum of the Warehousing Credit Limit, to be paid quarterly in arrears commencing on the Closing Date, and on or prior to the first Business Day of each Calendar Quarter thereafter during the term of the Loan.

 

3.5                                          Administrative Fee

 

In connection with each Warehousing Advance, the Borrower shall pay to the Lender, quarterly in arrears, an administrative fee equal to $10,000.

 

3.6                                          Miscellaneous Fees and Charges

 

The Borrower must pay or reimburse the Lender, as applicable, for all Miscellaneous Fees and Charges.  The Borrower must pay all Miscellaneous Fees and Charges within five (5) Business Days after the date of the Lender’s notice thereof.

 

6



 

3.7                                          Overdraft Advances

 

If, under the authorization given by the Borrower pursuant to this Agreement, the Lender debits the Borrower’s Operating Account to honor an item presented against an Operating Account and that debit or direction results in an overdraft, the Lender may make an additional advance to fund that overdraft (“ Overdraft Advance ”).  The Borrower must pay (a) the outstanding amount of any Overdraft Advance, within three (3) Business Days after the date of the Overdraft Advance, and (b) interest on the amount of the Overdraft Advance, at a rate per annum equal to the Applicable Rate plus 2%, within three (3) Business Days after the date of the Lender’s notice thereof.

 

3.8                                          Method of Making Payments

 

3.8(a)                           All payments of interest, principal and fees shall be made in lawful money of the United States in immediately available funds, without counterclaim or setoff and free and clear of, and without any deduction or withholding for, any taxes or other payments by wire transfer to Lender, or as otherwise provided in this Agreement.  Payments shall be credited on the Business Day on which immediately available funds are received prior to 2:00 p.m.; payments received after 2:00 p.m. shall be credited on the next Business Day.  All payments shall be applied first to the payment of all fees, expenses, and other amounts due to Lender (excluding principal and interest), then to accrued interest, and the balance on account of outstanding principal, provided ,   however , that, after the occurrence and during the continuation of an Event of Default, payments will be applied to the Obligations as Lender determines.  If the due date is not a Business Day, payment is due on, and interest will accrue to, the next Business Day.

 

3.8(b)                           Subject to Section 3.8(c) below, the Borrower authorizes the Lender to charge the Borrower’s Operating Accounts for any interest or fees due and payable to Lender after giving at least two (2) Business Days’ Notice to the Borrower.

 

3.8(c)                            While a Default or Event of Default exists, the Borrower authorizes the Lender to charge Borrower’s Operating Accounts for any Obligations due and payable to the Lender, without the necessity of prior demand or Notice from the Lender.

 

3.8(d)                           All payments made on account of the Obligations shall be made by the Borrower to the Lender.  No principal payments resulting from the refinancing, sale or other disposition of Pledged Loans or Pledged Securities shall be deemed to have been received by the Lender until the Lender has also received the Notice required under Section 3.3(e) .

 

3.9                                          Billings

 

Any changes in the interest rate and in the outstanding amount of the Obligations which occur between the date of any billing and the due date of any payment may be reflected in adjustments in the billing for a subsequent month.  Neither the failure of the Lender to submit a bill, nor any error in any such bill shall excuse the Borrower from the obligation to make full payment of all Borrower’s payment obligations when due.

 

7



 

3.10                                   Late Charges

 

The Borrower shall pay, upon billing therefor, a “Late Charge” equal to three percent (3%) of the amount of any payment of principal (other than principal due at the Warehousing Maturity Date or the date on which the Lender accelerates the time for payment of the Loan after the occurrence of an Event of Default), interest, or fees, which fees are not paid within ten (10) days of the due date thereof.  Late Charges are: (a) payable in addition to, and not in limitation of, the Default Rate; (b) intended to compensate the Lender for administrative and processing costs incident to late payments; (c) not interest; and (d) not subject to refund or rebate or credit against any other amount due.

 

3.11                                   Additional Provisions Relating to Interest Rate

 

3.11(a)                    If the Lender has determined, after the date hereof, that the adoption or the becoming effective of, or any change in, or any change by any Governmental Authority, central bank or comparable agency charged with the interpretation or administration thereof in the interpretation or administration of, any applicable law, rule or regulation regarding capital adequacy, or compliance by the Lender with any request or directive regarding capital adequacy (whether or not having the force of law) of any such authority, central bank or comparable agency, has or would have the effect of reducing the rate of return on the Lender’s capital or assets as a consequence of its commitments or obligations hereunder to a level below that which Lender could have achieved but for such adoption, effectiveness, change or compliance (taking into consideration Lender’s policies with respect to capital adequacy), then, upon notice from the Lender to the Borrower and delivery by the Lender of a statement setting forth the reduction in the rate of return experienced by the Lender and the amount necessary to compensate the Lender under this Section 3.11(a) , the Borrower shall be obligated to pay to the Lender such additional amount or amounts as will compensate Lender for such reduction.  Each determination by Lender of amounts owing under this Section shall, absent manifest error, be conclusive and binding on the parties hereto.

 

3.11(b)                    If Lender determines (which determination shall be conclusive) that (i) by reason of circumstances affecting the relevant market, adequate and reasonable means do not exist for ascertaining the Applicable Daily Floating LIBO Rate for any day; or (ii) the Daily LIBO Rate will not adequately and fairly reflect the cost to Lenders of funding (including maintaining) Warehousing Advances, then Lender shall give the Borrower prompt notice thereof, and, so long as such condition remains in effect, the Loan (and all outstanding and future Warehousing Advances under the Loan) shall bear interest at the Applicable Base Rate.

 

3.11(c)                     Any and all payments by the Borrower to or for the account of Lender hereunder shall be made free and clear of and without deduction for any and all present or future taxes, duties, levies, imposts, deductions, charges or withholdings, and all liabilities with respect thereto, excluding taxes imposed on Lender’s income, and franchise taxes imposed on it, by the jurisdiction under the laws of which Lender is organized or any political subdivision thereof (all such non-excluded taxes, duties, levies, imposts, deductions, charges, withholdings, and liabilities being hereinafter referred to as

 

8



 

Taxes ”).  If the Borrower shall be required by law to deduct any Taxes from or in respect of any sum payable under this Agreement to Lender, (i) the sum payable shall be increased as necessary so that after making all required deductions (including deductions applicable to additional sums payable under this Section 3.11(c) ) the Lender receives an amount equal to the sum it would have received had no such deductions been made, (ii) the Borrower shall make such deductions, (iii) the Borrower shall pay the full amount deducted to the relevant taxation authority or other authority in accordance with applicable law, and (iv) the Borrower shall furnish to the Lender the original or a certified copy of a receipt evidencing payment thereof.

 

3.11(d)                    The Borrower also agrees to pay any and all present or future stamp or documentary taxes and any other excise or property taxes or charges or similar levies which arise from any payment made under this Agreement or from the execution or delivery of, or otherwise with respect to, this Agreement (hereinafter referred to as “ Other Taxes ”).  Further, if the Borrower shall be required to deduct or pay any Taxes or Other Taxes from or in respect of any sum payable under this Agreement to Lender, the Borrower shall also pay to Lender, at the time interest is paid, such additional amount that Lender specifies is necessary to preserve the after-tax yield (after factoring in all taxes, including taxes imposed on or measured by net income) that Lender would have received if such Taxes or Other Taxes had not been imposed.

 

3.11(e)                     The Borrower agrees to indemnify the Lender for (i) the full amount of Taxes and Other Taxes (including, without limitation, any Taxes or Other Taxes imposed or asserted by any jurisdiction on amounts payable under this Section 3.11 ) paid by any of them and any liability (including penalties, interest, and expenses) arising therefrom or with respect thereto; (ii) any other amounts payable under Section 3.11 ; and (iii) any liability (including additions to tax, penalties, interest and expenses) arising therefrom or with respect thereto, in each case whether or not such Taxes or Other Taxes were correctly or legally imposed or asserted by the relevant Governmental Authority.  Payment under this Section 3.11(e)  shall be made within 30 days after the date that the Lender makes a demand therefor.

 

3.11(f)                      In the event that the Borrower is required to pay or withhold any amount pursuant to Sections 3.11(c) , 3.11(d) , or 3.11(e) , which results in the Borrower paying more than would have been the case without regard to such Sections (an “ Excess Payment ”), the Borrower shall have the option to terminate the Warehousing Commitment in its entirety (but not in part) and this Agreement (other than as to those provisions which by their terms survive the termination of this Agreement), by giving Notice to the Lender specifying the effective date of such termination, which Notice may be given no earlier than three (3) Business Days after making an Excess Payment and no later than thirty (30) days after making an Excess Payment.  Upon the effective date of the termination of this Agreement by the Borrower pursuant to this Section, the Borrower shall pay all of the Obligations in full.

 

3.11(g)                     Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained elsewhere in this Agreement, if (x) any change in law shall make it unlawful for the Lender to make Warehousing Advances as LIBOR Loans, or to maintain outstanding Warehousing Advances as

 

9



 

LIBOR Loans or to give effect to its obligations as contemplated hereby with respect to the Loan or any particular Warehousing Advance as a LIBOR Loan or (y) at any time Lender reasonably determines that the making or continuance of LIBOR Loans has become impracticable as a result of a contingency occurring after the date hereof which adversely affects the London interbank market, the Lender may, by written notice to the Borrower (i) declare that LIBOR Loans will not thereafter be made by any Lender hereunder, whereupon all subsequent Warehousing Advances will be made as Base Rate Loans unless such declaration shall be subsequently withdrawn; and/or (ii) require that any then outstanding Warehousing Advances be converted to Base Rate Loans (and thereby bear interest at the Applicable Base Rate), as of the effective date of such notice.

 

3.12                                   Continuing Authority of Authorized Representatives

 

The Lender is authorized to rely upon the continuing authority of the Persons hereafter designated by the Borrower (“ Authorized Representatives ”) to bind the Borrower with respect to all matters pertaining to the Loan and the Loan Documents, including, but not limited to, the submission of requests for Warehousing Advances, and certificates with regard thereto, instructions with regard to the Operating Accounts and, to the extent permitted under this Agreement, the Collateral, and matters pertaining to the procedures and documentation for Warehousing Advances.  Such authorization may be changed only upon written notice to Lender accompanied by evidence, reasonably satisfactory to Lender, of the authority of the person giving such notice and such notice shall be effective not sooner than five (5) Business Days following receipt thereof by Lender.  The Authorized Representatives as of the Closing Date are listed on Exhibit E .  Lender shall have a right of approval, not to be unreasonably withheld or delayed, over the identity of the Authorized Representatives so as to assure Lender that each Authorized Representative is a responsible and senior official of the Borrower.

 

4.                                                 COLLATERAL

 

4.1                                          Grant of Security Interest

 

As security for the payment of its obligations under the Warehousing Note and for the payment and performance of all of the Obligations, the Borrower grants a security interest to Lender, in all of the Borrower’s right, title and interest in and to the following described property, whether now owned or whether acquired or arising after the date of this Agreement (“ Collateral ”):

 

4.1(a)                           All amounts advanced by Lender to or for the account of the Borrower under this Agreement to fund a Mortgage Loan until that Mortgage Loan is closed and those funds disbursed.

 

4.1(b)                           All Mortgage Loans, including all Mortgage Notes, Mortgages and Security Agreements evidencing or securing those Mortgage Loans, that are delivered or caused to be delivered to Lender (including delivery to a third party on behalf of Lender), or that otherwise come into the possession, custody or control of Lender (including the possession, custody or control of a third party on behalf of Lender), in each case in

 

10



 

respect of which Lender has made a Warehousing Advance under this Agreement (collectively, “ Pledged Loans ”).

 

4.1(c)                            All Mortgage-backed Securities that are created in whole or in part on the basis of Pledged Loans or that are delivered or caused to be delivered to Lender or that otherwise come into the possession, custody or control of Lender, or its agent, bailee or custodian as assignee, or that are pledged to Lender or, for such purpose are registered by book-entry in the name of Lender (including registration in the name of a third party on behalf of Lender), in each case in respect of which a Warehousing Advance has been made by Lender under this Agreement (collectively, “ Pledged Securities ”).

 

4.1(d)                           All private mortgage insurance and all commitments issued by the FHA to insure or guarantee any Pledged Loan; all Purchase Commitments held by the Borrower covering Pledged Loans or Pledged Securities, and all proceeds from the sale of Pledged Loans or Pledged Securities to Investors pursuant to those Purchase Commitments; and all personal property, contract rights, servicing rights or contracts and servicing fees and income or other proceeds, amounts and payments payable to Borrower as compensation or reimbursement, accounts, payments, intangibles and general intangibles of every kind relating to Pledged Loans, Pledged Securities, Purchase Commitments, FHA commitments and private mortgage insurance and commitments relating to Pledged Loans and Pledged Securities, and all other documents or instruments relating to Pledged Loans and Pledged Securities, including any interest of the Borrower in any fire, casualty or hazard insurance policies and any awards made by any public body or decreed by any court of competent jurisdiction for a taking or for degradation of value in any eminent domain proceeding as the same relate to Pledged Loans.

 

4.1(e)                            All escrow accounts, documents, instruments, files, surveys, certificates, correspondence, appraisals, computer programs, tapes, discs, cards, accounting records (including all information, records, tapes, data, programs, discs and cards) necessary or helpful in the administration or servicing of the Collateral) and other information and data of the Borrower relating to the Collateral.

 

4.1(f)                             The Operating Accounts, the Cash Collateral Accounts, and all cash, whether now existing or acquired after the date of this Agreement, delivered to or otherwise in the possession of Lender, or Lender’s agent, bailee or custodian or designated on the books and records of the Borrower as assigned and pledged to Lender, including all cash deposited in the Cash Collateral Account.

 

4.1(g)                            All Hedging Arrangements related to the Collateral (“ Pledged Hedging Arrangements ”) and the Borrower’s accounts in which those Hedging Arrangements are held (“ Pledged Hedging Accounts ”), including all rights to payment arising under the Pledged Hedging Arrangements and the Pledged Hedging Accounts, except that Lender’s security interest in the Pledged Hedging Arrangements and Pledged Hedging Accounts applies only to benefits, including rights to payment, related to the Collateral.

 

4.1(h)                           All cash and non-cash proceeds of the Collateral, including all dividends, distributions and other rights in connection with, and all additions to, modifications of and

 

11



 

replacements for, the Collateral, and all products and proceeds of the Collateral, together with whatever is receivable or received when the Collateral or proceeds of Collateral are sold, collected, exchanged or otherwise disposed of, whether such disposition is voluntary or involuntary, including all rights to payment with respect to any cause of action affecting or relating to the Collateral or proceeds of Collateral.

 

4.2                                          Maintenance of Collateral Records

 

As long as the Warehousing Commitment is outstanding or there remain any Obligations to be paid or performed under this Agreement or under any other Loan Document, the Borrower must preserve and maintain, at its chief executive office and principal place of business or in a regional office approved by Lender, and, promptly upon request, make available to Lender the originals, or copies in any case where the originals have been delivered to Lender or to an Investor, of the Mortgage Notes, Mortgages and Security Agreements included in Pledged Loans, Mortgage-backed Securities delivered to Lender as Pledged Securities, Purchase Commitments, and all related Mortgage Loan documents and instruments, and all files, surveys, certificates, correspondence, appraisals, computer programs, tapes, discs, cards, accounting records and other information and data relating to the Collateral.

 

4.3                                          Release of Security Interest in Pledged Loans and Pledged Securities

 

4.3(a)                           Except as provided in Section 4.3(b) , Lender will release its security interest in a Pledged Loan and all of the Collateral related to such Pledged Loan, as such Collateral is described in Section 4.1 , only against payment to Lender of the Release Amount in connection with such Pledged Loan.  If a Pledged Loan is transferred to a pool custodian or an Investor for inclusion in a Mortgage Pool and Lender’s security interest in such Pledged Loan and all of the Collateral related to the Pledged Loan, as such Collateral is described in Section 4.1 is not released before the issuance of the related Mortgage-backed Security, then that Mortgage-backed Security, when issued, is a Pledged Security, Lender’s security interest continues in such Pledged Loan and all of the Collateral related to such Pledged Loan, as such Collateral is described in Section 4.1 , backing that Pledged Security and Lender is entitled to possession of the Pledged Security in the manner provided in this Agreement.

 

4.3(b)                           If a Pledged Loan is transferred to an Approved Custodian and included in an Eligible Mortgage Pool, Lender’s security interest in such Pledged Loan and all of the Collateral related to such Pledged Loan, as such Collateral is described in Section 4.1 , included in the Eligible Mortgage Pool will be released upon the delivery of the Agency Security to Lender (including delivery to or registration in the name of a third party on behalf of Lender) and that Agency Security is a Pledged Security.  Lender’s security interest in that Pledged Security will be released only against payment to Lender of the Release Amount in connection with the Mortgage Loans backing that Pledged Security.

 

4.3(c)                            Lender has the exclusive right to possession of all Pledged Securities or, if Pledged Securities are issued in book-entry form or issued in certificated form and delivered to a clearing corporation (as that term is defined in the Uniform Commercial Code of Pennsylvania) or its nominee, Lender has the right to have the Pledged Securities

 

12



 

registered in the name of a securities intermediary (as that term is defined in the Uniform Commercial Code of Pennsylvania) in an account containing only customer securities and credited to an account of Lender.  Lender has no duty or obligation to deliver Pledged Securities to an Investor or to credit Pledged Securities to the account of an Investor or an Investor’s designee except against payment for those Pledged Securities.  The Borrower acknowledges that Lender may enter into one or more standing arrangements with securities intermediaries with respect to Pledged Securities issued in book entry form or issued in certificated form and delivered to a clearing corporation or its designee, under which the Pledged Securities are registered in the name of the securities intermediary, and the Borrower agrees, upon request of Lender, to execute and deliver to those securities intermediaries their respective written concurrence in any such standing arrangements.

 

4.3(d)                           If no Default or Event of Default occurs (or, if a Default or Event of Default has occurred, such Default or Event of Default has been cured or waived), the Borrower may redeem a Pledged Loan and all of the Collateral related to a Pledged Loan, as such Collateral is described in Section 4.1 , or Pledged Security from Lender’s security interest by notifying Lender of its intention to redeem the Pledged Loan or Pledged Security from pledge and paying, or causing an Investor to pay, to Lender, for application as a prepayment on the principal balance of the Warehousing Note, the Release Amount in connection with such Pledged Loan or the Pledged Loans backing that Pledged Security.

 

4.3(e)                            After a Default or Event of Default occurs, Lender may, with no liability to the Borrower or any other Person, continue to release its security interest in any Pledged Loan and all of the Collateral related to such Pledged Loan, as such Collateral is described in Section 4.1 , or Pledged Security against payment of the Release Amount for such Pledged Loan or for the Pledged Loans backing that Pledged Security.

 

4.3(f)                             The amount to be paid by the Borrower to obtain the release of Lender’s security interest in a Pledged Loan and all of the Collateral related to such Pledged Loan, as such Collateral is described in Section 4.1 (“ Release Amount ”) will be (1) in connection with the sale of a Pledged Loan by Lender while an Event of Default exists, the amount paid to Lender in a commercially reasonable disposition of that Pledged Loan and (2) otherwise, the principal amount of the Warehousing Advance outstanding against the Pledged Loan together with all accrued and unpaid interest thereon.

 

4.4                                          Collection and Servicing Rights

 

4.4(a)                           If no Event of Default exists, the Borrower may service and receive and collect directly all sums payable to the Borrower in respect of the Collateral other than proceeds of any Purchase Commitment or proceeds of the sale of any Collateral.  All proceeds of any Purchase Commitment or any other sale of Collateral must be paid directly to the Cash Collateral Account for application as provided in this Agreement.

 

4.4(b)                           After an Event of Default occurs and remains continuing, Lender or its designee is entitled to service and receive and collect all sums payable to Borrower in respect of the

 

13



 

Collateral, and in such case, subject to any applicable requirements of the relevant Federal Agency, (1) Lender or its designee in its discretion may, in its own name, in the name of Borrower or otherwise, demand, sue for, collect or receive any money or property at any time payable or receivable on account of or in exchange for any of the Collateral, but Lender has no obligation to do so, (2) Borrower must, if Lender requests it to do so, hold in trust for the benefit of Lender and immediately pay to Lender at its office designated by Notice, all amounts received by Borrower upon or in respect of any of the Collateral, advising Lender as to the source of those funds, and (3) all amounts so received and collected by Lender will be held by it as part of the Collateral and applied by Lender as provided in this Agreement.

 

4.5                                          Return of Collateral at End of Warehousing Commitment

 

If (a) the Warehousing Commitment has expired or has been terminated, and (b) no Warehousing Advances, interest or other Obligations are outstanding and unpaid, Lender will release its security interest and will deliver all Collateral in its possession to the Borrower at Borrower’s expense.  Borrower’s acknowledgement or receipt for any Collateral released or delivered to Borrower under any provision of this Agreement is a complete and full acquittance for the Collateral so returned, and the Lender is discharged from any liability or responsibility for that Collateral.

 

4.6                                          Delivery of Collateral Documents

 

4.6(a)                           The Lender may deliver documents relating to the Collateral to Borrower for correction or completion under a Trust Receipt.

 

4.6(b)                           If no Default or Event of Default exists, upon delivery by Borrower to Lender of shipping instructions pursuant to the applicable Exhibit B , Lender will deliver the Mortgage Notes evidencing Pledged Loans or Pledged Securities together with all related loan documents and pool documents previously received by Lender under the requirements of the applicable Exhibit B to the designated Investor or Approved Custodian or to another party designated by Borrower and acceptable to Lender in its sole discretion.

 

4.6(c)                            If a Default or Event of Default exists, Lender may, without liability to Borrower or any other Person, continue to deliver Pledged Loans or Pledged Securities, together with all related loan documents and pool documents in Lender’s possession, to the applicable Investor or Approved Custodian or to another party acceptable to Lender in its sole discretion.

 

4.7                                          Borrower Remains Liable

 

Anything herein to the contrary notwithstanding, the Borrower shall remain liable under each item of the Collateral granted by it to observe and perform all the conditions and obligations to be observed and performed by it thereunder, all in accordance with the terms thereof and any other agreement giving rise thereto, and in accordance with and pursuant to the terms and provisions thereof.  Whether or not the Lender has exercised any rights in any of the Collateral, the Lender shall not have any obligation or liability (other than for gross negligence or willful

 

14


 

misconduct) under any of the Collateral (or any agreement giving rise thereto) by reason of or arising out of this Agreement or the receipt by the Lender of any payment relating thereto, nor shall the Lender be obligated in any manner to perform any of the obligations of the Borrower under or pursuant to any of the Collateral (or any agreement giving rise thereto) to make any payment, to make any inquiry as to the nature or the sufficiency of any payment received by it or as to the sufficiency of any performance by any party under any of the Collateral (or any agreement giving rise thereto), to present or file any claim, to take any action to enforce any performance or to collect the payment of any amounts which may have been assigned to it or to which it may be entitled at any time or times.

 

5.                                                 CONDITIONS PRECEDENT

 

5.1                                          Initial Advance

 

The effectiveness of this Agreement is subject to the satisfaction, in the sole discretion of Lender, of the following conditions precedent:

 

5.1(a)                           Lender must receive the following, all of which must be satisfactory in form and content to Lender, in its sole discretion:

 

(i)                                      The Warehousing Note and this Agreement, duly executed by the Borrower.

 

(ii)                                   The Borrower’s organizational documents, certified as true and complete by an appropriate officer or other Person.

 

(iii)                                Certificates of legal existence and good standing from the Secretary of State of Delaware for Borrower, dated within thirty (30) days of the date of this Agreement.

 

(iv)                               Such certificates of resolutions or other action, incumbency certificates and/or other certificates of responsible officers of the Borrower as Lender may require evidencing (A) the authority of the Borrower to enter into this Agreement and the other Loan Documents and (B) the identity, authority and capacity of each Authorized Representative thereof authorized to act as an Authorized Representative in connection with this Agreement and the other Loan Documents.

 

(v)                                  Uniform Commercial Code, tax lien and judgment searches of the appropriate public records for Borrower that do not disclose the existence of any Lien on the Collateral other than in favor of Lender.

 

(vi)                               Copies of Borrower’s errors and omissions insurance policy or mortgage impairment insurance policy, and blanket bond coverage policy, or certificates in lieu of policies, showing compliance by Borrower as of the date of this Agreement with the related provisions of Section 7.9 .

 

(vii)                            An opinion from counsel for the Borrower in form and substance satisfactory to Lender concerning, among other matters (i) the legal existence, good standing

 

15



 

and qualification to do business of the Borrower, (ii) the power and authority of the Borrower to enter into and perform the Loan Documents, (iv) the authorization of the individuals executing and delivering Loan Documents on behalf of the Borrower to do so, (v) the enforceability of the Borrower’s obligations under the Loan Documents, (vi) the absence of any pending or threatened material litigation against the Borrower, (vii) the validity and perfection of the Lender’s security interest in the Collateral, (viii) the non-contravention of the Borrower’s obligations under the Loan Documents, under the Borrower’s charter documents or under any material agreements or legal proceedings to which it is a party or by which it is bound, and (ix) such other matters as Lender reasonably shall request consistent with loan facilities similar to the loan facility established by this Agreement.

 

(viii)                         Such financial statements and other information as Lender shall have reasonably requested.

 

(ix)                               Such other documents as Lender reasonably may require, duly executed and delivered, and evidence satisfactory to Lender of the occurrence of any further conditions precedent to the closing of the credit facility established hereby.

 

5.1(b)                           Lender shall have filed Uniform Commercial Code financing statements in such jurisdictions as Lender shall have determined to be appropriate in order to perfect the security interest in the Collateral granted by Borrower pursuant to this Agreement or any other Loan Document.

 

5.1(c)                            Borrower shall have (i) paid to the Lender, as applicable, all amounts due as of the Closing Date, and (ii) paid or reimbursed the Lender for all its attorneys’ fees and expenses incurred in connection with this Agreement and the other Loan Documents.

 

5.2                                          Each Advance

 

The effectiveness of this Agreement, including the Lender’s obligation to make Warehousing Advances is subject to the satisfaction, in the sole discretion of Lender, as of the date of each Warehousing Advance, of the following additional conditions precedent:

 

5.2(a)                           The Borrower must have delivered to Lender the Warehousing Advance Request and the Collateral Documents required by, and must have satisfied the procedures and substantive requirements set forth in, Article 2 and the Exhibits described in that Article.  All items delivered to Lender must be satisfactory to Lender in form and content, and Lender may reject any item that does not satisfy the requirements of this Agreement or the applicable Purchase Commitment.  Confirmation of the date of the requested Warehousing Advance will constitute a representation by the Borrower that all necessary actions have been taken to qualify the Mortgage Loan for purchase by the Investor and that the borrowing hereunder is permitted by Investor regulations.

 

5.2(b)                           Lender must have received evidence satisfactory to it as to the making or continuation of any book entry or the due filing and recording in all appropriate offices of all

 

16



 

financing statements and other instruments necessary to perfect the security interest of Lender in the Collateral under the Uniform Commercial Code or other applicable law.

 

5.2(c)                            The representations and warranties of the Borrower contained in Article 6 and Article 9 must be accurate and complete in all material respects as if made on and as of the date of each Warehousing Advance.

 

5.2(d)                           The Borrower must have performed all agreements to be performed by them under this Agreement, and after giving effect to the requested Warehousing Advance, no Default or Event of Default will exist under this Agreement.

 

5.2(e)                            There shall not have been any material adverse change in the financial condition, business, or affairs of Borrower since the date of this Agreement which in Lender’s good faith judgment may jeopardize in a material manner the ability of Borrower to perform fully its obligations under each applicable Loan Document.

 

5.2(f)                             Lender shall have received and approved such other documents, and certificates as Lender reasonably may request (including without limitation the documents to be executed by the Mortgagor and the Borrower), in form and substance reasonably satisfactory to Lender.

 

5.2(g)                            Prior to any Warehousing Advance being made against any otherwise Eligible Loan, Borrower shall have provided to Lender copies of all documents, agreements and other materials and information concerning Borrower’s status as an originator and seller of such type of Mortgage Loan for the applicable Federal Agency as Lender may require.

 

Delivery of a Warehousing Advance Request by Borrower will be deemed a representation by the Borrower that all conditions set forth in this Section have been satisfied as of the date of the Warehousing Advance.

 

5.3                                          Force Majeure

 

Notwithstanding Borrower’s satisfaction of the conditions set forth in this Agreement, the Lender has no obligation to make a Warehousing Advance if Lender is prevented from obtaining the funds necessary to make a Warehousing Advance, or is otherwise prevented from making a Warehousing Advance as a result of any fire, flood or other casualty, failure of power, strike, lockout or other labor trouble, banking moratorium, embargo, sabotage, confiscation, condemnation, riot, civil disturbance, insurrection, act of terrorism, war or other activity of armed forces, act of God or other similar reason beyond the control of Lender.  Lender will make the requested Warehousing Advance as soon as reasonably possible following the occurrence of such an event (provided that all applicable terms and conditions relating to such Warehousing Advance continue to be satisfied).

 

6.                                                 GENERAL REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES

 

The Borrower represents and warrants to the Lender, as of the date of this Agreement and as of the date of each Warehousing Advance Request and the making of each Warehousing Advance, that:

 

17



 

6.1                                          Place of Business

 

The Borrower’s chief executive office and principal place of business is 7501 Wisconsin Avenue, Suite 1200,Bethesda, Maryland 20814.

 

6.2                                          Organization; Good Standing

 

The Borrower is a limited liability company duly organized, validly existing and in good standing under the laws of the State of Delaware, and has the full legal power and authority to own its property and to carry on its business as currently conducted.  The Borrower is duly qualified as a limited liability company to do business and is in good standing in each jurisdiction in which the transaction of its business makes qualification necessary, except in jurisdictions, if any, where a failure to be in good standing has no material adverse effect on Borrower’s business, operations, assets or financial condition as a whole.  For the purposes of this Agreement, good standing includes qualification for all licenses and payment of all taxes required in the jurisdiction of its formation and in each jurisdiction in which the Borrower transacts business.  Exhibit K hereto sets forth all foreign qualifications and mortgage lender and mortgage servicer licenses held by the Borrower.

 

6.3                                          Authorization and Enforceability

 

The Borrower has the power and authority to execute, deliver and perform this Agreement, the Warehousing Note and the other Loan Documents and the Borrower has the power and authority to obtain the Warehousing Advances under this Agreement.  The execution, delivery and performance by the Borrower of this Agreement, the Warehousing Note and the other Loan Documents and the Warehousing Advances requested and made under this Agreement and the Warehousing Note have been duly and validly authorized by all necessary limited liability company action on the part of the Borrower (which action has been modified or rescinded, and is in full force and effect) and does not and will not conflict with or violate any applicable provision of law, of any judgments binding upon the Borrower, or the certificate of formation and limited liability company operating agreement of Borrower, conflict with or result in a breach of, constitute a default or require any consent under, or result in or require or allow the acceleration of any indebtedness of the Borrower under any agreement, instrument or indenture to which it is a party or by which it or its property may be bound or affected, or result in the creation of any Lien upon any property or assets of the Borrower (other than the Lien on the Collateral granted under this Agreement).  This Agreement, the Warehousing Note and the other Loan Documents constitutes the legal, valid and binding obligations of the Borrower, enforceable in accordance with their respective terms, except that enforceability may be limited by bankruptcy, insolvency or other such laws affecting the enforcement of creditors’ rights and general principles of equity.

 

6.4                                          Approvals

 

The execution and delivery of this Agreement, the Warehousing Note and the other Loan Documents and the performance of the Borrower’s obligations under this Agreement, the Warehousing Note and the other Loan Documents and the validity and enforceability of this Agreement, the Warehousing Note and the other Loan Documents do not require any license,

 

18



 

consent, approval or other action of any agency, commission, instrumentality or other regulatory body or authority (in each case, whether federal, state or local, domestic or foreign) other than those that have been obtained and remain in full force and effect or those with respect to which the failure to obtain may reasonably be expected to result in a material adverse change in the Borrower’s business, operations, assets or financial conditions as a whole.

 

6.5                                          Financial Condition

 

The balance sheet of Borrower as of May 31, 2010 for the five (5) month period then ended and the balance sheet of the Borrower as of December 31, 2009 for the eleven (11) month period then ended, and the related statements of income and cash flows furnished to Lender, fairly present the financial condition of Borrower as of such date and the results of its operations for the five (5) month and eleven (11) month period, as applicable, then ended.

 

6.6                                          Litigation

 

Except as listed on Schedule 6.6 , as of the date hereof, there are no actions, claims, suits or proceedings pending or, to the Borrower’s knowledge, threatened or reasonably anticipated against or affecting the Borrower in any court or before any arbitrator or before any agency, board, bureau, commission, instrumentality or other administrative or regulatory body (in each case, whether federal, state or local, domestic or foreign) that, if adversely determined, may reasonably be expected to result in a material adverse change in the Borrower’s business, operations, assets or financial condition as a whole, or that would affect the validity or enforceability of this Agreement, the Warehousing Note or any other Loan Document.

 

6.7                                          Compliance with Laws

 

The Borrower is not in violation of any provision of any law, or of any judgment, award, rule, regulation, order, decree, writ or injunction of any court or public regulatory body or authority that could result in a material adverse change in the Borrower’s business, operations, assets or financial condition as a whole or that would affect the validity or enforceability of this Agreement, the Warehousing Note or any other Loan Document.

 

6.8                                          Regulation U

 

The Borrower is not engaged principally, or as one of its important activities, in the business of extending credit for the purpose of purchasing or carrying Margin Stock, and no part of the proceeds of any Warehousing Advance made under this Agreement will be used to purchase or carry any Margin Stock or to extend credit to others for the purpose of purchasing or carrying any Margin Stock.

 

6.9                                          Investment Company Act

 

The Borrower is not an “investment company” or controlled by an “investment company” within the meaning of the Investment Company Act.

 

19



 

6.10                                   Payment of Taxes

 

The Borrower has filed or caused to be filed all federal, state and local income, excise, property and other tax returns that are required to be filed with respect to the operations of the Borrower, all such returns are true and correct and Borrower has paid or caused to be paid all taxes shown on those returns or on any assessment, to the extent that those taxes have become due, including all FICA payments and withholding taxes, if appropriate.  The amounts reserved as a liability for income and other taxes payable in the financial statements described in Section 6.5 are sufficient for payment of all unpaid federal, state and local income, excise, property and other taxes, whether or not disputed, of Borrower accrued for or applicable to the period and on the dates of those financial statements and all years and periods prior to those financial statements and for which Borrower may be liable in its own right or as transferee of the assets of, or as successor to, any other Person.  No tax Liens have been filed and no material claims are being asserted against Borrower or any property of Borrower with respect to any taxes, fees or charges.

 

6.11                                   Agreements

 

The Borrower is not a party to any agreement, instrument or indenture or subject to any restriction materially and adversely affecting its business, operations, assets or financial condition.  The Borrower is not in default in the performance, observance or fulfillment of any of the obligations, covenants or conditions contained in any agreement, instrument, or indenture which default could result in a material adverse change in the Borrower’s business, operations, assets or financial condition as a whole.  No holder of any indebtedness of the Borrower has given notice of any asserted default under that indebtedness, and no liquidation or dissolution of the Borrower and no receivership, insolvency, bankruptcy, reorganization or other similar proceedings relative to the Borrower or any of its properties is pending or to the knowledge of the Borrower threatened.

 

6.12                                   Title to Properties

 

The Borrower has good, valid, insurable and (in the case of real property) marketable title to all of its properties and assets (whether real or personal, tangible or intangible) reflected on the financial statements described in Section 6.5 , except for those properties and assets that the Borrower has disposed of since the date of those financial statements either in the ordinary course of business or because they were no longer used or useful in the conduct of the Borrower’s business.  All of the Borrower’s properties and assets are free and clear of all Liens except as disclosed in Borrower’s financial statements.

 

6.13                                   ERISA

 

Each Plan is in compliance with all applicable requirements of ERISA and the Internal Revenue Code and with all material applicable rulings and regulations issued under the provisions of ERISA and the Internal Revenue Code setting forth those requirements, except where any failure to comply would not result in a material loss to the Borrower or any ERISA Affiliate.  All of the minimum funding standards or other contribution obligations applicable to each Plan have been satisfied.  No Plan is a Multiemployer Plan or a defined-benefit pension plan subject to Title IV of ERISA.

 

20



 

6.14                                   No Retiree Benefits

 

Except as required under Section 4980B of the Internal Revenue Code, Section 601 of ERISA or applicable state law, the Borrower is not obligated to provide post-retirement medical or insurance benefits with respect to employees or former employees.

 

6.15                                   Assumed Names

 

The Borrower does not originate Mortgage Loans or otherwise conduct business under any names other than its legal name and the assumed names set forth on Exhibit G .  The Borrower has made all filings and taken all other action as may be required under the laws of any jurisdiction in which it originates Mortgage Loans or otherwise conducts business under any assumed name.  The Borrower’s use of the assumed names set forth on Exhibit G does not conflict with any other Person’s legal rights to any such name, nor otherwise give rise to any liability by the Borrower to any other Person.  The Borrower may amend Exhibit G to add or delete any assumed names used by the Borrower to conduct business.  An amendment to Exhibit G to add an assumed name is not effective until a Borrower has delivered to Lender an assumed name certificate in the jurisdictions in which the assumed name is to be used, which must be satisfactory in form and content to Lender in its sole discretion.  In connection with any amendment to delete a name from Exhibit G , the Borrower represents and warrants that it has ceased using that assumed name in all jurisdictions.

 

6.16                                   Servicing

 

Exhibit H is a true and complete list of the Borrower’s Servicing Portfolio as of March 31, 2010.  All of the Borrower’s Servicing Contracts are in full force and effect, and are unencumbered by Liens.  No event of default or event that, with notice or lapse of time or both, would become an event of default, exists under any of Borrower’s Servicing Contracts.

 

6.17                                   Foreign Asset Control Regulations.

 

Neither the making of the Warehousing Advances nor the use of the proceeds of any thereof (or any other Loan) will violate the Trading With the Enemy Act (50 U.S.C. § 1 et seq., as amended) (the “ Trading With the Enemy Act ”) or any of the foreign assets control regulations of the United States Treasury Department (31 CFR, Subtitle B, Chapter V, as amended) (the “ Foreign Assets Control Regulations ”) or any enabling legislation or executive order relating thereto (which for the avoidance of doubt shall include, but shall not be limited to (a) Executive Order 13224 of September 21, 2001 Blocking Property and Prohibiting Transactions With Persons Who Commit, Threaten to Commit, or Support Terrorism (66 Fed. Reg. 49079 (2001)) (the “ Executive Order ”) and (b) the Uniting and Strengthening America by Providing Appropriate Tools Required to Intercept and Obstruct Terrorism Act of 2001 (Public Law 107-56).  Furthermore, neither the Borrower nor any of its affiliates (a) is or will become a “blocked person” as described in the Executive Order, the Trading With the Enemy Act or the Foreign Assets Control Regulations or (b) engages or will engage in any dealings or transactions, or be otherwise associated, with any such “blocked person.”

 

21



 

7.                                                 AFFIRMATIVE COVENANTS

 

As long as the Warehousing Commitment is outstanding or there remain any Obligations to be paid or performed under this Agreement or under any other Loan Document, the Borrower must, unless the Lender consents in writing:

 

7.1                                          Payment of Obligations

 

Punctually pay or cause to be paid all Obligations, including the Obligations payable under this Agreement and the Warehousing Note in accordance with their terms.

 

7.2                                          Financial Statements

 

Deliver to Lender, in form and detail reasonably satisfactory to Lender:

 

7.2(a)                           As soon as available and in any event within one hundred twenty (120) days after the end of each fiscal year of Borrower, audited fiscal year-end statements of income and cash flows of Borrower and its Subsidiaries for that year, and the related audited balance sheet as of the end of that year (setting forth in comparative form the corresponding figures for the preceding Fiscal Year), all in reasonable detail and accompanied by (1) an opinion as to those financial statements in form and substance reasonably satisfactory to Lender and prepared by an independent certified public accounting firm reasonably acceptable to Lender (it being acknowledged by the Lender that KPMG LLP currently is an acceptable independent certified public accounting firm) and (2) if then available or otherwise within fifteen (15) days of receipt by Borrower, any management letters, management reports or other supplementary comments or reports delivered by those accountants to Borrower or its governing board, body, manager, general partner, or the like;

 

7.2(b)                           As soon as available and in any event within sixty (60) days after the end of each Calendar Quarter of Borrower, interim statements of income of Borrower and its Subsidiaries for that Calendar Quarter and the period from the beginning of the Fiscal Year to end of that Calendar Quarter, and the related balance sheet (including contingent liabilities) as at the end of that Calendar Quarter, all in reasonable detail, subject, however, to year-end audit adjustments; and

 

7.2(c)                            Together with each delivery of financial statements required by this Section, a Compliance Certificate substantially in the form of Exhibit I .

 

7.3                                          Other Borrower Reports

 

Deliver to Lender:

 

7.3(a)                           As soon as available and in any event within sixty (60) days after the end of each calendar quarter, a report (“ Servicing Report ”) as of the end of the calendar quarter, as to all Mortgage Loans the servicing rights to which are owned by the Borrower.  The Servicing Report must be in similar summary form as previously presented to Lender (or as Lender otherwise may agree), and must, at a minimum, indicate which Mortgage

 

22



 

Loans (1) are current and in good standing, (2) are more than 30, 60 or 90 days past due, (3) are the subject of pending bankruptcy or foreclosure proceedings, or (4) have been converted (through foreclosure or other proceedings in lieu of foreclosure) into real estate owned by the Borrower, and include, by Mortgage Loan type (x) weighted average coupon, (y) weighted average maturity, and (z) weighted average servicing fee.

 

7.3(b)                           As soon as available and in any event within sixty (60) days after the end of each calendar quarter, a loan production report as of the end of that quarter, presenting (i) the total dollar volume and the number of Mortgage Loans originated and closed or purchased during that quarter and for the fiscal year-to-date, specified by property type, loan type and (ii) as to any Mortgage Loans sold in such quarter, the Investor to whom each Mortgage Loan was sold.

 

7.3(c)                            As soon as available, but in any event at least sixty (60) days before the end of each Fiscal Year, preliminary forecasts prepared by management of the Borrower, in form satisfactory to the Lender, of the balance sheets and statements of income or operations and cash flows of the Borrower on a calendar quarterly basis for the immediately following Fiscal Year (including the fiscal year in which the Maturity Date occurs).

 

7.3(d)                           Other reports in respect of Pledged Loans or Pledged Securities, including, without limitation, copies of purchase confirmations issued by Investors purchasing Pledged Loans from the Borrower, in such detail and at such times as Lender in its discretion may reasonably request.

 

7.3(e)                            With reasonable promptness, all further information regarding the business, operations, assets or financial condition of the Borrower as Lender may reasonably request, including copies of any audits completed by Fannie Mae, FHA or Ginnie Mae.

 

7.3(f)                             As soon as available and in any event within 30 days after the end of each Calendar Quarter, a report as of the end of such Calendar Quarter detailing all requests that the Borrower repurchase Mortgage Loans and the status of each such request and any indemnification or similar agreement to which the Borrower is a party in connection with any such request.

 

7.4                                          Maintenance of Existence; Conduct of Business

 

Preserve and maintain its existence as a limited liability company in good standing and all of its rights, privileges, licenses and franchises necessary or desirable in the normal conduct of its business, including its eligibility as lender, seller/servicer or issuer as described under Section 9.4 ; conduct its business in an orderly and efficient manner; maintain a net worth of acceptable assets as required for maintaining the Borrower’s eligibility as lender, seller/servicer or issuer as described under Section 9.4 ; and make no material change in the nature or character of its business or engage in any business in which it was not engaged on the date of this Agreement.

 

7.5                                          Compliance with Applicable Laws

 

Comply with the requirements of all applicable laws, rules, regulations and orders of any Governmental Authority, a breach of which could result in a material adverse change in

 

23



 

Borrower’s business, operations, assets, or financial condition as a whole or on the enforceability of this Agreement, the Warehousing Note, any other Loan Document or any Collateral, except where contested in good faith and by appropriate proceedings.

 

7.6                                          Inspection of Properties and Books; Operational Reviews

 

Permit Lender, and any Assignee or Participant (and their authorized representatives) to discuss the business, operations, assets and financial condition of the Borrower with the Borrower’s senior officers, and other management officials, agents and employees, and to examine and make copies or extracts of the Borrower’s books of account, all at such reasonable times as Lender or any Participant may request.  Provide their accountants with a copy of this Agreement promptly after its execution and authorize and instruct them to answer candidly all questions that the officers of Lender or any Participant or any authorized representatives of Lender or any Participant may address to them in reference to the financial condition or affairs of the Borrower.  The Borrower may have representatives in attendance at any meetings held between the officers or other representatives of Lender or any Participant and Borrower’s accountants under this authorization.  Permit any Lender or any Participant (and their authorized representatives) access upon reasonable Notice and during normal business hours to Borrower’s premises and records for the purpose of conducting a review of the Borrower’s general mortgage business methods, policies and procedures, auditing its loan files and reviewing the financial and operational aspects of Borrower’s business.

 

7.7                                          Notice

 

Give prompt Notice to Lender of (a) any action, suit or proceeding instituted by or against the Borrower in any federal or state court or before any agency, board, bureau, commission, instrumentality or other administrative or regulatory body (in each case, whether federal, state or local, domestic or foreign), which action, suit or proceeding has at issue in excess of $100,000, or any such proceedings threatened against the Borrower in a writing containing the details of that action, suit or proceeding; (b) the filing, recording or assessment of any Lien for any federal, state or local taxes, assessments or other governmental charges against the Borrower, any of its assets, other than a Lien for taxes, assessments or other governmental charges on real property securing or that previously secured an individual Mortgage Loan that is not a Pledged Loan; (c) the occurrence of a Default or an Event of Default; (d) the suspension, revocation or termination of the Borrower’s eligibility, in any respect, as lender, seller/servicer or issuer as described under Section 9.4 or the suspension, revocation or termination of any other license or approval required for the Borrower to engage in the business of originating, acquiring and, if applicable, servicing Mortgage Loans; (e) the imposition of any other adverse regulatory or administrative action or sanction on or against the Borrower by any agency, board, bureau, commission, instrumentality or other administrative or regulatory body (in each case, whether federal, state or local, domestic or foreign) that could result in a material adverse change in the Borrower’s business, operations, assets or financial condition as a whole or that could affect the validity or enforceability of any Pledged Loan or Pledged Security; (f) the transfer, loss, nonrenewal or termination of any Servicing Contracts to which the Borrower is a party, or which is held for the benefit of the Borrower, and the reason for that transfer, loss, nonrenewal or termination; (g) any Prohibited Transaction with respect to any Plan, specifying the nature of the Prohibited Transaction and what action the Borrower or such Guarantor’s proposes to take with respect to it; and (h) any

 

24


 

other action, event or condition of any nature that could lead to or result in a material adverse change in the business, operations, assets or financial condition of the Borrower.

 

7.8                                          Payment of Taxes and Other Obligations

 

Pay, perform and discharge, or cause to be paid, performed and discharged, all taxes, assessments and governmental charges or levies imposed upon the Borrower or upon its income, receipts or properties before those taxes, assessments and governmental charges or levies become past due, and all lawful claims for labor, materials and supplies or otherwise that, if unpaid, could become a Lien or charge upon any of their respective properties or assets.  The Borrower is not required to pay, however, any taxes, assessments and governmental charges or levies or claims for labor, materials or supplies for which the Borrower has obtained an adequate bond or insurance or that are being contested in good faith and by proper proceedings that are being reasonably and diligently pursued and for which proper reserves have been created.

 

7.9                                          Insurance

 

(a)                                  Maintain blanket bond coverage and errors and omissions insurance with such companies and in such amounts as satisfy prevailing requirements applicable to a lender, seller/servicer or issuer as described under Section 9.4 , including all applicable Federal Agency insurance requirements, and liability, fire and other hazard insurance on its properties, in each case with responsible insurance companies acceptable to Lender, in such amounts and against such risks as is customarily carried by similar businesses operating in the same location.  Within 30 days after Notice from Lender, obtain such additional insurance as Lender may reasonably require, all at the sole expense of the Borrower.  Copies of such policies must be furnished to Lender without charge upon request of Lender.  Borrower agrees to use its best efforts to obtain and deliver to Lender a certificate issued by said insurers to the effect that they will use their best efforts to give Lender at least thirty (30) days prior written notification prior to cancellation of coverage under any such policy.

 

(b)                                  Maintain a fidelity bond of an incorporated surety company in an amount acceptable to the Lender and consistent with the Borrower’s past practice securing protection and indemnity to Borrower against loss of any money or other property entrusted to Borrower or Borrower’s officers, employees or agents or coming into their control, caused by any dishonest, fraudulent or criminal act, direct or indirect, of Borrower or of its officers, employees or agents.  Borrower shall furnish a certificate evidencing such fidelity bond to Lender, upon request, and shall notify Lender if such fidelity bond coverage is decreased or exhausted.

 

7.10                                   Closing Instructions

 

Indemnify and hold Lender harmless from and against any loss, including reasonable attorneys’ fees and costs, attributable to the failure of any title insurance company, agent or attorney to comply with the Borrower’s disbursement or instruction letter relating to any Mortgage Loan. 

 

25



 

The Lender has the right to pre-approve the Borrower’s choice of title insurance company, agent or attorney, unless already approved by a relevant Federal Agency, as applicable, and the Borrower’s disbursement or instruction letter to them in any case in which the Borrower intends to obtain a Warehousing Advance against the Mortgage Loan to be created at settlement or to pledge that Mortgage Loan as Collateral under this Agreement.

 

7.11                                   Subordination of Certain Indebtedness

 

Cause any indebtedness of the Borrower for borrowed money to any Affiliate or any member, shareholder, director or officer of any Affiliate of the Borrower, to be subordinated to the Obligations by the execution and delivery to Lender of a Subordination of Debt Agreement, on the form prescribed by the Lender, certified by the corporate secretary of the Borrower to be true and complete and in full force and effect.

 

7.12                                   Other Loan Obligations

 

Perform all material obligations under the terms of each loan agreement, note, mortgage, security agreement or debt instrument by which the Borrower is bound or to which any of its property is subject, and promptly notify the Lender in writing of a declared default under or the termination, cancellation, reduction or nonrenewal of any of its other lines of credit or agreements with any other lender.  Exhibit J is a true and complete list of all such revolving lines of credit or revolving credit agreements as of the date of this Agreement.

 

7.13                                   ERISA

 

Maintain and cause each ERISA Affiliate to maintain each Plan in compliance with all material applicable requirements of ERISA and of the Internal Revenue Code and with all applicable rulings and regulations issued under the provisions of ERISA and of the Internal Revenue Code, and not, and not permit any ERISA Affiliate to, (a) engage in any transaction in connection with which the Borrower or any ERISA Affiliate would be subject to either a civil penalty assessed pursuant to Section 502(i) of ERISA or a tax imposed by Section 4975 of the Internal Revenue Code, in either case in an amount exceeding $25,000 or (b) fail to make full payment when due of all amounts that, under the provisions of any Plan, the Borrower or any ERISA Affiliate is required to pay as contributions to that Plan, or permit to exist any accumulated funding deficiency (as such term is defined in Section 302 of ERISA and Section 412 of the Internal Revenue Code), whether or not waived, with respect to any Plan in an aggregate amount exceeding $25,000.

 

7.14                                   Use of Proceeds of Warehousing Advances

 

Use the proceeds of each Warehousing Advance solely for the purpose of funding Eligible Loans and against the pledge of those Eligible Loans as Collateral.

 

7.15                                   Investor Instructions.

 

Upon any Event of Default prior to purchase of a Mortgage Loan by the Investor, and upon direction by the Lender, the Borrower shall immediately direct the Investor to provide any documents in its possession related to such Mortgage Loan to the Lender.

 

26



 

7.16                                   Sale of Mortgage Loan to Investor.

 

Provide status reports of its efforts to sell each Mortgage Loan to the applicable Investor on the earlier of: (a) within five (5) days after the Borrower becomes aware of any fact or circumstance that causes the Borrower to believe that the Investor may not purchase the Mortgage Loan within sixty (60) days after the date of the related Warehousing Advance, in which case such status report shall include Borrower’s plan for repaying the Lender the amount of the Mortgage Loan, or (b) fifty five (55) days after the date of the applicable Warehousing Advance.  In addition, if the Investor has not purchased, and the Borrower has not repaid, the Mortgage Loan within fifty-five (55) days after the date of the related Warehousing Advance, the Borrower shall immediately cause the Lender to be named as an additional insured under the property insurance policy covering the property which is collateral for the Mortgage Loan.

 

8.                                                 NEGATIVE COVENANTS

 

As long as the Warehousing Commitment is outstanding or there remain any Obligations to be paid or performed, Borrower must not, either directly or indirectly, without the prior written consent of Lender:

 

8.1                                          [Intentionally Deleted]

 

8.2                                          Contingent Liabilities

 

Assume, guarantee, endorse or otherwise become contingently liable for the obligation of any Person except (a) by endorsement of negotiable instruments for deposit or collection in the ordinary course of business and (b) for obligations arising in connection with the sale of Mortgage Loans with recourse in the ordinary course of a Borrower’s business.

 

8.3                                          Restrictions on Fundamental Changes

 

8.3(a)                           Reorganize, spin-off, consolidate with, merge with or into, or enter into any analogous reorganization or transaction with any Person.

 

8.3(b)                           Amend or otherwise modify the Borrower’s certificate of formation or operating agreement in any manner which is materially adverse to the Lender.

 

8.3(c)                            Liquidate, wind up or dissolve (or suffer any liquidation or dissolution).

 

8.3(d)                           Make any material change in the nature or scope of the business in which the Borrower engages as of the date of this Agreement and cease actively to engage in the business of originating or acquiring Mortgage Loans, or if applicable, servicing Mortgage Loans.

 

8.3(e)                            Sell, assign, lease, convey, transfer or otherwise dispose of (whether in one transaction or a series of transactions) all or any substantial part of the Borrower’s business or assets, whether now owned or acquired after the Closing Date, other than, in the ordinary course of business and to the extent not otherwise prohibited by this Agreement, sales by the Borrower of (1) Mortgage Loans, (2) Mortgage-backed Securities and (3) Servicing Contracts.

 

27



 

8.3(f)                             Acquire by purchase or in any other transaction all or substantially all of the business or property, or stock or other ownership interests of any Person.

 

8.3(g)                            Permit any Subsidiary of the Borrower or a Guarantor to do or take any of the foregoing actions.

 

8.4                                          Subsidiaries

 

Form or acquire any Subsidiary of the Borrower.

 

8.5                                          Loss of Eligibility, Licenses or Approvals

 

Take any action, or fail or omit to take any action, that would (a) cause the Borrower to lose all or any part of its status as an eligible lender, seller/servicer or issuer as described under Sections 9.4,   9.5,   9.6 or 9.7 , or all or any part of any other license or approval required for the Borrower to engage in the business of originating, acquiring and servicing Mortgage Loans or (b) result in the imposition of any other adverse regulatory or administrative action or sanction on or against the Borrower by any agency board, bureau, commission, instrumentality or other administrative or regulatory body (in each case, whether federal, state or local, domestic or foreign) that could result in a material adverse change in the Borrower’s business, operations, assets or financial condition as a whole or that could affect the validity or enforceability of any Pledged Loan.

 

8.6                                          Accounting Changes

 

Make any significant change in accounting treatment or reporting practices, except as required by GAAP, or change its fiscal year.  If any changes in GAAP would result in any material deviation in the method of calculating and results of testing compliance with any financial covenant hereunder, such financial covenant shall continue to be calculated and tested as if such change in GAAP had not occurred, unless otherwise specifically agreed in writing by Lender after full disclosure by Borrower.

 

8.7                                          Minimum Adjusted Tangible Net Worth

 

Permit the minimum Adjusted Tangible Net Worth of the Borrower, at the Closing Date and at the end of each Calendar Quarter thereafter to be less than Eighty-Five Million Dollars ($85,000,000).

 

8.8                                          Maximum Indebtedness to Adjusted Tangible Net Worth

 

Permit the ratio of Borrower’s Indebtedness (excluding Indebtedness under this Agreement) to Adjusted Tangible Net Worth of the Borrower at the Closing Date and at the end of each Calendar Quarter thereafter to be more than 3:1.

 

28



 

8.9                                          [Intentionally Deleted]

 

8.10                                   [Intentionally Deleted]

 

8.11                                   Minimum Cash and Cash Equivalents

 

Permit the sum of Borrower’s cash and Cash Equivalents at the end of any Calendar Quarter to be less than Seven Million Dollars ($7,000,000).

 

8.12                                   Servicing Delinquencies

 

Permit (i) the aggregate unpaid principal amount of Mortgage Loans comprising the Borrower’s Servicing Portfolio which are sixty (60) or more days past due or otherwise in default at any time to exceed two percent (2%) of the aggregate unpaid principal balance of all Mortgage Loans comprising the Borrower’s Servicing Portfolios at such time, or (ii) the aggregate unpaid principal amount of At Risk Mortgage Loans comprising the Borrower’s Servicing Portfolio which are sixty (60) or more days past due or otherwise in default to increase by more than two percent (2%) from the last day of a Fiscal Quarter to the last day of the following Fiscal Quarter.

 

8.13                                   Dividends and Distributions

 

So long as any Default or Event of Default is then outstanding or would be outstanding after taking into effect a dividend, redemption or setting aside of funds, cause or permit, directly or indirectly: declare, pay, authorize or make any form of dividend (except for stock dividends or stock splits) or return any capital, in cash or property, to its shareholders, their successors or assigns or repurchase, redeem or retire any of the capital stock of such Person.

 

8.14                                   Transactions with Affiliates

 

Directly or indirectly (a) make any loan, advance, extension of credit or capital contribution to any of the Borrower’s Affiliates, (b) sell, transfer, pledge or assign any of its assets to or on behalf of those Affiliates, (c) merge or consolidate with or purchase or acquire assets from those Affiliates, or (d) pay management fees to or on behalf of those Affiliates, other than (i) payments attributable to reasonable overhead and administrative charges allocated to the Borrower by the Affiliates, and (ii) reasonable subservicing fees payable to Affiliates for their servicing of the Servicing Portfolio.

 

8.15                                   Recourse Servicing Contracts

 

Except for Servicing Contracts involving Fannie Mae DUS Mortgage Loans, and conduit originations for which the Borrower notifies Lender pursuant hereto, acquire or enter into Servicing Contracts under which the Borrower must repurchase or indemnify the holder of the Mortgage Loans as a result of defaults on the Mortgage Loans at any time during the term of those Mortgage Loans.

 

29



 

9.                                                 SPECIAL REPRESENTATIONS, WARRANTIES AND COVENANTS CONCERNING COLLATERAL

 

9.1                                          Special Representations and Warranties Concerning Warehousing Collateral

 

The Borrower represents and warrants to the Lender, as of the date of this Agreement and as of the date of each Warehousing Advance Request and the making of each Warehousing Advance, that:

 

9.1(a)                           The Borrower has selected the Collateral in a manner so as to not affect adversely Lender’s interests.

 

9.1(b)                           The Borrower is the legal and equitable owner and holder, free and clear of all Liens (other than Liens granted under this Agreement), of the Pledged Loans and the Pledged Securities.  All Pledged Loans, Pledged Securities and related Purchase Commitments have been duly authorized and validly issued to the Borrower, and all of the foregoing items of Collateral comply with all of the requirements of this Agreement, and have been and will continue to be validly pledged or assigned to Lender, subject to no other Liens.

 

9.1(c)                            The Borrower has, and will continue to have, the full right, power and authority to pledge the Collateral pledged and to be pledged by it under this Agreement.

 

9.1(d)                           Each Mortgage Loan and each related document included in the Pledged Loans (1) has been duly executed and delivered by the parties to that Mortgage Loan and that related document, (2) has been made in compliance with all applicable laws, rules and regulations (including all laws, rules and regulations relating to usury), (3) is and will continue to be a legal, valid and binding obligation, enforceable in accordance with its terms, without setoff, counterclaim or defense in favor of the mortgagor under the Mortgage Loan or any other obligor on the Mortgage Note, (4) has not been modified, amended or any requirements of which waived, except in a writing that is part of the Collateral Documents, and (5) complies and will continue to comply with the terms of this Agreement, the related Purchase Commitment, and the standard practices of the applicable Investor.

 

9.1(e)                            Each Pledged Loan is secured by a Mortgage on real property and improvements located in one of the states of the United States or the District of Columbia.

 

9.1(f)                             Each Pledged Loan has been closed or will be closed and funded with the Warehousing Advance made against it.

 

9.1(g)                            Each Pledged Loan against which a Warehousing Advance has been or will be made on the basis of a Purchase Commitment, meets all of the requirements of that Purchase Commitment, and each Pledged Security against which a Warehousing Advance is outstanding meets all of the requirements of the related Purchase Commitment.

 

9.1(h)                           Pledged Loans that are intended to be exchanged for Agency Securities comply or, prior to the issuance of the Agency Securities will comply, with the requirements of any

 

30



 

governmental instrumentality, department or agency issuing or guaranteeing the Agency Securities.

 

9.1(i)                               Except for FHA Construction Mortgage Loans, each Mortgage Loan has been fully advanced in the face amount of its Mortgage Note.

 

9.1(j)                              Each Pledged Loan is a First Mortgage Loan, unless permitted to be a Subordinate Mortgage Loan under Exhibit D (in which case such Pledged Loan may only be a Second Mortgage Loan or a Third Mortgage Loan).

 

9.1(k)                           Each First Mortgage Loan is secured by a First Mortgage on the real property and improvements described in or covered by that Mortgage.

 

9.1(l)                               Each First Mortgage Loan has or will have a title insurance policy, in ALTA form or equivalent, from a recognized title insurance company, insuring the priority of the Lien of the Mortgage and meeting the usual requirements of Investors purchasing those Mortgage Loans.

 

9.1(m)                       The real property securing each Pledged Loan has been evaluated or appraised in accordance with Title XI of FIRREA, USPAP, and the requirements of the applicable Investor.

 

9.1(n)                           Each Subordinate Mortgage Loan (to the extent Subordinate Mortgage Loans are permitted by Exhibit D ) is a Second Mortgage Loan or a Third Mortgage Loan on the premises described in that Mortgage.  With respect to each Second Mortgage Loan and Third Mortgage Loan, the Borrower shall be the servicer, and the lender with respect to such Second Mortgage Loan and Third Mortgage Loan shall also be the lender with respect to the senior Mortgage Loan on such Property.

 

9.1(o)                           To the extent required by the related Purchase Commitment or by Investors generally for similar Mortgage Loans, each Subordinate Mortgage Loan has or will have a title insurance policy, in ALTA form or equivalent, from a recognized title insurance company, insuring the appropriate priority of the Lien of the Mortgage and meeting the usual requirements of Investors purchasing those Mortgage Loans.

 

9.1(p)                           The Mortgage Note for each Pledged Loan is (1) payable or endorsed to the order of the Borrower, (2) an “instrument” within the meaning of Article 9 of the Uniform Commercial Code of all applicable jurisdictions and (3) is denominated and payable in United States dollars.

 

9.1(q)                           No default exists under any Mortgage Loan when such Mortgage Loan first is included as a Pledged Loan, and no default has existed for 60 days or more under any such Mortgage Loan at any time thereafter.

 

9.1(r)                              No party to a Mortgage Loan or any related document is in violation of any applicable law, rule or regulation that would impair the collectability of the Mortgage Loan or the performance by the mortgagor or any other obligor of his or her obligations under the Mortgage Note or any related document.

 

31



 

9.1(s)                             All fire and casualty policies covering the real property and improvements encumbered by each Mortgage included in the Pledged Loans (1) name and will continue to name Borrower and its successors and assigns as the insured under a standard mortgagee clause, (2) are and will continue to be in full force and effect and (3) afford and will continue to afford insurance against fire and such other risks as are usually insured against in the broad form of extended coverage insurance generally available.

 

9.1(t)                              Pledged Loans secured by real property and improvements located in a special flood hazard area designated as such by the Director of the Federal Emergency Management Agency are and will continue to be covered by special flood insurance under the National Flood Insurance Program.

 

9.1(u)                           The real property and improvements securing each Pledged Loan are free of damage or waste and are in good repair, and no improvement located on or being a part of such real property violates any applicable zoning law or regulation (unless constituting a legal non-conforming use or improvement).

 

9.1(v)                           No notice of any partial or total condemnation has been given with respect to the real property and improvements securing any Pledged Loan.

 

9.1(w)                         None of the Pledged Loans is a graduated payment Mortgage Loan or has a shared appreciation or other contingent interest feature, and each Pledged Loan provides for periodic payments of all accrued interest on the Mortgage Loan on at least a monthly basis.

 

9.1(x)                           Neither the Borrower nor any of the Borrower’s Affiliates has any ownership interest, right to acquire any ownership interest or equivalent economic interest in any property securing a Pledged Loan or the mortgagor under the Pledged Loan or any other obligor on the Mortgage Note for such Pledged Loan.

 

9.1(y)                           The original assignments of Mortgage delivered to Lender for each Pledged Loan are in recordable form and comply with all applicable laws and regulations governing the filing and recording of such documents.

 

9.1(z)                            None of the mortgagors, guarantors or other obligors of any Pledged Loan is a Person named in any Restriction List and to whom the provision of financial services is prohibited or otherwise restricted by applicable law.

 

9.2                                          Special Affirmative Covenants Concerning Warehousing Collateral

 

As long as the Warehousing Commitment is outstanding or there remain any Obligations to be paid or performed under this Agreement or under any other Loan Document, the Borrower must, unless the Lender consents in writing:

 

9.2(a)                           Warrant and defend the right, title and interest of Lender in and to the Collateral against the claims and demands of all Persons.

 

32



 

9.2(b)                           Service or cause to be serviced all Pledged Loans in accordance with the standard requirements of the issuers of Purchase Commitments covering them and all applicable Federal Agency requirements, including taking all actions necessary to enforce the obligations of the obligors under such Mortgage Loans; service or cause to be serviced all Mortgage Loans backing Pledged Securities in accordance with applicable governmental requirements and requirements of issuers of Purchase Commitments covering them; hold all escrow funds collected in respect of Pledged Loans and Mortgage Loans backing Pledged Securities in trust, without commingling the same with non-custodial funds, and apply them for the purposes for which those funds were collected.

 

9.2(c)                            Execute and deliver to Lender, with respect to the Collateral, those further instruments of sale, pledge, assignment or transfer, and those powers of attorney, as reasonably required by Lender, and do and perform all matters and things necessary or reasonably desirable to be done or observed, for the purpose of effectively creating, maintaining and preserving the security and benefits intended to be afforded Lender under this Agreement.

 

9.2(d)                           Notify Lender within three (3) Business Days of any default under, or of the termination of, any Purchase Commitment relating to any Pledged Loan, Eligible Mortgage Pool or Pledged Security.

 

9.2(e)                            Promptly comply in all respects with the terms and conditions of all Purchase Commitments, and all extensions, renewals and modifications or substitutions of or to all Purchase Commitments; deliver or cause to be delivered to the Investor the Pledged Loans and Pledged Securities to be sold under each Purchase Commitment not later than the mandatory delivery date of the Pledged Loans or Pledged Securities under the Purchase Commitment.

 

9.2(f)                             Compare the names of every mortgagor, guarantor and other obligor of every Mortgage Loan, together with appropriate identifying information concerning those Persons obtained by Borrower, against every Restriction List, and make certain that none of the mortgagors, guarantors or other obligors of any Mortgage Loan is a Person named in any Restriction List and to whom the provision of financial services is prohibited or otherwise restricted by applicable law.

 

9.2(g)                            Other than with respect to Fannie Mae DUS Mortgage Loans, prior to the origination by the Borrower of any Mortgage Loans for sale to a Federal Agency, the Borrower shall have entered into an agreement among Lender, the Investor under the applicable Purchase Commitment, and the Borrower, pursuant to which such Investor agrees to send all cash proceeds of Mortgage Loans sold by the Borrower to such Investor to the applicable Cash Collateral Account.

 

33



 

9.3                                          Special Negative Covenants Concerning Warehousing Collateral

 

As long as the Warehousing Commitment is outstanding or there remain any Obligations to be paid or performed, the Borrower must not, either directly or indirectly, without the prior written consent of Lender:

 

9.3(a)                           Amend, modify, or waive any of the terms and conditions of, or settle or compromise any claim in respect of, any Pledged Loans or Pledged Securities.

 

9.3(b)                           Sell, transfer or assign, or grant any option with respect to, or pledge (except under this Agreement and, with respect to each Pledged Loan or Pledged Security, the related Purchase Commitment) any of the Collateral or any interest in any of the Collateral.

 

9.3(c)                            Make any compromise, adjustment or settlement in respect of any of the Collateral or accept any consideration other than cash in payment or liquidation of the Collateral.

 

9.4                                          Special Representations and Warranties Concerning Eligibility as Fannie Mae Approved Seller/Servicer of Mortgage Loans

 

The Borrower represents and warrants to Lender, as of the date of this Agreement and as of the date of each Warehousing Advance Request and the making of each Warehousing Advance, that the Borrower is approved, qualified and in good standing as a Fannie Mae-approved seller/servicer of Mortgage Loans, eligible to originate, purchase, hold, sell and service Mortgage Loans to be sold to Fannie Mae under the Fannie Mae DUS Program.

 

9.5                                          Special Representation and Warranty Concerning Fannie Mae DUS Program Reserve Requirements

 

The Borrower represents and warrants to Lender that the Borrower will have met the Fannie Mae DUS Program requirements for lender reserves for each Fannie Mae DUS Mortgage Loan to be funded by a Warehousing Advance, at such time as required by Fannie Mae under the Fannie Mae DUS Program.

 

9.6                                          Special Representations and Warranties Concerning FHA Mortgage Loans

 

The Borrower represents and warrants to Lender, as of the date of each Advance Request and the making of each Warehousing Advance, that:

 

9.6(a)                           Each FHA-insured Mortgage Loan included in the Pledged Loans meets all applicable governmental requirements for such insurance.  The Borrower has complied and will continue to comply with all laws, rules and regulations with respect to the FHA insurance of each Pledged Loan designated by the Borrower as an FHA-insured Mortgage Loan, and such insurance is and will continue to be in full force and effect.

 

9.6(b)                           For FHA-insured Pledged Loans that will be used to back Ginnie Mae Mortgage-backed Securities, the Borrower has received from Ginnie Mae the Confirmation Notice for Request of Additional Commitment Authority and Confirmation Notice for Request of Pool Numbers, and there remains available under those agreements a commitment on

 

34


 

the part of Ginnie Mae sufficient to permit the issuance of Ginnie Mae Mortgage-backed Securities in an amount at least equal to the amount of the Pledged Loans designated by the Borrower as the Mortgage Loans to be used to back those Ginnie Mae Mortgage-backed Securities; each of those Confirmation Notices is in full force and effect; each of those Pledged Loans has been assigned by the Borrower to one of those Pool Numbers and a portion of the available Ginnie Mae Commitment has been allocated to this Agreement by the Borrower, in an amount at least equal to those Pledged Loans; and each of those assignments and allocations has been reflected in the books and records of the Borrower.

 

9.7                                          Special Representations and Warranties Concerning Eligibility as Freddie Mac Program Plus Seller/Servicer of Mortgage Loans

 

9.7(a)                           The Borrower represents and warrants to Lender, as of the date of this Agreement and as of the date of each Warehousing Advance Request and the making of each Warehousing Advance, that the Borrower is approved, qualified and in good standing as a Freddie Mac Program Plus seller/servicer of Mortgage Loans

 

10.                                          DEFAULTS; REMEDIES

 

10.1                                   Events of Default

 

The occurrence of any of the following is an event of default (“ Event of Default ”):

 

10.1(a)                    The Borrower fails to pay the principal of any Warehousing Advance when due, whether at stated maturity, by acceleration, or otherwise; or fails to pay interest on any Warehousing Advance when due hereunder; or fails to pay, within any applicable grace period, any other amount due under this Agreement or any other Obligation of the Borrower to Lender.

 

10.1(b)                    The Borrower fails to perform or comply with any term or condition applicable to it contained in any Section of Article 7 or Article 8 .

 

10.1(c)                     The suspension, revocation or termination of the Borrower’s eligibility, in any respect, as lender, seller/servicer or issuer as described under Sections 9.4,   9.5,   9.6 or 9.7 , or of any other license or approval required for Borrower to engage in the business of originating, acquiring and, if applicable, servicing Mortgage Loans; or the imposition of any other adverse regulatory or administrative action or sanction on or against the Borrower by any agency, board, bureau, commission, instrumentality or other administrative or regulatory body (in each case, whether federal, state or local, domestic or foreign), that in each such case could result in a material adverse change in the Borrower’s business, operations, assets or financial condition as a whole or that could affect the validity or enforceability of any Pledged Loan.

 

10.1(d)                    Any representation or warranty made or deemed made by the Borrower under this Agreement, in any other Loan Document or in any written statement or certificate at any time given by the Borrower is inaccurate or incomplete in any material respect on the date as of which it is made or deemed made.

 

35



 

10.1(e)                     The Borrower defaults in the performance of or compliance with any term contained in this Agreement or any other Loan Document other than those referred to in Sections 10.1(a) , 10.1(b) , 10.1(c)  or 10.1(d)  and such default has not been remedied or waived in writing within 30 days after the earliest of (1) receipt by the Borrower of Notice from Lender of that default, (2) receipt by Lender of Notice from the Borrower of that default or (3) the date the Borrower should have notified Lender of that default under the applicable clause of Section 7.7 .

 

10.1(f)                      The Borrower defaults under any other Indebtedness in excess of $100,000 (individually or in the aggregate) and such default continues beyond any applicable grace period provided in the relevant agreement with respect thereto.

 

10.1(g)                     An “event of default” (however defined) occurs under any agreement between the Borrower and Lender or its affiliates other than this Agreement and the other Loan Documents.

 

10.1(h)                    A case (whether voluntary or involuntary) is filed by or against the Borrower under any applicable bankruptcy, insolvency or other similar federal or state law; or a court of competent jurisdiction appoints a receiver (interim or permanent), liquidator, sequestrator, trustee, custodian or other officer having similar powers over the Borrower, or over all or a substantial part of its properties or assets, and, if filed against the Borrower, such action is not dismissed within sixty (60) days; or the Borrower (1) consents to the appointment of or possession by a receiver (interim or permanent), liquidator, sequestrator, trustee, custodian or other officer having similar powers over the Borrower or over all or a substantial part of its properties or assets, (2) makes an assignment for the benefit of creditors, or (3) fails, or admits in writing its inability, to pay its debts as those debts become due.

 

10.1(i)                        The Borrower fails to perform any contractual obligation to repurchase Mortgage Loans.

 

10.1(j)                       Any money judgment, writ or warrant of attachment or similar process involving an amount in excess of $100,000 is entered or filed against the Borrower or any of its properties or assets and remains undischarged, unvacated, unbonded or unstayed for a period of 30 days or 5 days before the date of any proposed sale under that money judgment, writ or warrant of attachment or similar process.

 

10.1(k)                    Any order, judgment or decree decreeing the dissolution of the Borrower is entered and remains undischarged or unstayed for a period of 20 days.

 

10.1(l)                        The Borrower purports to disavow any of its Obligations or contests the validity or enforceability of any Loan Document.

 

10.1(m)                The Lender’s security interest on any portion of the Collateral becomes unenforceable or otherwise impaired.

 

36



 

10.1(n)                    A material adverse change occurs in the Borrower’s financial condition, business, properties or assets, operations or prospects, or in Borrower’s ability to repay the Obligations.

 

10.1(o)                    Any Lien for any tax, assessment or other governmental charge (i) is filed or is otherwise enforced against the Borrower or any of its property, including any of the Collateral, other than a Lien for taxes, assessments or other governmental charges on real property securing or that previously secured an individual Mortgage Loan that is not a Pledged Loan, or (ii) obtains priority that is equal to or greater than the priority of Lender’s security interest in any of the Collateral.

 

10.2                                   Remedies

 

10.2(a)                    If an Event of Default described in Section 10.1(h)  occurs with respect to the Borrower, the Warehousing Commitment will automatically terminate and the unpaid principal amount of and accrued interest on the Warehousing Note and all other Obligations will automatically become due and payable, without presentment, demand or other Notice or requirements of any kind, all of which the Borrower expressly waives.

 

10.2(b)                    If an Event of Default described in Section 10.1(a)  occurs with respect to the Borrower, the Lender may terminate the Warehousing Commitment and declare the Obligations to be immediately due and payable.

 

10.2(c)                     If any other Event of Default occurs, the Lender may, by Notice to the Borrower, terminate the Warehousing Commitment and declare the Obligations to be immediately due and payable.

 

10.2(d)                    If any Event of Default occurs, the Lender may, also take any of the following actions:

 

(i)                                      Foreclose upon or otherwise enforce its security interest in and Lien on the Collateral to secure all payments and performance of the Obligations in any manner permitted by law or provided for in the Loan Documents.

 

(ii)                                   Notify all obligors under any of the Collateral that the Collateral has been assigned to the Lender (or to another Person designated by the Lender) and that all payments on that Collateral are to be made directly to the Lender (or such other Person); settle, compromise or release, in whole or in part, any amounts any obligor or Investor owes on any of the Collateral on terms acceptable to the Lender; enforce payment and prosecute any action or proceeding involving any of the Collateral; and where any Collateral is in default, foreclose on and enforce any Liens securing that Collateral in any manner permitted by law and sell any property acquired as a result of those enforcement actions.

 

(iii)                                Prepare and submit for filing Uniform Commercial Code amendment statements evidencing the assignment to Lender or its designee of any Uniform Commercial Code financing statement filed in connection with any item of Collateral.

 

37



 

(iv)                               Act, or contract with a third party to act at the Borrower’s expense, as servicer or subservicer of Collateral requiring servicing and perform all obligations required under any Collateral, including Servicing Contracts and Purchase Commitments.

 

(v)                                  Require the Borrower to assemble and make available to the Lender the Collateral and all related books and records at a place designated by the Lender.

 

(vi)                               Enter onto property where any Collateral or related books and records are located and take possession of those items with or without judicial process; and obtain access to the Borrower’s respective data processing equipment, computer hardware and software relating to the Collateral and use all of the foregoing and the information contained in the foregoing in any manner the Lender deems necessary for the purpose of effectuating its rights under this Agreement and any other Loan Document.

 

(vii)                            Before the disposition of the Collateral, prepare it for disposition in any manner and to the extent the Lender deems appropriate.

 

(viii)                         Exercise all rights and remedies of a secured creditor under the Commercial Code of Pennsylvania or other applicable law, including selling or otherwise disposing of all or any portion of the Collateral at one or more public or private sales, whether or not the Collateral is present at the place of sale, for cash or credit or future delivery, on terms and conditions and in the manner as the Lender may determine, including sale under any applicable Purchase Commitment.  The Borrower waives any right it may have to prior notice of the sale of all or any portion of the Collateral to the extent allowed by applicable law.  If notice is required under applicable law, the Lender will give the Borrower not less than 10 days’ notice of any public sale or of the date after which any private sale may be held.  The Borrower agrees that 10 days’ notice is reasonable notice.  The Lender may, without notice or publication, adjourn any public or private sale one or more times by announcement at the time and place fixed for the sale, and the sale may be held at any time or place announced at the adjournment.  In the case of a sale of all or any portion of the Collateral on credit or for future delivery, the Collateral sold on those terms may be retained by the Lender until the purchaser pays the selling price or takes possession of the Collateral.  The Lender has no liability to the Borrower if a purchaser fails to pay for or take possession of Collateral sold on those terms, and in the case of any such failure, the Lender may sell the Collateral again upon notice complying with this Section.

 

(ix)                               The Lender may proceed by suit at law or in equity to collect all amounts due on the Collateral, or to foreclose the Lender’s Lien on and sell all or any portion of the Collateral pursuant to a judgment or decree of a court of competent jurisdiction.

 

(x)                                  Proceed against the Borrower on the Warehousing Note.

 

38



 

10.2(e)                     The Lender will not incur any liability as a result of the commercially reasonable sale or other disposition of all or any portion of the Collateral at any public or private sale or other disposition.  The Borrower waives (to the extent permitted by law) any claims it may have against the Lender or any Lender arising by reason of the fact that the price at which the Collateral may have been sold at a private sale was less than the price that might have been obtained at a public sale, or was less than the aggregate amount of the outstanding Warehousing Advances, accrued and unpaid interest on those Warehousing Advances, and unpaid fees, even if the Lender accepts the first offer received and does not offer the Collateral to more than one offeree.  The Borrower agrees that any sale of Collateral under the terms of a Purchase Commitment, or any other disposition of Collateral arranged by Borrower, whether before or after the occurrence of an Event of Default, will be deemed to have been made in a commercially reasonable manner.

 

10.2(f)                      The Borrower acknowledges that Mortgage Loans are collateral of a type that is the subject of widely distributed standard price quotations and that Mortgage-backed Securities are collateral of a type that is customarily sold on a recognized market.  The Borrower waives any right it may have to prior notice of the sale of Pledged Securities, and agrees that the Lender or any Lender may purchase Pledged Loans and Pledged Securities at a private sale of such Collateral.

 

10.2(g)                     The Borrower specifically waives and releases (to the extent permitted by law) any equity or right of redemption, stay or appraisal that the Borrower has or may have under any rule of law or statute now existing or adopted after the date of this Agreement, and any right to require the Lender or any Lender to (1) proceed against any Person, (2) proceed against or exhaust any of the Collateral or pursue its rights and remedies against the Collateral in any particular order or (3) pursue any other remedy within its power.  The Lender is not required to take any action to preserve any rights of the Borrower against holders of mortgages having priority to the Lien of any Mortgage or Security Agreement included in the Collateral or to preserve the Borrower’s rights against other prior parties.

 

10.2(h)                    The Lender may, but is not obligated to, advance any sums or do any act or thing necessary to uphold or enforce the Lien and priority of, or the security intended to be afforded by, any Mortgage or Security Agreement included in the Collateral, including payment of delinquent taxes or assessments and insurance premiums.  All advances, charges, costs and expenses, including reasonable attorneys’ fees and disbursements, incurred or paid by the Lender in exercising any right, power or remedy conferred by this Agreement, or in the enforcement of this Agreement, together with interest on those amounts at the Default Rate, from the time paid by the Lender until repaid by the Borrower, are deemed to be principal outstanding under this Agreement and the Warehousing Note.

 

10.2(i)                        No failure or delay on the part of the Lender or any Lender to exercise any right, power or remedy provided in this Agreement or under any other Loan Document, at law or in equity, will operate as a waiver of that right, power or remedy.  No single or partial exercise by the Lender or any Lender of any right, power or remedy provided under this Agreement or any other Loan Document, at law or in equity, precludes any other or

 

39



 

further exercise of that right, power or remedy by the Lender, or the Lender’s exercise of any other right, power or remedy.  Without limiting the foregoing, the Borrower waives all defenses based on the statute of limitations to the extent permitted by law.  The remedies provided in this Agreement and the other Loan Documents are cumulative and are not exclusive of any remedies provided at law or in equity.

 

10.2(j)                       The Borrower grants the Lender a license or other right to use, without charge, Borrower’s computer programs, other programs, labels, patents, copyrights, rights of use of any name, trade secrets, trade names, trademarks, service marks and advertising matter, or any property of a similar nature, as it pertains to the Collateral, in advertising for sale and selling any of the Collateral and the Borrower’s rights under all licenses and all other agreements related to the foregoing inure to the Lender’s benefit until the Obligations are paid in full.

 

10.3                                   Insufficiency of Proceeds

 

Nothing herein shall require the Lender to look to all or any portion of the Collateral prior to, or in lieu of, pursuing any other right or remedy, any or all of which may be pursued in any order and at any time, including at the same time.

 

10.4                                   Lender Appointed Attorney-in-Fact

 

The Borrower appoints the Lender its attorney-in-fact, with full power of substitution, for the purpose of carrying out the provisions of this Agreement, the Warehousing Note and the other Loan Documents and taking any action and executing any instruments that the Lender deems necessary or advisable to accomplish that purpose.  The Borrower’s appointment of the Lender as attorney-in-fact is irrevocable and coupled with an interest.  Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, the Lender may give notice of its security interest in and Lien on the Collateral to any Person, either in the Borrower’s name or in its own name, endorse all Pledged Loans or Pledged Securities payable to the order of the Borrower, change or cause to be changed the book-entry registration or name of subscriber or Investor on any Pledged Security, prepare and submit for filing Uniform Commercial Code amendment statements with respect to any Uniform Commercial Code financing statements filed in connection with any item of Collateral or receive, endorse and collect all checks made payable to the order of the Borrower representing payment on account of the principal of or interest on, or the proceeds of sale of, any of the Pledged Loans or Pledged Securities and give full discharge for those transactions.  The foregoing appointment shall be effective immediately with respect to ministerial matters, and upon the occurrence of an Event of Default with respect to all other matters.

 

10.5                                   Right of Set-Off

 

The Borrower hereby grants to the Lender a continuing lien, security interest and right of setoff as security for all liabilities and obligations to the Lender, whether now existing or hereafter arising, upon and against all deposits, credits, collateral and property, now or hereafter in the possession, custody safekeeping or control of the Lender or any entity under the control of the Lender, and their respective successors and assigns or in transit to any of them, other than third-party custodial accounts maintained by Borrower at Lender.  Upon occurrence of an  Event of

 

40



 

Default with respect to the payment of any Obligation or in the performance of any of its duties under the Loan Documents, the Lender may, without Notice to or demand on the Borrower (which Notice or demand the Borrower expressly waives), set-off, appropriate or apply any property of the Borrower held at any time by the Lender, or any indebtedness at any time owed by the Lender to or for the account of a Borrower, against the Obligations, whether or not those Obligations have matured.  ANY AND ALL RIGHTS TO REQUIRE LENDER TO EXERCISE ITS RIGHTS OR REMEDIES WITH RESPECT TO ANY OTHER COLLATERAL WHICH SECURES THE LOANS, PRIOR TO EXERCISING ITS RIGHT OF SETOFF WITH RESPECT TO SUCH NON-CUSTODIAL DEPOSITS, CREDITS OR OTHER PROPERTY OF THE BORROWER, ARE HEREBY KNOWINGLY, VOLUNTARILY AND IRREVOCABLY WAIVED.

 

11.                                          MISCELLANEOUS

 

11.1                                   Notices

 

Except where telephonic or facsimile notice is expressly authorized by this Agreement, all communications required or permitted to be given or made under this Agreement (“ Notices ”) must be in writing and must be sent by manual delivery, overnight courier or United States mail (postage prepaid), addressed as follows (or at such other address as may be designated by Borrower or Lender in a Notice to the other):

 

If to Borrower:

Walker & Dunlop, LLC

 

 

7501 Wisconsin Avenue, Suite 1200

 

 

 

Bethesda, Maryland 20814

 

Attention:

Deborah A. Wilson

 

 

 

Telephone:

(301) 215-5575

 

 

Facsimile:

(301) 634-2150

 

 

 

 

In each case with a copy to:

Morgan Lewis & Bockius LLP

 

225 Franklin Street

 

 

 

Boston, Massachusetts

 

Attention:

Sula R. Fiszman

 

 

 

Telephone:

617-341-7730

 

 

Facsimile:

617-341-7701

 

 

 

 

If to the Lender:

PNC Real Estate Finance

 

One PNC Plaza, 19th Floor

 

 

 

P1-POPP-19-2

 

 

Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania 15222

 

 

Attention: James A. Colella, Executive Vice President, Market Manager

 

 

Telephone: (412) 762-2260

 

 

Facsimile: (412) 762-6500

 

 

 

 

 

and

 

 

 

 

 

PNC Real Estate Finance

 

41



 

 

 

One PNC Plaza, 19 th  Floor

 

 

P1 — POPP — 19-2

 

 

Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania 15222

 

 

Attention: Terri Wyda, Vice President

 

 

Telephone: (412) 768-8782

 

 

Facsimile: (412) 762-6500

 

 

 

In each case with a copy to:

Ballard Spahr LLP

 

 

 

300 East Lombard Street, 18 th  Floor

 

 

Baltimore, Maryland 21202

 

 

Attention: Thomas A. Hauser, Esquire

 

 

Telephone: (410) 528-5691

 

 

Facsimile: (410) 528-5650

 

All periods of Notice will be measured from the date of delivery if delivered manually or by facsimile, from the first Business Day after the date of sending if sent by overnight courier or from 4 days after the date of mailing if sent by United States mail, except that Notices to the Lender under Article 2 and Section 3.3(e)  will be deemed to have been given only when actually received by the Lender.  The Borrower authorizes the Lender to accept the Borrower’s Warehousing Advance Requests, shipping requests, wire transfer instructions, security delivery instructions and other routine communications concerning the Warehousing Commitment and the Collateral transmitted to the Lender by electronic transmission (including facsimile or e-mail) and those documents, when transmitted to the Lender by electronic transmission have the same force and effect as the originals.

 

11.2                                   Reimbursement Of Expenses; Indemnity

 

11.2(a)                    Whether or not the transactions contemplated hereby shall be consummated, the Borrower agrees to pay promptly: (i) all the actual and reasonable out-of-pocket costs and expenses of the Lender for preparation of the Loan Documents and any consents, amendments, waivers, or other modifications thereto; (ii) the reasonable fees, expenses, and disbursements of counsel to the Lender in connection with the negotiation, preparation, execution, and administration of the Loan Documents and any consents, amendments, waivers, or other modifications thereto and any other documents or matters requested by the Borrower; (iii) all other actual and reasonable out-of-pocket costs and expenses incurred by the Lender in connection with the establishment of the facility, and the negotiation, preparation, and execution of the Loan Documents and any consents, amendments, waivers, or other modifications thereto and the transactions contemplated thereby; and (iv) all reasonable out-of-pocket expenses (including reasonable attorneys fees and costs, which attorneys may be employees of the Lender and the fees and costs of appraisers, brokers, investment bankers or other experts retained by the Lender) incurred by the Lender in connection with (x) the enforcement of or preservation of rights under any of the Loan Documents against the Borrower or any other Person, or the administration thereof, (y) any refinancing or restructuring of the credit arrangements provided under this Agreement in the nature of a “work out” or pursuant to any insolvency or bankruptcy proceedings, and (z) any litigation, proceeding or dispute whether arising hereunder or otherwise, in any way related to the

 

42



 

Lender’s relationship with the Borrower, except to the extent arising out of such Person’s gross negligence or willful misconduct as finally determined by a court of competent jurisdiction.  The covenants of this Section shall survive payment or satisfaction of payment of amounts owing with respect to the Warehousing Note.  The amount of all such expenses shall, until paid, bear interest at the rate applicable to principal hereunder (including the Default Rate) and be an Obligation secured by any Collateral.

 

11.2(b)                    The Borrower shall indemnify and hold harmless the Lender and its respective parents, affiliates, officers, directors, employees, attorneys, and agents (“ Indemnified Party ”) from and against any and all claims, actions and suits whether groundless or otherwise, and from and against any and all liabilities, losses, damages and expenses of every nature and character arising out of this Agreement or any of the other Loan Documents or the transactions contemplated hereby (“ Damages ”) including, without limitation (i) any actual or proposed use by the Borrower of the proceeds of the Loan, (ii) the Borrower entering into or performing this Agreement or any of the other Loan Documents, or (iii) with respect to the Borrower and its properties and assets, the violation of any applicable law, in each case including, without limitation, the reasonable fees and disbursements of counsel and allocated costs of internal counsel incurred in connection with any such investigation, litigation or other proceeding; provided , however , that no Indemnified Party shall be entitled to indemnification if a court of competent jurisdiction finally determines (all appeals having been exhausted or waived) that such Indemnified Party acted with willful misconduct or gross negligence.  In litigation, or the preparation therefor, the Lender shall be entitled to select their respective own counsel and, in addition to the foregoing indemnity, the Borrower agrees to pay promptly the reasonable fees and expenses of such counsel.  If, and to the extent that the obligations of the Borrower under this Section 11.2(b)  are unenforceable for any reason, the Borrower agrees to make the maximum contribution to the payment in satisfaction of such obligations which is permissible under applicable law.  The provisions of this Section 11.2(b)  shall survive the repayment of the Loan and the termination of the obligations of the Lender hereunder.

 

11.3                                   Financial Information

 

All financial statements and reports furnished to the Lender under this Agreement must be prepared in accordance with GAAP, applied on a basis consistent with that applied in preparing the most recent Audited Financial Statement of the Borrower provided to Lender.

 

11.4                                   Terms Binding Upon Successors; Survival of Representations

 

The terms and provisions of this Agreement are binding upon and inure to the benefit of the Borrower, the Lender, and their respective successors and permitted assigns.  All of the Borrower’s representations, warranties, covenants and agreements survive the making of any Warehousing Advance, and, except where a longer period is set forth in this Agreement, remain effective for as long as the Warehousing Commitment is outstanding or there remain any Obligations to be paid or performed.

 

43



 

11.5                                   Pledge to Federal Reserve Banks

 

The Lender may at any time pledge or assign all or any portion of its rights under the Loan Documents (including, without limitation, any portion of its Warehousing Note) to any of the Federal Reserve Banks organized under Section 4 of the Federal Reserve Act, 12 U.S.C. Section 341.  No such pledge or assignment or enforcement thereof shall release Lender from its obligations under any of the Loan Documents.

 

11.6                                   Governing Law

 

This Agreement and the rights and obligations of the parties hereunder shall be construed and interpreted in accordance with the laws of the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania (excluding the laws applicable to conflicts or choice of law).

 

11.7                                   Amendments

 

This Agreement may not be amended, modified, or supplemented except by a written agreement signed by the Borrower and the Lender.

 

11.8                                   Relationship of the Parties

 

This Agreement provides for the making of Warehousing Advances by the Lender, the requirement of Warehousing Advances by the Borrower, the payment of interest on those Warehousing Advances, and the payment of certain fees by the Borrower to the Lender.  The relationship between the Lender and Borrower is limited to that of creditor and secured party on the part of the Lender and of debtor on the part of Borrower.  The provisions of this Agreement and the other Loan Documents for compliance with financial covenants and the delivery of financial statements and other operating reports are intended solely for the benefit of the Lender to protect their interests as creditors and secured party.  Nothing in this Agreement creates or may be construed as permitting or obligating the Lender to act as a financial or business advisor or consultant to the Borrower, as permitting or obligating the Lender to control the Borrower or to conduct the Borrower’s operations, as creating any fiduciary obligation on the part of the Lender or to the Borrower, or as creating any joint venture, partnership, agency or other similar relationship between the Lender and the Borrower.  The Borrower acknowledges that it has had the opportunity to obtain the advice of experienced counsel of its own choice in connection with the negotiation and execution of the Loan Documents and to obtain the advice of that counsel with respect to all matters contained in the Loan Documents, including the waivers of jury trial and of punitive, consequential, special or indirect damages contained in Sections 11.15 and 11.16 , respectively.  The Borrower further acknowledges that it is experienced with respect to financial and credit matters and has made its own independent decisions to apply to the Lender for credit and to execute and deliver this Agreement.

 

11.9                                   Severability

 

If any provision of this Agreement or any other Loan Document is declared to be illegal or unenforceable in any respect, that provision is null and void and of no force and effect to the extent of the illegality or unenforceability, and does not affect the validity or enforceability of any other provision of the Agreement or such other Loan Document.

 

44


 

11.10                            Consent to Credit References

 

The Borrower consents to the disclosure of information regarding the Borrower and its relationship with the Lender to Persons making credit inquiries to the Lender.  This consent is revocable by the Borrower at any time upon Notice to the Lender as provided in Section 11.1 .

 

11.11                            Counterparts

 

This Agreement may be executed in any number of counterparts, each of which will be deemed an original, but all of which together constitute but one and the same instrument.

 

11.12                            Headings/Captions

 

The captions or headings in this Agreement and the other Loan Documents are for convenience only and in no way define, limit or describe the scope or intent of any provision of this Agreement or any other Loan Document.

 

11.13                            Entire A greement

 

This Agreement, the Warehousing Note and the other Loan Documents are intended by the parties as the final, complete and exclusive statement of the transactions evidenced by thereby.  All prior or contemporaneous promises, agreements and understandings, whether oral or written, are deemed to be superseded by this Agreement, the Warehousing Note and the other Loan Documents, and no party is relying on any promise, agreement or understanding not set forth in this Agreement, the Warehousing Note or the other Loan Documents.

 

11.14                            Consent to Jurisdiction

 

THE BORROWER AGREES THAT ANY SUIT FOR THE ENFORCEMENT OF THIS AGREEMENT OR ANY OF THE OTHER LOAN DOCUMENTS MAY BE BROUGHT IN THE COURTS OF THE COMMONWEALTH OF PENNSYLVANIA OR ANY FEDERAL COURT SITTING THEREIN AND CONSENTS TO THE NONEXCLUSIVE JURISDICTION OF SUCH COURT AND SERVICE OF PROCESS IN ANY SUCH SUIT BEING MADE UPON THE BORROWER BY MAIL AT THE ADDRESS SET FORTH HEREIN.  THE BORROWER HEREBY WAIVES ANY OBJECTION THAT IT MAY NOW OR HEREAFTER HAVE TO THE VENUE OF ANY SUCH SUIT OR ANY SUCH COURT OR THAT SUCH SUIT IS BROUGHT IN AN INCONVENIENT FORUM.

 

11.15                            Waiver of Jury Trial

 

THE BORROWER AND THE LENDER (BY ACCEPTANCE OF THIS AGREEMENT) MUTUALLY HEREBY KNOWINGLY, VOLUNTARILY AND INTENTIONALLY WAIVE THE RIGHT TO A TRIAL BY JURY IN RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM BASED HEREON, ARISING OUT OF, UNDER OR IN CONNECTION WITH THIS AGREEMENT OR ANY OTHER LOAN DOCUMENTS CONTEMPLATED TO BE EXECUTED IN CONNECTION HEREWITH OR ANY COURSE OF CONDUCT, COURSE OF DEALINGS, STATEMENTS (WHETHER VERBAL OR WRITTEN) OR ACTIONS OF ANY PARTY, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY COURSE OF CONDUCT, COURSE OF DEALINGS,

 

45



 

STATEMENTS OR ACTIONS OF THE LENDER RELATING TO THE ADMINISTRATION OF THE LOANS OR ENFORCEMENT OF THE LOAN DOCUMENTS, AND AGREE THAT NO PARTY WILL SEEK TO CONSOLIDATE ANY SUCH ACTION WITH ANY OTHER ACTION IN WHICH A JURY TRIAL CANNOT BE OR HAS NOT BEEN WAIVED.

 

11.16                            Waiver of Punitive, Consequential, Special or Indirect Damages

 

THE BORROWER WAIVES ANY RIGHT IT MAY HAVE TO SEEK PUNITIVE, CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES FROM LENDER OR ANY OF LENDER’S AFFILIATES, OFFICERS, DIRECTORS, EMPLOYEES, ATTORNEYS, OR AGENTS WITH RESPECT TO ANY AND ALL ISSUES PRESENTED IN ANY ACTION, PROCEEDING, CLAIM OR COUNTERCLAIM BROUGHT BY THE BORROWER AGAINST THE LENDER OR ANY OF THE LENDER’S AFFILIATES, OFFICERS, DIRECTORS, EMPLOYEES, ATTORNEYS, OR AGENTS WITH RESPECT TO ANY MATTER ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THIS AGREEMENT OR ANY OTHER LOAN DOCUMENT.  THIS WAIVER OF THE RIGHT TO SEEK PUNITIVE, CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES IS KNOWINGLY AND VOLUNTARILY GIVEN BY THE BORROWER, AND IS INTENDED TO ENCOMPASS EACH INSTANCE AND EACH ISSUE FOR WHICH THE RIGHT TO SEEK PUNITIVE, CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES WOULD OTHERWISE APPLY.  THE LENDER IS AUTHORIZED AND DIRECTED TO SUBMIT THIS AGREEMENT TO ANY COURT HAVING JURISDICTION OVER THE SUBJECT MATTER AND THE PARTIES TO THIS AGREEMENT AS CONCLUSIVE EVIDENCE OF THIS WAIVER OF THE RIGHT TO SEEK PUNITIVE, CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES.

 

11.17                            U.S. Patriot Act

 

The Lender hereby notifies the Borrower that pursuant to the requirements of the USA PATRIOT Act (Title III of Pub. L. 107-56 (signed into law October 26, 2001)) (the “ Act ”), it is required to obtain, verify and record information that identifies the Borrower, which information includes the name and address of the Borrower and other information that will allow Lender to identify the Borrower in accordance with the Act.

 

11.18                            Assignments and Participations

 

11.18(a)               The Lender may assign all or any part of, or any interest in, the Lender’s rights and benefits hereunder and under the other Loan Documents, as well as all obligations related to such assigned rights and interest, provided that each such assignment:

 

(i)                                      shall, if not an assignment of the entire commitment of the Lender, be in a minimum amount of $5,000,000,

 

(ii)                                   must be evidenced by an Assignment Agreement in the form of Exhibit M attached hereto and made a part hereof,

 

(iii)                                shall be effective upon compliance with subparagraphs (1), (2) and (3) above.

 

46



 

11.18(b)             The Lender may at any time enter into participation agreements with one or more participating lenders whereby the Lender may allocate certain percentages of the Warehousing Credit Limit to such participant(s), provided that no participant shall have, except as provided below, any voting or consent rights on any issue with respect to this Agreement or the other Loan Documents.  No participant shall be entitled to require the Lender to take or refrain from taking any action under this Agreement or any other Loan Document.  Notwithstanding the foregoing, any such participant shall be considered to be a “Lender” for purposes of Sections 3.11 , 10.5 , and 11.2 with respect to its participation; provided , however , that no participant shall be entitled to receive any greater amount than the Lender would have been entitled to receive in respect of the participation effected by such Lender had no participation occurred.  The Borrower acknowledges that, for the convenience of all parties, this Agreement is being entered into with the Lender only and that its obligations under this Agreement are, to the extent expressly provided for in this Section 11.18 , undertaken for the benefit of, and as an inducement to, any such participating lenders as well as the Lender.  Any grant of a participation by the Lender shall not discharge, reduce or otherwise affect the Lender’s obligation under this Agreement to fund Warehousing Advances, which obligation shall remain primary and absolute.  Such grants of participations shall not affect or diminish the rights of the granting Lender to reimbursement or other payments which may become due to the Lender under this Agreement and such reimbursements and other payments will be calculated as if said Lender had not granted any such participation.  Except as provided for herein, no participant shall have, by virtue of any participation, any rights or benefits under this Agreement or claims of any kind against the Borrower.

 

11.18(c)              The Borrower authorizes the Lender to disclose to any participant or assignee (each, a “ Participant ”) and any prospective Participant any and all information in the Lender’s possession concerning the Borrower which has been delivered to the Lender by the Borrower in connection with the Lender’s credit evaluation of the Borrower.  The Borrower shall assist the Lender in effectuating any assignment or participation pursuant to this Section 11.18 (including during syndication) in whatever manner the Lender reasonably deems necessary, including the participation in meetings with prospective Participants.

 

11.19                            Confidentiality

 

The terms and conditions of the Agreement shall be subject to the terms of that certain Confidentiality Agreement, dated as of June 30, 2010, by and between the Borrower and the Lender, a copy of which is attached hereto as Exhibit P .

 

12.                                          DEFINITIONS

 

12.1                                   Defined Terms

 

In addition to terms defined elsewhere in this Agreement, when used in this Agreement and, unless otherwise defined therein, in any other Loan Document (and including, unless otherwise defined therein, in any Schedules or Exhibits to this Agreement and to the other Loan

 

47



 

Documents), capitalized terms defined below or elsewhere in this Agreement have the following meanings:

 

Adjusted Tangible Net Worth ” shall mean Tangible Net Worth, minus Restricted Cash, plus commercial mortgage servicing rights (to the extent otherwise included in Intangible Assets).

 

Advance Rate ” means, with respect to any Eligible Loan, the Advance Rate set forth in Exhibit D for that type of Eligible Loan.

 

Affiliate ” means, when used with reference to any Person, (a) each Person that, directly or indirectly, controls, is controlled by or is under common control with, the Person referred to, (b) each Person that beneficially owns or holds, directly or indirectly, 5% or more of any class of voting Equity Interests of the Person referred to, (c) each Person, 5% or more of the voting Equity Interests of which is beneficially owned or held, directly or indirectly, by the Person referred to, and (d) each of such Person’s officers, directors and joint venturers.  For these purposes, the term “control” (including the terms “controlled by” and “under common control with”) means the possession, directly or indirectly, of the power to direct or cause the direction of the management and policies of the Person in question.

 

Agency Security ” means a Mortgage-backed Security issued or guaranteed by Fannie Mae, Freddie Mac, or Ginnie Mae.

 

Agreement ” means this Warehousing Credit and Security Agreement, either as originally executed or as it may be amended, restated, renewed or replaced, and including all Exhibits and Schedules hereto.

 

Applicable Base Rate ” means for any day, a fluctuating per annum rate of interest equal to the sum of (a) the higher of (i) the Prime Rate and (ii) the Federal Funds Open Rate plus fifty basis points (0.50%), and (b) one and one-half percent (1.5%).  The calculation and determination of the Applicable Base Rate shall be made daily by the Lender and such determination shall, absent manifest error, be final, conclusive and binding upon the Borrower and the Lender.  Changes in the Applicable Base Rate shall become effective on the same day as the Lender changes its Prime Rate or a change occurs in the Federal Funds Open Rate, depending upon which rate is applicable on that day to the determination of the Base Rate.

 

Applicable Daily Floating LIBO Rate ” means, for any day, a rate per annum equal to the Daily LIBO Rate for such day, plus two and one half percent (2.5%).

 

Applicable Rate ” means, for any day (a) except as otherwise required from time to time pursuant to Section 3.11(b)  or 3.11(g) , the Applicable Daily Floating LIBO Rate for such day, or (b) if, and only for as long as, required from time to time pursuant to Section 3.11(b)  or 3.11(g) , the Applicable Base Rate for each applicable day.

 

Approved Custodian ” means Fannie Mae, Freddie Mac, FHA and any pool custodian or other Person that the Lender deems acceptable, in its sole discretion, to hold Mortgage Loans for inclusion in a Mortgage Pool or to hold Mortgage Loans as agent for an Investor that has issued a Purchase Commitment for those Mortgage Loans.

 

48



 

At Risk Mortgage Loans ” means Mortgage Loans as to which the Borrower has any loss sharing arrangement or otherwise are with recourse to the Borrower.

 

Authorized Representatives ” has the meaning set forth in Section 3.12 .

 

Base Rate Loan ” means the Loan (or any particular Warehousing Advance) at any time while it bears interest at the Applicable Base Rate.

 

Borrower ” has the meaning set forth in the first paragraph of this Agreement.

 

Business Day ” means any (a) day other than Saturday or Sunday, or (b) day of the year on which offices of Lender are not required or authorized by law to be closed for business in Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania.  If any day on which a payment is due is not a Business Day, then the payment shall be due on the next day following which is a Business Day.  Further, if there is no corresponding day for a payment in the given calendar month (e.g., there is no “February 30th”), the payment shall be due on the last Business Day of the calendar month.

 

Calendar Quarter ” means the 3 month period beginning on each January 1, April 1, July 1 or October 1.

 

Cash Collateral Account ” means the Lender access only deposit accounts maintained at Lender and designated for receipt of the proceeds of the sale or other disposition of Collateral (account no. 4212830522  for Borrower).

 

Cash Equivalents ” means (a) marketable direct obligations issued or unconditionally guaranteed by the United States or any agency or any State thereof having maturities of not more than one (1) year from the date of acquisition; (b) commercial paper maturing no more than one (1) year after its creation and having (i) the rating of P-1 or higher from Moody’s Investors Service, Inc., (c) Lender’s certificates of deposit issued maturing no more than one (1) year after issue; (d) short term securities having the rating of AA or higher from Standard & Poor’s Ratings Group or Aa2 from Moody’s Investors Service, Inc. and (e) money market funds at least ninety-five percent (95%) of the assets of which constitute Cash Equivalents of the kinds described in clauses (a) through (d) of this definition.  Notwithstanding anything hereinto the contrary, nothing in the foregoing definition shall be construed to include “auction-rate” securities as Cash Equivalents herein.

 

C&D System ” means Fannie Mae’s Commitments and Deliveries system.

 

Closing Date ” means, subject to the Borrower’s satisfaction of the conditions set forth in Article 5 , the date as of which this Agreement is executed as first above written.

 

Collateral ” has the meaning set forth in Section 4.1 .

 

Collateral Documents ” means, with respect to each Mortgage Loan, (a) the documents set forth in the applicable Exhibit B attached hereto and (b) all other documents including, if applicable, any Security Agreement, executed in connection with or relating to the Mortgage Loan.

 

49



 

Compliance Certificate ” means a certificate executed on behalf of the Borrower by its chief financial officer or other management official having principal financial accounting responsibilities, substantially in the form of Exhibit I .

 

Daily LIBO Rate ” for any day shall mean, the rate per annum determined by the Lender by dividing (a) the Published Rate by (b) a number equal to 1.00 minus the LIBOR Reserve Percentage.

 

Damages ” has the meaning set forth in Section 11.2(b) .

 

Default ” means the occurrence of any event or existence of any condition that, but for the giving of Notice, the lapse of time or both would constitute an Event of Default.

 

Default Rate ” means, on any day, a rate per annum equal to the Applicable Rate on such day plus four percent (4%).

 

Eligible Loan ” means a Mortgage Loan that satisfies the conditions and requirements set forth in Exhibit D and meets the following criteria: (a) such Mortgage Loan has not been previously sold or pledged to obtain financing (whether or not such financing constitutes Indebtedness) under another warehousing financing arrangement or gestation agreement, (b) Lender believes that such Mortgage Loan is not based on untrue, incomplete, inaccurate or fraudulent information and is not otherwise subject to fraud, and (c) the Warehousing Advance on such Mortgage Loan will not exceed the Advance Rate applicable to that type of Eligible Loan at the time it is pledged.

 

Eligible Mortgage Pool ” means a Mortgage Pool for which (a) an Approved Custodian has issued its initial certification, (b) there exists a Purchase Commitment covering the Agency Security to be issued on the basis of that certification and (c) the Agency Security will be delivered to the Lender.

 

Equity Interests ” means all shares, interests, participations or other equivalents, however, designated, of or in a Person (other than a natural person), whether or not voting, including common stock, membership interests, warrants, preferred stock, convertible debentures and all agreements, instruments and documents convertible, in whole or in part, into any one or more of the foregoing.

 

ERISA ” means the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 and all rules and regulations promulgated under that statute, as amended, and any successor statute, rules, and regulations.

 

ERISA Affiliate ” means any trade or business (whether or not incorporated) that is a member of a group of which a Borrower is a member and that is treated as a single employer under Section 414 of the Internal Revenue Code.

 

Escrow Deposits ” shall mean escrow deposits maintained by the Borrower at the Lender, which shall be interest bearing or non-interest bearing as designated by the Borrower.

 

Event of Default ” means any of the conditions or events set forth in Section 10.1 .

 

50



 

Excess Payment ” has the meaning set forth in Section 3.11(f) .

 

Fair Market Value ” means, at any time for an Eligible Loan or a related Pledged Security (if the Eligible Loan is to be used to back a Pledged Security) as of any date of determination, the market price for such Eligible Loan or Pledged Security, determined by Lender based on market data for similar Mortgage Loans or Pledged Securities and such other criteria as Lender deems appropriate in its sole discretion.

 

Fannie Mae ” means Fannie Mae, a corporation created under the laws of the United States, and any successor corporation or other entity.

 

Fannie Mae DUS Mortgage Loan ” has the meaning specified in Exhibit D .

 

Fannie Mae DUS Program ” means Fannie Mae’s program for the purchase of Mortgage Loans originated under Fannie Mae’s Delegated Underwriting and Servicing Guide, as amended from time to time.

 

Fannie Mae Loan Loss Reserves ” means reserves established by the Borrower to absorb estimated future losses related to Fannie Mae DUS Mortgage Loans.

 

Federal Agency ” means FHA, Freddie Mac, Fannie Mae, Ginnie Mae or any other instrumentality or agency of the United States of America or corporation organized under the laws of the United States of America which insures, guaranties or purchases Mortgage Loans.

 

Federal Funds Open Rate ” for any day shall mean the rate per annum (based on a year of 360 days and actual days elapsed) which is the daily federal funds open rate as quoted by ICAP North America, Inc.  (or any successor) as set forth on the Bloomberg Screen BTMM for that day opposite the caption “OPEN” (or on such other substitute Bloomberg Screen that displays such rate), or as set forth on such other recognized electronic source used for the purpose of displaying such rate as selected by the Lender (an “Alternate Federal Funds Source”) (or if such rate for such day does not appear on the Bloomberg Screen BTMM (or any substitute screen) or on any Alternate Federal Funds Source, or if there shall at any time, for any reason, no longer exist a Bloomberg Screen BTMM (or any substitute screen) or any Alternate Federal Funds Source, a comparable replacement rate determined by the Lender at such time (which determination shall be conclusive absent manifest error); provided, that if such day is not a Business Day, the Federal Funds Open Rate for such day shall be the Federal Funds Open Rate on the immediately preceding Business Day.

 

FHA ” means the Federal Housing Administration and any successor agency or other entity.

 

FHA Construction Mortgage Loan ” means an FHA fully-insured Mortgage Loan for the construction or substantial rehabilitation of Multi-Family Properties.

 

FHA Mortgage Loan ” means an FHA Construction Mortgage Loan or an FHA Permanent Mortgage Loan.

 

FHA Permanent Mortgage Loan ” means an FHA fully-insured Mortgage Loan secured by a Mortgage on a Multi-Family Property.

 

51



 

FICA ” means the Federal Insurance Contributions Act and all rules and regulations promulgated under that statute, as amended, and any successor statute, rules and regulations.

 

FIRREA ” means the Financial Institutions Reform, Recovery and Enforcement Act of 1989 and all rules and regulations promulgated under that statute, as amended, and any successor statute, rules, and regulations.

 

First Mortgage ” means a Mortgage that constitutes a first Lien on the real property and improvements described in or covered by that Mortgage.

 

First Mortgage Loan ” means a Mortgage Loan secured by a First Mortgage.

 

Fiscal Year ” means any period of twelve consecutive months ending on December 31 of any calendar year.

 

Freddie Mac ” means Freddie Mac, or other Federal Agency to which the powers and duties of Freddie Mac have been transferred.

 

Freddie Mac Program Plus ” means Freddie Mac’s Program Plus Seller/Servicer program.

 

GAAP ” means generally accepted accounting principles set forth in opinions and pronouncements of the Accounting Principles Board and the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants and in statements and pronouncements of the Financial Accounting Standards Board, or in opinions, statements or pronouncements of any other entity approved by a significant segment of the accounting profession, which are applicable to the circumstances as of the date of determination.

 

Ginnie Mae ” means the Government National Mortgage Association or other Federal Agency as to which the powers and duties of the Governmental National Mortgage Association have been transferred.

 

Governmental Authority ” means the government of the United States or any other nation, or of any political subdivision thereof, whether state or local, and any agency, authority, instrumentality, regulatory body, court, central bank or other entity exercising executive, legislative, judicial, taxing, regulatory or administrative powers or functions of or pertaining to government (including any supra-national bodies such as the European Union or the European Central Bank).

 

Hedging Arrangements ” means, with respect to any Person, any agreements or other arrangements (including interest rate swap agreements, collars, derivatives, interest rate cap agreements and forward sale agreements) entered into to protect that Person against changes in interest rates or the market value of assets.

 

HUD ” means the Department of Housing and Urban Development, and any successor agency or other entity.

 

Indebtedness ” means, as to any Person: (a) all obligations for borrowed money or other extensions of credit whether secured or unsecured, absolute or contingent, including, without

 

52



 

limitation, unmatured reimbursement obligations with respect to letters of credit or guarantees issued for the account of or on behalf of such Person and its Subsidiaries and all obligations representing the deferred purchase price of property; (b) all obligations evidenced by bonds, notes, debentures or other similar instruments; (c) all liabilities secured by any mortgage, pledge, security interest, lien, charge, or other encumbrance existing on property owned or acquired subject thereto, whether or not the liability secured thereby shall have been assumed; (d) all guarantees, endorsements and other contingent obligations whether direct or indirect, in respect of indebtedness of others or otherwise, including any obligations under Hedging Arrangements and otherwise with respect to puts, swaps, and other similar undertakings, any obligation to supply funds to or in any manner to invest in, directly or indirectly, the debtor, to purchase indebtedness, or to assure the owner of indebtedness against loss, through an agreement to purchase goods, supplies, or services for the purpose of enabling the debtor to make payment of the indebtedness held by such owner or otherwise, and the obligations to reimburse the issuer in respect of any letters of credit; and (e) that portion of all obligations arising under capital leases that is required to be capitalized on the consolidated balance sheet of such Person and its Subsidiaries; but excluding, in all events obligations arising under operating leases and accounts payable arising in the ordinary course of business.

 

Indemnified Party ” has the meaning set forth in Section 11.2(b) .

 

Intangible Assets ” shall mean all assets which would be classified as intangible assets under GAAP consistently applied, including, without limitation, goodwill (whether representing the excess of cost over book value of assets acquired or otherwise), patents, trademarks, trade names, copyrights, franchises and deferred charges (including, without limitation, unamortized debt discount and expense, organization costs, and research and development costs).

 

Interest Expense ” for any period shall mean, the sum of (a) the amount of interest accrued on, or with respect to, Indebtedness for such period, including, without limitation, imputed interest on capital leases and imputed or accreted interest in respect of deep discount or zero coupon obligations, plus (b) the net amount payable under all Hedging Arrangements in respect of such period (or minus the net amount receivable under all Hedging Arrangements in respect of such period) plus (c) commitment fees payable during such period.

 

Internal Revenue Code ” means the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, Title 26 of the United States Code, and all rules, regulations and interpretations issued under those statutory provisions, as amended, and any subsequent or successor federal income tax law or laws, rules, regulations and interpretations.

 

Investment Company Act ” means the Investment Company Act of 1940 and all rules and regulations promulgated under that statute, as amended, and any successor statute, rules and regulations.

 

Investor ” means (a) a Federal Agency, or (b) a financially responsible private institution that the Lender deems acceptable from time to time, in its sole discretion, to issue Purchase Commitments with respect to a particular category of Eligible Loans.

 

Late Charge ” has the meaning set forth in Section 3.10 .

 

53



 

Lender ” has the meaning set forth in the first paragraph of this Agreement.

 

LIBOR Loan ” means the Loan (or any particular Warehousing Advance) at any time it is being maintained at a rate of interest based upon the Daily LIBO Rate (the Applicable Rate for which shall be the Applicable Daily Floating LIBO Rate).

 

LIBOR Reserve Percentage ” shall mean the maximum effective percentage in effect on such day as prescribed by the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System (or any successor) for determining the reserve requirements (including, without limitation, supplemental, marginal and emergency reserve requirements) with respect to eurocurrency funding (currently referred to as “Eurocurrency liabilities”).

 

Lien ” means any lien, mortgage, deed of trust, pledge, security interest, charge or encumbrance of any kind (including any conditional sale or other title retention agreement, any lease in the nature of such an agreement and any agreement to give any security interest).

 

Loan ” shall have the meaning set forth in Section 1.5 .

 

Loan Documents ” means this Agreement, the Warehousing Note, and each other document, instrument or agreement executed by the Borrower in connection with any of those documents, instruments and agreements, or establishing or evidencing an Obligation, including, without limitation, pursuant to a Hedging Arrangement with the Lender or an Affiliate as the counterparty, to the extent specifically hedging the Borrower’s interest bearing obligations under this Agreement, each as originally executed or as any of the same may be amended, restated, renewed or replaced.

 

Margin Stock ” has the meaning assigned to that term in Regulation U of the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System, as amended.

 

Miscellaneous Fees and Charges ” means, without duplication, the miscellaneous fees set forth on Exhibit L and/or in the custodial agreement and related documents and fee schedule previously, or to be, entered into by the Lender (or an affiliate) and the Borrower on or before the Closing Date, and all miscellaneous disbursements, charges and expenses incurred by or on behalf of Lender for the handling and administration of Warehousing Advances and Collateral, including custodial fees, costs for Uniform Commercial Code, tax lien and judgment searches conducted by Lender, filing fees, charges for wire transfers (outgoing and incoming) and check processing charges, charges for security delivery fees, charges for overnight delivery of Collateral to Investors, recording fees, service fees and overdraft charges.  Upon not less than 3 Business Days’ prior Notice to the Borrower, Lender may modify such Miscellaneous Fees and Charges (and Exhibit L , as may be appropriate) to conform to current Lender practices.

 

Mortgage ” means a mortgage or deed of trust on real property that, except in the case of an FHA Construction Mortgage Loan, is improved and substantially completed.

 

Mortgage-backed Securities ” means securities that are secured or otherwise backed by Mortgage Loans.

 

54


 

Mortgage Loan ” means any loan evidenced by a Mortgage Note and secured by a Mortgage and, if applicable, a Security Agreement.

 

Mortgage Loan Amount ” means the outstanding principal amount of Mortgage Loan.

 

Mortgage Note ” means a promissory note secured by one or more Mortgages and, if applicable, one or more Security Agreements.

 

Mortgage Pool ” means a pool of one or more Pledged Loans on the basis of which a Mortgage-backed Security is to be issued.

 

Multiemployer Plan ” means a “multiemployer plan” as defined in Section 4001(a)(3) of ERISA, to which the Borrower or any ERISA Affiliate of a Borrower has any obligation with respect to its employees.

 

Net Worth ” shall mean, as of the date of any determination thereof, the net worth of the Borrower determined in accordance with GAAP.

 

Notices ” has the meaning set forth in Section 11.1 .

 

Obligations ” means all indebtedness, obligations and liabilities of the Borrower to Lender (whether now existing or arising after the date of this Agreement, voluntary or involuntary, joint or several, direct or indirect, absolute or contingent, liquidated or unliquidated, or decreased or extinguished and later increased and however created or incurred), including, without limitation, Borrower’s obligations and liabilities to Lender (a) under the Loan Documents, (b) for disbursements made by the Lender for the Borrower’s account, (c) for overdrafts (which, if permitted, shall be at Lender’s sole discretion), (d) for automated clearinghouse exposure, (e) under Hedging Arrangements with Lender or an Affiliate as the counterparty, to the extent specifically hedging Borrower’s interest bearing obligations under this Agreement and of which Hedging Arrangement Lender had been provided Notice (and all details thereof) prior to its establishment, and (f) under any cash management or related agreements.

 

Operating Accounts ” means the demand deposit accounts maintained at Lender in the Borrower’s name and designated for funding that portion of each Eligible Loan not funded by a Warehousing Advance made against that Eligible Loan and for returning any excess payment from an Investor for a Pledged Loan or Pledged Security (as of the date hereof, account no. 4212867739 with respect to Borrower).

 

Other Fannie Mae Mortgage Loan ” has the meaning set forth in Exhibit D .

 

Other Taxes ” has the meaning set forth in Section 3.11(d) .

 

Overdraft Advance ” has the meaning set forth in Section 3.7 .

 

Participant ” shall have the meaning set forth in Section 11.18 .

 

Person ” means and includes natural persons, corporations, limited liability companies, limited liability partnerships, limited partnerships, general partnerships, joint stock companies, joint

 

55



 

ventures, associations, companies, trusts, banks, trust companies, land trusts, business trusts or other organizations, whether or not legal entities, and governments and agencies and political subdivisions of those governments.

 

Plan ” means each employee benefit plan (whether in existence on the date of this Agreement or established after that date), as that term is defined in Section 3 of ERISA, maintained for the benefit of directors, officers or employees of a Borrower or any ERISA Affiliate.

 

Pledged Hedging Accounts ” has the meaning set forth in Section 4.1(g) .

 

Pledged Hedging Arrangements ” has the meaning set forth in Section 4.1(g) .

 

Pledged Loans ” has the meaning set forth in Section 4.1(b) .

 

Pledged Securities ” has the meaning set forth in Section 4.1(c) .

 

Prime Rate ” means on any day, the rate of interest per annum then most recently established by the Lender as its “prime rate,” it being understood and agreed that such rate is set by the Lender as a general reference rate of interest, taking into account such factors as the Lender may deem appropriate, that it is not necessarily the lowest or best rate actually charged to any customer or a favored rate, that it may not correspond with future increases or decreases in interest rates charged by other lenders or market rates in general, and that Lender may make various business or other loans at rates of interest having no relationship to such rate.  If Lender ceases to exist or to establish or publish a prime rate from which the Prime Rate is then determined, the applicable variable rate from which the Prime Rate is determined thereafter shall be instead the prime rate reported in The Wall Street Journal (or the average prime rate if a high and a low prime rate are therein reported), and the Prime Rate shall change without notice with each change in such prime rate as of the date such change is reported.

 

Prohibited Transaction ” has the meanings set forth for such term in Section 4975 of the Internal Revenue Code and Section 406 of ERISA.

 

Property ” means a Multifamily Property securing a Mortgage Loan.

 

Published Rate ” shall mean the rate of interest published each Business Day in The Wall Street Journal “Money Rates” listing under the caption “London Interbank Offered Rates” for a one-month period (or, if no such rate is published therein for any reason, then the Published Rate shall be the eurodollar rate for a one-month period as published in another publication determined by the Lender).

 

Purchase Commitment ” means an unconditional, fixed price, irrevocable written commitment, in form and substance satisfactory to the Lender, issued in favor of the Borrower by an Investor under which that Investor commits to purchase Mortgage Loans or Mortgage-backed Securities.

 

Reference Rate ” means, as applicable for determining the Applicable Rate for any day, the Daily LIBO Rate or the Applicable Base Rate for such day.

 

Release Amount ” has the meaning set forth in Section 4.3(f) .

 

56



 

Restricted Cash ” shall mean segregated funds of the Borrower held for the benefit of third parties and noted as “restricted cash and cash equivalents” in the Borrower’s financial statements.

 

Restriction List ” and “ Restriction Lists ” means each and every list of Persons who are Specially Designated Nationals and Blocked Persons or otherwise are Persons to whom the Government of the United States prohibits or otherwise restricts the provision of financial services.  For the purposes of this Agreement, Restriction Lists include the list of Specially Designated Nationals and Blocked Persons established pursuant to Executive Order 13224 (September 23, 2001) and maintained by the U.S. Department of the Treasury’s Office of Foreign Assets Control or any successor agency or other entity, U.S. Department of the Treasury, current as of the day the Restriction List is used for purposes of comparison in accordance with the requirements of this Agreement.

 

Second Mortgage ” means a subordinate Mortgage that is in second lien position, subordinate to a first lien position Mortgage.

 

Second Mortgage Loan ” means a Mortgage Loan secured by a Second Mortgage.

 

Security Agreement ” means a security agreement or other agreement that creates a Lien on personal property, including furniture, fixtures and equipment, to secure repayment of a Mortgage Loan.

 

Servicing Contract ” means, with respect to any Person, the arrangement, whether or not in writing, under which that Person has the right to service Mortgage Loans.

 

Servicing Portfolio ” means, as to any Person, the unpaid principal balance of Mortgage Loans serviced by that Person under Servicing Contracts, minus the principal balance of all Mortgage Loans that are serviced by that Person for others under subservicing arrangements.

 

Servicing Report ” has the meaning set forth in Section 7.3(a) .

 

Specially Designated Nationals or Blocked Persons ” means Persons which are owned or controlled by, or acting on behalf of, the government of target countries or are associated with international narcotics trafficking or terrorism.

 

Subordinate Mortgage ” means a Second Mortgage or a Third Mortgage.

 

Subordinate Mortgage Loan ” means a Mortgage Loan secured by a Subordinate Mortgage for which all prior Mortgage Loans on that Property are under a Servicing Contract with the Borrower, and for which all prior Mortgage Loans on that Property have been sold to, or are subject to a Purchase Commitment issued by, Fannie Mae.

 

Subsidiary ” means any corporation, partnership, association or other business entity in which more than 50% of the shares of stock or other ownership interests having voting power for the election of directors, managers, trustees or other Persons performing similar functions is at the time owned or controlled by any Person either directly or indirectly through one or more Subsidiaries of that Person.

 

57



 

Tangible Net Worth ” means the excess of a Person’s (and, if applicable, that Person’s Subsidiaries, on a consolidated basis) (a) total assets plus Fannie Mae Loan Loss Reserves minus total liabilities as of the date of determination, each determined in accordance with GAAP applied in a manner consistent with the most recent audited financial statements delivered to Lender under this Agreement.  For purposes of calculating a Person’s Tangible Net Worth, advances or loans to employees, Affiliates or shareholders, members, directors, or officers, investments in Affiliates, assets pledged to secure any liabilities not included in the Indebtedness of that Person, Intangible Assets, those other assets that would be deemed by HUD to be non-acceptable in calculating adjusted net worth in accordance with its requirements in effect as of that date, as those requirements appear in the “Consolidated Audit Guide for Audits of HUD Programs,” and other assets the Lender deems unacceptable, in its sole discretion, must be excluded from that Person’s total assets.

 

Taxes ” has the meaning set forth in Section 3.11(c) .

 

Third Mortgage ” means a subordinate Mortgage that is in third lien position, subordinate to a first lien position Mortgage and a Second Mortgage.

 

Third Mortgage Loan ” means a Mortgage Loan secured by a Third Mortgage.

 

Trust Receipt ” means a trust receipt in a form approved by and under which the Lender may deliver any document relating to the Collateral to the Borrower for correction or completion.

 

USPAP ” means the Appraisal Foundation’s Uniform Standards of Professional Appraisal Practice, as in effect from time to time.

 

Warehousing Advance ” means a disbursement by Lender under Section 1.1 .

 

Warehousing Advance Due Date ” means, with respect to a Warehousing Advance, the date that is sixty (60) days after the date of such Warehousing Advance.

 

Warehousing Advance Request ” has the meaning set forth in Section 2.1 .

 

Warehousing Commitment ” means the obligation of the Lender to make Warehousing Advances to the Borrower under Section 1.1 .

 

Warehousing Credit Limit ” means One Hundred Fifty Million Dollars ($150,000,000); provided , however upon Borrower’s written request, Lender may, in its sole discretion, increase the Warehousing Commitment.

 

Warehousing Maturity Date ” has the meaning set forth in Section 1.2 .

 

Warehousing Note ” has the meaning set forth in Section 1.3 .

 

12.2                                   Other Definitional Provisions; Terms of Construction

 

12.2(a)                    Accounting terms not otherwise defined in this Agreement have the meanings given to those terms under GAAP.

 

58



 

12.2(b)                    Defined terms may be used in the singular or the plural, as the context requires.

 

12.2(c)                     All references to time of day mean the then applicable time in Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania, unless otherwise expressly provided.

 

12.2(d)                    References to Sections, Exhibits, Schedules and like references are to Sections, Exhibits, Schedules and the like of this Agreement unless otherwise expressly provided.

 

12.2(e)                     The words “include,” “includes” and “including” are deemed to be followed by the phrase “without limitation.”

 

12.2(f)                      Unless the context in which it is used otherwise clearly requires, the word “or” has the inclusive meaning represented by the phrase “and/or.”

 

12.2(g)                     All incorporations by reference of provisions from other agreements are incorporated as if such provisions were fully set forth into this Agreement, and include all necessary definitions and related provisions from those other agreements.  All provisions from other agreements incorporated into this Agreement by reference survive any termination of those other agreements until the Obligations of the Borrower under this Agreement and the Warehousing Notes are irrevocably paid in full and the Warehousing Commitment is terminated.

 

12.2(h)                    All references to the Uniform Commercial Code are deemed to be references to the Uniform Commercial Code in effect on the date of this Agreement in the applicable jurisdiction.

 

12.2(i)                        Unless the context in which it is used otherwise clearly requires, all references to days, weeks and months mean calendar days, weeks and months.

 

[Signature pages follow]

 

59



 

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have caused this Agreement to be duly executed as of the date first above written.

 

 

WALKER & DUNLOP, LLC

 

 

 

 

By:

/s/ William Walker

 

Name:

William Walker

 

Title:

President and Chief Executive Officer

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

PNC BANK, NATIONAL ASSOCIATION

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

By:

/s/ Terri Wyda

 

Name:

Terri Wyda

 

Title:

Vice President

 




Exhibit 10.27

 

MASTER LOAN PURCHASE AND SALE AGREEMENT

 

dated as of March 30, 2010

 

by and between

 

WALKER & DUNLOP, LLC
as Seller and as Initial Servicer,

 

and

 

KEMPS LANDING CAPITAL COMPANY, LLC,
as Buyer

 



 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

 

 

 

Page

 

 

 

 

ARTICLE I

DEFINITIONS

1

 

 

 

Section 1.01

Definitions

1

 

 

 

ARTICLE II

PURCHASE AND SALE OF THE LOANS

1

 

 

 

Section 2.01

Procedures

1

 

 

 

Section 2.02

Delivery of Original Mortgage Documents

4

 

 

 

Section 2.03

Nature of Sale; Security Interests

5

 

 

 

Section 2.04

Termination

6

 

 

 

Section 2.05

No Obligation

6

 

 

 

ARTICLE III

TERMS OF EACH PURCHASE

6

 

 

 

Section 3.01

Terms and Conditions

6

 

 

 

Section 3.02

Disbursement Amount

7

 

 

 

Section 3.03

Buyer’s Fees

7

 

 

 

Section 3.04

Deferred Purchase Price

7

 

 

 

Section 3.05

Seller Payment Amounts

7

 

 

 

Section 3.06

Seller Account

8

 

 

 

ARTICLE IV

SERVICING

9

 

 

 

Section 4.01

Servicing of the Mortgage Loans

9

 

 

 

Section 4.02

Additional Servicing and Administration Powers

11

 

 

 

Section 4.03

Obligations in connection with Sales to the Approved Investor

11

 

 

 

ARTICLE V

LIQUIDATION AND RISK OF LOSS

11

 

 

 

Section 5.01

Mortgage Loans Declared in Default

11

 

 

 

Section 5.02

Conversion to Liquidation Status Restricted

12

 

 

 

Section 5.03

Sale of Mortgage Loans

12

 

 

 

ARTICLE VI

INDEMNIFICATION

12

 

 

 

Section 6.01

Indemnification

12

 

 

 

ARTICLE VII

MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

12

 

 

 

Section 7.01

Amendments, Changes and Modifications

12

 

 

 

Section 7.02

Governing Law

13

 

 

 

Section 7.03

Communications

13

 

 

 

Section 7.04

Assignment of Rights to Third Parties

14

 

i



 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

(continued)

 

 

 

 

Page

 

 

 

 

Section 7.05

Severability

14

 

 

 

Section 7.06

Waivers

14

 

 

 

Section 7.07

Counterparts

14

 

 

 

Section 7.08

Survival of Representations and Warranties

14

 

 

 

Section 7.09

Term of Agreement

14

 

 

 

Section 7.10

Integrated Agreement

14

 

 

 

Section 7.11

Further Assurances

15

 

 

 

Section 7.12

Confidentiality

15

 

 

 

Section 7.13

Non-Petition Agreement

16

 

 

 

Section 7.14

Limitations on Payment Liabilities

16

 

 

 

Section 7.15

No Tax Confidentiality

16

 

 

 

Section 7.16

Third-Party Beneficiary

17

 

EXHIBITS AND SCHEDULES

 

Appendix A

 

Definitions

 

 

 

Schedule I

 

Seller Eligibility Representations and Warranties

Schedule II

 

Perfection Representations, Warranties and Covenants

Schedule III

 

Representations, Warranties and Covenants

Schedule IV

 

Covenants

Schedule V

 

Defaults and Remedies

 

 

 

Exhibit A

 

Form of Term Sheet

Exhibit B

 

Form of Purchase Request

Exhibit C

 

Form of Power of Attorney

Exhibit D

 

Form of Notice to Approved Investor

Exhibit E

 

Pre-Closing Package Documentation

Exhibit F

 

Form of Seller’s Title Insurance Certification

Exhibit G

 

Confirmation of Bailee Arrangement

Exhibit H

 

Delivery Process Outline

Exhibit I

 

Form of Certification Regarding Purchase Commitment

Exhibit J

 

Form of Enforceability Opinion

Exhibit K

 

Notice Addresses

 

ii



 

MASTER LOAN PURCHASE AND SALE AGREEMENT

 

THIS MASTER LOAN PURCHASE AND SALE AGREEMENT ( this “ Agreement ”), is made and entered into as of March 30, 2010 by and between WALKER & DUNLOP, LLC as seller (in such capacity, “ Seller ”) and as initial servicer (in such capacity, “ Servicer ”) and KEMPS LANDING CAPITAL COMPANY, LLC as buyer (“ Buyer ”).

 

WITNESSETH

 

WHEREAS, from time to time, Seller may desire to sell, and Buyer may desire to purchase, multifamily Mortgage Loans which were originated by Seller and which are or will be the subject of this Agreement.

 

NOW THEREFORE, in consideration of the above premises and of the mutual agreements contained herein, and intending to be legally bound, Seller, Buyer and Servicer each agree as follows:

 

ARTICLE I
DEFINITIONS

 

Section 1.01 Definitions. Certain capitalized terms used in the above recitals and in this Agreement are defined in and shall have the respective meanings assigned to them in (or by reference in) Appendix A to this Agreement. All references herein to “the Agreement” or “this Agreement” are to this Master Loan Purchase and Sale Agreement as it may be amended, supplemented or modified from time to time, the exhibits and attachments hereto and the capitalized terms used herein which are defined in such Appendix A , and all references herein to Articles, Sections and subsections are to Articles, Sections or subsections of this Agreement unless otherwise specified. The rules of construction and usage set forth in such Appendix A shall be applicable to this Agreement.

 

ARTICLE II
PURCHASE AND SALE OF THE LOANS

 

Section 2.01 Procedures.

 

(a)            General Procedures for Purchases of Eligible Loans.

 

(i)             Sale of Mortgage Loans . From time to time, Seller may sell, transfer, assign, set over and convey to Buyer, and, subject to the conditions herein, Buyer may, in its sole discretion, purchase, without recourse, but subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement, all right, title and interest of Seller in, and to, a Mortgage Loan and all related Transferred Assets (as defined below). In connection with each Purchase of a Mortgage Loan pursuant to the terms hereof, Seller shall be deemed to make, and hereby makes, as of the applicable Purchase Date for the benefit of Buyer and its assigns, the representations and warranties set forth in Section 2 of Schedule I in respect of each such Mortgage Loan.

 



 

(ii)            Rights of Ownership . From and after the related Purchase Date all rights arising with respect to each Mortgage Loan sold hereby, including all funds received on or in connection with each such Mortgage Loan, shall be received and held by Servicer, in trust for the benefit of Buyer and its assigns.

 

(iii)           Conditions to Each Sale . With respect to any Mortgage Loan that Buyer agrees to purchase, Buyer’s purchase of such Mortgage Loan shall be subject to satisfaction of each of the following conditions as of the related Purchase Date:

 

(A)           the related Purchase Request is valid on its face, is complete (including the Purchase Agreement Supplement attached thereto and whether in physical or, if applicable, in electronic form);

 

(B)            such Mortgage Loan is an Eligible Loan;

 

(C)            Seller has provided a written certification, in the form attached hereto as Exhibit I (as such exhibit may be updated from time to time by Buyer), that such Mortgage Loan is subject to, and in compliance with, an effective Purchase Commitment issued by the Approved Investor;

 

(D)           all of the representations and warranties of Seller and Servicer contained in Schedule I and in Schedule III of this Agreement with respect to each such Mortgage Loan are true and correct;

 

(E)            Seller is not in violation of any covenant or other obligation set forth in Schedule IV of this Agreement;

 

(F)            no Default or event which, but for the lapse of time or the giving of notice or both, would constitute a Default exists;

 

(G)            no Material Adverse Event has occurred;

 

(H)           a national title company or Closing Agent was used with respect to such Mortgage Loan and all of the required Closing Agent Approval Documents for such Mortgage Loan have been executed and received by Buyer;

 

(I)             Seller has assisted Buyer in obtaining insured Closing Protection Letters from each Closing Agent;

 

(J)             Unless previously delivered to Buyer, Seller has provided, or caused to be provided, a full errors and omissions and fidelity bond policy in a minimum amount of $3,000,000 (or such other amount as the Approved Investor may require) listing Buyer as direct loss payee;

 

2



 

(K)           Buyer has received an executed bailee letter with respect to the related Mortgage Documents from Closing Agent in form and substance satisfactory to Buyer;

 

(L)            Buyer has countersigned the related Purchase Request (including the Purchase Agreement Supplement attached thereto) and delivered such countersigned Purchase Request to Seller;

 

(M)          Unless previously delivered to Buyer, Seller has provided opinions of Seller’s counsel with respect to (i) corporate/enforceability matters substantially in the form of Exhibit J and (ii) true sale matters from outside counsel, each such opinion shall be in form satisfactory to Buyer in it its sole discretion; and

 

(N)           Buyer has sufficient funds to purchase such Mortgage Loan.

 

(iv)           Notice to Buyer of Intended Sale . On any Business Day, Seller may deliver a Purchase Request with respect to a Mortgage Loan that Seller intends to sell to Buyer. Seller shall transmit such Purchase Request to Buyer as directed from time to time by Buyer. Such Purchase Request shall serve as notice to Buyer of Seller’s intention to sell the Mortgage Loan described therein to Buyer on the related Purchase Date. Each Purchase Request prepared by Seller shall be complete and in appropriate form (including the Purchase Agreement Supplement attached thereto), shall be signed (electronically, if applicable) by an authorized Officer and shall include all of the information set forth on Exhibit B . Any Person that submits a Purchase Request electronically with a valid password shall be deemed to be an authorized Officer with full authority to submit such Purchase Request and such submission shall be binding on Seller.

 

(v)              Notice to Approved Investor of Intended Sale . In connection with each Purchase Request delivered to Buyer, Seller shall deliver to the Approved Investor:

 

(A)           A “Notice of Acquirer Funding” in the form attached hereto as Exhibit D (as such exhibit may be updated from time to time by Buyer); and

 

(B)            A pre-closing package including the related documents set forth on Exhibit E (as such exhibit may be updated from time to time by Buyer).

 

(vi)             Approval of Purchase Request . Within two (2) Business Days after Buyer’s receipt of (i) a fully completed Purchase Request with all attachments thereto and such other information and documents as Buyer shall request in its sole discretion in connection with its review of such materials from Seller and (ii) an Acceptance Notice from the Approved Investor, Buyer shall use commercially reasonable efforts to either (A) countersign such Purchase Request

 

3



 

(including the Purchase Agreement Supplement attached thereto) evidencing Buyer’s approval of the proposed Purchase (which may be given or denied in its sole discretion) and return the countersigned Purchase Request to Seller or (B) deny such Purchase Request. If Buyer fails to affirmatively notify Seller of its approval or denial of the proposed Purchase by the end of such two (2) Business Day period, then Buyer shall be deemed to have denied Seller’s request for such Purchase.

 

(vii)        Consummation of Sale . Subject to the terms and conditions hereof, if Buyer in its sole discretion agrees to purchase a Mortgage Loan, Buyer will cause to be transferred funds therefor to the appropriate Closing Agent on the applicable Purchase Date. Upon execution of the related Purchase Request (including the Purchase Agreement Supplement attached thereto) by Buyer, transfer of the related Seller Purchase Price therefore and authorization from Buyer to Closing Agent to release such funds, Seller shall have sold, assigned, transferred, set over and conveyed to Buyer and Buyer shall have bought, purchased, received and accepted (A) all of Seller’s right, title and interest in, and under such Mortgage Loan identified on such Purchase Request, including the security interest created thereby and the related Mortgage, (B) all Collections on account thereof due on or with respect to such Mortgage Loan on and after the applicable Purchase Date, (C) all fire and extended coverage insurance policies and binders relating to the Mortgaged Property for the benefit of the creditor of such Mortgage Loan, (D) the related Mortgage Documents, (E) the rights and benefits of, but not the obligations of, Seller under the related Purchase Commitment and (F) all proceeds in any way derived from any of the foregoing on or after the Purchase Date, all upon the terms and conditions set forth herein (collectively, the “ Transferred Assets ”).

 

(viii)         Instructions . Seller understands that all instructions under this Agreement are to be delivered to Buyer’s address listed on Exhibit K .

 

Section 2.02 Delivery of Original Mortgage Documents.

 

(a)            For each Mortgage Loan sold to Buyer hereunder, Seller shall cause the related Closing Agent, on behalf of Seller, to deliver to the Approved Investor (for receipt by the Approved Investor no later than one (1) Business Day after such Purchase Date), with copies to Buyer, or as otherwise directed by Buyer, the following documents with respect to such Mortgage Loan, whether in physical or electronic form, as applicable:

 

(i)             The original Mortgage Note bearing all intervening endorsements, if any (which may only be on an allonge to the extent permitted by the Approved Investor Guides), endorsed as follows “Pay to the order of              , without recourse”. The original Mortgage Note shall be accompanied by any riders or exhibits required or approved by the Approved Investor in connection with the origination of the related Mortgage Loan; and

 

4



 

(ii)            The original of each guaranty (e.g., a completion guaranty, rental achievement guaranty, etc.) and each credit enhancement (e.g., a letter of credit or pledge of collateral), if any, required by the related Purchase Commitment or otherwise obtained.

 

(b)               On or prior to the Purchase Date for each Mortgage Loan sold to Buyer hereunder, Seller shall execute an Assignment of Mortgage naming the Approved Investor as assignee of the related Mortgage, shall cause such Assignment of Mortgage to be recorded in the applicable recording office and shall file such UCC financing statements as are necessary to effect such Assignment of Mortgage. As soon as practicable after such Assignment of Mortgage is returned by the applicable recording office but, in any event, no later than the time required in order to comply with the Delivery Process Outline attached hereto as Exhibit H (if delivery by a certain time is required in order to comply therewith), Seller shall cause the related Closing Agent to deliver the original of such Assignment of Mortgage with evidence of recording thereon to the Approved Investor. As soon as practicable after receiving evidence of filing with respect to such UCC financing statements but, in any event, no later than the time required in order to comply with the Delivery Process Outline attached hereto as Exhibit H (if delivery by a certain time is required in order to comply therewith), Seller shall cause the related Closing Agent to deliver copies of such UCC financing statements with evidence of filing thereon to the Approved Investor. In addition, on the Purchase Date for such Mortgage Loan, Seller shall cause the related Closing Agent, on behalf of Seller, to deliver to Buyer an original executed Assignment of Mortgage, in recordable form, naming Buyer as assignee of the related Mortgage.

 

(c)                In addition to the foregoing, Seller shall comply with all notification, delivery, timing and other requirements set forth in, or otherwise reasonably necessary to achieve the terms of, (i) the Delivery Process Outline attached hereto as Exhibit H and (ii) any provisions referencing Buyer or the Master Purchase Agreement which may be set forth in the related Purchase Commitment.

 

(d)               Notwithstanding the foregoing, in the event that Buyer notifies Seller that the Approved Investor has failed to purchase a Mortgage Loan to be sold to the Approved Investor, Seller shall cause to be delivered to Buyer as soon as practicable thereafter any Mortgage Documents which have yet to be delivered to the Approved Investor.

 

Section 2.03 Nature of Sale; Security Interests.   Seller and Buyer intend that the conveyance of Seller’s right, title and interest in and to the Mortgage Loans and related Transferred Assets pursuant to this Agreement shall constitute a purchase and sale of the Transferred Assets and not a pledge of security for a loan and shall so record such conveyance on its respective books and records. If, notwithstanding the intent of the parties hereto, such conveyance is deemed to be a pledge of security for a loan, or, ever characterized by applicable law as a financing, then for value received, Seller promises to pay to Buyer the Aggregate Repurchase Amount according to this Agreement. Seller also intends and agrees that, in such event, (i) Seller shall be deemed to have granted to Buyer, and Seller does hereby grant to Buyer, a first priority security interest in Seller’s entire right, title and interest in and to the Transferred Assets and this Agreement shall constitute a security agreement under applicable law and (ii) in

 

5



 

furtherance thereof, will execute and deliver (A) the UCC financing statements, if requested by Buyer, in order to perfect Buyer’s Liens in all of the Transferred Assets and (B) a power of attorney, substantially in the form of Exhibit C , appointing NattyMac LLC, with full power of substitution, for the purpose of taking such action and executing agreements, instruments and other documents, in the name of Seller, as set forth therein, which appointment is coupled with an interest and is irrevocable. In addition, irrespective of whether such conveyance is deemed to be a pledge of security for a loan, or, ever characterized by applicable law as a financing, Seller hereby pledges all of its right, title, and interest in, to and under and grants a separate first priority lien on, and security interest in, the Seller Account to Buyer to secure the payment and performance by Seller of all amounts or obligations owing to Buyer pursuant to this Agreement. Buyer shall have all of the rights and may exercise all of the remedies of a secured creditor under the UCC and the other laws of the State of New York and Seller shall have all of the rights and may exercise all of the remedies of a debtor under the UCC and the other laws of the State of New York. In furtherance of the foregoing, (a) Buyer, at Seller’s sole cost and expense, may cause to be filed in such locations as may be necessary to perfect and maintain perfection and priority of the security interest granted hereby, UCC financing statements and continuation statements naming Seller as debtor and Buyer as secured party and (b) Seller shall from time to time take such further actions as may be requested by the Buyer to maintain and continue the perfection and priority of the security interest granted hereby (including marking its records and files to evidence the interests granted to Buyer hereunder).

 

Section 2.04 Termination.  No further Purchases are intended to be made hereunder on and after the Stated Termination Date. If for any reason, in Buyer’s sole discretion, Buyer Purchases a Mortgage Loan from Seller after the Stated Termination Date, then such Purchased Mortgage Loan shall be subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement. Buyer may, with one (1) Business Day’s prior written notice to Seller, terminate this Agreement without cause; provided however, such termination shall not affect the parties’ respective obligations with respect to any Mortgage Loans already purchased by Buyer or for which a Purchase Request has been approved by Buyer. Upon any such termination, at Buyer’s election, Seller shall continue to provide servicing and otherwise facilitate sales of the Mortgage Loans to the Approved Investor or any other Mortgage Loan Buyer.

 

Section 2.05 No Obligation.  Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in this Agreement, Buyer assumes no obligations of Seller or Servicer under any Purchase Commitment or other Transferred Asset, if any, all of which shall remain with Seller or Servicer following the sale hereunder.

 

ARTICLE III
TERMS OF EACH PURCHASE

 

Section 3.01 Terms and Conditions.   The terms and conditions relating to each of the Mortgage Loans sold hereunder shall be set forth in the related Purchase Request. Each Purchase Request shall be deemed to be controlling as to the related terms and provisions of the Purchase of a Mortgage Loan, absent manifest error, without regard to any other oral or written communication between Buyer and Seller with respect to the Purchase of such Mortgage Loan. With respect to the Purchase or Repurchase of a Mortgage Loan, in the event of any conflict between the terms and the provisions of this Agreement and the terms and provisions of the

 

6



 

related Purchase Request (including the Purchase Agreement Supplement attached thereto), the terms and provisions of this Agreement shall prevail over the terms and provisions of the related Purchase Request (including the Purchase Agreement Supplement attached thereto).

 

Section 3.02 Disbursement Amount.   On each Purchase Date, Buyer shall cause payment in immediately available funds to be delivered to the related Closing Agent and/or other applicable payoff designee on behalf of and at the direction of Seller, in amounts, with respect to such Mortgage Loan, equal to the Seller Purchase Price therefor. Buyer shall debit the Seller Account pursuant to Section 3.06(d) for any amounts to be delivered to the related Closing Agent in excess of the Seller Purchase Price.

 

Section 3.03 Buyer’s Fees.   Seller shall pay to Buyer the file fees, the transaction fees, the wire fees, the acceptance fee and any other fees, charges or expenses set forth in the Term Sheet and any other custodial or other fees separately agreed to by Seller and Buyer in writing.

 

Section 3.04 Deferred Purchase Price.   Buyer will pay Seller a Deferred Purchase Price (or Seller will pay Buyer the absolute value if the Deferred Purchase Price is negative) for each Eligible Loan sold to Buyer hereunder upon the sale of such Eligible Loan by Buyer or its assignee (other than to an affiliate of Buyer); provided, that the Deferred Purchase Price shall not be paid (x) in respect of any Mortgage Loan Repurchased hereunder by Seller or (y) in respect of any sale of any Mortgage Loan by Buyer if (i) Seller is not then in compliance with all of its repurchase obligations with respect to all Mortgage Loans sold by Seller hereunder in accordance with Section 3.05 , or (ii) a Default or event which, but for the lapse of time or the giving of notice or both, would constitute a Default shall then exist; provided, however, that with respect to each event in clause (y), the Buyer shall hold the Deferred Purchase Price and if the Seller is in compliance with all of its repurchase obligations or the Default or event which would give rise to a Default is cured, as applicable, at which time the Buyer shall then remit the Deferred Purchase Price to the Seller, less any reasonable expenses incurred by Buyer due to Seller’s non-compliance or Default.

 

Section 3.05 Seller Payment Amounts.

 

(a)            Upon the earlier of discovery by Seller, Buyer or any of their respective assignees of a breach of any of the representations and warranties set forth on Schedule I or Schedule II , without regard to any limitation set forth in such representation or warranty concerning the knowledge of Seller as to the facts stated therein, which materially and adversely affects the value of the Mortgage Loans or the interest therein of Buyer or its assignees (or which materially and adversely affects the interest of Buyer or its assignees in the related Mortgage Loan in the case of a representation and warranty relating to a particular Mortgage Loan), Seller shall commence commercially reasonable efforts to promptly cure such breach in all material respects and if such breach is not cured within 15 days, Seller shall immediately Repurchase all affected Mortgage Loans by remitting to Buyer an amount equal to the related Repurchase Amount; provided, that Seller shall within two (2) Business Days, Repurchase all affected Mortgage Loans in connection with a breach of any of the Approved Investor Eligibility Representations. For the avoidance of doubt, any non-compliance with any of the representations and warranties contained in Section 2 of Schedule I that has the

 

7


 

 

effect of reducing the value of the related Mortgage Loan or the underlying Mortgaged Property by $10,000 or more shall be deemed to materially and adversely affect the value of the Mortgage Loan or interest of Buyer or its assignees therein.

 

(b)            Upon the earlier of discovery by Seller, Buyer or any of their respective assignees of a breach of any of Seller’s obligations under Section 2.02 , Seller shall commence commercially reasonable efforts to promptly cure such breach in all material respects and if such breach is not cured within 15 days, Seller shall immediately Repurchase the related Mortgage Loan by remitting to Buyer an amount equal to the related Repurchase Amount.

 

(c)            In addition to the obligations set forth in Section 3.05(a)  and ( b) , Seller shall indemnify Buyer and its assigns, to the fullest extent permitted by applicable law, from and against any and all demands, claims, actions or causes of action, assessments, losses, diminution in value, liabilities, costs or expenses, including interest, penalties, reasonable attorneys’ fees and other related and reasonable professional fees and expenses of any nature whatsoever, asserted against, or paid, suffered or incurred, by Buyer or its assigns and resulting from or arising out of a breach of its representations and warranties contained in this Agreement (including the Schedules hereto), but only to the extent such out-of-pocket costs and expenses are not attributable to credit losses on the Mortgage Loans and are not otherwise included in the Repurchase Amount. It is understood and agreed that the obligations of Seller set forth in this Section 3.05 to cure or to purchase a Mortgage Loan and to indemnify Buyer and its assigns constitute the sole remedies of each such Person respecting a breach of the representations and warranties contained in this Agreement (including the Schedules hereto). The obligations of Seller under this Section 3.05 shall survive the delivery and purchase of each Mortgage Loan, liquidation of such Mortgage Loan giving rise to any indemnification claim, and the termination of this Agreement.

 

(d)            In addition to and separate and apart from the indemnification obligations set forth in Section 3.05(c) , Seller shall pay any and all expenses (including, without limitation, all reasonable fees and disbursements of counsel) which may be paid or incurred by Buyer in enforcing Buyer’s rights under this Agreement, or in collecting any or all of the obligations of Seller under this Agreement.

 

Section 3.06 Seller Account.  (a)  Seller shall (i) on or prior to the first Purchase Date, create and maintain as security for Seller’s obligations under this Agreement (and not as security for the performance of the Eligible Loans) a deposit account with an Eligible Institution, as directed by and in the name of Buyer, subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement (the “ Seller Account ”), (ii) on or prior to each Purchase Date, deposit into the Seller Account as security for Seller’s obligations under this Agreement (and not as security for the performance of the Eligible Loans) fifty percent (50%) of the Minimum Interest Amount with respect to the related Mortgage Loan; provided, that if Seller provides evidence satisfactory to Buyer, in Buyer’s sole discretion, that the Approved Investor will purchase such Mortgage Loan at an amount equal to or greater than Seller Purchase Price (a “Purchase Price Premium”), Seller shall agree to a lesser deposit to reflect such Purchase Price Premium (“Prepayment Amount”), (iii) until the date when all Mortgage Loans purchased hereunder have been sold or repurchased, not

 

8



 

withdraw any amount from the Seller Account if such withdrawal would cause the balance on deposit in the Seller Account to be less than the aggregate Minimum Interest Amount with respect to all Mortgage Loans purchased by Buyer pursuant to this Agreement and owned by Buyer as of the date of such withdrawal, (iv) pay all fees and expenses charged by the Eligible Institution to maintain the Seller Account and (v) be entitled to the balance of the Seller Account (i.e. withdraw it to a zero balance) when all Mortgage Loans purchased hereunder have been sold or repurchased and all other payment obligations of the Seller hereunder have been satisfied on the Stated Termination Date.

 

(b)            Buyer shall cause to be deposited into the Seller Account any Deferred Purchase Prices due to Seller and payable by Buyer under this Agreement and shall notify Seller of such deposit, whereupon Buyer shall notify the Eligible Institution of such permitted debits and Seller may debit the Seller Account for such amounts.

 

(c)            Seller hereby authorizes Buyer to debit the Seller Account and deposit into the Settlement Account for (i) any amounts due Buyer and payable by Seller or Servicer under this Agreement, including any Collections covered by clause (e) of the “Repurchase Amount” definition and (ii) any other fees or other amounts payable by Seller.

 

(d)            Buyer shall cause to be deposited into the Seller Account the amount, if any, by which the Seller Purchase Price exceeds the amounts to be delivered (as directed by Seller) to the related Closing Agent, whereupon Seller may debit the Seller Account for such amount (unless there are any amounts then due and payable by Seller to Buyer hereunder).

 

(e)            Buyer hereby authorizes Seller to debit the Seller Account for amounts on deposit in the Seller Account in excess of the aggregate Minimum Interest Amount with respect to all Mortgage Loans purchased by Buyer pursuant to this Agreement and owned by Buyer as of the date of such debit (including, without limitation, amounts deposited into the Seller Account pursuant to Section 3.06(a)  with respect to Mortgage Loans no longer owned by Buyer as of the date of such debit, amounts described in Section 3.06(b)  and amounts described in Section 3.06(e) ) and Buyer shall notify the Eligible Institution with which the Seller Account has been established of such authorization.

 

ARTICLE IV
SERVICING

 

Section 4.01 Servicing of the Mortgage Loans.

 

(a)            Servicer shall act as an independent contractor of Buyer in its activities as Servicer hereunder. Servicer shall service and administer each Mortgage Loan on behalf of Buyer on an interim basis in accordance with (i) Servicer’s standard and customary servicing practices for the Approved Investor’s multifamily Mortgage Loans and, in any event, in accordance with accepted and prudent mortgage loan servicing standards and procedures generally accepted by prudent lenders in the mortgage banking industry for mortgage loans of the same type as such Mortgage Loan and in a manner at least equal in

 

9



 

quality to the servicing Servicer provides for multifamily mortgage loans which it owns; and (ii) the Approved Investor Guides and (iii) the related Purchase Commitment, provided that, Servicer shall at all times comply with applicable law and the requirements of any applicable insurer or guarantor so that the insurance and any applicable guarantee in respect of such Mortgage Loan is not voided or reduced. Servicer shall at all times maintain accurate and complete records of its servicing of the Mortgage Loans, and Buyer may, at any time during Servicer’s business hours examine and make copies of such records or the Servicing Files. At any time upon Buyer’s request, Servicer shall deliver to Buyer reports regarding the status of the Mortgage Loans or the collateral securing the Mortgage Loans.

 

(b)            Servicer’s rights to interim service any Mortgage Loan on behalf of Buyer as provided in this Agreement shall terminate on the earlier of the date payment of the Deferred Purchase Price is due under Section 3.04 or the related Repurchase Date for such Mortgage Loan or on the date Buyer sells such Mortgage Loan to the Approved Investor or any other Person. If any Default hereunder occurs (other than pursuant to Section 1(d)  of Schedule V) at any time, Servicer’s rights and obligations to service any Mortgage Loan, as provided in this Agreement, shall terminate upon one (1) Business day’s written notice by Buyer; provided , that the termination of such rights and obligations to service any Mortgage Loan shall be in accordance with customary industry practices and all applicable laws and regulations. In the event Servicer is in Default pursuant to clause (d) of the definition of such term, Servicer’s rights and obligations to service any Mortgage Loan, as provided in this Agreement, shall terminate automatically and immediately, without any notice or action by Buyer. In the event that anything in this Agreement is interpreted as constituting one or more interim servicing contracts, each such servicing contract shall terminate in accordance with this Section 4.01(b) .

 

(c)            Buyer hereby agrees that Servicer may retain all Collections in respect of principal and interest received from the related Mortgagor on each Mortgage Loan during the interim servicing period and such amounts shall be offset against any Deferred Purchase Price owed by Buyer to Servicer with respect to such Mortgage Loan to the extent amounts have been so retained; provided, however, that Servicer’s right to retain such amounts is revocable by Buyer at any time and Servicer shall deposit such amounts in the Seller Account prior to such offset upon demand of Buyer.

 

(d)            Servicer acknowledges and agrees that with respect to each Mortgage Loan sold to the Approved Investor, (i) Servicer shall be compensated for servicing such Mortgage Loan during the interim servicing period through its receipt of the Deferred Purchase Price with respect to such Mortgage Loan which may be paid by Servicer’s retention of Collections in respect of principal and interest received from the related Mortgagor on such Mortgage Loan during the interim servicing period pursuant to Section 4.01(c) , (ii) the aggregate amount of such compensation shall be at least equal to the amount of interest income that the related Purchase Commitment provides may be retained by Servicer as compensation for servicing such Mortgage Loan and (iii) the Approved Investor shall have no obligation to compensate Servicer for servicing such Mortgage Loan during the interim servicing period.

 

10



 

(e)               Servicer shall permit Buyer to inspect Servicer’s servicing records and facilities, as the case may be, for the purpose of satisfying Buyer that Servicer has the ability to service the Mortgage Loans as provided in this Agreement.

 

(f)               With respect to any Mortgage Loan, Buyer has agreed to dispose of such Mortgage Loan to the Approved Investor pursuant to the Master Purchase Agreement; provided that if the Approved Investor defaults or otherwise is unable or unwilling to purchase a Mortgage Loan, then Buyer may dispose of such Mortgage Loan in any manner, irrespective of any Purchase Commitment, without notice to Seller or Servicer.

 

Section 4.02 Additional Servicing and Administration Powers.   Subject to the servicing standards described in Section 4.01 and any consent of Buyer required by Article V , Servicer shall have full power and authority, acting alone, to do or cause to be done, and shall do or cause to be done, any and all things in connection with such servicing and administration that it may deem necessary and desirable in connection with arranging for the sale and/or Securitization of Mortgage Loans to the Approved Investor or any other Mortgage Loan Buyer, including pursuant to a Purchase Commitment by the Approved Investor (in connection with which Servicer shall confirm to the Approved Investor the representations and warranties set forth in Schedule I or such other representations and warranties as are required by the Approved Investor), and including accepting nominal title to the Mortgage Loans from Buyer for the purpose of immediately thereafter transferring and delivering such Mortgage Loans to the Approved Investor. For any Mortgage Loan to be transferred and delivered to the Approved Investor by Buyer indirectly through Servicer, and solely for such purpose, Buyer shall be deemed to transfer such nominal title to Servicer immediately prior to Servicer’s transfer and delivery.

 

Section 4.03 Obligations in connection with Sales to the Approved Investor.   In connection with each sale of a Mortgage Loan by Buyer to the Approved Investor, Servicer shall deliver to the Approved Investor such information regarding such Mortgage Loan as the Approved Investor may require and shall otherwise cooperate with the Approved Investor and Buyer to facilitate such sale.

 

ARTICLE V
LIQUIDATION AND RISK OF LOSS

 

Section 5.01 Mortgage Loans Declared in Default.   Servicer shall give Buyer prompt written notice if by reason of the occurrence of events specified in the Mortgage Documents with respect to a Mortgage Loan or otherwise, such Mortgage Loan can be declared in default, thereby giving the holder of the Mortgage Loan the right to accelerate the indebtedness and foreclose the related lien and/or security interest. If Buyer provides its written consent to such declaration, Servicer shall declare such Mortgage Loan in default and such Mortgage Loan shall immediately be deemed “in liquidation.” Subject to the direction of Buyer, Servicer shall use its best efforts to promptly and efficiently liquidate the collateral securing the Mortgage Loan or cause the Mortgagor under the Mortgage Loan to bring current any Mortgage Loan that is in liquidation together with all related collateral, subject to the provisions of this Agreement and the Mortgage Documents. Nothing in this Section 5.01 shall be construed, however, as limiting Buyer’s right to take any action it deems necessary to protect its interests in a defaulted

 

11



 

Mortgage Loan, subject to the provisions of this Agreement, the Mortgage Documents and the rights of the Approved Investor.

 

Section 5.02 Conversion to Liquidation Status Restricted.   Servicer may not declare a Mortgage Loan in default for purposes of converting such Mortgage Loan to “in liquidation” status if (a) Seller shall have notified Buyer, or (b) Buyer shall have notified Seller, that Seller has defaulted in its representations or warranties with respect to such Mortgage Loan. If any Mortgage Loan was declared in default by Servicer, and Buyer subsequently discovers that Seller breached its representations and warranties with respect to such Mortgage Loan (or Seller notifies Buyer of such breach), whether or not such default was a proximate cause of the obligor’s default, the Mortgage Loan shall cease to be treated as an Eligible Loan “in liquidation” and, instead, such Seller shall promptly Repurchase such Mortgage Loan pursuant to Section 3.05 giving credit to payments to or from Buyer in respect of such Mortgage Loan.

 

Section 5.03 Sale of Mortgage Loans.   Should Servicer fail to sell Mortgage Loans “in liquidation” as required by Section 5.01 , Buyer shall direct Servicer as to the time and method of sale, disposition, or other liquidation of such unsold Mortgage Loans, and Servicer shall take all steps required to effect such sale, disposition or liquidation. No Person shall be required to purchase, repurchase, or substitute such Mortgage Loans except as herein provided with respect to Seller in the event of a breach of warranty or representation.

 

ARTICLE VI
INDEMNIFICATION

 

Section 6.01 Indemnification.   In addition to any other indemnification provided to Buyer by Seller or Servicer pursuant to this Agreement, each of Seller and Servicer hereby agrees to indemnify, defend and hold harmless Buyer and its affiliates, successors, assigns and each of their officers, directors, employees and agents (collectively, the “ Indemnitees ”), and each of them, to the fullest extent permitted by applicable law, from and against any and all demands, claims, actions or causes of action, assessments, losses, diminution in value, liabilities, costs or expenses, including interest, penalties, reasonable attorneys’ fees and other related and reasonable professional fees and expenses of any nature whatsoever, asserted against, or paid, suffered or incurred by, any Indemnitee and resulting from or arising out of the breach of or failure to perform any representation, warranty, covenant or other agreement made by Seller or Servicer, as applicable, hereunder (including the Schedules hereto). No Indemnitee is entitled to indemnification for its own gross negligence, willful misconduct, or fraud. The obligations of Seller and Servicer under this Article VI shall survive the delivery and purchase of each Mortgage Loan, liquidation of such Mortgage Loan giving rise to the indemnification claim, and the termination of this Agreement.

 

ARTICLE VII
MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

 

Section 7.01 Amendments, Changes and Modifications.   This Agreement may be amended, changed, modified or altered only with the written consent of Buyer, Servicer and Seller by an instrument in writing that specifically refers to this Agreement and that is executed by all parties.

 

12



 

Section 7.02 Governing Law.  THIS AGREEMENT SHALL BE CONSTRUED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF NEW YORK AND THE OBLIGATIONS, RIGHTS AND REMEDIES OF THE PARTIES HEREUNDER SHALL BE DETERMINED IN ACCORDANCE WITH SUCH LAWS. EACH PARTY HERETO HEREBY SUBMITS TO THE NON-EXCLUSIVE JURISDICTION OF THE UNITED STATES DISTRICT COURT FOR THE SOUTHERN DISTRICT OF NEW YORK AND OF ANY NEW YORK STATE COURT SITTING IN THE BOROUGH OF MANHATTAN IN NEW YORK CITY FOR PURPOSES OF ALL LEGAL PROCEEDINGS ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO THIS AGREEMENT OR THE TRANSACTIONS CONTEMPLATED HEREBY. EACH PARTY HERETO IRREVOCABLY WAIVES, TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, ANY OBJECTION WHICH IT MAY NOW OR HEREAFTER HAVE TO THE LAYING OF THE VENUE OF ANY SUCH PROCEEDING BROUGHT IN SUCH A COURT AND ANY CLAIM THAT ANY SUCH PROCEEDING BROUGHT IN SUCH A COURT HAS BEEN BROUGHT IN AN INCONVENIENT FORUM. EACH PARTY HERETO HEREBY CONSENTS TO PROCESS BEING SERVED IN ANY SUIT, ACTION OR PROCEEDING WITH RESPECT TO THIS AGREEMENT, OR ANY DOCUMENT DELIVERED PURSUANT HERETO BY THE MAILING OF A COPY THEREOF BY REGISTERED OR CERTIFIED MAIL, POSTAGE PREPAID, RETURN RECEIPT REQUESTED, TO ITS RESPECTIVE ADDRESS SPECIFIED AT THE TIME FOR NOTICES UNDER THIS AGREEMENT OR TO ANY OTHER ADDRESS OF WHICH IT SHALL HAVE GIVEN WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE OTHER PARTIES. THE FOREGOING SHALL NOT LIMIT THE ABILITY OF ANY PARTY HERETO TO BRING SUIT IN THE COURTS OF ANY JURISDICTION.

 

EACH OF THE PARTIES HEREBY IRREVOCABLY WAIVES ANY AND ALL RIGHT TO A TRIAL BY JURY WITH RESPECT TO ANY LEGAL PROCEEDING ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO THIS AGREEMENT OR ANY TRANSACTION CONTEMPLATED HEREBY.

 

Section 7.03 Communications.  Unless otherwise stated, a communication to a party to this Agreement must be written to be effective and is deemed given:

 

(a)            For Purchase Requests only when actually received by Buyer, either in physical or electronic form.

 

(b)            Otherwise, if by fax, when transmitted to the appropriate fax number, promptly confirmed by telephone.

 

(c)            Otherwise, if by mail, on the third Business Day after enclosed in a properly addressed, stamped, and sealed envelope deposited in the appropriate official postal service.

 

For purposes of the foregoing, until changed by written notice to each other party to this Agreement, the address, fax number, telephone number and e-mail address of each party to this agreement shall be as stated on Exhibit J .

 

13



 

Section 7.04 Assignment of Rights to Third Parties.   With respect to any Mortgage Loan, Buyer and any subsequent holder shall have the right, at any time after the Purchase Date, to assign its rights under this Agreement to any subsequent transferee of such Mortgage Loan. Seller acknowledges irrevocably that Buyer may transfer the Mortgage Loans at any time and consents to the assignment, in whole or in part, of this Agreement and all rights hereunder. Seller may not assign, transfer, hypothecate or otherwise convey its rights, benefits, obligations or duties hereunder without the prior express written consent of Buyer. Any such purported assignment, transfer, hypothecation or other conveyance by Seller without the prior express written consent of Buyer shall be void. The terms and provisions of this Agreement are for the purpose of defining the relative rights and obligations of Seller and Buyer with respect to the transactions contemplated hereby and, except as set forth in this Section 7.04 , no Person shall be a third-party beneficiary of any of the terms and provisions of this Agreement.

 

Section 7.05 Severability.   In the event that any provision of this Agreement shall be held invalid or unenforceable by any court of competent jurisdiction, such holding shall not invalidate or render unenforceable any other provision hereof. Such invalid or unenforceable provision shall be amended, if possible, in order to accomplish the purposes of this Agreement.

 

Section 7.06 Waivers.   The rights of each of the parties hereunder shall not be capable of being waived or varied otherwise than by an express waiver or variation in writing. Any failure to exercise or any delay in exercising any of such rights shall not operate as a waiver or variation of that or any other such right. Any defective or partial exercise of any of such rights shall not preclude any other or further exercise of that or any other such right. No act or course of conduct or negotiation on the part of any party shall in any way preclude such party from exercising any such right or constitute a suspension or any variation of any such right.

 

Section 7.07 Counterparts. This Agreement may be executed in any number of counterparts, each of which shall constitute one and the same instrument, and either party hereto may execute this Agreement by signing any such counterparts.

 

Section 7.08 Survival of Representations and Warranties.   It is understood and agreed that the representations and warranties set forth in Schedules II, III and IV shall survive the sale of each Mortgage Loan to Buyer and delivery of the Mortgage Documents to the Approved Investor, and shall inure to the benefit of Buyer and its assigns, notwithstanding any restrictive or qualified endorsement on any Mortgage Note or Assignment of Mortgage or the examination or failure to examine any Mortgage Document. Each and every representation and warranty made herein by Seller shall remain operative and in full force and effect regardless of (i) any investigation made by or on behalf of Seller or Buyer, (ii) the observance or performance of any covenant, agreement or obligation hereunder or (iii) the termination of this Agreement.

 

Section 7.09 Term of Agreement.   This Agreement shall continue in full force and effect so long as Buyer or any of its affiliates shall own any Mortgage Loans purchased from Seller.

 

Section 7.10 Integrated Agreement.   This Agreement, the Term Sheet and the documents, instruments and agreements executed and delivered pursuant to this Agreement, constitute the entire agreement between the parties with respect to the subject of the transactions

 

14



 

contemplated hereby and supersede all prior letters or agreements with respect thereto. For the avoidance of doubt, Appendix A , Schedules I through V and Exhibits A through J shall be a part of this Agreement for all purposes. The terms set forth in the Term Sheet are hereby expressly incorporated by reference into this Agreement and any reference to this Agreement contained in this Agreement shall be deemed to be a reference to this Agreement as supplemented by the Term Sheet (including, for the avoidance of doubt, for purposes of Schedule V ); provided , however , that in the event of any conflict between this Agreement and the Term Sheet, this Agreement shall prevail over the Term Sheet.

 

Section 7.11 Further Assurances. Seller and Buyer each agree to, at any time and from time to time, execute and deliver to the other such reasonable and appropriate additional documents, instruments or agreements and to take such further action as may be necessary or appropriate to effectuate the purposes of this Agreement. Seller further agrees to appoint NattyMac LLC as its lawful attorney-in-fact and to execute and deliver to Buyer a power of attorney substantially in the form of Exhibit C pursuant to Section 2.03 .

 

Section 7.12 Confidentiality. Neither Buyer nor Seller shall disclose any confidential or proprietary information of the other party with respect to such other party that may be in the possession of that party, including (i) such information in the possession of Buyer as to Seller’s financial condition or underwriting guidelines, (ii) such information in the possession of Seller as to any of the Mortgage Loan details with respect to the Mortgage Loans sold to Buyer and any information regarding pricing of any Mortgage Loan proposed to be purchased by Buyer and (iii) any information designated “confidential” or “proprietary” by either party to the other party to any Person who is not a partner, officer, employee, counsel, or agent of such party, except with the consent of such other party, pursuant to a subpoena or order issued by a court of competent jurisdiction, or by a judicial or administrative or legislative body or committee. Confidential information shall not include information which: (x) is in the receiving party’s possession without actual or constructive knowledge of an obligation of confidentiality with respect thereto, prior to disclosure by the disclosing party; (y) is or subsequently becomes part of a public domain through no fault of receiving party; or (z) is disclosed to the receiving party by a third party having no obligation of confidentiality with respect thereto, and provided the receiving party did not know, or reasonably should have know, that such information was wrongfully disclosed by such third parties.

 

Buyer and Seller agree to regard and preserve, as confidential, all information obtained by or disclosed to either by or at the other’s direction about its customers, including name, address, telephone number, account number, policy information and any list or grouping of customers (“ Customer Information ”), and to use such Customer Information solely in the manner contemplated and authorized by this Agreement. Each agrees not to disclose and not to permit its employees to disclose, Customer Information for any purpose other than for the performance of the Agreement. Upon termination of the Agreement, or at any time requested by the other party, the receiving party shall promptly return to the providing party, or destroy, all such Customer Information in its possession except for its business records. Each further agrees to implement and maintain an effective information security program to protect such Customer Information. The program shall include administrative, technical and physical safeguards to: (A) ensure the security and confidentiality of Customer Information; (B) protect against any anticipated threats or hazards to the security or integrity of such Customer Information; and (C)

 

15



 

protect against unauthorized access to or use of Customer Information which could result in substantial harm or inconvenience to either party or its customers. If either party is not in compliance with the requirements regarding Customer Information, such party shall immediately advise the other party and take steps to correct the non-compliance, including protecting customers and the providing party against the consequences of any disclosure or use of Customer Information in violation of this Agreement.

 

Notwithstanding the above provisions in this Section 7.12 , Buyer may disclose such information to its affiliates, rating agencies, dealers and investors and to the Approved Investor, after informing such parties of the confidential nature of such information.

 

Section 7.13 Non-Petition Agreement.   Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in this Agreement or any Purchase Request, each of Seller and Servicer covenants and agrees that it shall not, prior to the date which is one year and one day (or if longer, the applicable preference period then in effect) after the payment in full of all indebtedness of Buyer and any affiliate of Buyer which provides financing for the mortgage loans purchased by Buyer, acquiesce, petition or otherwise, directly or indirectly, invoke or cause Buyer to invoke the process of any governmental authority for the purpose of commencing or sustaining a case against Buyer under any federal or state bankruptcy, insolvency or similar law or appointing a receiver, liquidator, assignee, trustee, custodian, sequestrator or other similar official of Buyer or any substantial part of its property or ordering the winding up or liquidation of the affairs of Buyer. This Section 7.13 shall survive the termination of this Agreement.

 

Section 7.14 Limitations on Payment Liabilities.   Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in this Agreement or any Purchase Request, Buyer shall have no obligation to pay any amounts owing under this Agreement unless and until Buyer has received such amounts from the Mortgage Loans; provided that the foregoing shall not be deemed to excuse Buyer’s obligation to deliver funds to the Closing Agent pursuant to Section 3.02 above. In addition, Seller and Servicer hereby agree that Buyer shall have no obligation to pay to Seller or Servicer any amounts constituting fees, expenses or indemnities (collectively, “ Expense Claims ”) and that such Expense Claims shall not constitute a claim against Buyer (as defined in Section 101 of Title 11 of the United States Bankruptcy Code), unless or until Buyer has received amounts sufficient to pay such Expense Claims, and such amounts are not necessary to pay outstanding indebtedness of Buyer; provided, that Expense Claims shall not include Deferred Purchase Price or Buyer’s obligation to deliver funds to the Closing Agent pursuant to Section 3.02 or to release funds to the Seller pursuant to Section 3.06 above. This Section 7.14 shall survive the termination of this Agreement.

 

Section 7.15 No Tax Confidentiality.   Notwithstanding anything to the contrary set forth herein, any obligations of confidentiality contained herein shall not apply to the federal tax structure or federal tax treatment of any transaction referenced herein, and each party (and any employee, representative, or agent of any party) may disclose to any and all persons, without limitation of any kind, the federal tax structure and federal tax treatment of any transaction referenced herein; provided, however, that no party (and no employee, representation or other agent thereof) shall disclose any information that is not relevant to understanding the tax treatment or tax structure of such transactions (including the identity of, or any information that could lead another to determine the identity of any party, or employee, representative or agent of

 

16



 

any party) except as otherwise permitted by Section 7.12 . The preceding sentence is intended to cause this transaction to be treated as not having been offered under conditions of confidentiality for purposes of section 1.6011-4(b)(3) (or any successor provision) of the Treasury Regulations promulgated under section 6011 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended, and shall be construed in a manner consistent with such purpose. In addition, each party acknowledges that it has no proprietary or exclusive rights to the federal tax structure of this transaction or any federal tax matter or federal tax idea related to any transaction referenced herein.

 

Section 7.16 Third-Party Beneficiary.   The Approved Investor is an express third-party beneficiary of this Agreement entitled to enforce the provisions hereof as if a party to this Agreement to the extent necessary to enforce remedies against Seller for breach of any representation, warranty or undertaking to Buyer by and from Seller that has been assigned to the Approved Investor.

 

[Signatures Commence on Following Page]

 

17



 

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Buyer, Seller and Servicer have caused their names to be signed hereto by their respective officers thereunto duly authorized as of the day and year first above written.

 

BUYER

 

SELLER

 

 

 

KEMPS LANDING CAPITAL
COMPANY, LLC

 

WALKER & DUNLOP, LLC

 

 

 

 

 

 

By:

/s/ J. E. Gorecki

 

By:

/s/ William Walker

 

John E. Gorecki

 

Title:

President & CEO

Title:

Authorized Signer

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

SERVICER

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

WALKER & DUNLOP, LLC

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

By:

/s/ William Walker

 

 

 

Title:

President & CEO

 

Master Loan Purchase and Sale Agreement

 

S-1


 

 

APPENDIX A

 

DEFINITIONS AND USAGE

 

1.              Table of Contents, Titles and Headings. The table of contents, titles and headings of the articles and sections of this Agreement have been inserted for convenience and reference only and are not to be considered a part hereof and shall not in any way modify or restrict any of the terms or provisions hereof and shall never be considered or given any effect in construing this Agreement or any provision hereof or in ascertaining intent, if any question of intent should arise.

 

2.              Interpretation. Unless the context requires otherwise, words of the masculine gender shall be construed to include correlative words of the feminine and neuter genders and vice versa, words of the singular number shall be construed to include correlative words of the plural number and vice versa, and “including” (and with the correlative meaning “include”) means including without limiting the generality of any description preceding such term. This Agreement, and all terms and provisions hereof, shall be liberally construed to effect the purposes set forth herein and to sustain the validity of this Agreement.

 

3.              Accounting Principles. Unless otherwise specified, (a) GAAP determines all accounting and financial terms and compliance with financial covenants, and, (B) otherwise, all accounting principles applied in a current period must be comparable in all material respects to those applied during the preceding comparable period.

 

4.              Definitions.

 

Acceptance Notice ” means, with respect to any Mortgage Loan, written notice from the Approved Investor indicating that the Approved Investor has agreed to purchase such Mortgage Loan from Buyer in the event that such Mortgage Loan is originated by Seller and purchased by Buyer pursuant to this Agreement.

 

Agency Approval ” means, with respect to any Mortgage Loan that is a Conforming Agency Loan, Seller is approved as an approved seller/servicer (as the case may be) with respect to the Approved Investor.

 

Agreement ” means this Master Loan Purchase and Sale Agreement, and all exhibits, schedules, amendments and supplements hereto.

 

Aggregate Repurchase Amount ” means, at any time, the sum of all Repurchase Amounts for all Mortgage Loans Purchased from Seller and then owned by Buyer.

 

Applicable Rate ” means the Prime Rate of interest published from time to time by The Wall Street Journal , as such rate. In the event The Wall Street Journal publishes more than one Prime Rate of interest, the Prime Rate is defined to mean the higher Prime Rate of interest set forth therein. If at any time the Prime Rate increases or decreases, then the Applicable Rate hereunder shall be correspondingly increased or decreased, effective on said date. In the event that The Wall Street Journal abolishes or abandons the practice of publishing a Prime Rate, or should the same become unascertainable, Buyer shall designate a comparable reference rate

 

1



 

which shall be deemed to be the Applicable Rate for purposes hereof. If for any reason the Applicable Rate is voided by a court of competent jurisdiction or if for any reason such court finds that the Applicable Rate is different from the Applicable Rate designated by Buyer, then the Applicable Rate shall be deemed to be the highest rate permitted by law.

 

Approved Investor ” means Federal Home Loan Mortgage Corporation, or any successor thereto.

 

Approved Investor Eligibility Representations ” means, with respect to any Mortgage Loan, the loan level representations and warranties with respect to such Mortgage Loan that Seller would make for the benefit of the Approved Investor if Seller were selling and delivering such Mortgage Loan directly to the Approved Investor pursuant to the related Purchase Commitment.

 

Approved Investor Guides ” means the Freddie Mac Multifamily Seller/Servicer Guide and the Freddie Mac Delegated Underwriting for Targeted Affordable Housing Guide and all amendments and additions thereto.

 

Assignment of Leases ” means, with respect to any Mortgage Loan, an assignment of leases, rents and profits or similar instrument executed by the related Mortgagor, assigning to the mortgagee all of the income, rents and profits derived from the ownership, operation, leasing or disposition of all or a portion of the related Mortgaged Property, as amended, modified, renewed or extended through the date hereof and from time to time hereafter.

 

Assignment of Mortgage ” means an assignment of mortgage, notice of transfer or equivalent instrument in recordable form, sufficient under the laws of the jurisdiction wherein the related Mortgaged Property is located to reflect the sale of the Mortgage to Buyer or the Approved Investor, as applicable, which assignment, notice of transfer or equivalent instrument may be in the form of one or more blanket assignments covering the Mortgage Loans secured by Mortgaged Properties located in the same jurisdiction, if permitted by law.

 

Business Day ” means a day other than (i) a Saturday or Sunday and (ii) a day on which The Federal Reserve Bank of New York is authorized or obligated by law or executive order to remain closed.

 

Buyer ” is defined in the preamble to this Agreement.

 

Closing Agent ” means a Person closing a Mortgage Loan in escrow which is bonded by an Eligible Insurer pursuant to an approved Closing Protection Letter.

 

Closing Agent Approval Documents ” means the following documents and any other documents requested by Buyer from time to time:

 

(i)             Closing Agent application for each new Closing Agent;

(ii)            Errors and Omissions insurance policy declaration for each new Closing Agent (except for national title insurance company);

(iii)           Closing Protection Letter for each Mortgage Loan (except for national title insurance company);

 

2



 

(iv)           Funds Recipient Agreement for each Mortgage Loan;

(v)            Title Insurance Commitment for the issuance of a policy of title insurance for each Mortgage Loan; and

(vi)           Escrow agent’s closing instruction letter, if any.”

 

Closing Agent Standing Wire Instructions ” means, with respect to any Mortgage Loan, the standing wire instructions to the Closing Agent set forth in the relevant Purchase Request for use when Buyer wires payment of the Seller Purchase Price for such Mortgage Loan.

 

Closing Protection Letter ” means a master letter from an Eligible Insurer pursuant to which such Eligible Insurer agrees to reimburse, indemnify and hold harmless Buyer and its assigns from any expense, cost, loss or liability incurred by Buyer or its assigns from the failure of the relevant Closing Agent to comply with the specific directions provided by Buyer, as well as any fraud, misallocation of funds, gross negligence and any similar impropriety on the part of such Closing Agent.

 

Collections ” means all monies (including any prepayments) received by Seller, Servicer or Buyer, in good, collected funds as principal, interest or other sums due on account of the Mortgage Loans acquired by Buyer, and also includes proceeds from sales of the such Mortgage Loans, whether to the Approved Investor or otherwise.

 

Customary Servicing Procedures ” means procedures (including collection procedures) that Servicer customarily employs and exercises in servicing and administering mortgage loans similar to the Mortgage Loans or as otherwise specified in this Agreement.

 

Debtor Law ” means any applicable liquidation, conservatorship, bankruptcy, insolvency, rearrangement, moratorium, reorganization, or similar debtor relief laws affecting the rights of creditors generally and general equitable principles from time to time in effect under the laws of any State applicable to each loan or under the laws of the United States.

 

Default ” is defined in Schedule V .

 

Default Rate ” means, for any day, an annual interest rate equal to the lesser of (a) the Applicable Rate plus 4% or (b) the maximum non-usurious rate of interest that, under applicable law, Buyer is permitted to contract for, charge, take, reserve, or receive if the Purchases were characterized by applicable law as financings.

 

Deferred Purchase Price ” means, with respect to a Mortgage Loan, an amount equal to (x) the actual cash proceeds received by Buyer from the sale of such Mortgage Loan minus (y) the related Repurchase Amount.

 

Eligible Institution ” means either (a) a federal or a state chartered depository institution or a trust company where the short term unsecured debt obligations of which have the highest short term ratings of a nationally recognized rating agency at the time any amounts are held on deposit therein, (b) a depository institution or a trust company where the short term unsecured debt obligations of which have the highest short term ratings of a nationally recognized rating agency at the time any amounts are held on deposit therein in which such accounts are insured by the FDIC and the SAIF (to the limits established by the FDIC or the SAIF) and the uninsured

 

3



 

deposits in which accounts are otherwise secured such that Buyer has a claim with respect to the funds in such account or a perfected first-priority security interest against any collateral (which shall be limited to Eligible Investments) securing such funds that is superior to claims of any other depositors or creditors of the depository institution or trust company in which such account is maintained, or (c) a trust account or accounts maintained with the trust department of a federal or state chartered depositary institution or trust company, acting in its fiduciary capacity.

 

Eligible Insurer ” at any time of determination, means a Qualified Insurer issuing a Closing Protection Letter and with respect to which Buyer has not previously given notice to Seller of its disapproval.

 

Eligible Loan ” means a Mortgage Loan originated (or to be originated) by Seller that is (i) subject to, and in compliance with, an effective Purchase Commitment and (ii) identified in an Acceptance Notice received by Buyer.

 

FHA ” means the Federal Housing Administration within the United States Department of Housing and Urban Development.

 

Financials ” means balance sheets, profit and loss statements, statements of cash flow, quarterly call reports, and any other financial statements, reports, or information reasonably specified by Buyer and to be provided by Seller pursuant to Schedule IV .

 

Fitch ” means Fitch, Inc. and any successor thereto.

 

Flood Insurance Policy ” means a policy or binder of insurance issued pursuant to the Federal Flood Insurance Act, as amended, or any other policy or binder providing similar coverage against loss sustained by floods.

 

GAAP ” means generally accepted accounting principles of the Accounting Principles Board of the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants and the Financial Accounting Standards Board that are applicable from time to time.

 

Ground Lease ” means, with respect to any Mortgage Loan secured in whole or in part by the interest of the related Mortgagor as a lessee under a ground lease of the related Mortgaged Property, such ground lease, all written amendments and modifications, and any related estoppels or agreements from the ground lessor and, in the event the Mortgagor’s interest is a ground subleasehold, the related ground lease.

 

Lien ” means any lien, mortgage, security interest, pledge, assignment, charge, title retention agreement, or encumbrance of any kind and any other arrangement for a creditor’s claim to be satisfied from assets or proceeds prior to the claims of other creditors or the owners.

 

Mandatory Delivery Date ” means, with respect to any Mortgage Loan subject to a Purchase Commitment, the date by which Seller must deliver the related loan package to the Approved Investor, as specified in such Purchase Commitment.

 

Master Purchase Agreement ” means that certain Master Purchase Agreement, dated as of October 16, 2009, between Buyer and the Approved Investor.

 

4



 

Material Adverse Event ” shall mean an event, act or condition which has a material adverse effect on (a) the property, business, operations, financial condition or prospects of Seller, (b) the ability of Seller to perform its obligations under this Agreement, (c) the validity or enforceability of this Agreement, or (d) the rights and remedies of Buyer under this Agreement.

 

Minimum Interest Amount ” means, with respect to any Mortgage Loan, an amount equal to the product of (i) the related Seller Purchase Price as of the related Purchase Date, (ii) the Pricing Rate and (iii) a fraction, the numerator of which is 30 and the denominator of which is 360.

 

Moody’s ” means Moody’s Investors Service, Inc. and any successor thereto.

 

Mortgage ” means a mortgage, deed of trust, security deed or other instrument securing a Mortgage Loan which creates a Lien on a Mortgaged Property.

 

Mortgage Documents ” means, with respect to any Mortgage Loan, the documents described in Sections 2.02(a)  and (b)  and all other documents required to be included in the related “Final Delivery Package” (as such term is defined in the Approved Investor Guides).

 

Mortgage Interest Rate ” means, with respect to any Mortgage Loan, the annual rate at which interest accrues on such Mortgage Loan as provided under the related Mortgage Note.

 

Mortgage Loan ” means a mortgage loan identified and described in a Purchase Request. A Mortgage Loan includes the Mortgage Documents, scheduled monthly payments, principal prepayments, liquidation proceeds (whether upon initial foreclosure, final sale or otherwise), condemnation proceeds, insurance proceeds and all other rights, benefits, proceeds and obligations arising from or in connection with such Mortgage Loan.

 

Mortgage Loan Buyer ” means the Approved Investor, any other Securitization Vehicle or any other Person that is purchasing a Mortgage Loan from Buyer (other than by Seller under this Agreement).

 

Mortgage Loan File ” means the documents and information listed on Exhibit D , as it may be updated by Buyer from time to time.

 

Mortgage Note ” means the note or other evidence of indebtedness (including a lost note affidavit) of the Mortgagor under a Mortgage Loan and secured by the related Mortgage.

 

Mortgaged Property ” means real property securing repayment of the debt evidenced by a Mortgage Note.

 

Mortgagor ” means the obligor(s) on a Mortgage Note.

 

NattyMac LLC ” means NattyMac LLC, a Delaware limited liability company, an affiliate of Buyer.

 

5



 

Officer ” means any duly authorized officer of Seller involved in, or responsible for, the sale of the Mortgage Loans whose name appears on a list furnished by Seller to Buyer, as such list may be amended from time to time.

 

Outstanding Principal Balance ” means, with respect to any Mortgage Loan and any date of determination, the outstanding principal balance of such Mortgage Loan on such date as reflected on Servicer’s mortgage loan servicing system in accordance with its Customary Servicing Procedures.

 

Payment Account ” means a non-interest bearing deposit account established by Seller with an Eligible Institution, as directed by Buyer, for the deposit of Seller Purchase Prices in immediately available funds by Buyer.

 

Permitted Encumbrances ” means, with respect to any Mortgaged Property, (i) the lien of the applicable local or other governmental authority for current-period real property taxes and assessments, (ii) those deeded covenants, conditions and restrictions, rights of way, easements, and other matters that are of public record and permitted pursuant to the Approved Investor Guides or approved by the Approved Investor in writing and (iii) the right of tenants (whether under Ground Leases, space leases or operating leases) at such Mortgaged Property to remain following a foreclosure or similar proceeding.

 

Person ” means any individual, corporation, partnership, joint venture, limited liability company, association, joint-stock company, trust, unincorporated organization, government or any agency or political subdivision thereof.

 

Pricing Rate ” means the rate stated in the Term Sheet as the “Pricing Rate”. The Pricing Rate shall be computed daily on the basis of the actual number of days elapsed over a year assumed to be 360 days.

 

Purchase ” means the sale by Seller and purchase by Buyer of a Mortgage Loan, the related Purchase Commitment and related Mortgage Documents under this Agreement.

 

Purchase Agreement Supplement ” means, with respect to any Mortgage Loan, the document pursuant to which such Mortgage Loan is sold by Seller to Buyer, which may be prepared and sent electronically by Seller, shall be in the form of Annex 1 to Exhibit B and shall be attached as Annex 1 to the Purchase Request with respect to such Mortgage Loan.

 

Purchase Commitment ” means, with respect to a Mortgage Loan, a mandatory purchase commitment issued by the Approved Investor to Seller or an early rate lock application offer from Seller accepted by the Approved Investor, in each case, evidencing the commitment by the Approved Investor to purchase such Mortgage Loan from Seller.

 

Purchase Commitment Amount ” means, with respect to any Mortgage Loan subject to a Purchase Commitment, the purchase price set forth in the related Purchase Commitment at which the Approved Investor agrees to purchase such Mortgage Loan in accordance with its Purchase Commitment.

 

6



 

Purchase Date ” means the date the Seller Purchase Price for a Mortgage Loan is paid by Buyer to the Payment Account, which shall be the later of (A) the first date on which each condition set forth in Section 2.01(a)(iii)  is satisfied with respect to such Mortgage Loan and (B) such date as Seller shall have specified in the related Purchase Request.

 

Purchase Request ” means, with respect to any Mortgage Loan being offered for Purchase by Seller, a request, in appropriate data layout, in substantially in the form of Exhibit B , executed by an Officer of Seller and containing all of the information set therein, as such requested information may be amended from time to time in a notice from Buyer to Seller, specifying the relevant characteristics of such Mortgage Loan, including the Seller Purchase Price and a description of the related Purchase Commitment, and attaching a Purchase Agreement Supplement with respect to such Mortgage Loan as Annex 1 thereto.

 

Qualified Insurer ” means an insurance company duly qualified as such under the laws of the states in which the Mortgaged Properties are located, duly authorized and licensed in such states to transact the applicable insurance business and to write the insurance provided by the insurance policy or binder issued by it, and approved as an insurer by the Approved Investor.

 

Repurchase ” means, with respect to any Mortgage Loan, the transaction by which Seller remits the Repurchase Amount thereof to the Buyer in accordance with Section 3.05 .

 

Repurchase Amount ” means, with respect to any Mortgage Loan at any date of determination, an amount equal to the result of: (a) the Seller Purchase Price of such Mortgage Loan, plus (b)   the Minimum Interest Amount with respect to such Mortgage Loan, plus (c)   if such date of determination is more than 30 days after the related Purchase Date, accrued and unpaid interest on such Mortgage Loan at the Pricing Rate from the date which is 30 days after the related Purchase Date through (but not including) such date of determination, plus (d)   in the case of a Mortgage Loan subject to a Repurchase, any reasonable fees and expenses charged by other third parties and incurred by Buyer relating to the Repurchase of such Mortgage Loan, minus (e)   Collections in respect of principal and interest received by Servicer from the related Mortgagor on such Mortgage Loan and deposited into the Settlement Account or otherwise remitted to Buyer on or prior to such date of determination.

 

S&P ” means Standard & Poor’s Rating Services, a division of the McGraw & Hill Companies, Inc. and any successor thereto.

 

Securities ” or “ Securitization Securities ” means any note, bond or pass-through certificate that is, directly or indirectly, secured by or representing an interest in a Portfolio of Mortgage Loans designated by Servicer.

 

Securitization ” or “ Securitized ” means a transaction in which a Portfolio of Mortgage Loans designated by Servicer is financed through or sold to a Securitization Vehicle, which vehicle issues Securities in the capital markets, or is exchanged for such Securities.

 

Securitization Vehicle ” means the Approved Investor or any trust, partnership, corporation, limited liability company, limited liability partnership or other state law entity that is created for the principal purpose of owning or holding a Mortgage Loan or pool of Mortgage Loans which are the subject of a Securitization.

 

7



 

Seller ” is defined in the preamble to this Agreement.

 

Seller Account ” is defined in Section 3.06 .

 

Seller Purchase Price ” means, at any time of determination, with respect to any Mortgage Loan subject to a Purchase Commitment, an amount that is equal to the lesser of (i)   the Purchase Commitment Amount for such Mortgage Loan and (ii) the outstanding principal amount of such Mortgage Loan at such time.

 

Servicer ” is defined in the preamble to this Agreement.

 

Servicing File ” means all papers and records of whatever kind or description, whether developed or originated by Servicer or others, required to document or service the Mortgage Loan.

 

Settlement Account ” means a non-interest bearing deposit account established by Buyer with an Eligible Institution for the deposit of (i) payments from the Approved Investor and other Collections in respect of Mortgage Loans purchased and owned by Buyer and (ii) payments by Seller to Buyer.

 

Solvent ” means for any Person, that (a) the fair-market value of its assets exceeds its liabilities, (b) it has sufficient cash flow to enable it to pay its debts as they mature, and (c) it does not have unreasonably small capital to conduct its businesses.

 

Stated Termination Date ” means March 18, 2011, or such other date as agreed to by Seller and Buyer.

 

Taxes ” means, for any Person, taxes, assessments, or other governmental charges or levies imposed upon it, its income, or any of its properties, franchises, or assets.

 

Term Sheet ” means a term sheet, substantially in the form of Exhibit A , executed by Seller and Buyer.

 

Title Policy ” means a paid-up American Land Title Association (ALTA) Mortgagee’s title insurance policy or binder of the type of insurance acceptable to Buyer, naming Seller as the insured, issued by an Eligible Insurer insuring Seller and its successors and assigns as to the Lien of a Mortgage in an amount at least equal to the initial principal balance of the related Mortgage Loan.

 

Transferred Assets ” is defined in Section 2.01(a)(vii) .

 

UCC ” means the Uniform Commercial Code as enacted in the State of New York or in effect from time to time in the specified jurisdiction.

 

VA ” means the U.S. Department if Veterans Affairs, an agency of the United States of America, or any successor thereto including the Secretary of Veterans Affairs.

 

8



 

SCHEDULE I

 

SELLER ELIGIBILITY REPRESENTATIONS, WARRANTIES AND COVENANTS

 

1.              Representations, Warranties and Covenants Relating to Mortgage Loans. Seller represents and warrants to, and covenants with Buyer, with respect to itself and to each Mortgage Loan, as of the related Purchase Date:

 

(a)            Mortgage Loans as Described. The information set forth in the Purchase Request is true and correct in all material respects as of the date or dates that such information is specified therein.

 

(b)            Mortgage Loan Representations and Warranties. Each of the representations and warranties as to such Mortgage Loan as set forth in Section 2 below is true and correct.

 

(c)            Perfection Representations. The Perfection Representations in Schedule II shall be a part of this Agreement for all purposes.

 

(d)            Anti-Money Laundering Laws and OFAC. Seller (i) has complied with all applicable anti-money laundering laws and regulations, including the USA Patriot Act of 2001 (collectively, the “ Anti-Money Laundering Laws ”); (ii) has established an anti-money laundering compliance program as required by the Anti-Money Laundering Laws; (iii) has conducted the requisite due diligence in connection with the origination of each Mortgage Loan for purposes of the Anti-Money Laundering Laws, including with respect to the legitimacy of the applicable Mortgagor and the origin of the assets used by the said Mortgagor to purchase the property in question; and (iv) maintains, and will maintain, sufficient information to identify the applicable Mortgagor for purposes of the Anti-Money Laundering Laws. No Mortgage Loan is subject to nullification pursuant to Executive Order 13224 (the “ Executive Order ”) or the regulations promulgated by the Office of Foreign Assets Control of the United States Department of the Treasury (the “ OFAC Regulations ”) or in violation of the Executive Order or the OFAC Regulations, and no Mortgagor is subject to the provisions of such Executive Order or the OFAC Regulations nor listed as a “blocked person” for purposes of the OFAC Regulations.

 

(e)            Fidelity Bond. Seller has, and will maintain, at its own expense, a fidelity bond with broad coverage and an errors and omissions policy in the amount and with the coverage required by Buyer. Seller shall furnish proof of such coverage at or before selling Mortgage Loans to Buyer, and thereafter at Buyer’s request, no less frequently than once each year.

 

(f)             Insurer . The applicable insurer is an insurance company duly qualified as such under the laws of the states in which the Mortgaged Properties are located, duly authorized and licensed in such states to transact the applicable insurance business and to write the insurance provided by the insurance policy or binder issued by it, and approved as an insurer by the Approved Investor.

 

1



 

(g)            Insurance. Seller maintains (i) with financially sound, responsible, and reputable insurance companies or associations (or, as to workers’ compensation or similar insurance, with an insurance fund or by self-insurance authorized by the jurisdictions in which it operates) insurance with respect to its business operations and with respect to its properties used in its business and against casualties and contingencies and of types and in amounts (and with co-insurance and deductibles) as is customary in the case of similar businesses or as agreed to in the Term Sheet, and (ii) with respect to the Mortgage Loans with financially sound, responsible and reputable title insurance companies, which are duly qualified as such under the laws of the states in which the Mortgaged Properties are located, duly authorized and licensed in such states to transact the title insurance business and to write the title insurance provided by the title insurance policy or binder issued by it, and approved as an insurer by the Approved Investor.

 

(h)            Full Disclosure. All information furnished, or to be furnished, by Seller to Buyer in connection with this Agreement is true and accurate in all material respects or based on reasonable estimates on the date the information is stated or certified. No Mortgage Document, information, certificate of an Officer, statement furnished in writing, or report required hereunder, delivered to Buyer or its agents in connection with this Agreement or any Transferred Asset shall contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the Mortgage Document, information, certificate, statement or report not misleading.

 

2.              Eligibility Representations. Seller hereby represents and warrants to Buyer, as to each Mortgage Loan (except as otherwise specified below), as of the related Purchase Date and at all times thereafter until and including such time as such Mortgage Loan is sold to a Mortgage Loan Buyer in accordance with the terms hereof, as follows:

 

(a)            Each Mortgage Loan is an Eligible Loan.

 

(b)            Each Mortgage creates a valid lien on, or a perfected security interest with respect to the Mortgaged Property securing the related Mortgage Note (subject only to Permitted Encumbrances).

 

(c)            In the case of each Mortgage Loan, any and all requirements of any Federal, state, local law, regulation or order, including usury, applicable to such Mortgage Loan have been complied with

 

(d)            In the case of each Mortgage Loan, to the Seller’s knowledge after the exercise of reasonable diligence, all information supplied by, on behalf of, or concerning the related Mortgagor is true, accurate and complete in all material respects and does not contain any statement that is or will be inaccurate or misleading in any material respect.

 

(e)            Each imaged Mortgage Document represents a true, complete, and correct copy of the original Mortgage Document in all respects, including all signatures conforming with signatures contained in the original Mortgage Document, no information having been added or deleted, and no imaged Mortgage Document having been manipulated or altered in any manner. Each imaged Mortgage Document is clear

 

2



 

and legible, including accurate reproductions of photographs. No original Mortgage Documents have been or will be altered in any manner.

 

(f)             As of the related Purchase Date, no payment of principal and/or interest on any Mortgage Loan is more than zero days past the date late charges would be assessed as of the Purchase Date and no Mortgage Loan has been so delinquent more than once in the 12-month period prior to the related Purchase Date.

 

(g)            The information set forth in the related Mortgage Loan schedule with respect to each Mortgage Loan is true and correct in all material respects at the date or dates respecting which such information is furnished.

 

(h)            The origination and collection practices used by Seller with respect to each Mortgage Note and Mortgage are in all respects legal and to the Seller’s knowledge after the exercise of reasonable diligence, have been conducted in accordance with the Approved Investor Guides. Each Mortgage Loan will be serviced by Seller in accordance with the terms of the related Mortgage Note.

 

(i)             To Seller’s knowledge after the exercise of reasonable diligence, no Purchase Commitment, as assigned to Buyer hereunder as of its related closing date, is subject to any right of rescission, set-off, counterclaim or defense that would prevent Buyer (or Seller or Buyer’s assignees, acting on its behalf) from exercising the rights of Seller with respect to such Purchase Commitment, as assigned to Buyer hereunder.

 

(j)             In the case of each Mortgage Loan, Seller has provided Buyer all information required to be delivered in Schedule I and all such information is true, accurate and complete in all respects.

 

(k)            To Seller’s knowledge after the exercise of reasonable diligence, each Mortgage Loan complies with a Purchase Commitment.

 

(l)             In the case of each Mortgage Loan, to the Seller’s knowledge, after the exercise of reasonable diligence, all origination information and data provided by Seller with respect to such Mortgage Loan is true and correct as of the origination date.

 

(m)           In the case of each Mortgage Loan, Seller has not committed any negligent act or omission that has had an adverse effect on the value of the related Mortgage or Mortgaged Property.

 

3.              Additional Representations. In addition, notwithstanding any duplication of the representations and warranties set forth above, the Seller hereby makes, as to each Mortgage Loan, as of the related Purchase Date and at all times thereafter until and including such time as such Mortgage Loan is sold to a Mortgage Loan Buyer in accordance with the terms hereof, each of the representations and warranties with respect to such Mortgage Loan that Seller would make for the benefit of the Approved Investor if Seller were selling and delivering such Mortgage Loan directly to the Approved Investor pursuant to the related Purchase Commitment, including, without limitation, each of the representations and warranties set forth in the Approved Investor Guides during such period which are applicable to such Mortgage Loan; provided , however , that

 

3



 

to the extent such representations and warranties relate to the creditworthiness of the related Mortgagor, Seller hereby makes such representations and warranties solely as of the related Purchase Date.

 

4


 

 

SCHEDULE II

 

PERFECTION REPRESENTATIONS, WARRANTIES AND COVENANTS

 

In addition to the representations, warranties and covenants contained in the Master Loan Purchase and Sale Agreement (this “Agreement”), to induce Buyer to enter into this Agreement, Seller hereby represents, warrants, and covenants to Buyer as follows, on the date hereof and on each applicable Purchase Date hereafter:

 

General

 

1.              This Agreement creates a valid and continuing security interest (as defined in the applicable UCC) in Seller’s rights, title and interest in all Mortgage Loans accepted by Buyer for purchase under this Agreement, including the related contractual rights and all collateral related thereto now existing or hereafter arising in favor of Buyer, which security interest is prior to all other Liens (other than Permitted Encumbrances), and is enforceable as such as against creditors of and purchasers from Seller.

 

2.                 The Mortgage Loans transferred by Seller to Buyer constitute “instruments” or “payment intangibles” and the related contractual rights constitute “general intangibles” within the meaning of the UCC as in effect in the State of New York.

 

3.              The Settlement Account, the Seller Account and all subaccounts thereof constitute either deposit accounts or securities accounts.

 

4.                 The securities intermediary for the Settlement Account and the Seller Account has agreed to treat all assets credited to the Settlement Account and the Seller Account as “financial assets” within the meaning of the applicable UCC.

 

Creation

 

5.              With regard to those Mortgage Loans sold by Seller to Buyer hereunder, immediately prior to the transfer of the Mortgage Loans by Seller to Buyer, Seller owned and had good and marketable title to such Mortgage Loans and related contractual rights free and clear of any Lien, claim or encumbrance of any Person (other than Permitted Encumbrances).

 

6.              Seller has received or will receive prior to the time of sale all consents and approvals to the sale of Mortgage Loans and the related contractual rights to Buyer required by the terms of such Mortgage Loans and related contractual rights.

 

7.              To the extent properly credited to the Settlement Account, the Seller Account or subaccounts thereof constitute security entitlements, certificated securities or uncertificated securities, Seller has received all consents and approvals required to transfer to Buyer its interest and rights in the Settlement Account and the Seller Account.

 

1



 

Perfection

 

8.              Seller has caused or will have caused, within ten days after the effective date of this Agreement, the filing of all appropriate UCC financing statements in the proper filing office in the appropriate jurisdictions under applicable law in order to perfect in accordance with the UCC the security interest in the Mortgage Loans and related contractual rights granted by Seller to Buyer under this Agreement. Such financing statement shall describe such Mortgage Loans and related contractual rights and contain a statement that: “A purchase of or acquisition of a security interest in any collateral described in this financing statement will violate the rights of the Secured Party.”

 

9.              With respect to the Settlement Account, the Seller Account and all subaccounts that constitute deposit accounts, either:

 

(a)            Seller has delivered to Buyer and its assigns a fully-executed agreement pursuant to which the bank maintaining the deposit accounts has agreed to comply with all instructions originated by Buyer or its assigns directing disposition of the funds in the Settlement Account and the Seller Account without further consent by Seller; or

 

(b)            Seller has taken all steps necessary to cause Buyer or its assigns to become the sole “customer” (within the meaning of Section 9-104 of the UCC) of the bank with respect to each of the Settlement Account and the Seller Account.

 

10.            With respect to the Settlement Account, the Seller Account or subaccounts thereof that constitute securities accounts or security entitlements, either:

 

(a)            Seller has delivered to Buyer a fully-executed agreement pursuant to which the securities intermediary has agreed to comply with all instructions originated by Buyer or its assigns relating to the Settlement Account and the Seller Account without further consent by Seller; or

 

(b)            Seller has taken all steps necessary to cause the securities intermediary to identify
in its records Buyer or its assigns as the person having a security entitlement against the securities intermediary in the Settlement Account and the Seller Account.

 

Priority

 

11.            Other than the transfer of the Mortgage Loans and the related contractual rights to Buyer under this Agreement, Seller has not pledged, assigned, sold, granted a security interest in, or otherwise encumbered or conveyed any of the Mortgage Loans. Seller has not authorized the filing of, or is not aware of any UCC financing statements against itself or Buyer that include a description of collateral covering the Mortgage Loans, other than any UCC financing statements (i) relating to the sale of Mortgage Loans by Seller to Buyer under this Agreement or (ii) that have been terminated.

 

12.            Seller is not aware of any judgment, ERISA or tax lien filings against itself.

 

2



 

13.                 None of the instruments that constitute or evidence the Mortgage Loans transferred by Seller has any marks or notations indicating that they have been pledged, assigned or otherwise conveyed to any Person other than Buyer or the Approved Investor under this Agreement.

 

14.                 Neither the Settlement Account, the Seller Account nor any subaccount thereof is in the name of any Person other than Buyer or in the name of its nominee. Seller has not consented for the securities intermediary or bank of each of the Settlement Account and the Seller Account to comply with entitlement orders or other instructions of any person other than Buyer.

 

Survival of Perfection Representations

 

Notwithstanding any other provision of this Agreement, the Perfection Representations contained in this Schedule II shall be continuing, and remain in full force and effect (notwithstanding any termination of any of this Agreement) until such time as all of Seller’s obligations have been finally and fully paid and performed.

 

No Waiver

 

The parties to this Agreement shall not waive any of the Perfection Representations, and shall not waive a breach of any of the Perfection Representations.

 

3



 

SCHEDULE III

 

REPRESENTATIONS, WARRANTIES AND COVENANTS

 

1.              Representations, Warranties and Covenants of Buyer. Buyer represents and warrants to, and covenants with, Seller that, as of the date hereof and each Purchase Date:

 

(a)            Due Organization . Buyer is a limited liability company duly formed, validly existing and in good standing under the laws of the State of Delaware.

 

(b)            Due Authorization; Enforceability. This Agreement to which Buyer is a party, assuming due authorization, execution and delivery by the other parties thereto, constitutes a valid and legally binding obligation of Buyer, enforceable against Buyer in accordance with its terms, subject, as to enforcement, to bankruptcy, insolvency, reorganization and other similar laws of general applicability relating to or affecting creditors’ rights and to general equity principles, regardless of whether such enforcement is considered in a proceeding in equity or at law.

 

(c)            No Conflicts. The execution and delivery by Buyer of this Agreement, and all documents or instruments contemplated hereby which Buyer has executed and delivered and its performance of and compliance with the terms of this Agreement will not violate Buyer’s limited liability company agreement or certificate of formation, and will not conflict with or result in a breach of any of the terms or provisions of, or constitute a default under, any indenture, mortgage, deed of trust, loan agreement or other material agreement or instrument to which Buyer is a party or by which Buyer or to which any property or assets of Buyer is subject.

 

2.              Representations, Warranties and Covenants of Seller. Seller represents and warrants to, and covenants with, Buyer that, as of the date hereof and each applicable Purchase Date:

 

(a)            Due Organization. Seller is duly organized, validly existing and in good standing under the laws of the jurisdiction of its organization, and has all powers and all material governmental licenses, authorizations, consents and approvals required to carry on its business as now conducted. Seller is licensed and qualified to transact the mortgage origination business, in accordance with accepted practice and prudent guidelines, in, and is in good standing under the laws of, each state where a Mortgaged Property is located or is otherwise exempt under applicable law from such licensing and qualification or is otherwise not required under applicable law to effect such licensing and qualification and no demand for such licensing or qualification has been made upon Seller by any state having jurisdiction, and in such event Seller is or will be in compliance with the laws of any state to the extent necessary to insure the enforceability of each Mortgage Loan.

 

(b)            Due Authorization; Enforceability . The execution and delivery of this Agreement by Seller and the performance by Seller of the obligations to be performed by it hereunder have been duly authorized by any necessary corporate or other

 

1



 

similar action. Seller has the full legal power, right and actual authority to hold each Mortgage Loan, to sell each Mortgage Loan and to execute, deliver and perform, and to enter into and consummate, all transactions contemplated by this Agreement; including the ability to effect a valid and enforceable assignment of all of Seller’s rights, title and interest under the Mortgage Notes, Mortgages, and the other Mortgage Documents. This Agreement and each assignment in blank by Seller to Buyer of a Mortgage or Assignment of Leases (assuming the insertion of Buyer’s name), when duly executed and delivered by Seller, constitutes a legal, valid and binding obligation of Seller, enforceable against Seller in accordance with its terms, subject, as to enforcement, to bankruptcy, insolvency, reorganization and other similar laws of general applicability relating to or affecting creditors’ rights and to general equity principles, regardless of whether such enforcement is considered in a proceeding in equity or at law.

 

(c)            Compliance with Constituent Documents. Neither the execution and delivery of this Agreement, the origination of the Mortgage Loans by Seller, the sale of the Transferred Assets to Buyer, the consummation of the transactions contemplated by this Agreement, nor the fulfillment of or compliance with the terms and conditions of this Agreement, will violate Seller’s charter, limited liability operating agreement, or other governing or constituent documents.

 

(d)            No Conflicts. The execution and delivery of this Agreement by Seller and the performance by Seller of the obligations to be performed by it hereunder do not, and will not, (i) violate any provision of law, rule, regulation, order, writ, judgment, decree, determination or award presently in effect having applicability to Seller, or (ii) result in a breach of or constitute a default or potential default (or an event which with notice or lapse of time, or both, would constitute a default or potential default) under any indenture or loan or credit agreement or any other material agreement, lease or instrument to which Seller is a party or by which it or its properties or assets may be bound or affected. All parties that have had any interest in the Mortgage Loans, whether as mortgagee, assignee or pledgee are (or during the period in which they held and disposed of such interest, were) in compliance with all applicable licensing requirements of the federal, state, and local government wherein the Mortgaged Property is located.

 

(e)            Litigation. There are no actions, suits or proceedings pending or, to Seller’s knowledge, threatened against or affecting Seller or the properties of Seller before any court or governmental department, commission, board, bureau, agency or instrumentality, domestic or foreign, which, if determined adversely to Seller, would materially and adversely affect the sale of the Transferred Assets to Buyer, the execution, delivery or enforceability of this Agreement, or have a material adverse effect on the financial condition, properties or operations of Seller.

 

(f)             No Consent Required. No consent, approval, authorization, exemption or order of, or notice to or registration or filing with, any court or governmental agency, authority or administrative or regulatory body is required for the execution, delivery and performance by Seller of or compliance by Seller with this Agreement, the delivery of the Mortgage Documents to Buyer, the sale of the Transferred

 

2



 

Assets to Buyer or the consummation of the transactions contemplated by this Agreement.

 

(g)            No Bulk Transfer. The transfer, assignment and conveyance of the Transferred Assets by Seller pursuant to this Agreement is not subject to the bulk transfer or any similar statutory provision in effect in any applicable jurisdiction. Seller is not transferring the Transferred Assets with an actual intent to hinder, delay or defraud any of its creditors.

 

(h)            No Broker. Seller has not employed or otherwise engaged any broker or finder in connection with the negotiation or execution of this Agreement; nor has Seller conducted any negotiations with respect to this Agreement nor with respect to the transactions contemplated by this Agreement or otherwise taken any actions, in such a manner as to give rise to any claims(s) against Buyer for any brokerage commission, finder’s fee or similar payment.

 

(i)             Solvency. On the date of each Purchase, Seller is Solvent, the sale of the Transferred Assets will not cause Seller to become insolvent and Seller is not aware of any pending insolvency. The consideration received by Seller upon the sale of the Transferred Assets under this Agreement constitutes fair consideration and reasonably equivalent value for the Mortgage Loans.

 

(j)             Transactions with Affiliates. Seller is not a party to a material transaction with any of its affiliates except transactions in the ordinary course of business and upon fair and reasonable terms not materially less favorable than it could obtain or could become entitled to in an arm’s-length transaction with a Person that was not its affiliate.

 

(k)            Taxes. All tax returns (including income, payroll and other) of Seller required to be filed have been filed (or extensions have been granted) before delinquency, except for returns for which the failure to file is not a material adverse event, and all Taxes imposed upon Seller that are due and payable have been paid before delinquency.

 

(l)             Property and Liens. Seller has good and marketable title to all its property reflected on its most recent Financials except for property that is obsolete or that has been disposed of in the ordinary course of business or, after the date of this Agreement, as otherwise permitted by this Agreement all Transferred Assets are free and clear of any Liens and adverse claims of any nature.

 

(m)           Chief Executive Office. The principal place of business and chief executive office of Seller is located and has been located within the State of Maryland since its formation. The “location” of Seller as defined in the UCC is in the State of Delaware.

 

(n)            No Prior Names. The exact legal name of Seller is, and since its formation has been, the name set forth for it on the signature page hereto, unless otherwise disclosed to Buyer.

 

3



 

3.              Representations, Warranties and Covenants of Servicer. Servicer represents and warrants to, and covenants with, Buyer that, as of the date hereof and each applicable Purchase Date:

 

(a)            Servicer has complied with all applicable laws relating to licensing, qualification to do business and approval to service Mortgage Loans.

 

(b)            In the case of each Mortgage Loan, the excess of the Mortgage Interest Rate over the Pricing Rate is at least equal to the amount of interest income that the related Purchase Commitment provides may be retained by Servicer as compensation for servicing such Mortgage Loan.

 

(c)            The execution and delivery by Servicer and its performance of and compliance with the terms of this Agreement will not violate any term or condition of Servicer’s charter or bylaws, any agreement or instrument to which Servicer is a party or any judgment, order or regulation to which Servicer is subject.

 

(d)            In the case of each Mortgage Loan, any action taken by it when enforcing the rights of the holder of the related Mortgage or Servicer under the related Mortgage Documents will not violate the terms of any covenant in the related Mortgage Documents.

 

4



 

SCHEDULE IV

 

COVENANTS

 

1.              Covenants of Seller. Seller covenants and agrees that, unless otherwise consented to by Buyer, from and after the date hereof and until the date when all Mortgage Loans purchased hereunder have been sold or repurchased:

 

(a)            Reporting Requirements.   Seller shall furnish, or cause to be furnished, to Buyer the following, all in form and detail reasonably satisfactory to Buyer:

 

(i)                 Annual Financials of Seller. Promptly when available, but within ninety (90) days after the end of each fiscal year of Seller, Financials of Seller as of the close of such fiscal year, accompanied by the related report prepared by independent certified public accountants reasonably acceptable to Buyer and stating that those statements were prepared according to GAAP applied on a basis consistent with prior periods except for such changes in GAAP concurred in by Seller’s independent public accountants;

 

(ii)                Quarterly Financial Statements of Seller. Within forty-five (45) days after the end of each calendar quarter, Seller’s unaudited quarterly Financials;

 

(iii)               Compliance Certificate. Simultaneously with the delivery of the reports described in clauses (i) and (ii) above, a compliance certificate, certified by an Officer of Seller to be true and correct, certifying that such financial statements fairly present the financial condition and the results of operations of Seller on the dates and for the periods indicated, on the basis of GAAP, subject, in the case of interim financial statements, to normally recurring year-end adjustments; (iii) stating that Seller is in compliance with all covenants in this Schedule IV , and containing the calculations evidencing such compliance; (iv) stating whether any Event of Default exists on the date of such certificate and, if any Event of Default then exists, setting forth the details thereof and the action which Seller is taking or proposes to take with respect thereto.

 

(iv)              Notices. Promptly upon becoming aware thereof, notice of (A) the commencement of, or any determination in, any legal, judicial or regulatory proceedings, (B) any dispute between Seller and any governmental or regulatory body, (C) any event or condition, which, in any case of (A) or (B), if adversely determined, would have a material adverse effect on (1) the validity or enforceability of this Agreement, (2) the financial condition or business operations of Seller or (3) the ability of Seller to fulfill its obligations under this Agreement, (D) any material adverse change in the business, operations, prospects or financial condition of Seller, including the insolvency of Seller; (E) any fraud discovered with respect to any Eligible Loan or (F) any material adverse change in Seller’s relationship with the Approved Investor.

 

1



 

(v)               Other Information. Promptly upon reasonable request by Buyer, information (not otherwise required to be furnished under this Agreement) respecting the business affairs, assets, and liabilities of Seller and opinions, certifications, and documents in addition to those mentioned in this Agreement;

 

(b)            Books and Records. Seller shall maintain books, records, and accounts necessary to prepare Financials according to GAAP;

 

(c)            Inspections. Upon reasonable request but subject to any confidentiality requirements imposed by this Agreement or by law, Seller shall allow Buyer, or its representatives to review reports, files, and other records relating to the Transferred Assets and the servicing thereof and to make and take away copies, to conduct tests or investigations, and to discuss any of its affairs, conditions and finances with its directors, officers, or representatives from time to time during reasonable business hours; provided, that if a Default exists, Buyer may inspect Seller’s Mortgage Loan files at any time;

 

(d)            Taxes. Seller shall promptly pay when due any and all Taxes other than Taxes of which the failure to pay would not have a material adverse effect or which are being contested in good faith by lawful proceedings diligently conducted, against which reserve or other provision required by GAAP has been made, and in respect of which levy and execution of any Lien have been and continue to be stayed;

 

(e)            Maintenance of Existence, Assets, and Business. Seller shall (A) maintain its legal existence and good standing in its state of organization and its authority to transact business in all other states where failure to maintain its authority to transact business would have a material adverse effect, and (B) maintain all licenses, permits, and franchises necessary for its business where failure to do so would have a material adverse effect;

 

(f)             Insurance. Seller shall (a) maintain with financially sound, responsible and reputable insurers, insurance with respect to its assets and business against such liabilities, casualties, risks, and contingencies and in such types and amounts, including a fidelity bond and an errors and omissions policy in a minimum amount of $3,000,000 in form and with the coverages, with a company, and with respect to such individuals or groups of individuals, as shall satisfy prevailing Agency requirements applicable to a qualified mortgage institution and otherwise as is customary in the case of Persons engaged in the same or similar businesses and similarly situated, (b) with respect to the Mortgage Loans maintain with financially sound, responsible and reputable title insurance companies, which are duly qualified as such under the laws of the states in which the Mortgaged Properties are located, duly authorized and licensed in such states to transact the title insurance business and to write the title insurance provided by the title insurance policy or binder issued by it, and approved as an insurer by the Approved Investor and (c) upon Buyer’s request, furnish to Buyer from time to time (i) a summary of its insurance coverage, in form and substance satisfactory to Buyer, and (ii) copies of the applicable policies;

 

2



 

(g)            Purchase Commitments. Seller shall perform and observe in all material respects each of the provisions of each Purchase Commitment on its part to be performed or observed and cause all things to be done that are necessary to have the Mortgage Loan and Mortgage Documents covered by such Purchase Commitment comply with its respective requirements;

 

(h)            Limitation on Mergers, Issuance of Securities. Seller will not (i) merge or consolidate with or into any other Person, or (ii) issue any additional membership interests or other securities or any options, warrants or other rights to acquire such additional interests or other securities, without giving Buyer prior written notice;

 

(i)             Limitation on Dividends and Redemption. Seller will not directly, or indirectly, make any capital contribution to or purchase, redeem, acquire or retire any securities in any Person (whether such interests are now or hereafter issued, outstanding or created), or cause or permit any reduction or retirement of the membership interests of Seller without giving Buyer prior written notice. Seller may declare or pay any dividends on or make any other distribution in respect of any interest in it, so long as the net worth requirement set forth in the Term Sheet is met;

 

(j)             Agency Approval. Seller shall take all necessary action to maintain its Agency Approvals at all times during the term of this Agreement. If, for any reason, Seller ceases to maintain such Agency Approvals, Seller shall promptly and immediately notify Buyer;

 

(k)            Monetary Obligations. Seller shall satisfy any monetary obligations owed by Seller to Buyer that do not have a specified payment date in the Agreement within two (2) Business Days of demand therefor;

 

(l)             Indemnification Payments. Seller shall notify Buyer of payments made by Seller to the Approved Investor under any repurchase or indemnification obligations relating to the Transferred Assets;

 

(m)           Approved Investor Seller/Servicer. Seller shall maintain its status as an Approved Investor approved seller/servicer at all times;

 

(n)            Compliance with Law. Seller shall comply in all material respects with all laws, rules, regulations, and all orders of any governmental authority; and

 

(o)            Net Worth. Seller shall maintain a minimum adjusted net worth of $2,000,000 and minimum liquid assets of $200,000, each as calculated in accordance with Sections 3.3 (b) and (c) of the Freddie Mac Multifamily Seller/Servicer Guide.

 

3


 

SCHEDULE V

 

DEFAULTS AND REMEDIES

 

1.              Default. The term “Default” means the existence or occurrence of any one or more of the following:

 

(a)            Obligation. Seller fails to pay any obligation when due under this Agreement.

 

(b)            Covenants. Seller or Servicer fails to punctually and properly perform, observe, and comply with any covenant, agreement, or condition contained herein, and that failure continues for a period of five (5) calendar days after Seller or Servicer, as applicable, has, or, with the exercise of reasonable investigation, should have, notice of it.

 

(c)            Misrepresentation. Any representation or warranty made by or on behalf of Seller or Servicer in this Agreement or other writing by Seller or Servicer, as applicable, and furnished in connection with this Agreement, proves to have been incorrect or misleading in any material respect as of the date made or deemed made.

 

(d)            Debtor Law. Seller (i) voluntarily seeks, consents to, or acquiesces in the benefit of any Debtor Law, or (ii) becomes a party to or is made the subject of any proceeding provided for by any Debtor Law.

 

(e)            Judgments. Seller fails to pay any money judgment against it at least ten days prior to the date on which any of the assets of Seller may be lawfully sold by the judgment creditor to satisfy that judgment.

 

(f)             Attachments. Seller fails to have discharged within a period of thirty (30) days after the commencement thereof, any attachment, sequestration, or similar proceeding against any of the assets of Seller.

 

(g)            Unenforceability. Any material provision of this Agreement for any reason ceases to be in full force and effect or is fully or partially declared null and void or unenforceable or the validity or unenforceability of this Agreement is challenged or denied by Seller.

 

(h)            Change of Control. Seller fails to provide advance notice of any “change of control” of Seller or any change in the CEO, CFO or COO of Seller. “Change of Control” shall mean if any person not currently a member of the Seller shall possess, directly or indirectly, the power to direct or cause the direction of the management and policies of Seller, whether through the ownership of voting securities, by contract or otherwise.

 

(i)             Agency Qualifications Seller ceases to be an eligible lender, issuer, seller or servicer for the Approved Investor, (ii) any Agency imposes any sanctions upon Seller resulting in a material adverse effect, (iii) any Agency terminates or revokes

 

1



 

Seller’s right to service for such Agency, or (iv) any Agency initiates any transfer of servicing from Seller.

 

2.              Remedies. Upon the occurrence of a Default, Buyer may do any one or more of the following: reduce any claim to judgment; foreclose upon or otherwise enforce any Liens; commence termination of all the rights and obligations of Servicer under this Agreement, notify the applicable Mortgagors of Servicer’s termination, and exercise any other rights in this Agreement, at law, in equity, or otherwise that Buyer may direct.

 

3.              Right of Offset. Seller hereby grants to Buyer a right of offset, to secure Seller’s obligations hereunder, upon any and all monies, securities, or other property of Seller, and the proceeds therefrom now or hereafter held or received by or in transit to Buyer from or for the account of Seller, whether for safekeeping, custody, pledge, transmission, collection, or otherwise, and also upon any and all deposits (general or special, time or demand, provisional or final) and credits of Seller, and any and all claims of Seller against Buyer at any time existing. Upon the occurrence of any Default, Buyer is authorized at any time and from time to time, without notice to Seller, to offset, appropriate, and apply any and all of those items against Seller’s obligations. Notwithstanding anything in this Section 3 or elsewhere in this Agreement to the contrary, Buyer shall not have any right to offset, appropriate, or apply any accounts of Seller which consist of escrowed funds (except and to the extent of any beneficial interest which Seller have in such escrowed funds) which have been so identified by Seller in writing at the time of deposit thereof.

 

4.              Performance by Buyer. Should any covenant, duty, or agreement of Seller or Servicer fail to be performed according to the terms of this Agreement or of any said document delivered under this Agreement, Buyer may, at its option, after notice to Seller or Servicer, as the case may be, perform, or attempt to perform, such covenant, duty, or agreement on behalf of Seller or Servicer. In such event, Seller or Servicer, as the case may be, shall, at the request of Buyer, promptly pay any amount reasonably expended by Buyer in such performance or attempted performance to Buyer at its principal place of business, together with interest thereon at the Default Rate from the date of such expenditure by Buyer until paid. Notwithstanding the foregoing, it is expressly understood that Buyer does not assume and shall never have, except by express written consent of Buyer, any liability or responsibility for the performance of any duties of Seller or Servicer under this Agreement or under any other document delivered under this Agreement.

 

5.              Cumulative Rights. All rights available to Buyer under this Agreement or under any other document delivered under this Agreement shall be cumulative of and in addition to all other rights granted to Buyer at law or in equity whether or not Buyer shall have instituted any suit for collection, foreclosure, or other action in connection with this Agreement or any other document delivered under this Agreement.

 

2




Exhibit 23.1

 

Consent of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

 

The Board of Directors

Column Guaranteed LLC:

 

We consent to the inclusion in the registration statement (No. 333-XXXXX) on Form S-1 of Walker and Dunlop, Inc. of our report dated March 30, 2009, with respect to the statement of financial condition of Column Guaranteed LLC as of December 31, 2008, and the related statements of operations, changes in members’ equity and cash flows for the year then ended.

 

(signed) KPMG LLP

 

New York, New York
August 3, 2010

 




Exhibit 23.2

 

When the transaction referred to in note 7 of the Notes to Financial Statements has been consummated, we will be in a position to render the following report.

 

(signed) KPMG LLP

 

Consent of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

 

The Board of Directors
Walker & Dunlop, Inc.:

 

We consent to the inclusion in the registration statement (No. 333-XXXXX) on Form S-1 of Walker and Dunlop Inc. of our report dated August 2, 2010, except as to note 7, which is as of [xx], with respect to the consolidated and combined balance sheets of Walker & Dunlop (predecessor) as of December 31, 2009 and 2008, and the related statements of income, changes in members’ equity and cash flows for each of the years in the three-year period ended December 31, 2009, and the financial statement schedule and to the reference to our firm under the headings “Summary Selected Financial Data,” Selected Financial Data,” and “Experts,” in the prospectus.

 

Our report refers to Walker & Dunlop’s change in 2008 of its method of accounting for written loan commitments with the adoption of SEC Staff Accounting Bulletin No. 109 (included in FASB ASC Subtopic 815, Derivatives and Hedging) , and adoption of FASB Statement No. 159, Fair Value Option for Financial Assets and Financial Liabilities (included in FASB ASC Subtopic 825, Financial Instruments ), for certain financial assets and liabilities.

 

 

McLean, Virginia
     , 2010